You are on page 1of 858

90% Design

Development
Thickening Facility

West Boise
Wastewater Treatment Facility
Phosphorus Removal Project
Volume 3 - Specifications: Divisions 26-44
Prepared for

City of Boise
April 2013
Prepared by
Boise, Idaho

WBG061110203237BOI

CITY OF BOISE, IDAHO


BOISE, IDAHO
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
AND
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 3 DIVISION 26 THROUGH 44
for the construction of the
WEST BOISE WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL PROJECT
Formal Bid No. (FB 12-XXX)
City Project No. WBP-002

****

****

CH2M HILL
Boise, Idaho
April 2013
CH2M HILL 2013. All rights reserved.
Any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document and the ideas and designs incorporated herein is at the sole risk of
the party(ies) reusing, modifying, or altering it. All references to CH2M HILL and its employees and all professional seals
shall be removed prior to any reuse, modification, or alteration of this document.

Project No. 426399

Copy No.

VOLUME 3
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 26 - 44

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Pages
VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 THROUGH DIVISION 1
PART 1PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 11 13
00 21 13
00 41 13
00 43 13

Invitation to Bid ............................................................ ............. 1Instructions to Bidders ............................................................... 1Supplement: Escrow Bid Document Certificate. ........................ 1Bid Form (Stipulated Price Basis) ............... .............................. 1Bid Bond ................................................................................... . 1-

2
16
1
7
3

PART 2CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS


CONTRACTING FORMS
00 45 55
00 52 13

Affidavit of Payment or Securement of All Taxes...................... 1- 1


Agreement Form ......................................................... ............... 1- 10
Supplement: Assignment ............................................................ 1- 1

PROJECT FORMS
00 61 13.13
00 61 13.13
00 61 13.16

Performance Bond Form .................. .......................................... 1- 4


Performance Bond....................................................................... 1- 4
Payment Bond Form ............................... ................................... 1- 4

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT


00 72 00
00 73 00

General Conditions ......................................................... ........... 1- 46


Supplementary Conditions .......................... ............................... 1- 26

PART 3SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00
01 20 00

01 26 00
01 29 00

Summary of Work ....................................................................... 1Disputes Review Board............................................................... 1Supplement: Appendix A Disputes Review Board Three Party
Agreement ................................................................................... 1Contract Modification Procedures .............................................. 1Payment Procedures .................................................................... 1-

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

1
7
7
7
3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - i

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages

01 31 13
01 31 19
01 32 00
01 33 00
01 42 13
01 43 33

01 45 16.13
01 45 33

01 50 00
01 55 00
01 57 13
01 61 00
01 73 19
01 77 00
01 78 23
01 88 15
01 91 14

Supplement: Schedule of Values ................................................ 1Project Coordination ................................................................... 1Supplement: Removal from Service Request (RFS) Form ......... 1Project Meetings ......................................................................... 1Construction Progress Documentation ....................................... 1Submittal Procedures .................................................................. 1Supplement: Transmittal of Contractors Submittal ................... 1Abbreviations and Acronyms...................................................... 1Manufacturers Field Services .................................................... 1Supplement: Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance ............ 1Supplement: Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation .. 1Contractor Quality Control ......................................................... 1Special Inspection and Testing ................................................... 1Supplement: Contractors Statement of Responsibility .............. 1Supplement: Seismic Qualification of Mechanical and
Electrical Equipment Certificate of Compliance ........................ 1Temporary Facilities and Controls .............................................. 1Site Security ................................................................................ 1Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control ................................ 1Common Product Requirements ................................................. 1Installation of Rotary Screen Thickener Equipment (RST) ....... 1Closeout Procedures.................................................................... 1Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................ 1Supplement: Maintenance Summary Form................................. 1Seismic Anchorage and Bracing ................................................. 1Equipment Testing and Facility Startup...................................... 1Supplement: Unit Process Startup Form ..................................... 1Supplement: Facility Performance Demonstration/Certification 1-

4
12
1
3
8
12
1
5
4
1
1
9
6
2
2
9
2
9
8
9
5
7
2
5
6
1
1

VOLUME 2 DIVISION 2 THROUGH 23


DIVISION 02EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00

Demolition ..................................................................................... 1- 7

DIVISION 03CONCRETE
03 01 32
03 01 33
03 10 00
03 15 00
03 21 00
03 24 00

Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces .................. 1Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces ..................................... 1Concrete Forming and Accessories............................................. 1Concrete Joints and Accessories ................................................. 1Reinforcing Steel ........................................................................ 1Fibrous Reinforcing .................................................................... 1-

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - ii

16
14
5
8
5
3

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
03 30 00

03 39 00
03 62 00

03 63 00
03 64 23

Cast-in-Place Concrete................................................................ 1Supplement: Primary Structural Concrete Mix Design .............. 1Supplement: Slurry Concrete Mix Design .................................. 1Supplement: Encasement Concrete Mix Design......................... 1Supplement: Basin Concrete Fill Mix Design ............................ 1Supplement: Secondary Structural Concrete Mix Design .......... 1Concrete Curing .......................................................................... 1Nonshrink Grouting .................................................................... 1Supplement: 24-Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout
Test Form .................................................................................... 1Supplement: Grout Testing Procedure Form .............................. 1Concrete Doweling ..................................................................... 1Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting ..................................... 1-

29
3
2
2
2
2
4
7
1
2
5
9

DIVISION 04MASONRY (NOT USED)


DIVISION 05METALS
05 05 23
05 12 00
05 31 00
05 50 00
05 52 00
05 53 00

Welding ....................................................................................... 1Supplement: Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table .......... 1Structural Steel Framing ............................................................. 1Steel Decking .............................................................................. 1Metal Fabrications ...................................................................... 1Metal Railings ............................................................................. 1Metal Gratings ............................................................................ 1-

5
1
13
6
25
12
6

DIVISION 06WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES (NOT USED)


DIVISION 07THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 14 00
07 21 00
07 41 13
07 42 16
07 62 00
07 84 00
07 92 00

Fluid-Applied Waterproofing ..................................................... 1Thermal Insulation ...................................................................... 1Roof Panels ................................................................................. 1Insulated Wall Panels .................................................................. 1Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ................................................... 1Firestopping ................................................................................ 1Joint Sealants .............................................................................. 1-

5
4
6
5
6
5
6

DIVISION 08OPENINGS
08 11 00
08 33 23
08 41 13
08 45 00

Metal Doors and Frames ............................................................. 1Overhead Coiling Doors ............................................................. 1Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts ............................ 1Translucent Wall Assemblies ..................................................... 1-

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

4
5
6
11

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - iii

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
08 71 00
08 90 00

Door Hardware............................................................................ 1- 10
Louvers........................................................................................ 1- 4

DIVISION 09FINISHES
09 06 00
09 22 16
09 29 01
09 30 00
09 90 00

Schedules for Finishes ................................................................ 1Nonstructural Metal Framing ...................................................... 1Gypsum Board ............................................................................ 1Tiling ........................................................................................... 1Painting and Coating ................................................................... 1Supplement: Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS) ........................... 1Supplement: Product Data Sheet (PDS) .................................... .1-

2
4
3
5
27
1
1

DIVISION 10SPECIALITIES
10 14 00
10 28 00
10 44 00

Signage ........................................................................................ 1Supplement: Sign Schedule ........................................................ 1Toilet and Bath Accessories ........................................................ 1Portable Fire and Safety Equipment ........................................... 1-

5
1
3
4

DIVISION 11EQUIPMENT
11 24 19

Central Vacuum System.............................................................. 1- 3


Supplement: Induction Motor Data Sheet ................................... 1- 1

DIVISION 12
12 35 53.13

Metal Laboratory Casework ........................................................ 1- 11

DIVISION 13 THROUGH DIVISION 21 (NOT USED)


DIVISION 22PLUMBING
22 07 00
22 10 01
22 30 00
22 40 00

Plumbing Piping Insulation......................................................... 1Plumbing Piping and Accessories ............................................... 1Plumbing Equipment .................................................................. 1Plumbing Fixtures ....................................................................... 1-

7
20
4
7

DIVISION 23HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)


23 05 93
23 07 00
23 09 13
23 23 00

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ............................ 1HVAC Insulation ........................................................................ 1HVAC Controls Field Components and Instruments ................. 1Refrigerant Piping ....................................................................... 1-

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - iv

7
6
4
7

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
23 31 13
23 31 16.16
23 34 00
23 37 00
23 77 00
23 81 00
23 82 00

Metal Ducts and Accessories ...................................................... 1Foul Air Ductwork and Accessories ........................................... 1HVAC Fans ................................................................................. 1Air Outlets and Inlets .................................................................. 1Air Handling Units ...................................................................... 1Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment ......................................... 1Terminal Heating and Cooling Units .......................................... 1-

28
13
12
4
26
15
9

DIVISION 25 (NOT USED)


VOLUME 3 DIVISION 26 THROUGH 44
DIVISION 26ELECTRICAL
26 05 02
26 05 04
26 05 05
26 05 26
26 05 33
26 08 00
26 12 02
26 20 00
26 22 00
26 24 16
26 24 19
26 24 20
26 27 26
26 29 23
26 32 13.13
26 36 23
26 43 00
26 43 10
26 50 00

Basic Electrical Requirements .................................................... 1Basic Electrical Materials and Methods...................................... 1Conductors .................................................................................. 1Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.......................... 1Raceway and Boxes .................................................................... 1Commissioning of Electrical Systems ........................................ 1Oil-Filled Pad Mounted Transformers ........................................ 1Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors ............................................ 1Low-Voltage Transformers ......................................................... 1Panelboards ................................................................................. 1Low-Voltage Motor Control ....................................................... 1Variable Frequency Drive Motor Control Centers...................... 1Wiring Devices ........................................................................... 1Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drive System ........................ 1Diesel Engine Generator Set ....................................................... 1Automatic Transfer Switches ...................................................... 1Transient Voltage Suppression ................................................... 1Low-Voltage Harmonic Correction Equipment .......................... 1Lighting ....................................................................................... 1-

7
11
20
6
31
20
7
12
3
7
12
9
8
10
15
5
4
9
9

DIVISION 27 (NOT USED)


DIVISION 28ELECTRICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00

Fire Detection and Alarm ............................................................ 1- 22

DIVISION 31EARTHWORK
31 10 00
31 23 13

Site Clearing................................................................................ 1- 3
Subgrade Preparation .................................................................. 1- 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - v

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
31 23 16
31 23 19.01
31 23 23
31 23 23.15
31 32 19.16

Excavation................................................................................... 1Dewatering .................................................................................. 1Fill and Backfill .......................................................................... 1Trench Backfill ........................................................................... 1Geotextile .................................................................................... 1-

3
2
7
10
5

DIVISION 32EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS


32 11 23
32 12 16
32 16 00
32 91 13
32 92 00

Aggregate Base Courses ............................................................. 1Asphalt Paving ............................................................................ 1Curbs and Gutters ....................................................................... 1Soil Preparation ........................................................................... 1Turf and Grasses ......................................................................... 1-

6
9
5
4
6

DIVISION 33UTILITIES
33 05 01.01
33 05 13
33 46 16
33 66 16

Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings ................................................... 1Manholes ..................................................................................... 1Underdrain System ...................................................................... 1Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls .............................. 1-

10
11
4
7

DIVISIONS 34 (NOT USED)


DIVISION 35WATERWAY MARINE CONSTRUCTION
35 20 16.25

Fabricated Slide Gates ................................................................ 1- 9


Supplement: Fabricated Slide Gate Schedule ............................. 1- 1

DIVISION 40PROCESS INTEGRATION


40 05 15

40 05 33
40 27 00

40 27 00.01
40 27 00.02
40 27 00.03
40 27 00.04

Piping Support Systems .............................................................. 1Supplement: Table 1 Nonchemical Areas ................................... 1Supplement: Table 2 Chemical Areas......................................... 1Pipe Heat Tracing........................................................................ 1Process PipingGeneral ............................................................ 1Supplement: Piping Schedule Legend ........................................ 1Supplement: Piping Schedule ..................................................... 1Cement-Mortar, Glass-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings (Data Sheet) ............................. 1Carbon Steel Pipe and Fitting - General Service (Data Sheet) ... 1Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings Natural Gas Service
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1-

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - vi

11
1
1
5
24
2
5
3
1
5
2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
40 27 00.07
40 27 00.08
40 27 00.10
40 27 00.13
40 27 00.21
40 27 01
40 27 02

40 42 13
40 80 01
40 90 00

40 91 00
40 99 90

Galvanized Steel Pipe and Malleable Iron Fittings ..................... 1Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings General Svc (Data Sheet)........ 1Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings (Data Sheet).......... 1Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
(Data Sheet) ................................................................................ 1Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE) Data Sheet .......................... 1Process Piping Specialties........................................................... 1Process Valves and Operators ..................................................... 1Supplement: Electric Motor Actuator Schedule ......................... 1Supplement: Self-Regulated Valve Schedule. ............................ 1Process Piping Insulation ............................................................ 1Supplement: Service and Insulation Thickness Table ................ 1Process Piping Leakage Testing.................................................. 1Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems ...................... 1Supplement: Process Control Narratives .................................... 1Supplement: Instrument List ....................................................... 1Supplement: PLC Equipment List .............................................. 1Supplement: Control Panel Schedule.......................................... 1Supplement: HDW-LCP-001 I/O List1- ..................................... 1Supplement: AER-LCP-002 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: AER-LCP-004 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: SCL-LCP-001 I/O List ........................................... 1Supplement: DFT-LCP-001 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: THK-LCP-001 I/O List .......................................... 1Supplement: Loop Status Report ................................................ 1Supplement: Instrument Calibration Sheet ................................. 1Supplement: I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet ................................ 1Supplement: Performance Acceptance Test Sheet...................... 1Instrumentation and Control Components .................................. 1Package Control Systems ............................................................ 1-

2
4
2
1
2
19
34
4
1
7
2
5
35
14
13
3
3
1
5
3
3
1
9
1
1
1
1
28
16

DIVISIONS 41MATERIAL PROCESS AND HANDLING


41 22 13.19

Monorail Hoist and Lifting Equipment ....................................... 1- 6

DIVISION 42 (NOT USED)


DIVISION 43PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING
43 22 56
43 22 56.01
43 22 56.02

Vertical Bridge-Mounted Mixers ................................................ 1- 8


Supplement: Mixer Data Sheet ................................................... 1- 1
Supplement: WAS Phosphate Release Tank Mixer Data Sheet . 1- 1

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - vii

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


Pages
43 22 57
43 22 57.01

Submersible Mixers .................................................................... 1- 8


Submersible Mixers Data Sheet .................................................. 1- 1

DIVISION 44POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01
44 42 56.01

Primary Clarifier Equipment ....................................................... 1Screw Centrifugal Submersible Pumps ...................................... 1Supplement: Pump and Motor Data Sheets ................................ 144 42 56.03
Vertical Turbine Solids Handling Pumps ................................... 1Supplement: Vertical Turbine Pump Data Sheets ...................... 144 42 56.05
Horizontal Chopper Pump and Mixing Assemblies ................... 144 42 56.06
Immersible Pumps ...................................................................... 1Supplement: Pump and Motor Data Sheets ................................ 144 42 56.09
Non-Clog Dry-Pit Centrifugal Pumps......................................... 1Supplement: Pump Data Sheet.................................................... 144 42 56.13
Progressing Cavity Pumps .......................................................... 1Supplement: Polymer Feed Pump Data Sheet ............................ 144 42 56.14
Lobe Pumps ................................................................................ 1Supplement: Thickened Sludge Pumps 1, 2 Data Sheet ............. 1Supplement: Thickened Sludge Pumps 3, 4 Data Sheet ............. 1Supplement: Fermented Primary Sludge Pumps 1, 2
Data Sheet ................................................................................... 144 42 56.18
Peristaltic Chemical Metering Pumps ......................................... 1Supplement: Pump Data Sheet.................................................... 144 42 56.19
Axial-Flow Pump ........................................................................ 144 42 56.19.01 Supplement: Axial-Flow Pump .................................................. 144 42 73.01
Thermoplastic Liner for Concrete Structures .............................. 144 44 63.03
Dry and Liquid Polymer Feed System ........................................ 1-

16
7
3
8
8
10
6
3
8
4
6
3
9
2
2
2
7
1
8
1
5
16

DIVISIONS 45 THROUGH 49 (NOT USED)


VOLUME 4 DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 5 WIRING DIAGRAMS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 6 DESIGN DETAILS (BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 7 ROTARY SCREEN THICKENER EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT
(BOUND SEPARATELY)
VOLUME 8 GEOTECHNICAL DATA REPORT (BOUND SEPARATELY)
END OF SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - viii

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 05 02
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
A.

1.02

Requirements specified within this section apply to Division 26, Electrical.


Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual
sections.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.
4.
1.03

COMMUNICATIONS WORK DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY


A.

1.04

Telecommunications equipment including security card readers, Ethernet


switches, telephone, and fiberoptic patch panels are provided outside this
Contract. Under this Contract provide raceways, outlet and junction
boxes, cover plates, pull wires, and mounting board as indicated.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

1.05

National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National Electrical


Installation Standards.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

Provide manufacturers data for the following: Nameplates, signs, and


labels.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable
to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.06

B.

Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards


published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.

C.

Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and
Group of hazardous area indicated.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.

The following areas are classified hazardous Class I, Division 1, Group D, due
to the potential for occurrence of hazardous concentrations of combustible
gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials and methods
required for such areas.
1.

2.

B.

Fermentation Tanks:
a.
Internal area within fermentation tanks.
b.
Area within 3 foot radius of fermentation tank vent opening
Thickened Sludge Wet Well:
a.
Area within thickened sludge wet well.
Area within 3 foot radius of thickened sludge wet well vent
b.
opening.

The following areas are classified hazardous, Class I, Division 2, Group D,


due to the potential for accumulation of hazardous concentrations of
combustible gases, and for exposure to corrosive environment. Use materials
and methods required for such areas.
1.
2.

3.

4.

Enclosed, below grade valve and metering vaults with closed piping
systems containing wastewater.
Primary Clarifier:
a.
Area between the top of the primary clarifier walls to the water
surface.
b.
Envelope extending 18 inches above the primary clarifier walls
and 18 inches out from the primary clarifier walls.
c.
Envelope 18 inches above grade extending out 10 feet from the
exterior of the primary clarifier walls.
Thickened Sludge Wet Well:
a.
Envelope within 3 feet of hatch opening.
b.
Envelope between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent opening.
Fermentation Tanks:
a.
Envelope within 3 feet of hatch opening.
Envelope between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent opening.
b.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.
C.

The following areas are wet, and corrosive. Use materials and methods
required for such areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

D.

Area within VFLT wet well


Area within PFLT wet well.
Area within the fermentation tanks.
Area between the aeration basin water level and top of aeration basin
walls.
Area within 5 feet of Ferric Chloride Feed system.

The following areas are classified nonhazardous and wet. Use materials and
methods required for such areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
E.

WAS Phosphate Release: 18 inches above water surface and 10 feet


horizontally from wetted walls.

Outdoor abovegrade areas not covered above.


Belowgrade vaults.
Utilidors.
Thickening Building:
a.
RST room.
b.
Pump Room.
Galleries.
DAFT building basement.
South Plant Division Structure.

The following areas are classified as indoor and dry:


1.

2.

3.
4.

Thickening Building:
a.
Electrical Room.
b.
Mechanical Platform.
c.
Stairwell.
d.
Entry.
e.
Restroom.
Galleries:
a.
West Gallery North Stairtower Eletrical Room.
b.
West Gallery South Stairtower Electrical Room.
c.
South Plant Division Structure Electrical Room.
d.
Pretreatment Building Electrical Room.
e.
RAS Pump Station Electrical Room.
Filtrate Facility Electrical Room.
DAFT Building Electrical Room.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

The following areas are not classified. Use dust-tight and oil-tight NEMA 12
materials and methods.
1.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are
required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of
materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.

B.

Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be


capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient
temperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

C.

Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous


operation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range stated
in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

D.

Equip panels installed outdoors in direct sun with sun shields.

EQUIPMENT FINISH
A.

2.03

Manufacturers standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated.


If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

NAMEPLATES
A.

Material: Laminated plastic.

B.

Attachment Screws: Stainless steel.

C.

Color: White, engraved to a black core.

D.

Letter Height:
1.
2.

2.04

Thickening Building Polymer Room.

Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch.


Other electrical equipment: 1/4 inch.

SIGNS AND LABELS


A.

Sign size, lettering, and color shall be in accordance with NEMA Z535.4.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and


raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for
actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of
raceways, subject to approval of Engineer.

B.

Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets,


equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for
conflicts with openings, structural members, and components of other systems
and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify
Engineer in writing.

C.

Install Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless


otherwise specified.

D.

Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction.

E.

Lay out Work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member
or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform
cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings,
paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of
conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such
Work, restore surfaces to original condition.

ANCHORING AND MOUNTING


A.

3.03

Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with


manufacturers requirements for seismic zone criteria given in
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY


A.

Drawings provide a circuit schedule for each circuit showing the conduit and
cables to be included in each circuit. Do not combine power or control circuits
into common raceways without authorization of Engineer. When a cable tray
is provided the circuit may be collected into the common cable tray. Analog
cables shall be routed in a separate cable tray to avoid signal interference.
Power and control cables may be routed together in the same cable tray
separate from the analog circuits.

B.

Circuits shown on the facility plans can be combined into common raceways
in accordance with the requirements of the National Electric Code.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS


A.

Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs: Field mark motor control centers, and
panelboards, and automatic transfer switches to warn qualified persons of
potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons
before working on energized equipment.

B.

Multiple Power Supply Sign: Install permanent plaque or directory at each


service disconnect location denoting other services, feeders, and branch
circuits supplying the Thickening Building, and the area served by each.

C.

Equipment Nameplates:
1.

2.
3.
4.
3.05

3.06

Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including motor


control centers, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal
junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations.
Motor control center, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates
shall include equipment designation.
Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include
name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device.
Panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service
voltage, and phases.

LOAD BALANCE
A.

Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and


distribution equipment.

B.

Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on panelboards,


motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required.

C.

When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads,


maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that
lists final circuit arrangement.

CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING


A.

Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and
equipment by removing debris and vacuuming.

B.

Touchup Paint:
1.

Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of


devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency
and type of surface of original finish.

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.07

If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire


equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than
factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is
acceptable to Engineer.

PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION


A.

Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects
of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces.

B.

When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractors


convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other
adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate
protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS


26 05 02 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 05 04
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b.
A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and
Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy
and High-Strength Low Alloy Formability.
c.
E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 18,
Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors.
International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring
Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations InstrumentationPart 1:
Intrinsic Safety.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
c.
C12.1 Code for Electricity Metering
d.
C12.6 Phase-Shifting Devices Used in Metering, Marking and
Arrangement of, Terminals for
e.
CP 1, Shunt Capacitors.
f.
ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors,
and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts.
g.
ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot
Devices.
h.
KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches
(600 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
b.
248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses.
c.
486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

PART 2
2.01

489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case


Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
810, Standard for Capacitors.
943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks.
1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

Provide manufacturers data for the following:


a.
Control devices.
b.
Control relays.
c.
Circuit breakers.
d.
Nonfused switches.
e.
Timers.
f.
Intrinsic safety barriers.
g.
Firestopping.
h.
Enclosures: Include enclosure data for products having
enclosures.

PRODUCTS
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW
VOLTAGE
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Type: Molded case.


Trip Ratings: 15-800 amps.
Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac.
Suitable for mounting and operating in any position.
NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

Operating Mechanism:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle.


Quick-make, quick-break action.
Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in open position.
ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle.
Operating handle to assume a center position when tripped.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Trip Mechanism:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.


Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X
to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.
Two and three pole, common trip.
Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole.
Test button on cover.
Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where
multi-pole circuit breakers are shown.

D.

Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings: Equal to rating of existing equipment,


unless otherwise shown.

E.

Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as


specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground
fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of
personnel).
1.
2.

Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.


Push-to-test button.

F.

Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker


specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground
fault (UL-listed for equipment ground fault protection).

G.

Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustment


which simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual pole
continuously through a 3X to 10X trip range.

H.

Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle lock ON devices,


mechanical interlocks, key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs as
shown or otherwise required. Shunt trip operators shall be continuous duty
rated or have coil-clearing contacts.

I.

Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Supply (line side) at either end.


Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown.
Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than
100 amperes.
Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or
conductor ampacity.
Use bolted bus connections, except where bolt-on is not compatible with
existing breaker provisions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

J.

Enclosures for Independent Mounting:


1.
2.
3.

2.02

2.03

See Article Enclosures.


Service Entrance Use: Breakers in required enclosure and required
accessories shall be UL 489 listed.
Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover
with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by
qualified personnel.

NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE


A.

NEMA KS 1.

B.

Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with


external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions.

C.

Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity.

D.

Enclosures: See Article Enclosures.

E.

Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON


position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel.

FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT


A.

Power Distribution, General:


1.
2.
3.

B.

Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps:


1.
2.
3.

C.

Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating.


Provide to fit mountings specified with switches.
UL 248.

Class: RK-1.
Type: Dual element, with time delay.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts).
b.
Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts).

Cable Limiters:
1.
2.

600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad.


Manufacturer and Product: Bussmann; K Series.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Ferrule:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.04

600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension.


Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps.
Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required.
Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and
use.
Manufacturers:
a.
Bussmann.
b.
Littlefuse, Inc.

PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH


A.

Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5


Designation A600.

B.

Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard.

C.

Indicating Light: LED, full voltage.

D.

Pushbutton Color:
1.
2.

ON or START: Black.
OFF or STOP: Red.

E.

Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated.

F.

Legend Plate:
1.
2.
3.
4.

G.

Material: Aluminum.
Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color.
Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces
on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function.
Letter Height: 7/64-inch.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.

2.

Heavy-Duty, Oil-Tight Type:


a.
General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.
b.
Square D Co.; Type T.
c.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.
Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type:
a.
Square D Co.; Type SK.
b.
General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P.
c.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34.
d.
Crouse-Hinds; Type NCS.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS


A.

UL 486E and UL 1059.

B.

Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes.

C.

Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment,


panels, or boxes.

D.

Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing
direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke.

E.

Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity
metal.

F.

Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal.

G.

Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection.

H.

Terminals:
1.
2.
3.

I.

Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags.

J.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.06

Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than


stripping.
Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space.
Individual, rail mounted.

Phoenix Contact
Ideal.
Electrovert USA Corp.

GENERAL PURPOSE MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY


A.

Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous,


7,200VA make, 720VA break.

B.

Continuous and switching contact rating: 10amps.

C.

Accessories:
1.
2.

D.

Push-to-Test button.
Relay status LED.

Mounting: Can be mounted on din rail or panel.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.

2.07

TIME DELAY RELAY


A.

Industrial relay with contacts rated 8 amps continuous, 2000VA make or


break.

B.

Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay.

C.

One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum).

D.

Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent.

E.

Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on


Drawings.

F.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.08

Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type D3PF Series.


General Electric Co.

Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type TR
Square D Co.; Type F.
General Electric Co.
Square D; Class 8903,

SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS


A.

Carbon Steel Framing Channel:


1.
2.

Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum,


ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33.
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

B.

PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil
polyvinyl chloride coating.

C.

Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless
steel, 12-gauge minimum.

D.

Extruded Aluminum Framing Channel:


1.
2.

Material: Extruded from Type 6063-T6 aluminum alloy.


Fittings fabricated from Alloy 5052-H32.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.09

INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIER


A.

Provides a safe energy level for exposed wiring in a Class I, Division 1 or


Division 2 hazardous area when circuit is connected to power source in
nonhazardous area.

B.

Rating: Power source shall be rated 24 volts dc, nominal, with not more than
250 volts available under fault conditions.

C.

Contact Rating: 5 amps, 250 volts ac.

D.

Mounting: Rail or surface.

E.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.

2.10

2.11

B-Line Systems, Inc.


Unistrut Corp.
Aickinstrut.

MTL, Inc.; Series 2000 or Series 3000.


R. Stahl, Inc.

SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A.

Provide matting having a breakdown of 20 kV minimum.

B.

Manufacturer: U.S. Mat and Rubber Company.

FIRESTOPS
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

B.

Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than,


the assembly penetrated.
Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and
after exposure to flame.
Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established
by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Comply with Section 07 84 00, Firestopping.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.12

ENCLOSURES
A.

Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted
using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as
bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them.

B.

Color: Manufacturers standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless


otherwise shown.

C.

Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of


different systems and voltage.

D.

Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical


enclosures according to the following table:
ENCLOSURES
Location

PART 3
3.01

Environment

NEMA 250 Type

Indoor

Finished

Dry

Indoor

Unfinished

Dry

Indoor

Unfinished

Industrial Use

12

Indoor

Any

Wet

Outdoor

Any

Wet

4X 304 Stainless
Steel

Indoor and Outdoor

Any

Wet or Corrosive

4X Type 304
Stainless Steel

Indoor and Outdoor

Any

Hazardous Gas

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

3.02

Finish

Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH


A.

Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous,


indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and
individual stations.

B.

Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant


type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL


A.

Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment,


raceway, and cable tray systems.

B.

Channel Type:
1.
2.

3.

4.

C.

Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following:


1.
2.

3.04

3.05

3.06

Interior, Wet or Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations:


a.
Steel Raceway and Other Systems Not Covered: Carbon steel
Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations:
a.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:
Type 316 stainless steel, nonmetallic, or PVC-coated steel.
Outdoor, Noncorrosive Locations:
a.
Steel Raceway: Carbon steel or paint coated framing channel,
except where mounted on aluminum handrail, then use aluminum
framing channel.
Outdoor Corrosive Locations:
a.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered:
Type 316 stainless steel or PVC coated steel.

Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer.


PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch.

INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS


A.

Install in compliance with ISA RP12.06.01.

B.

Arrange conductors such that wiring from hazardous areas cannot short to
wiring from nonhazardous area.

C.

Stencil INTRINSICALLY SAFE CIRCUIT on all boxes enclosing barriers.

SWITCHBOARD MATTING
A.

Install 36-inch width at motor control centers.

B.

Matting shall run full length of all sides of equipment that have operator
controls or afford access to devices.

FIRESTOPS
A.

Install in strict conformance with manufacturers instructions. Comply with


installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory


materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and
walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or
wall assembly in which penetration occurs.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS


AND METHODS
26 05 04 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 05 05
CONDUCTORS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC): CS 8,


Specification for Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 kV
through 46 kV.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
b.
B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
c.
B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
d.
B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round ConcentricLay-Stranded Copper Conductors.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for AlternatingCurrent Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having
Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded
Insulation Rated 2.5 kV Through 500 kV.
b.
386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for
Power Distribution Systems Above 600V.
c.
404, Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded
Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500000 V.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA):
a.
S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.
b.
S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and
Instrumentation Cables.
c.
T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with
Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations.
b.
WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and
Instrumentation Cables.
c.
WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for
the Distribution of Electrical Energy.
d.
WC 71, Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts
for Use in the Distribution of Electric Energy.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.
6.

7.
8.

1.02

WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the


Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b.
262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of
Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C,
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
b.
44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
c.
62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables.
d.
486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors.
e.
486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors.
f.
510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and
Rubber Insulating Tape.
g.
854, Standard for Safety for Service-Entrance Cables.
h.
1072, Standard for Safety for Medium-Voltage Power Cables.
i.
1277, Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray
Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
j.
1569, Standard for Safety for Metal-Clad Cables.
k.
1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical
Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

3.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 2

Product Data:
a.
Wire and cable.
b.
Wire and cable accessories.
c.
Cable fault detection system.
Manufactured Wire Systems:
a.
Product data.
b.
Rating information.
c.
Dimensional Drawings.
d.
Special fittings.
Cable Pulling Calculations:
a.
Ensure submitted and reviewed before cable installation.
b.
Provide for the following cable installations:
1)
Medium voltage cable runs that cannot be hand pulled.
2)
Feeder circuits; single conductors #4/0 and larger.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.
1.03

Informational Submittals: Factory Test Report per AEIC CS 8, including


AEIC qualification report for conductors above 600 volts.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):


1.

2.

B.

PART 2
2.01

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the
AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC.
Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

Terminations and Splices for Conductors above 600 Volts: Work shall be
done by journeyman lineman with splicing credentials or electrician certified
to use materials approved for cable splices and terminations.
PRODUCTS

CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW


A.

Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70.

B.

Conductor Type:
1.
2.
3.

120-Volt and 277-Volt conductor termination at light switches,


10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper.
120-Volt conductors terminating at receptacles, 10 AWG and Smaller:
Solid copper.
All Other Circuits: Stranded copper.

C.

Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2.

D.

Flexible Cords and Cables:


1.
2.

Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in


accordance with UL 62.
Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of
NEMA WC 70.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS


E.

35kV EPR Insulated Cable:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.
10.

11.

2.02

Extrusion: Single-pass, triple-tandem, of conductor screen, insulation,


and insulation screen.
Type: 35 kV, shielded, UL 1072, Type MV-105.
Conductors: Copper, concentric lay Class B round stranded in
accordance with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, and ASTM B496.
Conductor Screen: Extruded, semiconducting ethylene-propylene rubber
in accordance with NEMA WC 71 and AEIC CS 8.
Insulation: 133 percent insulation level, ethylene-propylene rubber
(EPR) containing no polyethylene, in accordance with NEMA WC 71,
and AEIC CS 8.
Insulation Thickness 420-mil, 35 kV, nominal.
Insulation Screen: Thermosetting, semiconducting ethylene-propylene
rubber (EPR), extruded directly over insulation in accordance with
NEMA WC 74 and AEIC CS 8.
Metallic Shield: Uncoated, 5-mil, copper shielding tape, helically
applied with 12-1/2 percent minimum overlap.
Jacket: Extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound applied in
accordance with NEMA WC 71 or NEMA WC 74.
Operating Temperature: 105 degrees C continuous normal operations,
130 degrees C emergency operating conditions, and 250 degrees C
short-circuit conditions.
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Pirelli Wire and Cable.
c.
General Cable.
d.
Southwire Co.

600-VOLT RATED CABLE


A.

General:
1.

2.

3.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 4

Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray


Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13
meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725.
Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturers name, maximum
working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL
listing mark.
Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
B.

Type 1, Multiconductor Control Cable:


1.

2.
3.

4.

C.

Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C


wet locations.
Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant.

Conductors:
a.
14 AWG, seven-strand copper.
b.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon.
c.
UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1.
d.
Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape.
e.
Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1,
Table 2.
Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
Cable Sizes:
No. of Conductors

Max. Outside Diameter


(Inches)

Jacket Thickness
(Mils)

0.41

45

0.48

45

0.52

45

12

0.72

60

19

0.83

60

25

1.00

60

1.15

80

37
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Southwire.

Type 2, Multiconductor Power Cable:


1.

2.

General:
a.
Meet or exceed UL 1581 for cable tray use.
b.
Meet or exceed UL 1277 for direct burial and sunlight-resistance.
c.
Overall Jacket: PVC.
Conductors:
a.
Class B stranded, coated copper.
b.
Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene or crosslinked polyethylene.
c.
UL rated VW-1 or listed Type XHHW-2.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

3.
4.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 6

Color Code:
1)
Conductors, size 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors,
ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1.
2)
Conductors, size 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-73-532,
Method 4.
Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.
Cable Sizes:
No. of
Current
Carrying
Conductors

Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)

Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)

Conductor
Size

Minimum
Ground
Wire Size

14

14

2
3
4

0.42
0.45
0.49

45

12

12

2
3
4

0.42
0.45
0.49

45

10

10

2
3
4

0.54
0.58
0.63

60

10

3
4

0.66
0.75

60

3
4

0.74
0.88

60

3
4

0.88
1.04

60
80

3
4

1.01
1.16

80

3
4

1.10
1.25

80

1/0

3
4

1.22
1.35

80

2/0

3
4

1.32
1.53

80

3/0

3
4

1.40
1.60

80

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

D.

4/0

No. of
Current
Carrying
Conductors

Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)

Nominal
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)

3
4

1.56
1.78

80
110

Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Southwire.

Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair,


designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log
applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

E.

Conductor
Size

Minimum
Ground
Wire Size

Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness.


Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic
polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD.
Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric,
meeting requirements of ASTM B8.
b.
20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.
c.
Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC.
d.
Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon.
e.
Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red.
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Belden.

Type 5, 18 AWG, Multitwisted Shielded Pairs, with a Common Overall


Shield, Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process
control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements.
1.

Conductors:
a.
Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in
accordance with ASTM B8.
b.
Tinned copper drain wires.
c.
Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18.
d.
Insulation: 15-mil PVC.
e.
Jacket: 4-mil nylon.
f.
Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor
numerically printed for group identification.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

g.
2.
3.

4.

F.

Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic


polymer.
Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,
overlapped for 100 percent coverage.
Cable Sizes:

Number of Pairs

Maximum Outside
Diameter
(Inches)

Nominal Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)

0.50

45

0.68

60

12

0.82

60

16

0.95

80

24

1.16

80

36

1.33

80

50
Manufacturers:
a.
Okonite Co.
b.
Alpha Wire Corp.
c.
Belden.

1.56

80

Type 7, Multiconductor Metal-Clad (UL Type MC) Power Cable:


1.
2.

3.

4.
5.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 8

Meeting requirements of UL 44 and UL 1569.


Conductors:
a.
Class B stranded, coated copper.
b.
Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW
or EPR.
c.
Grounding Conductors: Bare, stranded copper.
Sheath:
a.
UL listed Type MC.
b.
Continuous welded, corrugated aluminum sheath.
c.
Suitable for use as grounding conductor.
Outer Jacket: PVC per UL 1569.
Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray
Flame Test.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

7.

Cable Sizes:

Conductor
Size

Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
(AWG)

No. of
Insulated
Conductors

Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)

12 AWG

12 or 3x16

3
4

0.79
0.85

50

10 AWG

10 or 3x14

3
4

0.82
0.90

50

8 AWG

10 or 3x14

3
4

0.85
1.00

50

6 AWG

8 or 3x12

3
4

0.99
1.10

50

4 AWG

8 or 3x12

3
4

1.08
1.20

50

2 AWG

6 or 3x10

3
4

1.24
1.45

50

1 AWG

6 or 3x10

3
4

1.40
1.55

50

1/0 KCM

6 or 3x10

3
4

1.52
1.60

50

2/0 AWG

4 or 3x8

3
4

1.67
1.75

50

4/0 AWG

4 or 3x8

3
4

1.93
2.10

60

250 KCM

4 or 3x8

3
4

2.11
2.20

60

350 KCM

3 or 3x8

3
4

2.39
2.50

60

500 KCM

2 or 3x8

3
4

2.80
2.90

75

Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Okonite Co.; Type CLX.
b.
Southwire Type MC.
c.
General Cable, CCW Armored Power.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Type 8, Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable:


1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

2.03

Conductors:
a.
Class B, stranded coated copper.
b.
Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL
Type XHHW-2.
c.
Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper.
Sheath:
a.
UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C.
b.
Continuous shield, A1/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper
braid.
Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569.
Cable Sizes:

Conductor
Size

Minimum
Ground
Wire Size
(AWG)

No. of
Insulated
Conductors

Max.
Outside
Diameter
(Inches)

Minimum
Jacket
Thickness
(Mils)

12 AWG

12

0.655

50

10 AWG

10

0.769

50

8 AWG

0.940

50

6 AWG

1.038

50

4 AWG

1.180

50

1.351

50

2 AWG
2
4
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Alpha Wire; Series V.
b.
Belden; Series 29500.
c.
LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim.

SPECIAL CABLES
A.

Type 30, Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 300V:
1.
2.

3.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 10

Category 6 UTP, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with


TIA/EIA 568-C Category 6 requirements.
Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit ethernet
and video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant
products and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and
Category 5e.
Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with
FEP insulation and blue PVC jacket.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.
B.

Type 35, ControlNet Flexible Coaxial Cable:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.04

2.05

NFPA 70 Plenum (CMP) rated; comply with flammability plenum


requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 262.
Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1-inch minimum at a temperature
of minus 20 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking.
Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 7852A.

Outer Jacket: PVC.


Quad shielded cable.
Dimensions: maximum of .35-inch nominal OD.
Conductors: 20 AWG stranded tinned copper.
Manufacturer and Product:
a.
Belden; 3093A.
b.
Rockwell; 1786 RG6.

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.

Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or


THHN/THWN, insulation.

B.

Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper.

ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW


A.

Tape:
1.

2.
3.

B.

General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch


Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of
UL 510.
Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic,
Scotch Brand 88.
Arc and Fireproofing:
a.
30-mil, elastomer.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth
tapebinder.
2)
Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder.

Identification Devices:
1.

Sleeve:
a.
Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed
black markings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

2.

3.
4.

5.
C.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE.
2)
Brady, Type 3PS.
Heat Bond Marker:
a.
Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure
sensitive adhesive.
b.
Self-laminating protective shield over text.
c.
Machine printed black text.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS-HB.
Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped
on plate.
Tie-On Cable Marker Tags:
a.
Chemical-resistant white tag.
b.
Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches.
c.
Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM-SCE.
Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch
minimum.

Connectors and Terminations:


1.

2.

3.

4.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 12

Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:


a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2)
Burndy; Insulug.
3)
ILSCO.
Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator:
a.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
b.
Seamless.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon.
2)
Burndy; Insulink.
3)
ILSCO; ILSCONS.
Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts):
a.
UL 486C.
b.
Plated steel, square wire springs.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts.
2)
Ideal; Twister.
Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector:
a.
Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel.
b.
Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

D.

Cable Lugs:
1.
2.
3.

4.

E.

Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable.


Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP.

Heat Shrinkable Insulation:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.06

In accordance with NEMA CC 1.


Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal.
Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators:
a.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70,
75 degrees C ampacity.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed.
2)
Burndy; Hydent.
3)
ILSCO.
Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Thomas & Betts; Locktite.
2)
Burndy; Quiklug.
3)
ILSCO.

Cable Ties:
1.
2.

F.

Manufacturers:
1)
3M Co.
2)
Thomas & Betts.
3)
Marrette.

Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin.


Single wall for insulation and strain relief.
Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.
b.
Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000.

ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS


A.

There are 2 types of interface systems within the treatment plant (Large and
Small). Provide accessories that match existing interfaces of existing
transformers. The existing transformers that are part of the construction both
use the large interface accessories.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Elbow Connector Systems:


1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

2.07

PULLING COMPOUND
A.

Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based


lubricant; UL listed.

B.

Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and


lead-covered wire and cable.

C.

Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer.

D.

Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and


fiberglass raceways.

E.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.08

Molded, peroxide-cured, EPDM-insulated, Class 35 kV, 150 kV


BIL, 200A, 10,000A rms load-break elbows having copper currentcarrying parts in accordance with IEEE 386.
Protective Caps: Class 35 kV, 150 kV BIL, 200 amperes, with molded
EPDM insulated body.
Insulated Standoff Bushings: Class 35 kV, 150 kV BIL, 200 amperes,
complete with EPDM rubber body, stainless steel eyebolt with brass
pressure foot, and stainless steel base bracket.
Bushing Inserts: Class 35 kV, 150 kV BIL, 200A, load-break with
EPDM rubber body and all-copper, current-carrying parts.
Mounting Plates: Two-way, ASTM A167 stainless steel, complete with
universal mounting brackets, grounding lugs and two parking stands.
Manufacturers:
a.
Cooper Industries.
b.
Elastimold.

Ideal Co.
Polywater, Inc.
Cable Grip Co.

WARNING TAPE
A.

As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.09

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854.

B.

Conductors Above 600 Volts: Test in accordance with NEMA WC 71 and


AEIC CS 8 partial discharge level test for EPR insulated cable.

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers


recommendations.

B.

Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless


noted otherwise.

C.

Do not exceed cable manufacturers recommendations for maximum pulling


tensions and minimum bending radii.

D.

Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for


copper conductors and aluminum conductors.

F.

Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-tocenter spacing as required by equipment terminals.

G.

Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults,


cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some
other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed
length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 18 inches on center.

H.

Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling
wires or cables.

I.

Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors,


pull through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than
raceway inside diameter.

J.

Cable Tray Installation:


1.
2.
3.

Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray.


Bundle, in groups, wire and cable of same voltage having a common
routing and destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 8 feet.
Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.

3.02

Separate control cables from power cables in same cable tray with
barriers.
Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the
following maximum intervals:
a.
Horizontal Runs: 20 feet.
b.
Vertical Runs: 5 feet.

POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING


A.

Conductors 600 Volts and Below:


1.

2.
3.

6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each
end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping
turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.
8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
Colors:
System

Conductor

Color

Equipment
Grounding

Green

240/120 Volts,
Single-Phase, ThreeWire

Grounded Neutral
One Hot Leg
Other Hot Leg

White
Black
Red

208Y/120 Volts,
Three-Phase, FourWire

Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C

White
Black
Red
Blue

480Y/277 Volts,
Three-Phase, FourWire

Grounded Neutral
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C

White
Brown
Orange
Yellow

All Systems

4.
B.

Note: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation.


Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other
than green, in accordance with NFPA 70.

Conductors Above 600 Volts:


1.

Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at


accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering
area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.03

CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A.

Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule


designations.

B.

Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules:


1.
2.

C.

Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit.


Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one
circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to
make it unique.

Method:
1.
2.

3.
3.04

Colors:
a.
Grounded Neutral: White.
b.
Phase A: Brown.
c.
Phase B: Orange.
d.
Phase C: Yellow.

Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond


markers.
Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger:
a.
Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags.
b.
Attach with nylon tie cord.
Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted.

CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW


A.

Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in


lighting and receptacle circuits.

B.

Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution


conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by
Engineer.

C.

Connections and Terminations:


1.
2.
3.

Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on
stranded conductors.
Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for
instrumentation and control, circuit conductors.
Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection
of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for


instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through
2/0 AWG.
Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for
power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger.
Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit
conductors 10 AWG and larger.
Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure
connection.
Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer.
Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used.
Compression Lugs:
a.
Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall
provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until
crimp is complete.
b.
Do not use plier type crimpers.

D.

Do not use soldered mechanical joints.

E.

Splices and Terminations:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Insulate uninsulated connections.


Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat
shrink.
Outdoors, Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weatherresistant tape or single wall heat shrink.
Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink.

F.

Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps.

G.

Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers:


1.
2.

H.

Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure.


Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal,
remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips
of insulating material to protect the conductors.

Control and Instrumentation Wiring:


1.

2.

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 18

Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and
instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated,
locking-fork compression lugs.
Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in
accordance with terminal manufacturers instructions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.

5.

I.

3.05

Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using


terminal strips.
Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made
under Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process
Systems, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections.
Cable Protection:
a.
All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex
conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in
diameter.
b.
Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables.
c.
Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over
shield.

Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install


minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet
in other assemblies.

CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS


A.

Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer.

B.

Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits, in accordance
with kit manufacturers instructions.

C.

Install splices or terminations as continuous operation in accessible locations


under clean, dry conditions.

D.

Single Conductor Cable Terminations: Provide heat shrinkable stress control


and outer nontracking insulation tubings, high relative permittivity stress relief
mastic for insulation shield cutback treatment, and a heat-activated sealant for
environmental sealing .

E.

Install terminals or connectors acceptable for type of conductor material used.

F.

Provide shield termination and grounding for terminations.

G.

Provide necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors.

H.

Where elbow connectors are specified, install in accordance with


manufacturers instructions.

I.

Connections and Terminations:


1.

Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for power circuit


conductors 4 AWG and larger.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
J.
3.06

Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors for motor circuit


conductors No. 12 and larger.

Give 2 working days notice to Engineer prior to making splices.

CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING


A.

Install arc and fireproofing tape on 35 kV cables throughout entire exposed


length in manholes, and handholes.

B.

Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as


single cable.

C.

Follow tape manufacturers installation instructions.

D.

Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tapebinder. Each band to


consist of a minimum of two wraps directly over each other.
END OF SECTION

CONDUCTORS
26 05 05 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

1.02

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):


1.

2.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National


Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code. (NEC).

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical


Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PRODUCTS
GROUND ROD
A.

Material: Copper-clad.

B.

Diameter: Minimum 1/2 inch.

C.

Length: 8 feet.

GROUND CONDUCTORS
A.

As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

CONNECTORS
A.

Exothermic Weld Type:


1.
2.
3.

B.

Compression Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material.


Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and
larger.
Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and
sealed.
Manufacturers:
a.
Burndy Corp.
b.
Thomas and Betts Co.
c.
ILSCO.

Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material.
1.

2.04

Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial.


Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process.
Manufacturers:
a.
Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon.
b.
Thermoweld.

Manufacturers:
a.
Burndy Corp.
b.
Thomas and Betts Co.

GROUNDING WELLS
A.

Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked
GROUND ROD.

B.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.

Christy Co.; No. G5.


Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series.

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.

B.

Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to


supplementary grounding electrodes.

C.

Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded


building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode.

D.

Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed


noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways,
ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and
metal piping systems.

E.

Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in


accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer.

F.

Shielded Instrumentation Cables:


1.
2.
3.

3.02

Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal.


Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and
apply heat shrink tube.
Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point.

WIRE CONNECTIONS
A.

Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and


control circuits above 50 volts.

B.

Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding


conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C.

Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings.

D.

Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment


containing a ground bus.

E.

Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus.

F.

Bolt connections to equipment ground bus.

G.

Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to


intermediate metallic enclosures.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

H.

3.03

3.04

3.05

3.06

Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding


system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch
machine screws.

MOTOR GROUNDING
A.

Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor


feeder raceway; connect to motor frame.

B.

Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding


conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus.

C.

Motors Less Than 10 hp: Furnish compression, spade-type terminal connected


to conduit box mounting screw.

D.

Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish


compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch
brass threaded stud with bolt and washer.

E.

Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install


solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt.

GROUND RODS
A.

Install full length with conductor connection at upper end.

B.

Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown.

C.

Space multiple ground rods by one rod length.

GROUNDING WELLS
A.

Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas.

B.

Install riser ring and cover flush with surface.

C.

Place 6 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well.

CONNECTIONS
A.

General:
1.
2.

Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanical, or


compression-type connectors; or brazing.
Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type
connectors.

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
B.

Exothermic Weld Type:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

3.

2.
3.

3.08

Install in accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations.


Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground
rods specified.
Install using connector manufacturers compression tool having proper
sized dies.

Mechanical Type:
1.

3.07

Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface.


Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.
Avoid using badly worn molds.
Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds.
After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and
thoroughly clean joint.

Compression Type:
1.
2.

D.

Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to


allow good metal-to-metal contact.
Notify Owner prior to backfilling ground connections.

Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion


inhibitor before making connection.
Install in accordance with connector manufacturers recommendations.
Do not conceal mechanical connections.

METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING


A.

Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to


grounding system.

B.

Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms.

C.

Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting


pushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways
carrying circuits to these devices.

MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING


A.

Install one ground rod inside each.

B.

Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 to 6 inches above floor.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.09

3.10

C.

Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible.

D.

Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway


grounding bushings to ground rod with No. 6 AWG copper conductor.

TRANSFORMER GROUNDING
A.

Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and


to any additional indicated grounding electrodes.

B.

Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to four locally driven ground rods


and buried ground wire encircling transformer and system ground network.

SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING


A.

Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus.


END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BONDING


FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO): HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A123/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b.
A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
c.
A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
d.
C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading
for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
e.
D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at
Commercial Power Frequencies.
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial
Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation
standards.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).
c.
C80.3, Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
d.
C80.5, Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC).
e.
C80.6, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC).
f.
RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized
Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
g.
TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.
h.
TC 3, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing.
i.
TC 6, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installation.
j.
TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and
Fittings.
k.
VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.
7.

1.02

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical


Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit.
b.
5, Standard for Safety for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
c.
6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit Steel.
d.
6A, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit
Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless.
e.
360, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
f.
514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable
Fittings.
g.
651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC
Conduit and Fittings.
h.
651A, Standard for Safety for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit
and HDPE Conduit.
i.
797, Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing Steel.
j.
870, Standard for Safety for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and
Associated Fittings.
k.
1242, Standard for Safety for Electrical Intermediate Metal
Conduit Steel.
l.
1660, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic
Conduit.
m. 1684, Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin
Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.
n.
2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication
Cable Raceway.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Manufacturers Literature:
a.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit.
b.
Intermediate metal conduit.
c.
PVC Schedule 40 conduit.
d.
PVC tubing (Type EB) conduit.
e.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit, submittal to include
copy of manufacturers warranty.
f.
Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.
g.
Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit.
h.
Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit.
i.
Device boxes for use in hazardous areas.
j.
Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade.
k.
Large junction and pull boxes.
l.
Terminal junction boxes.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

B.

Precast Manholes and Handholes:


a.
Dimensional Drawings and descriptive literature.
b.
Traffic loading calculations.
c.
Accessory information.
Telecommunications Pathway Cable Tray:
a.
Dimensional Drawings, calculations, and descriptive information.
b.
NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected.
c.
Support span length and pounds-per-foot actual and future cable
loading at locations, with safety factor used.
d.
Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of
tray for loading specified.
e.
Layout Drawings and list of accessories being provided.
Cable Tray Systems:
a.
Dimensional Drawings, calculations, and descriptive information.
b.
NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected.
c.
Support span length and pounds-per-foot actual and future cable
loading at locations, with safety factor used.
d.
Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of
tray for loading specified.
e.
Layout Drawings and list of accessories being provided.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Conduit Layout:
a.
Provide Drawings for underground and concealed conduits
including, but not limited to ductbanks, under floor slabs,
concealed in floor slabs, and concealed in walls.
b.
Provide plan and section showing arrangement and location of
conduit and duct bank required for:
1)
Medium Voltage feeder to THK-TRX-1.
2)
Medium Voltage feeder from DIG-TX-1 to SCL-TRX-1.
3)
Ductbank from RAS Pump Station to WAS Phosphate
Release facility.
4)
Ductbank from Thickening Building to east to west utilidor
in front of the Filtrate Storage facility.
c.
Reproducible; scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
Manufacturers certification of training for PVC-coated rigid galvanized
steel conduit installer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):


1.

2.

B.

PART 2
2.01

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical


Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall
be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other
organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PVC-Coated, Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit Installer: Certified by conduit


manufacturer as having received minimum 2 hours of training on installation
procedures.
PRODUCTS

CONDUIT AND TUBING


A.

Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):


1.
2.

B.

Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):


1.
2.

C.

Meet requirements of NEMA C80.6 and UL 1242.


Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective
layer.

PVC Schedule 40 Conduit:


1.
2.

D.

Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.


Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer.

Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651.


UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed
or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors.

PVC Tubing (Type EB):


1.
2.

Meet requirements of NEMA TC 6 and UL 651A.


UL listed for reinforced concrete encasement and 90 degrees C insulated
conductors.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:


1.
2.

3.
4.
F.

Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.

G.

Meet requirements of UL 1.
Material: Galvanized steel.

Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.

3.

2.02

UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors.


Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket.

Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.

H.

Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1.


Material:
a.
Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.
b.
Exterior Finish: PVC coating, 40-mil nominal thickness; bond to
metal shall have tensile strength greater than PVC.
c.
Interior finish: Urethane coating, 2-mil nominal thickness.
Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane.
Bendable without damage to interior or exterior coating.

Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket.


UL 1660 listed for:
a.
Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors.
b.
Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex.
b.
T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC.

FITTINGS
A.

Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit:


1.

2.

General:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 514B.
b.
Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless
compression fittings not permitted.
Bushing:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for
150 degrees C.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series BU-I.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type HB.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

9.

10.

Grounding Bushing:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for
150 degrees C, with solderless lugs.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series GIB.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG.
Conduit Hub:
a.
Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw.
b.
UL listed for use in wet locations.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton, Series HUB-B.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Series CH.
3)
Meyers; ST Series.
Conduit Bodies:
a.
Sized as required by NFPA 70.
b.
Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions):
1)
Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets.
3)
Killark; Series O electrolets.
4)
Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8.
c.
Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations):
1)
Appleton.
2)
Crouse-Hinds.
3)
Killark.
Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer.
Unions:
a.
Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC threepiece union.
2)
O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series,
three-piece coupling.
Conduit Sealing Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS.
3)
Killark; Type EY or Type EYS.
Drain Seal:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type EYD.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or Type EZD.
Drain/Breather Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; Type ECDB.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; ECD.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11.

12.

B.

PVC Conduit and Tubing:


1.
2.

C.

Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3.


Type: PVC, slip-on.

PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit:


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
D.

Expansion Fitting:
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Deflection/Expansion Movement:
a)
Appleton; Type DF.
b)
Crouse-Hinds; Type XD.
2)
Expansion Movement Only:
a)
Appleton; Type XJ.
b)
Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ.
c)
Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP.
Cable Sealing Fitting:
a.
To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit.
b.
For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at
connector entry.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Appleton; CG-S.
2)
Crouse-Hinds; CGBS.

Meet requirements of UL 514B.


Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by conduit
manufacturer.
Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish.
Cover shall be of same material as conduit body. PVC coated by conduit
manufacturer.
Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior.
Overlapping pressure-sealing sleeves.
Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated.
Manufacturers:
a.
Robroy Industries.
b.
Ocal.
Expansion Fitting:
a.
Manufacturer and Product: Ocal; OCAL-BLUE XJG

Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.

Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing


rated for 105 degrees C.
Insulated throat and sealing O-rings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

E.

Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

F.

3.
4.

Meet requirements of UL 514B.


Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring,
threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut.
Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout
strength and watertight seal.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Carlon; Type LT.
b.
O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q-P.
c.
Thomas & Betts; Series 6300.

Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

H.

Meet requirements of UL 514B.


Body: steel.
Throat: Nylon insulated.
1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body.
1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body.
Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400.

Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit:


1.
2.

G.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Thomas & Betts; Series 5331.
b.
O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q.

Approved for use in atmosphere involved.


Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2
areas.
Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner.
Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH or Type ECLK.
b.
Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK.

Watertight Entrance Seal Device:


1.

New Construction:
a.
Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring,
pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or
Type WSK, as required.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

2.03

OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES


A.

Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc-plated or cadmium-plated.

B.

Cast Metal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

C.

Box: Malleable iron or Cast ferrous metal.


Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, or cast ferrous metal,
with stainless steel screws.
Hubs: Threaded.
Lugs: Cast Mounting.
Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or Type FD.
b.
Appleton; Type FS or Type FD.
c.
Killark.
Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type GUA or Type EAJ.
b.
Appleton; Type GR.

PVC-Coated Cast Metal:


1.
2.
3.

4.

2.04

Cored-Hole Application:
a.
Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring,
and membrane clamp.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM.

Type: One-piece.
Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum.
Coating:
a.
Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC.
b.
Interior Surfaces: 2-mil urethane.
Manufacturers:
a.
Robroy Industries.
b.
Ocal.

JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES


A.

Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet
and Device Boxes.

B.

Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

D.

Large Stainless Steel Box:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

E.

NEMA 250 Type 4X.


Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel, with
white enamel painted interior mounting panel.
Cover: Hinged with clamps.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
b.
Robroy Industries.
c.
Wiegman.

Large Steel Box:


1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

F.

NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group
involved.
Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-galvanize finished or copper-free
aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances.
Cover: Hinged with screws.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB.
b.
Appleton; Type AJBEW.

NEMA 250 Type 12.


Box: 14-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed
exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish as approved by
Owner.
Cover: Hinged with clamps.
Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
b.
Robroy Industries.
c.
Wiegman.

Concrete Box, Nontraffic Areas:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension.


Cover: Steel diamond plate with locking bolts.
Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.
Size: 10 inches by 17 inches, minimum.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

G.

Concrete Box, Traffic Areas:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.05

Provide outlet boxes and cover plates meeting requirements of TIA 569B.

TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX


A.

Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown.

B.

Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer.

C.

Terminal Blocks:
1.
2.

2.07

Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension and bottom slab.


Cover: Steel checked plate; H/20 loading with screw down.
Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; B1017BOX.
b.
Utility Vault Co.; 3030 SB.

TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET


A.

2.06

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Utility Vault Co.; Series 36-1017.
b.
Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; N9.
c.
Quazite; PG Style.

Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box.


Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum.

METAL WIREWAYS
A.

Meet requirements of UL 870.

B.

Type: Steel-enclosed, lay-in type.

C.

Cover: Removable, screw type.

D.

Rating: Indoor.

E.

Finish: Rust inhibiting phosphatizing primer and gray baked enamel.

F.

Hardware: Plated to prevent corrosion; screws installed toward the inside


protected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation
damage.

G.

Knockouts: Without knockouts, unless otherwise indicated.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

H.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.08

Circle AW.
Hoffman.
Square D.

CABLE TRAYS
A.

Meet requirements of NEMA VE 1.

B.

Type: See Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings.

C.

Material: Copper-free aluminum alloy 6063-T6 finish.

D.

Dimensions: See cable tray schedule in Drawings.

E.

Barrier Strip: Vertical, solid type, with horizontal fittings and strip clamps.
Barrier strip to be installed in power and control cable tray.

F.

Fittings of same material as cross-sectional tray area and hardware of same


material as cable tray.

G.

Tray Grounding: Conform to NFPA 70 and NEMA VE 1.

H.

Provide next higher NEMA VE 1 class designation than required for support
of designed span length.

I.

Design Loads: Use working load adequate for actual cable installed plus
100 percent additional weight allowance for future cables plus 200-pound
concentrated static load applied between side rails at midspan, with safety
factor of 1.5 in accordance with NEMA VE 1, Table 3-1.

J.

Expansion Joints: NEMA VE 1 for 50 degrees F maximum temperature


variation.

K.

Furnish cable tray with no sharp edges, burrs, or weld projections.

L.

Warning Signs: 1-1/2-inch high black lettering on yellow background with


legend, WARNING, NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR
SUPPORT FOR LADDERS OR PERSONNEL.

M.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B-Line Systems, Inc.


Square-D.
P. W. Industries.
T. J. Cope, Inc.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.09

PRECAST MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES


A.

Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days.

B.

Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857.

C.

Access: Provide cast concrete 6-inch or 12-inch risers and access hole
adapters between top of manhole and finished grade at required elevations.

D.

Drainage:
1.
2.

E.

Raceway Entrances:
1.
2.
3.

F.

Provide on all four sides.


Provide knockout panels or precast individual raceway openings.
At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide
minimum 12-inch-high by 24-inch-wide knockout panels for future
raceway installation.

Embedded Pulling Iron:


1.
2.

G.

Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other


nondraining areas.
Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a
heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum
4-inch outlet and outlet pipe. Provide no drainage outlet.

Material: 3/4-inch-diameter stock, fastened to overall steel


reinforcement before concrete is placed.
Location:
a.
Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for
future raceway entrance.
b.
Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover.

Cable Racks:
1.
2.

Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate


cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares.
Wall Attachment:
a.
Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not
permitted.
b.
Insert Spacing: Maximum 3 feet on center for inside perimeter of
manhole.
c.
Arrange in order that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable
installation.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

H.

Manhole Frames and Covers:


1.
2.
3.
4.

I.

Handhole Frames and Covers:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized.


Cover Type:
a.
Solid: hinged, torsion spring, of diamond design.
Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.
Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters,
minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles:
a.
600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV.

J.

Hardware: Steel, hot-dip galvanized.

K.

Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole and manhole.

L.

Size: See Handhole/Manhole schedule on Drawings.

M.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.10

Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized.


Cover Type: Cover Type:
a.
Solid: hinged, torsion spring, of diamond design.
Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20.
Cover Designation: Cast, on upper side, in integral letters, minimum
2 inches in height, appropriate titles:
a.
Above 600 Volts: ELECTRIC HV.

Utility Vault Co.


Penn-Cast Products, Inc.
Concrete Conduit Co.
Associated Concrete Products, Inc.
Pipe, Inc.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Duct Bank Spacers:


1.

Modular Type:
a.
Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes.
b.
Suitable for all types of conduit.
c.
Manufacturers:
1)
Underground Device, Inc.
2)
Carlon.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

B.

Template Type:
a.
Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers.
b.
Suitable for all types of conduit.
c.
Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2-inch minimum thickness.
d.
Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter.
e.
Additional openings for stake-down, rebar, and concrete flow
through as required.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct.

Identification Devices:
1.

2.

Raceway Tags:
a.
Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal.
b.
Shape: Round.
c.
Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved.
d.
Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted.
Warning Tape:
a.
Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip.
b.
Color: Red.
c.
Width: Minimum 3 inches.
d.
Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below
tape.
e.
Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch-high permanent black
lettering imprinted continuously over entire length.
f.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Panduit; Type HTDU.
2)
Reef Industries; Terra Tape.

C.

Raceway Coating: Clean and paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00,


Painting and Coating.

D.

Heat Shrinkable Tubing:


1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin.


Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner.
Color: Black.
Manufacturers:
a.
Raychem.
b.
3M.

Wraparound Duct Band:


1.
2.
3.

Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hotmelt adhesive.


Width: 50 mm minimum.
Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors.
Reference Section 26 05 05, Conductors, concerning conduit sizing for
aluminum conductors.

B.

Comply with NECA Installation Standards.

C.

Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted.

D.

Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture.

E.

Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and
dust-tight seals until time for pulling in conductors.

F.

Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate


may collect above sealing fitting.

G.

Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit


runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point.

H.

Group raceways installed in same area.

I.

Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from


parallel runs.

J.

Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid


obstruction of passageways.

K.

Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members,


or intersections of vertical planes.

L.

Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell
with reinforcing steel.

M.

Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations.

N.

Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit,
PVC-coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp
locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound.

O.

Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation
of conductors, wires, or cables.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

P.

Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams


without Engineer approval.

Q.

Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under
slab, with no part embedded within slab.

R.

Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right
angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed.

S.

Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data
cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B.

REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS


A.

Where Drawings indicate existing conduits may be reused, they may be


reused only where they meet the following criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

3.03

Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or


damage to exterior surface.
Conduit is sized per the NEC.
Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents.
Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents.

Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately
1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling
new conductors.

INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE


A.

Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings.

B.

Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or


configuration.

C.

Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways


remain in position.

D.

Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls,
foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer.

E.

Slabs and Walls (Requires Engineer Approval):


1.
2.
3.

Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of slab or wall thickness.


Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall.
Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum ten times
conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.
7.
F.

Columns and Beams (Requires Engineer Approval):


1.
2.

3.04

Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times
conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise shown.
Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum
separation of 1 inch.
Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of
expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints.
Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface
elevation in walls of water holding structures.

Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness.


Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column
cross section.

CONDUIT APPLICATION
A.

Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch.

B.

Exterior, Exposed:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Interior, Exposed:
1.
2.
3.

D.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete):


1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC Schedule 40.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors:


1.
2.
3.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC Schedule 40.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Direct Earth Burial:


1.
2.
3.
4.

G.

Concrete-Encased Ductbank:
1.
2.

H.

PVC Schedule 40.


PVC tubing (Type EB), reinforced concrete ductbank only.

Under Slabs-On-Grade:
1.
2.
3.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

I.

Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: PVC-coated


rigid steel conduit.

J.

Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel, Intermediate metal,


or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

K.

Exterior Light Pole Foundations: PVC-coated rigid steel, or PVC Schedule 40


conduit.

L.

Corrosive Areas: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

M.

Hazardous Gas Areas:


1.
2.
3.

3.05

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC Schedule 40.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

Rigid galvanized steel.


Intermediate metal.
PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A.

For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type
transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations
approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize
vibration:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible metal liquid-tight conduit.


Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible.
Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible metal liquid-tight.
Areas nearby Ferrous Chloride Feed system: Flexible nonmetallic
liquid-tight conduit.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.
6.

3.06

Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic nonliquid-tight.


Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class I, Division 1
and 2 areas.

B.

Suspended Lighting Fixtures in Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight


conduit.

C.

Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be


Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit.

D.

Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient


to allow movement or adjustment of equipment.

PENETRATIONS
A.

Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown.

B.

Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams,


not permitted.

C.

Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations


to maintain fire-resistance rating using fire penetration seal as specified in
Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

D.

Apply heat shrinkable tubing to metallic conduit protruding through concrete


floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface.

E.

Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout


dry-pack, or use watertight seal device.

F.

Entering Structures:
1.

2.

General: Seal raceway at first box or outlet with oakum or expandable


plastic compound to prevent entrance of gases or liquids from one area
to another.
Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor:
a.
Provide a watertight seal.
b.
Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal
device on each side.
c.
With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device
on accessible side.
d.
Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal
device into construction with one or more integral flanges.
e.
Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal
device in a permanent, watertight manner.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.

6.

3.07

Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment:


a.
Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer.
b.
Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or
condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to
penetrating equipment.
c.
Seal penetration with Type 5 sealant, as specified in
Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.
Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install
watertight entrance seal device.
Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete
Encasement):
a.
Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight
entrance seal device.
b.
Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic
compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side.
Manholes and Handholes:
a.
Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings.
b.
Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall.
c.
Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of
wall, unless otherwise shown.

SUPPORT
A.

Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70


requirements. Do not exceed 10 feet in any application. Do not support from
piping, pipe supports, or other raceways.

B.

Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported


conduit, allow 20 percent extra space for future conduit.

C.

Application/Type of Conduit Strap:


1.
2.
3.

D.

Rigid Steel or EMT Conduit: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or


malleable iron.
PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC-coated metal.
Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC-coated metal.

Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Wood: Wood screws.


Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by
powder charge, with lock washers and nuts.
Steelwork: Machine screws.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

3.08

Location/Type of Hardware:
a.
Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized.
b.
Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel.
c.
Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

E.

Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway


not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not
use wire in lieu of straps or hangers.

F.

Support aluminum conduit on concrete surfaces with stainless steel or


nonmetallic spacers, or aluminum or nonmetallic framing channel.

BENDS
A.

Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical


distance.

B.

Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and
ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable
diameter, 15 inches minimum.

C.

Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings.

D.

Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with
acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to
facilitate bending.

E.

Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with
same radius so that bends are parallel.

F.

Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is


change in plane of run, and raceways are same size.

G.

PVC Conduit:
1.
2.
3.

H.

Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows.


90-Degree Bends: Provide rigid steel elbows, PVC-coated where direct
buried.
Use manufacturers recommended method for forming smaller bends.

Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor


bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit
flexibility.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.09

3.10

EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS
A.

Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs.

B.

Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature


variation.

C.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

PVC CONDUIT
A.

Solvent Welding:
1.
2.

B.

Adapters:
1.
2.

C.
3.11

3.12

Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints.


Install in order that joint is watertight.

PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type.


PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter.

Belled-End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining.

PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL


A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B.

Tools and equipment used in cutting, bending, threading and installation of


PVC-coated rigid conduit shall be designed to limit damage to PVC coating.

C.

Provide PVC boot to cover exposed threading.

WIREWAYS
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B.

Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise


shown.

C.

Applications:
1.
2.

Metal wireway in indoor dry locations.


Nonmetallic wireway in indoor wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 23

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.13

3.14

CABLE TRAYS
A.

Install in accordance with NEMA VE 1, section Application Information.

B.

Install accessories as necessary for complete system.

C.

Install in order that joints are not made at support brackets.

D.

Install horizontal section support brackets between support point and quarter
point of tray span.

E.

Provide ceiling trapeze for horizontal cable tray.

F.

Install support within 2 feet on each side of expansion joints and within 2 feet
of fitting extremity.

G.

Provide expansion joints in accordance with NEMA VE 1 for 50 degrees F


maximum temperature variation.

H.

Install horizontal tray level, plumb, straight, and true to line or grade within a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and within a cumulative maximum of 1/2 inch.

I.

Install vertical tray plumb within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

J.

Install without exposed raw edges.

K.

Maintain 12-inch vertical separation between multi-tiered trays having a


common support, and at crossover locations.

L.

Provide bonding jumper at each expansion joint and adjustable connection.

M.

Ground Conductor: Provide properly sized clamps for each section, elbow,
tee, cross, and reducer.

TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES
A.

Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturers premolded insulating sleeve


inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs.

B.

Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Terminate conduit in threaded conduit


hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity.

C.

Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures:


1.

General:
a.
Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is
not required.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 24

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

2.

3.
4.
5.
D.

Motor Control Center, and Free-Standing Enclosures:


1.

2.
3.15

Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal


boxes having threaded hubs.
c.
Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of
NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures.
d.
Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and
NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures.
e.
Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and
NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures.
Rigid Galvanized, or Intermediate Conduit:
a.
Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure.
b.
Install grounding bushing at source enclosure.
c.
Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment
ground bus or ground pad.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable
iron connectors.
Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain
relief connectors.
PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC-coated,
liquid-tight, metallic connector.

Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing;


provide grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or
grounding pad.
Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings.

UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
A.

Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one
manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between
them, depending on surface contour.

B.

Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete


encasement, unless otherwise shown.

C.

Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

D.

Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are


not in same transverse line.

E.

Union type fittings not permitted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 25

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Spacers:
1.

2.
G.

Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling


or concrete placement.

H.

Transition from Underground to Exposed: Rigid galvanized


steel, Intermediate metal, or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

I.

Installation with Other Piping Systems:


1.
2.
3.

Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation.


Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation.
Installation over valves or couplings not permitted.

J.

Metallic Raceway Coating: Along entire length, clean and paint in accordance
with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. When metallic raceways are
incased in concrete or are buried apply wraparound duct band with one-half
tape width overlap to obtain two complete layers or apply heat shrinkable
tubing.

K.

Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in


vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be
fastened to or will enter building or structure.

L.

Provide expansion/deflection fittings in conduit runs that exit building or


structure belowgrade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be PVCcoated rigid steel.

M.

Concrete Encasement:
1.
2.

N.
3.16

Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for such purpose, to


secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete
encasement.
Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support
of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet.

As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.


Concrete Color: Red.

Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

UNDER SLAB RACEWAYS


A.

Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts.

B.

Support raceways so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling


or concrete placement.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 26

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference
with slab on grade construction.

D.

Raceway spacing, in a single layer or multiple layers:


1.
2.

E.

Multiple Layers of Raceways: Install under slab on grade in trench below


backfill zone, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

F.

Individual Raceways and Single Layer Multiple Raceways: Install at lowest


elevation of backfill zone with spacing as specified herein. Where conduits
cross at perpendicular orientation, installation of conduits shall not interfere
with placement of under slab fill that meets compaction and void limitations
of earthwork Specifications.

G.

Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed,
shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate
raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar.

H.

Fittings:
1.
2.

3.
3.17

3 inches clear between adjacent 2-inch or larger raceway.


2 inches clear between adjacent 1-1/2-inch or smaller raceway.

Union type fittings are not permitted.


Provide expansion/deflection fittings in raceway runs that exit building
or structure below slab. Locate fittings 18 inches, maximum, beyond
exterior wall. Raceway type between building exterior wall to fitting
shall be PVC-coated rigid steel.
Couplings: In multiple raceway runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent
runs are not in same traverse line.

OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

Install plumb and level.


Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in
wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required;
seal unused openings.
Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas.

Size:
1.

Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural


conditions. Box extensions not permitted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 27

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

a.
2.
3.
C.

Locations:
1.
2.
3.

D.

Drawing locations are approximate.


To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features,
relocate outlets as directed by Engineer.
Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout,
unless otherwise shown.

Mounting Height:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
E.

Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such


that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space.
Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise
required for installed fixture.
Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box.

General:
a.
Dimensions given to centerline of box.
b.
Where specified heights do not suit building construction or
finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference.
c.
Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints.
Light Switch:
a.
48 inches above floor.
b.
When located next to door, install on lock side of door.
Thermostat: 54 inches above floor.
Telephone Outlet:
a.
15 inches above floor.
b.
6 inches above counter tops.
c.
Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor.
Convenience Receptacle:
a.
General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor.
b.
General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom
or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter
tops without backsplash.
c.
Industrial Areas: 48 inches above floor.
d.
Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade.
Special-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown.
Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.

Flush Mounted:
1.
2.

Install with concealed conduit.


Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of
boxes flush with finished surface.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 28

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
F.

Supports:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

3.18

Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive


box.

Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building


structure or structural member.
Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as
follows:
a.
Wood: Wood screws.
b.
Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.
c.
Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
d.
Steelwork: Machine screws.
Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
Provide plaster rings where necessary.
Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally
supported.

G.

Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where
required by fixture terminal temperature.

H.

Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate


strength to support fixture.

JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Install plumb and level.


Installed boxes shall be accessible.
Do not install on finished surfaces.
Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and
allowed by applicable codes.
Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are
required and allowed by applicable codes.
Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate
conductor installation.
Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or
redirect multiple conduit runs.
Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of
three right-angle bends.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 29

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Mounting Hardware:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Supports:
1.
2.

3.
4.
D.

2.
3.
4.

3.19

Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building


structure or structural member.
Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as
follows:
a.
Wood: Wood screws.
b.
Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields.
c.
Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
d.
Steelwork: Machine screws.
Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock
washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields.
Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally
supported.

At or Below Grade:
1.

E.

Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized.


Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel.
Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel.

Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in
locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways.
If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure
surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location.
Obtain Owners written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas,
roadways, or walkways.
Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights.

Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.

MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES


A.

Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade in accordance with


Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

B.

Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined.

C.

Install such that raceway enters at nearly right angle and as near as possible to
end of wall, unless otherwise shown.

D.

Grounding: As specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for


Electrical Systems.

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 30

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.
3.20

3.21

Identification: Field stamp covers with manhole or handhole number as


shown. Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height.

EMPTY RACEWAYS
A.

Provide permanent, removable cap over each end.

B.

Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells.

C.

Provide nylon pull cord.

D.

Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags


attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point.

IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.

Raceway Tags:
1.
2.

3.
4.
B.

3.22

Identify raceways in accordance with: Raceway Schedule designation.


For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and
at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or
surface mounted.
Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways.
Provide noncorrosive wire for attachment.

Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or


concrete-encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of,
centerline of run.

PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK


A.

Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage


during construction.

B.

Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over


conduit openings during construction.

C.

Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars.

D.

Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound


approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to
manufacturers instructions until time of use.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RACEWAY AND BOXES


26 05 33 - 31

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
D877, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of
Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
b.
D923, Standard Practice for Sampling Electrical Insulating
Liquids.
c.
D924, Standard Test Method for Dissipation Factor (or Power
Factor) and Relative Permittivity (Dielectric Constant) of
Electrical Insulating Liquids.
d.
D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil
Against Water by the Ring Method.
e.
D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by ColorIndicator Titration.
f.
D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density
(Specific Gravity), or API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid
Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method.
g.
D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum
Products (ASTM Color Scale).
h.
D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used
Electrical Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field.
i.
D1533, Standard Test Method for Water in Insulating Liquids by
Coulometric Karl Fischer Titration.
j.
D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage
of Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a.
43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of
Rotating Machinery.
b.
48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for AlternatingCurrent Cable Terminators Used on Shielded Cables Having
Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded
Insulation Rated 2.5kV through 500kV.
c.
81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,
and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.
d.
95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric
Machinery (2300V and Above) with High Direct Voltage.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for


Power Distribution Systems Above 600V.
f.
400, Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of
Shielded Power Cable Systems.
g.
450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and
Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary
Applications.
h.
C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
i.
C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breaker Switchgear.
j.
C37.20.2, Standard for Metal-Clad Switchgear.
k.
C37.20.3, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.
l.
C37.23, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Bus.
m. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor
Surge-Protective Devices.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
a.
S-93-639, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cables for Use in the
Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy.
b.
S-94-649, Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 through 46 kV.
c.
S-97-682, Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated
5 through 46 kV.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial
Applications.
b.
PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
c.
WC 74, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the
Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy.
InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance
Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b.
70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment
Maintenance.
c.
70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
d.
101, Life Safety Code.
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
(NICET).
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29,
Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Testing Firm Qualifications:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

1.04

Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests:


a.
Schedule for performing inspection and tests.
b.
Sample copy of equipment inspection form(s).
c.
Sample copy of individual device test form.
Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item
tested within 30 days after completion of test:
Operation and Maintenance Data:
a.
In accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance
Data.
b.
After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed
by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.

Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an


unbiased testing authority.
Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of
electrical equipment and systems being tested.
Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and
inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems.
Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive Project
report outlining services performed, results of such services,
recommendations, actions taken, and opinions.
In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation
of testing laboratories.

B.

Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than


requirements established by NETA ATS.

C.

Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been
installed.

B.

Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:


1.
2.

D.

Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization.


Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating
plant equipment.

Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized


electrical equipment.

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

GENERAL
A.

Perform tests in accordance with requirements of Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

B.

Tests and inspections shall establish:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturers


tolerances and standards.
Installation operates properly.
Equipment is suitable for energization.
Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and
NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2.

C.

Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry


standards, and manufacturers recommendations.

D.

Set, test, and calibrate, circuit breakers, power monitoring meters, and other
applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit,
coordination, and harmonics studies as specified in Section 26 05 70,
Electrical Systems Analysis.

E.

Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical


movement.

F.

Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond


to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer.

G.

Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved


Submittals.

H.

Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

I.

Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored.

J.

Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with


calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturers recommendations, or
as otherwise specified in NETA ATS.

K.

Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by


manufacturer.

L.

Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts.

M.

Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70.

N.

Investigate and repair or replace:


1.
2.
3.

O.

Electrical Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

P.

Electrical items that fail tests.


Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
Damaged electrical equipment.

Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior.


Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior.
Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces.
Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer door and panel sections
having dented surfaces.
Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and
panel sections.
Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking
devices.
Replace missing or damaged hardware.
Finish:
a.
Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars.
b.
If required due to extensive damage, as determined by Engineer,
refinish entire assembly.

Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type
required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

CHECKOUT AND STARTUP


A.

Voltage Field Test:


1.

2.
3.
B.

Equipment Line Current Tests:


1.
2.
3.

3.03

Check voltage at service disconnects at Thickening Building and RAS


pump station when installation is essentially complete and is in
operation.
Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and
unloaded conditions.
Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on same graph)
for 24 hours during normal working day.

Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment.


Make line current check after power company has made final
adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance.
If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate
current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies
cause of problem and corrective action taken.

PANELBOARDS
A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and


related work:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
B.

Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate


compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard
schedules.
Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and
other operable devices in accordance with manufacturers instruction
manual.
Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of
components.
Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque
wrench. Refer to manufacturers instructions for proper torque values.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective
devices.

Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with


manufacturers instruction:
1.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.1.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.04

Each phase of each bus section.


Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
With breakers open.
With breakers closed.
Control wiring except that connected to solid state components.
Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values
established by manufacturer.
Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground.

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

B.

Physical and insulator damage.


Proper winding connections.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless
otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Defective wiring.
Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
Free and properly installed resilient mounts.
Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages.
Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under
normal operating conditions.
Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
after energization and prior to loading.

Electrical Tests:
1.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.5 for each:
1)
Winding-to-winding.
2)
Winding-to-ground.
b.
Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at
30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.
c.
Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.14.
d.
Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or
greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.
e.
Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of
adjacent windings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

LIQUID FILLED TRANSFORMERS


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

B.

Electrical Tests:
1.

3.06

Physical and insulator damage.


Proper winding connections.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless
otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Defective wiring.
Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices.
Effective core and equipment grounding.
Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing.
Tank leaks and proper liquid level.
Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.
Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated voltage under normal
operating conditions.
Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
after energization and prior to loading.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.5 for each:
1)
Winding-to-winding.
2)
Winding-to-ground.
b.
Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at
30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes.
c.
Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.14.
d.
Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or
greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer.
e.
Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of
adjacent windings.

LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.

Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 1/0 and larger for:
a.
Physical damage.
b.
Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram.
c.
Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturers minimum
allowable bending radius where applicable.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

5.
B.

Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 4/0 and Larger:


1.

2.
C.
3.07

d.
Color coding conformance with specification.
e.
Proper circuit identification.
Mechanical Connections For:
a.
Proper lug type for conductor material.
b.
Proper lug installation.
c.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12,
unless otherwise specified by manufacturer.
Shielded Instrumentation Cables For:
a.
Proper shield grounding.
b.
Proper terminations.
c.
Proper circuit identification.
Control Cables For:
a.
Proper termination.
b.
Proper circuit identification.
Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and
grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated
conductors
b.
Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent
conductors for 1 minute.
c.
Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same
length and type.
d.
Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections.

Low-voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent


testing firm.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES, 35 KV MAXIMUM


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.

Inspect each individual exposed cable for:


a.
Physical damage plus jacket and insulation condition.
b.
Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram or
approved Submittals.
c.
Proper shield grounding.
d.
Proper cable support.
e.
Proper cable termination.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f.

2.

3.
B.

Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturers minimum


allowable bending radius.
g.
Proper arc and fireproofing in common cable areas.
h.
Proper circuit and phase identification.
Mechanical Connections:
a.
Proper lug type for conductor material.
b.
Proper lug installation.
c.
Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12,
unless otherwise specified by manufacturers.
Conductors Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals
and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.

3.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Utilize 5,000-volt megohmmeter for 35 kV conductors.
b.
Test each cable individually with remaining cables and shields
grounded.
c.
Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent
conductors for 1 minute.
d.
Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same
length and type.
e.
Investigate values less than 50 megohms.
Shield Continuity Tests:
a.
By ohmmeter method on each section of conductor.
b.
Investigate values in excess of 10 ohms per 1,000 feet of
conductors.
Acceptance Tests:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 400, ICEA S-93-639, NEMA WC 74,
ICEA S-94-649, and ICEA S-97-682 for insulated conductors.
b.
Each conductor section tested with:
1)
Splices and terminations in place but disconnected from
equipment.
2)
Remaining conductors and shields grounded in accordance
with IEEE 400.
c.
Apply maximum test voltage per NETA ATS, Table 100.6, based
on method (DC, AC, PD or VLF) used.
d.
Measure only leakage current associated with conductor.
e.
Utilize guard ring or field reduction sphere to suppress corona at
disconnected terminations.
f.
Maximum test voltage shall not exceed limits for terminators
specified in IEEE 48, IEEE 386, or manufacturers specifications.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

g.

h.

i.
j.
3.08

SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

3.09

Apply test voltage in a minimum of five equal increments until


maximum acceptable test voltage is reached.
1)
Increments not to exceed ac voltage rating of conductor.
2)
Record dc leakage current at each step after a constant
stabilization time consistent with system charging current.
Raise conductor to specified maximum test voltage and hold for
15 minutes or as specified by conductor manufacturer. Record
leakage current at 30 seconds and 1 minute, and at 1-minute
intervals, thereafter.
Immediately following test, ground conductor for adequate time
period to drain insulation stored charge.
Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis.

Proper blade pressure and alignment.


Proper operation of switch operating handle.
Adequate mechanical support for each fuse.
Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse.
Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.12.
Proper phase barrier material and installation.
Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved
Submittals.
Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and
mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing.

MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A.

General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperes
and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 100 amperes and
larger.

B.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Proper mounting.
Proper conductor size.
Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram.
Cracked casings.
Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.12.
Operate breaker to verify smooth operation.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.
8.
C.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.

3.

3.10

Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or
one-line diagram.
Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated
conductors.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt
circuit breakers.
b.
Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for
1 minute.
c.
Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for
1 minute.
d.
Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
Contact Resistance Tests:
a.
Contact resistance in microhms across each pole.
b.
Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles
and similar breakers.
Primary Current Injection Test to Verify:
a.
Breaker adjustable settings shall be provided by Engineer.
b.
Long-time minimum pickup and delay.
c.
Short-time pickup and delay.
d.
Ground fault pickup and delay.
e.
Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method.
f.
Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within
manufacturers published time-current characteristic tolerance
band, including adjustment factors.
g.
Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4,
Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7.
h.
Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by
NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS,
Table 100.8.

METERING
A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams.


Verify meter multipliers.
Verify meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents.
Check calibration of meters at cardinal points.
Check calibration of electrical transducers.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.11

GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.

3.12

Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center, and panelboard


assemblies for proper connection and tightness.
Ground bus connections in motor control center, assemblies for proper
termination and tightness.
Effective transformer core and equipment grounding.
Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and
tightness.
Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds
were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained.

Fall-of-Potential Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of
main ground systems resistance.
b.
Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no
greater than 5 ohm(s).
Two-Point Direct Method Test:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of
ground resistance between main ground system, equipment
frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points.
b.
Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system
resistance by 0.50 ohm.

GROUND FAULT SYSTEMS


A.

Inspection and testing limited to:


1.
2.

B.

Zero sequence grounding systems.


Residual ground fault systems.

Visual and Manual Inspection:


1.

2.

Neutral main bonding connection to ensure:


a.
Zero sequence sensing system is grounded ahead of neutral
disconnect link.
b.
Ground strap sensing system is grounded through sensing device.
c.
Neutral ground conductor is solidly grounded.
Verify control power has adequate capacity for system.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.
6.
C.

Electrical Tests:
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
3.13

Manually operate monitor panels for:


a.
Trip test.
b.
No trip test.
c.
Nonautomatic rest.
Zero sequence system for symmetrical alignment of core balance
transformers about current carrying conductors.
Relay check for pickup and time under simulated ground fault
conditions.
Verify nameplate identification by device operation.

Test system neutral insulation resistance with neutral ground link


removed; minimum 1 megohm.
Determine relay pickup by primary current injection at the sensor. Relay
pickup current within plus or minus 10 percent of device dial or fixed
setting.
Test relay timing by injecting 300 percent of pick-up current or as
specified by manufacturer. Relay operating time in accordance with
manufacturers time-current characteristic curves.
Test system operation at 55 percent rated control voltage, if applicable.
Test zone interlock system by simultaneous sensor current injection and
monitoring zone blocking functions.

AC INDUCTION MOTORS
A.

General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 10 horsepower and


larger.

B.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Proper electrical and grounding connections.


Shaft alignment.
Blockage of ventilating air passageways.
Operate motor and check for:
a.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b.
Overheating.
c.
Correct rotation.
d.
Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or
motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation.
e.
Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS,
Table 100.10.
Check operation of space heaters.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.
3.
3.14

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
All motors greater than 10hp shall be tested.
b.
In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by
NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for:
1)
Motors above 200 horsepower for 10-minute duration with
resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and
10 minutes.
2)
Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with
resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds.
c.
Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values
established by manufacturers.
Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load
conditions and nameplate full-load amperes.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

9.
10.

Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation.


Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices.
Proper overload protection for each motor.
Improper blockage of air-cooling passages.
Proper operation of drawout elements.
Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system.
Check door and device interlocking system by:
a.
Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position.
b.
Opening attempt of door when device is in ON position.
Check key interlocking systems for:
a.
Key captivity when device is in ON position.
b.
Key removal when device is in OFF position.
c.
Closure attempt of device when key has been removed.
d.
Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock
cylinders.
e.
Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders;
destroy duplicate sets of keys.
Check nameplates for proper identification of:
a.
Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram.
Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract
Documents.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11.
12.
13.

14.
15.

16.
17.

18.
19.
B.

Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract


Documents.
Check bus connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohmmeter:
Ohmic value to be zero.
Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock
systems by:
a.
Closure attempt for locked open devices.
b.
Opening attempt for locked closed devices.
c.
Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions.
Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part
of motor control center.
Control Wiring:
a.
Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective
devices with elementary diagrams.
b.
Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling.
c.
Check for proper conductor identification.
d.
Check for proper conductor lugs and connections.
Exercise active components.
Inspect contactors for:
a.
Correct mechanical operations.
b.
Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure.
c.
Correct torque of connections.
Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size.
Compare motor protector with motor characteristics for proper size.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.1.
b.
Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on
each phase.
c.
Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute
on each phase.
d.
Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase
with starter contacts closed and protective devices open.
e.
Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1.
Current Injection through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor FullLoad Current and Monitor Trip Time:
a.
Trip time in accordance with manufacturers published data.
b.
Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
3.15

Control Wiring Tests:


a.
Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits.
b.
Check voltage levels at each point on terminal board and each
device terminal.
c.
Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts dc on control wiring,
except that connected to solid state components; 1 megohm
minimum insulation resistance.
Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
B.

Check doors and panels for proper interlocking.


Check connections for high resistance by low-resistance ohmmeter.
Check positive mechanical and electrical interlock between normal and
alternate sources.
Check for proper operation:
a.
Manual transfer function switch.
b.
Generator under load and nonload conditions.
c.
Auto-exerciser of generator under load and no-load conditions.
Verify settings and operation of control devices.

Electrical Tests:
1.

2.

3.

Insulation Resistance Tests:


a.
Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS,
Table 100.1, for each phase with switch CLOSED in both source
positions.
b.
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute.
c.
Test values in accordance with manufacturers published data.
Contact Resistance Test:
a.
Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade for both
source positions.
b.
Investigate values exceeding 500 micro-ohms.
c.
Investigate values deviating from adjacent pole by more than
50 percent.
Set and calibrate in accordance with Specifications, manufacturers
recommendations, and information provided by Engineer.
a.
Voltage and frequency sensing relays.
b.
Time delay relays.
c.
Engine start and shutdown relays.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

3.16

LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.

B.

Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures.


Ground connections to ground bus.

Electrical Tests:
1.

3.17

Perform automatic transfer tests by:


a.
Simulating loss of normal power.
b.
Return to normal power.
c.
Simulating loss of alternate power.
d.
Simulating single-phase conditions for normal and alternate
sources.
Monitor and verify operation and timing of:
a.
Normal and alternate voltage sensing relays.
b.
Engine-start sequence.
c.
Timing delay upon transfer and retransfer.
d.
Engine cool down and shutdown.
e.
Interlocks and limit switch functions.
f.
Engine cool down and shutdown feature.

Varistor Type Arrestors:


a.
Clamping voltage test.
b.
Rated RMS voltage test.
c.
Rated dc voltage test.
d.
Varistor arrestor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33,
Section 4.4 and Section 4.9.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS AND SURGE CAPACITORS


A.

Visual Inspection:
1.
2.

B.

Ground connections to ground electrode.


Shortest practical jumper connections to line.

Electrical Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Grounding electrode resistance test in accordance with IEEE 81,


Section 8.2.1.5 using three-point fall-of-potential method.
Insulation power factor.
Insulation resistance.
RF noise test using Stoddart noise test set with applied voltage of
1.18 times maximum continuous operating voltage.

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

6.
3.18

Insulation power factor leakage current, watts loss, and insulation


resistance test in accordance with manufacturers test values. RIV value
not to exceed 10 microvolts above background noise.
Leakage current and watts loss tests.

STANDBY GENERATOR SYSTEMS


A.

Visual and Mechanical Inspection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.

11.
12.
13.

B.

Proper grounding.
Blockage of ventilating passageways.
Proper operation of jack water heaters.
Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
Overheating of engine or generator.
Proper installation of vibration isolators.
Proper cooling liquid type and level.
Operate engine-generator and check for:
a.
Excessive mechanical and electrical noise.
b.
Overheating.
c.
Correct rotation.
d.
Check resistance temperature detectors or generator inherent
thermal protectors for functionability and proper operation.
e.
Excessive vibration.
Verify voltage regulator and governor operation will cause unit speed
and output voltage to stabilize at proper values within reasonable length
of time.
Proper operation of meters and instruments.
Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line
diagram or approved Submittal.
Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives, and
active harmonic conditioners energized and operating under normal load
conditions.

Electrical and Mechanical Tests:


1.

2.

Cold start test by interrupting normal power source with test load
consisting of connected building load to verify:
a.
Transfer switch operation.
b.
Automatic starting operation.
c.
Operating ability of engine-generator.
d.
Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents.
Phase rotation tests.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.

6.

Test engine protective shutdown features for:


a.
Low oil pressure.
b.
Overtemperature.
c.
Overspeed.
Vibration baseline test on generator sets rated above 300 kW; levels in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Load bank test with reactors and resistors adjusted to 80 percent power
factor for each load step. Record voltage, frequency, load current, oil
pressure, and engine coolant temperature at 15-minute intervals:
a.
25 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
b.
50 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
c.
75 percent applied load for 30 minutes.
d.
100 percent applied load for 3 hours.
e.
Load test results to demonstrate ability of unit to deliver rated load
for test period.
One-Step Rated kW Load Pickup Test:
a.
Perform test immediately after performing load bank test.
b.
Apply rated load to generator.
c.
Compare voltage drop with maximum allowable voltage dip for
specified starting situation.
END OF SECTION

COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 00 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 12 02
OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
1.02

ASTM International (ASTM): D3487, Standard Specification for


Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
386, Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for
Power Distribution Systems Above 600V.
b.
C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.
c.
C57.12.22, Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,
Three-Phase Distribution Transformers with High-Voltage
Bushings, 2,500 kVA and Smaller.
d.
C57.12.26, Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,
Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use with Separable
Insulated High Voltage Connectors.
e.
C57.12.28, Switchgear and TransformersPad-Mounted
Equipment, Enclosure Integrity.
f.
C57.12.90, Standard Test Code for Liquid Immersed Distribution,
Power, and Regulating Transformers.
g.
C57.106, Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Insulating Oil
in Equipment.
h.
C62.11, Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for Alternating-Current
Power Circuits (>1 kV).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
TR 1, Transformers, Regulators, Reactors.
b.
TP 1, Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
Transformers.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.

Descriptive information.
Dimensional Drawings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

1.03

Design, test, and assemble in accordance with applicable standards of


NEMA TR 1, IEEE C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.22, IEEE C57.12.26, and
IEEE C57.12.90.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage and deliver prior to Project
completion the following spare parts, and materials.
1.
2.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,


Operation and Maintenance Data.
Factory test reports.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.04

Transformer nameplate data.


Schematic and connection diagrams.

One quart of paint to match color and quality of equipment final shop
finish.
Two spare fuse links for each replaceable fuse size.

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Cutler-Hammer.

B.

ABB.

C.

General Electric.

D.

Cooper Power System.

GENERAL
A.

Integral Unit: Compartmental type unit consisting of transformer, oil-filled


tank, and high and low voltage terminating compartments, assembled on a
common structural base.

B.

Anchor Bolts: Galvanized, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified


in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

TRANSFORMER
A.

kVA Rating: As shown.

B.

Primary Voltage: 34.5 kV line-to-line, volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60-Hz,


grounded-wye.

C.

Secondary Voltage: 480/277volts, three-phase, four-wire, 60 Hz, groundedwye.

D.

BIL Rating:
1.
2.

E.

Temperature Rise: 65 degrees C above 30 degrees average ambient with


maximum ambient not to exceed 40 degrees C.

F.

Impedance: 5.75 percent for transformers rated 750 kVA and above.

G.

Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Table 4-1 of NEMA TP 1.

H.

Dielectric Coolant: Fully biodegradable, nontoxic, and nonbio-accumulating


fluid, qualifying as less flammable per NEC 450.23; Factory Mutual
Approved or UL Classified.

I.

Primary Taps:
1.
2.
3.

2.04

150 BIL kV insulation class transformers.


30 BIL for secondary.

Full capacity, two 2-1/2 percent below and two 2-1/2 percent above,
rated voltage.
Externally operated no-load tap changer.
Provisions for locking handle in any position.

J.

Coil Conductors: Aluminum windings.

K.

Wye-wye transformers wound on five-legged cores.

L.

Sound Level: In accordance with manufacturers standards.

ENCLOSURE
A.

In accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 requirements.

B.

Welded carbon steel transformer tank, with cooling panels when required, and
lifting eyes.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

C.

12-gauge sheet steel terminal compartment enclosure having no exposed


screws, bolts, or other fasteners that are externally removable.

D.

Color: Provide Munsell green finish as approved by Owner.

TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS
A.

General: IEEE C57.12.28, enclosed high and low voltage compartments side
by side, separated by steel barrier, bolted to transformer tank.
1.

B.

High Voltage Compartment:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

C.

Doors:
a.
Individual, full-height, air-filled.
b.
Low voltage door with three-point latching mechanism, vault type
handle, and single padlocking provision.
c.
High voltage door fastenings inaccessible until low voltage door
has been opened.
d.
Door Bolts: Hex-head type.
e.
Lift-off, stainless steel hinges and door stops.
f.
Removable front sill to facilitate rolling or skidding over conduit
stubs.
g.
Recessed lock pocket, with steel door release bolt adjacent to
secondary compartment door handle.

Deadfront in accordance with IEEE C57.12.26 type construction.


Protective fuses.
High voltage bushings.
Transformer grounding pad.
Surge arrestors with barriers.
Loop feed, four position sectionalizing load-break switch.

Low Voltage Compartment:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Livefront in accordance with IEEE C57.12.26 type construction.


Low voltage bushings
Grounding pad.
Stainless steel equipment nameplate.
Liquid level gauge.
1-inch upper filter press and filling plug.
Drain valve with sampling device.
Dial type thermometer.
Pressure relief valve.
Pressure relief device, self-resealing with indicator.

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11.
12.
2.06

BUSHINGS
A.

High Voltage:
1.

B.

2.
3.

2.08

Deadfront Termination:
a.
Provide 6 height voltage bushings in accordance with IEEE 386.
b.
Bushings externally clamped and front removable.
c.
Rated for 200 amperes continuous, 150 kV BIL.
d.
Standoff brackets located adjacent to bushings.

Low Voltage:
1.

2.07

Pressure-vacuum gauge.
Nameplate.

Molded epoxy bushing clamped to tank with 8 hole spade type


terminals.
Rated 150 percent of continuous full-load current, 30 BIL, 600 volts.
Internally connected neutral extending to neutral bushing.

HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHING


A.

Internal, oil-immersed, gang-operated load-break, manually operated switches.

B.

Hot stick operated handle located in high voltage compartment.

C.

Capable of operating at full-load current.

D.

Feed Switch: Four-position, indexing plate, loop.

HIGH VOLTAGE PROTECTION


A.

Combination Oil-Immersed Bayonet Expulsion and Current Limiting Fuses:


1.

2.
3.
4.

Accessibility:
a.
Bayonet expulsion fuse accessible through primary compartment.
b.
Current-limiting fuse accessible through tank handhole.
Expulsion Fuse for Low Current Faults: Interrupting capacity of
1,800 amperes rms asymmetrical.
Current Limiting for High Current Faults: Interrupting capacity of
50,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
Bayonet fuse externally replaceable with hot stick.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.09

SURGE ARRESTORS
A.

Metal-Oxide, Varistor Type:


1.
2.
3.

2.10

TANK GROUNDING PADS


A.

High and Low Voltage Compartments:


1.
2.

3.
2.11

2.12

Connected together with bare No. 2/0 stranded copper conductors.


Wye-wye high and low voltage neutrals internally connected with link
and brought out to insulated low voltage bushing externally grounded to
tank.
Low voltage neutral connected to externally mounted insulating bushing
in low voltage compartment and grounded to tank with removable strap.

TAP CHANGER WARNING SIGN


A.

Red laminated plastic, engraved to white core.

B.

Engrave to read: DO NOT OPERATE WHEN TRANSFORMER


ENERGIZED.

C.

Mount above tap changer handle.

FACTORY TESTS
A.

PART 3
3.01

Insulated body, elbow type, 27 kV in accordance with IEEE C62.11.


Installed in high voltage compartment.
Connected to transformer high voltage terminals.

Production tests in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90 and IEEE C57.12.00,


Section 8 and Table 16.
EXECUTION

GENERAL
A.

Secure to mounting pads with anchor bolts.

B.

Install plumb and longitudinally in alignment with pad or adjacent building


wall.

C.

Ground neutrals and enclosures in accordance with applicable codes.

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

ADJUSTMENTS
A.

Adjust voltage taps to obtain rated output voltage under normal operating load
conditions.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

OIL-FILLED PAD MOUNTED


TRANSFORMERS
26 12 02 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 20 00
LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
RELATED SECTIONS
A.

1.02

This section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment


specification. Application, horsepower, enclosure type, mounting, shaft type,
synchronous speed, and deviations from this section will be listed in the
equipment specification. Where such deviations occur, they shall take
precedence over this section.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):


a.
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b.
11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
b.
620, Guide for the Presentation of Thermal Limit Curves for
Squirrel Cage Induction Machines.
c.
841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical IndustryPremium
Efficiency Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC)
Squirrel Cage Induction MotorsUp to and Including 370 kW
(500 hp).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
C50.41, Polyphase Induction Motors for Power Generating
Stations.
c.
MG 1, Motors and Generators.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
a.
83, Standard for Safety for Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and
Cables.
b.
674, Standard for Safety for Electric Motors and Generators for
Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
c.
2111, Standard for Safety for Overheating Protection for Motors.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

1.04

DEFINITIONS
A.

CISD-TEFC: Chemical industry, severe-duty enclosure.

B.

DIP: Dust-ignition-proof enclosure.

C.

EXP: Explosion-proof enclosure.

D.

Inverter Duty Motor: Motor meeting applicable requirements of


NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Parts 30 and 31.

E.

Motor Nameplate Horsepower: That rating after any derating required to allow
for extra heating caused by the harmonic content in the voltage applied to the
motor by its controller.

F.

ODP: Open drip-proof enclosure.

G.

TEFC: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled enclosure.

H.

TENV: Totally enclosed, nonventilated enclosure.

I.

WPI: Open weather protected enclosure, Type I.

J.

WPII: Open weather protected enclosure, Type II.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

Descriptive information.
Nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Additional Rating Information:
a.
Service factor.
b.
Locked rotor current.
c.
No load current.
d.
Multispeed load classification (for example, variable torque).
e.
Adjustable frequency drive motor load classification (for example,
variable torque) and minimum allowable motor speed for that load
classification.
f.
Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency and power factor.
Enclosure type and mounting (such as, horizontal, vertical).
Dimensions and total weight.
Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1
and NFPA 70.
Bearing type.

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

PART 2
2.01

Factory test reports.


Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

2.02

Bearing lubrication.
Bearing life.
Space heater voltage and watts.
Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.
Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the
motor.
Description and rating of submersible motor moisture sensing system.

General Electric.
Reliance Electric.
MagneTek.
Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc., Motors and Drives Division.
Baldor.
U.S. Electrical Motors.
TECO-Westinghouse Motor Co.
Toshiba International Corp., Industrial Division.
WEG Electric Motors Corp.

GENERAL
A.

For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish identical motors and
accessories of a single manufacturer.

B.

In order to obtain single source responsibility, utilize a single supplier to


provide drive motor, its driven equipment, and specified motor accessories.

C.

Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

For motors used in hazardous (classified) locations, Class I, Division 1,


Groups B, C, and D, and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G provide
motors that conform to UL 674 and have an applied UL listing mark.

E.

Motors shall be specifically designed for the use and conditions intended, with
a NEMA design letter classification to fit the application.

F.

Lifting lugs on motors weighing 100 pounds or more.

G.

Operating Conditions:
1.
2.

3.
2.03

2.04

2.05

Maximum ambient temperature not greater than 40 degrees C.


Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions without reduction
being required in nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding rated
temperature rise.
Overspeed in either direction in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

HORSEPOWER RATING
A.

As designated in motor-driven equipment Specification.

B.

Constant Speed Applications: Brake horsepower of driven equipment at any


operating condition not to exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating,
excluding service factor.

C.

Adjustable Frequency and Adjustable Speed Applications (Inverter Duty


Motor): Driven equipment brake horsepower at any operating condition not to
exceed motor nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor.

SERVICE FACTOR
A.

Inverter-duty Motors: 1.0 at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise


noted.

B.

Other Motors: 1.15 minimum at rated ambient temperature, unless otherwise


noted.

VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING


A.

System Frequency: 60 Hz.

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor-driven equipment


specification:
Voltage Rating
Size

2.06

Voltage

Phase

1/2 hp and smaller

115

3/4 hp through 400 hp

460

C.

Suitable for full voltage starting.

D.

Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor
starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage.

EFFICIENCY AND POWER FACTOR


A.

For all motors except single-phase, under 1 hp, multispeed, short-time rated
and submersible motors, or motors driving gates, valves, elevators, cranes,
trolleys, and hoists:
1.

2.
2.07

2.08

Efficiency:
a.
Tested in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 12.59.
b.
Guaranteed minimum at full load in accordance with
NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12, Full-load Efficiencies for NEMA
Premium Efficiency Electric Motors Rated 600 Volts or Less
(Random Wound), or as indicated in motor-driven equipment
specification.
Power Factor: Guaranteed minimum at full load shall be manufacturers
standard or as indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

LOCKED ROTOR RATINGS


A.

Locked rotor kVA Code F or lower, if motor horsepower not covered by


NEMA MG 1 tables.

B.

Safe Stall Time: 12 seconds or greater.

INSULATION SYSTEMS
A.

Single-Phase, Fractional Horsepower Motors: Manufacturers standard


winding insulation system.

B.

Motors Rated Over 600 Volts: Sealed windings in accordance with


NEMA MG 1.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

2.09

Three-phase and Integral Horsepower Motors: Unless otherwise indicated in


motor-driven equipment specification, Class B or Class F at nameplate
horsepower and designated operating conditions , except EXP and DIP motors
which must be Class B with Class B rise.

ENCLOSURES
A.

Enclosures to conform to NEMA MG 1.

B.

TEFC and TENV: Furnish with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug.

C.

Explosion-Proof (EXP):
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.10

TEFC listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I,


Division 1, Group D hazardous locations.
Drain holes with drain and breather fittings.
Integral thermostat opening on excessive motor temperature in
accordance with UL 2111 and NFPA 70.
Terminate thermostat leads in terminal box separate from main terminal
box.

D.

Submersible: In accordance with Article Special Motors.

E.

Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC): In accordance with Article


Special Motors.

TERMINAL (CONDUIT) BOXES


A.

Oversize main terminal boxes for all motors.

B.

Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs


for conduit attachment.

C.

Furnish gaskets between box halves and between box and motor frame.

D.

Minimum usable volume in percentage of that specified in NEMA MG 1,


Section 1, Paragraph 4.19 and NFPA 70, Article 430:
Terminal Box Usable Values
Voltage

Horsepower

Percentage

Below 600

15 through 125

500

Below 600

150 through 300

275

Below 600

350 through 600

225

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Terminal Box Usable Values

E.
2.11

Voltage

Horsepower

Percentage

Above 600

All sizes

200

Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in each terminal box.

BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION


A.

Horizontal Motors:
1.

2.
3.
B.

Vertical Motors:
1.

2.

C.

Thrust Bearings:
a.
Antifriction bearing.
b.
Manufacturers standard lubrication 100 hp and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 125 hp and larger.
d.
Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
Guide Bearings:
a.
Manufacturers standard bearing type.
b.
Manufacturers standard lubrication 200 hp and smaller.
c.
Oil lubricated 250 hp and larger.
d.
Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life.

Regreasable Antifriction Bearings:


1.
2.

D.

3/4 hp and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or


regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable
grease relief plugs.
1 hp through 400 hp: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end
bells with removable grease relief plugs.
Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as
defined in ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.

Readily accessible, grease injection fittings.


Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs.

Oil Lubrication Systems:


1.
2.
3.

Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge.


Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs.
Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.
2.12

2.13

NOISE
A.

Measured in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

B.

Motors controlled by adjustable frequency drive systems shall not exceed


sound levels of 3 dBA higher than NEMA MG 1.

BALANCE AND VIBRATION CONTROL


A.

2.14

2.15

Inverter Duty Rated Motors, Bearing Isolation: Motors larger than 50 hp shall
have electrically isolated bearings to prevent stray current damage.

In accordance with NEMA MG 1, Part 7.

EQUIPMENT FINISH
A.

External Finish: Prime and finish coat manufacturers standard. Field painting
in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

B.

Internal Finish: Bore and end turns coated with clear polyester or epoxy
varnish.

SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES


A.

Screen Over Air Openings: Stainless steel on motors with ODP, WPI, and
WPII enclosures meeting requirements for guarded machine in NEMA MG 1,
and attached with stainless steel screws.

B.

Space Heaters:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Provide winding space heaters with leads wired out to motor terminal
box.
Provide extra hole or hub on motor terminal box as required.
Unless shown otherwise, heater shall be suitable for 120V ac supply,
with wattage suitable for motor frame size.

Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.

Raised or stamped letters on stainless steel or aluminum.


Display motor data required by NEMA MG 1, Paragraph 10.39 and
Paragraph 10.40 in addition to bearing numbers for both bearings.
Premium efficiency motor nameplates to display NEMA nominal
efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency, full load power factor, and
maximum allowable kVAR for power factor correction capacitors.

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.
2.16

Anchor Bolts: Provide meeting manufacturers recommendations and of


sufficient size and number for specified seismic condition.

SPECIAL MOTORS
A.

Requirements in this article take precedence over conflicting features specified


elsewhere in this section.

B.

Chemical Industry, Severe-Duty (CISD-TEFC):


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

15.

16.

In accordance with IEEE 841.


TEFC in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Suitable for indoor or outdoor installation in severe-duty applications
including high humidity, chemical (corrosive), dirty, or salty
atmospheres.
Motor Frame, End Shields, Terminal Box, and Fan Cover: Cast iron.
Ventilating Fan: Corrosion-resistant, nonsparking, external.
Drain and Breather Fittings: Stainless steel.
Nameplate: Stainless steel.
Gaskets between terminal box halves and terminal box and motor frame.
Extra slinger on rotor shaft to prevent moisture seepage along shaft into
motor.
Double shielded bearings.
125,000 hours minimum L-10 bearing life for direct-connected loads.
External Finish: Double-coated epoxy enamel.
Coated rotor and stator air gap surfaces.
Insulation System, Windings, and Connections:
a.
Class F insulation, Class B rise or better at 1.0 service factor.
b.
Multiple dips and bakes of nonhygroscopic polyester varnish.
Service Factor:
a.
At 40 Degrees C Ambient: 1.15.
b.
At 65 Degrees C Ambient: 1.00.
Safe Stall Time Without Injurious Heating: 20 seconds minimum.

C.

Multispeed: Meet requirements for speeds, number of windings, and load


torque classification indicated in motor-driven equipment specification.

D.

Inverter Duty Motor:


1.
2.
3.

Motor supplied power by adjustable voltage and adjustable frequency


drives shall be inverter duty rated.
Suitable for operation over entire speed range indicated.
Provide forced ventilation where speed ratio is greater than published
range for motor provided.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

E.

When installed in Division 1 hazardous (classified) location shall be


identified as acceptable for variable speed when used in Division 1
location.
Shaft Grounding Device: Motors larger than 30 hp shall be provided
with shaft grounding brush or conductive micro fiber shaft grounding
ring. Shaft grounding device shall be solidly bonded to grounded motor
frame per manufacturers recommendations.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Grounding Brush: Sohre Turbomachinery, Inc.
2)
Grounding Ring: EST-Aegis.

Submersible Pump Motor:


1.

2.

Manufacturers:
a.
Reliance Electric.
b.
ITT Flygt Corp.
At 100 Percent Load:
Submersible Pump Motors
Guaranteed
Minimum Efficiency

Guaranteed
Minimum Power
Factor

5 through 10

80

82

10.1 through 50

85

82

50.1 through 100

87

82

Horsepower

3.
4.
5.

6.

7.

Over 100
89
82
Insulation System: Manufacturers standard Class B or Class F.
Motor capable of running dry continuously.
Enclosure:
a.
Hermetically sealed, watertight, for continuous submergence up to
65-foot depth.
b.
Listed to meet UL 674 and NFPA 70 requirements for Class I,
Division 1, Group D hazardous atmosphere.
c.
Seals: Tandem mechanical.
Bearing and Lubrication:
a.
Permanently sealed and lubricated, replaceable antifriction guide
and thrust bearings.
b.
Minimum 15,000 hours L-10 bearing life.
Inrush kVA/horsepower no greater than NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70,
Code F.

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

2.17

Winding Thermal Protection:


a.
Thermal sensor and switch assembly, one each phase, embedded
in stator windings and wired in series.
b.
Switches normally closed, open upon excessive winding
temperature, and automatically reclose when temperature has
cooled to safe operating level.
c.
Switch contacts rated at 5 amps, 120V ac.
Motor Seal Failure Moisture Detection:
a.
Probes or sensors to detect moisture beyond seals.
b.
Probe or sensor monitoring module for mounting in motor
controller, suitable for operation from 120V ac supply.
c.
Monitoring module with control power transformer, probe test
switch and test light, and two independent 120V ac contacts, one
opening and one closing when flux of moisture is detected.
Bearing Overtemperature Protection for Motors Larger than 100 hp:
a.
Sensor on lower bearing housing monitoring bearing temperature.
b.
Any monitoring relay necessary to provide 120V ac contact
opening on bearing overtemperature.
Winding thermal protection, moisture detection, and bearing
overtemperature specified above may be monitored by single device
providing two independent 120V ac contacts, one closing and one
opening on malfunction.
Connecting Cables:
a.
One cable containing power, control, and grounding conductors.
Each cable suitable for hard service, submersible duty with
watertight seal where cable enters motor.
b.
Length: 30 feet minimum.
c.
UL 83 listed and sized in accordance with NFPA 70.

FACTORY TESTING
A.

Tests:
1.
2.
3.

In accordance with IEEE 112 for polyphase motors.


Routine (production) tests in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Test
multispeed motors at all speeds.
For energy efficient motors, test efficiency and power factor at
50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated horsepower:
a.
In accordance with IEEE 112, Test Method B, and NEMA MG 1,
Paragraph 12.59. and Paragraph 12.60.
b.
For motors 500 hp and larger where facilities are not available to
test by dynamometer (Test Method B), determine efficiency by
IEEE 112, Test Method F.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.
4.
PART 3
3.01

On motors of 100 hp and smaller, furnish copy of motor efficiency


test report on an identical motor.
Provide test reports for polyphase motors.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

In accordance with manufacturers instructions and recommendations.

B.

Align motor carefully and properly with driven equipment.

C.

Secure equipment to mounting surface with anchor bolts.


END OF SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE
AC INDUCTION MOTORS
26 20 00 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.

4.
5.

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.

PART 2
2.01

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C57.96, Guide


for Loading Dry Type Transformers.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 409,
Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type
Transformers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.
c.
TP 1, Guide For Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
Transformers.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.
b.
489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
c.
1561, Standard for Dry-Type, General Purpose, and Power
Transformers.

Descriptive information.
Dimensions and weight.
Transformer nameplate data.
Schematic and connection diagrams.

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Dry-type, self-cooled, two-winding, with aluminum windings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full
NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

D.

Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Table 4.2 of NEMA TP 1.

E.

Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

F.

Overload capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96.

G.

Wall Bracket: For three-phase units, 15 kVA to 45kVA.

H.

Vibration Isolators:
1.
2.
3.
4.

I.

Rated for transformers weight.


Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound
emitted by transformer.
Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external
vibration isolators.
30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer
enclosure with integral vibration isolator.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA.


45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA.
50 decibels for 51 kVA to 150 kVA.
55 decibels for 151 kVA to 300 kVA.
60 decibels for 301 kVA to 500 kVA.

General Electric Co.


Square D Co.
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.

GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER


A.

Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturers standard.

B.

Core and Coil:


1.
2.

Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for threephase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA.
Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and
above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above.

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Enclosure:
1.
2.
3.
4.

D.

Voltage Taps:
1.

E.
PART 3
3.01

Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated.


Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Corrosive Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel.

Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2-1/2 percent, full capacity; two
above and two below normal voltage rating.

Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with NECA and manufacturers instructions.

B.

Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in
direct contact with mounting surface.

C.

Provide moisture-proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections.

D.

Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under


normal plant load conditions.

E.

Provide wall brackets for three-phase units, 15 kVA to 45 kVA.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

1.02

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):


a.
C62.1, Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits.
b.
C62.11, Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power
Circuits.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 407,
Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
c.
AB 1, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
d.
KS 1, Enclosed Switches.
e.
LA 1, Surge Arrestors.
f.
PB 1, Panelboards.
g.
PB 1.1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
67, Standard for Panelboards.
b.
98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
c.
486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with
Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors.
d.
489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
e.
508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
f.
870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.
g.
943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Manufacturers data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective


device, accessory item, and component.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

1.03

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers recommended installation instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.04

Manufacturers Shop Drawings including dimensioned plan, section,


and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general
arrangement.
Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following:
a.
Protective devices with factory settings.
b.
Provisions for future protective devices.
c.
Space for future protective devices.
d.
Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings.
e.
Enclosure type.
f.
Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings.
g.
Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range.
h.
Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system
voltage.
i.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary
components.

Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following
material:
Item
Touch-up paint for panelboards

PART 2
2.01

Quantity
One half-pint container

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 2

Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
Or equal.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

B.

Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as equipment furnished under


Section 26 24 19, Low-Voltage Motor Control.

C.

No or-equal or substitute products will be considered.

GENERAL
A.

Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67.

B.

Wire Terminations:
1.

2.
C.

Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable


for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC
75 degrees C conductor ampacity.
In accordance with UL 486E.

Load Current Ratings:


1.

2.

Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard


assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as
defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of
noncontinuous rating.
Where indicated continuous, 100 percent, etc., selected components
and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value
shown.

D.

Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit


rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the indicated SCCR.

E.

Overcurrent Protective Devices:


1.
2.

3.
F.

In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489.


Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation.
a.
Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent
devices and without removing main bus.
b.
Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover.
Series-Connected Short Circuit Ratings: Devices shall be fully rated;
series-connected ratings unacceptable.

Circuit Breakers:
1.

2.
3.

General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make,


quick-break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and
TRIPPED positions of operating handle.
Noninterchangeable: In accordance with NEC.
Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in all panelboards.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

7.

G.

Enclosures:
1.
2.
3.

H.

Provide as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and


Methods.
Material: Type 1, Type 3R, and Type 3S shall be code-gauge, hot-dip
galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame.
Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturers standard gray
baked enamel or lacquer.

Bus:
1.
2.

I.

Trip Mechanism:
a.
Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each
pole.
b.
Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous
adjustment 3X to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps.
c.
Two and three pole, common trip.
d.
Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one
pole.
e.
Test button on cover.
f.
Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise.
Unacceptable Substitution:
a.
Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for
multi-pole breakers.
b.
Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole
spaces.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip
breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on
5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity,
for protection of personnel).
a.
Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker.
b.
Push-to-test button.
c.
Reset button.
Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip
breaker specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on
30-mA ground fault (UL listed for equipment ground fault protection).

Material: Copper full sized throughout length.


Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of
bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and
tap as required for current and future positions.

Feeder Lugs: Main, feed-through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted


mechanical or crimp compression type.

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

J.

Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for
termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box.
1.
2.

K.

Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination
of neutral conductors, and isolated from box.
1.
2.

Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the


quantity of breaker pole positions.
Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors.

L.

Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections,
and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings
indicated.

M.

Special Features: Where indicated, provide the following features:


1.
2.

2.03

Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the


quantity of breaker pole positions.
Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors
such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc.

Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for


panelboards having service disconnecting means.
Surge Arresters:
a.
In accordance with NEMA LA 1, IEEE C62.1, and IEEE C62.11.
b.
Comply with Section 26 43 00, Transient Voltage Suppression.
c.
Coordinate impulse spark over voltage with system voltage.
d.
Provide protective device within panelboard as disconnecting
means and short circuit protection per manufacturers
recommendation.
e.
Provide factory mounting within panelboard utilizing
UL-recognized mounting device.

208 VOLT LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


A.

Protective Device Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main
and subfeed devices; also provide for branch devices where indicated.

B.

Multi-Section Panelboards: Where more than 42 poles are required or more


than one section is otherwise indicated, provide multiple panelboards with
separate fronts.
1.
2.

Panelboard sections shall be individually installed and field


interconnected to form a single electrical unit.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide feed-through lugs on each section
but last.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
5.
6.
2.04

NEMA 250 TYPE 1 BRANCH PANELBOARD ENCLOSURE:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

2.05

Front trim shall be secured to box with concealed trim clamps.


Surface-mount panelboard front trim shall have same dimensions as
box.
Door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, shall provide
access to protective device operating handles.
Doors over 30 inches in height shall have multi-point latching.
Door lock shall be secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all
panelboards keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock.
Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and
enclosed card, mounted inside each panel door.

480V POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


A.

Branch Protective Devices:


1.
2.

3.
PART 3
3.01

Surface-mount panels shall be individually mounted and may be


different sizes.
Surface-mount multi-section panelboards may be comprised of sections
of unequal heights.
Provide feed-through and main lugs in individual sections as required
for field assembly of a complete multi-section panelboard.
Provide neutral and ground terminal bars in each section.

Locking: Furnish devices with provisions for handle padlocking.


Load Connections: Wire lugs shall be mechanical or crimp compression
type, removable/replaceable, and suitable for 75 degrees C rated
conductors without derating switch nor conductor ampacity.
Provide a nameplate for each circuit, blanks for spares.

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers


written installation instructions.

B.

Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls.

C.

Install top of cabinet trim78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown.
Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than
78 inches above the floor.

D.

Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter


devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289.

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

3.03

E.

Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F.

Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap
with nylon wire ties.

208V BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD


A.

Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.

B.

Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard.

480V POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD


A.

Provide engraved identification for each protective device.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 24 19
LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

1.02

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National


Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Standard for
Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).
b.
ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements.
c.
ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated
600 Volts.
d.
ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than
600V.
e.
ICS 18, Motor Control Centers.
f.
KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment
Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
b.
489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
c.
845, Motor Control Centers.

DEFINITIONS
A.

CT: Current Transformer.

B.

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

C.

N.C.: Normally Closed.

D.

N.O.: Normally Open.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

E.

THD: Total Harmonic Distortion.

F.

VT: Voltage Transformer.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.
B.

Descriptive information.
Itemized Bill of Material.
Dimensional Drawings.
Front Panel Elevations.
Conduit entrance locations.
Bus data.
Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics.
Anchoring instructions and details.
Typed tabulation:
a.
Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings.
b.
Motor horsepower.
c.
Nameplate full load current.
d.
Measured load current and voltage.
e.
Overload model number and relay setting.
f.
Protective device trip settings.
g.
Manufacturers solid state starter switch or dip switch or program
settings.
h.
Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter
manufacturers overload heater or setting selection tables for
starters provided.
Control diagrams.
One-line diagrams.
Schematic (elementary) diagrams.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Manufacturers installation instructions.


Factory test reports, certified.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Complete set of as-built wiring diagrams.
a.
Provide an individual wiring diagram for each motor starter and
VFD in the Project.
b.
Each Drawing shall match the presentation shown in the wiring
diagram volume.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.
d.
e.
1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.05

Provide products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories that


conform to UL Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

PART 2
2.01

Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to


final installation location within building.
PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.

2.02

Provide interconnection reports for each wiring diagram that


provides all wiring and termination data.
Drawings shall be in AutoCAD format and shall be in accordance
with the Citys CAD standards.
See wiring diagram volume for more requirements.

Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer.
Or equal.

GENERAL
A.

Like Items of Equipment: End product of one manufacturer and same


manufacturer as low voltage switchboard and panelboards for standardization.

B.

Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, motor


starters, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to
accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract.

C.

Controllers: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, Class A.

D.

Control Transformer:
1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit.


Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit.
One fuse in secondary circuit.
Mount within starter unit.

Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

G.

Anchor Bolts: Galvanized, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

H.

Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.

I.

Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250.

J.

Equipment Finish:
1.
2.

2.03

Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C.


Altitude: 2730 above sea level.
Equipment to be fully rated.

Electrocoating process applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base


coating.
Exterior Color: Manufacturers standard.

SEPARATELY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL


A.

Combination Full-Voltage, Magnetic Starter:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

B.

Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 65,000 amperes


at 480 volts short circuit capacity with overload protection.
Three-phase, nonreversing, full voltage.
Control: As shown on Drawings.
Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector.
Enclosure: As required per Section 26 05 05, Conductors.
Pilot Lights: As shown on Drawings.
Padlockable operating handle, capable of up to three locks.

Solid State Motor Overload Protection:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
Phase loss, phase unbalanced and Class II ground fault protection.
Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
Manual reset.
Provide in each ungrounded phase.
Mount within starter unit.
Communications: None.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

B.

In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and
UL 845.
Voltage Rating: As shown.
Short Circuit Rating: As shown on Drawings.
Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and
other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise
noted.
NEMA ICS 18, Part 3.
a.
Class: I.
b.
Type: B.

Enclosure:
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

7.

Type: NEMA 250 Type 1, indoor gasketed


Vertical Section Standard Indoor Dimensions for NEMA 1 Type:
a.
Nominal, front mounted, 90 inches high, 20 inches wide,
16 inches deep for: RAS Pump Station Facility
b.
Nominal, back-to-back, 90 inches high, 20 inches wide, 21 inches
deep for Thickening Facility.
c.
Alternative width dimensions of 24 inches and 30 inches are
acceptable for oversize devices or panels.
d.
Do not exceed space shown.
Construction:
a.
Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons.
b.
Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without
bolts, nuts, or cover plates causing interference.
c.
Removable top cover plates.
d.
Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension.
Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting
angles to meet specified seismic requirements.
Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top
and bottom.
Vertical Wiring Compartment:
a.
Full height, isolated from unit starters with separate hinged door
and tie supports.
b.
No terminal blocks allowed in vertical wireway compartment.
c.
Provide separate low level signal raceway in wireway.
Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers
for each starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front
without unit removal.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.
9.

10.
11.
C.

Bus:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.
D.

Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or


other unit.
Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so
doors cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater
mechanism to allow intentional access and energizing at any time by
qualified individual.
External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing,
padlockable in OFF position with up to three-lock capability.
Cable Entrance: Main leads enter from bottom; control and feeder
circuits enter from top.

Horizontal Power Bus:


a.
Three-phase tin-plated, copper, entire width of control center,
rated as shown.
b.
Tin or silver-plated at joints.
c.
Construct to allow future extension of additional sections.
d.
Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable.
e.
Isolated from top horizontal wireway.
Vertical Power Bus:
a.
Three-phase tin-plated, copper, full height of section, rated
300 amperes.
b.
Tin-plated at joints.
c.
Sandwich type bus insulation providing deadfront construction
with starter units removed except for bus stab openings.
d.
Insulated and isolated barrier, complete with shutters.
Neutral Bus: None.
Ground Bus:
a.
Copper, bare rated 300 amperes, entire width of control center
b.
Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.
Bus Bracing: as shown.

Motor Controller Unit:


1.

2.

Provide indicated individual components and control devices including


pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time
delay relays, and elapsed time meters as specified in Section 26 05 04,
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
Construction:
a.
Drawout combination type with stab connections for starters
NEMA ICS, Size 5 and smaller.
b.
Bolt-on combination type with cable connection to riser for
starters NEMA ICS, Size 6 and larger.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

5.

6.

c.
Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size.
d.
Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards on all units.
Starters:
a.
NEMA ICS 18, standard rating, except none smaller than
NEMA ICS, Size 1.
b.
Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled
for 65,000 amperes at 480 volts short circuit capacity with
overload protection.
c.
Three-phase, nonreversing, unless specified otherwise.
d.
Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector.
e.
Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter:
1)
Control: As shown on Drawings.
2)
Pilot Lights: RedON.
f.
Combination Adjustable Frequency Drive, Solid State Starter:
Drives as specified in Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable
Frequency Drive System.
g.
Communications: None.
h.
Padlockable operating handle when de-energized with up to threelock capability.
i.
Unit door interlocked to prevent opening when disconnect is in
closed position.
j.
Mechanical interlocked to prevent placing disconnect in ON
position when unit door is open.
k.
Minimum Dimensions: 12 inches high by full section width, less
vertical wireway.
Disconnecting Device:
a.
As indicated.
b.
Padlockable in OPEN position for up to three locks.
Circuit Breaker:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 489.
b.
Molded case with manufacturers recommended trip setting for
maximum motor protection.
c.
Magnetic trip only.
d.
Tripping indicated by operating-handle position.
e.
Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with shortcircuit capacity indicated.
Solid State Motor Overload Protection:
a.
Inverse-time-limit characteristic.
b.
Phase loss, phase unbalance and Class II ground fault protection.
c.
Current operated electronic circuitry with adjustable trip.
d.
Class 10/20/30 relay trip, switch selectable.
e.
One N.O. auxiliary contact for remote monitoring.
f.
Manual reset.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.
E.

Control Unit:
1.
2.
3.

F.

Disconnecting Device: Pull-apart terminal blocks capable of


de-energizing external source control circuits in unit.
Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 26 05 04,
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
Control Wiring:
a.
Copper, 14 AWG, minimum.
b.
Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each
end of wires.
c.
Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp
terminals.
d.
Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal
blocks.

Incoming Line Terminal:


1.
2.
3.

G.

g.
Provide in each ungrounded phase.
h.
Mount within starter unit.
i.
Communications: suitable for Ethernet/IP in the future
j.
Manufacturer and Model: Eaton C440 (or equal).
Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual-reset interposing relay for
connection to motor-mounted thermal protector system.

Construction: As specified in Paragraph, Motor Controller Unit.


Incoming Service Feeder: Cable.
Mechanical type CU-/AL lugs for 75 degrees C cable.

Main Protective Device and Feeder Unit:


1.
2.
3.

Construction: As specified in Paragraph Motor Controller Unit.


Incoming Service Feeder: Cable.
Static Trip Circuit Breaker:
a.
In accordance with UL 489.
b.
Main and feeder protective device rated 400Aand greater.
c.
UL labeled as suitable for service entrance.
d.
Molded case breakers with ambient insensitive solid-state trips
and having current sensors and logic circuits integral in breaker
frame.
e.
Solid-state current control with adjustable ampere setting,
adjustable long-time delay, adjustable short-time trip and delay
band, fixed or adjustable instantaneous trip, and adjustable ground
fault trip and delay band.

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f.

4.

5.
H.

Locate trip button on front cover of breaker to permit mechanical


simulation overcurrent tripping for test purposes and to trip
breaker quickly in emergency situation.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker:
a.
In accordance with UL 489.
b.
Feeder protective devices rated less than 400A.
c.
Thermal-magnetic trip and interrupting capacity required for
connection to system with short circuit capacity indicated.
d.
Indicate tripping by operating-handle position.
e.
Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C
ampacity.
Key Interlocking: Kirk or Superior keying system with Corbin lock
cylinders and keys where indicated.

Digital Power Meter (DPM)


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

General:
a.
Solid state device with LED displays.
b.
Direct voltage input up to 600V ac.
c.
Current input via current transformer with 5-ampere secondary.
d.
Programmable current and potential transformer ratios.
e.
Selectable Voltage Measurements: Line-to-line or line-to-neutral
and wye or delta.
f.
Communication: Ethernet TCP/IP
Simultaneous Display:
a.
Volts, three-phase.
b.
Amperes, three-phase.
Display
a.
Kilowatts.
b.
Kilowatt hours.
c.
Power factor.
d.
Frequency.
e.
kW Demand with programmable period intervals.
f.
kVA.
g.
kVAR.
h.
kVARh.
i.
Percent THD
j.
Minimum and Maximum THD values
Voltage Rating: 600 Vac
Provide a embedded Web Server to monitor meter with a laptop or over
a network
Minimum of 500Mb of memory for data storage and trending.
Manufacturers and Products: Eaton Power Expert 2270 (or equal).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

I.

TVSS: As specified in Section 26 43 00, Transient Voltage Suppression.

J.

Active Harmonic Conditioner: as specified in Section 26 43 10, Low Voltage


Active Harmonic Correction Equipment.

K.

Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters,


Control Relays, Time-Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in
Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

L.

Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.05

Laminated plastic; white, engraved to black core.


Provide for each motor control center and each unit.
Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram.
Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units.
Attach with stainless steel panhead screws on face of control center.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Testing:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

6.

7.

Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430,
Part VIII.
Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA
requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification,
assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit
functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise,
inspect and perform continuity checks.
Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on
diagrams or as called for in Specification.
Control Circuits and Devices:
a.
Energize circuit at rated voltage.
b.
Operate control devices.
c.
Perform continuity check.
Instruments, Meters, Protective Relays, and Equipment:
a.
Verify devices functioned by energizing potential to rated values
with connection to devices made at outgoing terminal blocks.
b.
Verify protective relays operated for functional checks and trips
manually initiated to verify functioning of operation for indicator
and associated circuits.
Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except
potential transformers. Tests shall be made phase-to-phase and

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.
9.
PART 3
3.01

phase-to-around with 60-cycle test voltages applied for 1 second at


2,640 volts.
Verify equipment passed tests and inspection.
Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists, and final
certified and signed test report.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

B.

Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, IEEE C2,


NECA 402, Submittals, and manufacturers written instructions and
recommendations.
Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size
and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.
Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.
Coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary feeders.
Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads.
Retighten current-carrying bolted connections and enclosure support
framing and panels to manufacturers recommendations.
Motor Data: Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each
motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information:
a.
Motor served by tag number and equipment name.
b.
Nameplate horsepower.
c.
Motor code letter.
d.
Full load amperes.
e.
Service factor.
f.
Installed overload relay heater catalog number.

Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic-trip-only circuit


breakers.
Adjust to approximately 11 times motor rated current.
Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following
installation.

Overload Relay: Select and install overload relay heaters and switch settings
after actual nameplate full-load current rating of motor has been determined.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Furnish manufacturers representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33,


Manufacturers Field Services, for the following services at jobsite for
minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: 2 person-days for
installation assistance, and inspection of installation.
END OF SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL


26 24 19 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 24 20
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which shall be followed for this section:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

1.02

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National


Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 402, Standard for
Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).
b.
ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements.
c.
ICS 2, Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated
600 Volts.
d.
ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than
600V.
e.
ICS 18, Motor Control Centers.
f.
KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment
Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
b.
489, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
c.
845, Motor Control Centers.

DEFINITIONS
A.

CT: Current Transformer.

B.

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

C.

N.C.: Normally Closed.

D.

N.O.: Normally Open.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

E.

THD: Total Harmonic Distortion.

F.

VT: Voltage Transformer.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.
B.

Descriptive information.
Itemized Bill of Material.
Dimensional Drawings.
Front Panel Elevations.
Conduit entrance locations.
Bus data.
Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics.
Anchoring instructions and details.
Typed tabulation:
a.
Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings.
b.
Motor horsepower.
c.
Nameplate full load current.
d.
Measured load current and voltage.
e.
Protective device trip settings.
Control diagrams.
One-line diagrams.
Schematic (elementary) diagrams.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Manufacturers installation instructions.


Factory test reports, certified.
Final VFD parameter settings for all VFDs
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Complete set of as-built wiring diagrams.
a.
Provide an individual wiring diagram for each motor starter and
VFD in the project.
b.
Each Drawing shall match the presentation shown in the wiring
diagram volume.
c.
Provide interconnection reports for each wiring diagram that
provides all wiring and termination data.
d.
Drawings shall be in AutoCAD format and shall be in accordance
with the Citys CAD standards.
e.
See wiring diagram volume for more requirements.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.05

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

PART 2
2.01

Provide products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories that


conform to UL Standards and have applied UL Listing Mark.

Shipping Splits: Established by Contractor to facilitate ingress of equipment to


final installation location within building.
PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.

2.02

Allen-Bradley.
No or equal.

GENERAL
A.

Make adjustments necessary to wiring, conduit, disconnect devices, VFD


ratings, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to
accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract.

B.

Control Transformer, as required:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit.


Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit.
One fuse in secondary circuit.
Mount within starter unit.

C.

Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.

D.

Lifting lugs on equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds.

E.

Anchor Bolts: Galvanized, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

F.

Seismic Zone and Importance Factor shall be as specified in Section 01 61 00,


Common Product Requirements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
3.

H.

Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250.

I.

Equipment Finish:
1.
2.

2.03

Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C.


Altitude: 2730 above sea level.
Equipment to be fully rated.

Electrocoating process applied over rust-inhibiting phosphated base


coating.
Exterior Color: Manufacturers standard.

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

B.

In accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 18, and
UL 845.
Voltage Rating: As shown.
Short Circuit Rating: As shown on Drawings.
Main and branch circuit breakers, controllers, wire connections, and
other devices to be front mounted and accessible, unless otherwise
noted.
NEMA ICS 18, Part 3.
a.
Class: I.
b.
Type: A.

Enclosure:
1.
2.

3.

Type: NEMA 250 Type 1, indoor gasketed.


Vertical Section Standard Indoor Dimensions for NEMA 1 Type:
a.
Nominal, back-to-back, 90 inches high, 20 inches wide, 24 inches
deep for Thickening Facility.
b.
Alternative width dimensions of 24 inches and 30 inches are
acceptable for oversize devices or panels.
c.
Do not exceed space shown.
Construction:
a.
Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons.
b.
Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without
bolts, nuts, or cover plates causing interference.
c.
Removable top cover plates.
d.
Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.

7.

8.
9.

10.
11.
C.

Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting


angles to meet specified seismic requirements.
Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top
and bottom.
Vertical Wiring Compartment:
a.
Full height, isolated from unit starters with separate hinged door
and tie supports.
b.
No terminal blocks allowed in vertical wireway compartment.
c.
Provide separate low level signal raceway in wireway.
Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers
for each starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front
without unit removal.
Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or
other unit.
Door Interlocking: Mechanically interlock starter and feeder doors so
doors cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater
mechanism to allow intentional access and energizing at any time by
qualified individual.
External disconnect handles with ON/OFF and trip positions showing,
padlockable in OFF position with up to three-lock capability.
Cable Entrance: Main leads enter from bottom; control and feeder
circuits enter from top.

Bus:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

Horizontal Power Bus:


a.
Three-phase tin-plated, copper, entire width of control center,
rated as shown.
b.
Tin or silver-plated at joints.
c.
Construct to allow future extension of additional sections.
d.
Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable.
e.
Isolated from top horizontal wireway.
Vertical Power Bus:
a.
Three-phase tin-plated, copper, full height of section, rated
300 amperes.
b.
Tin-plated at joints.
c.
Sandwich type bus insulation providing deadfront construction
with starter units removed except for bus stab openings.
d.
Insulated and isolated barrier, complete with shutters.
Neutral Bus: None.
Ground Bus:
a.
Copper, bare rated 300 amperes, entire width of control center
b.
Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts.
Bus Bracing: as shown.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Combination Magnetic Starter Motor Controller: No combination magnetic


starter motor controller shall be provided within the VFD motor control
center.

E.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Motor Controller Unit:


1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

F.

Communication:
1.
2.
3.

G.

Provide indicated individual components and control devices including


pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time
delay relays, and elapsed time meters as specified in Section 26 05 04,
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
Construction:
a.
Drawout combination type with stab connections smaller drives.
b.
Bolt-on combination type with cable connection to riser larger
VFD drives.
c.
Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards on all units.
Variable Frequency Drive: Provide drive in accordance with
specification 26 29 23, Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drive System.
Disconnecting Device:
a.
As indicated.
b.
Padlockable in OPEN position for up to three locks.
Circuit Breaker:
a.
Meet requirements of UL 489.
b.
Molded case with manufacturers recommended trip setting for
maximum motor protection.
c.
Magnetic trip only.
d.
Tripping indicated by operating-handle position.
e.
Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with shortcircuit capacity indicated.

Each VFD shall communicate with the plant control system via
Ethernet.
Each VFD shall have its own CAT6 cable home run to the local control
panel as shown.
There shall be no Ethernet switch within the MCC.

Control Unit:
1.
2.

Disconnecting Device: Pull-apart terminal blocks capable of


de-energizing external source control circuits in unit.
Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 26 05 04,
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

H.

Incoming Line Terminal:


1.
2.
3.

Construction: As specified in Paragraph, Motor Controller Unit.


Incoming Service Feeder: Cable.
Mechanical type CU-/AL lugs for 75 degrees C cable.

I.

Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches, Elapsed Time Meters,


Control Relays, Time-Delay Relays, and Reset Timers: As specified in
Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.

J.

Nameplates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.04

Control Wiring:
a.
Copper, 14 AWG, minimum.
b.
Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each
end of wires.
c.
Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp
terminals.
d.
Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal
blocks.

Laminated plastic; white, engraved to black core.


Provide for each motor control center and each unit.
Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram.
Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units.
Attach with stainless steel panhead screws on face of control center.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Testing:
1.
2.

3.
4.

Applicable Standards: NEMA ICS 18, UL 845, and NEC Article 430,
Part VIII.
Perform standard factory inspection and tests in accordance with NEMA
requirements to verify components have been designed to Specification,
assembled in accordance with applicable standards, and each unit
functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.
Actual operation shall be performed wherever possible. Otherwise,
inspect and perform continuity checks.
Verify component devices operated correctly in circuits as shown on
diagrams or as called for in Specification.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

6.

7.
8.
PART 3
3.01

Control Circuits and Devices:


a.
Energize circuit at rated voltage.
b.
Operate control devices.
c.
Perform continuity check.
Perform dielectric tests on primary circuits and equipment, except
potential transformers. Tests shall be made phase-to-phase and phase-toaround with 60-cycle test voltages applied for 1 second at 2,640 volts.
Verify equipment passed tests and inspection.
Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists, and final
certified and signed test report.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

B.

Install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, IEEE C2,


NECA 402, Submittals, and manufacturers written instructions and
recommendations.
Secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of sufficient size
and number adequate for specified seismic conditions.
Install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with pad or wall.
Grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads.
Retighten current-carrying bolted connections and enclosure support
framing and panels to manufacturers recommendations.
Motor Data: Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each
motor starter enclosure door displaying the following information:
a.
Motor served by tag number and equipment name.
b.
Nameplate horsepower.
c.
Motor code letter.
d.
Full load amperes.
e.
Service factor.
f.
Installed overload relay heater catalog number.

Circuit Breakers:
1.
2.

Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic-trip-only circuit


breakers.
Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following
installation.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Furnish manufacturers representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33,


Manufacturers Field Services, for the following services at job for minimum
person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.

2 person-days for installation assistance, and inspection of installation.


2 person-days for functional testing assistance.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE


MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
26 24 20 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for


Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
Federal Specifications (FS):
a.
W-C-596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical,
Power.
b.
W-S-896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted
(General Specification).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
a.
C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges
in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.
b.
C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard
Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
FB 11, Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve
Type for Hazardous Locations.
c.
WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.
d.
WD 6, Wiring Devices Dimensional Specifications.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a.
498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
b.
508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment.
c.
943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
d.
1010, Standard for Safety for Receptacle-Plug Combinations for
Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
e.
1436, Standard for Safety for Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar
Indicating Devices.
f.
1449, Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices (SPD).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

PART 2
2.01

Action Submittals: Manufacturers product data for wiring devices.


PRODUCTS

SWITCHES
A.

Switch, General Purpose:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

B.

NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896F.


Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal.
Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy
contact.
Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent
lamp loads.
Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting
strap.
Special Features:
a.
Provide the following features in comparable devices where
indicated: Three-way and four-way.
Manufacturers and Products, Industrial Grade:
a.
Cooper Arrow Hart; AH1220 Series.
b.
Bryant; 4901 Series.
c.
Hubbell; 1221 Series.
d.
Leviton; 1221 Series.

Switch, Motor Rated:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2

Type: Two-pole or three-pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch


without overload protection.
UL 508 listed.
Totally enclosed snap-action switch. Quick-make, slow-break design
with silver alloy contacts.
Minimum General Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac.
Minimum Motor Ratings:
a.
2 horsepower for 120V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
b.
3 horsepower for 240V ac, single-phase, two-pole.
c.
15 horsepower for 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole.
Screw-type terminal.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Cooper.
b.
Hubbell.
c.
Leviton.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

RECEPTACLES
A.

Receptacle, General Purpose:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.

B.

Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

C.

NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596G.


Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire
terminals.
Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face,
unless otherwise indicated.
One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless
construction).
Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted
blade without detent.
Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless
otherwise indicated.
Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet box.
Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices
where indicated:
a.
Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8.
Industrial Grade Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Cooper Arrow Hart; 5362 Series.
b.
Hubbell Bryant; HBL5362 Series.
c.
Leviton; 5362 Series.

Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle.


Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA.
Rectangular smooth face with push-to-test and reset buttons.
Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8.
Feed-through Capability: 20 amps.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Hubbell Bryant; GFTR20 Series.
b.
Cooper Arrow Hart WRVGF20 Series.
c.
Leviton;7899 Series.

Receptacle, Special-Purpose:
1.
2.

Rating and number of poles as indicated or required for anticipated


purpose.
Where indicated provide matching plug with cord-grip features for each
special-purpose receptacle.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

DEVICE PLATES
A.

Sectional type plate not permitted.

B.

Cast Metal:
1.
2.

C.

Weatherproof:
1.

2.

3.

D.
2.04

Material: Malleable ferrous metal, or Copper-free aluminum, with


gaskets.
Screw: Oval-head stainless steel.

Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 1:


a.
Gasketed, cast-aluminum, with individual cap over each
receptacle opening.
b.
Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Crouse-Hinds; Type WLRD-1.
2)
Appleton; Type FSK-WRD.
Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 2:
a.
UL listed for wet location while in use.
b.
Die cast metal cover.
c.
Manufacturer and Product: TayMac; Type Multi-Mac.
Switch:
a.
Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external
operator for internal switch.
b.
Mounting Screw: Stainless steel.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Taymac: Type TC.

Sheet Steel: Formed sheet steel or Feraloy designed for installation on castmetal box.

FINISHES
A.

Wiring device catalog numbers specified in this section do not designate


device color. Unless otherwise indicated, or required by code, provide colors
as specified below.

B.

Wiring Device: Gray.

C.

Special purpose devices may be manufacturers standard color (black).

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.

Comply with NECA 1.

B.

Coordination with Other Trades:


1.

2.

3.

4.
C.

Conductors:
1.
2.

3.
4.

D.

Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that
is guided by riding against outside of box.
Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar,
cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate
raceway system, conductors, and cables.
Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not
cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to
cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall.
Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is
complete.

Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced
or terminated on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from
stranded wire.
Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors.
b.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and
foreign matter.
c.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is
large enough.

Device Installation:
1.

2.
3.

Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or


that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations
were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is
time to connect conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge
covers, until last possible moment.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

3.02

SWITCH INSTALLATION
A.

Switch, General Purpose:


1.
2.
3.

B.

Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.


Install with switch operation in vertical position.
Install single-pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position
when switch is on.

Switch, Motor Rated:


1.
2.
3.

3.03

Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than
6 inches (150 mm) in length.
Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or
20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on device.
Device Plates:
a.
Do not use oversized or extra deep plate.
b.
Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device
plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening.

Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.


Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up
position when ON.
Install within sight of motor when used as disconnect switch.

RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION
A.

Duplex Receptacle:
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 6

Install with grounding slot up, except where horizontal mounting is


shown, in which case install with neutral slot up down.
Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only.
Weatherproof Receptacle:
a.
Install in cast metal box.
b.
Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle
opening.
Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where
ground fault protection is specified for downstream conventional
receptacles.
Special-Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION


A.

Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box.

B.

Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished
wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be
acceptable.

C.

Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has
no sharp corners or edges.

D.

Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch.

E.

Type (Unless Otherwise Shown):


1.
2.

F.

Interior:
1.

2.
3.05

Other Areas: Metal.


Exterior:
a.
Switch: Weatherproof.
b.
Receptacle in Damp Location: Weatherproof Type 1.
c.
Receptacle in Wet Location: Weatherproof Type 2.

Surface Mounted, Metal Box:


a.
General Purpose Areas: Sheet Steel.
b.
Process Areas: Cast.
Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1.

IDENTIFICATION
A.

Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles
in indoor locations.
1.
2.
3.

B.

Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels.


Use 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise
indicated.
Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on
face of plate.

Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes
where more than one circuit is present.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.06

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports.

B.

Test Instrument for 125-Volt 20-Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer


with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

C.

Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

D.

Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts.

E.

Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or
higher is not acceptable.

F.

Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum.

G.

GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

H.

Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at


circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove
malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 29 23
LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
1.02

Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA): 359-A-1, Special Colors.


Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a.
112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
b.
519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems.
c.
C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in
Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
CP 1, Shunt Capacitors.
c.
MG 1, Motors and Generators.
d.
WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extensions, and
Instrumentation Cables.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 79, Electrical Standard
for Industrial Machinery.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Terms that may be used in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

AFD: Adjustable frequency drive.


CMOS: Complementary metal oxide semiconductor.
CSI: Current source inverter.
EMU: Energy monitoring unit.
GTO: Gate turn-off thyristor.
MPR: Motor protection relay.
MTBF: Mean time between failure.
PWM: Pulse width modulation.
ROM: Read only memory.
RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
RTU: Remote Telemetry Unit.
Rated Load: Load specified for equipment.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.03

Rated Speed: Nominal rated (100 percent) speed specified for


equipment.
TDD: Total demand distortion.
THD: Total harmonic distortion.
TTL: Transistor transistor logic.
VFD: Variable Frequency Drive (Same as AFD).

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

Performance Requirements:
1.

2.

B.

Composite drive/motor efficiency (CE) is defined as ratio of motor shaft


kW to drive input kW. VFD system minimum requirements:
a.
At 60-Hz drive output and 100 percent load, CE equals
92 percent.
b.
At 50-Hz drive output and 60 percent load CE equals 89 percent.
c.
At 40-Hz drive output and 30 percent load CE equals 84 percent.
d.
At 30-Hz drive output and 12.5 percent load CE equals
77 percent.
Rated Continuous Operation Capacity: Not less than 1.15 times full load
current rating of driven motor, as indicated on motor nameplate, and
suitable for continuous operation at continuous overload which may be
imposed on motor by driven pump operating over specified speed range.

Design Requirements:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.
6.

Drive system consisting of variable frequency controller, drive motor,


auxiliary items, and components necessary for complete operating
system.
Other equipment is being powered from same bus as variable frequency
drives. Ensure proper operation of drives and other loads under normal
and emergency conditions.
Furnish VFDs rated on basis of actual motor full load nameplate current
rating times the service factor.
Drive System: Convert incoming three-phase, 60-Hz ac power to
variable voltage, adjustable frequency output for adjustable speed
operation of a standard ac induction squirrel-cage motor, using pulsewidth-modulation (PWM) technique to produce adjustable frequency
output.
System rated for continuous industrial duty and suitable for use with
NEMA MG 1, Design B motors.
Incoming Line Circuit Breaker: Provide positive means of disconnecting
incoming power, and overcurrent protection for drive system.

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

1.04

Incoming Line Reactor: Design to minimize harmonic distortion on


incoming power feeder, and to help facilitate installation of active
harmonic distortion unit upstream in power system.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.

11.
12.
B.

Overall drive system operating data, including efficiencies, input


currents, and power factors, at driven equipment actual load and rated
system input voltage, at 0, 40, 60, 80, 100, and 110 percent of rated
speed.
VFD output pulse maximum peak voltage, pulse rise time, and pulse
rate of rise including justification for proposed deviation from specified
values. Include motor manufacturers certification motor insulation will
withstand long-term overvoltages caused at motor terminals due to
specified output pulse data or proposed deviation from this data.
Complete system rating, including nameplate data, continuous operation
load capability throughout speed range of 0 percent to 120 percent of
rated speed.
Complete adjustable frequency controller rating coordinated with motor
full load nameplate current rating; list controller special features being
supplied.
Controller, reactor, dimensional Drawings; information on size and
location of space for incoming and outgoing conduit.
Maximum heat dissipation from enclosure.
Should separate enclosures and equipment be necessary for line reactor
elements provide complete dimensional information including location
of space for incoming and outgoing conduit, weight, maximum heat
loss, and minimum current carrying capacity and recommended wire
size for required interconnecting circuits.
Layout of controller face showing pushbuttons, switches, instruments,
and indicating lights.
Complete system schematic (elementary) wiring diagrams.
Complete system interconnection diagrams between controller, drive
motor, and related components or controls external to system, including
wire numbers and terminal board point identification.
Descriptive literature for control devices such as relays and timers.
Itemized bill-of-materials listing system components.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

Statement of Supplier qualifications.


Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

2.03

Manufacturers printed installation instructions.


Field test reports.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
As-built wiring diagrams as required per wiring diagram volume.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

Supplier: Minimum 5 years experience in furnishing similar size and type


adjustable frequency, controlled speed, drive systems.
PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Components and accessories specified in this section shall be products of:


Allen-Bradley, Powerflex 753.

B.

No or-equal or substitute products will be considered.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.

Ambient Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

B.

Storage Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to 158 degrees F.

C.

Humidity: 0 percent to 95 percent relative (noncondensing).

D.

Altitude: 0 foot to 3,300 feet.

E.

Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of maximum frequency.

COMPONENTS
A.

Drive Units:
1.

2.
3.

Incorporate switching power supply operating from dc bus, to produce


PWM output waveform simulating sine wave and providing power loss
ride through of 2 milliseconds at full load, full speed.
Current-limiting semiconductor fuses for protection of internal power
semiconductors.
Employ diode bridge rectifier providing constant displacement power
factor of 0.95 minimum at all operating speeds and loads.

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

10.

11.
12.

13.
14.

Use transistors for output section, providing a minimum 97 percent


drive efficiency at full speed, full load.
Employ dc power discharge circuit so that after removal of input power
dc link capacitor voltage level will decay below 50 volts dc within
1 minute after de-energizing following NEMA CP 1 and NFPA 79.
Design dc link capacitor for a MTBF of 5 years.
Operate with open circuited output.
Input Voltage: 480V ac plus or minus 10 percent.
Output Voltage: 0 to 480 volts, three-phase, 0 to 66 -Hz, minimum.
Maximum peak voltage of PWM VFD output pulse of 1,000 volts, with
pulse rise time of not less than 2 microseconds, and maximum rate of
rise of 500 volts per microsecond. Maximum frequency of PWM VFD
output pulse (carrier) frequency of 4,000-Hz. Should magnitudes of
these characteristics be more stressful to motor insulation than specified
values, furnish insulation systems on motors suitable for proposed
values.
Motor Audible Noise Level: When operating throughout speed range of
PWM VFD, no more than 3 dBA above that designated in NEMA MG 1
for same motor operated at constant speed with a 60-Hz supply voltage.
Short-Time Overload Capacity: 125 percent of rated load in rms current
for 1 minute following full load, full speed operation.
Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: Suitable for connection to system with
maximum source three-phase, bolted fault, short-circuit available of
42,000 amps rms symmetrical at 480 volts unless shown otherwise on
one-line diagram Drawing.
Furnish drives with 3 percent current-limiting line reactors mounted
within equipment enclosure.
Diagnostics: Comprehensive for drive adjustment and troubleshooting:
a.
Memory battery backup; 100-hour minimum during power loss.
b.
Status messages will not stop drive from running but will prevent
it from starting.
c.
Fault Condition Messages and History: First fault protection
function to be activated, ability to store six successive fault
occurrences in order. Minimum faults numerically:
1)
Overcurrent (time and instantaneous).
2)
Overvoltage.
3)
Undervoltage (dc and ac).
4)
Overtemperature (drive, motor windings, motor bearing,
pump bearing).
5)
Communication fault.
6)
Short-circuit/ground fault (motor and drive).
7)
Motor stalled.
8)
Semiconductor fault.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

15.

16.

9)
Microprocessor fault.
10) Single-phase voltage condition.
Drive Protection:
a.
Fast-acting semiconductor fuses.
b.
Overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent trip.
c.
Dc undervoltage protection, 70 percent dropout.
d.
Dc overvoltage protection, 130 percent pickup.
e.
Overtemperature, drive, inverter, converter, and dc link
components.
f.
Overtemperature, motor, and pump.
g.
Single-phase protection.
h.
Reset overcurrent protection (manual or automatic reset).
i.
Active current limit/torque limit protection.
j.
Semiconductor fault protection.
k.
Short-circuit/ground fault protection.
l.
Serial communication fault protection.
m. Microprocessor fault.
n.
Surge protection for transient overvoltage (6,000 volts, 80 joule
surge, tested per IEEE C62.41).
o.
Visual display of specific fault conditions.
Operational Features:
a.
Use manufacturers standard unless otherwise indicated.
b.
Sustained power loss.
c.
Momentary power loss.
d.
Power interruption.
e.
Power loss ride through
f.
Electronic motor overload protection.
g.
Stall protection.
h.
Slip compensation.
i.
Automatic restart after power return (ability to enable/disable
function).
j.
Critical frequency lockout (three selectable points minimum, by
1.5-Hz steps in 10-Hz bands, to prevent resonance of system).
k.
Drive maintenance system software for complete programming
and diagnostics.
l.
Ground fault protection, drive, and motor.
m. Operate with no motor connected to output terminals.

B.

Rectifier: Three-phase 6-pulse full wave diode bridge rectifier to provide


constant dc voltage to drives dc bus.

C.

Controller: Microprocessor-controller PWM inverter to convert to dc voltage


to variable voltage, adjustable frequency, three-phase ac output. Output
voltage shall vary proportionally with frequency to maintain constant ratio of

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

volts to hertz up to 60-Hz; above 60-Hz, voltage shall remain constant with
drive operating in constant horsepower output mode.
D.

Enclosure:
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

7.

Wall Mounted: NEMA 250, Type 1, gasketed, enclosure for mounting


against wall, completely front accessible, and hinged doors. Properly
sized to dissipate heat generated by controller within limits of specified
operating conditions (including ambient temperature and ambient
airflow). Enclosure not to exceed dimensions shown on Drawings.
MCC mounted: Allen-Bradley standard enclosure
Cable termination compartment door interlocked main circuit breaker,
defeatable (lockable in the open position), emergency stop pushbutton,
alphanumeric keypad and display, and operators controls. Components
and controls specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods.
Wire drive from below for power and control wiring.
Size forced-ventilation for periodic operation to cool each unit with
maximum room ambient temperature of 104 degrees F. Furnish
redundant fans such that if one fan fails remaining fans furnish adequate
ventilation for drive when operating at maximum capacity. Furnish
filters on ventilation intakes.
Wiring:
a.
Bundle stranded copper wiring neatly with nylon tie wraps or with
continuous plastic spiral binding.
b.
Label each terminal for permanent identification of leads.
c.
Identify each wire at each end with imprinted mylar adhesive-back
wire markers.
d.
Incorporate in as-installed wiring diagrams for wire and terminal
numbers shown.
e.
Wiring across door hinge, use 19-strand, NEMA WC 57 Class C
stranding looped for proper twist rather than bending at hinge.
f.
Wire connections internal to panels by crimp-on terminal types.
g.
For multiple enclosure systems, complete interconnection wiring
with gasketed enclosure openings for wiring.
h.
Multipoint plug receptacles for control wiring crossing equipment
shipping splits.
Selector switches, indicating lights, potentiometers, instruments,
protective devices, and major system components identified by means of
mechanically attached, engraved, laminated nameplates.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Operator Interface:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

Controls: Mount drive local control on front door of enclosure and


include control switch and membrane type keypad for the following
operator functions:
a.
Start (when in local mode).
b.
Stop (when in local mode).
c.
Speed increase (when in local mode).
d.
Speed decrease (when in local mode).
e.
Parameter mode selection (recall programmed parameters).
f.
LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE control selection (in remote, furnish for
remote RUN command digital input and speed increase/decrease
via remote 4 mA to 20 mA analog signal).
g.
Fault reset, manual for faults, except loss of ac voltage which is
automatic upon return.
h.
RUN/preset speed.
i.
Parameter lock, password or key switch lockout of changes to
parameters.
j.
Start disable, key switch or programmed code.
120 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz circuits for control power and operator
controls from internal control power transformer. Furnish power for
motor space heaters rated 120 volts.
Arrange component and circuit such that failure of a single component
cannot cause cascading failure(s) of other component(s).
Alphanumeric Display: During normal operation and routine test, the
following parameters shall be available:
a.
Motor current (percent of drive rated current).
b.
Output frequency (Hertz).
c.
Output voltage.
d.
Running time.
e.
Local/remote indicator.
f.
Status of digital inputs and outputs.
g.
Analog input and output values.
h.
Output motor current per leg.
i.
All test points.
Adjustable Parameters: Set drive operating parameters and indicate in
numeric form. Potentiometers may not be used for parameter
adjustment. Minimum setup parameters available:
a.
Frequency range, minimum, maximum.
b.
Adjustable acceleration/deceleration rate.
c.
Volts per Hertz (field weakening point).
d.
Active current limit/torque limit, 0 percent to 140 percent of drive
rating.
e.
Adjustable voltage boost (IR compensation).

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f.
g.
F.

Signal Interface:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
G.

2.
3.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch


die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible
location.
Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.
Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

PART 3
3.01

Digital Input: Accept digital inputs as shown on Drawings.


Digital Output: Furnish discrete output dry contact closures rated 5 amps
at 120 volts ac as shown on Drawings.
Analog Input: When LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in REMOTE,
control drive speed from remote 4 mA to 20 mA dc signal.
a.
Make provisions for adjustment of minimum and maximum motor
speed which shall result from this signal.
b.
Factory set this adjustment to comply with operating speed range
designated in driven equipment specifications.
c.
Frequency resolution shall be 0.1 percent of base speed.
Analog Output: Furnish two 4 mA to 20 mA dc signals for actual
frequency, actual load.
Communication: Ethernet TCP/IP.

Accessories:
1.

2.04

Preset speed (adjustable, preset operating point).


Provision for adjustment of minimum and maximum pump speed
to be furnished as function of 4 mA to 20 mA remote speed signal.

Enclosure: Manufacturers standard baked enamel finish.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Test:
1.
2.
3.

B.

Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.03

Conduct on each controller.


Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections,
interconnections, proper installation, and quiet operation.
Vibration Test: Record test data for report.

Conduct on each controller.


Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
Test for continuous 12-hour period without malfunction.
Demonstrate performance by operating continuous period while varying
application load, as input conditions allow, to verify system
performance.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.

B.

2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.


2 person-days for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
END OF SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM
26 29 23 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 32 13.13
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.

1.02

ASTM International (ASTM): A335/A335M, Specification for Seamless


Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
California Air Resources Board (CARB).
Code of Federal Regulations (CRF): Title 40 Volume 18, Control of
Emissions from New and In-Use Non-road Compression-Ignition
Engines.
International Organization for Standardization (DIN/ISO): 9001, Quality
Management SystemsFundamentals and Vocabulary.
National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
MG 1, Motors and Generators.
National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 404,
Recommended Practice for Installing Generator Sets.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
37, Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and
Gas Turbines.
b.
70, National Electric Code.
c.
110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
SAE International (SAE): J1074, Engine Sound Level Measurement.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
142, Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids.
b.
508, Industrial Control Equipment.
c.
1236, Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries.
d.
2085, Protected Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids.
e.
2200, Stationary Engine Generator.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Dimensioned outline Drawing showing plan and elevations of engine


generator set and drive system.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.

Paragraph by paragraph specification compliance statement, describing


differences between specified and proposed equipment.
Engine and generator weight, and anchoring requirements.
Catalog information and technical description; include materials for
block, heads, valves, rings, cylinders, pistons, crankshaft, and major
bearings and wear surfaces.
Complete list of accessories provided.
Performance curves showing engine efficiency (fuel consumed per kWh
output), gross fuel consumption rate, and kW output at design rated
output, one-half load, and one-quarter load. Account for design altitude,
temperature corrections, and engine parasitic loads.
Transient and subtransient reactances per unit.
Control panel instrument identification inscriptions.
Electrical schematic and wiring diagrams for the following:
a.
Generator control panel.
b.
Main generator.
c.
Battery charging system.
d.
Interconnection wiring diagram for automatic transfer switch
specified in Section 26 36 23, Automatic Transfer Switch.
e.
Enclosed electrical components.
Engine generator set motor starting capability and percent voltage dip
curve.
Block heater size and voltage.
Jacket water heater size and voltage.
Subbase tank size and dimensions.
Noise data for enclosed engine generator at 50 percent, 75 percent, and
full load.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Manufacturers Certificate of compliance with specified EPA emissions


requirements in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field
Services.
Certification, copies of analyses, or test reports demonstrating
appropriate vibration analysis and design in all modes.
Factory Test Report.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Description of parts and service availability.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Special guarantee.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.

2.

B.

Manufacturer Special Requirements:


1.
2.

1.04

Provided by Owner.

SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A.

1.06

Generator set shall be listed to UL 2200 or submitted to an independent


third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.
Manufacturer of generator set shall be certified to ISO 9001 and shall
have third party certification verifying quality assurance in
design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance
with ISO 9001.

AIR QUALITY PERMIT


A.

1.05

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Provide the Work in accordance


with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the
AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the
AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The City of
Boise publishes the acceptable laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf
Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards
published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those
standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

Provide manufacturers guarantee or warranty with no deductibles and


including travel time, service hours, repair parts and expendables (oil, filters,
antifreeze and other items required for the complete repair) with Owner named
as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide
for correction of the Work specified in this Specification section found
defective during a period of 2 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective
Work as specified in the General Conditions.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Item
Diesel fuel line filter elements

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Quantity
3 complete sets
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET
26 32 13.13 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Item

PART 2
2.01

Lubricating oil filter elements with


gasket

3 complete sets

Touch up paint

1 quart each color used

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials and equipment specified in this section shall be products of:


1.
2.

2.02

2.03

Quantity

Caterpillar.
Cummins.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.

Ambient Temperature at Air Intake: 104 degrees F maximum.

B.

Ambient Temperature at Engine Generator Set: 104 degrees F maximum.

GENERAL
A.

Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Operate at 1,800 rpm.


Rated at 450kW at 0.8 PF, based on specified service conditions.
Voltage: 480Y/277 volts, three-phase, 3-wire, 60-Hz.
Rated based on standby service.

B.

Emissions: Engines shall meet emission requirements specified in 40 CFR


Chapter I Part 89 for off-highway Internal Combustion (IC) engines.

C.

Vibration Design:
1.
2.
3.

Use vibration analytical techniques to determine shaft critical speeds,


and to develop bearing design and shaft balancing to mitigate vibration.
Apply torsional analysis and design to mitigate torsional vibration.
Engine and generator, individually, shall not exhibit vibration in any
plane exceeding 10 mils at continuous rating point, when measured at
attachment points to common steel subbase.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

ENGINE
A.

General:
1.
2.

B.

Type:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Manufacturers standard design, unless otherwise specified.


Engine parts designed with adequate strength for specified duty.

Diesel Cycle, 4-stroke type with unit mounted radiator and fan cooling.
Minimum displacement shall be as recommended by generator
manufacturer.
Minimum number of cylinders shall be 6.

Starting System:
1.
2.
3.

4.

Type: Automatic, using 12-volt or 24-volt battery-driven starter acting


in response to control panel.
Starter shall be capable of three complete cranking cycles without
overheating.
Batteries:
a.
Sized as recommended by engine manufacturer.
b.
Lead-acid type.
c.
Capable of providing 15 seconds minimum of cranking current at
0 degree C and three complete 15-second cranking cycles at
40 degrees C.
d.
Housed in acid-resistant frame isolated from engine generator
main frame.
e.
Located such that maintenance and inspection of engine is not
hindered.
f.
Complete with battery cables and connectors.
g.
Electric battery warmer plate.
Battery Charger:
a.
UL 1236 listed and labeled.
b.
10-amp automatic float, taper and equalize charge type, with plus
or minus 1 percent voltage regulation over a plus or minus
10 percent input voltage variation.
c.
Temperature compensated to operate over an ambient range of
minus 30 degrees C to 50 degrees C.
d.
Locate charger wall mounted in generator enclosure. Generator
manufacturer shall coordinate location.
e.
Include:
1)
Ammeter and voltmeter.
2)
Fused ac input and dc output.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f.
g.
D.

Fuel System:
1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump.


Fuel filter with replaceable spin-on canister element.
As specified under Article Integral Subbase Fuel Tank.
Fuel Connections to Engine: Flexible hose, suitable for application.

Governing System:
1.
2.
3.

F.

3)
Power ON pilot light.
4)
AC failure relay and light.
5)
Low and high dc voltage alarm relay and light.
Alarm relay dry contacts rated 4 amps at 120V ac.
Wire battery charger status and alarm contacts back to generator
control panel, terminate and identify contacts.

Electro-mechanical or electro-hydraulic type.


Regulates speed as required to hold generating frequency within
tolerable limits and within 5 percent of nominal design speed.
Accessories:
a.
Manual speed control device.
b.
Positive overspeed trip switch.

Jacket Water Cooling System:


1.

2.
3.

4.

Radiator:
a.
Consisting of jacket water pump, fan assembly, fan guard, and
duct flange outlet.
b.
Cooling System: Rated for full load operation in 122 degrees F
(50 degrees C) ambient as measured at alternator air inlet.
c.
Fan: Suitable for use in a system with 0.5 in H2O restriction.
d.
Sized based on a core temperature that is 20 degrees F higher than
rated operation temperature.
Engine Thermostat: As recommended by manufacturer to regulate
engine water temperature.
Jacket Water Heater:
a.
Suitable for operation on 208volt, single-phase, 60-Hz current.
b.
Maintain engine water temperature at 120 degrees F with an
ambient temperature of 50 degrees F.
c.
Thermostatically controlled.
Engine Cooling Liquid: Fill cooling system with a 50/50-ethylene
glycol/water mixture prior to shipping.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Lubrication System:
1.
2.

3.
H.

Exhaust System:
1.
2.
3.
4.

I.
2.05

Type: Full-pressure.
Accessories:
a.
Pressure switch to initiate shutdown on low oil pressure.
b.
Oil filter with replaceable element. Filter shall not be above 6 feet
6 inches with subbase fuel tank.
c.
Bayonet type oil level stick.
d.
Valved oil drain extension.
e.
Accessories shall not be located above 6 feet 6 inches from floor.
If accessories are higher, provide aluminum platform to access
maintenance items.
Oil Cooling System: Water-cooled heat exchanger utilizing jacket water.

Muffler: Rated for residential silencing.


Exhaust Pipe: ASTM A335, Grade P11, standard wall, with fittings
selected to match piping materials.
Pipe Connections: Welded.
Engine Connection:
a.
Flanged, flexible, corrugated, Type 321 stainless steel expansion
fitting, specifically suited for diesel exhaust service.
b.
Length as required for flexibility and expansion in piping
arrangement shown on Drawings.

Air Intake System: Equip with dry type air cleaner with filter service
(restriction) indicator.

GENERATOR
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

Meet requirements of NEMA MG 1.


Synchronous type with 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip-proof
construction, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan.
Stator Windings:
a.
Skewed for smooth voltage waveform.
b.
Reconnectable, 12 lead.
Overspeed Capability: 125 percent.
Waveform Deviation from Sine Wave: 5 percent maximum.
Telephone Interference Factor: 50 maximum.
Total Harmonic Current and Voltage Distortion: 5 percent maximum,
measured at generator main circuit breaker.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Insulation System:
1.
2.

C.

Excitation System:
1.
2.

D.

Field brushless type or permanent magnet generator (PMG) exciter.


PMG and Controls: Capable of providing regulated current, at a rate of
300 percent of nameplate current, to a single-phase or three-phase fault
for 10 seconds.

Voltage Regulation:
1.
2.
3.

E.

Class H, with a maximum rise of 125 degrees C over 40 degree C


ambient in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Epoxy varnish.

Solid state, three-phase sensing type.


Adjustable output voltage level to plus or minus 5 percent.
Provisions for proper voltage regulation for existing or future adjustable
frequency drives as part of generator load.

Voltage and Frequency Regulation Performance:


1.
2.

3.

Steady State Voltage Regulation: Less than plus or minus 1 percent from
no load to continuous rating point.
NEMA MG 1 Defined Transient Voltage Dip:
a.
Less than 20 percent at rapid application of rated load.
b.
Recovery to rated voltage and frequency within 2 seconds
following initial load application.
Steady State Frequency Regulation: Plus or minus 1.5-Hz overload
range.

F.

Short Circuit Capabilities: Sustain 300 percent of rated current for 10 seconds
for external three-phase bolted fault without exceeding rated temperatures.

G.

Main Terminations:
1.
2.
3.

4.

Do not provide a main breaker


Current Rating: 125% of the Generator rating.
Enclosure:
a.
Rating: NEMA 250, Type 12.
b.
Mounted with vibration isolation from engine generator set.
Surge Protective Devices: Three-phase capacitors and arresters mounted
in terminal compartment.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.06

2.07

BASEPLATE
A.

Mount engine generator set on a rigid common steel base frame.

B.

Base frame shall be stiffened to minimize deflections.

INTEGRAL SUBBASE FUEL TANK


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.08

2.09

Full load operation of generator set for 8 hours.


UL 2085 listed and labeled.
Installation shall be in compliance to NFPA 37.
Double-walled, steel construction and shall include the following
features:
a.
Emergency tank and basin vents.
b.
Mechanical level gauge.
c.
Fuel supply and return lines, connected to generator set with
flexible fuel lines as recommended by engine manufacturer and in
compliance to UL 2200 and NFPA 37 requirements.
d.
Leak detection provisions, wired to generator set control for local
and remote alarm indication.
e.
High and low level float switches to indicate fuel level. Wire
switches to generator control for local and remote indication of
fuel level.
f.
Basin drain.
g.
Integral lifting provisions.

VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.

Performance: To meet code requirements specified in Section 01 61 00,


Common Product Requirements.

B.

Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type.

C.

Include seismic restraints if required by Site location.

CONTROL SYSTEM
A.

Control Panel:
1.
2.
3.

Rating: NEMA 250, Type 12.


Material: Steel.
Instrument Identification: Face label or engraved, black, laminated
plastic nameplate with white 1/4-inch-high letters, attached with
Type 422 stainless steel screws.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.

7.

B.

Instrumentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Type: Suitable for engine-mounted vibration environment.


Mounting: Nonshock mounted.
Alarm and Signal Contacts: Rated 5 amps at 120V ac, dry.
Fault Indication Lamps: Manufacturers standard.
Meters: Digital with analog display, plus or minus 2 percent accuracy.

Operator Controls and Indicators:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

D.

UL 508 listed.
Tested to meet or exceed IEEE 587 requirements for voltage surge
resistance.
Controls shall be solid-state, microprocessor based. Control panel shall
be designed and built by generator manufacturer and shall provide
operating, monitoring, and control functions for generator set.
Control Panel mounting height shall not exceed 6 feet 6 inches above
where personnel will access panel, Manufacturer shall modify mounting
height if a sub-base fuel tank is used.

HANDCRANK/STOP/AUTO/ENGINE TEST selector switch.


Generator voltage adjustment.
Voltmeter PHASE SELECTOR switch.
Ammeter PHASE SELECTOR switch.
Voltmeter.
Ammeter.
Kilo-Watts (kW).
Percent kW.
Power Factor.
FREQUENCY meter.
Engine OIL PRESSURE indicator.
Engine jacket WATER TEMPERATURE indicator.
Engine SPEED indicator (RPM).
Engine OIL TEMPERATURE indicator.
RUNNING TIME indicator.
DC battery voltage.
Emergency Stop button.

Alarm Indicators with Manual Pushbutton RESET:


1.
2.
3.

Low oil pressure.


High jacket water temperature.
Engine overspeed.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
E.

External Interfaces:
1.
2.
3.

F.

3.

4.
5.

6.

2.10

Furnish a single, common DPDT relay output upon occurrence of alarm


condition.
Output: Dry contact rated 5 amps at 120V ac.
Accept remote dry start contact closure from automatic transfer switch,
rated 10 amps at 32V dc.

Functional Requirements:
1.
2.

G.

Engine overcrank.
Low/high dc voltage.

LCD text display of alarm/event descriptions.


Recranking Lockout: When engine fires, starting control shall
automatically disconnect cranking control to prevent recranking for a
preset period of time after engine stop.
Overcranking Lockout: Initiate after four cranking cycles of 10 seconds
on and 10 seconds off or provide continuous cranking cycle with crank
time limiter.
Cooldown timer, adjustable from 5 minutes to 60 minutes.
Alarms:
a.
Low coolant level.
b.
Low fuel level.
c.
Low battery voltage
d.
High battery voltage.
e.
Battery charger failure.
Engine shutdown upon any of the following conditions:
a.
Engine overspeed.
b.
Emergency stop button depressed.
c.
High jacket water temperature alarm setpoint and shutdown
setpoint.
d.
Low oil pressure alarm setpoint and shutdown setpoint.

Power Requirements: Manufacturers stands internally connected.

OUTDOOR WEATHER-PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE


A.

General:
1.
2.

Provide generator set with outdoor enclosure, with entire package listed
under UL 2200.
Package shall comply with requirements of NEC for wiring materials
and component spacing.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
10.

Design total assembly of generator set, enclosure, and subbase fuel tank
(when used) to be lifted into place using spreader bars.
Housing:
a.
Provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in
ambient temperature of 100 degrees F.
b.
Doors:
1)
Hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for
operating and service functions.
2)
Lockable and include retainers to hold door open during
service.
Roof: Cambered to prevent rainwater accumulation.
Openings: Screened to limit access of rodents into enclosure.
Electrical power and control interconnections shall be made within
perimeter of enclosure.
Finishes:
a.
Prime sheet metal for corrosion protection and finish painted with
manufacturers standard color using a two-step electrocoating
paint process, or equal meeting performance requirements
specified below.
b.
Prime and paint surfaces of metal parts. Painting process shall
result in coating that meets the following requirements:
1)
Primer: 0.5 mil to 2.0 mils thick.
2)
Top Coat: 0.8 mil to 1.2 mils thick.
3)
Gloss:
a)
Per ASTM D523, 80 percent plus or minus 5 percent.
b)
Gloss retention after 1 year shall exceed 50 percent.
4)
Crosshatch Adhesion: Per ASTM D3359, 4B-5B.
5)
Impact Resistance: Per ASTM D2794, 120-inch to 160-inch
pounds.
6)
Salt Spray: Per ASTM B117, plus 1,000 hours.
7)
Humidity: Per ASTM D2247, plus 1,000 hours.
8)
Water Soak: Per ASTM D2247, plus 1,000 hours.
c.
Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other nonmetallic
service parts shall not be acceptable.
d.
Fasteners used shall be corrosion-resistant and designed to
minimize marring of painted surface when removed for normal
installation or service work.
e.
Outside Color: Sand (Neutral color).
Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12-gauge steel for
framework and 14-gauge steel for panels.
Hardware and hinges shall be austenitic stainless steel.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11.

12.

13.

14.
15.
16.

17.

2.11

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.12

Exhaust Silencer:
a.
Install factory-mounted exhaust silencer inside enclosure.
b.
Exhaust shall exit enclosure through a rain collar and terminate
with a rain cap.
c.
Exhaust connections to generator set shall be through seamless
flexible connections.
Maintenance Provisions:
a.
Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines that extend to
exterior of enclosure, with internal drain valves.
b.
External radiator-fill provision.
c.
External fuel fill provision (if equipped with a subbased fuel
tank).
Provide motorized louvers to minimize air flow through enclosure when
generator set is not operating. Louvers shall include provisions to
prevent accumulation of ice or snow that might prevent operation.
Inlet ducts shall include rain hoods.
Provide external emergency stop switch that is protected from accidental
actuation.
Provide factory mounted and wired electrical distribution panel to serve
generator set and enclosure. Provisions required include: Factory-wired
normal ac service from panelboard to engine coolant and alternator
heaters, battery charger, and battery heating plate.
Sound Attenuation:
a.
Provide with sound-attenuated housing which allows generator set
to operate at full rated load in an ambient temperature of up to
100 degrees F.
b.
Enclosure shall reduce sound level of generator set while
operating at full rated load to a maximum of 75 dBA at any
location 7 meters from generator set in a free field environment
when tested in accordance with SAE J1074.

Engine Generator Set and Instrument Panel: Factory-applied primer and two
finish coats of manufacturers standard heat-resistant engine paint.

FACTORY TESTS
A.

General: Conform to NFPA 110.

B.

Steady Load Test: Test engine generator set at steady load run of 60 minutes
minimum duration at 100 percent full-rated load.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Transient Load Test: Conduct transient load test to demonstrate ability to meet
load pickup and load release requirements specified.

D.

Harmonic Test: Conduct at full load conditions.

E.

Record and Report:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Level and securely mount engine generator set in accordance with


manufacturers recommendations.

B.

Install in accordance with NECA 404.

C.

Where applicable, mount engine generator set on vibration isolators in


accordance with isolator manufacturers recommendations.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Strip chart recording and full harmonic analysis measuring up to 50th


harmonic for both voltage and current and three phases simultaneously.
Transient response.
Load/speed stability.
Engine fuel consumption.
Power output.
Harmonic analysis.

Touch up damaged coating with paint system compatible to existing.

FIELD TESTS
A.

General: Conform to NFPA 110.

B.

Performance Test: See Section 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical


Systems.

C.

Test Report: Record and report the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Electric load on generator.


Fuel consumption.
Exhaust temperature.
Ambient air temperature.
Safety shutdown performance results.
All test results.

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Post-test Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.04

Make final adjustments.


Replace fuel and oil filters.
Check belt drive tensions.
Demonstrate proper operation of equipment, including automatic
operation with control from automatic transfer switch, to Engineer and
Owner.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1 person-day for functional testing and completion of Manufacturers
Certificate of Proper Installation.
1 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
1 person-day for post-startup training of Owners personnel.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SET


26 32 13.13 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 36 23
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.
4.
1.02

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C37.90.1,


Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and
Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems:
General Requirements.
b.
ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors,
and Overload Relays not more than 2000 volts ac or 750 volts ac.
c.
ICS 6, Industrial Control And Systems: Enclosures 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1008, Transfer Switch
Equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Descriptive product information.


Dimensional Drawings.
Control diagrams.
Conduit entrance locations.
Equipment ratings.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Factory test reports.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


26 36 23 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):

B.

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf

C.

Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards


published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Caterpillar.

B.

Cummins.

GENERAL
A.

Transfer switch to be product of a single manufacturer in order to achieve


standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and
manufacturers service.

B.

Transfer switch shall be the same manufacturer as the engine generator

C.

In accordance with applicable standards of NFPA 70, NEMA ICS 1,


NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 6, IEEE C37.90.1, and UL 1008.

D.

Transfer switch consisting of inherently double-throw power switch unit with


interconnected control module.

E.

Rated 100 percent, in amperes, for total system transfer of motor, electric
heating, discharge lamp loads, and tungsten-filament lamp loads.
1.
2.

F.

Switches rated 400 amperes and below suitable for 100 percent
tungsten-filament lamp loads.
Switches rated above 400 amperes suitable for 30 percent
tungsten-filament lamp loads.

Main and arcing contacts visible for inspection with cabinet door and barrier
covers removed.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


26 36 23 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Suitable for 480 volts, three-phase, three-wire, grounded-wye electrical


service having an available short circuit current at line terminals of
65,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

H.

Switch Rating: continuous amperes as shown on Drawings in nonventilated


enclosure.

I.

Current carrying capacity of arcing contacts shall not be used to determine the
transfer switch rating.

J.

Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C
ampacity.

K.

Operating Conditions:
1.
2.

2.03

ENCLOSURE
A.

Type: Nonventilated NEMA 250, Type 1 with enclosure grounding terminal.

B.

Dead front, front accessible wall mounted cabinet with 14-gauge welded steel
construction.

C.

Continuously hinged single door, with handle and lock cylinder.

D.

Finish: Baked enamel applied over rust-inhibiting, phosphated base coating.


1.
2.

2.04

Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C.


Equipment to be fully rated without any derating for operating
conditions listed above.

Exterior and Interior Color: Provide Manufacturers standard finish as


approved by Owner.
Unpainted Metal Parts: Plated for corrosion resistance.

TRANSFER SWITCH
A.

Type: Electrically operated, mechanically held, double-throw.

B.

Momentarily energized, single-electrically operated mechanism energized


from source to which load is to be transferred.

C.

Locking mechanism to maintain constant contact pressure.

D.

Mechanical interlock switch to ensure only one of two possible switch


positions.

E.

Silver alloy contacts protected by arcing contacts.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


26 36 23 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

F.

Main and arcing contacts visible when door is open and barrier covers
removed.

G.

Manual operating handle for transfer in either direction under either loaded or
unloaded conditions.

H.

Internal control wire connections made with ring or spade type terminals, lock
washers, and sleeve type marking labels.

CONTROL MODULE
A.

Completely enclosed and mounted integrally to the transfer switch enclosure.

B.

Microprocessor for sensing and logic control with inherent digital


communications capability.

C.

Plug-in printed circuit boards for sensing and control logic.

D.

Adjustable solid state undervoltage sensors for all three phases of normal and
for one phase of standby source:
1.
2.

E.

Adjustable frequency sensors for standby source:


1.
2.

F.

Pickup 85 to 100 percent nominal.


Dropout 75 to 98 percent of pickup setting.

Pickup 90 to 100 percent nominal.


Dropout 87 to 89 percent of pickup setting.

Control module with adjustable time delays:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

0.5- to 6-second engine start delay.


0- to 5-minute load transfer to emergency delay.
0- to 30-minute retransfer to normal delay.
0- to 30-minute unload running time delay.
Switch to bypass any of the above time delays during testing.

G.

Form-C start contacts, rated 10 amperes, 32-volt dc, for two-wire engine
control, wired to terminal block.

H.

Exerciser, adjustable in 15-minute increments, 7-day dial clock to simulate


normal power failure and transfer load to generator, complete with door
mounted NO LOAD and LOAD selector switch.

I.

Adjustable 0 to 5 minutes time delay relay for engine starting signal.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


26 36 23 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.06

DIGITAL POWER METER


A.

Meters to be connected to load side of transfer switch.

B.

Meter shall display the following parameters:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.07

2.08

INDICATORS
A.

Type: Manufacturers standard.

B.

Green lens to indicate switch position for normal power source.

C.

Red lens to indicate switch position for standby power source.

D.

White lens to indicate normal power source is available within parameters


established by pickup and dropout settings.

E.

Amber lens to indicate standby power source is available within parameters


established by pickup and dropout settings.

F.

Provide one normally open and one normally closed, 5 amperes, 120-volt
contact for remote indication when transfer switch is in either position.

FACTORY TESTS
A.

Test to Ensure Correct:


1.
2.
3.

B.
PART 3
3.01

3 phase amps.
L-G, L-L, 3 phase volts.
Frequency.
Watts.

Operation of individual components.


Sequence of operation.
Transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings.

Dielectric strength test per NEMA ICS 1.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES


26 36 23 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 43 00
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit product data on each suppressor type, indicating component values,


part numbers, and conductor sizes. Include dimensional drawing for each,
showing mounting arrangements.

B.

Submit manufacturers UL certified test data and nameplate data for each
TVSS.

C.

Submit electrical single-line diagram showing location of each TVSS.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

UL Compliance and Labeling:


1.

2.
B.
PART 2
2.01

For power and signal circuits, TVSS devices shall comply with
UL 1449 and complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic
interference filter. Provide units that are listed and labeled by UL.
For telephone circuit protection, TVSS devices shall comply with
UL 497A.

ANSI Compliance: Use TVSS devices in compliance with the


recommendations of IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2, and IEEE C62.45.
PRODUCTS

GENERAL
A.

All TVSS devices for power circuits, provided under this section, shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.

B.

TVSS devices shall be capable of performance at ambient temperatures


between minus 40 degrees C and 60 degrees C, at relative humidity ranging
from 0 percent to 95 percent, and at altitudes ranging from sea level to
12,000 feet.

C.

TVSS devices shall be fused to disconnect the suppressor from the electrical
source should the suppressor fail. The fusing shall allow full surge handling
capabilities and to afford safety protection from thermal overloads and short
circuits.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION


26 43 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

2.03

D.

Design TVSS devices for the specific type and voltage of the electrical
service. Single-phase and three-phase wye-configured systems shall have L-N,
L-G, and N-G protection. Grounded delta-configured systems shall have L-L
and L-G protection.

E.

Power Filter: The TVSS shall include a high frequency extended range power
filter complimentary listed to UL 1283 as an electromagnetic interference
filter.

MANUFACTURER
A.

Innovative Technology, VanGuard Series.

B.

Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.

C.

General Electric.

MAIN DISTRIBUTION TVSS


A.

Provide TVSS meeting IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 Location in


accordance with Category C.

B.

Surge current capacity shall be not less than the following:


1.
2.
3.

2.04

L-N Capacity: 200 kA.


L-G Capacity: 120 kA.
N-G Capacity: 120 kA.

C.

Suppressor housing shall be in an enclosure that has the same NEMA rating as
the equipment it protects and painted to match.

D.

UL 1449 maximum suppression voltage shall not be more than:

System Voltage

Phase

L-L or L-N
Suppression Voltage

480Y/277

800

PANELBOARD TVSS
A.

Provide TVSS meeting IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2 Location


Category B.

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION


26 43 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Surge current capacity shall be not less than the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.05

C.

Suppressor shall be in an enclosure that has the same NEMA rating as the
panel it protects or the TVSS may be integral to a panelboard.

D.

UL 1449 maximum clamp voltage shall not be more than:

Phase

120

400

208Y/120

400

480

800

Provide unit or separately mounted LED-type indication lights to show the


normal and failed status of each module. Provide one normally open and one
normally closed contacts which operate when the unit fails.

SURGE COUNTER
A.

PART 3
3.01

System Voltage

L-L or L-N Clamp


Voltage

ANNUNCIATION
A.

2.06

L-L Capacity: 80 kA.


L-N Capacity: 80 kA.
L-G Capacity: 80 kA.
N-G Capacity: 80 kA.

Provide each TVSS rated above 100 kA with a counter displaying the number
of voltage transients that have occurred on the unit input. The counter shall be
battery backed and retain the count through system power outages.
EXECUTION

APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.

Install TVSS when indicated on the Drawings and:


1.
2.

Main Distribution TVSS in or near each motor control center that is fed
directly from a transformer.
Panelboard TVSS In or near each panelboard unless otherwise
indicated.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION


26 43 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


A.

Install suppressors according to manufacturers recommendations.

B.

Install suppressors directly to the cabinet which houses the circuit to be


protected so that the suppressor leads are straight and short, with all
conductors laced, running directly to the point of connection within the panel,
without loops or bends. If bends are unavoidable, no bend may exceed
90 degrees and bending radius may not be less than 6 inches.

C.

Connecting wires shall be as short as possible with gently twisted conductors,


tied together, to prevent separation. Connecting wires shall not exceed
24 inches in length at any point.

D.

Field installed conductors shall be the same as specified for building wire, not
smaller than No. 8 AWG and not larger than No. 4 AWG. Device leads shall
not be longer than the length recommended by the manufacturer, unless
specifically reviewed and approved by the manufacturer.

E.

Provide dedicated disconnecting means for TVSS devices installed at main


service entrance location, switchgear, and motor control centers. Provide
dedicated 30-60-ampere circuit breakers (size dependent upon wire size used)
with number of poles as required, as disconnecting means for TVSS devices
installed at panelboards. The interrupting capacity of the circuit breakers shall
be that specified for the other breakers at that location.
END OF SECTION

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION


26 43 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 43 10
LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.
4.
1.02

WORK INCLUDED
A.

This section specifies the requirements necessary to provide:


1.
2.

1.03

Active Harmonic Correction (AHC) equipment.


Manufacturers services.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA (FOR REFERENCE)


A.

As shown on Drawings.

B.

All harmonic-producing adjustable frequency drives are 6-pulse-type,


equipped with 3 percent line reactors.
1.

1.04

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):


a.
519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electric Power Systems.
b.
C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in LowVoltage AC Power Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 508 Industrial Control Equipment.

Manufacturer and Model: Allen Bradley; PowerFlex 753 Series.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT


A.

AHC equipment shall include:


1.
2.
3.

AHC unit.
Accessories, as specified.
Number Required (AHC plus accessories): One.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Harmonic correction equipment shall be suitable for installation as shown.


Installation of one AHC is planned. This AHC shall be suitable for operation
with utility and standby genset sources as shown. The installation of this AHC
is intended to provide sufficient cancellation of new load-produced harmonic
current such that the requirements of IEEE 519 are achieved at the at the
outgoing feeder to THK-MCC-002 , which is the designated Point of
Common Coupling (PCC).

C.

Harmonic Correction Equipment shall be suitable to be installed within an


MCC where shown on Drawings.

D.

Minimum Rating, Total Harmonic Cancellation Current: 100 amperes. Each


AHC unit shall be rated on the basis of total harmonic cancellation current in
amperes.

E.

Modes of Operation:
1.

2.

F.
1.05

AHC shall electronically inject harmonic current as required to cancel


load-produced harmonic current. Such current injection shall, within the
total cancellation current rating of the unit, maintain the PCC harmonic
current and voltage distortion at or below 5 percent TDD and 5 percent
THD(V), as defined by IEEE 519 for load demand and voltage
distortion limits. TDD is defined as the total RMS current distortion in
percent of the maximum demand load current of the circuit downstream
of the point of AHC application.
AHC shall also be capable of providing reactive current compensation
(displacement power factor correction). This function shall be manually
or automatically activated. When reactive current compensation is
activated, the AHC shall first perform harmonic current correction and
then, within its total injection current capacity, inject reactive
compensation current as required to maintain the PCC power factor at or
above 0.90 lagging.

Capacity Expansion: AHC shall be capable of parallel connection to increase


harmonic correction and reactive current compensation capacity.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

Manufacturer Descriptive Information (AHC and current transformers):


Summary of product ratings, features, and performance demonstrating
compliance with specification requirements.
Complete product specifications.

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10- 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

3.

4.

1.06

Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
1.

Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed.

QUALIFICATIONS
A.

PART 2
2.01

Factory Test Report: Provide on Sellers standard forms.


Installation Instructions: Provide complete details for physical and
electrical installation and connection, including AHC, power supply
connection, and sensing current transformers.
Operation and Maintenance Manual: Manual shall provide detailed
instructions for all programming, operation, and maintenance activities.
Provide replacement parts listing and instructions for obtaining. Provide
manufacturers pre-printed manual with copy of approved submittal
Drawings and tabulation of final settings.
Field Test and Commissioning Report: Provide summary of field
commissioning, including installation check, set-up and programming,
functional and performance testing, and approvals. Provide on Sellers
standard forms.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

1.07

Drawings: Outline and arrangement drawing, schematic and connection


diagram.
Installation Information: Description of physical installation
requirements, mounting provisions, conduit entry, interconnection
wiring, power supply connection and requirements.

Manufacturer: Company providing harmonic correction equipment of the type


specified, with minimum 5 years documented experience.
PRODUCTS

GENERAL
A.

Products shall comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA 70.

B.

Equipment Finish:
1.

Manufacturers standard finish color, except where specific color is


indicated.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
2.02

2.03

If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance


with light gray color finish as approved by Owner.

AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION APPROVAL


A.

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf

B.

Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards


published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.

ACTIVE HARMONIC CORRECTION EQUIPMENT


A.

Input Power:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

B.

Voltage: 480V ac, three-phase, three-wire, plus ground.


Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent of nominal.
Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 5 percent.
Current Limit: 100 percent of rating, minimum.
Surge Withstand Capability: IEEE C62.41 without damage.
Input Fuses: Rated at 200,000 AIC (amperes interrupting capacity).

Output Performance:
1.
2.

3.

Performance of the active harmonic correction equipment shall be


independent of the impedance of the power source.
Harmonic Correction:
a.
Within the total cancellation current capacity of the AHC, limit
2nd- through 50th-order harmonic current to less than 5 percent
TDD as defined by IEEE 519 at the PCC at each installed
location. Harmonic levels for individual harmonic orders shall
comply with respective levels established in IEEE 519.
b.
Within the total cancellation current capacity of the AHC, limit
the load-produced THD(V) of the electrical system at the PCC of
AHC application to less than or equal to 5 percent, as defined by
IEEE 519.
Reactive Current Compensation: Within the total reactive compensation
capacity of the AHC, correct to 0.90 lagging displacement power factor,
minimum. Leading power factor is not permitted.

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10- 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Environmental Conditions: The AHC shall be suitable for use under the
following environmental conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Operating Ambient Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.


Storage Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to 140 degrees F.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing.
Altitude: Operation up to 1,500 meters without derating.
Audible Noise: Shall not exceed 65 dbA measured 1 meter from surface
of unit.

D.

Warranty: The AHC manufacturer shall warrant products against defects in


material and workmanship for a period of 2 years from final acceptance.

E.

Enclosure:
1.
2.

3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

See Section 26 24 19, Low Voltage Motor Control for AHCs that are
installed in motor control centers.
Each AHC shall be provided in a NEMA 250, Type 1-rated enclosure.
Units shall not have any ventilation openings on the back. Provide
filtered ventilation as required.
Units with total cancellation current ratings of 100 amperes and less
may be designed for free-standing (conduit entry/exit through top and
bottom) or wall-mounting (conduit entry/exit through top or bottom)
installation. Units rated greater than 100 amperes shall be designed for
free-standing installation.
Freestanding units shall include a door-interlocked disconnect that
provides power interruption when the door is opened. Disconnect shall
be lockable in the power-off position. Door shall have continuous hinge
three-point locking mechanism.
Freestanding units shall include lifting lugs or other suitable lifting
provisions.
All units shall be provided with an identified grounding lug.
The enclosure finishing shall be the manufacturers standard type and
color.

F.

Operator Controls: Provide manufacturers standard controls interface.


Minimum requirements include ON/OFF-RESET control and indicators for
power on, unit operating, fault, warning, and unit at maximum capacity.
Provide a minimum of three Form-C dry contact relay outputs for remote
monitoring of status by others, including power on, unit operating, and fault.

G.

AHC shall be designed and equipped to limit radiated and conducted EMI in
accordance with FCC and/or EU EMC directives.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

H.

Accessories:
1.
2.

3.
4.
2.04

2.05

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Perform Sellers standard factory inspection and tests to verify components


have been designed to specification, assembled in accordance with applicable
standards, and each unit functions in accordance with electrical diagrams.

B.

Verify component devices operated correctly under conditions of actual operation.

C.

Perform dielectric tests.

D.

Verify equipment passed tests and inspection.

E.

Provide standard factory inspection and test checklists and final certified and
signed test report.

MANUFACTURERS AND MODELS


A.

PART 3
3.01

Interconnection control cables: Provide cables as required to interface


with current transformers.
Source and load sensing shall be provided by remotely-installed current
transformers. Two transformers shall be provided, installed on two
power circuit phases.
Current transformers shall be split-core type, suitable for operation at
400Hz.
Current transformer rating, ratio, and configuration shall be selected by
equipment manufacturer. See Drawings for electrical system details.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of: Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Model HCU100D5N1.
EXECUTION

DELIVERY
A.

For AHC installed in an motor control center, see Section 26 24 19, Low
Voltage Motor Control.

B.

AHC shall be factory assembled.

C.

Factory test results shall be reviewed and accepted by Seller before AHC is
shipped.

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10- 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Equipment shall be packaged or crated in a manner that will provide


protection from damage, deterioration, or contamination during shipping,
handling, and storage. Provisions for storage at the Job Site are as follows:
Secure, heated, indoor location.

E.

Extra Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.

F.

Accessories:
1.
2.

3.02

Deliver at same time as AHC delivery.


Furnish accessories required to place each item of equipment in full
operation.

INSTALLATION
A.

3.03

Deliver at same time as AHC delivery.


Mark to identify associated products by name, equipment, and part
number. Provide detailed packing list.
Package parts for protection against damage from elements during
shipping, handling, and storage.
Ship in boxes or containers marked to indicate contents and as stated
above.

Install in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Provide field quality control as part of manufacturers services.

B.

Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment,


anchorage, and grounding.

C.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Perform inspection and testing of AHC in accordance with NETA ATS,


industry standards, and manufacturers recommendations.
Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater
than, requirements established by NETA ATS.
Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS.
Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been
installed.
Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

D.

Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be:


a.
Scheduled with Owner.
b.
Conducted to avoid extended period of interruption to the
operating plant equipment.

Tests and inspection shall establish that:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Equipment and accessories are properly installed.


Equipment is operational within industry and manufacturers tolerances.
Installation operates properly.
Equipment is suitable for energization.
Installation conforms to requirements of NFPA 70.

E.

Verify nameplate data.

F.

Check accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, per


manufacturers recommendations.

G.

Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement.

H.

Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or


as recommended by manufacturer.

I.

Test control and signal wiring for proper termination and function.

J.

Investigate and repair or replace:


1.
2.

Equipment items that fail tests.


Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.

K.

Provide and temporarily connect a three-phase harmonic analyzer upstream of


the point of AHC application to measure TDD and THD (V) levels to verify
performance of the AHC. Results shall demonstrate system operation in
accordance with these specifications. Conduct operating test and document
(current and voltage waveforms with harmonic spectra) with and without
AHC application.

L.

Demonstrate control, monitoring, and indication functions in presence of Owner.

M.

Provide certified test report(s) documenting the successful completion of


testing. Include field test measurement data.

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10- 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Furnish manufacturers representative for the following services at Job Site or


classroom as designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below (travel
time excluded):
1.

B.

2 work days for inspection of installation, checkout and programming,


functional and performance testing, startup, and instruction of Owner
personnel.

Manufacturers Certification by a Factory Trained Manufacturers


Representative: Certify in writing equipment has been installed, adjusted, and
tested in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOW-VOLTAGE ACTIVE HARMONIC


CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 43 10 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.

1.02

Canadian Standards Association (CSA).


Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM).
Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41,
Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC) Softbound Version.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
595, Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures.
b.
844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
c.
924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop s:
a.
Interior Luminaires:
1)
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2)
Photometrics.
3)
Mounting or suspension details.
b.
Exterior Luminaires:
1)
Catalog data sheets and pictures.
2)
IESNA lighting classification and isolux diagram.
3)
Fastening details to wall or pole.
4)
Ballast type, location, and method of fastening.
c.
Lamps:
1)
Voltages.
2)
Colors.
3)
Approximate life (in hours).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

e.

1.03

1.04

4)
Approximate initial lumens.
5)
Lamp type and base.
Ballasts:
1)
Type.
2)
Wiring diagram.
3)
Nominal watts and input watts.
4)
Input voltage and power factor.
5)
Sound rating.
6)
Temperature rating.
7)
Efficiency ratings.
8)
Low temperature characteristics.
9)
Emergency ballasts rating and capacity data.
Photocells:
1)
Voltage, and power consumption.
2)
Capacity.
3)
Contacts and time delay.
4)
Operating levels.
5)
Enclosure type and dimensions.
6)
Temperature range.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
(NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled
or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization
acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. The
City of Boise publishes a list of acceptable testing laboratories at:
http://pds.cityofboise.org/media/104151/electricaltestinglaboratories.pdf

B.

Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards


published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards
and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

Aluminum Poles:
1.

2.
3.

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 2

Manufacturers standard provision shall be made for protecting the


finish during shipment and installation. Minimum protection shall
consist of spirally wrapping each pole shaft with protective paper
secured with tape, and shipping small parts in boxes.
Do not store poles on ground.
Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing
vegetation.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
LUMINAIRES
A.

Feed-through type, or separate junction box.

B.

Ballasts: Two-lamp when possible.

C.

Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG.

D.

Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire


from ceiling.

E.

Exterior Installations:
1.
2.

2.02

UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS.


Ballast: Removable, prewired.

LAMPS
A.

Fluorescent:
1.
2.

B.

Type Efficiency: Energy.


Color: 4100k.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.03

Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before


installing pole.
Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and
shaft cap or tenon.

General Electric Co.


Osram Sylvania.
Phillips Lighting Company.

BALLASTS
A.

General:
1.

2.

Meet requirements for fixture light output, reliable starting, radio


interference, total harmonic distortion, electromagnetic interference, and
dielectric rating.
Certified by electrical testing laboratory to conform to CBM
specifications.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Fluorescent (Electronic):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

2.04

EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.

In accordance with UL 924.

B.

Nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry in metal case

C.

Solid state charging indicator monitoring light and double-pole test switch.

D.

Capable of operating one fluorescent lamps for a period of 90 minutes with


output of 1,100 to 1,200 lumens.

E.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.05

Provide in 1 lamp, 2 lamp, or 3 lamp models.


High frequency ballast of 20k Hz or greater; instant-start.
Meets FCC Part 18.
UL listed, Class P, sound rating A.
Total harmonic distortion THD shall be less than 10 percent.
Shall withstand line transients per IEEE C62.41, Cat A.
Shall not contain PCBs and shall carry a minimum 3-year
manufacturers warranty.
Ballast shall start lamp at a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F.

MagneTek Lighting Products.


The Bodine Co., Inc.
Lithonia.

LIGHTING CONTROL
A.

Photocell:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 4

Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control.


Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum or zinc, unaffected by
moisture, vibration, or temperature changes.
Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn.
Time delay feature to prevent false switching.
Field adjustable to control operating levels.
Manufacturers:
a.
Tork.
b.
Paragon Electric Company.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.06

POLES
A.

General:
1.

2.
3.
B.

Handhole:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Design for wind load as specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product


Requirements, while supporting luminaires and other appurtenances.
The effective projected areas (EPA) of luminaires and appurtenances
used in calculations shall be specific for the actual products provided on
each pole.
Poles shall be one piece construction.
Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall not be installed.

Poles shall have oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening


of 2.5 inches by 5 inches.
Cover shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.
Metal poles shall have internal grounding connection accessible from
handhole near bottom of each pole.

Aluminum Poles:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.

Manufactured of corrosion-resistant aluminum alloys. Seamless


extruded or spun seamless type with minimum 0.188-inch wall
thickness.
Shape: Square Straight.
Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis
when used with copper ground wire.
Shaft Top: Fitted with cap.
Base:
a.
Anchor bolt mounted and machined to receive lower end of shaft.
b.
Joint between shaft and base shall be welded.
c.
Base cover shall be cast aluminum alloy.
d.
Hardware, except anchor bolts, shall be either anodized aluminum
alloy or stainless steel.
e.
Handhole.
Provide pole cast-in-place foundations with galvanized steel anchor
bolts, threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end.
Provide base covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for
anchor bolts.
Finish: Pole and brackets shall have dark bronze finish to match
luminaire.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS


A.

Features:
1.
2.
3.

2.08

2.09

2.10

POLE FOUNDATIONS
A.

Anchor Bolts: Steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; the
top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized.

B.

Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C.

See standard details.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.

Manufacturers Nameplate: Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate


bearing manufacturers name, address, model number, and serial number
securely affixed in a conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent will
not be acceptable.

B.

Markings shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel.

FACTORY FINISH
A.

2.11

Not less than 1-1/4-inch aluminum secured to pole.


brackets shall be coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for
use with one type of luminaire shall be identical.
Special mountings or brackets shall be as indicated on Drawings and
shall be of metal which will not promote galvanic reaction with
luminaire head.

Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall,


as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.

IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER AND FUSE


A.

Fuse Holder:
1.
2.

B.

Fuse:
1.
2.

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 6

General: Waterproof, of corrosion-resistant material.


Rating: 600 volts.

General: Midget, dual element.


Rating: 5-amp, voltage as required by application.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.
PART 3
3.01

Manufacturer: Methods Electronics Inc. Network, Buss Div.


EXECUTION

LUMINAIRES
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
B.

Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.


Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for
complete installation and meeting specified seismic requirements.
Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural
reinforcements to building and to concrete pole bases required to safely
mount.
Install plumb and level.
Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud.

Mounting:
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

General:
a.
Mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions shall be
coordinated with Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements.
b.
Refer to Fastener Schedule in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting
plate to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
Suspended:
a.
Chain or cable suspension is not allowed. Swinging suspension is
not allowed. Support luminaire with a minimum of two points of
contact, one at each end.
b.
Support for suspended luminaire shall consist of framing channel,
and/or threaded rod.
c.
Mount luminaire at height as shown in Drawings.
d.
Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished
floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable.
Pole Mounted: Provide cast-in-place concrete base.
Provide branch circuit in-line fuses in pole base handhole.
Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including
metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic
enclosures as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding. Where copper
grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide
specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Finished Areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.
7.

D.

Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid conflict with other building


systems or blockage of luminaire light output.
1.
2.

E.
3.02

Install symmetrically with tile pattern.


Locate with centerlines either on centerline of tile or on joint between
adjacent tile runs.
Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill
light will show between ceilings and sealing rings.
Junction Boxes:
a.
Flush and Recessed Luminaires: Locate minimum 1-foot from
luminaire.
b.
In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by
removing luminaire.
Wiring and Conduit:
a.
Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire.
b.
Provide flexible steel conduit.
Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction.
Independent Supports:
a.
Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with two safety
chains or two No. 12 soft-annealed galvanized steel wires of
length needed to secure luminaire to building structure
independent of ceiling structure.
b.
Tensile strength of chain or wire, and method of fastening to
structure shall be adequate to support weight of luminaire.
c.
Fasten chain or wire to each end of luminaire.

Fixture Suspension: Provide 1/4-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor


type hangers not permitted.
Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or
angled hangers.

Building Exterior: Flush-mounted back box and concealed conduit, unless


otherwise indicated.

LAMPS
A.

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 8

Provide in each fixture, number and type for which fixture is designed, unless
otherwise noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

3.04

BALLASTS
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

B.

Utilize all ballast mounting holes to fasten securely within luminaire.

C.

Replace noisy or defective ballasts.

LIGHTING CONTROL
A.

3.05

3.06

Lighting control as shown on Drawings.

EMERGENCY BALLAST
A.

Install battery, charger, and electronic circuitry metal case inside fluorescent
fixture housing adjacent to ac ballast.

B.

Install monitoring light and double-pole switch adjacent to light fixture.

C.

Wire in accordance with manufacturers wiring diagrams.

CLEANING
A.

Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark.

B.

Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust.

C.

Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only.

D.

Touch up painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint


ordered from manufacturer.

E.

Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LIGHTING
26 50 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

8.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Surge


Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
International Fire Code (IFC).
International Building Code (IBC).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b.
72, National Fire Alarm Code.
c.
90A, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
d.
101, Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
e.
820, Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection
Facilities.
f.
1221 Standard for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of
Emergency Services Communications Systems.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
(NICET).
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):
a.
232, Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data
Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data
Interchange.
b.
485, Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for
Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
217, Single and Multiple Station Smoke Alarms.
b.
228, Door Closures-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke
Detectors.
c.
268, Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
d.
286A, Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.
e.
464, Audible Signal Appliances.
f.
497B, Protectors for Data Communication and Fire Alarm
Circuits.
g.
864, Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

h.
i.
j.

9.
10.
11.

12.
1.02

1449, Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.


1480, Speakers for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
1604, Electrical Equipment for Use in Class I and Class II,
Division 2, and Class III Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
k.
1638, Visual Signaling Appliances Private Mode Emergency
and General Utility Signaling.
l.
1971, Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.
Air National Guard (ANG): ETL 01-1-1, Air National Guard Design
Policy.
Uniform Fire Code (UFC): 3-600-01, Design: Fire Protection
Engineering for Facilities.
United State Air Force (USAF):
a.
ETL 01-4, Fire Protection Engineering Criteria Protective
Aircraft Shelters (PAS).
b.
ETL 01-18, Fire Protection Engineering Criteria Electronic
Equipment Installations.
c.
ETL 02-15, Fire Protection Engineering Criteria New Aircraft
Facilities.
d.
ETL 98-8, Fire Protection Engineering Criteria Existing Aircraft
Facilities.
Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC): 4-021-01, Design and O&M: Mass
Notification Systems.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Addressable: A fire alarm system component with a unique identification that


can have its status individually identified or that is used to individually control
other functions.

B.

AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C.

CAD: Computer Aided Design.

D.

Coded: Audible or visible signal that conveys information about alarm event.
Examples are, number of rings of a bell or flashes of a strobe. This could be
used to convey location or type of alarm.

E.

dB: Decibels.

F.

DXF: Drawing Interchange Format.

G.

ECP: Environmental Control Panel.

H.

FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

I.

HVAC: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.

J.

I/O: Input/Output.

K.

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.

L.

LED: Light-Emitting Diode.

M.

MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor.

N.

RAM: Random Access Memory.

O.

SOM: Sequence of Operations Matrix.

P.

Zone: A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define an area
from which an alarm signal can be received or an area to which a signal can be
sent. The term zone is typically used when describing conventional,
non-addressable systems.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

Design Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

B.

Contract Drawings show location of fire alarm system components.


Design, coordinate, and provide system in accordance with building
codes indicated in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.
Design conduit layout and wiring interconnection of devices specified
herein.
Coordinate, and include in design, requirements for interfacing with
HVAC system.
Equipment suitable for addressable fire alarm system.
Fire alarm control panel and system shall be listed for use with

Performance Requirements:
1.

Actuation of alarm (smoke or heat detector, flow switch, or other


normally open initiating device contact) or trouble (trouble or
supervisory switch) shall cause the following operations:
a.
Audible and visual indications of alarmed devices on fire alarm
control panel display, and on remote annunciator.
b.
For remote buildings with subpanels, transmit common alarm or
trouble signal to light appropriate zone lamp at master fire alarm
control panel.
c.
Master fire alarm control panel shall transmit common alarm or
trouble signal to plant control panel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
1.04

Actuation of duct smoke detectors shall, send signal (contact closure) to


environmental control panel (ECP) to shut off HVAC equipment and
send a Supervisory Alarm to the fire control panel. Contact output to
ECP shall be rated for no less than 5A, 250V ac.
Sequence of Operations Matrix on the Drawings describes functions of
fire alarm system.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.

Descriptive product information for each individual system component.


Dimensional Drawings of panels and associated equipment.
Itemized bill of material.
Operating and programming instructions.
Control panel configuration and module data.
Complete point to point wiring diagrams of system and device
interconnection. Identify spare connection points.
Alarm initiating, indicating, and supervisory device electrical data.
Annunciator configuration and module data.
Plans showing device and panel locations as well as conduit and cable
sizes. Prepare Drawings and diagrams on drawing sheets of uniform size
without extraneous information. Marked up electrical, HVAC, lighting
or similar Drawings or copies of catalog data sheets are not acceptable
in lieu of required Drawings or diagrams.
Sequence of Operation Matrix.
Battery sizing calculations.
Supervisory power requirements for equipment.
Alarm power requirements for equipment.
Power supply rating justification showing power requirements for
system power supplies.
Voltage drop calculations for wiring runs, demonstrating worst case
condition.
Sample warranty.
Recommended types and quantities for spare parts.
Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
10.

11.
12.
13.
1.05

Experience and qualifications of firm(s) proposed to design and install


system.
Certifications documenting service technicians training. Certification
shall indicate name of individual, training, dates, systems qualified, and
current status.
Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
Copy of design documents, Shop Drawings, and calculations submitted
to code-enforcement authorities.
Code-enforcement authority approval letter.
Factory test reports.
Detailed program and schedule for testing, inspection, and maintenance
of fire alarm system that satisfies requirements of NFPA 72,
manufacturers recommendations, and local authority having
jurisdiction.
Documentation of system voltage, current, and resistance readings taken
during installation, testing, and ATP phases of system installation.
System record drawings and wiring details including one set of
reproducible masters and drawings on CD-ROM in a DXF format
suitable for use in a CAD drafting program.
NFPA 72, Record of Completion: Submit to Owner and codeenforcement authorities.
NFPA 72, Inspection and Testing Form: Submit to Owner and code
enforcement authorities.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Qualifications:
1.

2.

3.

Provide names of projects, locations, and telephone numbers of persons


to contact for at least two installations where Contractor or
Subcontractor has installed detection and alarm systems that are similar
in size and scope as this.
System design, installation and testing shall be performed by licensed
firm(s) with established reputation in fire alarm system industry having
10 years experience in design, installation, and testing of fire alarm
systems.
Service technician shall be formally trained by manufacturer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Submit Shop Drawings and system design


calculations for approval to the following code enforcement authorities:
1.

1.06

SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A.

1.07

Provide manufacturers extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as


beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide
for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of
Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a period of
2 years after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for
correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified
in the General Conditions.

MAINTENANCE
A.

PART 2
2.01

Maintenance Service: For 2 years after Correction Period, provide maximum


of 2 service calls, at Owners request, to make adjustments or repairs required
to keep system in satisfactory, full operation.
PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.02

City of Boise Planning and Development Services.

Siemens Building Technologies.


FCI.
Notifier Fire Systems.
Edwards Systems Technology.
Simplex/Grinnell.

GENERAL
A.

Material and equipment shall be standard products of their respective


manufacturers, and shall be of a model that has been in production for not less
than 3 years. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in
the opinion of Owner, reasonably convenient to Site.

B.

Contractor shall become familiar with details of Project, verify dimensions in


field, and revise conduit and equipment locations to avoid obstructions and
allow installation of new equipment.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.
2.03

2.04

Contractor shall not begin system installation prior to receiving written


approval of Shop Drawings from Engineer.

UL COMPLIANCE
A.

Products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall


conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark.

B.

Equipment shall be UL listed in accordance with requirements of NFPA.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.

Altitude: Not greater than 3,300 feet above sea level.

B.

Ambient Temperature:
1.

2.

C.
2.05

Indoor:
a.
Maximum 40 degrees C.
b.
Minimum 5 degrees C.
Outdoor:
a.
Maximum 50 degrees C.
b.
Minimum -29 degrees C.

Equipment shall be fully rated without derating for these conditions.

POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (POI)


A.

POIs shall be prepared on full size drawing sheets.

B.

POIs shall be framed in extruded metal frames, mounted under glass and shall
be water/weather resistant. Instructions shall be permanently mounted on
reserved wall area in space shown on Drawings.

C.

POIs shall include:


1.

2.

Facility floor plans showing location of fire equipment and devices with
coordinated identification. Show items such as firewalls, fire dampers,
and fire alarm devices.
Fire alarm wiring diagrams and schematics, with zone
identification with transmitter zone lists and device address list.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.06

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.

Control panel circuit for 24V dc, power limited, initiating circuits per
NFPA 70, Article 760.
Assembled panel UL 864 listed Product Category UOJ2, as an
integrated control system.
Enclosure:
a.
NEMA 250 Type 1.
b.
Color: Red.
Internally Mounted Module with:
a.
Transformer with 120 V ac input and 21.5V ac output.
b.
Solid state rectifier for 21.5V ac input and fuse protected, filtered,
and regulated 26V dc no-load output.
c.
Solid state transfer switch, minimum 8 amp-hours.
d.
Standby sealed, gelled electrolyte (lead acid) batteries sized for
system operating period of 24 hours of standby mode operation.
e.
Solid state battery charger.
f.
Over/under voltage monitor supervisory circuit.
g.
LEDs for status of normal power, battery trouble, and power
supply module trouble.
h.
Alarm mode of 10 minutes after standby operation.
Local differentiating audible sound device for alarm, trouble, and
supervisory conditions.
Full digital transmission protocol.
Addressable signal transmission protocol to be either digital
pole/response protocol or proprietary communication protocol, with all
antilog sensing device signals digitally transmitted to control panel.
Digital alarm communicator output circuitry for remote alarm control
panel.
MOV/gas discharge transient protection for power supply module, plus
initiating and indicating alarm devices.
For addressable systems provide additional 20 percent capacity for
future indicating and initiating devices.
EMI/RF Protection:
a.
Protect control equipment, devices, and wiring against unwanted
radiated electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and from affects of
audio and radio frequencies (RF) that can cause transmission of
spurious alarms.
b.
System shall be designed and installed so as to be unaffected (with
control cabinet faceplates installed) by operation of handheld,
portable radios of up to 5 watts, or portable cellular telephones up
to 1 watt, within 12 inches of system components.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Addressable Control Panel:


1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

Modular construction with solid state, microprocessor-based


components, programmable central processor unit, back lighted display
of primary control status and essential alarm operating conditions, and
concealed, maintenance, purpose operators keypad.
With Signaling Line Circuit Class B and Class B Notification Appliance
Circuits.
Main control module consisting of operators keyboard/keypad, local
and remote communications and supervision capabilities, system control
memory, and programming interface.
a.
Two-line, back lighted, 80 alphanumerical LCD characters with:
1)
Visible cursor for entering data information.
2)
Displayable when cabinet door is open.
b.
Primary operators keypad with:
1)
Acknowledge keys and LEDs for system alarm, supervisory
service, and system trouble conditions.
2)
Power on LED.
3)
Alarm silence reset keys.
4)
Displayable when cabinet door is closed.
c.
Pass code protected action display keypad for:
1)
Circuit/device enable or disable.
2)
Control on/off.
3)
Test/status.
4)
Auto or manual.
5)
Activate/reset.
6)
Display historical logs/real time.
7)
Function/menu.
8)
Program.
9)
Delete.
10) Displayable when cabinet door is open.
d.
Numerical entry and selection keypad, used in conjunction with
action display keypad, to perform control function on system
zones, initiating circuits, or auxiliary relays, and to gain access to
system information. Displayable when cabinet door is closed.
e.
Four function keys for control of variable functions related to
primary operations keypad, displayable when door is open.
TIA 485, NFPA 72, Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 data circuit capability for
remote annunciators.
8 Form C relay contacts rated 2 amperes, 120V ac. Relay contacts shall
be programmable and for any alarm condition. 3 relays shall be used to
notify Plant Control System of alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions.
Down loader port for connection to microprocessor-based transponder.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

8.
2.07

2.08

2.09

2.10

Power supply interface module generating digital voltage and current


data to LCD with:
a.
dc power conversion and output terminals.
b.
Supervision and control of power supply.
Two isolated TIA 232 communication port modules.

ADDRESSABLE DETECTOR BASE


A.

Solid state circuitry with integral LED visual alarm, dip switch or program
selectable addressing, and common base receptacle for ionization,
photoelectric, and heat detectors. Device address shall be located in base.

B.

Constantly monitors detector status and status changes.

C.

Suitable for mounting on standard outlet box.

INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSABLE MODULE


A.

Solid state circuitry with selectable latch/nonlatch operating conditions and


mounting plate.

B.

Monitors single and multiple devices with dry contacts.

C.

Suitable for installing inside 4-inch by 4-inch by 2-1/2-inch electrical box.

ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE


A.

Monitor module with solid state circuitry for Class B circuits serving dry
contact initiating devices.

B.

Control module with solid state circuitry for supervised control functions.

C.

Module shall provide 120V, 2A rated dry contact for controlling shut down of
HVAC systems.

D.

Module complete with mounting plate, suitable for installation in 4-inch


by 4-inch by 2-1/2-inch electrical box having 1-1/2-inch deep extension ring.

INITIATING DEVICE
A.

Pull Station, Fire:


1.
2.

Double-action station for general alarm.


Constructed of die-cast metal with baked red enamel finish,
weatherproof housing, and raised white letters stating FIRE.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

B.

Heat Detector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

C.

Surface-mounted with hinged front cover having keyed or allen-wrench


reset lock.
Where required, rated for use in hazardous environments.
Lift door and pull handle for double action operating station with plastic
break rod.
Activated station pull handle, latched in protruding position until reset
by key.
Stations keyed alike with fire alarm control panel.
Screw terminal for field connections.
Manual Pull Station: Microprocessor-based communication circuit, or
dip switch selectable address, and compatible with fire alarm control
panel.

Fixed Plug-in temperature elements with 90 degrees C trip setting,


complete with addressable mounting base.
Nonrestorable fixed temperature elements.
Dangling disk indicator for activated fix temperature element and LED
indicator for activated rate-of-rise temperature element.
Attach detector bases on surface mounted octagon boxes.
Conceal surface mounted boxes with surface trim skirt.
Double-screw terminals for supervised connection.

Smoke Detector:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

Photoelectric type with plug-in, twist-lock addressable base per UL 217


and UL 268.
Solid state circuitry, nonradioactive photo-optic sensing chamber,
suitable for device releasing service.
Concealed, field adjustable, sensitivity test switch.
LED; pulsed indication for power availability and steady indication for
activated detectors.
Self-Compensating Circuitry:
a.
Voltage Range: 15V dc to 30V dc, 24V dc nominal.
b.
Temperature Range: 0 degrees C to 38 degrees C.
c.
Operating Temperature Range: Minus 10 degrees C to
50 degrees C.
d.
Humidity Range: 0 to 95 percent relative humidity.
Detectors equipped with insect screen.
Photoelectric sensors adjusted to within 3 percent of UL 217 window
obturation sensitivity value.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Air Duct Smoke Detector:


1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
2.11

Duct mounted housing with prealigned sampling and exhaust tubes,


analog sensing, solid state circuitry, and plug-in, twist-lock addressable
base for photoelectric detector in accordance with UL 286A, NFPA 72,
NFPA 90A, and NFPA 101.
Sampling tubes to extend full width of branch air return duct.
Self-Compensating Circuitry:
a.
Voltage Range: 15V dc to 30V dc, 24V dc nominal.
b.
Temperature Range: 0 degrees C to 38 degrees C.
c.
Humidity Range: 10 percent to 90 percent relative humidity.
d.
Velocity Range: 400 feet to 4,000 feet per minute.
Front mounted LED with pulsed indication for alarm condition.
Normally open, double-pole, double-throw auxiliary relay with
2 amperes, 125V ac rated contacts for resistive loads.

ALARMS
A.

Audible Fire Alarm Horn:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

B.

Polarized, 24V dc devices with sound power measured dB in accordance


with UL 464.
Separate in/out wire leads for filed connections.
Red molded polycarbonate material
Audibility: In accordance with NFPA 72 and local requirements.
Surface mounted basic unit, design for mounting on a 4 inch square
electrical box.
Microprocessor-based, temporal Code 3 tone generation and volume
control, suitable for installation in doors and outdoors.

Visual Alarm, Fire:


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

Polarized, 24V dc, multi-candela indicating output per UL 1638.


Solid state circuitry for low intensity control of xenon flashtube.
Tamper-proof, translucent molded, polycarbonate, pyramidal shaped
lens with FIRE in red lettering visible from 180-degree viewing field;
red enclosure.
Polarized in/out wiring.
Designed for mounting on wall, single-gauge electrical box, or as part of
audible/visible base housing.
Synchronized unit.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Audio Visual Alarm:


1.

2.
D.

Bi-Color Warning Lights (Ventilation Failure):


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

E.

2.13

Provide signs in accordance with Section 10 14 00, Signage.


Provide a red sign adjacent to every bi-color warning light that with the
words, Warning! Ventilation Failure. Build-up of Combustible Gas is
Possible.

WIRING
A.

AC power wiring shall meet requirements of Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

B.

Low voltage wiring shall be solid copper or bunch tinned (bonded) stranded
copper, minimum 14 AWG, and shall meet NEC Article 760 for nonpower
limited service.

C.

Network or addressable loop cables shall be as recommended by manufacturer


for installation of their system and UL Listed for Fire Alarm Systems.

RACEWAYS
A.

2.14

Corrosion-resistant metal fixture with green and red globes.


24V dc, LED lamps; green steady, red flashing.
UL Listed for wet and outdoor installation.
Wall mount design.
Manufacturer and Product: Edwards Signal; 101 series.

Signs:
1.
2.

2.12

Where shown on Contract Drawings, single unit audible/visual devices


combining attributes listed above in individual devices, shall be installed
in a single unit.
Synchronous audible/visible output.

Conduit used for installation of Fire Alarm or Ventilation Alarm system shall
follow requirements as identified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

END-OF-LINE RESISTORS
A.

Ohmic value and power rating as determined by manufacturer based upon


number of circuit devices supplied and circuit configuration as installed.

B.

Single-gang, stainless steel plate mounted in surface mounted box.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.15

SURGE SUPPRESSORS
A.

Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS):


1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
PART 3
3.01

3.02

Provide to suppress voltage transients that might damage fire alarm


panel/transmitter components. Unit shall wire in series to power supply
of protected equipment with screw terminations.
Unit shall be UL 1449 listed with a 330-volt suppression level and have
a maximum response time of 5 nanoseconds.
Unit shall meet IEEE C62.41 Category B tests for surge capacity.
Features:
a.
Multi-stage construction that includes inductors and silicon
avalanche zener diodes.
b.
Long life indicator lamp (LED or neon lamp) which extinguishes
upon failure of protection components. Fusing shall be externally
accessible when this feature is available.
Manufacturer and Product: Edco of Florida, Ocala, FL;
Model HSP-121BT2.

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Coordinate with other trades for mounting and interfacing with fire alarm
system related devices.

B.

Install control panels, initiating and alarm devices, conduit, and wiring for
interconnection of devices specified herein for complete and operable system.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install and connect fire detection and alarm equipment in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and recommendations, and in accordance with
applicable codes and standards.

B.

Mount devices in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

C.

Provide outlet and junction boxes that are compatible with raceway system.

D.

Mount detector LEDs so they are readily visible from floor.

E.

Arrange sampling tubes and duct detectors to monitor duct area and point of
duct penetration sealed and reinsulated.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

F.

Program or configure panels and devices, as required to operate as defined by


Sequence of Operations Matrix as shown on Drawings.

G.

Install conductors in accordance with Section 26 05 05, Conductors, and


NFPA 70, Article 760.

H.

Install initiating alarm, signal, and communication conductors in separate and


independent raceway system.

I.

Circuit wiring color-code, as established by installer, to be maintained


throughout installation.

J.

Size conductors in accordance with device manufacturers recommendations.


Increase AWG size of alarm conductors, if necessary, to maintain terminal
voltage drop within acceptable level required by NEC and NFPA.

K.

Detectors shall not be installed until after construction clean up of trades is


complete, per requirements of NFPA. Exception, where required by AHJ for
protection during construction, detectors installed prior to final clean-up by
trades shall be cleaned or replaced.

L.

Duct Smoke Detector: Furnish, wire, and connect to fire alarm system in
accordance with this Specification. Installed in accordance with
Section 23 09 13, HVAC Controls, Field Components, and Instruments.

M.

HVAC Equipment: Wire and connect fire alarm system to air handling
system, smoke exhaust fan and smoke damper control circuits, and fan status
contacts

N.

Suppression Sprinkler System: Wire and connect to fire alarm system to


suppression sprinkler system.

CONDUIT
A.

Requirements apply to fire alarm system conduits, electrical enclosures,


terminal cabinets, junction boxes, pullboxes, and device backboxes.

B.

Conduit systems shall be dedicated to fire alarm system and shall contain no
unrelated conductors.

C.

Fire alarm system conduits shall be of sizes and types specified under
Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.
1.

Conduit shall be as identified under Section 26 05 33, Raceway and


Boxes. Flexible metallic conduit may be used for whips to devices only,

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

D.

maximum length 6 feet, 3/4-inch diameter minimum. Set screw type


couplings or connectors are specifically prohibited.
Size conduits according to conductors contained therein. Cross sectional
area percentage fill for fire alarm system conduits shall not exceed
40 percent.

Route and install conduit to minimize potential for physical damage, either
mechanical or by fire, and so as not to interfere with existing building systems,
facilities or equipment, and to facilitate service and minimize maintenance.
Coordinate installation between different trades to avoid conflicts.
1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.
8.
9.

10.

Conduit, except flexible conduit whips to devices, shall be solidly


attached to building structural members or permanent walls. Conduit
shall not be attached to existing conduit, ductwork, cable trays, other
ceiling equipment, drop ceiling hangers/grids or partition walls, except
where necessary to connect to initiating, evacuation signaling or
auxiliary function devices.
Conduit shall be routed either parallel or perpendicular to building
structural members.
Conduit shall be installed at a height so as not to obstruct any portion of
a window, doorway cable tray, stairway or a passageway, and shall not
interfere with operation of existing mechanical or electrical equipment.
Conduit, junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, electrical
enclosures and device backboxes shall be readily accessible for
inspection, testing, service and maintenance.
Conduits shall be arranged to minimize the possibility of water in those
conduits draining through control panels.
a.
Conduit, except nipples between control panels shall be arranged
to enter control cabinets from below.
b.
Conduit shall be provided with three, 1/4-inch drain holes at
horizontal low point beneath each control cabinet.
Bushings shall be provided at termination of conduit, prior to
installation of wire.
Install junction boxes as necessary. Conductors shall be pulled through
junction boxes, without splices.
Pullboxes shall be installed in each conduit at intervals not to exceed
100 feet. Pullboxes shall be 4-inch square, minimum.
Device backboxes and junction boxes shall be sized to accommodate
number of conductors contained. Extension rings or extension boxes are
prohibited.
Junction boxes, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, device backboxes, and
raceways shall be gasketed and weather-tight per requirements of
Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

3.05

E.

Conduit, junction boxes, panels, electrical enclosures, relays and device


backboxes shall be exposed in unfinished areas. Conduit and device
backboxes shall be concealed in walls, ceiling spaces, electrical shafts or
closets, in finished areas, except as noted on Drawings. Exposed conduit
penetrations of walls shall be provided with escutcheon plates on either side of
the wall.

F.

Conduit penetrations of walls, floors and ceilings shall be sealed around


conduit(s) in accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants, restoring
walls, floors and ceilings to their original condition, fire resistance and
integrity.

G.

Pull boxes, junction boxes, conduit bodies, and terminal cabinets shall be
painted fire engine red prior to installation. Provide touch-up painting, of
normally visible pull boxes, junction boxes, and terminal cabinets prior to
final acceptance testing.

H.

Conduit shall be grounded by approved ground clamps, and per NEC


requirements.

I.

Mount end-of-line resistors on terminal blocks.

J.

Detection and alarm wire shall be installed in separate conduits. Outgoing and
return conductors for each supervised circuit shall be routed in separately as
required by NFPA 72. The minimum separation of outgoing and return
conduits shall be 1 foot vertically and 4 feet horizontally.

IDENTIFICATION
A.

Junction, terminal, and pulling box covers shall be painted red and identified
with engraved labels by loop number and circuit that it contains.

B.

Detection and terminal devices shall have engraved alphanumeric


identification that shall be keyed to posted operations and maintenance
instructions.

CONDUCTORS
A.

Requirements apply to fire alarm system conductors, including all signaling


line, initiating device, indicating appliance, releasing function, remote
signaling, ac and dc power and grounding/shield drain circuits.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Conductors shall be:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

New; wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges or crushed insulation shall not
be used.
Installed in conduit.
Continuous between devices and between devices and intermediary
terminal cabinets.
Low voltage conductors shall be minimum size No. 14 AWG. Smaller
conductors shall only be permitted where part of a manufacturers
specific communications cable, i.e. addressable system.
In accordance with requirements of NEC, Article 760 for nonpower
limited service.

C.

Splices in conductors are specifically prohibited.

D.

Types:
1.
2.

E.

Conductors, except ac power conductors and grounding conductors,


shall be solid copper or bunch tinned (bonded) stranded copper.
Stranded copper conductors are acceptable for ac power conductors and
grounding conductors only.

Terminations, including field connections to supervisory resistors, diodes,


relays or other devices shall be to numbered terminals or terminal strips and
readily accessible for inspection, service, testing and maintenance.
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Terminations shall be within junction boxes, device backboxes, terminal


cabinets, control panels or other suitable metal enclosures.
Terminals and terminal strips shall be suitable for the size and number
of conductors connected to them.
Each conductor termination shall be uniquely numbered with durable
plastic tags or uniquely identifiable by a combination of numbers and
color codes. These conductor numbers shall be shown on Contractors
Record Drawings (floor plans and detailed wiring diagrams) in a manner
allowing ready identification of conductor terminations.
Wire nuts are prohibited.
Where pigtail devices are factory provided with wires too short to be
connected to terminal strips (i.e., solenoids), such connections shall be
soldered and taped.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Control Panel Wiring:


1.
2.

3.

4.
5.

G.

Fully dressed and bundled with nylon tie wraps at 3-inch intervals.
Bundled wiring shall be routed parallel to terminal strips within control
panels, with individual conductors turned out at 90 degree angles to
their associated terminal connections.
AC power conductors shall be bundled and routed separately from low
voltage conductors. A minimum 2-inch separation shall be maintained
between ac power conductors and low voltage conductors wherever
possible.
Control cabinets shall be sized to accommodate the requirements of this
Section.
Control panels shall not be used as raceways. Conductors that do not
terminate within a control panel shall not be routed through that control
panel.

Conductors shall be separated into the following categories:


1.
2.

Low voltage circuits that serve devices.


ac power circuits.

H.

Each category of conductors shall be installed in physically separated,


dedicated conduits, and shall not interface with one another, except at
common associated control equipment. Conductors shall be further segregated
as necessary to conform to fire alarm system manufacturers recommendations
and as necessary to prevent electrical crosstalk between conductors installed in
common conduits.

I.

Wiring shall be THHN or TFFN stranded. Use of multi-conductor twisted pair


or similar wiring is not permitted.

J.

Install as nonpower limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 72, and NEC,
Article 760.

K.

Conductors looped around terminals are prohibited.

L.

Wire nut splices are prohibited.

M.

T-tapping of circuits is prohibited.

N.

Circuits shall be megger tested to voltage rating of their insulation before final
terminations are made.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.06

OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION


A.

3.07

3.08

Install TVSS for fire alarm control panel per manufacturers requirements.

REPAIR/RESTORATION
A.

Touch up scratches, mars, and dents, incurred during shipment or installation


of equipment.

B.

If required because of extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, refinish


entire assembly.

C.

Keep covers on smoke detectors until areas have been thoroughly cleaned.

TESTS AND INSPECTION


A.

In accordance with Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup,


and NFPA 72.

B.

Demonstrate entire system meets performance requirements specified in


Article System Description.

C.

Perform tests in presence of code-enforcement authorities, Owner and


Engineer.

D.

Each smoke detector shall be individually field tested prior to installing device
at its designated location to ensure reliability after shipment and storage
conditions. A dated log indicating system address, type of device, sensitivity
and initials of technician performing test, using test equipment specifically
designed for that purpose, shall be prepared and kept for final acceptance
documentation. After testing detection devices, base shall be labeled with
system address, date, and initials of installing technician. Labeling shall not be
visible after installation is complete.

E.

Test wiring runs for continuity, short circuits, and grounds before system is
energized. Resistance, current, and voltage readings shall be made as work
progresses.
1.

2.

3.

Systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or


charts of tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on logging
form for readings, dates, and witnesses.
Notify Fire Marshal and Owner before start of any required tests.
Correct items found at variance with Drawings or Specification during
testing or inspection.
Deliver test reports to Fire Marshal and Owner as completed.

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Prepare final as-built Sequence of Operations Matrix (See Supplement at End


of Section) referencing each alarm input to every output function affected as a
result of an alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition on that. In case of outputs
programmed using more complex logic functions involving any, or, not,
count, time, and timer statements; complete output equation shall be
referenced in matrix.

G.

Prepare complete listing of device labels for alphanumeric annunciator


displays and logging printers prior to acceptance test.
1.

2.

3.

4.

H.

Test system wiring to demonstrate correct system response and correct


subsequent system operation in event of:
a.
Open, shorted, and grounded intelligent analog signaling line
circuit.
b.
Open, shorted, and grounded network signaling line circuit.
c.
Open, shorted, and grounded conventional initiating device
circuits.
d.
Primary power or battery disconnected.
Demonstrate system evacuation alarm indicating appliances as follows:
a.
Alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed.
b.
Audibility and visibility at required levels.
Demonstrate system onsite and offsite reporting functions as follows:
a.
Correct alarm custom message display, address, device type, date
and time transmitted, for each alarm input.
b.
Correct trouble custom message display, address, device type, date
and time transmitted, for each alarm input.
c.
Trouble signals received for disconnect.
Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows:
a.
Disconnect system primary power for a period of time as specified
herein; at end of period, alarm condition shall be created and
system shall perform as specified for period as specified.
b.
Restore system primary power for 48 hours and system-charging
current shall be normal trickle charge for fully charged battery
bank.
c.
Check system battery voltages and charging currents at fire alarm
control panel using test codes and LCD displays

In the event system fails to perform as specified and programmed during


acceptance test, test shall be terminated at discretion of acceptance inspector.
1.

Retest system, correcting deficiencies and providing test documentation


to acceptance inspector.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

I.

Upon completion of tests, complete and provide the following:


1.
2.

3.09

In event that software changes are required during acceptance test,


system manufacturer to compare edited program with original and shall
furnish utility program. Utility shall yield printed list of changes and
system functions, inputs and outputs affected by changes. Items listed by
program shall be minimum acceptable to be retested before calling for
resumption of acceptance test. Submit printed list and printer log of
retesting before scheduling of acceptance test.
Acceptance inspector may elect to require complete acceptance test to be
performed again if, in their opinion, modifications to system hardware
or software warrant complete retesting.

NFPA 72, Record of Completion, and Inspection and Testing Form.


Certification that final system meets UL.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Furnish manufacturers representative in accordance with Section 01 43 33,


Manufacturers Field Services, for the following services at site or classroom
as designated by Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time
excluded:
1.
2.

1 person-day for functional and performance testing.


1 person-day for prestartup classroom or site training.
END OF SECTION

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM


28 31 00 - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.

Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation


and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying; topsoil.

B.

Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or


protruding above ground surface.

C.

Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps,


buried logs, and roots greater than 2-inch caliper to a depth of 6 inches below
subgrade.

D.

Scalping: Removal of sod without removing more than upper 3 inches of


topsoil.

E.

Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is


completed.

F.

Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be


performed.

SUBMITTALS
A.

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.04

Action Submittals: Drawings clearly showing clearing, grubbing, and


stripping limits.

Obtain Engineers approval of staked clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits,


prior to commencing clearing, grubbing, and stripping.

SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING


A.

Prepare Site only after adequate erosion and sediment controls are in place.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

3.02

GENERAL
A.

Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for Site improvements within
limits shown or specified.

B.

Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal.

LIMITS
A.

As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits.


1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
B.
3.03

Excavation 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes.


Trench Excavation: 4 feet from trench centerline, regardless of actual
trench width.
Fill:
a.
Clearing and Grubbing: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill.
b.
Stripping 2 feet beyond toe of permanent fill.
Waste Disposal:
a.
Clearing: 2 feet beyond perimeter.
b.
Scalping and Stripping: Not required.
c.
Grubbing: Around perimeter as necessary for neat finished
appearance.
Structures: 10 feet outside of new structures.
Overhead Utilities:
a.
Clearing and Grubbing: Entire width of easements and rights-ofway.
b.
Scalping and Stripping: Wherever grading is required.
Other Areas: As shown.

Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits.

CLEARING
A.

Clear areas within limits shown or specified.

B.

Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated
for removal.

C.

Cut stumps not designated for grubbing flush with ground surface.

D.

Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface.

SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

GRUBBING
A.

3.05

3.06

3.07

Grub areas within limits shown or specified.

SCALPING
A.

Do not remove sod until after clearing and grubbing is completed and
resulting debris is removed.

B.

Scalp areas within limits shown or specified.

STRIPPING
A.

Do not remove topsoil until after scalping is completed.

B.

Strip areas within limits to minimum depths shown or specified. Do not


remove subsoil with topsoil.

C.

Stockpile strippings, meeting requirements of Section 32 91 13, Soil


Preparation, for topsoil, separately from other excavated material.

DISPOSAL
A.

Clearing and Grubbing Debris:


1.
2.
3.

Dispose of debris offsite.


Burning of debris onsite will not be allowed.
Woody debris may be chipped. Chips may be sold to Contractors
benefit or used for landscaping onsite as mulch or uniformly mixed with
topsoil, provided that resulting mix will be fertile and not support
combustion. Dispose of chips that are unsaleable or unsuitable for
landscaping or other uses with unchipped debris.

B.

Scalpings: As specified for clearing and grubbing debris.

C.

Strippings:
1.
2.

Dispose of strippings that are unsuitable for topsoil or that exceed


quantity required for topsoil offsite.
Stockpile topsoil in sufficient quantity to meet Project needs. Dispose of
excess strippings as specified for clearing and grubbing.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SITE CLEARING
31 10 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 23 13
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.

Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

B.

Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and


grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and
scarification and compaction of subgrade.

C.

Proof-Rolling: Testing of subgrade by compactive effort to identify areas that


will not support the future loading without excessive settlement.

D.

Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

E.

Relative Density: As defined in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

F.

Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing,


scalping of topsoil and excavation to grade prior to placement of fill, roadway
structure or base for floor slab.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.04

Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition;


Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; and Section 31 23 16, Excavation, prior to
subgrade preparation.

Notify Engineer when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof-rolling or


whenever compaction or proof-rolling is resumed after a period of extended
inactivity.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBGRADE PREPARATION
31 23 13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

3.02

3.03

GENERAL
A.

Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or
proof-rolling.

B.

Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross-section and uniformly compact


surface.

C.

Do not use sections of prepared ground surface as haul roads. Protect prepared
subgrade from traffic.

D.

Maintain prepared ground surface in finished condition until next course is


placed.

COMPACTION
A.

Under Earthfill: A minimum of three passes with a self-propelled compactor


weighing a minimum of 10 tons, or a loaded dump truck or similar
heavy-wheeled vehicle to form a firm, unyielding surface.

B.

Under Pavement Structure, Floor Slabs On Grade, or Granular Fill Under


Structures: A minimum of three passes with a self-propelled compactor
weighing a minimum of 10 tons to form a firm, unyielding surface.

TESTING
A.

3.04

Proof-roll subgrade with equipment specified in Article Compaction to detect


soft or loose subgrade or unsuitable material, as determined by Engineer.

CORRECTION
A.

Soft or Loose Subgrade: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16,


Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as
specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

B.

Unsuitable Material: Over excavate as specified in Section 31 23 16,


Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as
specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.
END OF SECTION

SUBGRADE PREPARATION
31 23 13 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 23 16
EXCAVATION
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

1.02

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.03

1.04

Excavation Plan, Detailing:


a.
Methods and sequencing of excavation.
b.
Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material.
c.
Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions.

Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation.

WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A.

Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than


32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely
thaws.

B.

Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or


backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper
compaction.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Demolition: Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00,


Demolition, prior to excavating.

B.

Clearing, Grubbing, and Stripping: Complete applicable Work specified in


Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to excavating.

C.

Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 31 23 19.01,


Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation.

D.

Excavation Support: Install and maintain shoring, as necessary to support


sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement
of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

3.02

GENERAL
A.

Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to


accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot,
except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or
minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar
items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be
deposited against earth.

B.

Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer.

C.

Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01 50 00,


Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Protection of Work and Property.

UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
A.

3.03

Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type,


nature, or condition of the materials encountered.

TRENCH WIDTH
A.

Minimum Width of Trenches:


1.

2.

3.
B.

3.04

Single Pipes, Conduits, Direct-Buried Cables, and Duct Banks:


a.
Less than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches.
b.
Greater than 4-inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches greater
than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct-buried
cable, or duct bank.
c.
Large Diameter: Outside diameter plus 36 inches.
Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench:
18 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct
banks, plus space between.
Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting.

Maximum Trench Width: Unlimited, unless otherwise shown or specified, or


unless excess width will cause damage to existing facilities, adjacent property,
or completed Work.

STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL


A.

Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until
material is needed.

EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

B.

Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are
readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be
clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated
position.

C.

Confine stockpiles to within easements, rights-of-way, and approved work


areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets.

D.

Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other


excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are
designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

E.

Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent


property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce
excessive settlement.

DISPOSAL OF SPOIL
A.

Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity


needed for fill or backfill, offsite.

B.

Dispose of debris resulting from removal of underground facilities as


specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition, for demolition debris.

C.

Dispose of debris resulting from removal of organic matter, trash, refuse, and
junk as specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, for clearing and grubbing
debris.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

EXCAVATION
31 23 16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 23 19.01
DEWATERING
PART 1

GENERAL (NOT USED)

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

GENERAL
A.

3.02

3.03

Remove and control water during periods when necessary to properly


accomplish Work.

SURFACE WATER CONTROL


A.

See Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls, Article Temporary


Controls.

B.

Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed.

DEWATERING SYSTEMS
A.

Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and


capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in the dry and to
lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest
point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water,
regardless of source, and until backfilled to final grade.

B.

Design and Operate Dewatering Systems:


1.
2.
3.

To prevent loss of ground as water is removed.


To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed
Work, or adjacent property.
To relieve artesian pressures and resultant uplift of excavation bottom.

C.

Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water


in event of component failure.

D.

Provide 100 percent emergency power backup with automatic startup and
switchover in event of electrical power failure.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DEWATERING
31 23 19.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

DISPOSAL OF WATER
A.

Obtain discharge permit for water disposal from authorities having


jurisdiction.

B.

Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required by regulatory


agencies, prior to discharge.

C.

Remove solids from treatment facilities and perform other maintenance of


treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency.

D.

Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not
cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed
Work, or adjacent property.
END OF SECTION

DEWATERING
31 23 19.01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 23 23
FILL AND BACKFILL
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.
1.02

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer Than
75-Micrometers (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing.
b.
C136, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
c.
D75, Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
d.
D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3
(600 kN-m/m3)).
e.
D1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of
Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
f.
D2488, Standard Practice for Description and Identification of
Soils (Visual- Manual Procedure).
g.
D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
h.
D4254, Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
i.
D6938, Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth).
State of Idaho Transportation Department, Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction, latest edition.
Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction (ISPWC), latest edition.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Relative Compaction:
1.
2.

Ratio, in percent, of as-compacted field dry density to laboratory


maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D698.
Apply corrections for oversize material to either as-compacted field dry
density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Optimum Moisture Content:


1.
2.

Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine


maximum dry density for relative compaction.
Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4-inch
sieve.

C.

Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on


maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and
minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254.

D.

Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required


demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil,
excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.

E.

Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase
of Work.

F.

Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

G.

Well-Graded:
1.
2.

3.
H.

A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof


of one or more sizes.
Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of
uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size
distribution parameters.
Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong
and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids.

Influence Area: Area within planes sloped downward and outward at


60-degree angle from horizontal measured from:
1.
2.
3.

1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs.


1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder.
0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts.

I.

Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated


borrow areas on or near Site.

J.

Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for


specified use.

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

B.
1.04

Informational Submittals: Manufacturers data sheets for compaction


equipment.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Notify Engineer when:


1.
2.
3.
4.

1.05

Ready to place fill or backfill on prepared subgrade.


Structure or tank is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling
operations are resumed after a period of inactivity.
Soft, loose, or unsuitable subgrade materials are encountered.
Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02 41 00, Demolition;


Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing; Section 31 23 16, Excavation; and
Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill.

B.

Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained


compressive strength, specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Obtain Engineers acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to
placing backfill.

C.

Backfill around water-holding structures only after completion of satisfactory


leakage tests as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

D.

Do not place fill materials (structural fill, granular fill, select structural fill, or
general fill, etc.) until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in
Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

PART 2
2.01

Samples: Imported material taken at source, if applicable.

PRODUCTS
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.

Gradation Tests: Perform a minimum of one gradation test per material type.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

2.03

2.04

2.05

GENERAL FILL AND GENERAL BACKFILL


A.

Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks larger than
3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and
other deleterious materials.

B.

Classifying as SP, SW, or SM in accordance with ASTM D2488.

STRUCTURAL FILL
A.

Structural fill shall consist of imported material or material from onsite


excavations that is selectively borrowed or screened to meet the requirements
herein.

B.

Structural fill shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications for


Highway Construction, Section 703.11, Aggregate for Granular Subbase. The
minimum R-value requirement does not apply and R-value testing is not
required.

SELECT STRUCTURAL FILL


A.

Select structural fill shall consist of imported material or material from onsite
excavations that is selectively borrowed or screened to meet the requirement
herein.

B.

Select structural fill shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction, Section 703.11, Aggregate for Granular Subbase,
except that no more than 2 percent shall pass the No. 200 sieve. The minimum
R-value requirement does not apply and R-value testing is not required.

GRANULAR FILL
A.

2.06

Granular fill shall consist of imported material meeting the requirements of


Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Section 703.04, Untreated
Aggregate Base, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size, Type B. The
minimum R-value requirement does not apply and R-value testing is not
required.

GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL


A.

Granular drain material shall consist of imported material meeting the


requirements of Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, Section
703.03, Coarse Aggregate for Concrete, Size No. 2b.

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING


A.

2.08

BASE COURSE ROCK


A.

2.09

Meeting the requirements of Granular Fill.

SOIL COVER OVER GEOTEXTILES


A.

Particle Size: Maximum 1 inch.

B.

Free of sharp angular pieces that may damage geotextile.

C.

The type specified for the specific site location uses as shown on the
Drawings.

PART 3
3.01

Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper


compaction.

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during
placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

B.

Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform
thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to
specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where
necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement
surfaces drained of water.

C.

During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each
structure and buried tank even.

D.

Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface


upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

E.

If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid.


Excavate trench for installation of item.
Install bedding, if applicable, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15,
Trench Backfill.
Install item.
Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as specified in
Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, before resuming filling or
backfilling specified in this section.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Tolerances:
1.
2.

G.

3.02

Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures,


pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of
fill or backfill material.

BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES


A.

Under Facilities and Beneath Concrete Slabs: Within influence area beneath
structures, pavements, curbs, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities,
backfill with structural fill to 6 inches below the bottom of facility and slab,
and then with granular fill to the bottom of facility and slab, unless otherwise
shown. Place structural fill in lifts of 8-inch maximum thickness and granular
fill in lifts of 6-inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of
98 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with
ASTM D698.

B.

Subsurface Drainage: Refer to Section 33 46 16, Underdrain System.

C.

Behind Retaining Walls:


1.
2.
3.

3.03

Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless


dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise.
Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage as shown. Reverse
slopes are not permitted.

Backfill with select structural fill within 2 feet of walls.


Backfill with structural fill beyond 2 feet of walls.
Place backfill in maximum 12-inch lifts and compact to minimum 95
percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM
D698.

GENERAL FILL AND GENERAL BACKFILL


A.

Outside Influence Areas beneath Structures, Tanks, Pavements, Curbs, Slabs,


Piping, and Other Facilities: Unless otherwise shown, place general fill and
general backfill as follows:
1.
2.
3.

Allow for 6-inch thickness of topsoil where required.


Maximum 12-inch-thick lifts.
Compact with a minimum of 3 passes of heavy earthmoving equipment
to form a firm, unyielding surface.

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

SITE TESTING
A.

Gradation:
1.
2.

3.
B.

In-Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement


of materials, test as follows:
1.

3.05

Place and Compact as specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

REPLACING OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL


A.

Replace excavation carried below grade lines or limits shown or established


by Engineer as follows:
1.

2.
3.
4.

3.07

Structural Fill, Select Structural Fill, and Granular Fill: One test for
every lift placed.

GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING


A.

3.06

Refer to Article Source Quality Control requiring a minimum of one test


per material type.
If test results indicate material does not meet Specification
requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures
are taken.
Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification
requirements.

Beneath Footings: Structural fill to no closer than 6 inches below the


bottom of footing elevation, then granular fill to the bottom of footing
elevation.
Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or
backfill.
Beneath Slabs-On-Grade: Structural fill to no closer than 6 inches below
the bottom of slab, then granular fill to the bottom of slab..
Trenches:
a.
Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material
or granular pipe base material, as specified in Section 31 23 23.15,
Trench Backfill.
b.
Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as
specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.

PLACING FILL OVER GEOSYNTHETICS


A.

Refer to Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FILL AND BACKFILL


31 23 23 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 23 23.15
TRENCH BACKFILL
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.

American Public Works Association (APWA): Uniform Color Code.


ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b.
C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
c.
C117, Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than
75 Micrometer (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing.
d.
C136, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
e.
C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
f.
C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
g.
C1012/C1012M, Standard Test Method for Length Change of
Hydraulic-Cement Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution.
h.
D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3
(600 kN-m/m3)).
i.
D1140, Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils
Finer than No. 200 (75 micrometer) Sieve.
j.
D2487, Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System).
k.
D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
l.
D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and
Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
m. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit,
and Plasticity Index of Soils.
n.
D4832, Standard Test Method for Preparation and Testing of
Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.1, Safety
Colors.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or


duct banks are placed.

B.

Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite.

C.

Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material.

D.

Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from
prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe,
conduit, cable or duct bank.

E.

Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and


installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of
bedding material.

F.

Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry


density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by
ASTM D698. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either ascompacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by
Engineer.

G.

Relative Density: As defined by ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.

H.

Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Engineer determines


to be suitable for a specific use.

I.

Well-Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or


lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when
compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free
from detrimental voids. Satisfying both of the following requirements, as
defined in ASTM D2487:
1.
2.

1.03

Coefficient of Curvature: Greater than or equal to 1 and less than or


equal to 3.
Coefficient of Uniformity: Greater than or equal to 4 for materials
classified as gravel, and greater than or equal to 6 for materials
classified as sand.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop Drawings: Manufacturers descriptive literature for marking tapes


and tracer wire.

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
GEOTEXTILE
A.

2.02

Catalog and manufacturers data sheets for compaction equipment.


Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to
delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated
materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted
prior to material delivery to Site.

As specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile.

MARKING TAPE
A.

Nondetectable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical


reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil.
Thickness: Minimum 5 mils.
Minimum Width: 3 inches.
Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering
imprinted continuously over entire length.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Reef Industries; Terra Tape.
b.
Mutual Industries; Non-detectable Tape.
c.
Presco; Non-detectable Tape.

Detectable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective


high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket.
Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils.
Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils.
Minimum Width: 3 inches.
Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1-inch high, permanent black lettering
imprinted continuously over entire length.
Joining Clips: Tin or nickel-coated furnished by tape manufacturer.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable.
b.
Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape.
c.
Presco; Detectable Tape.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code.


Color*

Facility

Red

Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables

Orange

Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit

Yellow

Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials

Green

Sewers and drain lines

Blue

Potable water

Purple

Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines

*As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code.


2.03

TRACER WIRE
A.

Material: Minimum 12-gauge solid copper or copper jacket with a steel core,
with high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or high-molecular weight
polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation suitable for direct bury.

B.

Splices: Use wire nut or lug suitable for direct burial as recommended by
tracer wire manufacturer.

C.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.04

TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL


A.

2.05

Copperhead Industries, LLC.


Performance Wire & Cable Inc.
Pro-line Safety Products Company.

Provide as specified and meeting the requirements of Structural Fill in Section


31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL


A.

Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material.

B.

Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as
determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock
within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless
otherwise specified.
1.

Duct Banks: 3/4-inch maximum particle size.

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

2.06

GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL


A.

2.07

Provide as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

CONCRETE BACKFILL
A.

2.09

Provide as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

GENERAL BACKFILL
A.

2.08

PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene
Wrap: 3/8-inch maximum particle size.
Pipe Under 18-Inch Diameter: 3/4-inch maximum particle size, except
1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe
under 3-inch diameter.
Pipe 18-Inch Diameter and Greater: 1-1/2-inch maximum particle size
for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned
or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe.
Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material.
Conduit and Direct-Buried Cable:
a.
Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200
sieve.
b.
Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges.
c.
Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve.
d.
If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that
passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in
accordance with ASTM D4318.

Provide as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)


A. Provide, select, and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between
50 psi and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832.
B. Materials:
1.
2.
3.

4.

Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or Type II.


Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, Size 7.
Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except
as modified herein:
a. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss on Ignition: Unless permitted otherwise,
maximum 3 percent.
Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.10

GRAVEL SURFACING ROCK


A.

2.11

TOPSOIL
A.

2.12

As specified in Section 32 11 23, Aggregate Base Courses.

As specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for:


1.
2.
3.

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
TRENCH PREPARATION
A.

Water Control:
1.
2.
3.

B.
3.02

General backfill.
Trench stabilization material.
Bedding and pipe zone material.

As specified in Section 31 23 19.01, Dewatering.


Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides
and bottom.
Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete.

Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that
falls into trench.

TRENCH BOTTOM
A.

Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material,
and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space
for bedding material if shown or specified.

B.

Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent


pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of
overexcavation, if any required.

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A.

Where shown and as specified in Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextile, except as


follows:
1.

2.
3.
3.04

3.05

Extend geotextile for full width of trench bottom and up the trench wall
to the top of the pipe zone, or base material for manholes and
miscellaneous structures.
Anchor geotextile trench walls prior to placing trench stabilization or
bedding material.
Provide 24-inch minimum overlap at joints.

TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION


A.

Rebuild trench bottom with trench stabilization material.

B.

Place material over full width of trench in 6-inch lifts to required grade,
providing allowance for bedding thickness.

C.

Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding
material prior to placing succeeding lifts.

BEDDING
A.

Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Engineer,


excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity.

B.

Place over full width of prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when
required depth exceeds 8 inches.

C.

Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface.

D.

Minimum Thickness: As follows:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

E.

Pipe Diameter 15 Inches and Smaller: 4 inches.


Pipe Diameter between 15 Inches and up to 36 Inches: 6 inches.
Pipe Diameter Larger than 36 Inches: 8 inches.
Conduit: 3 inches.
Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches.
Duct Banks: 3 inches.

Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch
to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to
provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct-buried
cable, or duct bank.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.06

F.

Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if


applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle.

G.

Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper


assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel
of pipe or conduit.

BACKFILL PIPE ZONE


A.

Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following:


1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their
movement during backfill operations.

C.

Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable,


between pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench.
1.
2.

3.07

Pipe: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise.


Conduit: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise.
Direct-Buried Cable: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise.
Duct Bank: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise.

Pipe 10-Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to
1/2 pipe diameter.
Pipe Over 10-Inch Diameter: Maximum 6-inch lifts.

D.

Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld
tamping bars supplemented by walking in and slicing material under
haunches with a shovel to ensure voids are completely filled before placing
each succeeding lift.

E.

Do not use power-driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material.

MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION


A.

Continuously install marking tape along centerline of buried piping, on top of


last lift of pipe zone material. Coordinate with piping installation drawings.
1.
2.

Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and


waterlines.
Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping.

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.08

3.09

TRACER WIRE INSTALLATION AND TESTING


A.

Install tracer wire continuously along centerline of nonmetallic buried piping.

B.

Attach wire to top of pipe using tape at maximum of 10-foot intervals. In


areas where depth of cover is excessive for allowing detection of tracer wire
with electronic pipe locator, install tracer wire within pipe backfill directly
above pipe centerline at a minimum depth of 3 feet.

C.

Install splices in accordance with manufacturers instructions for direct bury


applications. Tie ends of wire to be joined in a knot as required to reduce
tension on splice.

D.

Bring tracer wire to surface at each valve box, curb box, vault, air valve,
blowoff valve, hydrant, and pipeline marker. Tracer wire shall be brought to
surface at least every 1,000 feet. If distance between pipe appurtenances
exceeds 1,000 feet, install valve box to allow access to tracer wire. Mark valve
box cover with the word TRACER. Coil enough excess tracer wire at each
appurtenance to extend wire 12 inches above ground.

E.

Test continuity of tracer wire using electronic pipe locator in presence of


Engineer.

BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
B.

Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements.


Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction.
Do not allow backfill to free fall into trench or allow heavy, sharp
pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of
backfill has been provided over top of pipe.
Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at
least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe.
Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock
surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable.
Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for
adjacent trench, unless otherwise shown or specified.

Class A Backfill:
1.
2.

Place in lifts not exceeding thickness of 9 inches.


Mechanically compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent relative
compaction prior to placing succeeding lifts.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.10

3.11

3.12

REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL
A.

Replace topsoil in top 6 inches of backfilled trench.

B.

Maintain finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as
necessary to restore drainage.

MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL


A.

After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain surface of backfilled trench


even with adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed.

B.

Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as
necessary to keep surface of backfilled trench even with adjacent ground
surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep surface of backfilled
trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic
flow.

C.

Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain surface of


backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.

D.

Asphaltic Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt as specified in


Section 32 12 16, Asphalt Paving.

E.

Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep surface of
backfilled trench level with adjacent ground surface.

SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL
A.

Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench


backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill.
END OF SECTION

TRENCH BACKFILL
31 23 23.15 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 31 32 19.16
GEOTEXTILE
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:


1.

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
D737, Standard Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile
Fabrics.
b.
D4355, Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by
Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type
Apparatus.
c.
D4491, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of
Geotextiles by Permittivity.
d.
D4533, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Geotextiles.
e.
D4595, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method.
f.
D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and
Elongation of Geotextiles.
g.
D4716, Test Method for Determining the (In-Plane) Flow Rate
per Unit Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geosynthetic
Using a Constant Head.
h.
D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening
Size of a Geotextile.
i.
D4833, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of
Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products.
j.
D4884, Standard Test Method for Strength of Sewn or Thermally
Bonded Seams of Geotextiles.
k.
D4886, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of
Geotextiles (Sand Paper/Sliding Block Method).
l.
D5199, Standard Test Method for Measuring the Nominal
Thickness of Geosynthetics.
m. D5261, Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area
of Geotextiles.
n.
D6193, Standard Practice for Stitches and Seams.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

1.03

DEFINITIONS
A.

Fabric: Geotextile, a permeable geosynthetic comprised solely of textiles.

B.

Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Maximum of series of average


roll values representative of geotextile furnished.

C.

Minimum Average Roll Value (MinARV): Minimum of series of average roll


values representative of geotextile furnished.

D.

Nondestructive Sample: Sample representative of finished Work, prepared for


testing without destruction of Work.

E.

Overlap: Distance measured perpendicular from overlapping edge of one


sheet to underlying edge of adjacent sheet.

F.

Seam Efficiency: Ratio of tensile strength across seam to strength of intact


geotextile, when tested according to ASTM D4884.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

B.

1.04

Shop Drawings:
a.
Manufacturer material specifications and product literature.
b.
Description of proposed method of geotextile deployment; sewing
equipment and methods, if used; and provisions for holding
geotextile temporarily in place until permanently secured.
Samples:
a.
Geotextile: One-piece, minimum 18 inches long, taken across full
width of roll of each type and weight of geotextile furnished for
Project. Label each with brand name and furnish documentation
of lot and roll number from which each Sample was obtained.

Informational Submittals: Certifications from each geotextile manufacturer


that furnished products have specified property values. Certified property
values shall be either minimum or maximum average roll values, as
appropriate, for geotextiles furnished.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

Deliver each roll with sufficient information attached to identify it for


inventory and quality control.

B.

Handle products in manner that maintains undamaged condition.

GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

1.05

SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING


A.

Where geotextile is to be laid directly upon ground surface, first prepare


subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B.

Notify Engineer whenever geotextiles are to be placed. Do not place


geotextile without Engineers approval of underlying materials.

PART 2
2.01

Do not store products directly on ground. Ship and store geotextile with
suitable wrapping for protection against moisture and ultraviolet exposure.
Store geotextile in way that protects it from elements. If stored outdoors,
elevate and protect geotextile with waterproof cover.

PRODUCTS
NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE
A.

Nonwoven geotextile shall be composed of continuous or discontinuous


(staple) fibers held together through needle-punching, spun-bonding, thermalbonding, or resin-bonding.

B.

Unseamed Sheet Width: Minimum 12 feet.

C.

Nominal Weight per Square Yard: 8 oz per ASTM D5261.

D.

Physical Properties: Conform to requirements in Table No. 1.


Table No. 1
Physical Property Requirements for Nonwoven Geotextile
Property

Requirement

Test Method

Water Permittivity

1.5 sec.-1, MinARV

Apparent Opening Size


(AOS)

No. 80 U.S. Standard


Sieve Size, MaxARV

ASTM D4751

Grab Tensile Strength,


Machine Direction

200 lb/in, MinARV

ASTM D4632

Grab Elongation,
Machine Direction

50 percent, MaxARV

ASTM D4632

Trapezoid Tear Strength

80 lb, MinARV

ASTM D4533

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASTM D4491
(Constant Head)

GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

SEWING THREAD
A.

Polypropylene, polyester, or Kevlar thread.

B.

Durability: Equal to or greater than durability of geotextile sewn.

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
LAYING GEOTEXTILE
A.

3.02

JOINTS
A.

3.03

3.05

3.06

Provide 24-inch minimum overlap at joints.

SECURING GEOTEXTILE
A.

3.04

Lay and maintain geotextile smooth and free of tension, folds, wrinkles, or
creases.

Secure geotextile during installation as necessary with sandbags or other


means approved by Engineer.

PLACING PRODUCTS OVER GEOTEXTILE


A.

Before placing material over geotextile, notify Engineer. Do not cover


installed geotextile until after Engineer provides authorization to proceed.

B.

If tears, punctures, or other geotextile damage occurs during placement of


overlying products, remove overlying products as necessary to expose
damaged geotextile. Repair damage as specified in Article Repairing
Geotextile.

INSTALLING GEOTEXTILE IN TRENCHES


A.

Place geotextile in a way to completely envelope granular drain material to be


placed in trench and with specified overlap at joints. Overlap geotextile in
direction of flow. Place geotextile in a way and with sufficient slack for
geotextile to contact trench bottom and sides fully when trench is backfilled.

B.

After granular drain material is placed to required grade, fold geotextile over
top of granular drain material, unless otherwise shown. Maintain overlap until
overlying fill or backfill is placed.

REPAIRING GEOTEXTILE
A.

Repair or replace torn, punctured, flawed, deteriorated, or otherwise damaged


geotextile.

GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Repair Procedure:
1.
2.
3.

3.07

Place patch of undamaged geotextile over damaged area and at least


18 inches in all directions beyond damaged area.
Remove interfering material as necessary to expose damaged geotextile
for repair.
Sew patches or secure them with heat fusion tacking, or by other means
approved by Engineer.

REPLACING CONTAMINATED GEOTEXTILE


A.

Protect geotextile from contamination that would interfere, in Engineers


opinion, with its intended function. Remove and replace contaminated
geotextile with clean geotextile.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GEOTEXTILE
31 32 19.16 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO):
a.
T11, Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75m
(No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
b.
T27, Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
c.
T89, Standard Specification for Determining the Liquid Limit of
Soils.
d.
T90, Standard Specification for Determining the Plastic Limit and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
e.
T96, Standard Specification for Resistance to Degradation of
Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine.
f.
T99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density Relations of
Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 pound) Rammer and a 305 mm (12 in)
Drop.
g.
T180, Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of
Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18-in)
Drop.
h.
T190, Standard Specification for Resistance R-Value and
Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils.
i.
T265, Standard Method of Test for Laboratory Determination of
Moisture Content of Soils.
j.
T310, Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture
Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth).
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
C88, Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
b.
D1883, Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory Compacted Soils.
c.
D2419, Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
d.
D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

1.03

DEFINITIONS
A.

Completed Course: Compacted, unyielding, free from irregularities, with


smooth, tight, even surface, true to grade, line, and cross-section.

B.

Completed Lift: Compacted with uniform cross-section thickness.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
PART 2
2.01

Certified Test Results on Source Materials: Submit copies from


commercial testing laboratory 20 days prior to delivery of materials to
Project showing materials meeting the physical qualities specified.
Certified results of in-place density tests from independent testing
agency.

PRODUCTS
BASE COURSE OR LEVELING COURSE
A.

Physical Qualities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Abrasion, AASHTO T96: 35 percent maximum wear.


Fractured Face: 75 percent minimum particles.
Liquid Limit, AASHTO T89: Maximum 30 percent.
Plasticity Index, AASHTO T90: Maximum 6 percent. Nonplastic.
Sand Equivalency, ASTM D2419: 35 percent, minimum.

Gradation, AASHTO T27, Based on U.S. Standard Sieves:


Table 1
Gradation
Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Designation

(Square Opening)

Material
Base Course or
Leveling Course3/4 in
(Type 1)

Subbase Course 2in


(Type II)

100

90-100

25 mm (1")

100

19 mm (3/4")

90-100

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 2

55-83

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Table 1
Gradation
Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Designation

Material

(Square Opening)

Base Course or
Leveling Course3/4 in
(Type 1)

Subbase Course 2in


(Type II)

(No. 4)

40-65

30-60

(No. 8)

30-50

(No. 30)
75 m (No. 200)
2.02

2.03

3-9

0-8

SUBBASE COURSE
A.

Clean, tough, uniform quality, durable fragments of crushed rock, free from
flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces, or other objectionable matter
occurring either free or as coating on stone. Gradation as specified in Table 1.

B.

Physical Qualities: Same as for base course.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Perform tests necessary to locate acceptable source of materials meeting


specified requirements.

B.

Final approval of aggregate material will be based on test results of installed


materials.

C.

Should separation of coarse from fine materials occur during processing or


stockpiling, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct
uniformity in grading.

PART 3
3.01

10-25

EXECUTION
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.

As specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B.

Obtain Engineers acceptance of subgrade before placing base course or


surfacing material.

C.

Do not place base course or gravel surfacing in snow or on soft, muddy, or


frozen subgrade.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

3.02

EQUIPMENT
A.

3.03

Base Course or Gravel Surfacing: Place geotextile before placing rock


surfacing as specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, for fines
separation.

Compaction Equipment: Adequate in design and number to provide


compaction and to obtain specified density for each layer.

HAULING AND SPREADING


A.

Hauling Materials:
1.
2.
3.

B.

Spreading Materials:
1.
2.
3.

3.04

Do not haul over surfacing in process of construction.


Loads: Of uniform capacity.
Maintain consistent gradation of material delivered; loads of widely
varying gradations will be cause for rejection.

Distribute material to provide required density, depth, grade, and


dimensions with allowance for subsequent lifts.
Produce even distribution of material upon roadway or prepared surface
without segregation.
Should segregation of coarse from fine materials occur during placing,
immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity
in grading.

CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES
A.

Base Course or Gravel Surfacing:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 6 inches.


Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown.
Spread lift on preceding course to required cross-section.
Lightly blade and roll surface until thoroughly compacted.
Add keystone to achieve compaction and as required when aggregate
does not compact readily due to lack of fines or natural cementing
properties, as follows:
a.
Use base course or gravel surfacing as keystone.
b.
Spread evenly on top of base course, using spreader boxes or chip
spreaders.
c.
Roll surface until keystone is worked into interstices of base
course without excessive displacement.

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.
6.
B.

Subbase Course:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

3.05

3.06

Continue operation until course has become thoroughly keyed,


compacted, and will not creep or move under roller.
Blade or broom surface to maintain true line, grade, and cross-section.

Place geotextile prior to subbase coarse as specified in Section


31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill.
Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 9 inches.
Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown.
Spread on preceding course in accordance with cross-section shown.
Blade lightly and roll surface until material is thoroughly compacted.

ROLLING AND COMPACTION


A.

Commence compaction of each layer of base after spreading operations and


continue until density of 95 percent of maximum density has been achieved as
determined by AASHTO T99.

B.

Roll each layer of material until material does not creep under roller before
succeeding layer is applied.

C.

Commence rolling at outer edges and continue toward center; do not roll
center of road first.

D.

Apply water as needed to obtain specified densities.

E.

Place and compact each lift to required density before succeeding lift is
placed.

F.

Remove floating or loose stone from surface of preceding course before


placing leveling course.

G.

Surface Defects: Remedy by loosening and rerolling. Reroll entire area,


including surrounding surface, until thoroughly compacted.

H.

Finished surface shall be true to grade and crown before proceeding with
surfacing.

SURFACE TOLERANCES
A.

Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and crosssection at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted.

B.

Finished Surface of Untreated Aggregate Base Course: Within plus or minus


0.04 foot of grade shown at any individual point.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Gravel Surfacing: Within 0.04 foot from lower edge of 10-foot straightedge
placed on finished surface, parallel to centerline. Overall Average: Within
plus or minus 0.01 foot from crown and grade specified.

D.

Gravel Resurfacing:
1.
2.
3.

3.07

Replace gravel surfacing on areas that were gravel surfaced prior to


construction
Provide compacted gravel surfacing to depth equal to original, but not
less than 4 inches.
Leave each surface in as good or better condition as it was before start
of construction.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

In-Place Density Tests:


1.
2.
3.

Provide Inspector at least 2 hours advance notification prior to testing.


Show proof that areas meet specified requirements before identifying
density test locations.
Refer to Table 2 for minimum sampling and testing requirements for
aggregate base course and surfacing.
Table 2
Minimum Sampling and Testing Requirements
Property

3.08

Test Method

Frequency

Sampling
Point

Gradation

AASHTO T11 and


AASHTO T27

One sample every 500


tons but at least every
4 hours of production

Roadbed after
processing

Moisture Density
(Maximum
Density)

AASHTO T99,
Method D

One test for every


aggregate grading
produced

Production
output or
stockpile

In-Place Density
and Moisture
Content

AASHTO T310 , and


AASHTO T265 for
moisture content

One for each 500 ton


but at least every
10,000 sq ft of area

In-place
completed,
compacted
area

CLEANING
A.

Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and staging
areas of all excess aggregate.
END OF SECTION

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES


32 11 23 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO):
a.
M17, Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Paving Mixtures.
b.
M81, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid Curing
Type).
c.
M82, Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium
Curing Type).
d.
M140, Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.
e.
M208, Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt.
f.
T166, Standard Method of Test for Bulk Specific Gravity of
Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry
Specimens.
g.
T176 Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded
Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.
h.
T230, Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of
Pavement Compaction of Bituminous Aggregate Mixtures.
i.
T245, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus.
j.
T246, Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Deformation and
Cohesion of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of Hveem Apparatus.
k.
T247, Standard Method of Test for Preparation of Test Specimens
of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of California Kneading
Compactor.
l.
T283, Standard Method of Test for Resistance of Compacted
Bituminous Mixture to Moisture Induced Damage.
m. T304, Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of
Fine Aggregate (Method A).
Asphalt Institute (AI):
a.
Manual Series No. 2 (MS-2), Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete.
b.
Superpave Series No. 2 (SP-2), Superpave Mix Design.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
D2041, Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.
d.
e.
1.02

1.03

D4318, Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and


Plasticity Index of Soils.
D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat
and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
D5821, Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Combined Aggregate: All mineral constituents of asphalt concrete mix,


including mineral filler and separately sized aggregates.

B.

RAP: Reclaimed asphalt pavement.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

Asphalt Concrete Mix Formula:


a.
Submit minimum of 15 days prior to start of production.
b.
Submittal to include the following information:
1)
Gradation and portion for each aggregate constituent used in
mixture to produce a single gradation of aggregate within
specified limits.
2)
Bulk specific gravity for each aggregate constituent.
3)
Measured maximum specific gravity of mix at optimum
asphalt content determined in accordance with
ASTM D2041.
4)
Properties as stated in this Section for at least four different
asphalt contents other than optimum, two below optimum,
and two above optimum.
5)
Percent of asphalt lost due to absorption by aggregate.
6)
Index of Retained Strength (TSR) at optimum asphalt
content as determined by AASHTO T283.
7)
Percentage of asphalt cement, to nearest 0.1 percent, to be
added to mixture.
8)
Optimum mixing temperature.
9)
Optimum compaction temperature.
10) Temperature-viscosity curve of asphalt cement to be used.
11) Brand name of any additive to be used and percentage
added to mixture.

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.
5.

1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Qualifications:
1.
2.

1.05

Test Report for Asphalt Cement:


a.
Submit minimum 10 days prior to start of production.
b.
Show appropriate test method(s) for each material and the test
results.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for the following
materials:
a.
Aggregate: Gradation, source test results as defined in this
Section.
b.
Asphalt for Binder: Type, grade, and viscosity-temperature curve.
c.
Prime Coat: Type and grade of asphalt.
d.
Tack Coat: Type and grade of asphalt.
e.
Additives.
f.
Mix: Conforms to job-mix formula.
Statement of qualification for independent testing laboratory.
Test Results:
a.
Mix design.
b.
Asphalt concrete core.
c.
Gradation and asphalt content of uncompacted mix.
d.
Field density.
e.
Quality control.

Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329.


Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be prepared by approved certified
independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt
technician.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when


ground temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or air temperature is lower than
40 degrees F. Measure ground and air temperature in shaded areas away from
heat sources or wet surfaces.

B.

Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when


application surface is wet.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.

Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade Css-1, CSS-1h conforming to AASHTO


M208.

B.

Sand (Blotter Material): Clean, dry, with 100 percent passing No. 4 sieve, and
a maximum of 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.

ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX


A.

General:
1.
2.

Mix formula shall not be modified except with written approval of


Engineer.
Source Changes:
a.
Should material source(s) change, establish new asphalt concrete
mix formula before new material(s) is used.
b.
Perform check tests of properties of plant-mix bituminous
materials on first day of production and as requested by Engineer
or Owner to confirm that properties are in compliance with design
criteria.
c.
Make adjustments in gradation or asphalt content as necessary to
meet design criteria.

B.

Composition: Hot-plant mix of aggregate, mineral filler if required, and


paving grade asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized,
uniformly graded, and combined in such proportions that resulting mixture
meets grading requirements of mix formula.

C.

Aggregate:
1.
2.

3.

General: RAP material may be used up to a maximum of 15 percent by


total weight. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/4 inch.
Coarse:
a.
Material retained on a No. 8 sieve.
b.
Minimum 75 percent by weight of individual pieces having two or
more fractured faces, and 90 percent by weight having at least one
fractured face.
Fine:
a.
Material passing a No. 8 sieve.
b.
Clean, sound, durable, angular shaped particles produced by
crushing.
c.
Plasticity Index: Maximum 6.

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.
4.
5.

D.

Mineral Filler: In accordance with AASHTO M17.

E.

Asphalt Cement: Paving Grade 64-28.

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Traffic Control:
1.
2.

B.
3.02

3.03

Liquid Limit: Maximum 25, when tested in accordance with


ASTM D4318.
Natural Sand: Shall not be used.
All tests necessary for the Contractor to locate a source of aggregate that
meets the requirements of this Section shall be made by the Contractor.
Approval of the source of aggregate does not relieve the Contractor in
any way of the responsibility to deliver to the Job Site aggregate that
meets the requirements specified herein. Aggregate may be provided in
a single stockpile if it meets all other requirements of aggregate.

In accordance with Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and


Controls.
Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated
or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt.

Driveways: Repave driveways from which pavement was removed. Leave


driveways in as good or better condition than before start of construction.

LINE AND GRADE


A.

Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of


underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness.

B.

Shoulders: Construct to line, grade, and cross-section shown.

PREPARATION
A.

Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade Preparation.

B.

Thoroughly coat edges of contact surfaces (curbs, manhole frames) with


emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent
staining of adjacent surfaces.

C.

Sawcut a minimum of 1 foot width (or as shown on the plans) at meet lines of
existing pavement surfaces, immediately prior to placing asphalt concrete, to
remove damaged or broken pavement and to provide a smooth edge for
joining the new pavement. The Contractor is responsible for re-cutting edges

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

that are damaged or broken prior to placing asphalt, at the Contractors


expense.
3.04

PAVEMENT APPLICATION
A.

General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in


conformance with this section.

B.

Tack Coat:
1.
2.
3.
4.

C.

Apply uniformly to clean, dry surfaces avoiding overlapping of


applications.
Do not apply more tack coat than necessary for the days paving
operation.
Touch up missed or lightly coated surfaces and remove excess material.
Application Rate: Minimum 0.05 to 0.15 gallon of asphalt (residual if
diluted emulsified asphalt) per square yard of surface area.

Pavement Mix:
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

Prior to Paving:
a.
Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter.
b.
Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement
mix.
Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in one single lift.
Compacted Lift Thickness:
a.
Minimum: Twice maximum aggregate size, but in no case less
than 2 inch.
b.
Maximum: 3 inches.
Total Compacted Thickness: As shown.
Apply such that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical.
Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not
scatter material over finished surface.
Joints:
a.
Offset edge of each layer a minimum of 6 inches so joints are not
directly over those in underlying layer.
b.
Offset longitudinal joints in roadway pavements so longitudinal
joints in wearing layer coincide with pavement centerlines and
lane divider lines.
c.
Form transverse joints by cutting back on previous days run to
expose full vertical depth of layer.
Succeeding Lifts: Apply tack coat to pavement surface between each
lift.

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.

D.

Compaction:
1.
2.

E.

Roll until roller marks are eliminated and minimum density of percent
of mix design unit weight at optimum asphalt content is obtained.
Joint Compaction:
a.
Place top or wearing layer as continuously as possible.
b.
Pass roller over unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when
placing of mix is discontinued long enough to permit mixture to
become chilled.
c.
Cut back previously compacted mixture when Work is resumed to
produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of layer.
d.
Cut away waste material and lay new mix against fresh cut.

Tolerances:
1.

2.

3.
4.

3.05

After placement of pavement, seal meet line by painting a minimum of


6 inches on each side of joint with cut-back or emulsified asphalt. Cover
immediately with sand.

General: Conduct measurements for conformity with crown and grade


immediately after initial compression. Correct variations immediately
by removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling.
Completed Surface or Wearing Layer Smoothness:
a.
Uniform texture, smooth, and uniform to crown and grade.
b.
Maximum Deviation: 1/8 inch from lower edge of a 12-foot
straightedge, measured continuously parallel and at right angle to
centerline.
c.
If surface of completed pavement deviates by more than twice
specified tolerances, remove and replace wearing surface.
Transverse Slope Maximum Deviation: 1/4 inch in 12 feet from rate of
slope shown.
Finished Grade:
a.
Perform field differential level survey on maximum 50-foot grid
and along grade breaks.
b.
Maximum Deviation: 0.02 foot from grade shown.

PATCHING
A.

Preparation:
1.
2.

Remove damaged, broken, or unsound asphalt concrete adjacent to


patches. Trim to straight lines exposing smooth, sound, vertical edges.
Prepare patch subgrade as specified in Section 31 23 13, Subgrade
Preparation.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Application:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Compaction:
1.

2.

3.
D.

Roll patches with power rollers capable of providing compression of


200 to 300 pounds per linear inch. Use hand tampers where rolling is
impractical.
Begin rolling top course at edges of patches, lapping adjacent asphalt
surface at least 1/2 the roller width. Progress toward center of patch
overlapping each preceding track by at least 1/2 width of roller.
Make sufficient passes over entire area to remove roller marks and to
produce desired finished surface.

Tolerances:
1.
2.

3.06

Patch Thickness: 3 inches or thickness of adjacent asphalt concrete,


whichever is greater.
Place asphalt concrete mix across full width of patch in layers of equal
thickness.
Spread and grade asphalt concrete with hand tools or mechanical
spreader, depending on size of area to be patched.

Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown
of adjacent surface.
Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus 1/4 inch
when straightedge is laid across patched area between edges of new
pavement and surface of old surfacing.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

General: Provide services of approved certified independent testing laboratory


to conduct tests.

B.

Field Density Tests:


1.
2.
3.

Perform tests from cores or sawed samples in accordance with


AASHTO T230 and AASHTO T166.
Measure with properly operating and calibrated nuclear density gauge in
accordance with ASTM D2950.
Maximum Density: In accordance with ASTM D2041, using sample of
mix taken prior to compaction from same location as density test
sample.

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Testing Frequency:
1.

2.

Quality Control Tests:


a.
Asphalt Content, Aggregate Gradation: Once per every 500 tons
of mix or once every 4 hours, whichever is greater.
b.
Mix Design Properties, Measured Maximum (Rices) Specific
Gravity: Once every 1,000 tons or once every 8 hours, whichever
is greater.
Density Tests: Once every 500 tons of mix or once every 4 hours,
whichever is greater.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ASPHALT PAVING
32 12 16 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 32 16 00
CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.

4.
1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals: Complete data on concrete mix, including aggregate


gradations and admixtures in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.

1.03

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO): T 99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density
Relations of Soils Using a 2.5 kg (5.5 pound) Rammer and a 305 mm
(12 in.) Drop.
American Concrete Institute (ACI): 304R, Guide for Measuring,
Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
b.
C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete.
c.
D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
Standard Specification: State of Idaho.

Curing Compound: Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance and


application instructions.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the State of Idaho Standard


Specifications for Highway Construction.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CURBS AND GUTTERS


32 16 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.

2.02

EXPANSION JOINT FILLER


A.

2.03

2.04

A.

As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B.

Aggregate gradation should be 3/4-inchmaximum as defined in Section


03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C.

Slump: 2 inches to 4 inches.

CURING COMPOUND

PART 3

Liquid membrane forming, clear or translucent, suitable for spray application


and meeting ASTM C309, Type 1.
EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

3.02

Preformed asphalt-impregnated, expansion joint material meeting


ASTM D994, 1/2-inch thick.

CONCRETE

A.

3.01

Conform to the requirements of the referenced Standard Specification.

Perform Work in accordance with the referenced Standard Specification.

FORMWORK
A.

Lumber Materials:
1.

2.

2-inch dressed dimension lumber, or metal of equal strength, straight,


free from defects that would impair appearance or structural quality of
completed curb and sidewalk.
1-inch dressed lumber or plywood may be used where short-radius
forms are required.

B.

Metals: Steel in new undamaged condition.

C.

Setting Forms:
1.
2.

Construct forms to shape, lines, grades, and dimensions.


Stake securely in place.

CURBS AND GUTTERS


32 16 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Bracing:
1.
2.

E.

Tolerances:
1.
2.

3.03

3.04

Brace forms to prevent change of shape or movement resulting from


placement.
Construct short-radius curved forms to exact radius.

Do not vary tops of forms from gradeline more than 1/8-inch when
checked with 10-foot straightedge.
Do not vary alignment of straight sections more than 1/8-inch in 10 feet.

PLACING CONCRETE
A.

Prior to placing concrete, remove water from excavation and debris and
foreign material from forms.

B.

Place concrete as soon as possible, and within 1-1/2 hours after adding cement
to mix without segregation or loss of ingredients, and without splashing.

C.

Place, process, finish, and cure concrete in accordance with applicable


requirements of ACI 304, and this section. Wherever requirements differ, the
more stringent shall govern.

D.

To compact, vibrate until concrete becomes uniformly plastic.

CURB CONSTRUCTION
A.

Construct ramps at pedestrian crossings.

B.

Expansion Joints: Place at maximum 45-foot intervals and at the beginning


and end of curved portions of curb and at connections to existing curbs. Install
expansion joint filler at each joint.

C.

Curb Facing: Do not allow horizontal joints within 7 inches from top of curb.

D.

Contraction Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Maximum 15-foot intervals in curb.


Provide open joint type by inserting thin, oiled steel sheet vertically in
fresh concrete to force coarse aggregate away from joint.
Insert steel sheet to full depth of curb.
Remove steel sheet with sawing motion after initial set has occurred in
concrete and prior to removing front curb form.
Finish top of curb with steel trowel and finish edges with steel edging
tool.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CURBS AND GUTTERS


32 16 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Front Face:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
F.

Backfill curb with earth upon completion of curing period, but not before
7 days has elapsed since placing concrete.
1.
2.

3.05

Remove front form and finish exposed surfaces when concrete has set
sufficiently to support its own weight.
Finish formed face by rubbing with burlap sack or similar device to
produce uniformly textured surface, free of form marks, honeycomb,
and other defects.
Remove and replace defective concrete.
Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces of curb upon completion of
finishing.
Continue curing for minimum of 5 days.

Backfill shall be free from rocks 2 inches and larger and other foreign
material.
Compact backfill firmly.

SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION
A.

Thickness:
1.
2.

B.

4 inches in walk areas.


6 inches in driveway areas.

Connection to Existing Sidewalk:


1.
2.
3.

Remove old concrete back to an existing contraction joint.


Clean the surface.
Apply a neat cement paste immediately prior to placing new sidewalk.

C.

Expansion Joints: Place in adjacent curb, where sidewalk ends at curb, and
around posts, poles, or other objects penetrating sidewalk. Install expansion
joint filler at each joint.

D.

Contraction Joints:
1.
2.
3.

Provide transversely to walks at locations opposite contraction joints in


curb.
Dimensions: 3/16-inch by 1-inch weakened plane joints.
Construct straight and at right angles to surface of walk.

CURBS AND GUTTERS


32 16 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Broom surface with fine-hair broom at right angles to length of walk


and tool at edges, joints, and markings.
Mark walks transversely at 5-foot intervals with jointing tool; finish
edges with rounded steel edging tool.
Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces upon completion of
finishing.
Protect sidewalk from damage and allow to cure for at least 7 days.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CURBS AND GUTTERS


32 16 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 32 91 13
SOIL PREPARATION
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

B.

Certified Topsoil Analysis Reports:


a.
Indicate quantities of materials necessary to bring onsite topsoil
into compliance with textural/gradation requirements.
b.
Indicate quantity of lime, quantity and analysis of fertilizer, and
quantity and type of soil additive.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

PART 2
2.01

Samples: Representative of stockpiled or imported topsoil.

Informational Submittals:
1.

1.03

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
C33/C33M, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b.
C602, Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials.
c.
D2974, Standard Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic
Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils.
d.
D5268, Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping
Purposes.

Perform Work specified in Section 31 10 00, Site Clearing, prior to


performing Work specified under this section.
PRODUCTS

TOPSOIL
A.

General: Natural, friable, sandy loam, obtained from well-drained areas, free
from objects larger than 1-1/2 inches maximum dimension, and free of
subsoil, roots, grass, other foreign matter, hazardous or toxic substances, and
deleterious material that may be harmful to plant growth or may hinder
grading, planting, or maintenance.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.
2.02

Source: Stockpile material onsite, in accordance with Section 31 10 00, Site


Clearing.

LIME
A.

Composition: Ground limestone with not less than 85 percent total carbonates,
ASTM C602.

B.

Gradation:
1.
2.
3.

2.03

Minimum 50 percent passing No. 100 sieve.


Minimum 90 percent passing No. 20 sieve.
Coarser material acceptable provided rates of application are increased
proportionately on basis of quantities passing No. 100 sieve.

SOIL ADDITIVES
A.

Sawdust or Ground Bark:


1.
2.

B.

Peat:
1.

C.

Nontoxic, of uniform texture, and subject to slow decomposition when


mixed with soil.
Nitrogen-treated, or if untreated mix with minimum 0.15 pound of
ammonium nitrate or 0.25 pound of ammonium sulfate per cubic foot of
loose material.

Composition: Natural residue formed by decomposition of reeds,


sedges, or mosses in a freshwater environment, free from lumps, roots,
and stones.
a.
Organic Matter: Not less than 90 percent on a dry weight basis as
determined by ASTM D2974.
b.
Moisture Content: Maximum 65 percent by weight at time of
delivery.

Fertilizer:
1.

Natural:
a.
Manure:
1)
Well-rotted, stable or cattle manure, free from weed seed
and refuse.
2)
Maximum 50 percent sawdust or shavings by volume.
3)
Age: Minimum 4 months; maximum 2 years.

SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

D.
2.04

PART 3

3.02

Sand: Fine Aggregates as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place


Concrete.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.01

Commercial:
a.
Commercial, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for
application with equipment designed for that purpose.
b.
Contain the following minimum percentage of plant food by
weight:
1)
Summer Mix:
a)
Nitrogen: 20 percent.
b)
Phosphoric Acid: 10 percent.
c)
Potash: 10 percent.
2)
Winter Mix:
a)
Nitrogen: 16 percent.
b)
Phosphoric Acid: 8 percent.
c)
Potash: 0 percent.

Topsoil Analysis/Testing: Performed by county or state soil testing service or


approved certified independent testing laboratory.
EXECUTION

SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A.

Apply lime at the rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet to subgrade before
tilling.

B.

Scarify subgrade to minimum depth of 6 inches where topsoil is to be placed.

C.

Remove stones over 2-1/2 inches in any dimension, sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous material.

D.

Limit preparation to areas which will receive topsoil within 2 days after
preparation.

TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
A.

Do not place topsoil when subsoil or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or


otherwise detrimental to the Work.

B.

Mix soil amendments, lime, and other soil additives, identified in analysis
reports with topsoil before placement or spread on topsoil surface and mix

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

thoroughly into entire depth of topsoil before planting or seeding. Delay


mixing of fertilizer if planting or seeding will not occur within 3 days.
C.

Uniformly distribute to within 1/2 inch of final grades. Fine grade topsoil
eliminating rough or low areas and maintaining levels, profiles, and contours
of subgrade.

D.

Remove stones exceeding 1-1/2-inch diameter, roots, sticks, debris, and


foreign matter during and after topsoil placement.

E.

Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from Site. Grade stockpile area as
necessary and place in condition acceptable for planting or seeding.
END OF SECTION

SOIL PREPARATION
32 91 13 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 32 92 00
TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
DEFINITIONS
A.

Maintenance Period: Begin maintenance immediately after each area is


planted (seed, or sod) and continue for a period of 8 weeks after all planting
under this section is completed.

B.

Satisfactory Stand: Lawn or section of lawn that has:


1.
2.
3.

1.02

No bare spots larger than 3 square feet.


Not more than 10 percent of total area with bare spots larger than
1 square foot.
Not more than 15 percent of total area with bare spots larger than
6 square inches.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals: Product labels/data sheets.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.
4.

Seed: Certification of seed analysis, germination rate, and inoculation:


a.
Certify that each lot of seed has been tested by a testing laboratory
certified in seed testing, within 6 months of date of delivery.
Include with certification:
1)
Name and address of laboratory.
2)
Date of test.
3)
Lot number for each seed specified.
4)
Test Results: (i) name, (ii) percentages of purity and of
germination, and (iii) weed content for each kind of seed
furnished.
b.
Mixtures: Proportions of each kind of seed.
Seed Inoculant Certification: Bacteria prepared specifically for legume
species to be inoculated.
Certification of sod; include source and harvest date of sod, and sod
seed mix.
Description of required maintenance activities and activity frequency.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION


A.

Seed:
1.

2.
B.

Sod:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.
1.04

Do not harvest if sod is excessively dry or wet to the extent survival may
be adversely affected.
Harvest and deliver sod only after laying bed is prepared for sodding.
Roll or stack to prevent yellowing.
Deliver and lay within 24 hours of harvesting.
Keep moist and covered to protect from drying from time of harvesting
until laid.

Hydroseeding Mulch: Mark package of wood fiber mulch to show air dry
weight.

WEATHER RESTRICTIONS
A.

1.05

Furnish in standard containers with seed name, lot number, net weight,
percentages of purity, germination, and hard seed and maximum weed
seed content, clearly marked for each container of seed.
Keep dry during storage.

Perform Work under favorable weather and soil moisture conditions as


determined by accepted local practice.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Complete Work prepare topsoil as specified in Section 32 91 13, Soil


Preparation, before starting Work of this section.

B.

Complete Work under this section within 10 days following completion of soil
preparation.

C.

Notify Engineer at least 3 days in advance of:


1.
2.

D.

Each material delivery.


Start of planting activity.

Planting Season: March 15 and September 15.

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.06

MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.

Contractor: Perform maintenance operations during maintenance period to


include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
FERTILIZER
A.

Commercial, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application


with equipment designed for that purpose. Minimum percentage of plant food
by weight.

B.

Application Rates: Determined by soil analysis results.

C.

Mix:
1.
2.
3.

D.
2.02

Watering: Keep surface moist.


Washouts: Repair by filling with topsoil, liming, fertilizing, seeding, and
mulching.
Mulch: Replace wherever and whenever washed or blown away.
Mowing: Mow to 2 inches after grass height reaches 3 inches, and mow
to maintain grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches.
Reseed unsatisfactory areas or portions thereof immediately at the end of
the maintenance period if a satisfactory stand has not been produced.
Reseed/replant during next planting season if scheduled end of
maintenance period falls after September 15.
Reseed/replant entire area if satisfactory stand does not develop by
July 1 of the following year.

Nitrogen: 10.
Phosphoric Acid: 10.
Potash: 10.

Top Dress Type: As recommended by local authority.

SEED
A.

Fresh, clean new-crop seed that complies with the tolerance for purity and
germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America.

B.

Seeds of Legumes: Inoculated with pure culture of nitrogen-fixing bacteria


prepared specifically for legume species in accordance with inoculant
manufacturers instructions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

D.
2.03

Summer Seed Mix for lawn Area(s):


Proportion By Weight

Confetti Perennial Rye


Grass

30%

Academy Perennial Rye


Grass

30%

Kentucky Blue Grass

25%

Creeping Red Fescue

15%

Winter Protective Seed: Annual ryegrass.

SOD
A.

Strongly rooted pads, capable of supporting own weight and retaining size and
shape when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on upper 10 percent of
pad.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.04

Species

Grass Height: Normal.


Strip Size: Suppliers standard.
Soil Thickness: Uniform; 1 inch plus or minus 1/4 inch at time of
cutting.
Age: Not less than 10 months or more than 30 months.
Condition: Healthy, green, moist; free of diseases, nematodes and
insects, and of undesirable grassy and broadleaf weeds. Yellow sod, or
broken pads, or torn or uneven ends will not be accepted.

HYDROSEEDING MULCH
A.

Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch:


1.
2.
3.

4.

Specially processed wood fiber containing no growth or germination


inhibiting factors.
Dyed a suitable color to facilitate inspection of material placement.
Manufactured such that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with
water, the material fibers will become uniformly suspended to form
homogenous slurry.
When hydraulically sprayed on ground, material will allow absorption
and percolation of moisture.

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.

Grade areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
1.
2.
3.

3.02

3.03

Roll and rake, remove ridges, fill depressions to meet finish grades.
Limit such Work to areas to be planted within immediate future.
Remove debris, and stones larger than 1-1/2-inch diameter, and other
objects that may interfere with planting and maintenance operations.

B.

Moisten prepared areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface to dry off before seeding. Do not create muddy soil.

C.

Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed


after preparation and before planting.

FERTILIZER
A.

Apply evenly over area in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Mix


into top 2 inches of topsoil, when applied by broad cast method.

B.

Application Rate: Determined by soil test results in accordance with


Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

SEEDING
A.

Start within 2 days of preparation completion.

B.

Hydroseed or mechanical seeding is acceptable.

C.

Mechanical: Broadcast seed in two different directions, compact seeded area


with cultipacter or roller.
1.
2.
3.
4.

D.

Sow seed at uniform rate of 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet.


Use Brillion type seeder.
Broadcasting will be allowed only in areas too small to use Brillion type
seeder. Where seed is broadcast, increase seeding rate 20 percent.
Roll with ring roller to cover seed, and water with fine spray.

Hydroseeding:
1.
2.
3.

Application Rate: 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet.


Apply on moist soil, only after free surface water has drained away.
Prevent drift and displacement of mixture into other areas.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.

3.04

E.

Mulching: Apply uniform cover of wood fiber mulch at rate of 1,500 pounds
per acre.

F.

Water: Apply with fine spray after mulching to saturate top 4 inches of soil.

SODDING
A.

Do not plant dormant sod, or when ground is frozen.

B.

Lay sod to form solid mass with tightly fitted joints; butt ends and sides, do
not overlap.
1.
2.
3.

4.

3.05

Upon application, allow absorption and percolation of moisture into


ground.
Mixtures: Seed and fertilizer may be mixed together, apply within
30 minutes of mixing to prevent fertilizer from burning seed.

Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses.


Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod.
Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade; work sifted soil
into minor cracks between pieces of sod, remove excess to avoid
smothering adjacent grass.
Complete sod surface true to finished grade, even, and firm.

C.

Water sod with fine spray immediately after planting. During first week, water
daily or more frequently to maintain moist soil to depth of 4 inches.

D.

Apply top dress fertilizer at recommended rate.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

8 weeks after seeding is complete and on written notice from Contractor,


Engineer will, within 15 days of receipt, determine if a satisfactory stand has
been established.

B.

If a satisfactory stand has not been established, Engineer will make another
determination after written notice from Contractor following the next growing
season.
END OF SECTION

TURF AND GRASSES


32 92 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 33 05 01.01
WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):


a.
B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings.
b.
B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
c.
BPVC SEC IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a.
C200, Steel Water Pipe - 6 In. (150 mm) and Larger.
b.
C205, Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel
Water Pipe - 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger - Shop Applied.
c.
C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
d.
C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In.
Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm.
e.
C208, Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings.
f.
M11, Steel Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation.
American Welding Society (AWS):
a.
A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and
Nondestructive Examination.
b.
A3.0M/A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions Including
Terms for Adhesive Bonding, Brazing, Soldering, Thermal
Cutting, and Thermal Spraying.
c.
D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
d.
QC 1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
b.
A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
c.
A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.
d.
A370, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical
Testing of Steel Products.
e.
E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in
Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 9001:2000,
Quality Management Systems - Requirements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.
7.
1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

Fittings: Including, but not limited to fittings, closure pieces, bends, reducers,
tees, wyes, bifurcations, crosses, outlets, manifolds, nozzles, wall sleeves,
bulkheads, and other piping and appurtenances fabricated from steel plate,
sheet, or coils as required to provide the Work, complete. Fittings shall
include piping above ground or inside structures.

B.

Acronyms:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

1.03

Lloyds Registry.
Steel Pipe Fabricators Association (SFPA).

CJP: Complete Joint Penetration.


CWI: Certified Welding Inspector.
MT: Magnetic Particle Testing.
NDE: Nondestructive Examination.
NDT: Nondestructive Testing.
PJP: Partial Joint Penetration.
PQR: Procedure Qualification Record.
PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing.
UT: Ultrasonic Testing.
VT: Visual Testing.
WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification.
WPS: Welding Procedure Specification.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.

Fittings:
1.

2.
3.

B.

Factory-made fittings: Butt welded, wrought carbon steel butt- welding,


ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB meeting the requirements of
ASME B16.9; fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe; long radius
elbows unless shown otherwise.
Design reinforcement, unless otherwise shown.
Shop-fabricated fittings design in accordance with AWWA M11,
AWWA C200, and AWWA C208 as modified herein, and this
Specification.

Welding Procedure Specification (WPS):


1.

Qualified by testing in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX for shop


welds and AWS D1.1/D1.1M for field welds.

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
1.04

PQRs conducted on unlisted base metal (most coil products are unlisted
base metals) to be production welded as required in the referenced
welding Code shall be traceable to heat lots.
Written WPS required for welds, both shop and field.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

B.

Shop Drawings showing pipe layout.


Material list and steel reinforcement schedules for materials specified.
Fabrication Information:
a.
Welded joint details including:
1)
Butt joints.
2)
Miter-cut ends for alignment conformance.
Welding Data (Shop and Field Welding):
a.
Show on a weld map, complete information regarding base metal
specification designation location, type, size, and extent of welds
with reference called out for WPS and NDE numbers in tail of
welding symbol.
b.
Distinguish between shop and field welds.
c.
Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints
and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding
details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for all
welds.
d.
Welding and NDE symbols shall be in accordance with
AWS A2.4.
e.
Welding terms and definitions shall be in accordance with
AWS A3.0M/A3.0.
f.
Submit welding data together with Shop Drawings as a complete
package.
Product data for the following:
a.
Welded Steel Pipe and Fittings:
1)
Material data.
2)
Chemical and physical test reports showing data consistent
with specified requirements for each heat of steel proposed
for use.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

Certificates: Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance in accordance


with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Pipe Manufacturers written Quality Assurance/Control Plan.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.05

Statements of Qualification:
a.
Contractors Shop Inspector.
b.
Contractors Field Inspector.
Procedures:
a.
Shop and field welding information; at a minimum include
complete welding code paper trail with linkage to Shop Drawings.
b.
Welder Qualifications and Welding Procedure Specifications in
accordance with Section 05 05 23, Welding, and as specified
below:
1)
Provide complete joint dimensions and details showing
bevels, groove angles, root face, and root openings for all
welds.
2)
Written NDT procedures.
c.
Written weld repair procedures for the Work.
d.
Field coating application and repair.
e.
Field lining application and repair.
Reports:
a.
Field Quality Control Test Reports:
1)
Weld tests, including re-examination of repaired welds, on
each weld joint for the following tests, as applicable:
a)
RT.
b)
UT.
b.
Cement-mortar lining compressive strength tests in accordance
with AWWA C205.
Field Testing Plan: Submit at least 15 days prior to testing and include
following information at a minimum:
a.
Testing dates.
b.
Piping system and sections to be tested.
c.
Method of isolation.
d.
Method of conveying water from source to system being tested.
e.
Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping sections to
be tested.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Qualifications:
1.

2.

Welders and Welding Operators:


a.
Shop Welders: In accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX.
b.
Field Welders: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Contractors Inspector for Shop and Field Welding:
a.
In accordance with AWS QC 1, with knowledge of welding code
for the Work.
b.
After receiving CWI qualification, at least one Shop CWI and one
Field CWI shall have 5 years minimum professional experience

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

B.

Contractors Shop Inspector:


1.
2.

C.

related to welding inspection similar to the Work. Other CWIs


may work under the supervision of 5-year CWI, provided they
have 1 year of related professional experience after receiving CWI
qualification.
NDT Quality Control Personnel:
a.
In accordance with requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A, NDT
Level II.
b.
After receiving NDT qualification, at least one NDT person shall
have 5 years minimum professional experience related to NDT
inspection similar to the Work. Other NDT personnel may work
under the supervision of 5year NDT, provided they have 1 year of
related professional experience after receiving NDT qualification.

In accordance with AWWA C200.


Responsibilities:
a.
Verify conformance to use of specified materials and their proper
storage.
b.
Monitor conformance to approved WPS.
c.
Monitor conformance to approved NDT procedure specifications.
d.
Monitor conformance of WPQ.
e.
Provide 100 percent visual inspection before, during, and after
shop welding.
f.
Coordinate NDT work and review test results.
g.
Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of
inspection and testing.

Contractors Field Inspector:


1.
2.

In accordance with AWWA C206 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


Responsibilities:
a.
Verify conformance to use of specified materials and their proper
storage.
b.
Monitor conformance to approved WPS.
c.
Monitor conformance to approved NDT procedure specifications.
d.
Monitor conformance of WPQ.
e.
Provide 100 percent VT before, during, and after field welding.
f.
Coordinate NDT work and review test results.
g.
Maintain records and prepare report confirming results of
inspection and testing.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.06

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE


A.

Delivery:
1.
2.
3.

B.
PART 2
2.01

2.02

Securely bulkhead or otherwise seal ends of pipe and fittings prior to


loading at manufacturing site.
Pipe ends shall remain sealed until installation.
Damage to pipe and fittings, including linings and coatings, found upon
delivery to Site shall be repaired to Engineers satisfaction or removed
from Site and replaced.

Storage: Support pipe securely to prevent accidental rolling and to avoid


contact with mud, water, or other deleterious materials.
PRODUCTS

GENERAL
A.

Pipe Size and Wall Thickness: ASTM A106, Grade B, standard weight.

B.

Comply with AWWA C200 and additional requirements of these Contract


Documents.

FITTINGS
A.

Fabrication:
1.
2.

B.

Shop fabricate. No field fabrication will be allowed, unless approved by


Engineer.
Fabricate the 20 inch by20 inch by36 inch tee on RAS line from
materials or straight pipe in conformance with specified requirements
and dimensions of AWWA C208, as shown on Drawings.

Steel Butt-Weld Fittings:


1.
2.
3.
4.

In accordance with ASME B16.9 conforming to ASTM A234/A234M.


Standard weight.
Taper pipe wall at welds at 4:1 for connection to pipe of different wall
thickness.
Coordinate difference in diameter convention between fittings and
AWWA C200 and AWWA C208 pipe and fittings to provide complete
piping system as shown.

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

JOINTS
A.

Shop Welded:
1.
2.
3.

B.

Preparation of Joints for Field Welding:


1.

2.04

In accordance with AWWA C207.

EPOXY COATING
A.

2.06

Butt Joint Welded:


a.
Plain ends beveled as required by AWWA C200 and Contractors
field WPS.
b.
Provide protection for factory beveled pipe ends so ends are not
damaged during transport.

FLANGES
A.

2.05

Fabricate in accordance with AWWA C200 as modified herein.


Complete joint penetration (CJP) butt joints shall be used for
longitudinal, girth, and spiral welds, unless otherwise indicated.
Lengths of pipe shall not be shop-joined using lap joints.

Per paint System No. 5, Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

CEMENT-MORTAR LINING
A.

Shop-Applied:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

Applied centrifugally in conformance with AWWA C205. Thickness


shall be in accordance with AWWA C205.
Lining machine type that has been used successfully for similar work
and approved by Engineer.
Maintain pipe in round condition during lining operation and thereafter
by suitable bracing or strutting.
Provide polyethylene or other suitable bulkhead on ends of pipe and on
special openings to prevent drying out of lining. Bulkheads shall be
substantial enough to remain intact during shipping and storage until
pipe is installed.
Pipe shall be left bare where field joints occur.
Ends of lining shall be left square and uniform. Feathered or uneven
edges will not be permitted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.
2.

3.02

3.03

WELDING
A.

Perform welding only in presence of Contractors Field Inspector.

B.

Conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWWA C206, approved welding procedures,


and referenced welding codes. In case of conflict AWS D1.1/D1.1M shall
govern.

C.

Preheat and Interpass temperature requirements for unlisted base metals shall
be determined according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Annex XI Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.

D.

Rejectable weld defects shall be repaired or redone, and retested until sound
weld metal has been deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes.

CEMENT-MORTAR LINING APPLICATION AT JOINTS


A.

3.04

Joints and related work for field assembly of fittings shall conform to
requirements for straight pipe, unless otherwise shown.
Inspect pipe and fittings before installation. Clean ends thoroughly,
remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.

Cement-Mortar Lining: For pipe with shop-applied cement-mortar lining,


place lining at joints in accordance with AWWA C205.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Field Welding:
1.

2.

3.

All welds, 100 percent inspection, shall be VT inspected by


Contractors Field Inspector and marked to indicate acceptance or
rejection.
CJP Welds:
a.
Inspect 10 percent of butt joint welds with full circumference RT.
b.
Inspect 10 percent of other groove welds with UT.
Weld Acceptance:
a.
If, in the opinion of Engineer, inspections indicate inadequate
quality of welds, percentage of welds inspected shall be increased.
b.
Welds to be inspected, if less than 100 percent rate, shall be
selected at random by Engineer.

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

4.

B.

VT: Perform VT per AWS D1.1/D1.1M Paragraph 6.9, Visual


Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections.
d.
UT: Perform UT of CJP groove welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.13.1.
e.
RT: Perform RT of CJP butt joint welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.12.1.
f.
PT or MT:
1)
Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Paragraph 6.10.
2)
Acceptance shall be in accordance with VT standards
specified above.
g.
Remove in manner that permits proper and complete repair by
welding.
h.
Caulking or peening of defective welds is not permitted.
i.
Retest unsatisfactory welds.
Verification Acceptance: Owner may conduct random nondestructive
inspections of field-welded joints. Inspections will be of an appropriate
type for weld being evaluated. Possible types of inspection include, but
are not limited to, RT, UT, PT, and VT. Testing will be performed and
evaluated per AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Provide Owners Verification
Inspector access to the Work.

Hydrostatic Testing:
1.

Pipeline:
a.
General:
1)
Notify Engineer in writing 5 days prior to testing. Perform
testing in presence of Engineer.
2)
Test newly installed pipelines. Using water as test medium,
pipes shall successfully pass a leakage test prior to
acceptance.
3)
Furnish testing equipment and perform tests in manner
satisfactory to Engineer.
4)
Isolate new pipelines that are connected to existing
pipelines.
5)
Supply of temporary water shall be as stated in
Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.
6)
Dispose of water used in testing in accordance with federal,
state, and local requirements.
b.
Preconditiong of cement-motar-lined pipe:
1)
Maximum filling velocity shall not exceed 0.25 foot per
second, calculated based on the full area of pipe.
2)
Expel air from pipe system during filling. Expel air through
corporation stop installed at high points and other strategic
points.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3)
4)

c.

Test pressure: 30 psi.


Contractor shall fill the pipe at least 7 days prior to the
testing to allow the cement motar lining to be saturated.
5)
During the period after filling and before testing, make-up
water could be added to maintain the specified test pressure.
Contractor shall monitor the daily make-up water quantity
to track the time required for the lining saturation.
Testing Procedure:
1)
At the beginning of the test, add make-up water and
maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump.
Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached.
2)
Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours
minimum. No make-up water is allowed for pipe with
welded joints.
3)
If pressure drops more than 3 percent of the specified test
pressure or if leaks are visible, repair defective pipe section
and repeat hydrostatic test.
END OF SECTION

WELDED STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS


33 05 01.01 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 33 05 13
MANHOLES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO): M198, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe,
Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint
Sealants.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b.
A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
c.
A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
d.
A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
e.
A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain
Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
f.
B139/B139M, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod,
Bar, and Shapes.
g.
C14, Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer,
Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
h.
C31/C31M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field.
i.
C39/C39M, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
j.
C150/C150M, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
k.
C192/C192M, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
l.
C387/C387M, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry,
Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete.
m. C443, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and
Manholes Using Rubber Gaskets.
n.
C478, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Sections.
o.
C923, Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals.
p.
C990, Standard Specification for Joints in Concrete Pipe,
Manholes, and Precast Box Sections using Preformed Flexible
Joint Sealants.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

q.
r.
s.

t.
u.
v.
1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.
1.03

Experience Record:
a.
Precast concrete production capabilities.
b.
Evidence of current PCI plant certification.
Manufacturers recommended installation instructions.
Field quality control report.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.

2.
PART 2
2.01

C1311, Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants.


C1244, Standard Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by
the Negative Air Pressure (Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill.
D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3
(600 kN-m/m3)).
D4101, Standard Specification for Propylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials.
F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs.
F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.

Precast Concrete and Precast Prestressed Concrete: Product of


manufacturer with 3 years experience producing precast concrete
products of quality specified.
Precast Plant: PCI certified plant with current certification.

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Materials of Construction and Service Conditions:


1.
2.

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 2

Screws, Bolts, or Nuts: Type 304 stainless steel conforming to


ASTM F593 and ASTM F594.
Gaskets: Internal and external seals shall be made of materials that have
been proven to be resistant to the following exposures and conditions:
a.
Sanitary sewage.
b.
Corrosion or rotting under wet or dry conditions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

3.
4.
B.

Gaseous environment in sanitary sewers and at road surfaces


including common levels of ozone, carbon monoxide, and other
trace gases at installation site.
d.
Biological environment in soils and sanitary sewers.
e.
Chemical attack by road salts, road oil, and common street
spillages or solvents used in street construction or maintenance.
f.
Temperature ranges, variations, and gradients in construction area.
g.
Variations in moisture conditions and humidity.
h.
Fatigue failure caused by a minimum of 30 freeze-thaw cycles per
year.
i.
Vibrations because of traffic loading.
j.
Fatigue failure because of repeated variations of tensile,
compressive and shear stresses, and repeated elongation and
compression. Material shall remain flexible allowing repeated
movement.
Materials shall be compatible with each other and manhole materials.
Designed to provide a 20-year service life.

Structures shall meet requirements of ASTM C478, this specification and the
following:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Concrete:
a.
Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M.
b.
Compressive Strength:
1)
Minimum 4,000 psi.
2)
Minimum strength shall be confirmed at 7 days by making
two standard cylinders per manhole for testing.
c.
Concrete mix design shall include Xypex C-500 or C-1000 based
upon mix design at dosage recommended by manufacturer for
installation.
Reinforcement: Grade 60, unless otherwise specified.
Ring: Custom made with openings to meet indicated pipe alignment
conditions and invert elevations.
Floor: Minimum 6 inches below pipe to provide clearance for grouting
channels.
Joint:
a.
Form joint contact services with machined castings.
b.
Surfaces shall be parallel with nominal 1/16-inch clearing and
tongue equipped with recess for installation of O-ring rubber
gasket.
Gasket: Meet requirements of ASTM C443.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

PRECAST MANHOLES
A.

Riser Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Cone Sections:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Concrete grade rings; maximum 6 inches high.


Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478.

Joint Seal Manufacturers and Products:


1.

2.

3.

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 4

Base slab integral with sidewalls.


Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478.

Manhole Extensions:
1.
2.

E.

Eccentric.
Same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser section.
Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel.

Base Sections and Base Slab:


1.
2.

D.

Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478.


Diameter: Minimum 48 inches.
Wall Thickness: Minimum 4 inches or 1/12 times inside diameter,
whichever is greater.
Top and bottom surfaces shall be parallel.
Joints: Tongue-and-groove confined O-ring with rubber gaskets meeting
ASTM C443.

Butyl Gaskets:
a.
Hamilton Kent, Sparks, NV; Kent-Seal No. 2.
b.
Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC Bidco
C-56.
Confined Plastic or Rubber O-Ring:
a.
As recommended by precasting manufacturer.
b.
Meet requirements of ASTM C443.
External Wrap:
a.
Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Gator Wrap.
b.
Henry Company, Houston, TX; RU116 Rubr-Nek External Joint
Wrap.
c.
Trelleborg Engineered Solutions, Park Hills, MO; NPC External
Joint Wrap.
d.
Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; Cretex Wrap.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Polypropylene Steps:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
2.03

2.04

CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES
A.

Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B.

Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.

MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVER


A.

Castings:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.
2.05

Fabricate from minimum 1/2-inch, Grade 60, steel bar meeting


ASTM A615/A615M.
Polypropylene encasement shall conform to ASTM D4101.
Minimum Width: 13 inches, center-to-center of legs Embedment: 3-1/2
inch minimum and 4-1/2-inch minimum projection from face of
concrete at point of embedment to center of step.
Cast in manhole sections by manufacturer.
Load Test: Capable of withstanding ASTM C478 vertical and horizontal
load tests.

Tough, close-grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters,
blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects.
Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A48M Class 30B.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-12.
Plane or grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces.

Cover: Owners Standard.

MANHOLE FRAME CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE


A.

Butyl Sealant:
1.
2.
3.

Conform to ASTM C1311, or AASHTO M198 and ASTM C990.


Trowelable or cartridge applied.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Tremco Commercial Sealants and Waterproofing, Beachwood,
OH; Tremco Butyl Sealant.
b.
Bostik, Middleton, MA; Chem-Calk 300.
c.
Press-Seal Gasket Company, Fort Wayne, IN; EZ-Stik #3.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

External Wrap:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

C.

Frame to Structure Anchor Bolts:


1.
2.

2.06

Meet requirements of ASTM C923.


Construct of high quality rubber that will provide flexible watertight seal
around joint.
Thickness: Minimum 60 mils.
Consist of a top and bottom section and be sealed to structure, frame
top, and bottom with mastic as applicable.
Length: Extend from manhole frame and extension ring to cone section.
Bands: If required, constructed of minimum 16-gauge sheet if
channeled, or 5/16-inch diameter if round.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Sealing Systems, Inc., Loretto, MN; Infi-Shield.
b.
Trelleborg Engineered Systems, Milford, NH; NPC Flexrib
Frame-Chimney Seals.
c.
Cretex Specialty Products, Waukesha, WI; X-85 Seal.

3/4-inch-diameter HAS stainless steel bolts; minimum 6-5/8-inch


embedment.
Manufacturer and Product: Hilti; HVA Capsules Adhesive Anchoring
System.

MORTAR
A.

Standard premixed in accordance with ASTM C387/C387M, or proportion


one part Portland cement to two parts clean, well-graded sand that will pass a
1/8-inch screen.

B.

Admixtures: May be included; do not exceed the following percentages of


weight of cement:
1.
2.

C.

Mix Consistency:
1.
2.

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 6

Hydrated Lime: 10 percent.


Diatomaceous Earth or Other Inert Material: 5 percent.

Tongue-and-Groove Type Joint: Such that mortar will readily adhere to


pipe.
Confined Groove (Keylock) Joint: Such that excess mortar will be
forced out of groove and support is not provided for section being
placed.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

BACKFILL AROUND AND UNDER MANHOLE


A.

2.08

Structural fill as specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

FLEXIBLE JOINTS FOR SEALING PIPES IN MANHOLE


A.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.

2.09

NPC, Inc., Milford, New Hampshire; Kor-N-Seal flexible rubber boot


with stainless steel accessories.
A-LOK Products, Inc., Tullytown, PA; Z-LOK XP or A-LOK flexible
connectors.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to delivery of precast manhole sections to Site, yard permeability tests


may be required at point of manufacture. Engineer or Owner will select
precast sections not to exceed 5 percent of the total project quantity to test
from material which is to be supplied to Project. Test specimens shall be mat
tested and meet permeability test requirements of ASTM C14.

B.

Concrete Testing: Test two concrete test cylinders for each manhole.
Compressive strength shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M,
ASTM C39/C39M, and ASTM C192/C192M.

C.

Inspection:
1.

2.

Material Quality:
a.
Manufacturing process and finished sections shall be subject to
inspection and approval by Owner and Engineer.
1)
Inspections may take place at manufacturers plant, at Site
after delivery, or at both.
2)
Sections not meeting requirements of this Specification or
that are determined to have defects which may affect
durability of structure are subject to rejection.
3)
Sections rejected after delivery shall be removed and
replaced.
4)
Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if
already installed shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner
and Engineer.
5)
If structure cannot be repaired it shall be removed and
replaced entirely at Contractors expense.
At the time of inspection the sections will be carefully examined for
compliance with ASTM C478 and with manufacturers Drawings.
Sections will be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, scratch

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

Prior to installation inspect materials:


1.

2.
3.
B.
3.02

3.03

strength, blisters, cracks, roughness, and soundness. Surface shall be


dense and close textured.
Imperfections may be repaired, subject to approval of Engineer, after
demonstration by manufacturer that strong and permanent repairs result.

Sections not meeting requirements of this specification or that are


determined to have defects which may affect durability of structure are
subject to rejection.
Sections damaged after delivery will be rejected and if already installed
shall be repaired to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer.
Remove and replace structure that cannot be repaired.

If needed, dewater excavation during construction and testing operations.

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL


A.

Excavation: As specified in Section 31 23 16, Excavation.

B.

Backfill: As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

INSTALLATION OF PRECAST MANHOLES


A.

Concrete Base:
1.

2.

B.

Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 8

Precast:
a.
Place on compacted structural fill.
b.
Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first
section.
Cast-in-Place:
a.
Invert: Minimum 8 inches below lowest connecting pipe.
b.
First section of manhole shall be cast in concrete base.

Inspect precast manhole sections to be joined.


Clean ends of sections to be joined.
Do not use sections with chips or cracks in tongue.
Locate precast steps in line with each other to provide continuous
vertical ladder.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Preformed Plastic Gaskets or Rubber O-Ring:


1.
2.
3.

D.

External Joint Wraps: Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

E.

Extensions:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.04

3.05

3.06

Use only pipe primer furnished by gasket manufacturer.


Install gasket material in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Completed Manhole: Rigid and watertight.

Provide on manholes in streets or other locations where change in


existing grade may be likely.
Install to height not exceeding 12 inches.
Lay grade rings in mortar with sides plumb and tops level.
Seal joints with mortar as specified for sections and make watertight.

MANHOLE INVERT
A.

Construct with smooth transitions to ensure unobstructed flow through


manhole. Remove sharp edges or rough sections that tend to obstruct flow.

B.

Where full section of pipe is laid through manhole, break out top section and
cover exposed edge of pipe completely with mortar. Trowel mortar surfaces
smooth.

MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS


A.

Install concrete grade rings as required to set covers flush with surface of
adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed.

B.

Set frames in three equally spaced beads of butyl sealant that run full
circumference of frame.

C.

Anchor frame to manhole with specified bolts.

D.

Install interior manhole frame to structure seals in accordance with


manufacturers instructions. Seal shall cover grade rings.

CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE
A.

Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B.

Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.07

MANHOLE PIPING
A.

Drop Assembly: See Drawings for detail of installation requirements.

B.

Flexible Joints:
1.
2.

3.08

Install manhole steps at 16 inches on center, plus or minus 1/4-inch


tolerance, and locate to provide a continuous vertical ladder.
Do not vary spacing between any two adjacent steps by more than
1/2 inch.
Distance between wall of manhole and center of rung, measured at point
of embedment, shall be not less than 4 inches or more than 6-1/4 inches.
Testing:
a.
Test each step for a horizontal pullout load of 400 pounds with
load applied over a width of 3-1/2 inches and centered on rung.
b.
Apply load at a uniform rate until required test load is reached.
c.
Provide suitable hydraulic jacks and gauges to perform test.
d.
Steps will be considered acceptable if they remain solidly
embedded after application of test load and if no cracking or
fracture of step nor spalling of concrete, masonry, or mortar is
evident.
e.
Replace, or reset and retest, steps failing to withstand required
load.

Provide in pipe not more than 1-1/2 feet from manhole walls.
Where last joint of pipe is between 1-1/2 feet and 6 feet from manhole
wall, provide flexible joint in manhole wall.

MANHOLES OVER EXISTING PIPING


A.

Maintain flow through existing pipelines at all times.

B.

Concrete Pipe: Apply bonding agent on surfaces in contact with concrete.

C.

Construct base under existing piping.

D.

Construct manhole as detailed in Drawings.

E.

Apply minimum of two complete wraps of hydrophilic waterstop centered on


pipe in wall.

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.09

3.10

F.

Place a minimum of 24 inches of concrete around each pipe penetration


outside manhole against undisturbed soil or compacted aggregate unless
otherwise detailed.

G.

Grout channel through manhole.

H.

Saw cut out or demolish existing pipe within new manhole using method
approved by Engineer.

I.

Protect new concrete or grout for 7 days after placing concrete.

CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MANHOLES


A.

Core manhole bases and grouting as necessary.

B.

Seal pipe in manhole using flexible connector.

C.

Regrout to provide smooth flow into and through manholes.

D.

Provide diversion facilities and perform work necessary to maintain flow


during connection.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Conduct negative air pressure (vacuum) test on all manholes in accordance


with ASTM C1244 Hydrostatic Testing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

When, in Engineers opinion, groundwater table is too low to permit


visual detection of infiltration leaks, hydrostatically test all manholes.
Procedure: Plug inlets and outlets and fill manhole with water to height
determined by Engineer.
Manhole may be filled 24 hours prior to time of testing, if desired, to
permit normal absorption into pipe walls to take place.
Leakage in each manhole shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per hour per foot
of head above invert.
Repair manholes that do not meet leakage test, or do not meet specified
requirements from visual inspection.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MANHOLES
33 05 13 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 33 46 16
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.

1.02

This section covers the Work necessary for the underdrain system.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

PART 2
2.01

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials


(AASHTO):
a.
M 252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene
Drainage Tubing.
b.
M 294, Interim Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 12
to 24-Inch Diameter.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
D3350, Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials.
b.
F1336, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Gasketed Sewer Fittings.

PRODUCTS
UNDERDRAIN PIPE
A.

Underdrain pipe shall consist of high-density polyethylene corrugated pipe


with an integrally formed smooth interior. Perforated pipe shall be used in the
locations shown on the Drawings. Perforated polyethylene tubing shall
conform to AASHTO M 252, Type S. Nonperforated polyethylene tubing
shall conform to AASHTO M 252, Type S or AASHTO M 294, Type S. All
pipe shall be slotted unless otherwise shown.

B.

All fittings and couplings shall be as specifically manufactured for the pipe.
Perforated pipe shall be joined by split couplings with gaskets conforming to
AASHTO M 252. Solid pipe shall be joined by double bell watertight joints
which meet the requirements of ASTM F1336, except that the inside
dimensions of the bells shall match the outside dimensions of the pipe.

C.

Pipe perforations shall be the slotted type and shall conform to


AASHTO M 252.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

D.

Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from high-density polyethylene resin


which shall meet or exceed the requirements of Cell Class 324420 C
(minimum) as defined and described in ASTM D3350, except that the carbon
black content shall not exceed 5 percent.

E.

Pipe shall be as manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. of


Columbus, Ohio, or Hancor, Inc., of Findlay, OH, or approved equivalent.

MANHOLES
A.

2.03

GRANULAR DRAIN MATERIAL


A.

PART 3
3.01

As specified in Section 33 05 13, Manholes.

As specified in Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.


EXECUTION

PREPARATION OF TRENCH
A.

Trench Excavation: Excavation shall be as specified under applicable parts of


Section 31 23 16, Excavation, and Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill. Place
and compact Granular Drain Material to the lines shown and as described in
Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill, and trench into drain gravel to install
underdrain pipe.

B.

Removal of Water: At all times, provide and maintain ample means and
devices to remove and dispose of water entering the trench during the laying
operation to the extent required to properly grade the bottom of the trench and
allow for proper compaction of the backfill in the pipe zone. Do not lay pipe
in water.

C.

Preparation of Pipe Prior to Installation: Inspect all pipe and fittings before
lowering into the prepared trench to ensure that no cracked, broken, or
defective pipe or fittings are being used in the Work. Clean the ends of the
pipe thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt from the inside of the pipe.
Ensure that the inside surfaces are smooth and free from any projections
which would interfere with the assembly or watertightness of the joint.

D.

Handling: Provide and use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe
and proper protection of the Work. Lower all pipe into the trench in such a
manner as to avoid any physical damage to the pipe. Reject all damaged pipe
and remove from the Job Site. Do not drop or dump pipe into the trench under
any circumstances.

UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

3.02

3.03

Line and Grade: Maximum deviation from true line or grade, as established by
the Engineer, shall not exceed 1/2-inch for line and 1/4-inch for grade
provided that such variation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert.

INSTALLATION OF UNDERDRAIN PIPE


A.

The locations of the slotted underdrain are shown. Bring the subgrade to the
final elevation, dig trenches, and place geotextile as specified in
Section 31 32 19.16, Geotextiles. Bring Granular Drain Material to the level
of the bottom of pipe, and lay the slotted pipe on a true alignment in the
prepared trench as shown. Face joints in direction opposite of flow if
interlocking joints are used. Orient so that two slots face down.

B.

After a section of pipe has been lowered into the prepared trench, wipe the end
of the pipe to be joined and the inside of the joint clean immediately before
joining the pipe. Make the joint in strict accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer. Provide all special tools and appliances required for the
jointing assembly.

C.

Joints shall be made in complete conformance with pipe manufacturer


recommendations whether done by butt fusion or mechanical interlock. After
the joint has been made, align and check the pipe for grade. The trench bottom
shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for the pipe at every
point between joints. Apply sufficient pressure in making the joint to assure
that joint is home as defined in the standard installation instructions
provided by the pipe manufacturer. To assure proper pipe alignment and joint
makeup, place sufficient pipe zone material to secure the pipe from movement
before the next joint is installed.

D.

Prevent soil or other foreign material and debris from getting into the pipe
during the laying operation. At all times when laying operations are not in
progress, at the close of the days work or during periods of inactivity, close
and block the open end of the last laid section of pipe to prevent entry of
foreign material or creep of the gasketed joints.

BACKFILLING
A.

Placing of Granular Drain Material: Place gravel around pipe as shown.

B.

Backfill: Accomplish backfill in accordance with the applicable portions of


Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill, and 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES
A.

As specified in Section 33 05 13, Manholes.


END OF SECTION

UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM
33 46 16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 33 66 16
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) WALLS
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.

Supply all labor, tools, equipment, and materials to design and construct a
28-inch reinforced mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) wall.

B.

The Drawings illustrate the plan and elevation views for the MSE walls,
including straight and curvilinear alignments. The section views are shown in
concept only.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
A615, Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
b.
A31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
c.
C33, Concrete Aggregates.
d.
C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
e.
C94, Ready-Mixed Concrete.
f.
C131, Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles
Machine.
g.
C143, Standard Test Method for Sump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete.
h.
C150, Portland Cement.
i.
C173, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method.
j.
C231, Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
k.
C260, Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
l.
C1372, Segmental Retaining Wall Units.
m. C1602, Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

1.04

DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE


A.

Check the materials upon delivery to assure proper material has been received.

B.

Prevent excessive mud, wet cement, and like materials from coming in contact
with the units.

C.

Protect the materials from damage. Damaged and rejected material rejected by
the Engineer shall be removed from the Project.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Design, including a cross-section Drawing, shall be stamped by a professional


engineer registered to perform work in Idaho.
1.

Wall installation instructions.

B.

Sample of block.

C.

Proposed stain color(s) to be used.

D.

Bound and sealed computations.

E.

Product data.

F.

Ready mixed concrete mix design.

G.

Test Reports and Records.


1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Compressive strength test results for the concrete mix used to


manufacture the units. Tests shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM C192.
Air-entrainment including compliance with ASTM C231.
Hydraulic Cement Material Certification Report: Compliance with
ASTM C150 Chemical Analyses.
Slump.
Aggregate test reports including compliance with ASTM C88 and
ASTM C131.

H.

Wall Backfill Material: Test reports and records including gradation, PI, LL,
and standard Proctor curve. Test shall be performed in accordance with
applicable ASTM standards and specifications.

I.

Geogrid:
1.
2.

Material.
Manufacturers installation instructions.

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
CEMENT
A.

2.02

2.03

2.04

Cement shall be portland cement Type I II or I II LA, unless otherwise


indicated on the Drawings.

AGGREGATE
A.

Fine aggregate shall consist of hard, strong, durable particles conforming to


the provisions of ASTM C33.

B.

Coarse aggregate shall conform to the provisions of ASTM C33 except that all
aggregate shall be crushed aggregate. Screened aggregate is unacceptable.

WATER
A.

Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis,
salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel.

B.

Water for mixing concrete shall conform to ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1603.

C.

The water shall not contain deleterious amounts of chloride ion.

ADMIXTURES
A.

General:
1.
2.

3.
B.

Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior acceptance


by the Engineer.
The admixture shall maintain the same composition and performance
throughout the Work as the product used in the concrete proportions
established in accordance with ACI 211.
Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used.

Chemical Admixtures Conforming to ASTM C494:


1.

The table below identifies seven types of chemical admixtures meeting


ASTM C494 that can be added to portland cement for the purpose or
purpose indicated.
Type

Purpose

Water Reducing

Retarding

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Type

C.

2.

Accelerating

Water Reducing and Retarding

Water Reducing and Accelerating

Water Reducing, High Range

Water Reducing, High Range, and Retarding

An air-entraining agent shall be used in all concrete. The agent used


shall conform to ASTM C260, Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
The air content shall be 5 percent 1-1/2 percent in conformance with
ASTM C173.

CONCRETE MIX DESIGN


A.

The concrete mix shall meet the properties and characteristics specified in this
Specification and in Section 033000, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B.

Wall units shall be made with Ready-Mixed concrete in accordance with


ASTM C94 and in accordance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.06

Air Entrainment:
1.

2.05

Purpose

Air-entrainment: 6 1-1/2 percent.


28-Day Compressive Strength: Fc 4,000 psi.
Water to Cement (W/C) Ratio: 0.42 0.01.
Slump: 5 1-1/2 percent.

WALL UNITS
A.

Wall units shall be Redi-Rock LEDGESTONGE style or equal as produced


by a licensed manufacturer. Exterior wall faces shall be stained a color
simulating a natural rock wall appearance and matching the existing MSE
wall north of Primary Clarifier No. 2.

B.

All material used in the wall units must meet applicable and referenced ASTM
and Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C.

Tolerances:
1.

Exterior block dimensions shall be uniform and consistent. Maximum


dimensional deviations shall be 1 percent excluding the architectural
surface.

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

2.07

D.

Exposed face shall be finished as specified. Other surfaces shall be smooth


form type.

E.

Dime-size bug holes on the block face may be patched and/or shake-on color
stain can be used to blend into the remainder of the block face.

GEOGRID
A.

2.08

2.11

The leveling pad shall be concrete meeting the requirements of this


Specification above and Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

FREE-DRAINING BACKFILL
A.

2.10

The Miragrid XT Series Geogrids, or equivalent, shall be used for soil


reinforcement.

LEVELING PAD
A.

2.09

Maximum width (face to back) deviation including the architectural


surface shall be 1 inch.

Free draining backfill material shall be washed aggregate meeting the


requirements of ASRC C33 Size No. 57 concrete aggregate and shall be
placed to a minimum of 1 foot width behind the back of the wall and shall
extend vertically from the Leveling Pad to an elevation 4 inches below the top
of wall.

WALL BACKFILL MATERIAL


A.

Backfill material shall be approved by the Engineer. Site excavated soils


meeting the requirements of the Specifications may be used if approved unless
otherwise specified in the Drawings.

B.

Unsuitable soils with a PL>6, organic soils and frost susceptible soils shall not
be used within a one to one influence area.

C.

Non-woven geotextile cloth shall be placed between the Free Draining


Backfill and retained soil if shown on the Drawings.

D.

Where additional fill is needed, Contractor shall submit sample and


specifications to the Engineer for evaluation and approval.

GEOGRID CONNECTION (TYPE 1)


A.

Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, Geogrid Connection (Type 1) shall


be used.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Reinforcing bar used in the Type 1 geogrid connection shall be 1/2-inch


diameter MMFX2 corrosion resistant bar as manufactured by MMFX Steel
Corporation of America, Charlotte, NC (866-752-9155).

C.

Corrosion resistant uncoated steel shall be low carbon, chromium bar with a
minimum of 8.5 percent by weight chromium meeting all requirements of
ASTM A615 Grade 75.

PART 3
3.01

3.02

3.03

3.04

EXECUTION
EXCAVATION
A.

Excavate to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.

B.

The Work includes shoring, sheeting, or other temporary slope stabilization as


required to perform the Work.

FOUNDATION SOIL PREPARATION


A.

Native foundation soil shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D698 or


90 percent of ASTM D1557 prior to placement of the concrete leveling pad.
See Section 31 23 23, Fill and Backfill, for the referenced quality standards.

B.

Insitu foundation soil shall be examined by the Engineer to determine that the
actual foundation soil strength meets or exceeds assumed design strength.

C.

Remove and replace soil that fails to meet the required strength with
acceptable, compacted material.

LEVELING PAD PLACEMENT


A.

Leveling pad shall be placed as shown on the Drawings.

B.

Leveling pad shall be placed on undisturbed native soils or suitable imported


fill material.

C.

For steps and pavers, a minimum of 1-inch to 1-1/2-inch of free draining sand
shall be screeded smooth to act as a placement bed for the steps or pavers.

UNIT INSTALLATION
A.

The first course of wall units shall be placed on the prepared leveling pad with
the aesthetic surface facing out and the front edges tight together. All units
shall be checked for level and alignment as they are placed.

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

B.

Confirm that units are in full contact with leveling pad. Proper care shall be
taken to develop straight lines and smooth curves on base course in
accordance with the wall layout shown in the Drawings.

C.

Backfill in front and back of entire base row shall be placed and compacted to
firmly lock them in place. Check all units again for level and alignment.
Sweep any excess backfill material from top of units.

D.

Install next course of wall units on top of base row.

E.

Position blocks to be offset from seams of blocks below. Blocks shall be


placed fully forward so knob and groove are engaged.

F.

Check each block for proper alignment and level.

G.

Backfill to 12-inch width behind block with free draining backfill.

H.

Spread backfill in uniform lifts not exceeding 9 inches. Employ methods using
compaction equipment that will affect the stability or batter of the wall. Handoperated plate compaction equipment shall be used around the block and
within 3 feet of the wall to achieve consolidation. Compact backfill to
95 percent of standard proctor (ASTM D698) density within 2 percent of its
optimum moisture content.

I.

Install each subsequent course in like manner. Repeat procedure to the extent
of wall height.

J.

Allowable construction tolerance at the wall face is 2 degrees vertically and


1 inch in 10 feet horizontally. Demonstrate that the work is proceeding in
accordance with the permitted tolerances.

K.

Curves shall be made with a minimum 14-foot 6-inch radius at the wall face.

GEOGRID INSTALLATION
A.

3.06

See wall installation instructions submittal.

STAINING
A.

Exterior faces to be stained using a multistep process to simulate the natural


color variations of natural stone.

B.

Staining to be coordinated with appearance of the existing MSE wall north of


Primary Clarifier 2.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED
EARTH (MSE) WALLS)
33 66 16 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 35 20 16.25
FABRICATED SLIDE GATES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.
1.02

1.03

American Water Works Association (AWWA): C513, Open-Channel,


Fabricated-Metal Slide Gates.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A193/A193M, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials
for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications.
b.
A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and General Applications.
c.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
d.
B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy
Sheet and Plate.
e.
B308/B308M, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy
6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

DEFINITIONS
A.

Submersible: The ability to exclude water when submerged under a 20-foot


head of fresh water for 24 hours and still maintain electrical integrity.

B.

Slenderness Ratio: The ratio of the maximum unsupported stem length to the
stem cross-section radius of gyration.

C.

Self-Contained: The arrangement of gate operator, supported by gate frame,


such that operating thrust loads are not applied external to the assembly.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.

d.
e.
f.
g.

h.
i.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

1.04

Manufacturers catalog information, descriptive literature,


specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
Detailed structural and mechanical and electrical Drawings
showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other
items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to
other work, and weights of associated equipment associated
therewith.
Gate operator and stem calculations for each gate and service
condition.
Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to
the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load.
External utility requirements such as air, water, power, drain, etc.,
for each component.
Functional description of internal and external instrumentation
and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored,
controlled, or alarmed.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminal and
numbers.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers written/printed installation instructions.
Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

Coordinate such that electric motor operators are fully assembled and tested,
including motor, at the factory.

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.05

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools:
Item

B.
PART 2
2.01

Stem collars for all gate stems

One of each different size

Bronze lift nuts

One of each different size

Indicator lights

One dozen

Special tools required to


maintain or dismantle

One complete set

Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product


Requirements.
PRODUCTS

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.02

See supplements to this section for additional product information.

MATERIALS
A.

Aluminum Plate and Shapes: ASTM B209 and ASTM B308/B308M,


Alloy 6061-T6.

B.

Stainless Steel:
1.
2.

2.03

Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316L or Type 304L.
Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L or Type 304L.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.

2.04

Quantity

Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per minute per foot of gate periphery
under either seating or unseating head conditions.

SLIDE GATES
A.

Rising stem type, with assembly styles designated as follows:


1.
2.

Style A: Upward acting type for wall surface mounting on the concrete
structures.
Style B: Upward acting type for mounting in channels with concrete
embedded frame and invert.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
B.

Guide Frames:
1.
2.

3.

4.
5.
C.

Stainless steel.
Vertical Guides: Design for maximum rigidity, and extend in one
continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for support of gate
operators of self-contained gates. When guides extended above the
operating floor, they shall be sufficiently strong so that no further
reinforcements are required.
a.
Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot.
b.
Incorporate a replaceable UHMW polyethylene bearing strip in a
retainer slot on the downstream side (unseating head side) of the
gate.
Frame Invert: For flush bottom gate, furnish a neoprene insert to
function as a seating surface for the gate disc.
a.
Weight: Not less than 9 pounds per linear foot.
Join vertical guide frames and invert with factory welded corners.
Size guided slot to provide a minimum disc engagement of 1 inch on
each side.

Wall Thimbles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

D.

Style C: Mounted on flanged thimble embedded in wall of new


construction.

Type 316L stainless steel one-piece construction.


Cast center ring or water stop around periphery.
Front Flange: Machined, with tapped holes for gate frame attaching
studs.
Stamp vertical center lines of metal with word top.
Furnish permanent gasket of uniform thickness or mastic suitable for
contact with potable water between gate frame and thimble.
For large rectangular thimbles, furnish holes in invert to allow concrete
placement under thimble. Space holes so that unvented invert length
does not exceed 24 inches.

Disc:
1.

2.

Disc Plate (Sliding Member): One-piece stainless steel plate. Reinforce


as required so that the disc will not deflect more than 1/360 of the gate
span, when the upstream liquid depth (seating head side) is as shown on
the schedule and the downstream liquid depth is less than 1/2 inch.
Reinforce gate disc with one-piece stainless steel angles or channels
welded to the disc plate. Bolted reinforcements will not be permitted.

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Operator Support Yoke:


1.
2.
3.

F.

Stems:
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
G.

1-inch minimum diameter, ASTM A276, Type 316 or Type 304


stainless steel.
Threads: Acme type with RMS surface roughness of 63 micro inches or
less on the flanks for manually operated gates and 32 micro inches or
less on the flanks for electrically operated gates. Extend threaded
portion of stem 2 inches above operator when gate is in CLOSED
position.
Ratio of the unsupported stem length to the radius of gyration, both in
inches, shall not exceed 200.
Stems to withstand in compression, without damage, the thrust equal to
at least 2-1/2 times the rated output of the hoisting mechanism, with a
40-pound effort applied to the handwheel or crank.
Equip operating stems with cast iron, bushed stem guides, mounted on
cast iron brackets; adjustable in two directions and spaced so that the L/r
ratio does not exceed 200.
Adjustable stop collar for the CLOSED position.
Connect the stems to the disc plate with a yoke, bolted to the stem and
welded to the disc.

Stem Covers:
1.
2.

H.

For self-contained gate operators, attached to the vertical extensions of


the guide frames.
Constructed from at least two stainless steel angles, or two other
suitable shapes, and bolt in place to provide a rigid assembly.
Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/4 inch under full operator
applied loading.

Transparent plastic, vented pipe stem cover and cap.


Provide with OPEN/CLOSED designators with 1-inch graduations on
clear mylar pressure sensitive, adhesive tape, suitable for outdoor
application.

Manufacturers:
1.

Stainless Steel:
a.
Whipps, Inc.
b.
Hydro Gate Corp.
c.
Rodney Hunt Co.
d.
H. Fontaine, Ltd.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

GATE OPERATORS
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
B.

Type 1, Handwheel-Operated Bench Stands:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Direct drive.
Sealed, ball thrust, roller or needle bearing type and equipped with
bronze lift nut, internally threaded with Acme threads.
Furnish mechanical seals at housing penetrations.
Handwheel and Baseplate: Cast iron or cast aluminum.
Manual Effort: Not to exceed 40 pounds.

Type 2, Crank-Operated Bench Stands:


1.

2.
3.

4.
D.

Components: Withstand a minimum of 250 percent of design torque or


thrust at extreme operator positions without damage.
Mount at walkway level, 36 inches above floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
Gear train and gate stem sections shall produce a self-locking drive
train.
Lift Nuts: Internally threaded with cut or cold-rolled Acme threads
corresponding to stem threading.
Roller Bearings: Ball-thrust or tapered above and below lift nut to
support both opening and closing thrusts.
a.
Grease lubrication fittings for bearings.
b.
Input pinions with needle or ball bearings.
Lubrication: Furnish rising stem gates with an insert lubricator flange in
lift, with grease fitting for greasing stem threads below stem nut.

Weatherproof housings, mounted on cast aluminum or cast iron base to


the top horizontal member of the slide gate frame as described under
paragraph Operator Support Yoke.
Solid Bronze Lift Nut: Integrally threaded with Acme threads.
Ball Thrust or Tapered Roller Bearings:
a.
Locate above and below operating nut flange to support opening
and closing thrusts.
b.
Include grease lubrication fittings and input pinions.
Manual Crank Effort: Not to exceed 40 pounds.

Type 3, Geared Floor Stands:


1.
2.
3.

Crank-operated, with weatherproof housings with solid bronze lift nut.


Mount on high-strength cast-iron pedestal or base.
Maximum manual crank effort to operate gate shall not exceed
40 pounds.

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.

E.

Type 4, Electric Motor Operators:


1.

F.

2.

For each gate operator, 1-1/2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag,
bearing the gate tag number shown in the schedule.
Attach the tags to the operator by soldered split key rings to that ring
and tag cannot be removed. Use block type numbers and letters with
1/4-inch minimum high numbers and letters stamped on and filled with
black enamel.

APPURTENANCES
A.

Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and


components weighing over 100 pounds.

B.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel sized by


equipment manufacturer at least 1/2 inch in diameter, or as shown, and as
specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

C.

Staff Gauges: For stainless steel, downward acting weir gates. Graduated in
1/4 inches and marked every inch and foot.
1.

2.07

28-inch-high steel pedestal or direct yoke-mounted, totally enclosed


weatherproof electric drive unit, and a totally enclosed gear box which
lifts the gate stem and is controlled as specified in Section 40 27 02,
Process Valves and Operators, Article 2.06.B Electric Motor Actuators.

Identification Tagging Requirements:


1.

2.06

Lift Nut: Internally threaded with Acme threads.


Furnish ball thrust or tapered roller bearings above and below the lift
nut to support both opening and closing thrusts.
a.
Grease lubrication fittings for bearings.
b.
Input pinions with needle or ball bearings.
c.
Mechanical seals at housing penetrations.

Manufacturer and Product: Stevens Water Monitoring Equipment;


Porcelain Enameled Style C.

SHOP/FACTORY FINISHING
A.

Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete with unthinned bitumastic
paint in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, or insulate
with suitable protective neoprene gasket material.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

In accordance with the manufacturers written instructions.

B.

Disassemble factory assembled gate components before installation.

C.

Field mount operators after installing gates.

D.

Brace thimbles internally during concrete placement.

E.

Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by the manufacturer


and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

F.

Lubricate stems before operating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on each slide gate.

B.

Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.03

Conduct on each slide gate.


Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.
Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest if necessary.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.

B.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

C.

Provide manufacturers representative at Site in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, for installation assistance,
inspection and certification of proper installation.

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this


Specification.
1.

Slide Gate Schedule.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SLIDE GATE SCHEDULE


Design Operating
Head (feet)
Gate Identification No. and
Location

Assembly
Style

Wall Opening
(width/height inches)

Thimble
Type

Material

Seating/Unseating
Condition

Operator Type

AER-GTE-P-30781
Mixed Liquor Transfer Pump Station

20-inch diameter

F x MJ

Stainless Steel

10/7

Type 4

AER-GTE-P-30835
Aeration Basin 5

24-inch diameter

F x MJ

Stainless Steel

11/9

Type 4

AER-GTE-P-30836

24-inch diameter

F x MJ

Stainless Steel

11/9

Type 4

HDW-GTE-P-20311
Headworks

54-inch by 120-inch

N/A

Stainless Steel

12/6

Type 4

HDW-GTE-P-20312 *
Headworks

54-inch by 120-inch

N/A

Stainless Steel

12/6

Type 4

HDW-GTE-P-20313 **
Headworks

54-inch by 120-inch

N/A

Stainless Steel

12/6

Type 4

THK-GTE-P-71111
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks

6-inch by 6- inch

N/A

Type 316
Stainless Steel

21/20.5

Type 4

THK-GTE-P-71112
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks

6-inch by 6- inch

N/A

Type 316
Stainless Steel

21/20.5

Type 4

THK-GTE-P-71081
Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks

6-inch by 6- inch

N/A

Type 316
Stainless Steel

20.5/20.5

Type 4

WSR-GTE-P-64061
WAS Phosphate Release Facility

42-inch by 42-inch

N/A

Stainless Steel

3/3

Type 4

WSR-GTE-P-64062
WAS Phosphate Release Facility

42-inch by 42-inch

N/A

Stainless Steel

3/3

Type 4

Aeration Basin 6

* Formerly HDW-GTE-P-20311. Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with type specified.
** Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with type specified.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FABRICATED SLIDE GATES


35 20 16.25 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 05 15
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.03

American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 7, Minimum Design


Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B31.1, Power
Piping.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
b.
A653/A653M, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ZincCoated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process.
c.
E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
International Code Council (ICC):
International Building Code (IBC).
International Mechanical Code (IMC).
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):
a.
SP 58, Pipe Hangers and SupportsMaterials, Design and
Manufacture.
b.
SP 127, Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic
Design, Selection, and Application.

Wetted or Submerged: Submerged, less than 1 foot above liquid surface,


below top of channel wall, under cover or slab of channel or tank, or in other
damp locations.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Catalog information and Drawings of piping support system, locating


each support, sway brace, seismic brace, hanger, guide, component, and
anchor for piping 6 inches and larger and 4 inches and smaller. Identify

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.
4.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

1.04

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
Maintenance information on piping support system.

QUALIFICATIONS
A.

1.05

support, hanger, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and Shop
Drawing detail number.
Calculations for each type of pipe support, attachment and anchor.
Revisions to support systems resulting from changes in related piping
system layout or addition of flexible joints.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Piping support systems shall be designed and Shop Drawings prepared and
sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the state of Idaho.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.

General:
1.
2.

3.
4.
B.

Design, size, and locate piping support systems throughout facility,


whether shown or not.
Piping Smaller than 30 Inches: Contractor Shall be responsible for the
design, sizing and location of piping support systems in accordance with
the requirements specified herein and in general conformance with the
Drawings and Design Details: Supports are shown only where specific
types and locations are required; additional pipe supports may be
required.
Piping 30 Inches and Larger: Support systems designed by Engineer and
detailed on the Drawings.
Meet requirements of MSS SP 58 and ASME B31.1 or as modified by
this section.

Pipe Support Systems:


1.

2.

Design pipe support systems for gravity and thrust loads imposed by
weight of pipes or internal pressures, including insulation and weight of
fluid in pipes.
Seismic loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on
Structural General Drawings.

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.

C.

Anchoring Devices: Design, size, and space support anchoring devices,


including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor support, to
withstand shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each
particular support.

D.

Vertical Sway Bracing: 10-foot maximum centers or as shown.

E.

Existing Support Systems: Use existing supports systems to support new


piping only if Contractor can show they are adequate for additional load, or if
they are strengthened to support additional load.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

Wind loads in accordance with governing codes and as shown on


Structural General Drawings.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Rod Size: In accordance
MSS SP 58 Table 3 and Table 4.
a.
Ductile-iron Pipe 8 Inches and Under: Maximum span limited to
that for standard weight steel pipe for water service.
b.
Ductile-iron Pipe 10 Inches and Larger: Maximum span limited to
20 feet.

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

When specified items are not available, fabricate pipe supports of correct
material and to general configuration indicated.

B.

Special support and hanger details may be required for cases where standard
catalog supports are not applicable.

C.

Materials: In accordance with Table 1 and Table 2, attached as Supplements at


end of section.

HANGERS
A.

Clevis: MSS SP 58, Type 1:


1.
2.
3.

Anvil; Figure 260 for steel pipe and Figure 590 for ductile-iron pipe,
sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.
Insulated Steel Pipe: Anvil; Figure 260 with insulated saddle system
(ISS), sizes 1/2 inch through 16 inches.
B-Line; Figure B3100, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Adjustable Swivel Split-Ring Pipe Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 6:


1.
2.

C.

Steel Yoke Pipe Rolls and Roller Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 41 or Type 43:
1.
2.

D.

Anvil; Figure 175, sizes 2 inches through 30 inches.


B-Line; Figure B3120, sizes 2 inches through 24 inches.

WALL BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES


A.

Welded Steel Wall Bracket: MSS SP 58, Type 33 (heavy-duty):


1.
2.

B.

Anvil; Figure 199, 3,000-pound rating.


B-Line; Figure B3067, 3,000-pound rating.

Adjustable J hanger MSS SP 58, Type 5:


1.
2.

Anvil; Figure 67, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches.


B-Line; Figure B3690, sizes 1/2 inch through 8 inches.

C.

Offset Pipe Clamp: Anvil; Figure 103, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.

D.

Channel Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.04

Anvil; Figure 181 for sizes 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches, and
Figure 171 for sizes 1 inch through 30 inches.
B-Line; Figure B3110 for sizes 2 inches through 24 inches and
Figure B3114 for 30 inches.

Pipe Rollers and Supports: MSS SP 58, Type 44:


1.
2.

2.03

Anvil; Figure 104, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.


B-Line; Figure B3171, sizes 3/4 inch through 8 inches.

Unistrut.
Anvil; Power-Strut.
B-Line; Strut System.
Aickinstrut (FRP).

PIPE SADDLES
A.

Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe saddle for pipe 6 inches and larger with
baseplates drilled for anchors bolts.
1.
2.

In accordance with Standard Detail 4005-515.


Sizes 20 inches though 60 inches, Piping Technology & Products, Inc.;
Fig. 2000.

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Saddle Supports, Pedestal Type:


1.
2.

3.

2.05

CHANNEL TYPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS


A.

Channel Size: 12-gauge, 1-5/8-inch wide minimum steel, or 1-1/2-inch wide,


minimum FRP.

B.

Members and Connections: Design for loads using one-half of manufacturers


allowable loads.

C.

Fasteners: Vinyl ester fiber, polyurethane base composite nuts and bolts, or
encapsulated steel fasteners.

D.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.06

Minimum standard weight pipe stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange.


Nonadjustable Saddle: MSS SP, Type 37 with U-bolt.
a.
Anvil; Figure 259, sizes 4 inches through 36 inches with
Figure 63C base.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3095, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches with
B3088S base.
Adjustable Saddle: MSS SP 58, Type 38 without clamp.
a.
Anvil; Figure 264, sizes 2-1/2 inches through 36 inches with
Figure 62C base.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3092, sizes 3/4 inch through 36 inches with
Figure B3088S base.

B-Line; Strut System.


Unistrut.
Anvil; Power-Strut.
Aickinstrut (FRP System).
Enduro-Durostrut (FRP Systems).

FRP PIPE SUPPORTS SYSTEMS


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

FRP with UV additive, protective veil, and vinyl ester resins resistance
to chemicals listed in Supplement at end of section.
Fire Retardant: ASTM E84.
Include hangers, rods, attachments, and fasteners.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Clevis Hangers:
1.
2.

C.

Design:
1.
2.

D.

Riser Clamp: MSS SP 58, Type 8.


1.
2.

2.09

Aickinstrut.
Enduro.
Century Composite.

PIPE CLAMPS
A.

2.08

Design pipe supports spacing, hanger rod sizing based upon


manufacturers recommendations.
Identify and highlight non-FRP fasteners or components in Shop
Drawing.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.07

Factor of Safety: 3 to 1.
Minimum Design Load: 200 pounds.

Anvil; Figure 261, sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches.


B-Line; Figure B3373, sizes 1/2 inch through 30 inches.

ELBOW AND FLANGE SUPPORTS


A.

Elbow with Adjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2 inches through 18 inches, Anvil;


Figure 62C base.

B.

Elbow with Nonadjustable Stanchion: Sizes 2-1/2 inches through 42 inches,


Anvil; Figure 63A or Figure 63B base.

C.

Flange Support with Adjustable Base: Sizes 2 inches through 24 inches,


Standon; Model S89.

INTERMEDIATE PIPE GUIDES


A.

Type: Hold down pipe guide.


1.

Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3552, 1-1/2 inches through


30 inches.

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Type: U-bolts with double nuts to provide nominal 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch


clearance around pipe; MSS SP 58, Type 24.
1.
2.

2.10

PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES


A.

Type: Spider.

B.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.

2.11

2.12

Anvil; Figure 255, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.


B-Line; Figure B3281 through Figure B3287, sizes 1/2 inch through
24 inches.

PIPE ANCHORS
A.

Type: Anchor chair with U-bolt strap.

B.

Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure B3147A or Figure B3147B.

SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A.

Solid pipe bracing attachment to pipe clevis with clevis cross brace and angle
rod reinforcement.

B.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.13

Anvil; Figure 137 and Figure 137S.


B-Line; Figure B3188 and Figure B3188NS.

Mason Industries.
B-Line.
Anvil.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Anchor Bolts:
1.

2.

Size and Material: Sized by Contractor for required loads, 1/2-inch


minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
Bolt Length (Extension Above Top of Nut):
a.
Minimum Length: Flush with top of nut preferred. If not flush,
shall be no more than one thread recessed below top of nut.
b.
Maximum Length: No more than a full nut depth above top of nut.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Dielectric Barriers:
1.
2.

C.

Insulation Shields:
1.
2.

D.

Type: Galvanized steel or stainless steel, MSS SP 58, Type 40.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Anvil; Figure 167, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3151, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

Welding Insulation Saddles:


1.
2.

E.

Plastic coated hangers, isolation cushion, or tape.


Manufacturer and Products:
a.
B-Line; B1999 Vibra Cushion.
b.
B-Line; Iso Pipe, Isolation Tape.

Type: MSS SP 58, Type 39.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Anvil; Figure Series 160, sizes 1 inch through 36 inches.
b.
B-Line; Figure Series B3160, sizes 1/2 inch through 24 inches.

Plastic Pipe Support Channel:


1.
2.

Type: Continuous support for plastic pipe and to increase support


spacing.
Manufacturer and Product: B-Line; Figure Series B3106V, sizes
1/2 inch through 6 inches with Figure B3106 Vee bottom hanger.

F.

Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with


MSS SP 58.

G.

Attachments:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

I-Beam Clamp: Concentric loading type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, Type 28,
Type 29, or Type 30, which engage both sides of flange.
Concrete Insert: MSS SP 58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with
load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.
Welded Beam Attachment: MSS SP 58, Type 22.
a.
Anvil; Figure 66.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3083.
U-Channel Concrete Inserts: As specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.
Concrete Attachment Plates:
a.
Anvil; Figure 47, Figure 49, or Figure 52.
b.
B-Line; Figure B3084, Figure B3085, or Figure B3086.

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

B.

Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 58, unless shown


otherwise.
Install pipe hanger rods plumb, within 4 degrees of vertical during shut
down, start up or operations.
Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by
equipment.
Support large or heavy valves, fittings, and appurtenances independently
of connected piping.
Support no pipe from pipe above it.
Support pipe at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible
joints and couplings, and where shown.
Do not use adhesive anchors for attachment of supports to ceiling or
walls.
Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or
bridge crane runs.
Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal
and lateral sway bracing and to reduce movement after startup.
Install lateral supports for seismic loads at changes in direction.
Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads
and to direct and control thermal expansion.
Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are
completed.

Standard Pipe Supports:


1.

2.

3.

Horizontal Suspended Piping:


a.
Single Pipes: Clevis hangers or adjustable swivel split-ring.
b.
Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger system.
Horizontal Piping Supported from Walls:
a.
Single Pipes: Wall brackets, or attached to wall, or to wall
mounted framing with anchors.
b.
Stacked Piping: Wall mounted framing system and J hangers
acceptable for pipe smaller than 3-inch.
c.
Pipe clamp that resists axial movement of pipe through support is
not acceptable. Use pipe rollers supported from wall bracket.
Horizontal Piping Supported from Floors:
a.
Saddle Supports:
1)
Pedestal Type, elbow and flange.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2)
Provide minimum 1-1/2-inch grout beneath baseplate.
Floor Mounted Channel Supports:
1)
Use for pipe smaller than 3-inch running along floors and in
trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be accommodated
using pedestal pipe supports.
2)
Attach channel framing to floors with baseplate on
minimum 1-1/2-inch nonshrink grout and with anchor bolts.
3)
Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps.
c.
Concrete Cradles: Use for pipe larger than 3 inches along floor
and in trenches at pipe elevations lower than can be
accommodated using stanchion type.
Insulated Pipe:
a.
Pipe hanger and support shall be on outside of insulation. Do not
enclose within insulation.
b.
Provide precut 120-degree sections of rigid insulation (minimum
length same as shield), shields and oversized hangers or insulated
saddle system (ISS).
c.
Wall-mounted pipe clips not acceptable for insulated piping.
Vertical Pipe: Support with wall bracket and elbow support, or riser
clamp on floor penetration.

b.

4.

5.
C.

Standard Attachments:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

New Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts, concrete attachment plates, or


concrete anchors as limited below:
a.
Single point attachment to ceiling allowed only for 3/4-inch rod
and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe).
b.
Where there is vibration or bending considerations, do not connect
a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete
anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.
Existing Concrete Ceilings: Channel type support with minimum of two
anchor points, concrete attachment plates or concrete anchors as limited
below:
a.
Single point attachment to ceiling is allowed only for 3/4-inch rod
and smaller (8 inches and smaller pipe).
b.
Where there is vibration or bending considerations do not connect
a single pipe support hanger rod directly to a drilled concrete
anchor (single point attachment) regardless of size.
Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments.
Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than
2-1/2 inches thick.
Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with concrete
anchors.

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.
D.

Saddles for Steel or Concrete Pipe: Provide 90-degree to120-degree pipe


saddle for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger when installed on top of steel or
concrete beam or structure, pipe rack, trapeze, or where similar concentrated
point supports would be encountered.

E.

Intermediate and Pipe Alignment Guides:


1.
2.
3.

F.

2.
3.

Insulation Shield: Install on insulated piping with oversize rollers and


supports.
Welding Insulation Saddle: Install on insulated steel pipe with oversize
rollers and supports.
Dielectric Barrier:
a.
Provide between painted or galvanized carbon steel members and
copper or stainless steel pipe or between stainless steel supports
and nonstainless steel ferrous metal piping.
b.
Install rubber wrap between submerged metal pipe and oversized
clamps.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Provide pipe alignment guides, or pipe supports that provide same


function, at expansion joints and loops.
Guide pipe on each side of expansion joint or loop at 4 pipe and 14 pipe
diameters from each joint or loop.
Install intermediate guides on metal framing support systems not
carrying pipe anchor or alignment guide.

Accessories:
1.

3.02

Concrete Beams: Concrete inserts, or if inserts are not used attach to


vertical surface similar to concrete wall. Do not drill into beam bottom.

Paint atmospheric exposed surfaces hot-dip galvanized steel components as


specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1.
2.

Table 1: Nonchemical Areas.


Table 2: Chemical Areas.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Table 1
Nonchemical Areas
Exposure Conditions

Support Material

Office Areas

Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic


coat hangers for uninsulated copper or
stainless steel piping

Shops and Warehouse Areas

Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic


coat hangers for uninsulated copper or
stainless steel piping

Pipe Galleries

Galvanized steel or precoated steel, plastic


coat hangers for uninsulated copper or
stainless steel piping

Process Areas: High Humidity or Hydrogen


sulfide
Utilidor pipe trenches,
RAS Pump Station
WAS Phosphate Release Facility
DAFT Building

Stainless steel or FRP

Process Areas: Wetted or Submerged


Primary Clarifiers
Interior of fermentation tanks,
Interior of Aeration Basins

Stainless steel or FRP

Pipes conveying chemicals listed in Table 2

Provide with corresponding support per


Table 2.

Notes:
1. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol).
2. Stainless steel to be Type 316.
3. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.
4. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these
surfaces.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Table 2
Chemical Areas
Support for Direct
Exposure

Exposure Conditions

Support for Remote


Exposure

Coagulants (Polymer)

FRP

Precoated steel or galvanized


steel

Ferric Chloride

FRP

Precoated steel

Notes:
1. Direct exposure includes entire area within containment area; area within 20 feet
horizontal and 10 feet vertical of chemical pumps or chemical mixing stations; or as
specified.
2. Remote exposure is area beyond area defined as direct exposure, but within designated
building.
3. Precoated steel to be fusion bonded epoxy or vinyl copolymer (Plastisol).
4. Stainless steel to be Type 316.
5. Galvanized steel to be per ASTM A653/A653M, Class G90, or hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M.
6. Do not use galvanized steel or aluminum where lime dust can accumulate on these
surfaces.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS


40 05 15 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 05 33
PIPE HEAT TRACING
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.
4.
1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

PART 2
2.01

Manufacturers descriptive literature.


Plastic Pipe Installations: Output adjustment factors for heating tape for
the services indicated.
Pipe heat loss calculations for each pipe size to be heat traced.

PRODUCTS
SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.

Design Heating Load:


1.

2.
2.02

Factory Mutual.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics engineers, Inc (IEEE): 515,
Testing, Design, Installation and Maintenance of Electrical Resistance
Heat Tracing for Industrial Applications.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

Heating load to be calculated based upon a 75 degree F delta, 20 mph


wind if pipes are located outdoors, insulation as specified in
Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation, pipe as specified in
Section 40 27 00, Process PipingGeneral, and shall include a
10 percent safety factor.
Heat loss calculations shall be based on IEEE 515, Equation 1, Page 19.

ELECTRICAL HEATING TAPE


A.

Cable: Self-limiting, parallel circuit construction consisting of continuous


inner core of variable resistance conductive heating material between two

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPE HEAT TRACING


40 05 33 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

parallel copper bus wires. Provide tinned copper braid for PVC, FRP, and
stainless steel pipe applications.
B.

UL Listing: Listed as self-limiting pipe tracing material for pipe freeze


protection application in ordinary conditions.

C.

Maximum Maintenance Temperature: 150 degrees F (65 degrees C).

D.

Maximum Intermittent Temperature: 185 degrees F (85 degrees C).

E.

Service Voltage: As indicated by branch circuits provided for heat tracing on


the Drawings.

F.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.

2.03

Raychem; BTV-CR.
Thermon; BSX.
Nelson; CL1-J1 or L1-J1.

CONNECTION SYSTEM
A.

Rating: NEMA 250, Type 4 and Factory Mutual approved.

B.

Operating Monitor Light: Furnish with each circuit power connection kit to
indicate when heat tracing is energized.

C.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Connection Kit:


a.
Raychem; JBS-100.
b.
Thermon; PCA-1-SR or DP-L.
c.
Nelson; PLT-BC.
Splice Kit:
a.
Raychem; S-150.
b.
Thermon; PCS-1-SR.
c.
Nelson; PLT-BS.
Tee Kit:
a.
Raychem; T-100.
b.
Thermon; DS-S.
c.
Nelson; PLT-BY.
End Seal Kit:
a.
Raychem; E-150.
b.
Thermon; DE-S.
c.
Nelson; LT-ME.

PIPE HEAT TRACING


40 05 33 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

2.04

SECURING TAPE
A.

Plastic Piping Systems:


1.
2.

B.

Type: Glass or polyester cloth pressure sensitive tape.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Raychem; GS54 or GT66.
b.
Thermon; PF-1.
c.
Nelson; GT-6 or GT-60.

PIPE MOUNTED THERMOSTAT


A.

Type: Fixed, nonadjustable, set at 40 degrees F.

B.

Sensor: Fluid-filled with 3-foot capillary.

C.

Enclosure: Glass-filled nylon, NEMA 250, Type 4X weatherproof with


gasketed lid.

D.

Switch: SP-ST, UL listed, rated 22 amps, 120 to 240V ac.

E.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.06

Type: Aluminum foil coated adhesive tape.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Raychem; AT-180.
b.
Thermon; AL-20P.
c.
Nelson; AT-50.

Metallic Piping Systems:


1.
2.

2.05

Lighted End Seal Kit:


a.
Raychem; E-100-L.
b.
Thermon; DLS.
c.
Nelson; LT-L.

Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-F5.


Thermon; E4X-1.
Raychem; DigiTrace Model E507S-LS for hazardous areas.
Thermon; E7-25325 for hazardous areas.

AMBIENT THERMOSTAT
A.

Type: Adjustable setting (15 to 140 degrees F).

B.

Sensor: Fluid-filled probe.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPE HEAT TRACING


40 05 33 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Enclosure: Epoxy-coated NEMA 250, Type 4X aluminum enclosure with


exposed hardware of stainless steel.

D.

Switch: SP-DT, UL or FM listed, rated 22 amps, 125 to 250V ac.

E.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.
4.

PART 3
3.01

Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-1A.


Thermon; B4X-15140.
Raychem; DigiTrace Model AMC-1H for hazardous areas.
Thermon; B7-15140 for hazardous areas.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and


recommended practices.
Provide insulation as specified in Section 40 42 13, Process Piping
Insulation, over all pipe heat tracing.
Ground metallic structures or materials used for support of heating cable
or on which it is installed in accordance with applicable codes.
Wiring between power connection points of heat tracing cable branch
lines shall be provided by heat tracing system supplier.
Provide end of circuit pilot lights on heat tracing circuits for buried
piping.

Electrical Heating Tape:


1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

Determine required length of electrical heating tape by considering


length of circuit, number and type of fittings and fixtures, design heating
load, and heating tape output.
Where design heating load exceeds heating tape capacity, install by
spiraling.
Derate heating tape capacity when installed on plastic piping.
Install on services indicated in the Piping Schedule.
Install additional heating tape at bolted flanges, valves, pipe supports,
and other fittings and fixtures as recommended by supplier, but not less
than the following:

PIPE HEAT TRACING


40 05 33 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Item
Bolted flanges (per pair)

Two times pipe diameter

Valves

Four times valve length

Pipe hanger or support penetrating


insulation

Three times pipe diameter

C.

Heat Tracing Circuits: Limit individual lengths of heat tracing circuits such
that maximum single circuit capacity is 20 amps when starting the circuit at
40 degrees F. Provide multiple 20-amp circuits as required at individual heat
tracing locations.

D.

Thermostats:
1.
2.

3.02

Heating Tape Length


(min. feet)

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as approved


by Engineer.
For each group of heat traced circuit, install one ambient thermostat.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Test each circuit with 500-volt insulation tester between circuit and ground
with neutrals isolated from ground.
1.

Insulation Resistance: Minimum 1,000 megohms per 1,000 feet.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PIPE HEAT TRACING


40 05 33 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section


and any supplemental Data Sheets:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Air Force: A-A-58092, Tape Antiseize, Polytetrafluorethylene.


American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO): HB-17, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
American Petroleum Institute (API): SPEC 5L, Specification for Line
Pipe.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a.
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels.
b.
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Qualification
Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers,
and Welding and Brazing Operators.
c.
B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
d.
B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
(Classes 25, 125, and 250).
e.
B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300.
f.
B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through
NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard.
g.
B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings.
h.
B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
i.
B16.15, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250.
j.
B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
k.
B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings.
l.
B16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500.
m. B16.25, Butt Welding Ends.
n.
B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes
150 and 300.
o.
B31.1, Power Piping.
p.
B31.3, Process Piping.
q.
B31.9, Building Services Piping.
r.
B36.10M, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
s.
B36.19M, Stainless Steel Pipe.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.
6.

7.

8.

American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): SNT-TC-1A,


Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing.
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a.
C104/A21.4, Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water.
b.
C105/A21.5, Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe
Systems.
c.
C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water.
d.
C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
e.
C115/A21.15, Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or
Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.
f.
C116/A21.16, Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the
Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron
Fittings for Water Supply Service.
g.
C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
h.
C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
i.
C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 In.
Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm).
j.
C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
American Welding Society (AWS):
a.
Brazing Handbook.
b.
A5.8/A5.8M, Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and
Braze Welding.
c.
QC1, Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A47/A47M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron
Castings.
b.
A53/A53M, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
c.
A105/A105M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
for Piping Applications.
d.
A106/A106M, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel
Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
e.
A126, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
f.
A135/A135M, Standard Specification for Electric-ResistanceWelded Steel Pipe.
g.
A139/A139M, Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc)Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over).
h.
A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

i.
j.

k.
l.

m.

n.
o.
p.

q.

r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
aa.
bb.
cc.

A181/A181M, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings,


for General-Purpose Piping.
A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy
and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and
Parts for High-Temperature Service.
A183, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and
Nuts.
A193/A193M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High
Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.
A194/A194M, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both.
A197/A197M, Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron.
A216/A216M, Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.
A234/A234M, Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.
A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and
Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
A269, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.
A320/A320M, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and
Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service.
A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts.
A395/A395M, Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron
Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
A403/A403M, Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings.
A409/A409M, Standard Specification for Welded Large Diameter
Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High-Temperature Service.
A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
A587, Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded
Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical Industry.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

dd.

A743/A743M, Standard Specification for Castings, IronChromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for
General Application.
ee. A744/A744M, Standard Specification for Castings, IronChromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service.
ff. A774/A774M, Standard Specification for As-Welded Wrought
Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at
Low and Moderate Temperatures.
gg. A778, Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubular Products.
hh. B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
ii.
B43, Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe,
Standard Sizes.
jj.
B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
kk. B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
ll.
B75, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube.
mm. B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
nn. B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar and Shapes.
oo. B462, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030,
UNS N06022, UNS N06035, UNS N06200, UNS N06059, UNS
N06686, UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, UNS
N08367, UNS N10276, UNS N10665, UNS N10675, UNS
N10629, UNS N08031, UNS N06045, UNS N06025, and UNS
R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts
for Corrosive High-Temperature Service.
pp. B464, Standard Specification for Welded UNS N08020, N08024,
and N08026 Alloy Pipe.
qq. B474, Standard Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Nickel
and Nickel Alloy Pipe.
rr. C582, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced
Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment.
ss. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension.
tt.
D413, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property Adhesion to
Flexible Substrate.
uu. D543, Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics
to Chemical Reagents.
vv. D1248, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable.
ww. D1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

xx.

yy.
zz.
aaa.
bbb.
ccc.
ddd.
eee.
fff.

ggg.
hhh.
iii.
jjj.
kkk.
lll.
mmm.
nnn.

ooo.
ppp.
qqq.
rrr.

D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)


(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
D1785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
D2000, Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications.
D2310, Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
D2464, Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
D2466, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
D2467, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
D2837, Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design
Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials or Pressure Design Basis
for Thermoplastic Pipe Products.
D2996, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Fiberglass
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer
Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
D3222, Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene
Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials.
D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and
Fittings Materials.
D4101, Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials.
D4894, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials.
D4895, Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Resin Produced from Dispersion.
F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
F437, Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
F439, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
F441/F441M, Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.

10.
11.
12.
1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

Submerged or Wetted:
1.

1.03

sss. F477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for


Joining Plastic Pipe.
ttt. F493, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
uuu. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs.
vvv. F656, Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent
Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and
Fittings.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc. (MSS): SP-43, Wrought Stainless Steel Butt-Welding
Fittings.
NSF International (NSF): 61 Drinking Water System Components
Health Effects.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): LI 1, Industrial
Laminating Thermosetting Products.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.

Zone below elevation of:


a.
Top face of channel walls and cover slabs.
b.
Top face of aeration basin walkways.
c.
Top face of clarifier walkways.
d.
Liquid surface or within 3 feet above top of liquid surface.
e.
Top of tank wall or under tank cover.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.

Where pipe diameter, thickness, pressure class, pressure rating, or thrust


restraint is not shown or specified, design piping system in accordance with
the following:
1.
2.
3.

Building Service Piping: ASME B31.9, as applicable.


Sanitary Building Drainage and Vent Systems: Uniform Plumbing Code,
2009, with City of Boise Amendments.
Buried Piping: H20-S16 traffic load with 1.5 impact factor,
AASHTO HB-17, as applicable.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

1.04

Thrust Restraints:
a.
Design for test pressure shown in Piping Schedule.
b.
Above grade piping shall utilize inherently restrained or
mechanically restrained joints.
c.
Only restrained joint piping shall be utilized in below grade
applications.
d.
Concrete thrust blocking is not permitted for buried pressure
piping.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
B.

Shop Fabricated Piping:


a.
Detailed pipe fabrication or spool Drawings showing special
fittings and bends, dimensions, coatings, and other pertinent
information.
b.
Layout Drawing showing location of each pipe section and each
special length; number or otherwise designate laying sequence on
each piece.
Pipe Wall Thickness: Identify wall thickness and rational method or
standard applied to determine wall thickness for each size of each
different service including exposed, submerged, buried, and
concrete-encased installations for Contractor-designed piping.
Hydraulic Thrust Restraint for Restrained Joints: Details including
materials, sizes, assembly ratings, and pipe attachment methods.
Dissimilar Buried Pipe Joints: Joint types and assembly Drawings.
Pipe Corrosion Protection: Product data.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.

Manufacturers Certification of Compliance:


a.
Pipe and fittings.
b.
Welding electrodes and filler materials.
c.
Factory applied resins and coatings.
Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Qualifications:
a.
Welders:
1)
List of qualified welders and welding operators.
2)
Current test records for qualified welder(s) and weld type(s)
for factory and field welding.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Qualifications:
1.

1.06

Welder and Welding Operator Qualifications:


a.
Qualified by accepted inspection and testing agency before
starting Work in accordance with Section IX, Article III of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
b.
Qualified to perform groove welds in Positions 2G and 5G for
each welding process and pipe material specified.
c.
Qualification tests may be waived by Engineer based on evidence
of prior qualification.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements, and:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

PART 2
2.01

Weld Procedures: Records in accordance with ASME Boiler and


Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX for weld type(s) and base metal(s).
Pipe coating applicator certification.
Laboratory Testing Equipment: Certified calibrations, manufacturers
product data, and test procedures.
Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.

Flanges: Securely attach metal, hardboard, or wood protectors over


entire gasket surface.
Threaded or Socket Welding Ends: Fit with metal, wood, or plastic
plugs or caps.
Linings and Coatings: Prevent excessive drying.
Cold Weather Storage: Locate products to prevent coating from freezing
to ground.
Handling: Use heavy canvas or nylon slings to lift pipe and fittings.

PRODUCTS
PIPING
A.

As specified on Piping Data Sheet(s) and Piping Schedule located at the end
of this section as Supplement.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Diameters Shown:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Standardized Products: Nominal size.


Fabricated Steel Piping (Except Cement-Lined): Outside diameter,
ASME B36.10M.
Cement-Lined Steel Pipe: Lining inside diameter.

JOINTS
A.

Grooved End System:


1.
2.
3.

B.

Rigid type.
Use of flexible grooved joints will only be allowed where shown on
Drawings or with prior approval by Engineer.
Flanges: When required, furnish with grooved type flange adapters of
same manufacturer as grooved end couplings.

Flanged Joints:
1.
2.

Flat-faced, carbon steel, or alloy flanges when mating with flat-faced


cast or ductile iron flanges.
Higher pressure rated flanges as required to mate with equipment when
equipment flange is of higher pressure rating than required for piping.

C.

Threaded Joints: NPT taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

D.

Mechanical Joint Anchor Gland Follower:


1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Flexible Mechanical Compression Joint Coupling:


1.
2.

F.

Ductile iron anchor type, wedge action, with breakoff tightening bolts.
Thrust rated to 250 psi minimum.
Rated operating deflection not less than 2-1/2 degrees.
UL and FM approved.

Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 305 bands.


Manufacturers:
a.
Pipeline Products Corp.
b.
Fernco Joint Sealer Co.

Mechanical connections of profile wall polyethylene (PWPE) pipe to auxiliary


equipment and other piping systems shall be through flanged connections
consisting of the following:
1.

A polyethylene stub end thermally butt-fused to end of pipe.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.
G.
2.03

Gasket Joints in PVC Piping for Gravity Applications: As specified on Data


Sheet.

GASKET LUBRICANT
A.

2.04

ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 stainless steel backing flange,


125-pound, ASME B16.1 standard. Use insulating flanges where
shown.
Bolts and nuts of sufficient length to show a minimum of three
complete threads when joint is made and tightened to manufacturers
standard. Retorque nuts after 4 hours.
Gaskets as specified on Data Sheet.

Lubricant shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer and no substitute or orequal will be allowed.

PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION


A.

Coatings: See Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for details of coating
requirements.

B.

Heat Shrink Wrap:


1.
2.

C.

Polyethylene Encasement (Bagging):


1.

2.

D.

Type: Cross-linked polyolefin wrap or sleeve with mastic sealant.


Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; WPC or TPS.

Encasement Tube: Black polyethylene encasement tube, 8 mils


minimum thickness, conforming to AWWA C105/A21.5, free of gels,
streaks, pinholes, foreign matter, undispersed raw materials, and visible
defects such as tears, blisters, and thinning at folds.
Securing Tape: Thermoplastic tape, 8 mils minimum thickness, 1 inch
wide, pressure sensitive adhesive face capable of bonding to metal,
bituminous coating, and polyethylene encasement tube.

Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:


1.

Materials:
a.
In accordance with applicable piping material specified in Pipe
Data Sheet. Complete assembly shall have ASME B31.3 working
pressure rating equal to or higher than that of joint and pipeline.
b.
Galvanically compatible with piping.
c.
Resistant for intended exposure, operating temperatures, and
products in pipeline.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

5.

2.05

2.06

Union Type, 2 Inches and Smaller:


a.
Screwed or solder-joint.
b.
O-ring sealed with molded and bonded insulation to body.
Flange Type, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Flanged, complete with bolt
insulators, dielectric gasket, bolts, and nuts. Bolt insulating sleeves shall
be provided full length between insulating washers. Contractor shall be
responsible for fit-up of all components of insulated flange assembly to
provide a complete functioning installation. AWWA C207 steel flanges
may be drilled oversize up to 1/8-inch to accommodate insulating
sleeves. No less than minimum thread engagement in accordance with
specified bolting standards will be permitted to accommodate
thicknesses of all required washers, flanges and gasket.
Flange Insulating Kits:
a.
Gaskets: Full-face, Type E with elastomeric sealing element.
Sealing element shall be retained in a groove within retainer
portion of gasket.
b.
Insulating Sleeves: Full-length mylar.
c.
Insulating Washers: High-strength phenolic.
d.
Steel Washers: Hardened steel, ASTM F436, 1/8 inch thick.
1)
Provide two washers per bolt for flange diameters equal to
or less than 36-inch.
2)
Provide four washers per bolt for flange diameters larger
than 36-inch.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Dielectric Flanges and Unions:
1)
PSI, Houston, TX.
2)
Advance Products and Systems, Lafayette, LA.
b.
Insulating Couplings:
1)
Dresser; STAB-39.
2)
Baker Coupling Company, Inc.; Series 216.

THRUST TIES
A.

Steel Pipe: Fabricated lugs and rods in accordance with details shown on
Drawings.

B.

Buried Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Unless restraint is otherwise specified
or shown, conform to NFPA 24. Tie-rod attachments relying on clamp friction
with pipe barrel to restrain thrust are unacceptable.

VENT AND DRAIN VALVES


A.

Pipeline 2-Inch Diameter and Smaller: 1/2-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.
2.07

Pipelines 2-1/2-Inch Diameter and Larger: 3/4-inch vent, 1-inch drain, unless
shown otherwise.

FABRICATION
A.

Mark each pipe length on outside with the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.08

B.

Code markings according to approved Shop Drawings.

C.

Flanged pipe shall be fabricated in the shop, not in the field, and delivered to
the Site with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be
individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by the
manufacturer.

FINISHES
A.

Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Pipe Data Sheet(s)
and Piping Schedule.

B.

Galvanizing:
1.
2.
3.

PART 3
3.01

Size or diameter and class.


Manufacturers identification and pipe serial number.
Location number on laying Drawing.
Date of manufacture.

Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of ASTM A153/A153M.


Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable.
Stainless steel components may be substituted where galvanizing is
specified.

EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.

Verify size, material, joint types, elevation, horizontal location, and pipe
service of existing pipelines to be connected to new pipelines or new
equipment.

B.

Inspect size and location of structure penetrations to verify adequacy of wall


pipes, sleeves, and other openings.

C.

Welding Electrodes: Verify proper grade and type, free of moisture and
dampness, and coating is undamaged.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

3.03

PREPARATION
A.

See Piping Schedule and Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, for
additional requirements.

B.

Notify Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to field fabrication of pipe or fittings.

C.

Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and
remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.

D.

Damaged Coatings and Linings: Repair using original coating and lining
materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions, except for damaged
glass-lined pipe that is to be promptly removed from the Site.

WELDING
A.

Perform in accordance with Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code and ASME B31.1 for Pressure Piping, as may be specified on Piping
Data Sheets, and if recommended by piping or fitting manufacturer.

B.

Weld Identification: Mark each weld with symbol identifying welder.

C.

Pipe End Preparation:


1.
2.
3.

D.

Surfaces:
1.
2.

3.

E.

Machine Shaping: Preferred.


Oxygen or Arc Cutting: Smooth to touch, true, and slag removal by
chipping or grinding.
Beveled Ends for Butt Welding: ASME B16.25.

Clean and free of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, or other material
detrimental to welding.
Clean stainless steel joints with stainless steel wire brushes or stainless
steel wool prior to welding. Carbon steel brushes and tools shall not be
used on stainless surfaces.
Thoroughly clean each layer of deposited weld metal, including final
pass, prior to deposition of each additional layer of weld metal with a
power-driven wire brush.

Alignment and Spacing:


1.
2.

Align ends to be joined within existing commercial tolerances on


diameters, wall thicknesses, and out-of-roundness.
Root Opening of Joint: As stated in qualified welding procedure.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
F.

Climatic Conditions:
1.

2.

3.04

Minimum Spacing of Circumferential Butt Welds: Minimum four times


pipe wall thickness or 1 inch, whichever is greater.

Do not perform welding if there is impingement of any rain, snow, sleet,


or high wind on the weld area, or if the ambient temperature is below
32 degrees F.
Stainless Steel and Alloy Piping: If the ambient is less than
32 degrees F, local preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is
required.

G.

Tack Welds: Performed by qualified welder using same procedure as for


completed weld, made with electrode similar or equivalent to electrode to be
used for first weld pass, and not defective. Remove those not meeting
requirements prior to commencing welding procedures.

H.

Surface Defects: Chip or grind out those affecting soundness of weld.

I.

Weld Passes: As required in welding procedure.

J.

Weld Quality: Free of cracks, incomplete penetration, weld undercutting,


excessive weld reinforcement, porosity slag inclusions, and other defects in
excess of limits shown in applicable piping code.

INSTALLATIONGENERAL
A.

Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturers instructions, unless


otherwise shown or specified.

B.

Remove foreign objects prior to assembly and installation.

C.

Flanged Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Install perpendicular to pipe centerline.


Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting
equipment flanges or as shown.
Use torque-limiting wrenches to ensure uniform bearing and proper bolt
tightness.
Plastic Flanges: Install annular ring filler gasket at joints of raised-face
flange.
Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: Include stainless steel washer plates as
required for mating to serrated faces and lined valves and equipment.
Raised-Face Flanges: Use flat-face flange when joining with flat-faced
ductile or cast iron flange.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.
8.

9.
10.
D.

Threaded and Coupled Joints:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

E.

Conform to ASME B1.20.1.


Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when
screwed home in fittings.
Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading.
Make connections with not more than three threads exposed.
Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on
Piping Data Sheets.

Grooved-End Joints:
1.

2.
F.

Verify compatibility of mating flange to adapter flange gasket prior to


selecting grooved adapter flanging.
Flange fillers are to be avoided, but if necessary, may be used to make
up for small angles up to 6 degrees and for filling gaps up to 2 inches
between flanges. Stacked flange fillers shall not be used.
Threaded flanged joints shall be shop fabricated and delivered to Site
with flanges in-place and properly faced.
Manufacturer: Same as pipe manufacturer or grooved joint flange
adapter manufacturer.

Piping shall be grooved in accordance with the manufacturers latest


published instructions and shall be accurately cut with tools conforming
to coupling manufacturers standards and to AWWA C606.
Install grooved joint couplings and gaskets in accordance with
manufacturers latest published installation instructions.

Soldered Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Use only solder specified for particular service.


Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs.
After thoroughly cleaning pipe and fitting of oil and grease using solvent
and emery cloth, apply noncorrosive flux to the male end only.
Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint before hardened.
Before soldering, remove stems and washers from solder joint valves.

G.

Pipe Connections at Concrete Structures: As specified in Article Piping


Flexibility Provisions in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping Specialties.

H.

PVC:
1.

Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to


threaded valve or fitting.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.
I.

Ductile Iron Piping:


1.
2.

J.

6.
7.

3.05

Cutting Pipe: Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or
abrasive blade cutter. Do not flame cut.
Dressing Cut Ends:
a.
General: As required for the type of joint to be made.
b.
Rubber Gasketed Joints: Remove sharp edges or projections.
c.
Push-On Joints: Bevel, as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
d.
Flexible Couplings, Flanged Coupling Adapters, and Grooved End
Pipe Couplings: As recommended by the coupling or adapter
manufacturer.

Profile Wall Polyethylene Piping (PWPE):


5.

K.

Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not


overtighten fittings.
Do not thread Schedule 40 pipe.

Join pipes, fittings, and flange connections by means of thermal


butt-fusion.
Perform butt-fusion in accordance with pipe manufacturers
recommendations as to equipment and technique.
Special Precautions at Flanges: Polyethylene pipe connected to heavy
fittings, manholes, and rigid structures shall be supported in such a
manner that no subsequent relative movement between polyethylene
pipe at flanged joint and rigid structures is possible.

Fiberglass Reinforced Piping: In accordance with Section 23 31 16.16, Foul


Air Ductwork and Accessories.

INSTALLATIONEXPOSED PIPING
A.

Piping Runs:
1.
2.

Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless


shown otherwise.
Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall
provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.

B.

Supports: Contractor-designed, in accordance with details indicated on the


Drawings.

C.

Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve


building space and not interfere with use of space and other Work.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Unions or Flanges: Provide at each piping connection to equipment or


instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation
and removal.

E.

Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by


equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection; install
to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.

F.

Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.
7.

3.06

Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from


walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system
including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or
hanger/support systems.
Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping:
Minimum 3 feet, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of
piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms,
insulation, or hanger/support systems.
From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of
completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or
mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders,
stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.
Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less
than the top of the opening.
Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer
vaults or electrical equipment rooms.
Do not route piping over, around, in front of, behind, or below electrical
equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or
other similar electrical Work.

INSTALLATIONBURIED PIPE
A.

Joints:
1.

2.
3.

Dissimilar Buried Pipes:


a.
Provide flexible mechanical compression joints for pressure pipe.
b.
Provide concrete closure collar for gravity piping or as shown.
Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete,
unless specifically shown.
Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit correct assembly and
inspection of entire joint.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Placement:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

11.
12.
13.
14.

C.

Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed.
Pipe Base and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench
Backfill.
Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or
damage to pipe.
Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe.
Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual
inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection.
Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.
Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement
operations are not in progress and at close of days Work.
Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying.
Install closure sections and adapters for gravity piping at locations where
pipe laying changes direction.
Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical
closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths
will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment,
provide:
a.
Shorter pipe lengths.
b.
Special mitered joints.
c.
Standard or special fabricated bends.
After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade.
Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before
next joint is installed.
Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
Gravity Applications: Plug or close off pipes that are stubbed off for
manhole, concrete structure, or for connection by others, with temporary
watertight plugs.

PVC or PWPE Pipe Placement:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Lay pipe snaking from one side of trench to other.


Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature
variation between time of solvent welding and during operation.
Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F, or above
90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight.
Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during the
laying operation.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Service Connections for Gravity Applications:


1.
2.

E.

Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

3.07

3.08

Minimum Slope: 1/4 inch per foot.


Disconnecting and Reconnecting Existing Service Connections:
a.
Locate the existing service connections prior to constructing
the tee in the new sewerline.
b.
Disconnect existing service connections from existing sewers
to be abandoned and reconnect them to the new sewers.

Deflection from Horizontal Line, Except PVC: Maximum 2 inches.


Deflection From Vertical Grade: Maximum 1/4 inch.
Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of manufacturers
recommendation.
Horizontal position of pipe centerline on alignment around curves
maximum variation of 1.75 feet from position shown.
Pipe Cover: Minimum 3 feet, unless otherwise shown.

INSTALLATIONCONCRETE ENCASED
A.

Provide reinforced concrete pipe encasement where shown on Drawings and


where otherwise required. Some piping may be required to be concrete
encased for pipe strength requirements that are included in the Specifications.
Piping under and within the influence of buildings, utility trenches, vaults,
slabs and other structures shall be concrete encased. See details on Drawings
for encasement requirements.

B.

Where concrete encased piping crosses structure construction and expansion


joints, provide flexible piping joints to coincide with structure joints to
prevent excessive pipe stress and breakage.

PIPE CORROSION PROTECTION


A.

Ductile Iron Pipe:


1.
2.
3.

Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as


shown in Piping Schedule.
Buried: Wrap with polyethylene bagging.
Submerged or Embedded: Coat with coal-tar epoxy as specified in
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. If in potable water service, use
NSF 61 approved epoxy.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Copper Pipe:
1.
2.

Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


Buried: Not used.

C.

PVC Pipe, Exposed: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

D.

Piping Accessories:
1.

2.

Exposed:
a.
Field paint black and galvanized steel, brass, copper, and bronze
piping components as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, as applicable to base metal material.
b.
Accessories include, but are not limited to, pipe hangers, supports,
expansion joints, pipe guides, flexible couplings, vent and drain
valves, and fasteners.
Buried:
a.
Ferrous Metal and Stainless Steel Components: Coat with coal-tar
epoxy as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Bolts, Nuts, and Similar Items: Coat with bituminous paint.
c.
Flexible Couplings, Grooved Couplings, and Similar Items: Wrap
with heat shrink wrap.
d.
Buried Valves and Similar Elements on Wrapped Pipelines: Coat
with bituminous paint and wrap entire valve in polyethylene
encasement.
e.
Cement-Coated Pipelines: Cement coat appurtenances same as
pipe.

E.

Polyethylene Encasement: Install in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5 and


manufacturers instructions.

F.

Tape Coating System: As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

G.

Heat Shrink Wrap: Apply in accordance with manufacturers instructions to


surfaces that are cleaned, prepared, and primed.

H.

Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Unions:


1.

2.

Applications:
a.
Dissimilar metal piping connections.
b.
Cathodically protected piping penetration to watertight structures.
c.
Where required for electrically insulated connection.
Pipe Installation:
a.
Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to nonimmersed
piping shall be installed above maximum water surface elevation.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

c.

3.09

I.

Pipe Bonding for Buried Piping: Not used.

J.

Cathodic Protection for Buried Piping: Not used.

THRUST RESTRAINT
A.

Location:
1.

2.
B.

2.
3.

C.

Buried Piping: Where shown and where required to restrain force


developed at pipeline tees, plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where
unbalanced forces exist because of hydrostatic testing and normal
operating pressure.
Exposed Piping: At all joints in piping.

Thrust Ties:
1.

3.10

Submerged carbon steel, ductile iron, or galvanized piping in


reinforced concrete shall be isolated from the concrete
reinforcement steel.
Align and install insulating joints as shown on the Drawings and
according to manufacturers recommendations. Bolt lubricants
that contain graphite or other metallic or electrically conductive
components that can interfere with the insulating capabilities of
the completed flange shall not be used.

Steel Pipe: Attach with lugs fabricated in accordance with details shown
on Drawings.
Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with socket clamps anchored against a
grooved joint coupling or flange.
Flanged Coupling Adapters: For exposed installations, install
manufacturers anchor studs through the coupling sleeve or use
dismantling joints.

Mechanical Joint Valve Restraint in Proprietary Restrained Joint Piping:


Install pipe joint manufacturers adapter gland follower and pipe end retainer,
or mechanical joint anchor gland follower.

SLAB, FLOOR, WALL, AND ROOF PENETRATIONS


A.

Application and Installation: As specified in Section 40 27 01, Process Piping


Specialties.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.11

BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A.

Do not install branch connections smaller than 1/2-inch nominal pipe size,
including instrument connections, unless shown otherwise.

B.

When line of lower pressure connects to a line of higher pressure,


requirements of Piping Data Sheet for higher pressure rating prevails up to and
including the first block valve in the line carrying the lower pressure, unless
otherwise shown.

C.

Threaded Pipe Tap Connections:


1.
2.
3.

3.12

VENTS AND DRAINS


A.

3.13

3.16

See Section 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation.

HEAT TRACING
A.

3.15

Vents and drains at high and low points in piping required for completed
system may or may not be shown. Install vents on high points and drains on
low points of pipelines at all low and high point locations.

INSULATION
A.

3.14

Ductile Iron Piping: Connect only with service saddle or at a tapping


boss of a fitting, valve body, or equipment casting.
Welded Steel or Alloy Piping: Connect only with welded threadolet or
half-coupling as specified on Piping Data Sheet.
Limitations: Threaded taps in pipe barrel are unacceptable.

See Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

Notify Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of any surface preparation or


coating application Work.

B.

As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating

PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A.

As specified in Section 31 23 23.15, Trench Backfill and, 09 90 00, Painting


and Coating.

B.

See Piping Schedule for pipe color coding.

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.17

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.18

Pressure Leakage Testing: For potable W1 piping see Specification section as


specified in Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.

CLEANING
A.

Following assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, flush pipelines
(except as stated below) with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until
foreign matter is removed.

B.

Blow instrument air lines clean of loose debris with compressed air
at 4,000 fpm; do not flush with water.

C.

If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps or blow at 4,000 fpm
velocity, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush or
blow line at lower velocity.

D.

Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave


in-place until cleaning is complete.

E.

Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by


removing spools and valves from piping.

F.

Gravity Applications:
1.

2.

3.19

Prior to final acceptance and final manhole-to-manhole inspection of


sewer system by Engineer, flush and clean all parts of the system.
Remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt,
and other foreign material from the sewer system at or near the closest
downstream manhole. If necessary, use mechanical rodding or bucketing
equipment.
Upon Engineers final manhole-to-manhole inspection of the sewer
system. if any foreign matter is still present in the system, reflush and
clean the sections and portions of the lines as required.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification:
1.
2.

Piping Schedule.
Data Sheets.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 23

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Number

Title

40 27 00.01

Cement-Mortar , Glass-Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and


Fittings

40 27 00.02

Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP) and Fittings

40 27 00.03

Carbon Steel Pipe and FittingsGeneral Service

40 27 00.04

Carbon Steel Pipe and FittingsNatural Gas Service

40 27 00.07

Galvanized Steel Pipe and Malleable Iron Fittings

40 27 00.08

Stainless Steel Pipe and FittingsGeneral Service

40 27 00.10

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

40 27 00.13

Copper and Copper Alloy Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

40 27 00.21

Profile Wall Polyethylene (PWPE)


END OF SECTION

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 - 24

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PIPING SCHEDULE LEGEND


EXPOSURE
ALL

All

BUR

Buried

EXP

Exposed (includes piping in the utilidors)

SUB

Submerged

ENC

Concrete Encased

MATERIAL
CLDI

Cement-Lined Ductile Iron

CLWS

Cement-Lined Welded Steel

CISP

Cast Iron Soil Pipe

COP

Copper

DI

Ductile Iron

FRP

Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe

GLDI

Glass-Lined Ductile Iron

GSP

Galvanized Steel Pipe

PVC

Polyvinyl Chloride

PWPE

Profile Wall Polyethylene

SST

Stainless Steel

STL

Steel

WS

Fabricated Welded Steel

JOINT TYPE
FLG

Flanged

GR

Grooved

HS

Hub and Spigot

HU

Hubless

PRJ

Proprietary Restrained Joint

MJ

Restrained Mechanical Joint

Screwed

SL

Soldered

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SW

Socket Welded

Welded (including solvent, wrapped FRP, and fusion)

PRESSURE TEST
G

Gravity Service: Test pressure is not shown on gravity


services. Test in accordance with hydrostatic test
requirements of Section 40 80 01, Process Piping
Leakage Testing.

Hydrostatic

In Service

Pneumatic

PC

Test per Uniform Plumbing Code

NA

Not Applicable

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Piping Schedule

Service
AIR, HIGH PRESS.

Legend
AHP

Size(s)
(In.)1
ALL

Exposure
ALL

Piping
Material6
COP

Specification
Section
40 27 00.13

Joint
Type
SL

Coating2

Test Pressure and


Type
(psig, x),
x = Type indicated
in Legend

Sys. #10

225, P

Pipe Color and


Label13

Remarks

MEDIUM GREEN
COMPRESSED AIR

THICKENED SLUDGE

TS

>=4

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

EXP

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

<4

EXP

SST

402700.08

FLG,S,
W

110, H

LIGHT BROWN

Sys. #5

CONDENSATE DRAIN

CO

ALL

ALL

CISP

40 27 00.02

HU

10 FT WC, H, PC

LIGHT BROWN

8,10

SANITARY DRAIN, SANITARY


VENT

SS,V

ALL

ALL

CISP

40 27 00.02

HU

10 FT WC, H, PC

LIGHT BROWN

8,10

PROCESS DRAIN/Overflow

PD/OF

ALL

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

10 FT WC, H, PC

LIGHT BROWN

60, H

OSHA YELLOW

EXP
Overflow

OF

ALL

SUB

GLDI

40 27 00.01

FERROUS CHLORIDE

FC

<=1

EXP

PVC
TUBING

SEE
REMARKS

BUR

PVC
TUBING

SEE
REMARKS

PVC
CONDUIT
CONTAIN
MENT

26 05 33
(CONDUIT)

STL

40 27 00.03

EXP IN
UTILIDOR

HIGH PRESSURE HOT WATER

HPHW

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

ALL

EXP

FLG,GR

Sys. #5

FLG,GR

Sys. #2
with
Ceramic
epoxy

DANGER FERROUS
CHLORIDE

SW

3000, H

OSHA GREEN

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Piping Schedule

Service
MIXED LIQUOR

Legend
ML

Size(s)
(In.)1
20,16,14
,10

Exposure
BUR

Piping
Material6
CLDI

Specification
Section
40 27 00.01

EXP

MIXED LIQUOR RECYCLE

NATURAL GAS

MLR

NG

Joint
Type
PRJ,MJ

30, H

FLG,GR

Sys. #5
Sys. #5

42, 14

EXP

CLWS

33 05 01.01

W,FLG

ALL

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

ALL

Coating2

FLG,GR

Sys. #5

SUB

FL,GR

Sys. #2

Sys. #5

STL

40 27 00.04

Pipe Color and


Label13

Remarks

LIGHT BROWN
3

I
30, H

EXP

EXP

Test Pressure and


Type
(psig, x),
x = Type indicated
in Legend

12
LIGHT BROWN
3

50, P

OSHA YELLOW

5,10

LABEL WHITE/
GREEN NATURAL
GAS
THICKENED PRIMARY SLUDGE

TPS

>=4

BUR

GLDI

40 27 00.01

EXP

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

Sys. #5
Sys. #2
with
Ceramic
epoxy

THICKENED PRIMARY SLUDGE

TPS

>=4

SUB

GLDI

40 27 00.01

FLG,GR

FERMENTED PRIMARY
SLUDGE

FPS

>=4

BUR

GLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

EXP
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE

PRIMARY SCUM

RAS

PSM

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

FLG,GR

<=36

BUR

CLDI

<30

EXP

>=30

EXP

CLWS

>4

SUB

GLDI

40 27 00.01

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

150, H

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

30, H

LIGHT BROWN

Sys. #5

PRJ,MJ
FLG

Sys. #5

33 05 01.01

W,FLG

Sys, #5

40 27 00.01

FLG

Sys. #2

11

150, H

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Piping Schedule

Service
SECONDARY SCUM

Legend
SSM

Size(s)
(In.)1
ALL

Exposure
BUR

Piping
Material6
CLDI

Specification
Section
40 27 00.01

EXP

Joint
Type

Coating2

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

Test Pressure and


Type
(psig, x),
x = Type indicated
in Legend
150, H

Pipe Color and


Label13
LIGHT BROWN

Sys. #5

STORM DRAIN, PROCESS


DRAIN (OUTSIDE OF
STRUCTURES)

ALL

BUR

PVC

40 27 00.10

HS

PRIMARY EFFLUENT

PE

ALL

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

25, H

LIGHT BROWN

100, H

BLUE

EXP
POTABLE WATER

W1

>=4

BUR

FLG,GR
CLDI

40 27 00.01

EXP

Sys. #5

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

Sys. #5

<4

ALL

COP

40 27 00.13

SL

HW

<4

ALL

COP

40 27 00.13

SL

100, H

FLUSHING HOT WATER

FHW

<4

ALL

COP

40 27 00.13

SL

100, H

POLYMER SOLUTION

PO

ALL

ALL

PVC

40 27 00.10

VFA FILTRATE

VFLT

ALL

BUR

PVC

40 27 00.10

VFA FILTRATE

VFLT

>=4

EXP

CLDI

40 27 00.01

FLG,GR

<4

EXP

PVC

40 27 00.10

<4

ALL

PVC

40 27 00.10

>=4

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

HOT WATER

Remarks

(W1 DOWN STREAM OF WATER


HEATER)

P-RICH FILTRATE

PFLT

EXP

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

FLG,GR

Sys. #25

Sys. #5

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

3,16
3

Sys. #25

150, H

LIGHT BROWN

Sys. #5

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Piping Schedule

Service
NON-POTABLE WATER

Legend
W2

(W1 WATER DOWNSTREAM OF


BACKFLOW PREVENTER)

NON-POTABLE WATER

Size(s)
(In.)1
>=4

Exposure
BUR

Piping
Material6
CLDI

Specification
Section
40 27 00.01

EXP
<4

W3

>=4

NON-POTABLE WATER (WELL


WATER)

W5

BUR / SUB

PVC

40 27 00.10

ALL OTHER

GSP

40 27 00.07

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

BUR / SUB

PVC

40 27 00.10

ALL OTHER

GSP

40 27 00.07

ALL

ALL

SST

40 27 00.08

>=4

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

EXP

FOUL AIR

WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE

FA

WAS

CVS

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4

100, H

PURPLE (INSIDE)

Sys. #5

Sys. #5

LIGHT BROWN
(UTILIDOR)

Sys. #5

Sys. #5
9
100, H

FLG,GR

Sys. #5

40 27 00.07

Sys. #5

ALL

EXP

FRP

23 31 16.16

FLG, W

Sys. #25

EXP

SST

23 31 13

FLG

NA

BUR

PWPE

40 27 00.21

HS,FLG

NA

BUR

CLDI

40 27 00.01

PRJ,MJ

25, H

EXP

See Remarks

11 24 19

FLG,GR

Sys. #5

See
Remarks

Sys. #5

DARK BLUE
(INSIDE)

LIGHT BROWN
(UTILIDOR)

GSP

ALL

Remarks

BLUE

EXP

ALL

Pipe Color and


Label13

100, H

<4

EXP
Central Vacuum System

Coating2

PRJ,MJ
FLG,GR

EXP
<4

Joint
Type

Test Pressure and


Type
(psig, x),
x = Type indicated
in Legend

NA

LIGHT BROWN

14
14

LIGHT BROWN
3

See Remarks

CVS

15

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Piping Schedule

Service

Legend

Size(s)
(In.)1

Exposure

Piping
Material6

Specification
Section

Joint
Type

Coating2

Test Pressure and


Type
(psig, x),
x = Type indicated
in Legend

Pipe Color and


Label13

Remarks

> Greater Than


< Less Than
<= Less Than or Equal To
>= Greater Than or Equal To
All All Sizes
2

Coating system number as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating, and as specified in Article Pipe Corrosion Protection. Buried DI piping shall be polyethylene encased.

All outside piping, valves, and fittings shall be heat traced per Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing, and insulated per 40 42 13, Process Piping Insulation. VFLT piping within the Aeration Basin 1 and 2
Division Structure shall be heat traced and insulated.
4

See Drawing notes for FC tubing specification. Use SCH 40 PVC conduit as containment pipe. Provide clear PVC drop leg as visual leak inspection port at multiple locations. See Civil Drawings for
requirement.
5

All below grade natural gas piping is not in contract and will be provided by local utilities.

Material shall be in accordance with the Piping Schedule except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

Schedule 160 piping, socket-weld joints and fittings. All components to be rated for test pressure. Insulate.

4-inch and smaller drain piping that connects to larger than 4-inch drain piping shall be same pipe material as large drain piping. Exception: where larger drain piping is DI, smaller drain piping shall be GSP.

Piping shall be stainless steel where indicated on the Drawings.

10

See Section 22 10 01, Plumbing Piping and Accessories, for additional requirements.

11

All RAS piping shall be cement mortar lined.

12

Cement-lined welded steel piping shall be used at the 14 inch transitioning from 42 inch inside the pipe gallery. See Drawings for location.

13

Unless otherwise noted in quotations, labels on all piping shall match the designation noted in the Service column.

14

FA piping outdoors shall be FRP. FA piping indoors shall be SST duct. Refer to Division 23 for additional requirements.

15

CVS piping is provided by the equipment vendor. Refer to Section 11 24 19, Central Vacuum System, for CVS piping Specification and additional requirements.

16

For DI piping carrying VFLT, provide ceramic epoxy lining in accordance with System #2 specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Coal tar or high build epoxies are not an acceptable substitute
for ceramic epoxy lining.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPINGGENERAL
40 27 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
General

Description
Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61
acceptance.
Pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that source manufacturing
facility has been producing ductile iron pipe of the specified diameters,
dimensions, and standards for a period of not less than 10 years.
Testing of pipe required by AWWA A21.51 shall be conducted in
testing and laboratory facilities located in the USA and operating under
USA laws and regulations. Pipe shall be handled during manufacture
and shipped without nesting (without insertion of one pipe inside
another).

Pipe

Buried Liquid Service Using Mechanical or Proprietary Restrained


Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, and AWWA C151/A21.51, pressure
class conforming to Table 5 and Table 7 for Type 4 trench, 250 psi
minimum working pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.
Exposed Pipe Using Grooved End and Flange Joints:
AWWA C115/A21.15, thickness Class 53 minimum, 250 psi minimum
working pressure.

Lining

Cement-mortar: AWWA C104/A21.4. Where indicated on the Piping


Schedule, provide ceramic epoxy lining in lieu of cement mortar on
interior of pipe and fittings, in accordance with painting System #2 as
defined in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
Glass: Completely fused above 1,400 degrees F, 6 mils to 10 mils thick,
defects which expose base metal not greater than 0.01 percent of total
lined surface, hardness greater than 5 on the Mohs scale, lining bonded
sufficiently to withstand a metal strain of 0.001 inch/inch without
damage to the glass lining, finished lined pipe not to deviate more than
0.0125 inch per foot of length from a centerline perpendicular to the
flange face or square end of the pipe. Fast Fabricators, Inc., Ferrock
MEH-32; Ceramic Coating Co., SL-31; VITCO Corp., SG-14.

Fittings

Lined and coated same as pipe.


Mechanical: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11, and
AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working
pressure. Follower glands shall be ductile iron.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item

Description
Proprietary Restrained: AWWA C110/A21.10, AWWA C111/A21.11,
and AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working
pressure. Restraint shall be achieved with removable metal elements
fitted between a welded bar on the pipe barrel and the inside of the joint
bell or fitting sizes smaller than 16 inches may be mechanical joint,
restrained by anchor gland followers, ductile iron anchor type, wedge
action, with break-off tightening bolts. Assembled joints shall be rated
for deflection in operation at rated pressure. Rated deflection shall be
not less than 1-1/2 degrees for 36-inch and smaller pipe. Rated
deflection shall be not less than 1/2 degree for 42-inch and larger pipe.
Clow Corp., American Cast Iron Pipe Co., U.S. Pipe. Restrained joints
relying on metal teeth molded into the gasket to prevent joint separation
under pressure will not be accepted.
Grooved End: AWWA C606 and AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile iron,
250 psi minimum working pressure; Victaulic.
Flange: AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, Class 125
flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.

Joints

Mechanical: 250 psi minimum working pressure with restrained gland


follower, mega-lug or equal.
Proprietary Restrained: 150 psi minimum working pressure. Clow
Corp., Super-Lock; American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring or
Lok-Ring; U.S. Pipe, TR Flex.
Grooved End: Rigid type radius cut conforming to AWWA C606,
250 psi minimum working pressure; Victaulic.
Flange: Class 125 flat face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to
AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, except from glass-lined pipe,
shall be made with service saddles as specified in Section 40 27 01,
Process Piping Specialties. Branch connections, 3 inches and smaller
from glass-lined pipe shall be made with glass-lined tee with a flanged
branch for adapting to branch piping.

Couplings

Grooved End: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per
ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536; Victaulic.

CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.01
CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item

Description
Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 250 psi minimum working pressure,
malleable iron per ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron per ASTM A536;
Victaulic.

Bolting

Mechanical, Proprietary Restrained, and Grooved End Joints:


Manufacturers standard.
Class 125 Flat-Faced Flange: ASTM A307, Grade A carbon steel hex
head bolts, ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and Wetted
Installations: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M,
Grade B8M hex head bolts; ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts
and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Gaskets

General: Gaskets in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61


certified.
Mechanical and Proprietary Restrained Joints; Water and Sewage
Service: Rubber conforming to AWWA C111/A21.11.
Grooved End Joints: Halogenated butyl conforming to ASTM D2000
and AWWA C606.
Flanged, Water and Sewage Services: 1/8-inch-thick, homogeneous
black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to 275 degrees F,
conforming to ASME B16.21 and ASTM D2000 4CA 415 A25 B35
C32 EA14 F19.
Full face for Class 125 flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for Class 250
raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering entire
inside face with gasket cemented to blind flange.
Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test
pressure.

Joint Lubricant

Manufacturers standard.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CEMENT-MORTAR, GLASS-LINED
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.01 DATA SHEET - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.02
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) AND FITTINGS
Item

Size

Description

Pipe

6" and smaller

Hubless, CISPI 301, service weight, no-hub


ends.

Joints

6" and smaller

Coupling to conform to ASTM C564,


ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310, Compression:
Neoprene sealing sleeve with 24-gauge
Type 304 stainless steel shield and clamp
assembly.

Fittings

6" and smaller

Conform to ASTM A888 and CISPI 301

Coating

All

Bituminous-coated inside and out; marked


with manufacturers name or trademark and
CISPI symbol.

END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP)


AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.02 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Pipe

Size
All

Description
Black carbon steel, ASTM A106/A106M,
Grade B seamless or ASTM A53/A53M,
Grade B seamless or ERW. Threaded, buttwelded, socket-welded, grooved end, and flanged
joints:

Screwed:
2" & smaller

Schedule 40.

Welded:
2-1/2" thru 10"

Schedule 40.

Grooved:
2-1/2" thru 6"

Schedule 40.

Socket-welded:

Joints

Fittings

Where indicated in
Piping Schedule

Schedule 160.

2" & smaller

Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment or


grooved end meeting the requirements of
AWWA C606.

2-1/2" & larger

Butt-welded or flanged at valves and equipment,


or grooved end meeting the requirements of
AWWA C606.

All

Where indicated in Piping Schedule, joints shall


be socket-welded.

2" & smaller

Threaded: 150- or 300-pound malleable iron,


ASTM A197/A197M or ASTM A47/A47M,
dimensions in accordance with ASME B16.3.
Fire sprinkler fittings to be UL listed.
Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47/A47M
or ductile iron ASTM A536, grooved ends to
accept couplings without field preparation.
Victaulic Co.; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item

Size
2-1/2" & larger

Description
Butt Welded: Wrought carbon steel buttwelding, ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.9;
fitting wall thickness to match adjoining pipe;
long radius elbows unless shown otherwise.
Grooved End: Malleable iron
ASTM A47/A47M, ductile iron ASTM A536,
forged steel ASTM A234/A234M, or factory
fabricated from ASTM A53/A53M pipe.
Grooved ends to accept couplings without field
preparation. Victaulic Co.; Anvil International,
Inc., Gruvlok; Shurjoint Piping Products.

Branch
Connections

All

Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in Piping


Schedule, fittings shall be socket-weld type,
ASTM A105/A105M, 2,000- or 3,000pound
WOG, conforming to ASME B16.11; bore to
match pipe inside diameter.

2" & smaller

For threaded pipe: Threaded, straight, or


reducing tees in conformance with Fittings
specified above.
For welded or grooved pipe, use threadolet.

Flanges

2-1/2" & larger

Butt-welding or grooved end tee in conformance


with Fittings specified above.

All

Where socket-weld pipe is indicated in Piping


Schedule, branch connections shall be made with
socket fittings in accordance with Fittings,
above.

2" & smaller

Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M,


Grade II, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300
socket-weld or threaded, 1/16-inch raised face.
Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in the
Piping Schedule, flanges shall be socket-weld
type.

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item

Size
2-1/2" & larger

Description
Butt-Welded Systems: Forged carbon steel,
ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150
or Class 300 slip-on or welding neck, 1/16-inch
raised face; weld neck bore to match pipe
internal diameter. Use weld neck flanges when
abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slip-on flanges
inside and outside.
Grooved End Adapter Flange: Malleable iron
ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron ASTM A536.
Victaulic Style 741 or 743; Anvil International,
Inc., Gruvlok Figure 7012 or 7013; Shurjoint
Model 7041-A. Include stainless steel washer
plates as required for mating to serrated faces
and lined valves and equipment.
Cast Iron Mating Flange: AWWA C207, Class D
or E, hub or ring type to mate with ASME B16.1,
Class 125 cast-iron flange. AWWA C207
Class F hub type or ASTM A105/A105M,
ASME B16.5 Class 300 to mate with
ASME B16.1 Class 250 cast-iron flange.

Unions

2" & smaller

Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197 or


ASTM A47/A47M, 150- or 300-pound WOG,
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.3.
Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in the
Piping Schedule, unions shall be socket-weld
type.

Couplings

2-1/2" & larger

Grooved End: Rigid joint malleable iron,


ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron, ASTM A536.
Victaulic Co.; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok;
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Screwed End: Malleable iron,
ASTM A197/A197M or ASTM A47/A47M.
Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in the
Piping Schedule, couplings shall not be used.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Bolting

Size
All

Description
Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex
head bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts
and ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers
at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to
60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Where socket-welded pipe is indicated in the Piping
Schedule, bolting shall be carbon steel
ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B7 studs;
ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 2H hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers at nuts
and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of
bolt minimum yield stress.

When mating flange on equipment is cast iron


and gasket is flat ring, provide ASTM A307,
Grade B hex head bolts; ASTM A563, Grade A
heavy hex nuts and ASTM F436/F436M
hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt
minimum yield stress.
Grooved End Couplings: Carbon steel,
ASTM A183 bolts and nuts, 110,000 psi
minimum tensile strength.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and
Submerged and Wetted Installations: Type 316
stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M,
Grade B8M hex head bolts;
ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M Type 3 alloy washers at
nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to
60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.03
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Gaskets

Size
All flanges

Description
Water, Steam, and Air Services: 1/16-inch-thick,
compressed inorganic fiber with nitrile binder,
rated 400 degrees F. continuous.
Fuel Gas Service: See Data Sheet 40 27 00.04
Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings Natural Gas
Service.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the
entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the
blind flange.
Grooved Couplings: EPDM per ASTM D2000
for water and oil-free air to 230 degrees F, nitrile
for oil vapor in air and oil services to
180 degrees F.

Thread
Lubricant

2" & smaller

General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon


tape.
Fuel Gas Service: See Data Sheet 40 27 00.04
Carbon Steel Pipe and Fittings Natural Gas
Service.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.03 DATA SHEET - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.04
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
Item
Pipe

Size
All

Description
Black carbon steel, ASTM A106/A106M, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B seamless or
ERW. Threaded, butt-welded, grooved end, and flanged
joints:

Screwed:
2" & smaller

Schedule 40.

Welded:
2-1/2" thru 10
Joints

Fittings

Branch
Connections

Schedule 40.

2" & smaller

Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment or grooved


end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.

2-1/2" & larger

Butt-welded or flanged at valves and equipment, or


grooved end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.

2" & smaller

Threaded: 150- or 300-pound malleable iron,


ASTM A197/A197M or ASTM A47/A47M, dimensions
in accordance with ASME B16.3. Fire sprinkler fittings to
be UL listed.

2-1/2" & larger

Butt Welded: Wrought carbon steel butt- welding,


ASTM A234/A234M, Grade WPB meeting the
requirements of ASME B16.9; fitting wall thickness to
match adjoining pipe; long radius elbows unless shown
otherwise.

2" & smaller

For threaded pipe: Threaded, straight, or reducing


tees in conformance with Fittings specified above.
For welded pipe, use threadolet.

Flanges

2-1/2" & larger

Butt-welding tee in conformance with Fittings specified


above.

2" & smaller

Forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, Grade II,


ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300 socket-weld or
threaded, 1/16-inch raised face.

2-1/2" & larger

Butt-Welded Systems: Forged carbon steel,


ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150 or
Class 300 slip-on or welding neck, 1/16-inch raised face;

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
40 27 00.04 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.04
CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
Item

Size

Description
weld neck bore to match pipe internal diameter. Use weld
neck flanges when abutting butt-weld fittings. Weld slipon flanges inside and outside.
Cast Iron Mating Flange: AWWA C207, Class D or E,
hub or ring type to mate with ASME B16.1, Class 125
cast-iron flange. AWWA C207 Class F hub type or
ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 300 to mate
with ASME B16.1 Class 250 cast-iron flange.

Unions

2" & smaller

Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197 or


ASTM A47/A47M, 150- or 300-pound WOG, meeting
the requirements of ASME B16.3.

Couplings

2-1/2" & larger

Screwed End: Malleable iron, ASTM A197/A197M or


ASTM A47/A47M.

Bolting

All

Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex head


bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts. Grooved
End Couplings: Carbon steel, ASTM A183 bolts and nuts,
110,000 psi minimum tensile strength.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and Submerged and
Wetted Installations: Type 316 stainless steel,
ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head bolts and
ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M hex nuts.

Gaskets

All flanges

Fuel Gas Service: 1/8-inch-thick, homogeneous black


rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated
250 degrees F. continuous and conforming to
ASME B16.21 and ASTM D1330, Steam Grade.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the entire inside
face with the gasket cemented to the blind flange.

Thread
Lubricant

2" & smaller

General Service: 100 percent virgin PTFE Teflon tape.


Fuel Gas Service: Yellow Teflon tape designed for fuel
gas service, Air Force A-A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape,
Inc.
END OF SECTION

CARBON STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSNATURAL GAS SERVICE
40 27 00.04 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item

Size

Pipe

Joints

Description
Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A106, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53, Grade B seamless or
ERW.

2" & smaller

Schedule 80.

2-1/2" & larger

Schedule 40.

2" & smaller

Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment, or


grooved end meeting requirements of
AWWA C606.

2-1/2" & larger

Flanged at valves and equipment, or grooved end


meeting requirements of AWWA C606.

Fittings

Threaded: 150- or 300-pound malleable iron,


ASTM A197 or ASTM A47, dimensions in
accordance with ASME B16.3.
Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47 or
ductile iron ASTM A536, 250 psi working
pressure, grooved ends to accept couplings
without field preparation. Victaulic; Anvil
International, Inc., Gruvlok.

Branch
Connections

2" & smaller

Tee or reducing tee in conformance with Fittings


above, galvanized 2,000-pound WOG threadolet
or welding boss; galvanize after welding.

2-1/2" & larger

Branch Same Size as Run: Grooved end tee in


accordance with Fittings above.
Branch One or More Sizes Smaller Than Run:
grooved end reducing tee in accordance with
Fittings above.

Flanges

Galvanized forged carbon steel,


ASTM A105/A105M, ASME B16.5 Class 150
or Class 300, threaded, 1/16-inch raised face.
Grooved end adapter flange, malleable iron
ASTM A47 or ductile iron ASTM A536.
Victaulic; Anvil International, Inc., Gruvlok.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE


AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
40 27 00.07 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.07
GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
Item

Size

Description

Unions

Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197 or


ASTM A47, 300-pound WOG, brass to iron seat,
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.3.

Couplings

Grooved End: Rigid joint malleable iron,


ASTM A47 or ductile iron, ASTM A536,
250 psi working pressure. Victaulic; Anvil
International, Inc., Gruvlok.

Plugs

Forged carbon steel, ASTM A181/A181M,


Grade II, round head, threaded, galvanized.

Bolting

Grooved End Couplings: Carbon steel,


ASTM A183 bolts and nuts, 110,000 psi
minimum tensile strength.
Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex
head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head
nuts.

Gaskets

All flanges

Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8 inch


thick, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM),
hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to 250 degrees F.
continuous and conforming to ASME B16.21
and ASTM D1330, Steam Grade.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering entire
inside face with gasket cemented to blind flange.

Thread
Lubricant

Grooved end
couplings

EPDM or chlorinated butyl per ASTM D2000


for water, and air to 230 degrees F, dimensions
conforming to AWWA C606.

2" & smaller

Teflon tape or joint compound that is insoluble


in water.
END OF SECTION

GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE


AND MALLEABLE IRON FITTINGS
40 27 00.07 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Pipe

Joints

Fittings

Branch Connections

Size

Description

2-1/2" & smaller

Schedule 40S: ASTM A312/A312M,


Type 304 seamless, pickled and passivated.

3" thru 6"

Schedule 10S: ASTM A778, as-welded


grade, Type 304L, pickled and passivated.

1-1/2" & smaller

Threaded or flanged at equipment as


required or shown.

2" & larger

Butt-welded or flanged at valves and


equipment.

1-1/2" & smaller

Threaded: Forged 1,000 CWP minimum,


ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F304 or cast
Class 150, ASTM A351/A351M,
Grade CF8/304.

2" & 2-1/2"

Butt Welded: ASTM A403/A403M,


Grade WP304L conforming to ASME B16.9
and MSS SP 43, annealed, pickled and
passivated; fitting wall thickness to match
adjoining pipe; long radius elbows, unless
shown otherwise.

3" & larger

Butt-Welded: ASTM A774/A774M


Grade 304L conforming to MSS SP 43, aswelded grade, pickled and passivated;
fitting wall thickness to match adjoining
pipe; long radius elbows, unless shown
otherwise.

1-1/2" & smaller

Tee or reducing tee in conformance with


fittings above.

2" & larger

Butt-welding tee or reducing tee in


accordance with fittings above.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Flanges

Size
All

Description
Forged Stainless Steel:
ASTM A182/A182M, Grade F304L,
ASME B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300, slipon weld neck or raised face. Weld slip-on
flanges inside and outside.
Cast Carbon Steel: ASTM A216/A216M
Grade WCA, drilled, ASME B16.5
Class 150 or Class 300 Van Stone Type with
stainless steel stub ends, ASTM A240
Type 304L as-welded grade, conforming
to MSS SP 43, wall thickness same as pipe.
Blind Flanges, exposed to the atmosphere
and not buried nor immersed in liquid, may
be either stainless steel or Class 125 ductile
iron or Class 150 carbon steel with gaskets
as specified herein.

Unions

2" & smaller

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 2

Threaded Forged: ASTM A182/A182M,


Grade F304, 2,000-pound or 3,000-pound
WOG, integral ground seats, AAR design
meeting the requirements of ASME B16.11,
bore to match pipe.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Bolting

Size
All

Description
Forged Flanges: Type 304 stainless steel,
ASTM A320/A320M Grade B8M hex head
bolts, ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex
head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3
alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt
minimum yield stress.
Van Stone Flanges and anywhere mating
flange on equipment is cast iron and gasket
is flat ring: Carbon steel ASTM A307
Grade B hex head bolts, ASTM A563
Grade A hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers
at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to
60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.
Flanged Joints in Sumps, Wet Wells, and
Submerged and Wetted Installations:
Type 316 stainless steel,
ASTM A320/A320M, Grade B8M hex head
bolts and ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8M
hex nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 3
alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads.
Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of bolt
minimum yield stress.

Gaskets

All Flanges

Water and Sewage Services:1/8 inch thick,


homogeneous black rubber (EPDM),
hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to
250 degrees F. continuous and conforming to
ASME B16.21 and ASTM D1330, Steam
Grade.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering
entire inside face with gasket cemented to
blind flange.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.08
STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
Item
Thread Lubricant

Size
2" & smaller

Description
General Service: Nickel pigmented PTFE,
designed for stainless steel pipe, Air Force
A-A-58092, AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc.
Fuel Gas Service: Not used.

END OF SECTION

STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND


FITTINGSGENERAL SERVICE
40 27 00.08 DATA SHEET - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.10
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item

Size

Description

General

All

Materials in contact with potable water shall conform


to NSF 61 acceptance.

Pipe

All

Schedule 40 PVC: Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B


conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785.
Pipe shall be manufactured with titanium dioxide for
ultraviolet protection.
Threaded Nipples: Schedule 80 PVC.
Gravity Applications: ASTM D3034, SDR less than
35, except cell classification shall be 12454-B or
12454-C as defined in ASTM D1784.

Fittings

All

Schedule to Match Pipe Above: ASTM D2466 and


ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80
ASTM D2464 for threaded type. Fittings shall be
manufactured with titanium dioxide for ultraviolet
protection.
Gravity Applications: PVC, gasketed. Provide plug
when service piping is not required. Removal of
plugs shall provide a socket suitable for making a
flexible jointed lateral connection or extension.

Joints

All

Solvent socket weld except where connection to


threaded valves and equipment may require future
disassembly.
Gravity Applications: ASTM D3212 rubber gasketed.

Flanges

All

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

One-piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in


accordance with Fittings above, ASME B16.1,
Class 125 drilling

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.10
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
Item
Bolting

Size

Description

All

Flat Face Mating Flange and In Corrosive Areas:


ASTM A193/A193M, Type 316 stainless steel
Grade B8M hex head bolts, ASTM A194/A194M
Grade 8M hex head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M
Type 3 alloy washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve
40 percent to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield
stress.
With Raised Face Mating Flange: Carbon steel
ASTM A307 Grade B square head bolts,
ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex head nuts and
ASTM F436/F436M hardened steel washers at nuts
and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent to 60 percent of
bolt minimum yield stress.

Gaskets

All

Flat Face Mating Flange: Full faced 1/8-inch-thick


ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber.
Raised Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch
ethylene propylene (EPR) rubber, with filler gasket
between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect
the flange from bolting moment.
Gravity Applications: ASTM F477, with lubricants
as approved by manufacturer.

Solvent Cement

All

Socket type joints shall be made employing solvent


cement that meets or exceeds the requirements of
ASTM D2564 and primer that meets or exceeds
requirements of ASTM F656 and as recommended by
pipe and fitting manufacturer.

Thread Lubricant

All

Teflon Tape.
END OF SECTION

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)
PIPE AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.10 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.13
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
Item

Description

General

Materials in contact with potable water shall conform to NSF 61


acceptance.

Pipe

Oxygen Service: Red brass, seamless, standard wall thickness,


conforming to ASTM B43.
Seamless, conforming to ASTM B88 as follows:

Tubing

Water (buried) .......................... Type K, soft or hard temper


Water (exposed) ........................ Type L, hard drawn
Domestic hot water ................... Type L, hard drawn
Compressed air service ............. Type L, hard drawn
Refrigerant service .................... Type L, hard drawn
P-Trap priming service ............. Type L, soft temper
Sample line service ................... Type L, hard drawn
Fittings

Services: ASTM B75 commercially pure wrought copper, socket


joint, dimensions conforming to ASME B16.22.

Flanges

Services: Class 150, ASTM B75 commercially pure wrought


copper, socket joint, ASME B16.24 standard.

Bolting

Services: ASTM A307, carbon steel, Grade A hex head bolts,


ASTM A563 Grade A hex head nuts and ASTM F436/F436M
hardened steel washers at nuts and bolt heads. Achieve 40 percent
to 60 percent of bolt minimum yield stress.

Gaskets

1/16-inch-thick nonasbestos compression type, full face, Cranite,


John Manville.

Solder

Services:
Joints 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Wire solder (95-5 tin/antimony),
conforming to ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn95. Do not use cored
solder.
Joints Larger Than 2-1/2 Inch: Wire solder, melt range
approximately 440 degrees F to 660 degrees F, conforming to
ASTM B32 Alloy Grade HB or HN. Do not use cored solder.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY


PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
40 27 00.13 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.21
PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
Item
Pipe

Description
AASHTO MP6 (1050- to 1200-mm diameter), as manufactured
by ADS, or equal.
ASTM F894, PE3408 profile wall type pipe (Spirolite, or
equal), class 63, unless otherwise specified.
Provide magnetic tracer tape.

Profile

Type S and D.
Extruded ribs for gaining structural rigidity and strength.

Joints

Bell and spigot, gasketed type. Gaskets per ASTM F477.


Flanges: Flange dimensions and bolt pattern as called out on
Drawings. Flanged adapters butt-fused to pipe for dampers or
valves or where called out on Drawings, AWWA C207.
Stainless steel backup ring epoxy coated. Flange gasket to be
1/4-inch compressed Kevlar with neoprene binder flange
gasket. Flanged adapter may be butt-fusion welded to solid wall
pipe for attaching to profile wall pipe. Interior of pipe to remain
smooth (no step down) at any transitions.

Fittings

Manufacturers standard; same stiffness and class as adjacent


pipe.
Where mitered elbows are provided, interior of fitting shall
remain smooth. Trim any residual material as necessary.
Provide double mitered as a minimum, unless otherwise noted.

Source Quality Control

In accordance with specified AASHTO Specification.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROFILE WALL
POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 00.21
PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
Item
Flexible Connections

Description
Neoprene with coated stainless steel clamps, 1/2-inch thick.

Remarks:
1. Connections to stainless steel or FRP ductwork shall be made with flanged connections.
Flange dimensions and bolt pattern shall match.
2. Manufacture from materials that meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM D3350 for a
minimum cell classification of PE 345434C.
3. Place bells facing upstream. Locate bell and spigot joints, pushed home, at each
structural joint indicated on Drawings.
4. Moe miter, minimum, per 45 degrees of deflection.
5. For bell and spigot connections, provide a minimum of two bell and spigot joints pulled
1-5/8 inches out from the home position for each 40 feet of pipe length.
6. Where joining of profile wall pipe by extrusion welding, all joints shall be performed by
factory trained technicians.
END OF SECTION

PROFILE WALL
POLYETHYLENE (PWPE)
40 27 00.21 DATA SHEET - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 01
PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
1.02

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):


a.
B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,
125, and 250).
b.
B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through
NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard.
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a.
C110/A21.10, Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
b.
C153/A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
c.
C210, Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines.
d.
C213, Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior
of Steel Water Pipelines.
e.
C219, Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe.
f.
Manual M11, Steel PipeA Guide for Design and Installation.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)
on Iron and Steel Hardware.
b.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 24, Standard for the
Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
NSF International (NSF): NSF 61, Drinking Water System
ComponentsHealth Effects.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.

Manufacturers data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings,


overall lengths, and live lengths (as applicable).
Metal Bellows Field Finishing:
a.
Manufacturers recommended weld procedures for joining welded
carbon steel piping to stainless steel bellows.
b.
Welder qualifications for joining welded carbon steel piping to
stainless steel bellows.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

3.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.

C.
1.03

Product data for field-applied System No. 4, high temperature,


epoxy lining and coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating.
Chemical Injectors:
a.
Type, size, quantity, materials, and model number of each.
b.
Sketch of each showing major parts, main pipe, and dimensions.
c.
Details and model number of each support system and component.
d.
Details and model of connects (for example, service saddle, weldo-let).

Coupling Harness:
a.
Details, ratings, calculations and test reports for thrust restraints
relying on welded bars or rings.
b.
Weld procedure qualifications.
c.
Load proof-testing report of prototype restraint for any size
coupling.
Basket Strainer:
a.
Manufacturers written/printed installation instructions.
b.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation


and Maintenance Data.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and
special tools for basket strainer:
Item

B.

Quantity

Basket

One for each strainer

Disc seals

One for each strainer

Special tools required to maintain or


dismantle

One complete set

Delivery: In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product


requirements.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Provide required piping specialty items, whether shown or not shown on


Drawings, as required by applicable codes and standard industry practice.

B.

Rubber ring joints, mechanical joints, flexible couplings, and proprietary


restrained ductile iron pipe joints are considered flexible joints; welded,
screwed, flanged, and hub and spigot pipe joints are not considered flexible.

CONNECTORS
A.

Teflon Bellows Connector:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Type: Two convolutions, unless otherwise shown, with metal


reinforcing bands.
Flanges: Ductile iron, drilled 150 psi ASME B16.5 standard.
Working Pressure Rating: 140 psi, minimum, at 120 degrees F.
Thrust Restraint: Limit bolts to restrain force developed by specified test
pressure.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Garlock; Style 214.
b.
Resistoflex; No. R6904.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 112.
d.
Proco Products, Inc.; Series 442.

Elastomer Bellows Connector:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Type: Fabricated spool, with single filled arch.


Materials: Nitrile tube and wrap-applied neoprene cover.
End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,
with full elastomer face and steel retaining rings.
Working Pressure Rating: 140 psig, minimum, at 180 degrees F for sizes
12 inches and smaller.
Thrust Restraint: Control rods to limit travel of elongation and
compression.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Goodall Rubber Co.
b.
Garlock; Style .
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 1501.
d.
Proco Products, Inc.; Series 220.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Metal Bellows Connector:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

D.

Type: Single-ply, annular corrugated metal bellows with limit rods.


Circumferential convolution welds not permitted.
Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
End Connections: ANSI 150-pound carbon steel flanges.
Minimum Design Working Pressure: 50 psig at 300 degrees F.
Length: Minimum of four convolutions and minimum manufacturer
recommendation for vibration isolation.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
U.S. Bellows, Inc.; Universal Tied Expansion Joint.
b.
Metraflex; Model MN.
c.
Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc.; Expansion Joints.

Flexible Metal Hose Connector:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Type: Close pitch, annular corrugated with single braided jacket.


Material: Bronze.
End Connections: Female copper solder joint.
Minimum Burst Pressure: 500 psig at 70 degrees F.
Length: Minimum manufacturer recommendation for vibration isolation.
Manufacturers:
a.
U.S. Hose Corp.; Series 300.
b.
Anamet Industrial, Inc.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.
d.
Proco Products, Inc.

E.

Closure Collar Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place


Concrete.

F.

Quick Connect Couplings for Chemical Services:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Type: Twin cam arm actuated, male and female, locking, for chemical
loading and transfer.
Materials: Glass-filled polypropylene or PVDF with EPDM, Viton-A or
Teflon gaskets as recommended for the service by manufacturer.
End Connections: NPT threaded or flanged to match piping connections.
Hose shank for chemical installations.
Plugs and Caps: Female dust cap for each male end; male dust plug for
each female end.
Pressure Rating: 125 psi, minimum, at 70 degrees F.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
OPW; Kamlock.
b.
Ryan Herco; 1300 Series.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

COUPLINGS
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

B.

Flexible Sleeve Type Coupling:


1.

C.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Steel Pipe:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 38.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 411.
b.
Ductile Iron Pipe:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 253.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 441.

Transition Coupling for Steel Pipe:


1.

D.

Coupling linings for use in potable water systems shall be in


conformance with NSF 61.
Couplings shall be rated for working pressure not less than indicated in
Piping Schedule for the service and not less than 150 psi.
Couplings shall be lined and coated with fusion-bonded epoxy in
accordance with AWWA C213.
Unless thrust restraint is provided by other means, couplings shall be
harnessed in accordance with requirements of AWWA Manual M11 or
as shown on Drawings.
Sleeve type couplings shall conform to AWWA C219 and shall be
hydraulically expanded beyond minimum yield for accurate sizing and
proofing of tensile strength.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 162.
b.
Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 413.

Flanged Coupling Adapter:


1.
2.

Anchor studs where required for thrust restraint.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Steel Pipe:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 913.
b.
Ductile Iron Pipe:
1)
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 128.
2)
Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 912.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Restrained Flange Adapter:


1.

2.

3.
F.

Dismantling Joints:
1.

2.

G.

Pressure Rating:
a.
Minimum working pressure rating shall not be less than rating of
the connecting flange.
b.
Proof testing shall conform to requirements of AWWA C219 for
bolted couplings.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 131.
b.
Smith Blair, Inc.; Model 975.

Exposed Metallic Piping Plain End Couplings:


1.

2.

3.

2.04

Pressure Rating:
a.
Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi.
b.
Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall
be supported by manufacturers proof testing.
Thrust Restraint:
a.
Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer
pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly
while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe
surface.
b.
Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not
be acceptable.
Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Mega-Flange.

Plain end pipe couplings shall be self-restrained against hydrostatic


thrust forces equal to not less than two times the working pressure rating
of the coupling. Couplings shall accommodate 4 degrees angular
deflection at the time of installation and subsequent to pressurization.
Casing, bolts, and nuts shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel.
The sealing sleeve shall be EPDM or NBR elastomer as best suited for
the fluid service.
Couplings manufacturer and products shall be Straub Couplings, Grip-L
or Metal Grip, or equal.

EXPANSION JOINTS
A.

Elastomer Bellows:
1.
2.

Type: Reinforced molded wide arch.


End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125-pound ASME B16.1 standard,
with split galvanized steel retaining rings.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.

B.

Size
(inch)

Deflection
(inch)

Pressure
(psig)

2-1/2 to 12

1.06

150

14

1.65

130

16 to 20
1.65
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
General Rubber Corp.; Style 1015 Maxijoint.
b.
Mercer; Flexmore Style 450.
c.
Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711.
d.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Series 1500.
e.
Proco Products, Inc.; Series 251.

110

Teflon Bellows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Washers: Over retaining rings to help provide leak-proof joint under test
pressure.
Thrust Protection: Control rods to protect the bellows from
overextension.
Bellows Arch Lining: Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl.
Rated Temperature: 250 degrees F.
Rated Deflection and Pressure:
a.
Lateral Deflection: 3/4 inch, minimum.
b.
Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure.
c.
Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as
follows:

Type: Three convolutions, with metal reinforcing bands.


Flanges: Ductile iron, drilled 150 psi ASME B16.5 standard.
Working Pressure Rating: 100 psig, minimum, at 120 degrees F.
Thrust Restraint: Limit bolts to restrain force developed by specified test
pressure.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Garlock; Style 215.
b.
Resistoflex; No. R6905.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style 113.
d.
Proco Products, Inc.; Series 443.

Metal Bellows:
1.
2.
3.

Type: Single-ply, annular corrugated metal bellows with limit rods.


Circumferential convolution welds not permitted.
Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
End Connections: ASME 150-pound carbon steel flanges.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.

D.

Teflon Bellows
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

E.

Material: Stainless steel bellows with female copper solder joint ends.
Working Pressure Rating: 175 psig, minimum.
Accessories: Anti-torque device to protect bellows.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Senior Flexonics; Model HB.
b.
Hyspan; Model 8510.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style EC-FFS.

Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe Expansion Compensator:


1.
2.
3.
4.

G.

Type: Three convolutions, with metal reinforcing bands.


Flanges: Ductile iron, drilled 150 psi ANSI B16.5 standard.
Working Pressure Rating: 100 psig, minimum, at 120 degrees F.
Thrust Restraint: Limit bolts to restrain the force developed by the
specified test pressure.
Manufacturers and Products
a.
Garlock Style 215
b.
Resistoflex; No. R6905

Copper Pipe Expansion Compensator:


1.
2.
3.
4.

F.

Minimum Design Working Pressure: 50 psig at 300 degrees F.


Length: Minimum of eight convolutions and minimum axial
compression of 3/4 inches.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
U.S. Bellows, Inc.; Universal Tied expansion joint.
b.
Metraflex, Model MN.
c.
Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc.; Expansion Joints.

Material: Carbon steel with stainless steel bellows.


Working Pressure Rating: 175 psig, minimum.
Accessories: Anti-torque device to protect bellows.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Senior Flexonics; Model H.
b.
Hyspan; Model 8503.
c.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.; Style EC-MMT.

Flexible Metal Hose:


1.
2.

Type: Close pitch, annular corrugated with single braided jacket.


Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 321.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.
6.

2.05

FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINTS


A.

Design:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

B.
2.06

End Connections:
a.
3 Inches and Larger: Shop fabricated flanged ends to match
mating flanges.
b.
2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Screwed ends with one union end.
Minimum Burst Pressure: 600 psig at 70 degrees F for 12 inches and
smaller.
Length: Provide hose live-length equal to lengths shown on Drawings.
Manufacturer:
a.
U.S. Hose Corp.; Series 401M.
b.
Anamet Industrial, Inc.; BWC21-1.

Ball and socket type for earth settlement compensation.


Joints shall be double ball assemblies rated for 15-degree minimum
deflection and not less than 4 inches offset from centerline of connecting
piping.
Assembly shall accommodate up to 4 inches of expansion in length.
Ductile iron conforming to AWWA C153/A21.53.
Rated for 350 psi.
Components shall be lined and coated by manufacturer with fusionbonded epoxy on all surfaces not bearing gaskets.
End Connections: Flanged or mechanical joint as shown and as required
by connecting pipe and fittings.
Joint connecting to mechanical joint shall be thrust restrained.
Bonding:
a.
Manufacturer shall factory install thermite welded joint bonds for
assembled expansion joint.
b.
Provide 24-inch bond wires for field bonds to adjacent metallic
piping.
c.
Bond wires shall be 2 AWG with two 12-inch-long THHN
insulated 12 AWG wire pigtails.

Manufacturer and Product: EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Flex-Tend.

SEAL WATER HOSE


A.

Product as specified for water hose, except 3/8 inch with male NPT ends, in
2-foot lengths.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

SERVICE SADDLES
A.

Double-Strap Iron:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

B.

Nylon-Coated Iron:
1.
2.
3.

4.
2.08

Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure


without leakage or over stressing.
Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which
saddle is installed.
Materials:
a.
Body: Nylon-coated iron.
b.
Seal: Buna-N.
c.
Clamps and Nuts: Stainless steel.
Manufacturer: Smith-Blair; Style 315 or 317.

PIPE GUIDES
A.

Alignment Guides:
1.
2.

2.09

Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure


without leakage or over stressing.
Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which
saddle is installed.
Taps: Iron pipe threads.
Materials:
a.
Body: Malleable or ductile iron.
b.
Straps: Galvanized steel.
c.
Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel.
d.
Seal: Rubber.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Smith-Blair; Series 313 or 366.
b.
Dresser; Style 91.

Steel Spider Type.


Manufacturers:
a.
Grinnel, Figure 256.
b.
Hyspan, Series 9500.

OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLES
A.

Materials:
1.
2.

Straps: Alloy steel with 3/4-inch threaded ends.


Seal: O-Ring SBR rubber gasket.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

2.10

Compatible with ductile iron pipe.

B.

Connection: AWWA C110/A21.10 flange or mechanical joint outlet, in


accordance with Piping Schedule and as shown.

C.

Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 250 psi internal pressure without


leakage over stressing.

D.

Manufacturer and Product: American Ductile Iron; Outlet/Tapping Saddle.

PIPE SLEEVES
A.

Steel Pipe Sleeve:


1.
2.

3.

B.

Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve:


1.
2.
3.

C.

Minimum Thickness: 3/16 inch.


Seep Ring:
a.
Center steel flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or
water-bearing walls, 3/16-inch minimum thickness.
b.
Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than
pipe sleeve outside diameter.
c.
Continuously fillet weld on each side all around.
Factory Finish:
a.
Galvanizing:
1)
Hot-dip applied, meeting requirements of
ASTM A153/A153M.
2)
Electroplated zinc or cadmium plating is unacceptable.
b.
Shop Lining and Coating: Factory prepare, prime, and finish coat
in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

Molded HDPE with integral water stop ring not less than 3 inches larger
than sleeve.
Provided with end caps for support during concrete placement.
Manufacturer and Product: Century-Line, Model CS sleeves as
manufactured by PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal.

Insulated and Encased Pipe Sleeve:


1.

Manufacturer and Product: Pipe Shields, Inc.; Models WFB, WFB-CS


and -CW Series, as applicable.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Modular Mechanical Seal:


1.
2.

3.

4.
2.11

Type: Interconnected synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to


continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall sleeve opening.
Fabrication:
a.
Assemble interconnected rubber links with ASTM A276,
Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts.
b.
Pressure plates shall be reinforced nylon polymer.
Size: According to manufacturers instructions for size of pipes shown
to provide a watertight seal between pipe and wall sleeve opening, and
to withstand a hydrostatic head of 40 feet of water.
Manufacturer: Thunderline Corp., Link-Seal Division.

SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS


A.

Ductile Iron Wall Pipe:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

B.

Diameter and Ends: Same as connecting ductile iron pipe.


Thickness: Equal to or greater than remainder of pipe in line.
Fittings: In accordance with applicable Pipe Data Sheet.
Thrust Collars:
a.
Rated for thrust load developed at 250 psi.
b.
Safety Factor: 2, minimum.
c.
Material and Construction: Ductile iron or cast iron, cast integral
with wall pipe wherever possible, or thrust rated, welded
attachment to wall pipe.
Manufacturers:
a.
American Cast Iron Pipe Co.
b.
U.S. Pipe and Foundry Co.

Steel or Stainless Steel Wall Pipe:


1.
2.
3.

Same material and thickness as connecting pipe, except 1/4-inch


minimum thickness.
Lining: Same as connecting pipe.
Thrust Collar:
a.
Outside Diameter: Unless otherwise shown, 3 inches greater than
outside diameter of wall pipe.
b.
Continuously fillet welded on each side all around.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.12

CHEMICAL INJECTOR SYSTEM


A.

Chemical Injectors:
1.
2.

B.

Support System:
1.
2.

C.
2.13

Type, size, quantity, and materials as shown on Drawings and Standard


Details.
Manufacturer: SAF-T-FLO.

Stainless steel Unistrut or FRP Aickenstrut.


Materials compatible with chemical service and subject to Engineer
approval.

Connectors: Stainless steel service saddle or weld-o-let, as shown on


Drawings.

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
A.

Spray Nozzles
1.

2.

B.

Type 8:
a.
Spray pattern: Narrow angle, high impact.
b.
Spray Angle: 35 degrees at 40 psi.
c.
Material: 316 stainless steel.
d.
Orifice Diameter: 11/64 inch.
e.
Capacity: 9.5 gpm at 100 psi.
f.
Size: 1/2-inch NPT.
g.
Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co., Model Series FlatJet or
equal.
Type 12:
a.
Spray Pattern: Full cone.
b.
Spray Angle: 60 degrees.
c.
Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
d.
Orifice Diameter: 1/2 inch.
e.
Capacity: 35 gpm at 80 psi.
f.
Size: 1/2-inch NPT.
g.
Manufacturer: Spraying Systems Co., Model Series Full Jet, or
equal.

Strainers, Water Service, 2 Inches and Smaller:


1.
2.

Type: Bronze body, Y-pattern, 200 psi nonshock rated, with screwed
gasketed bronze cap.
Screen: Heavy-gauge Type 304 stainless steel or monel, 20-mesh.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

C.

Strainers, Water Service, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:


1.
2.
3.

D.

2.
3.
4.

Type: Y-pattern PVC body, 150 psi nonshock rated, with screwed PVC
cap and Viton seals.
End Connections: Screwed or solvent weld, 2 inches and smaller.
Class 150 ANSI flanged, 2-1/2 inches and larger.
Screen: Heavy-gauge PVC, 1/32-inch mesh, minimum 2 to 1 screen area
to pipe size ratio.
Manufacturer: Hayward.

Quick Couplings:
1.

F.

Type: Cast iron or ductile iron body, Y-pattern, 175 psi nonshock rated,
with flanged gasketed iron cap.
Screen: Heavy-gauge Type 316 stainless steel, 0.045-inch perforations.
Manufacturer and Product: Armstrong International, Inc.;
Model A7FL 125.

Strainers, Plastic Piping Systems, 4 Inches and Smaller:


1.

E.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Armstrong International; Inc.; Model F.
b.
Mueller Steam Specialty; Model 351M.

Provide female NPT by male quick-connect hose adapters for all -, 1-,
and 1-1/2-inch hose valves and hydrants and provide female NPT by
female quick-connect hose couplers for all flushing connections.
Provide a hose shank quick-connect hose coupler on one end and a hose
shank quick-connect hose adapter on the other end of each water hose
provided for this project. All adapters and couplers shall satisfy
dimensional requirements of MIL-C-27487E and shall be stainless steel
and sized as shown on the Drawings. Adapters and couplers shall be
Dover Corp., OPW Division, Kamlok Series, or Dixon Cam and Groove
Couplings.

Quick Disconnect Cam Operating Coupling:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Material: Polypropylene
Size: 2-inch
Male coupler end with female locking cap.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Harrington Industrial Plastics, Inc. Part FPP with Part DC female
cap.
b.
Ryan Herco Industrial Plastics; Part 1301 or 1302 with 1314
female cap.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Water Hose:
1.

2.
3.

H.

Hose Nozzles:
1.

2.

I.

3.01

Bronze body, 3/8-inch, horizontal, ball action with tempered glass.


Rated 125 psi with NPT screwed ends.
Operate with a minimum flow of 0.25 gpm.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Eugene Ernst Co.; Series E-57-4.
b.
Jacoby Tarbox Co.

EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.

3.02

Furnish cast brass, satin finish nozzles with adjustable fog, straightstream, and shut-off feature and rubber bumper, one nozzle per hose
bibb at each hose rack. Provide nozzles with female NST hose thread,
sized to match hose connections indicated on the Drawings.
Manufacturers:
a.
Croker.
b.
Elkhart.

Pump Seal Water Sight Flow Indicators:


1.
2.
3.
4.

PART 3

Furnish 50-foot lengths of rubber hose, two lengths at each hose rack,
size to match hose connections indicated on the Drawings. EPDM black
cover and EPDM tube, reinforced with two textile braids. Provide each
length with brass male and female NST hose thread couplings to fit hose
nozzle and hose valve.
Rated minimum working pressure of 200 psi.
Manufacturers:
a.
Goodyear.
b.
Boston.

Provide accessibility to piping specialties for control and maintenance.

PIPING FLEXIBILITY PROVISIONS


A.

General:
1.
2.

Thrust restraint shall be provided as specified in Section 40 27 00,


Process PipingGeneral.
Install flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, in accordance
with approved Shop Drawings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Flexible Joints at Concrete Backfill or Encasement: Install within 18 inches or


one-half pipe diameter, whichever is less, from the termination of any concrete
backfill or concrete encasement.

C.

Flexible Joints at Concrete Structures:


1.
2.

D.

3.03

Install 18 inches or less from face of structures; joint may be flush with
face.
Install a second flexible joint, whether or not shown.
a.
Pipe Diameter 18 Inches and Smaller: Within 18 inches of first
joint.
b.
Pipe Diameter Larger than 18 Inches: Within one pipe diameter of
first joint.

Flexible expansion joints shall be provided to compensate for earth settlement


at buried piping connections to structure wall pipes. Wrap complete joint
assembly in a double layer of polyethylene encasement, as specified in
Section 40 27 00, Process PipingGeneral.

PIPING TRANSITION
A.

Applications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
B.

Provide complete closure assembly where pipes meet other pipes or


structures.
Pressure Pipeline Closures: Plain end pieces with double flexible
couplings, unless otherwise shown.
Restrained Joint Pipe Closures: Install with thrust tie-rod assemblies as
shown or in accordance with NFPA 24.
Gravity Pipe Closures: As specified for pressure pipelines, or concrete
closures.
Concrete Closures: Use to make connections between dissimilar pipe
where standard rubber gasketed joints or flexible couplings are
impractical, as approved.
Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable.

Installation:
1.

2.

Flexible Transition Couplings: Install in accordance with coupling


manufacturers instructions to connect dissimilar pipe and pipes with a
small difference in outside diameter.
Concrete Closures:
a.
Locate away from structures so there are at least two flexible
joints between closure and pipe entering structure.
b.
Clean pipe surface before placing closure collars.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.04

Wet nonmetallic pipe thoroughly prior to pouring collars.


Prevent concrete from entering pipe.
Extend collar a minimum of 12 inches on each side of joint with
minimum thickness of 6 inches around outside diameter of pipe.
Make entire collar in one placement.
After concrete has reached initial set, cure by covering with wellmoistened earth.

PIPING EXPANSION
A.

Piping Installation: Allow for thermal expansion due to differences between


installation and operating temperatures.

B.

Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Grooved Joint and Flanged Piping Systems: Elastomer bellows


expansion joint.
Nonmetallic Pipe: Teflon bellows expansion joint.
Screwed and Soldered Piping Systems: Copper or galvanized and black
steel pipe expansion compensator, as applicable.
Air and Water Service above 120 Degrees F: Metal bellows expansion
joint.
Pipe Run Offset: Flexible metal hose.

Weld-End Metal Bellows Installation:


1.
2.

3.

Field Weld: Stainless steel bellows beveled ends joined to ALP carbon
steel piping in accordance with approved welding procedures.
Lining:
a.
System No. 4, high-temperature epoxy, in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Field apply lining to protect bellows and piping from rust at
welded joint.
c.
Line both ends inside bellows, entire length of extension stub end,
and from weld joint to a distance of 1 foot inside length of the
carbon steel pipe.
Coating:
a.
System No. 4, high-temperature epoxy, in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
b.
Field apply coating to protect bellows and piping from weather
and rust at welded joint.
c.
Coat both ends outside bellows, entire length of extension stub
end, and from weld joint to a distance of 1 foot outside length of
the carbon steel pipe.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.
3.05

3.06

SERVICE SADDLES
A.

Ferrous Metal Piping (except stainless steel): Double-strap iron.

B.

Plastic Piping: Nylon-coated iron.

OUTLET/TAPPING SADDLE
A.

3.07

Anchors: Install as shown in the Standard Details, to withstand expansion


joint thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion.

Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

COUPLINGS
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.08

Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.


Before coupling, clean pipe holdback area of oil, scale, rust, and dirt.
Do not remove pipe coating. If damaged, repair before joint is made.
Application:
a.
Metallic Piping Systems: Flexible couplings, transition couplings,
and flanged coupling adapters.
b.
Concrete Encased Couplings: Flexible coupling.

FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT


A.

Install to prevent piping from being supported by equipment, for vibration


isolation, and where shown.

B.

Product Applications Unless Shown Otherwise:


1.
2.
3.
4.

C.

Nonmetallic Piping: Teflon bellows connector.


Copper Piping: Flexible metal hose connector.
Compressor and Blower Discharge: Metal bellows connector.
All Other Piping: Elastomer bellows connector.

Limit Bolts and Control Rods: Tighten snug prior to applying pressure to
system.

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.09

PIPE SLEEVES
A.

Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

Installation:
1.
2.

3.10

Support noninsulating type securely in formwork to prevent contact with


reinforcing steel and tie-wires.
Caulk joint with specified sealant in non-submerged applications and
seal below grade and submerged applications with wall penetration seal.

SLAB, FLOOR, WALL AND ROOF PENETRATIONS


A.

Applications:
1.

2.
3.
4.
B.

Watertight and Below Ground Penetrations:


a.
Wall pipes with thrust collars.
b.
Provide taps for stud bolts in flanges to be set flush with wall face.
Nonwatertight Penetrations: Pipe sleeves with seep ring.
Existing Walls: Rotary drilled holes.
Fire-Rated or Smoke-Rated Walls, Floors or Ceilings: Insulated and
encased pipe sleeves.

Wall Pipe Installation:


1.
2.

3.11

As specified in Section 40 27 00, Process PipingGeneral.


Above Grade in Nonsubmerged Areas: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
Below Grade or in Submerged or Damp Environments: Shop-lined and
coated.
Alternatively, Molded Polyethylene Pipe Sleeve as specified may be
applied.

Isolate embedded metallic piping from concrete reinforcement.


Support wall pipes securely by formwork to prevent contact with
reinforcing steel and tie-wires.

CHEMICAL INJECTOR SYSTEM


A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES


40 27 01 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 27 02
PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

American Gas Association (AGA): 3-88, Orifice Metering of Natural


Gas.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z21.15, Manually
Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and
Hose End Valves.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a.
B16.1, Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (Classes 25,
125, and 250).
b.
B16.44, Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in
Aboveground Piping Systems up to 5 PSI.
American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE): 1011, Performance
Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a.
C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
b.
C500, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
c.
C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
d.
C507, Ball Valves, 6 in. Through 48 in. (150 mm Through
1200 mm).
e.
C508, Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in. through
24-in. (50 mm Through 600 mm) NPS.
f.
C509, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
g.
C510, Double Check Valve, Backflow Prevention Assembly.
h.
C511, Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention
Assembly.
i.
C540, Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates.
j.
C550, Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.
k.
C606, Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
l.
C800, Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
b.
A351/A351M, Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for
Pressure-Containing Parts.
c.
A564/A564M, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and ColdFinished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.
e.

7.

8.
9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.

B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.


B62, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
f.
B98/B98M, Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod,
Bar, and Shapes.
g.
B127, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy
(UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
h.
B139, Standard Specification for Phosphor Bronze Rod, Bar and
Shapes.
i.
B164, Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar,
and Wire.
j.
B194, Standard Specification for Copper-Beryllium Alloy Plate,
Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar.
k.
B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications.
l.
D429, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to
Rigid Substrates.
m. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds.
Canadian Gas Association, Inc. (CGA): 9.1, Manually Operated Gas
Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End
Valves.
FM Global (FM).
Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
(IAPMO).
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS):
a.
SP-80, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
b.
SP-81, Stainless Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves.
c.
SP-85, Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded
Ends.
d.
SP-88, Diaphragm Valves.
e.
SP-110, Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends
NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components
Health Effects.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
USC Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PART 2
2.01

Shop Drawings:
a.
Product data sheets for each make and model. Indicate valve Type
Number, applicable Tag Number, and facility name/number or
service where used.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
d.
For each power actuator provided, Manufacturers standard data
sheet, with application specific features and options clearly
identified.
e.
Sizing calculations for open-close/throttle and modulating valves.
f.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services for:
a.
Electric actuators; full compliance with AWWA C540.
b.
Butterfly valves; full compliance with AWWA C504.
Component and attachment testing seismic certificate of compliance as
required by Section 01 45 33, Special Inspection and Testing.
Certification for compliance to NSF 61 for valves used for drinking
water service.
Actuator performance test certificates for each actuator
Tests and inspection data.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Valves to include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem,


floor stand, operating nut, chain, wrench, and accessories to allow a complete
operation from the intended operating level.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

B.

Valve to be suitable for intended service. Renewable parts not to be of a lower


quality than specified.

C.

Valve same size as adjoining pipe, unless otherwise called out on Drawings or
in Supplements.

D.

Valve ends to suit adjacent piping.

E.

Resilient seated valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight) in either direction at


valve rated design pressure. All other valves shall have no leakage (drip-tight)
in either direction at valve rated design pressure, unless otherwise allowed for
in this section or in stated valve standard.

F.

Size operators and actuators to operate valve for the full range of pressures
and velocities.

G.

Valve to open by turning counterclockwise, unless otherwise specified.

H.

Factory mount operator, actuator, and accessories.

SCHEDULE
A.

2.03

Electric Motor Actuator Schedule, Pneumatic Actuator Schedule and


Self-Regulated Valve Schedule located at the end of this section.

MATERIALS
A.

Bronze and brass valve components and accessories that have surfaces in
contact with water to be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and
2 percent aluminum.
1.

2.
B.

Approved alloys are of the following ASTM designations: B61, B62,


B98/B98M (Alloy UNS No. C65100, C65500, or C66100), B139 (Alloy
UNS No. C51000), B584 (Alloy UNS No. C90300 or C94700), B164,
B194, and B127.
Stainless steel Alloy 18-8 may be substituted for bronze.

Valve materials in contact with or intended for drinking water service to meet
the following requirements:
1.
2.

Comply with requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act and other
applicable federal, state, and local requirements.
Coatings materials to be formulated from materials deemed acceptable
to NSF61.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

2.04

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

Epoxy Lining and Coating:


1.
2.
3.

4.
B.

Use where specified for individual valves described herein.


In accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise specified.
Either two-part liquid material or heat-activated (fusion) material except
only heat-activated material if specified as fusion or fusion bonded
epoxy.
Minimum 7-mil dry film thickness except where limited by valve
operating tolerances.

Exposed Valves:
1.
2.

2.05

Furnish certification that product is certified as suitable for contact with


drinking water by an accredited certification organization in accordance
with NSF 61. Provide certification for each valve type used for drinking
water service.

In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.


Safety isolation valves and lockout valves with handles, handwheels, or
chain wheels safety yellow.

VALVES
A.

Gate Valves:
1.

General:
a.
AWWA gate valves to be in full compliance with stated AWWA
standard and the following requirements:
1)
Provide 2-inch operating nut and handwheel for AWWA
gate valves 12 inches and smaller.
2)
Provide totally enclosed spur or bevel gear operator with
indicator for AWWA gate valves 14 inches and larger.
3)
Provide Affidavit of Compliance per the applicable AWWA
standard for AWWA gate valves.
4)
Mark AWWA gate valves with manufacturers name or
mark, year of valve casting, valve size, and working water
pressure.
5)
Repaired AWWA gate valves shall not be submitted or
supplied.
6)
Supply AWWA gate valves with stainless steel bolting.
7)
AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 valves may be substituted
for each other.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

5.

B.

Type V100 Gate Valve 3 Inches and Smaller:


a.
All-bronze, screwed bonnet, packed gland, single solid wedge
gate, nonrising stem, Class 125 rated 200 psi CWP, complies with
MSS SP-80 Type 1.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Crane; Figure 438, NPT threaded ends.
2)
Stockham; Figure B103, NPT threaded ends.
3)
Crane; Figure 1324, soldered ends.
4)
Stockham; Figure B104, soldered ends.
Type V101 Gate Valve 3 Inches and Smaller:
a.
All-bronze, screwed bonnet, packed gland, single solid wedge
gate, rising stem, Class 125 rated 200 psi CWP, complies with
MSS SP-80 Type 2.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Crane; Figure 428, NPT threaded ends.
2)
Stockham; Figure B-100, NPT threaded ends.
3)
Crane; Figure 1334, soldered ends.
4)
Stockham; Figure B-108, soldered ends.
Type V132 Resilient Seated Gate Valve 3 Inches to 12 Inches, for
Buried Service:
a.
Iron body, resilient seat, bronze stem and stem nut, mechanical
joint ends, nonrising stem, in accordance with AWWA C509,
2-inch operating nut, minimum design working water pressure
200 psig, full port, fusion epoxy coated inside and outside per
AWWA C550.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
M&H Valve; AWWA C509.
2)
U.S. Pipe; A-USPO.
Type V134 Resilient Seated Ductile Iron Gate Valve 3 Inches to
36 Inches:
a.
Ductile iron body, resilient seat, bronze stem and stem nut,
ANSI Class 125 flanged ends, nonrising stem, in accordance with
AWWA C515, minimum design working water pressure 200 psig,
full port, fusion epoxy coated inside and outside per
AWWA C550 .
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
American Flow Control; Series 2500.
2)
M&H; Style 7000 and C515 Large RW Valves.

Globe Valves:
1.

Type V200 Globe Valve 3 Inches and Smaller:


a.
All-bronze, union bonnet, packed gland, inside screw, rising stem,
TFE disc, Class 150 rated 150 psi SWP/300 psi CWP, complies
with MSS SP-80 Type 2.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Stockham; Figure B-22T, NPT threaded end.
2)
Crane Co.; Figure 7TF, NPT threaded end.
3)
Milwaukee; Model 1590T, soldered ends.
4)
NIBCO; Figure S-235-Y, soldered ends.
Type V201 Angle Pattern Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
All-bronze, NPT threaded ends, union bonnet, packed gland,
inside screw, rising stem, TFE disc, Class 150 rated 150 psi
SWP/300 psi CWP, complies with MSS SP-80 Type 2.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Stockham; Figure B-222T.
2)
Crane Co.; Figure 17TF.
Type V208 Needle Disc Type Globe Valve 1/8 Inch to 3/4 Inch:
a.
All-bronze, threaded bonnet, packed gland, rising stem, bronze
body and stem, Class 200 rated 200 psi SWP/400 psi CWP,
complies with MSS SP-80.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Crane Cat.; No. 88.
2)
Stockham; B-64.
Type V234 Angle Type Hose Valve 1/2 Inch to 3/4 Inch:
a.
Bronze, angle sillcock type body, threaded or solder inlet as
applicable, pressure rating 125 psi cold water.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: Nibco; No. 63 or No. 763.
Type V235 Angle Type Hose Valve 3/4 Inch:
a.
3/4-inch NPT female inlet, 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet,
heavy rough brass body rated 125 psi, lockshield bonnet,
removable handle, atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to
ASSE Standard 1011 and IAPMO code.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Acorn; 8126, surface pipe mount valve, bent nose without
flange.
2)
Acorn; 8121, surface mount through wall valve, bent nose
with flange.
3)
Acorn; 8131, pipe and pedestal mounted valve located
above 6 inches, straightnose.
4)
Acorn; 8136, pedestal mounted valve located lower than
6 inches, inverted nose.
Type V237 Angle Pattern Hose Valve 1 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
All-bronze, NPT threaded ends, inside screw-type rising stem,
TFE disc, cast brass male NPT by male NHT adapter with
hexagonal center wrench nut, brass cap with chain, complies with
MSS SP-80, rated 300 WOG.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

C.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Stockham; Figure B-222T.
2)
Crane Co.; Cat. No. 17TF.
3)
Nibco; Figure T-335-Y.

Ball Valves:
1.

2.

3.

Type V300 Ball Valve 3 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air
Service:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and
end piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE
seats and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland,
zinc-coated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated
600-pound WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Threaded:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 70-100.
b)
Nibco; T-580-70.
2)
Soldered:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 70-200.
b)
Nibco; S-580-70.
Type V301 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for General Water and Air
Service:
a.
Two-piece, full port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end
piece, hard chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats
and packing, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, zinccoated steel hand lever operator with vinyl grip, rated 600-pound
WOG, 150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Threaded:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 77-100.
b)
Nibco; T-585-70.
2)
Soldered:
a)
Conbraco Apollo; 77-200.
b)
Nibco; S-585-70.
Type V302 Actuator Ready Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for
General Water and Air Service:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and
end piece, actuator mounting pad, Type 316 stainless steel ball
and stem, vented ball, reinforced PTFE seats and seals, adjustable
packing nut, blowout-proof stem, rated 600-pound WOG,
150-pound SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 71-140.
2)
Milwaukee; 20BSOR-02.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Type V303 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for Equipment Air System
Shutoff:
a.
Two-piece, NPT threaded ends, bronze body and end piece, hard
chrome-plated solid bronze or brass ball, RTFE seats and packing,
blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, 125 psig rated,
safety exhaust port to exhaust downstream side when valve is in
closed position, zinc-coated steel locking handle with vinyl grip.
b.
Meets OSHA Regulation 29 CFR Part 1910.147 requirements.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 75-100-41.
2)
Nibco; T-580-70-SV/T-585-70-SV.
Type V305 Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller for Natural Gas Service:
a.
Two-piece bronze or forged brass body and end piece, NPT
threaded ends, hard chrome plated solid brass ball, RTFE seats
and seal, blowout-proof stem, zinc-plated hand lever operator with
vinyl grip, UL Listed Guide YRPV for natural/manufactured gas,
600 WOG.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 80-100.
2)
Nibco; T-585-70-UL/T-580-70-UL.
Type V306 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Two-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end
piece, NPT threaded ends, ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel
ball, reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing
gland, blowout proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever
operator with vinyl grip, rated 1,000 psig CWP, complies with
MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 76F-100 Series.
2)
Nibco; T-585-S6-R-66-LL.
Type V307 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Three-piece, full port, ASTM A276 GR 316 or
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end
pieces, Type 316 stainless steel ball, NPT threaded ends,
reinforced PTFE seats, seals, and packing, adjustable packing
gland, blowout-proof stainless steel stem, stainless steel lever
operator with vinyl grip, rated 800 psig to 1,000 psig CWP,
complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 86R-100/86-500 Series.
2)
Nibco; T-595-S6-R-66-LL.
Type V308 Stainless Steel Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Two-piece, standard port, NPT threaded ends,
ASTM A351/A351M GR CF8M stainless steel body and end

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.

10.

11.

D.

pieces, actuator mounting pad, Type 316 stainless steel ball and
stem, vented ball, reinforced PTFE seats and seals, adjustable
packing nut, blowout-proof stem, rated 1,500 psig WOG
minimum, 150 psi SWP, complies with MSS SP-110.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Conbraco Apollo; 76-100.
2)
Nibco; T-580-S6-R-66-LL.
3)
Milwaukee; 20SSOR-02.
Type V320 Vee-Ball Valve 1 Inch to 16 Inches:
a.
ANSI Class 150-pound flanged ends, Type 317 stainless steel
body, heat treated nickel- or hard chromium-plated Type 317
stainless steel ball, splined-type 17-4 PH stainless steel shafts,
reinforced PTFE flow-ring seal, reinforced PTFE with stainless
steel or Hastalloy sleeve bearings, and PTFE V-ring packing.
Valve to have 300:1 rangeability and equal percentage
characteristic.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Fisher Controls: Design V150.
2)
DeZurik: VPB V-Port Ball Valve.
Type V330 PVC Ball Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784, Type I,
Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry, double
union design, solvent-weld socket ends, elastomer seat, Viton or
Teflon O-ring stem seals, to block flow in both directions.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
2)
ASAHI/America; Type 21.
3)
Spears; True Union.
Type V331 PVC Ball Valve 3 Inches and 4 Inches:
a.
Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, with ASTM D1784 Type I, Grade 1
PVC full port body, Teflon seat, Viton O-ring stem, face and
carrier seals, end entry design with dual union, solvent-weld
socket ends, or single union ball valve with flanged ends drilled to
ASME B16.1.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
2)
ASAHI/America; Type 21.

Plug Valves:
1.

Type V400 Eccentric Plug Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:


a.
Nonlubricated type rated 175 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with
pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, threaded ends, lever
operator, cast-iron plug with round or rectangular port, plug
coated with Buna-N, stem bearing lubricated stainless steel or

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings, or U-cups with O-rings of


nitrile rubber.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Ballcentric.
2)
DeZurik; Style PEC.
3)
Milliken; Millcentric Series 603.
Type V405 Eccentric Plug Valve 3 Inches to 12 Inches:
a.
Nonlubricated type rated 175 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with
pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service
flanged ends per ASME B16.1 or grooved ends in accordance
with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical
joint ends, unless otherwise shown.
b.
Plug cast iron with round or rectangular port of no less than
80 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with Buna-N, seats
welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless steel or bronze,
stem seal multiple V-rings, or U-cups with O-rings of nitrile
rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings.
c.
For buried service, provide external epoxy coating.
d.
Operators:
1)
3-Inch to 4-Inch Valves: Wrench lever manual.
2)
6-Inch to 12-Inch Valves: Totally enclosed, geared, manual
operator with handwheel, 2-inch nut, or chain wheel. Size
operator for 1.5 times the maximum operating shutoff
pressure differential for direct and reverse pressure,
whichever is higher. For buried service, provide completely
sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2-inch nut.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Ballcentric.
2)
DeZurik; Style PEC.
3)
Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.
Type V406 Eccentric Plug Valve 14 Inches to 20 Inches:
a.
Nonlubricated type rated 150 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with
pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service
flanged ends per ASME B16.1 or grooved ends in accordance
with AWWA C606 for rigid joints, buried service mechanical
joints ends, unless otherwise shown, plug cast iron with round or
rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area
and coated with Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings
lubricated stainless steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings or
U-cups with O-rings of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and
lower bearings.
b.
Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2-inch
nut, or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times maximum
operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse
pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

7.

completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant and 2-inch


nut.
c.
For buried service, provide external epoxy coating.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Ballcentric.
2)
DeZurik; Style PEC.
3)
Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.
Type V407 Eccentric Plug Valve 24 Inches to 48 Inches:
a.
Nonlubricated type rated 150 psig CWP, drip-tight shutoff with
pressure from either direction, cast-iron body, exposed service
flanged ends per ASME B16.1, buried service mechanical joints
ends unless otherwise shown, plug cast iron port opening of no
less than 70 percent of connecting pipe area and coated with
Buna-N, seats welded nickel, stem bearings lubricated stainless
steel or bronze, stem seal multiple V-rings or U-cups with O-rings
of nitrile rubber, grit seals on both upper and lower bearings.
b.
Totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2-inch
nut, or chain wheel. Size operator for 1.5 times the maximum
operating shutoff pressure differential for direct and reverse
pressure, whichever is higher. For buried service, provide
completely sealed operator filled with heavy lubricant.
c.
For buried service, provide external epoxy coating.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Ballcentric.
2)
DeZurik; Style PEC.
3)
Milliken; Millcentric Series 600.
Type V410 Curb Valve Stop and Drain 3/4 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
AWWA C800 type, IPS female threaded inlet and outlet. Port to
drain downstream line when valve is closed.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Mueller Co. H10284.
2)
Ford Meter Box Co.
Type V462 Gauge Cock 1/8 Inch to 1/4 Inch:
a.
1/4-inch bronze body, hexagon end pattern, tee head, male ends,
rated 125-pound SWP.
b.
Manufacturer and Product: United Brass Works; Figure 973.
Type V464 Corporation Stop 1/2 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
AWWA C800 type, tapered threaded inlet, except when
connecting to tapped fittings which require IPS tapered threads,
outlet compression connection or IPS threads to suit connecting
pipe, stops 1 inch and smaller rated 100 psi, larger stops rated
80 psi.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Ford Meter Box Co.
2)
Mueller Co.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Butterfly Valves:
1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
In full compliance with AWWA C504 and following
requirements:
1)
Suitable for throttling operations and infrequent operation
after periods of inactivity.
2)
Elastomer seats which are bonded or vulcanized to the body
shall have adhesive integrity of bond between seat and body
assured by testing, with minimum 75-pound pull in
accordance with ASTM D429, Method B.
3)
Bubble-tight with rated pressure applied from either side.
Test valves with pressure applied in both directions.
4)
No travel stops for disc on interior of body.
5)
Self-adjusting V-type or O-ring shaft seals.
6)
Isolate metal-to-metal thrust bearing surfaces from
flowstream.
7)
Provide traveling nut or worm gear actuator with
handwheel. Valve actuators to meet the requirements of
AWWA C504.
8)
Buried service operators shall withstand 450 foot-pounds of
input torque at fully open and fully closed positions.
9)
Provide linings and coatings per AWWA, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
10) Valves to be in full compliance with NSF 61.
b.
Non-AWWA butterfly valves to meet the following actuator
requirements:
1)
For above ground installations, provide handle and notch
plate for valves 6 inches and smaller and heavy-duty, totally
enclosed gearbox type operators with handwheel, position
indicator and travel stops for valves 8 inches and larger,
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified herein.
Type V500 Butterfly Valve Water Works Service 3 Inches to 72 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Short body type, flanged ends.
c.
Cast-iron body, cast or ductile iron disc, Type 304 stainless steel
shafts, Buna-N rubber seat bonded or molded in body only, and
stainless steel seating surface.
d.
Provide epoxy lining in compliance with AWWA C550.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Model 2FII or Triton XR-70.
2)
DeZurik; AWWA Valve.
Type V502 Butterfly Valve General Service 3 Inches to 20 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Wafer style type.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

F.

c.
Buna-N rubber seat.
Type V504 Butterfly Valve General Service 4 Inches to 48 Inches:
a.
AWWA C504, Class 150B.
b.
Mechanical joint end type.
c.
Cast-iron body, cast or ductile iron disc, Type 304 stainless steel
shafts, Buna-N rubber seat bonded or molded in body only, and
stainless steel seating surface.
d.
Provide epoxy lining in compliance with AWWA C550.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Pratt; Groundhog.
2)
DeZurik; Buried AWWA Valve.
Type V513 Butterfly Valve 2 Inches to 20 Inches:
a.
Wafer Lug style, ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc,
Type 316 or 18-8 stainless steel one-piece stem, Buna-N
replaceable resilient seat, heavy-duty self-lubricating sleeve type
bushings, NBR stem seal, 150 psi working pressure rating, valve
body to fit between ANSI Class 125/150 flanges.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Bray Controls; Series 30/31.
2)
Tyco/Keystone; Model AR1/AR2.
3)
Crane/Centerline; Series 200.

Check and Flap Valves:


1.

2.

3.

Type V600 Check Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:


a.
All bronze, threaded cap, threaded or soldered ends, swing type
replaceable bronze disc, rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Stockham; Figure B-319, threaded ends.
2)
Milwaukee; Figure 509, threaded ends.
3)
Stockham; Figure B-309, soldered ends.
4)
Milwaukee; Figure 1509, soldered ends.
Type V604 Check Valve 2-1/2 Inches to 12 Inches:
a.
Flanged end, cast-iron body, bronze mounted swing type, solid
bronze or cast iron disc, bronze seat ring, rated 125-pound SWG,
200-pound WOG.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Stockham G-931; List 37, Clearway check valve.
2)
Crane Co.; Cat. No. 373.
Type V606 Check Valve 2 Inches to 12 Inches:
a.
Flanged end, cast-iron body, bronze mounted swing type, solid
bronze or cast iron disc, bronze seat ring, outside lever and
weight, rated 125-pound SWP, 200-pound WOG.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

4.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Stockham; G-931.
2)
Crane Co.; Cat. No. 383.
Type V608 Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches:
a.
b.

c.

5.

6.

7.

8.

AWWA C508, 125-pound flanged ends, cast-iron body, bronze body


seat, bronze mounted cast-iron clapper with , stainless steel hinge shaft.
Valves, 2 inches through 12 inches rated 175-pound WWP and
14 inches through 24 inches rated 150-pound WWP. Valves to be fitted
with adjustable outside lever and spring. Increasing-pattern body
valve may be used where increased outlet piping size is shown.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
M&H Valve; Style 59, 159, or 259.
2)
Mueller Co.; No. A-2600 Series.

Type V612 Double Disc Swing Check Valve 2 Inches to 48 Inches:


a.
Wafer style, spring loaded, cast-iron body, aluminum-bronze or
ductile iron discs, Buna-N resilient seats, and Type 316 stainless
steel spring, hinge pin, and stop pin.
b.
Valves 2 inches through 12 inches rated 200 psi nonshock
working pressure and valves 14 inches through 48 inches rated
150 psi nonshock working pressure.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO; Series 9000.
2)
Val-Matic; Dual Disc.
3)
Crane/Stockham; WG-970.
4)
Tyco; Gulf MB Series.
Type V617 Wafer Style Check Valve 2 Inches to 36 Inches:
a.
Wafer style, swing check, one-piece body design, full resilient
seal in machined body groove. Cast-iron body, ANSI Class 125
rating, Type 316 stainless steel disc, Type 316 stainless steel
spring and other internals, Buna-N seal, outside lever and weight
assembly, and internal epoxy coating.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Tyco; Prince Figure 800 Series.
2)
Crane; Uni-Chek II.
Type V630 PVC Ball Check Valve 4 Inches and Smaller:
a.
ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, dual
union socket weld ends, rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F, and Viton
seat and seal.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Nibco; Chemtrol Tru Union.
2)
ASAHI/America.
3)
Spears; True Union.
Type V634 Rubber Flapper Check Valve 2 Inches to 24 Inches:
a.
Iron body, ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges, steel-reinforced
Buna-N flapper raised seating ring, rated 150-pound CWP.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

9.

10.

G.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
APCO; Series 100.
2)
Val-Matic; Swingflex.
Type V640 Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly
3/4 Inch to 10 Inches:
a.
Two resilient seated check valves, two nonrising stem resilientseated isolation valves, test cocks, in accordance with
AWWA C510, rated 175 psi maximum working pressure, meets
requirements of USC Foundation For Cross-Connection Control
and Hydraulic Research.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
FEBCO; Model 850.
2)
Danfoss Flomatic; Model DCVE/DCV.
3)
Watts; Series 007/709.
Type V642 Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly
3/4 Inch to 10 Inches:
a.
Two resilient seated check valves with an independent relief valve
between the valves, two nonrising stem resilient-seated isolation
valves, test cocks, in accordance with AWWA C511, rated 175 psi
maximum working pressure, meets requirements of USC
Foundation For Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic
Research.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
FEBCO; Model 860.
2)
Danfoss Flomatic; Model RPZE/RPZ.
3)
Watts; Series 009/909.

Self-Regulated Automatic Valves:


1.

2.

Type V710 Pressure-Reducing Valve 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller:


a.
Direct diaphragm operated, spring controlled, bronze body, NPT
threaded ends, 200-psig rated minimum.
b.
Size/Rating: As shown in the Valve Schedule.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Fisher; Type 75A.
2)
Watts; Series 223.
Type V714 Pressure-Reducing Valve 3 Inches and Larger:
a.
Hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated, pilot controlled globe
valve, ductile iron body, ANSI Class 150 flanged ends, rated
250 psi, bronze or stainless steel trim, stainless steel stem,
externally mounted strainers with cocks, maintains a constant
downstream pressure regardless of fluctuations in flow or
upstream pressure.
b.
As shown in the Valve Schedule.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Cla-Val; 90-01 Series.
2)
Singer; Model 106PR.
Type V730 Pressure-Relief Valve 2 Inches and Smaller:
a.
Direct diaphragm, spring controlled, cast-iron body, spring case,
nitrile seat neoprene diaphragm, stainless steel valve stem, NPT
threaded ends, 200 psi rated.
b.
Opens when upstream pressure reaches a maximum set point.
c.
Size/Rating: As shown in the Valve Schedule.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Fisher; 98 Series.
Type V740 Air and Vacuum Valve 1/2 Inch to 16 Inches:
a.
1/2-inch through 3-inch NPT inlets and outlets, 4 inches and
larger ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanged inlet with plain outlet and
protective hood.
b.
Rated 150 psi working pressure, cast-iron or ductile iron body and
cover, stainless steel float and trim, built and tested to
AWWA C512.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 140 or 150.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 100.
Type V742 Air and Vacuum Valve 1/2 Inch to 16 Inches For Vertical
Turbine Service:
a.
1/2 inch through 3 inches equipped with stainless steel diffuser
screen to break up solid water column before coming in contact
with float, manufacturers standard double acting throttling device
in outlet for throttling, NPT threaded inlet and outlet.
b.
4 inches and larger equipped with anti-slam device to throttle flow
of water into air valve. Design anti-slam device to permit full,
unrestricted flow of air into and out of air valve, but reduce flow
area for water to approximately 10 percent. ASME B16.1
Class 125 flanged inlet and NPT threaded outlet.
c.
Rated 150 psi working pressure, cast-iron or ductile iron body and
cover, stainless steel float and trim, built and tested to
AWWA C512.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 141DAT to 146DAT
or Series 1904 to 1916.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 100WS to 116WS.
Type V744 Air Release Valve 1/2 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
Suitable for water service, automatically exhaust small amounts of
entrained air that accumulates in a system. In CLOSED position,
seat against resilient seat to prevent water leakage.
b.
Rated 150 psi working pressure, cast-iron or ductile iron body and
cover, stainless steel float and trim, NPT threaded inlet and outlet,
built and tested to AWWA C512.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

7.

8.

9.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 50, 200, and 200A.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 15A to 45.6.
Type V746 Combination Air Release Valve 1 Inch to 16 Inches:
a.
Suitable for water service, combines the operating features of both
an air and vacuum valve and air release valve. Air and vacuum
portion to automatically exhaust air during filling of system and
allow air to re-enter during draining or when vacuum occurs. The
air release portion to automatically exhaust entrained air that
accumulates in system.
b.
Valve single body or dual body, air release valve mounted on air
and vacuum valve, isolation valve mounted between the dual
valves. 1-inch through 3-inch valves with NPT threaded inlet and
outlet, 4-inch and larger valves with ASME B16.1 Class 125
flanged inlet and cover outlet.
c.
Rated 150 psi working pressure, cast-iron or ductile iron body and
cover, stainless steel float and trim, built and tested to
AWWA C512.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 143C to 147C or
1804 to 1816.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 201C to 203C or 104/22 to 116/38.
Type V747 Rolling Seal Combination Air Valve 3/4 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
Designed for water service and uses rolling seal to allow smaller
and larger amounts of air to automatically exhaust under pressure
and air to enter when a vacuum occurs all in a single valve body.
b.
Reinforced nylon body with polypropylene discharge elbow, NPT
inlet, 230 psi working pressure.
c.
Foamed polypropylene float, EPDM rubber rolling seal
mechanism with reinforced nylon plug, plug cover, and clamping
stem, Buna-N O-ring.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: ARI Valves; D-040 or D-040-C.
Type V748 Rolling Seal Combination Air Valve 2 Inches to 8 Inches:
a.
Suitable for water service, combines the operating features of both
an air and vacuum valve and air release valve. Air and vacuum
portion to automatically exhaust air at a high rate during filling of
system and allow air to re-enter during draining or when vacuum
occurs. The air release portion to automatically exhaust entrained
air that accumulates in system. Air release uses rolling seal
mechanism.
b.
High flow air/vacuum valve, cast-iron body with stainless steel
float and seat, EPDM seal, ANSI Class 125 flanged inlet, 230-psi
working pressure nonslam feature.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

10.

11.

12.

Air release valve with foamed polypropylene float, EPDM rubber


rolling seal mechanism with reinforced nylon plug, plug cover,
and clamping stem, Buna-N O-ring.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: ARI Valves; D-060-C HF NS.
Type V750 Sewage Air and Vacuum Valve 2 Inches to 14 Inches:
a.
Suitable for sewage service; automatically exhausts air during
system filling and allows air to re-enter during draining or when
vacuum occurs.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi, 1-inch through 3-inch valves
with NPT threaded inlet and outlet, 4-inch and larger valves with
ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanged inlet and threaded cover outlet,
built and tested to AWWA C512.
c.
Materials: Cast-iron or ductile iron body and cover, concave or
skirted stainless steel float and trim, Buna-N seat.
d.
Sewage air and vacuum valve fitted with blowoff valve, flushing
valve with quick disconnect couplings, and a minimum 5 feet of
hose with quick disconnect couplings to permit backflushing after
installation without dismantling valve.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 401 SAVV to
414 SAVV.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 301 to 306.
Type V752 Sewage Air Release Valve 2 Inches to 4 Inches:
a.
Suitable for sewage service; automatically exhausts entrained air
that accumulates in a system.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi., built and tested to
AWWA C512.
c.
Materials: Cast-iron or ductile iron body and cover with NPT
threaded inlet and 1-inch NPT threaded outlet, concave or skirted
stainless steel float and trim; Buna-N resilient seat.
d.
Sewage air release valve fitted with blowoff valve, flushing valve
with quick disconnect couplings, and a minimum 5 feet of hose
with quick disconnect couplings to permit backflushing after
installation without dismantling valve.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 400 SARV or
450 SARV.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 48 or 49.
Type V754 Sewage Combination Air Valve 2 Inches to 6 Inches:
a.
Suitable for sewage service; combines the operating functions of
both an air and vacuum valve and an air release valve. The air and
vacuum portion shall automatically exhaust air during filling of a
system and allow air to re-enter during draining or when a vacuum
occurs. Air release portion to automatically exhaust entrained air

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

13.

14.

that accumulates in system. Single body unit with air and vacuum
valve and an air release valve in a single housing.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi, built and tested to
AWWA C512.
c.
Materials: Cast-iron or ductile iron body and covers, NTP
threaded inlet and outlet, with concave or skirted stainless steel
float and trim.
d.
Sewage air release valve fitted with blowoff valve, flushing valve
with quick disconnect couplings, and a minimum 5 feet of hose
with quick disconnect couplings to permit backflushing after
installation without dismantling valve.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Series 440 SCAV.
2)
Val-Matic Valve; Series 800.
Type V756 Sewage Combination Air and Vacuum Valve 6 Inches to
14 Inches:
a.
Suitable for sewage service; combines the operating functions of
both an air and vacuum valve and an air release valve using
separate valves connected together. The air and vacuum valve
shall automatically exhaust large quantities of air during system
filling and allow air to re-enter during draining or when a vacuum
occurs. Air release valve to automatically exhaust small quantities
of entrained air that accumulates in system.
b.
Rated working pressure of 150 psi.
c.
Materials: Cast-Iron or Ductile Iron Body:
1)
Air and Vacuum Valve:
a)
Upper and lower concave or skirted stainless steel
float and trim.
b)
Inlet Flanges: ASME B16.1 Class 125 pound.
c)
Outlet: Hooded.
d)
Seat: Buna-N.
2)
Air Release Valve: 2-inch NPT threaded inlet and 1/2-inch
NPT threaded outlet; Buna-N seat.
d.
Provide with all-bronze blow-off and flushing gate valves for each
valve, all-bronze isolation gate valve between the air and vacuum
valve and the air release valve; 5-foot rubber hose with quick
disconnect couplings.
e.
Manufacturer and Product: APCO Valve and Primer Corp.;
Series 400C.
Type V757 Sewage Rolling Seal Combination Air Valve 2 Inches to
8 Inches:
a.
Designed for sewage service, uses rolling seal to allow smaller
and larger amounts of air to automatically exhaust under pressure
and air to enter when a vacuum occurs all in a single valve body.
Body designed to allow sewage solids to flow out of valve.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

c.

d.
H.

Epoxy coated steel funnel shaped body with ANSI Class 150
flanged inlet and access flanges, reinforced nylon combination air
and vacuum valve assembly and polypropylene discharge elbow,
250-psi working pressure, all-bronze drain/flush valve, flushing
connection.
Foamed polypropylene float, EPDM rubber rolling seal
mechanism with reinforced nylon plug, plug cover, and clamping
stem, Buna-N O-ring.
Manufacturer and Product: ARI Valves; D-020.

Miscellaneous Valves:
1.

2.

3.

Type V903 Diaphragm Valve, 1/2 Inch to 4 Inches:


a.
Weir type with PVC Type 1, Grade 1 body, PTFE with EPDM or
Viton backing and with PVDF gas barrier diaphragm, double
union design, solvent weld socket ends, handwheel operator,
position indicator, adjustable travel stop, clear molded acrylic
stem cap.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
ASAHI/AMERICA; Diaphragm Valve Type 14.
2)
ITT Engineered Valves; Dia-Flo.
3)
Saunders Valve; Diaphragm Valve.
Type V940 Solenoid Valve 1/4 Inch to 2 Inches:
a.
Two-way internal pilot operated diaphragm type, brass body,
resilient seat suitable for air or water, solenoid coil molded epoxy,
NEMA insulation Class F, 120 volts ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise
indicated. Solenoid enclosure NEMA 250, Type 4 unless
otherwise indicated. Size and normal position CLOSED when
de-energized as indicated.
b.
Minimum operating pressure differential no greater than 5 psig,
maximum operating pressure differential not less than 125 psig.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
ASCO;
2)
Skinner;
Type V910 Telescoping Scum Collection Valve:
a.
Rack and pinion type with offset floor stand and cast-iron offset
floor stem incorporating rack guides, pinion, and handwheel
supports. Rack and pinion and connecting rods Type 304 stainless
steel, slip pipe stainless steel with flat weir-crest skimming funnel,
cast-iron pipe companion flange, O-ring seal and gasket for
connection to discharge pipe. Skimming funnel minimum top
diameter of 8 inches.
b.
Valve, 4 inches nominal and continuously adjustable from a high
point of 4 feet below bottom of floor stand to a low point 8 feet
below bottom of floor stand.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.
d.

2.06

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.


Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Waterman Industries Inc., Flared Style.
2)
Or equal.

OPERATORS AND ACTUATORS


A.

Manual Operators:
1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
For AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed requirements of
the applicable valve standard. Provide gear reduction operator
when force exceeds requirements.
b.
For non-AWWA valves, operator force not to exceed applicable
industry standard or 80 pounds, whichever is less, under any
operating condition, including initial breakaway. Provide gear
reduction operator when force exceeds requirements.
c.
Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device.
d.
Position indicator on quarter-turn valves.
e.
Worm and gear operators one-piece design, worm-gears of gear
bronze material. Worm of hardened alloy steel with thread ground
and polished. Traveling nut type operators threaded steel reach
rod with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
Exposed Operator:
a.
Galvanized and painted handwheel.
b.
Cranks on gear type operator.
c.
Chain wheel operator with tieback, extension stem, floor stand,
and other accessories to permit operation from normal operation
level.
d.
Valve handles to take a padlock, and wheels a chain and padlock.
Buried Operator:
a.
Buried service operators on valves larger than 2-1/2 inches shall
have a 2-inch AWWA operating nut. Buried operators on valves
2 inches and smaller shall have cross handle for operation by
forked key. Enclose moving parts of valve and operator in housing
to prevent contact with the soil.
b.
Buried service operators to be grease packed and gasketed to
withstand a submersion in water to 20 feet minimum.
c.
Buried valves shall have extension stems, bonnets, and valve
boxes.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Electric Motor Actuators:


1.

Type: Large Open Close (LOC), Large Modulating (LM), Large Quarter
Turn Open Close (LQTOC) and Large Quarter Turn Modulating
(LQTM) Actuators:
a.
Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque
not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
b.
Stem protection for rising stem valves.
c.
Actuator OperationGeneral:
1)
Suitable for full 90-degree rotation of quarter-turn valves or
for use on multiturn valves, as applicable.
2)
Actuator gearing shall be totally enclosed in an oil filled
gearcase suitable for operation at any angle.
3)
The manual override handwheel must be mechanically
independent of the motor drive, and any gearing should be
such as to permit emergency manual operation in a
reasonable time.
4)
Valve position indication.
5)
Comply with latest version of AWWA C542.
6)
Controls intergral with actuator and fully equipped as
specified in AWWA C542.
7)
Operate from FULL CLOSED to FULL OPEN positions or
the reverse in the number of seconds given in the Electric
Motor Actuator Schedule.
8)
Nonintrusive Electronics: Local controls, diagnostics, and
calibration, including limit and torque switch settings, shall
be accomplished nonintrusively. Electronic valve position
display with capability to show continuous torque output.
Provide two hand-held configuration units for every
10 actuators provided, two minimum.
9)
Each actuator must be factory performance tested. See
Information Submittal section above for required
certificates.
10) Fabricated Slide Gates:
a)
Rated running torque equal to 20 percent of the motor
starting torque at a rated running time of 15 minutes,
without exceeding the allowable NEMA temperature
rise for the insulation class used.
b)
Clear UV resistant plastic pipe stem cover with cap
and mylar strip gauge.
d.
Open-Close(OC) /and Throttling Service:
1)
Size motors for one complete OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycle
no less than once every 10 minutes.
2)
Actuator suitable for throttling operation of valve at
intermediate positions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 23

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3)

e.

f.

LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE Selector Switch, padlockable in


each position:
a)
Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary
pushbuttons with seal-in circuits to control valve in
LOCAL position.
b)
Remote OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary control dry
contact inputs in REMOTE position. Integral seal-in
circuits for remote OPEN and CLOSE commands;
valve travel stops when remote STOP contact opens.
c)
Auxiliary contact that closes in REMOTE position.
4)
OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights.
5)
Integral reversing motor starter with built-in overload
protection capable of a minimum of 60 starts per hour.
6)
Valve shall remain in last position on loss of operator
power.
Modulating (M) Service:
1)
Size motors for continuous duty.
2)
Feedback potentiometer, or equivalent, and integral
electronic positioner/comparator circuit to maintain valve
position.
3)
HAND-OFF-AUTO (Local-Off-Remote) Selector Switch,
padlockable in each position:
a)
Integral OPEN-STOP-CLOSE momentary
pushbuttons with seal-in circuits to control valve in
HAND (Local) position.
b)
4 mA to 20 mA dc input signal to control valve in
AUTO (Remote) position.
c)
Auxiliary contact that closes in AUTO (Remote)
position.
4)
Valve shall close upon loss of signal, unless otherwise
indicated.
5)
OPEN and CLOSED indicating lights.
6)
Ac motor with solid state reversing starter or dc motor with
solid state reversing controller, and built-in overload
protection. Controller capable of 1,200 starts per hour.
7)
Duty cycle limit timer and adjustable band width, or
equivalent, to prevent actuator hunting.
8)
Valve position output converter that generates an isolated
4 to 20 mA dc signal in proportion to valve position, and is
capable of driving into loads of up to 500 ohms at 24 volts
dc.
Actuator Power Supply:
1)
480 volts, three-phase, unless otherwise indicated.
2)
Control power transformer, 120-volt or 24-volt DC
secondary.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 24

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3)
4)

2.

Externally operable power disconnect switch.


Electric circuit of the actuator shall not vary with the valve
type, remaining identical regardless of whether the valve is
to open or close on torque or position limit.
g.
Enclosure:
1)
As defined in NEMA 250, Type 4, unless otherwise
indicated.
2)
Allow for temporary site storage without the need for
electrical supply connection, and without voiding the
warranty.
3)
Contain 120-volt space heaters, if required to prevent
condensation.
h.
Limit Switch:
1)
Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) type, field adjustable,
with contacts rated for 5 amps at 120 volts ac.
2)
Each valve actuator to have a minimum of two auxiliary
transfer contacts at end position, one for valve FULL OPEN
and one for valve FULL CLOSED.
3)
Housed in actuator control enclosure.
i.
Control Features: Electric motor actuators with features as noted
above, and as modified/supplemented in the Electric Motor
Actuator Schedule.
j.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Rotork Controls; IQ, IQM, IQT, IQTM.
2)
Flowserve Limitorque; MX.
Type: Small Quarter Turn Open Close (SQTOC) Actuators:
a.
Size to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque
not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
b.
Actuator OperationGeneral:
1)
Designed for 90-degree operation.
2)
Built to withstand line vibration and shock without failure.
3)
Sized to guarantee valve closure at the specified differential
pressure.
4)
Designed to operate in ambient temperature ranges from
minus 20 degrees F (-30 degrees C) to plus 140 degrees F
(+60 degrees C).
5)
A hand wheel shall be provided for emergency operation.
The hand wheel shall not rotate when the motor is operating.
6)
Actuator shall have self-locking gear train system which
will hold the valve in position without the need for electromechanical braking.
7)
Mechanical stainless steel travel stops shall be provided
outside the enclosure for ease of adjusting and shall limit
travel of the actuator in either direction.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 25

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8)

3.

Each actuator must be factory performance tested. See


Information Submittal section above for required
certificates.
c.
Actuator Power Supply:
1)
Motor shall be a permanent split capacitor reversible
induction type with Class F insulation.
2)
Contain a built-in automatic reset thermal overload
protection.
3)
120 volts, single-phase, 60 Hz power supply.
d.
Enclosure:
1)
Shall be die-cast aluminum, powder coated, rated IP68,
NEMA 4X watertight.
2)
Minimum of two conduit entries, one for power and one for
control.
3)
Shall have a visual position indicator.
4)
Shall incorporate an internal anti-condensation heater to
minimize condensation due to temperature and humidity
changes.
e.
Limit Switch:
1)
Travel switches shall be pre-wired to a terminal block for
ease of access and limit actuator travel in both directions.
2)
Cams for the travel switches shall be infinitely adjustable.
f.
Control Features:
1)
The actuator shall incorporate a self-contained control
package with local controls (local/stop/remote, on/off),
status indication relays, isolated control circuits, phase
rotation correction, LED position indication, and support for
common bus communication protocols.
2)
Control power shall be separate from valve actuator power.
3)
Actuators shall have features as noted above, and as
modified/supplemented in the Electric Motor Actuator
Schedule.
g.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Rotork Controls; ROMpac.
2)
Or equal.
Type: Small Modulating (SM) Actuators:
a.
Size to 1-1/4 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque
not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
b.
Actuator OperationGeneral:
1)
Actuator must be capable of continuous modulation.
2)
Body of actuator constructed of cast aluminum.
3)
Yoke assemblies are to be supplied with the actuator and
shall provide rigid static support for the actuator and
preclude any deflection during rapid movement.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 26

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4)

Designed to operate in ambient temperatures of minus


22 degrees F (-30 degrees C) to plus 158 degrees F
(+70 degrees C).

5)

c.

Allow for temporary site storage without the need for


electrical supply connection, and without voiding the
warranty.
6)
All exterior fasteners shall be stainless steel.
7)
Each actuator must be factory performance tested. See
Information Submittal section above for required
certificates.
Enclosure:
1)
Actuators shall be O-ring sealed, watertight to IP68,
NEMA 6, and shall at the same time have an inner
watertight and dustproof O-ring seal between the terminal
compartment and the internal electrical elements of the
actuator fully protecting the motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuator from ingress of moisture
and dust when the terminal cover is removed on site for
cabling.
2)
Actuator Power Supply:
a)
120 volts, single-phase, 60 Hz power supply.
b)
Safety margin of motor power available for seating
and unseating the valve shall be sufficient to ensure
torque/thrust limit trip at maximum valve torque with
the supply voltage 10 percent below normal.
c)
Actuator must have a means of running to a preselected position or remaining at the last position
should the main power be lost.
3)
Control Features:
a)
Maximum inaccuracy of the valve travel position due
to any limitation (repeatability, deadband, resolution,
hysteresis, etc.) shall be less than 0.2 percent.
b)
Performance parameters shall be as follows:
(1) Linearity: +/- 0.50 percent.
(2) Deadband: +/- 0.00 percent to 10.0 percent,
adjustable.
(3) Repeatability: +/- 0.10 percent.
(4) Hysteresis: +/- 0.10 percent.
c)
The speed of the actuator shall be non-intrusively
adjustable up to its maximum speed.
d)
Continuous remote position indication in the form of
4 mA to 20mA output.
e)
The actuator must be capable of positioning using a
4 mA to 20mA control signal either full range or split
range configuration. The response of the actuator must

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 27

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f)

g)
h)

i)
j)
k)

l)

be adjustable to characterize the position of the valve


in response to the signal, default characteristic will be
linear.
Upon loss of control signal the actuator must have a
means of running to a pre-selected position or
remaining in the last position.
A hand wheel or knob shall be provided such that the
maximum rim pull shall not exceed 50 pounds force.
A method for isolating the actuator from the control
signal shall be provided to facilitate manual operation.
The isolation switch shall be pad lockable in the local
manual, off or remote control mode.
Non-intrusive means to modify/change actuator
setting and configuration (HMI).
Ability to allow force or torque seating of the valve to
be selected on the HMI.
Setting such as max torque, deadband, etc. shall be
configured using a PDA. Software shall be provided
by the actuator manufacturer. A PC version of the
software must also be provided.
Internal data logger capable of monitoring the
following:
(1) Net valve torque/thrust demand of the valve
(2)
(3)

d.

throughout the stroke.


Valve position.
Number of movements in any position (cycle
counter).
Input signal and dwell time.
Failsafe energy estimate.
Local commands (via PDA).
Actuator memory, processor, sensors.
System efficiency parameters.

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
m) The following derived diagnostic information shall be
able to be downloadable over a PDA or available twowire communication link:
(1) Valve signature plot.
(2) Dynamic response tests.
(3) Step change response tests.
(4) Internal Integrity Diagnostic.
(5) Dwell time plot.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Rotork Controls; CVA.
2)
Or equal.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 28

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

ACCESSORIES
A.

Tagging: 1-1/2-inch diameter stainless steel tag with No. 16 stainless steel
jack chain for each valve and valve actuator bearing the valve tag number to
be assigned by the Engineer and Owner during construction.

B.

Limit Switch:
1.
2.

C.

T-Handled Operating Wrench:


1.
2.

3.
D.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Pratt.
b.
DeZurik.

Floor Stand:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

F.

Eight each galvanized operating wrenches, 4 feet long.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Mueller; No. A-24610.
b.
Clow No.; F-2520.
Four each galvanized operating keys for cross handled valves.

Extension Bonnet for Valve Operator: Complete with enclosed stem,


extension, support brackets, and accessories for valve and operator.
1.

E.

Factory installed NEMA 4X limit switch by actuator manufacturer.


SPST, rated at 5 amps, 120 volts ac.

Nonrising, heavy pattern, indicating type.


Complete with solid extension stem, coupling, handwheel, stem guide
brackets, and yoke attachment. Stem length as required to connect valve
operating nut and floor stand.
Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200.
Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Clow; Figure F-5515.
b.
Mueller, Figure A-26426.

Floor Box:
1.
2.

3.
4.

Plain type, for support of nonrising type stem.


Complete with solid extension stem, operating nut, and stem guide
brackets. Stem length as required to extend valve operating nut to within
3 inches of finish floor.
Stem Guide: Space such that stem L/R ratio does not exceed 200.
Anchor Bolts: Type 304 stainless steel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 29

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

G.

Chain Wheel and Guide:


1.
2.
3.
4.

H.

3.
4.

5.
6.

3.01

Handwheel direct-mount type.


Complete with chain.
Galvanized or cadmium-plated.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Clow Corp.; Figure F-5680.
b.
Walworth Co.; Figure 804.
c.
DeZurik Corp.; Series W or LWG.

Cast-Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum
of 5-1/4-inch ID shaft.
1.
2.

PART 3

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Neenah Foundry; R 7506.
b.
Clow; No. F5690.

Box: Cast iron with minimum depth of 9 inches.


Lid: Cast iron, minimum depth 3 inches, nonlocking type, marked
SEWER.
Extensions: Cast iron.
Two-piece box and lid for valves 4 inches through 12 inches, threepiece box and lid for valves larger than 12 inches with base sized for
valve.
Valve extension stem for valves with operating nuts 3 feet or greater
below finish grade.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
East Jordan Iron Works; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes.
b.
Bingham & Taylor; Cast-Iron Valve Boxes.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Flange Ends:
1.
2.

B.

Flanged valve bolt holes shall straddle vertical centerline of pipe.


Clean flanged faces, insert gasket and bolts, and tighten nuts
progressively and uniformly.

Screwed Ends:
1.
2.

Clean threads by wire brushing or swabbing.


Apply joint compound.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 30

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

PVC and CPVC Valves: Install using solvents approved for valve service
conditions.

D.

Valve Installation and Orientation:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

General:
a.
Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed
without encountering obstructions.
b.
Install valves in location for easy access for routine operation and
maintenance.
c.
Install valves per manufacturers recommendations.
Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves:
a.
Install operating stem vertical when valve is installed in horizontal
runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less
above finished floor, unless otherwise shown.
b.
Install operating stem horizontal in horizontal runs of pipe having
centerline elevations greater than 4 feet 6 inches above finish
floor, unless otherwise shown.
Eccentric Plug Valves:
a.
Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve as
follows:
1)
Liquids with suspended solids service with horizontal flow:
Install valve with stem in horizontal position with plug up
when valve is open. Install valve with seat end upstream
(flow to produce unseating pressure).
2)
Liquids with suspended solids service with vertical flow:
Install valve with seat in highest portion of valve (seat up).
3)
Clean Liquids and Gas Service: Install valve with seat end
downstream of higher pressure when valve is closed (higher
pressure forces plug into seat).
Butterfly Valves:
a.
Unless otherwise restricted or shown on Drawings, install valve a
minimum of 8 diameters downstream of a horizontal elbow or
branch tee with shaft in horizontal position.
b.
For vertical elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of valve,
install valve with shaft in vertical position.
c.
For horizontal elbow or branch tee immediately upstream of
valve, install valve with shaft in horizontal position.
d.
When installed immediately downstream of a swing check, install
valve with shaft perpendicular to swing check shaft.
e.
For free inlet or discharge into basins and tanks, install valve with
shaft in vertical position.
Check Valves:
a.
Install valve in horizontal or vertical flow (up) flow piping only
for liquid services.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 31

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.

3.02

Install valve in vertical flow (up) piping only for gas services.
Install swing check valve with shaft in horizontal position.

E.

Install a line size ball valve and union upstream of each solenoid valve, in-line
flow switch, or other in-line electrical device, excluding magnetic flowmeters,
for isolation during maintenance.

F.

Locate valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance. Install


access doors in finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access.

G.

Extension Stem for Operator: Where the depth of the valve operating nut is
3 feet or greater below finish grade, furnish an operating extension stem with
2-inch operating nut to bring operating nut to a point within 6 inches of finish
grade.

H.

Torque Tube: Where operator for quarter-turn valve is located on floor stand,
furnish extension stem torque tube of a type properly sized for maximum
torque capacity of valve.

I.

Floor Box and Stem: Steel extension stem length shall locate operating nut in
floor box.

J.

Chain Wheel and Guide: Install chain wheel and guide assemblies or chain
lever assemblies on manually operated valves over 6 feet 9 inches above
finish floor. Install chain to within 3 feet 0 inch of finish floor. Where chains
hang in normally traveled areas, use appropriate L type tie-back anchors.
Install chains to within operator horizontal reach of 2 feet 6 inches maximum,
measured from normal operator standing location or station.

TESTS AND INSPECTION


A.

Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.

B.

Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions.
Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure
conditions from both directions.

C.

Inspect air and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and
seating is fully functional.

D.

Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any
discrepancies with manufacturers data.

E.

Set, verify, and record set pressures for relief and regulating valves.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 32

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

F.

Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set


opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by
Engineer.

G.

Test hydrostatic relief valve seating; record leakage. Adjust and retest to
maximum leakage of 0.1 gpm per foot of seat periphery.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Services and Certificate of Proper Installation: Provide


manufacturers services and Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation
in conformance with the requirements of Section 01 43 33 Manufacturers
Field Services, for the equipment as specified below. Manufacturers
representation shall provide supervision of equipment installations, field
inspection of equipment before startup, and the completion of the Certificate
of Property Installation exclusive of specified services for Instruction of
Owners Personnel.
1.

B.

Provide manufacturers services and Manufacturers Certificate of


Proper Installation for the following equipment:
a.
Valves 24 inches and larger.
b.
Electrical actuated valves.
c.
Reduced pressure backflow preventers.
d.
Self-contained pilot controlled regulating valves.
e.
Air, air and vacuum, and combination air release valves.
2.
Manufacturer supplying multiple valves and/or actuators may
incorporate all supplied valves into one certificate listing the valves
provided.
Manufacturers Services Instruction of Owners Personnel: Provide training,
startup assistance, and post startup operations and maintenance assistance to
the Owner spersonnel, including site trips per the table below. Trips and days
shall be as defined in section 01 43 33 Manufacturers Field Services. Site
visits shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Engineer. Site visits for
other proposed, e.g. to certify installation, will not be counted toward these
minimums.
Valve
Type/Description

No. of
Trips

Valves 24 inches
and larger
Electrical actuated
valves

No. of
Days at
Jobsite
1

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Notes

For each manufacturer of each


applicable type valve
For each actuator type.
Training specific for actuator.
Valve training separate, if 24
inch and larger

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 33

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.
3.04

Valve
Type/Description

No. of
Trips

Reduced-pressure
backflow preventers
Self-contained, pilot
operated valves

No. of
Days at
Jobsite
1

Notes

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.
2.

Electric Motor Actuator Schedule.


Self-Regulated Valve Schedule.
END OF SECTION

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 - 34

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

Tag Number

Valve Type

AER-FCV-30881
AER-FCV-30882
AER-FV-P-30885
AER-FCV-30885
AER-FCV-30886
AER-FV-P-30886

butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
butterfly
existing
butterfly
existing
butterfly
butterfly
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
solenoid
(V-940)
solenoid
(V-940)
solenoid
solenoid

AER-FV-35151
AER-FV-35152
AER-FV-35153
DFT-FV-35421
DFT-FV-35431
DFT-FCV-35441
DFT-FCV-35442
DFT-FV-35451
AER-FCV-39101
THK-FCV-P-63041
THK-FCV-P-63043
THK-FV-P-63051
THK-FV-P-63052
THK-FV-P-63053
THK-FV-P-63054
THK-FCV-63071
THK-FCV-63072

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Valve
Size
(inches)

Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)

Maximum
P
(psi)

PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE

8000
8000
4000
4000
4000
4000

RAS

Process
Fluid

Service

Travel Time
(Seconds)

Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements

10
10
10
10
10
10

M
M
O/C
M
M
O/C

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec

B, E, J
B, E, J
B, J
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, J

LM
LM
LQTOC
LQTM
LQTM
LQTOC

12000

20

O/C

30-60 sec

B, D, J

LM

RAS

12000

20

O/C

30-60 sec

B, D, J

LM

8
8
4
4
8
4
1
1.5

RAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
WAS
SSM
VFLT
VFLT

12000
510
510
510
510
50
24
86

20
25
25
25
25
25
25
40
40

O/C
O/C
O/C
M
M
O/C
M
M
M

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec

B, D, J
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, D, I
B, E, I
B, E, I
B, E, I

LM
SQTOC
SQTOC
SM
SM
SQTOC
SM
SM
SM

W3

48

50

O/C

30-60 sec

B, I

SOLENOID

W3

48

50

O/C

30-60 sec

B, I

SOLENOID

2
1.5

W3
W3
WAS
FPS/WAS

48
22

50
50

O/C
O/C
M
M

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec

B, I
B, I
B, E, I
B, E, I

SOLENOID
SOLENOID
SM
SM

Actuator Type

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

Tag Number

THK-FCV-63073
THK-FCV-63074
THK-FV-63171
THK-FV-63172
THK-FV-63191
THK-FV-63201
THK-FV-63211
THK-FV-63221
THK-FV-63231
THK-FV-63232
THK-FV-63241
THK-FV-63242
THK-FV-63243
THK-FV-63244
THK-FV-P-63271
THK-FV-P-63272
THK-FV-P-63273
THK-FV-P-63274
THK-FV-63281
THK-FV-63282
WSR-GTE-P-64061

WSR-GTE-P-64062

Valve Type

Valve
Size
(inches)

eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug

12
12
10
12

eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug

4
4
4
4

slide gate

See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25

slide gate

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 2

Process
Fluid

FPS/WAS
FPS
FPS
FPS/WAS
PFLT
PFLT
VFLT
VFLT
PO
PO
PO
PO
PO
PO
WAS
WAS
WAS/FPS
FPS
PFLT/VFLT
VFLT
WAS

WAS

Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)

Maximum
P
(psi)

551
551
161
161

40
10
10
10

262
262
262
187

20
20
20
20

510

See
Section 35
20 16.25

510

See
Section 35
20 16.25

Service

Travel Time
(Seconds)

M
M
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
12-inches /
minute

O/C

12-inches /
minute

Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements

B, E, I
B, E, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I

Actuator Type

SM
SM
SQTOC
SQTOC
LOC
LOC
LOC
LQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
LOC

LOC

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

Tag Number

Valve Type

THK-FV-P-71031
THK-FV-P-71032
THK-FV-P-71033
THK-GTE-P-71081

eccentric plug
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
slide gate

THK-GTE-P-71111

slide gate

THK-GTE-P-71112

slide gate

THK-FV-P-71121
THK-FCV-P-71161
THK-FCV-P-71162
THK-FV-P-63011B
THK-FV-P-63012B
THK-FV-P-63013B
THK-FV-P-63014B

solenoid
eccentric plug
eccentric plug
ball
ball
ball
ball

Valve
Size
(inches)

8
8
8
See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25
See
Section
35 20
16.25
2
4
4
3
3
3
3

Process
Fluid

Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)

Maximum
P
(psi)

Service

Travel Time
(Seconds)

Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements

B, D, J
B, D, J
B, D, J

Actuator Type

FPS
FPS
FPS
N/A

850
850
850
N/A

50
50
50
See
Section 35
20 16.25

O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
12-inches /
minute

N/A

N/A

See
Section 35
20 16.25

O/C

12-inches /
minute

LOC

N/A

N/A

See
Section 35
20 16.25

O/C

12-inches /
minute

LOC

W3
TPS
TPS
PWAS
PWAS
FPS/PWAS
FPS

72
57.5
57.5
80
80
80
80

20
10
10
120
120
120
120

O/C
M
M
O/C
O/C
O/C
O/C

30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec
30-60 sec

B, D, I
B, E, J
B, E, J
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I
B, D, I

LQTOC
LQTOC
LQTOC
LOC

SOLENOID
SM
SM
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC
SQTOC

Service: O/C = Open-Close, T = Throttling, M = Modulating


Control Feature Modifications/Supplements:
A = Actuator shall open valve upon loss of signal.
B = Actuator shall remain in last position upon loss of signal.
C = Local OPEN-CLOSE momentary pushbuttons that must be continuously depressed to initiate/maintain valve travel; travel stops when pushbutton is released or when end of
travel limit is reached.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

Tag Number

Valve Type

Valve
Size
(inches)

Process
Fluid

Maximum
Operating
Flow
(gpm)

Maximum
P
(psi)

Service

Travel Time
(Seconds)

Control Feature
Modifications/
Supplements

Actuator Type

D = Remote OPEN-CLOSE maintained dry contacts; travel stops when remote contact opens, or when end of travel limit is reached. 120V dry contacts for open and close position
status.
E = 4-20mA position control and 4-20mA position feedback. 120Vac contact for remote mode status.
F = Motor and control enclosure(s) NEMA 250, Type 6 (IP 68).
G = Motor and control enclosure(s) NEMA 250, Type 7.
H = 120V dry contacts for open and close position status.
I= Operation from 120-volt, single-phase power.
J = Operation from 480V, three-phase power.
K = Formerly HDW-GTE-P-20311. Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with modulating type specified.
L = Existing slide gate, replace existing operator and controls with modulating type specified.

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SELF-REGULATED VALVE SCHEDULE


Tag No.

Valve Type No.

Size
(inches)

Inlet*
Pressure

THK-PCV-P-63051

(pressure control valve)

THK-PCV-P-63052

(pressure control valve)

THK-PCV-P-63053

Outlet*
Pressure

Maximum
psig

Flow
(gpm)

Fluid

40

48

W3

40

48

W3

(pressure control valve)

40

48

W3

THK-PCV-P-63054

(pressure control valve)

1.5

40

22

W3

THK-PCV-P-63011

(pressure control valve)

40

56

W2

THK-PCV-P-63012

(pressure control valve)

40

56

W2

THK-PCV-P-63013

(pressure control valve)

40

79

W2

THK-PCV-P-63014

(pressure control valve)

40

79

W2

THK-PCV-P-63031

(pressure control valve)

1/4

50

0.5-1

W2

THK-PCV-P-63032

(pressure control valve)

1/4

50

0.5-1

W2

THK-PCV-P-71121

(pressure control valve)

100 (is this


W3 pressure
correct)

72

W3

20

*Inlet Pressure = Set pressure for pressure relief valve or downstream set pressure for pressure reducing valve.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS


40 27 02 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 42 13
PROCESS PIPING INSULATION
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning


Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE): 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate.
b.
C165, Standard Test Method for Measuring Compressive
Properties of Thermal Insulations.
c.
C177, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux
Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
d.
C518, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter
Apparatus.
e.
C534/C534M, Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible
Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form.
f.
C547, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
g.
C552, Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal
Insulation.
h.
C585, Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing.
i.
C1136, Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance
Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
j.
E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
k.
E96/E96M, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission
of Materials.
International Code Council (ICC): International Energy Conservation
Code (IECC).
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS): SP 58, Pipe Hangers and
Supports-Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals: Manufacturers descriptive literature.

B.

Informational Submittals: Maintenance information.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
PIPE INSULATION
A.

Type 1Elastomeric:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

B.

Material: Flexible elastomeric pipe insulation, closed-cell structure in


accordance with ASTM C534/C534M.
Temperature Rating: Minus 40 degrees F to 180 degrees F.
Nominal Density: 3 pcf to 6 pcf.
Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum
numerical value of 0.25 Btu-in/hr-square foot degrees F at 75 degrees F
per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
Minimum water vapor transmission of 0.08 perm-inch per
ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A.
Joints: Manufacturers adhesive.
Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed Index: Less than 50 per ASTM E84.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
K-Flex; Insul-Tube 180 or Insul-Sheet 1800.
b.
Armacell; AP Armaflex.

Type 2Fiberglass:
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.

Material: UL rated, preformed, sectional bonded fiberglass per


ASTM C585 with factory applied, Kraft paper with aluminum foil vapor
barrier jacket with pressure-sensitive, self-sealing lap.
Insulation Temperature Rating: Zero to 850 degrees F.
Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum
numerical value of 0.23 Btu-in/hr-square foot degrees F at 75 degrees F.
Jacketing per ASTM C1136 with minimum water vapor transmission
for jacket of 0.02 perm-inch per ASTM E96/E96M. Furnish with no
jacket if field finish system specified.
Joints: Matching pressure-sensitive butt strips for sealing
circumferential joints.
Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed Index: Less than 50 per ASTM E84.

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

C.

Type 3Foamglass:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

2.02

Material: Cellular glass per ASTM C552.


Nominal Density: 7.5 pcf.
Compressive Strength: 90 psi per ASTM C165.
Temperature Rating: Minus 290 to 900 degrees F.
Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and maximum
numerical value of 0.29 Btu-in/hr-square foot degrees F.
Minimum water vapor transmission for insulation of 0.00 perm-inch per
ASTM E96/E96M.
Joints: Matching pressure-sensitive butt strips for sealing
circumferential joints.
Flame Spread Rating: 0 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed Index: 0 per ASTM E84.
Follow manufacturers recommendation, based upon temperature of
piping to be insulated.
Manufacturer and Product: Pittsburgh Corning; Foamglas.

FITTING INSULATION
A.

Type 1: Same as pipe.

B.

Type 2:
1.

2.

C.
2.03

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Owens Corning Fiberglass; ASJ/SSL-11.
b.
John Manville; Micro-Lok with Jacket.

Wired in-place premolded insulation or mitered segments, or soft


fiberglass insulation inserts covered with premolded 20-mil minimum
thickness PVC fitting covers.
Manufacturers:
a.
Manville Zeston.
b.
Speedline.
c.
Proto.
d.
Ceel-Co.

Type 3: Same as pipe.

ROOF DRAIN AND OVERFLOW DRAIN SUMP INSULATION


A.

Type 1: 1 inch thick.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

2.05

INSULATION AT PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


A.

Refer to details on the Drawings.

B.

Copper, Ductile Iron, and Nonmetallic Pipe: High-density inserts, thickness


equal to adjoining insulation of Type 3 or other rigid insulation or
manufactured pre-insulated pipe hangers and insulation shields per MSS
SP 58 Table A3. Extend inserts beyond shields.

C.

Steel Pipe: Insulation saddles or high-density inserts, thickness equal to


adjoining insulation of Type 3 or other rigid insulation or manufactured preinsulated pipe hangers and insulation shields per MSS SP 58 Table A3 at
support locations. Extend inserts beyond shields.

INSULATION FINISH SYSTEMS


A.

Type F1PVC:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

B.

Type F2Paint:
1.

2.
C.

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketing, minimum 20 mils indoors and


30 mils outdoors, for straight run piping and fitting locations,
temperatures to 140 degrees F.
Color: PVC jacketing shall be color coded to match colors listed in pipe
schedule where suitable matching colors are available. If no suitable
colors are available jacketing shall be white.
Flame Spread Rating: 25 per ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed Index: 50 per ASTM E84.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Knauf; Proto 1000.
b.
Johns Manville; Zeston 2000.

Type 1 Insulation: Acrylic latex paint, white, and suitable for outdoor
use.
a.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Armstrong; WB Armaflex finish.
2)
Rubatex; 374, white finish.
Type 2 Insulation: In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating.

Type F3Aluminum:
1.

Aluminum Roll Jacketing: For straight run piping, wrought aluminum


Alloy 3003, 5005, 1100, or 3105 to ASTM B209 with H-14 temper,
minimum 0.016 inch thickness, with smooth mill finish.

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

D.

Type F4Foamglass Jacketing:


1.

2.

PART 3
3.01

Type 3 InsulationBuried and Up to 1 Foot Above Grade: 70-mil


bituminous resin with woven, glass fabric, aluminum foil layer, and
plastic film coating, heat-sealed at overlap; Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap
SS.
Type 3 InsulationGreater that 1 Foot Above Grade: 30-mil modified
bituminous membrane with manual jacket pressure seals; Pittsburgh
Corning Pittwrap CW30.

EXECUTION
APPLICATION
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

3.02

Vapor Barrier: Provide factory applied vapor barrier, consisting of


40-pound kraft paper with 1-mil thick low density polyethylene film,
heat and pressure bonded to inner surface of aluminum jacketing.
Fitting Covers: Material as for aluminum roll jacketing, premolded, one
or two piece covers, which includes elbows, tee/valves, end caps,
mechanical line couplings, and specialty fittings.
Manufacturers:
a.
RPR Products; Insul-Mate.
b.
Childers.
c.
Pabco.

Insulate valve bodies, flanges, and pipe couplings.


Insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, anchors, and other piping
appurtenances that are secured directly to cold surfaces.
Do not insulate flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints.
Service and Insulation Thickness: Refer to Supplement Service and
Insulation Thickness table following End of Section and to Piping
Schedule in Section 40 27 00, Process PipingGeneral.

INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified


herein.
Install after piping system has been pressure tested and leaks corrected.
Install over clean dry surfaces.
Use insulating cements, lagging adhesives, and weatherproof mastics
recommended by insulation manufacturer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.
6.

7.

8.

Do not allow insulation to cover nameplates or code inspection stamps.


Run insulation or insulation inserts continuously through pipe hangers
and supports, wall openings, ceiling openings, and pipe sleeves, unless
otherwise shown.
Install removable insulation sections on devices that require access for
maintenance of equipment or removal, such as unions and strainer end
plates.
Personnel Protection: Install on pipes from floor to 8 feet high. Install on
pipes within 4 feet of platforms and to 8 feet high above platforms.

B.

Connection to Existing Piping: Cut back existing insulation to remove portion


damaged by piping revisions. Install new insulation.

C.

Cold Surfaces: Provide continuous vapor seal on insulation on cold surfaces


where vapor barrier jackets are used.

D.

Placement:
1.
2.

Insulate valves and fittings with sleeved or cut pieces of same material.
Seal and tape joints.

E.

Heat Traced Piping: Apply insulation after heat-tracing work is completed and
inspected.

F.

Roof Drains: Insulate vertical drops from roof drains to horizontal pipe,
exposed and concealed horizontal piping, and 2 feet down on vertical risers
from horizontal pipe.

G.

Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: Insulate entire pipe runs. Where roof and
overflow drains exist through an exterior wall ensure annular space between
pipes and walls are properly sealed prior to insulating.

H.

Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Sumps: Insulate entire sumps.

I.

Vapor Barrier:
1.
2.
3.

Provide continuous vapor barrier at joints between rigid insulation and


pipe insulation.
Install vapor barrier jackets with pipe hangers and supports outside
jacket.
Do not use staples and screws to secure vapor sealed system
components.

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

J.

Aluminum Jacket:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

3.03

FIELD FINISHING
A.

Apply coating of insulating cement where needed to obtain smooth and


continuous appearance.

B.

Where pipe labels or banding are specified, apply to finished insulation, not to
pipe.

C.

Painting Piping Insulation (Exposed to View):


1.
2.

3.04

Use continuous friction type joint to hold jacket in place, providing


positive weatherproof seal over entire length of jacket.
Secure circumferential joints with preformed snap straps containing
weatherproof sealant.
On exterior piping, apply coating over insulation and vapor barrier to
prevent damage when aluminum fitting covers are installed.
Do not use screws or rivets to fasten fitting covers.
Install removable prefabricated aluminum covers on exterior flanges and
unions.
Caulk and seal exterior joints to make watertight.

Aluminum or color coded PVC jacketing does not require painting.


If an insulated piping system is indicated to be painted in
Section 40 27 00, Process PipingGeneral, piping shall receive the
following:
a.
Prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating.
b.
Finished insulation (and not pipe) shall be painted in accordance
with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this


specification:
1.

Service and Insulation Thickness table.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Service and Insulation Thickness

Service Type

Pipe
Legend

DWDomestic and
Service Hot Water
Systems.

HW

FLUSHING HOT
WATER

FHW

HIGH PRESSURE
HOT WATER

HPHW

WaterSystems
W1 W2
W3
W5
HTPiping requiring
heat tracing.

Thickness

Fluid
Temperature
(degrees F)*

ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.

105 to 140

ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.

140 to 180

ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in thickest
insulation.

105 to 140

ASHRAE 90.1 or
IECC whichever
results in the
thickest
insulation.

40 to 60

Pipe Size:
Insulation
Thickness
Inches:a
1/4-3/4: 1/2
1-3: 1
3.5-10: 1.5
12-16: 2
18-24: 2.5

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Finish Systems
Insulation
Type 1

Concealed
from View
None

Indoors
Exposed
F3 below 8'

Outdoors

Buried

F3

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

F3

F4 on
Type 3

F3

F4 on
Type 3

F2 above 8'

Type 2

None

Minimum 1.5" thick

Type 1

F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'

None

F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'

Type 1

None

F3 below 8'
F2 above 8'

Type 2
Insulate and heat
trace outside lines 1'
above grade. Use
Type 3 insulation
from 1 foot above
grade to frost depth.

None

F3 below 8'
F1 above 8'

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Service and Insulation Thickness

Service Type

Pipe
Legend

Thickness

Fluid
Temperature
(degrees F)*

Finish Systems
Insulation

Concealed
from View

Indoors
Exposed

Outdoors

Buried

*Use these fluid temperatures unless otherwise noted in the Piping Schedule.
Inchesa: Based upon insulation with glass fiber per ASTM C547, outdoors with 20 mph wind with 10 percent safety and no value assigned to cladding or air
space at cladding. Matches the watts per foot in Section 40 05 33, Pipe Heat Tracing

PROCESS PIPING INSULATION


40 42 13 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 80 01
PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

1.02

ICBO/IAPMO Uniform Plumbing Code.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.

Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information
that follows.
a.
Testing dates.
b.
Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.
c.
Test type.
d.
Method of isolation.
e.
Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s)
to be tested.
Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment.
Certified Test Report.

PART 2

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

PREPARATION
A.

Notify Engineer in writing 5 business days in advance of testing. Perform


testing in presence of Engineer.

B.

Pressure Piping:
1.

2.
3.

Install temporary thrust blocking or other restraint as necessary to


protect adjacent piping or equipment and make taps in piping prior to
testing.
Prior to test, remove or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or
devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.
New Piping Connected to Existing Piping:
a.
Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds,
blind flanges, or as acceptable to Engineer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

4.

5.
C.

Test section may be filled with water and allowed to stand under low pressure
prior to testing.

D.

Gravity Piping:
1.
2.
3.

3.02

Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods that
do not place entire existing system under test load, as approved by
Engineer.
Items that do not require testing include: Piping between wetwells and
wetwell isolation valves, Equipment seal drains, tank overflows to
atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents.
Test Pressure: As indicated on Piping Schedule, or as specified by
equipment manufacturer.

Perform testing after service connections, manholes, and backfilling


have been completed between stations to be tested.
Determine groundwater level at time of testing by exploratory holes or
other method acceptable to Engineer.
Pipe 42 Inches Diameter and Larger: Joint testing device may be used to
isolate and test individual joints.

HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING


A.

Fluid: Clean water of such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping


system.

B.

Exposed Piping:
1.
2.
3.

4.

5.
6.
7.
C.

Perform testing on installed piping prior to application of insulation.


Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area
of pipe.
Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or
loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge
air pockets.
Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 60 minutes,
minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct
examinations for leakage.
Examine joints and connections for leakage.
Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.
Empty pipe of water prior to final cleaning or disinfection.

Buried Piping:
1.
2.

Test after backfilling has been completed.


Expel air from piping system during filling.

PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
5.
6.

Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump.
Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached.
Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum,
reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure.
Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to
maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.
Maximum Allowable Leakage:

L=

SD(P )1 / 2
133,200

where:
L
S
D
P
7.
3.03

=
=
=
=

Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour.


Length of pipe tested, in feet.
Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches.
Test pressure during leakage test, in pounds per square inch.

Correct leakage greater than allowable, and retest as specified.

PNEUMATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING


A.

Do not perform on:


1.
2.
3.

PVC or CPVC pipe.


Piping larger than 18 inches.
Buried and other non-exposed piping.

B.

Fluid: Oil-free, dry air.

C.

Procedure:
1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to


piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply
soap bubble mixture to joints and connections; examine for leakage.
Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks are
corrected.
Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test pressure.
Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately one-tenth of
specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.
Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of
10 minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap
bubble examination for leakage.
Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

D.

Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances


at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage.

E.

After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will carry
flammable or combustible gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be
present in system during filling process.

HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING


A.

Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2-gallon water leakage under


specified conditions.

B.

Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallons per hour per inch diameter per
100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to
minimum head specified.

C.

Gravity Sanitary and Roof Drain Piping: Test in accordance with the Uniform
Plumbing Code, 2009. Test with 10 feet of water to include highest horizontal
vent in filled piping. Where vertical drain and vent systems exceed 10 feet in
height, test systems in 10-foot vertical sections as piping is installed.

D.

Exfiltration Test:
1.

2.
E.

Hydrostatic Head:
a.
At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater level in
section being tested.
No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of pipe in
b.
test section, including service connections.
Length of Pipe Tested: Limit length such that pressure on invert of
lower end of section does not exceed 30 feet of water column.

Infiltration Test:
1.

Groundwater Level: At least 6 feet above inside top of highest section


of pipe in test section, including service connections.

F.

Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage rate
for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a
pressure test.

G.

Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and retest
as specified.

PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Test Report Documentation:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Test date.
Description and identification of piping tested.
Test fluid.
Test pressure.
Remarks, including:
a.
Leaks (type, location).
b.
Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.
Signed by Contractor and Engineer to represent that test has been
satisfactorily completed.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PROCESS PIPING
LEAKAGE TESTING
40 80 01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 90 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.

This section gives general requirements for Process Instrumentation and


Control (PIC). The following PIC subsections expand on requirements of this
section: Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components.

B.

Major Work Items: Includes but is not limited to engineering, furnishing,


installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and
training for complete PIC.
1.
2.
3.
4.

1.02

Process instrumentation including primary elements, transmitters,


control devices, and control panels.
Programmable controllers.
Local Control Panels
Applications Software: Provided by Engineer for PLCs, and OWS.
Work related to supporting this activity includes:
a.
Early delivery of PLC equipment to Engineers office.
b.
Setup and demonstration testing of programming equipment at
Engineers office.
c.
Assistance with onsite checkout of applications software during
applications software functional testing.
d.
For additional related requirements refer to:
1)
Article Sequencing and Scheduling in this section.
2)
Process Control Narrative Supplement.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section


and other PIC subsections:
1.
2.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI).


ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A182/A182M, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy
and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and
Parts for High-Temperature Service.
b.
A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
c.
A312/A312M, Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and
Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

5.

6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
1.03

d.
B32, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
e.
B88, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
Deutsche Industrie-Norm (DIN): VDE 0611, Specification for modular
terminal blocks for connection of copper conductors up to 1,000V ac
and up to 1,200V dc.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): C62.41,
Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
International Society of Automation (ISA):
a.
RP12.06.01, Recommended Practice for Wiring Methods for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation Part 1:
Instrinsic Safety.
b.
S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
c.
S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams.
d.
S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial
Process Instruments.
e.
TR20.00.01, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments, Part 1: General.
International Conference on Energy Conversion and Application
(ICECA).
National Electrical Code (NEC).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts
Maximum).
b.
ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820, Standard for Fire
Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): 508A, Standard for Safety,
Industrial Control Panels.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Abbreviations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

DCU: Distributed Control Unit.


FDT: Factory Demonstration Test.
HMI: Human-Machine Interface.
HVAC: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.
I&C: Instrumentation and Control.
I/O: Input and Output.
O&M: Operation and Maintenance.
OWS: Operator Work Station
P&ID: Process and Instrument Diagram.
PC: Personal Computer.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

PCS: Plant Control System


PIC: Process Instrumentation and Control.
PICS: Process Instrumentation and Control System.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
RIO: Remote I/O.
SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.

B.

Enclosure: Control panel, console, cabinet, or instrument housing.

C.

Instructor Day: Eight hours of actual instruction time.

D.

Standard Software: Software packages that are independent of Project on


which they are used. Standard software includes system software, supervisory
control, and data acquisition (SCADA) software.
1.

2.

3.
E.

Application Software: Software to provide functions unique to this Project and


that are not provided by standard software alone, including but not limited to:
1.

2.
F.

System Software: Application independent (non-project specific)


software developed by digital equipment manufacturers and software
companies. Includes, but is not limited to, operating systems; network
support, programming languages (C, C++, Visual C++, BASIC, Visual
Basic, etc); Office Suites (word processor, spreadsheet, database, etc.);
e-mail; security (firewall, antivirus; spam, spyware, etc.) debugging
aids; and diagnostics.
SCADA Software: Software packages independent of specific process
control project on which they are used. Includes, but is not limited to,
providing configuring and run-time capability for, data acquisition (I/O
driver, OPC servers, etc.), monitoring, alarming, human-machine
interface, supervisory control, data collection, data retrieval, trending,
report generation, control, and diagnostics.
Controller Programming Software: Software packages for the
configuring of PLCs, RTUs, DCUs, SLDC, and fieldbus devices.

Configuring databases, tables, displays, historians, reports, parameter


lists, ladder logic, function block, and control strategies required to
implement functions unique to this Project.
Programming in any programming or scripting language.

Rising/Falling: Define action of discrete devices about their setpoint.


1.
2.

Rising: Contacts close when an increasing process variable rises through


setpoint.
Falling: Contacts close when a decreasing process variable falls through
setpoint.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

Signal Types:
1.

2.
3.

1.04

Analog Signal, Current Type:


a.
4 to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1.
b.
Unless otherwise indicated for specific PIC subsection
components, use the following ISA S50.1 options.
1)
Transmitter Type: Number 2, two-wire.
2)
Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L.
3)
Fully isolated transmitters and receivers.
Discrete signals, two-state logic signals using dc or 120V ac sources as
indicated.
Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and
digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers,
controllers, and digital devices.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

Design Requirements:
1.

2.

B.

Complete detailed design of PIC components and PIC Drawings Provide


consistent hardware and software functions for PIC. For example,
provide functions in control logic, sequence controls, and display
layouts in same or similar manner.
PIC design as shown and specified includes:
a.
Functional requirements, performance requirements, and
component Specifications.
b.
P&IDs, block diagrams, and network diagrams.
c.
Typical Drawings for installation details, control panel schedules,
PLC I/O module wiring, panel power, and control diagrams.

Use a qualified PIC System Integrator for at least the following Work:
1.

For PIC Equipment and Ancillaries:


a.
Completing detail design.
b.
Submittals.
c.
Equipment, enclosures, and ancillaries.
d.
Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination
with Contractor for Certificate of Proper Installation.
e.
Verify readiness for operation.
f.
Verify correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging
and connecting).
g.
Adjusting and calibrating.
h.
Starting up.
i.
Testing and coordination of testing.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

j.
k.
2.

3.

1.05

Training.
Assist Engineer with Operational Readiness Test 2 as defined in
Article Field Quality Control.
Verify following Work not by PIC System Integrator is provided:
a.
Correct type, size, and number of signal wires with their raceways.
b.
Correct electrical power circuits and raceways.
c.
Correct size, type, and number of PIC-related pipes, valves,
fittings, and tubes.
d.
Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process
mechanical piping for in-line primary elements.
NonPIC Equipment Directly Connected to PIC Equipment:
a.
Obtain from Contractor, manufacturers information on
installation, interface, function, and adjustment.
b.
Coordinate with Contractor to allow required interface and
operation with PIC.
c.
For operation and control, verify installations, interfacing signal
terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
d.
Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PIC.
e.
Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the
following:
1)
Valve operators, position switches, and controls.
2)
Chemical feed pump and feeder speed/stroke controls.
3)
Engine generator
4)
Automatic transfer switch
5)
Fire alarm control panel
6)
Motor control centers.
7)
Variable frequency drive systems.
8)
Packaged control systems.
f.
Examples of items not in this category:
1)
Internal portions of equipment provided under Division 26,
Electrical, that are not directly connected to PIC equipment.
2)
Internal portions of package system instrumentation and
controls that are not directly connected to PIC equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

Submit proposed Submittal breakdown consisting of sequencing and


packaging of information in accordance with Project Schedule.
Partial Submittals not in accordance with Project Schedule will not be
accepted.
Submittal Format: See Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

B.

Identify proposed items, options, installed spares, and other provisions


for future Work (for example, reserved panel space; unused
components, wiring, and terminals).
Legends and Abbreviation Lists:
a.
Definition of symbols and abbreviations used; for example,
engineering units, flowstreams, instruments, structures, and other
process items used in nameplates, legends, data sheets, point
descriptions, HMI displays, alarm/status logs, and reports.
b.
Use identical abbreviations in PIC subsections.
c.
Submit updated versions as they occur.
Activity Completion:
a.
Action Submittals: Completed when reviewed and approved.
b.
Informational Submittals: Completed when reviewed and found to
meet conditions of the Contract.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

3.

Bill of Materials: List of required equipment.


a.
Group equipment items by enclosure and field, and within an
enclosure, as follows:
1)
PIC Components: By component identification code.
2)
Other Equipment: By equipment type.
b.
Data Included:
1)
Equipment tag number.
2)
Description.
3)
Manufacturer, complete model number and all options not
defined by model number.
4)
Quantity supplied.
5)
Component identification code where applicable.
6)
For panels, include panel reference number and name plate
inscription.
Catalog Cuts: I&C components, electrical devices, and mechanical
devices:
a.
Catalog information, marked to identify proposed items and
options.
b.
Descriptive literature.
c.
External power and signal connections.
d.
Scaled Drawings showing exterior dimensions and locations of
electrical and mechanical interfaces.
Instrument List:
a.
Engineer will provide an initial Instrument List in Microsoft
Excel. Data from this may be used as starting point for creating
final Instrument List and Component Data Sheets.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

Applicable fields to be completed include, but are not limited to:


Instrument List Characteristics
Item

Initially Completed By

Tag Number

Engineer

Loop Number

Engineer

Description

Engineer

Manufacturer and complete model


number

4.

Contractor

Size and scale range

Engineer

Setpoints

Engineer

Reference P&IDs, Electrical,


Mechanical, Interconnection Drawings
and Installation Details Drawings

Engineer

Instrument detail number

Engineer

c.
Submit updated version of Instrument List.
d.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.
Component Data Sheets: Data sheets for I&C components.
a.
Format:
1)
Similar to ISA TR20.00.01.
2)
Microsoft Excel, one component per data sheet.
3)
Submit proposed format for Component Data Sheets before
completing data sheets for individual components.
b.
Content: Specific features and configuration data for each
component, including but not limited to:
1)
Tag Number.
2)
Component type identification code and description.
3)
Location or service.
4)
Service conditions.
5)
Manufacturer and complete model number.
6)
Size and scale range.
7)
Setpoints.
8)
Materials of construction.
9)
Options included.
10) Power requirements.
11) Signal interfaces.
12) Name, address, and telephone number of manufacturers
local office, representative, distributor, or service facility.
c.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

6.

7.

8.

Preliminary Panel Elevation Drawings: Provide prior to submitting


Panel Construction Drawings:
a.
Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and location of front of panel
devices.
b.
Panel Legend (Bill of Material): List front of panel devices by tag
number. Include nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and
annunciator inscriptions.
c.
Submit electronic copies of Drawings.
Panel Construction Drawings:
a.
Scale Drawings: Show dimensions and locations of panelmounted devices, doors, louvers, subpanels, internal and external.
b.
Panel Legend (Bill of Material): List front of panel devices by tag
numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator
inscriptions.
c.
Bill of Materials: List devices mounted within panel that are not
listed in panel legend. Include tag number, description,
manufacturer, and model number.
d.
Construction Details: NEMA rating, materials, material thickness,
structural stiffeners and brackets, lifting lugs, mounting brackets
and tabs, door hinges and latches, and welding and other
connection callouts and details.
e.
Construction Notes: Finishes, wire color schemes, wire ratings,
wire, terminal block numbering, and labeling scheme.
f.
Submit electronic copies of Drawings.
Detailed Wiring Diagrams:
a.
Refer to Drawings for Detailed Wiring Diagrams including:
1)
Provide wiring diagrams showing individual wiring diagram
for each device as shown in wiring diagram volume. The
generic wiring diagrams are provided in the Drawings.
These Drawings are to be completed and revised to match
actual installation. These Drawings are managed by the City
and shall be done in accordance with the Citys CAD
standards.
b.
Prepare as-built redline markup of detailed wiring diagrams.
Provide all information in brackets including, but not limited to
terminal numbers, PLC addresses, relays, and tag numbers.
c.
Submit electronic copies of Drawings.
Panel Wiring Diagrams:
a.
Cover wiring within a panel including, but not limited to,
instrumentation, control, power, and communications, and digital
networks.
b.
Objectives: For use in wiring panels, making panel connections,
and future panel trouble shooting.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

9.

Diagram Type:
1)
Ladder diagrams where applicable in a format similar to
those shown on Drawings. Include devices that are mounted
in or on the panel that require electrical connections. Show
unique rung numbers on left side of each rung.
2)
Schematic Drawings for wiring of circuits that cannot be
well represented by ladder diagrams.
d.
Item Identification: Identify each item with attributes listed.
1)
Wires: Wire number and color. Cable number if part of
multiconductor cable.
2)
Terminals: Location (enclosure number, terminal junction
box number, or MCC number), terminal strip number, and
terminal block number.
3)
Components:
a)
Tag number, terminal numbers, and location
(FIELD, enclosure number, or MCC number).
b)
Switching action (open or close on rising or falling
process variable), setpoint value and units, and
process variable description (for example, Sump Level
High).
4)
I/O Points: PLC unit number, I/O tag number, I/O address,
terminal numbers, and terminal strip numbers.
5)
Relay Coils:
a)
Tag number and its function.
b)
On right side of run where coil is located, list contact
location by ladder number and sheet number.
Underline normally closed contacts.
6)
Relay Contacts: Coil tag number, function, and coil location
(ladder rung number and sheet number).
e.
Show each circuit individually. No typical diagrams or typical
wire lists will be allowed.
f.
Ground wires, surge protectors, and connections.
g.
Wire and Cable Names: Show names and wire color
corresponding to Circuit and Raceway Schedule for circuits
entering and leaving a panel. Refer to Division 26, Electrical.
Communications and Digital Networks Diagrams:
a.
Scope: Includes connections to Ethernet network, remote I/O, and
ControlNet devices.
b.
Format: Network schematic diagrams for each different type of
network.
c.
Show:
1)
Interconnected devices, both passive and active.
2)
Device names and numbers.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

10.

11.
12.
13.
14.

15.
16.

C.

3)
Terminal numbers.
4)
Communication Media: Type of cable.
5)
Connection Type: Type of connector.
6)
Node and device address numbers.
7)
Wire and cable numbers and colors.
Panel Power Requirements and Heat Dissipation: For control panels
tabulate and summarize:
a.
Required voltages, currents, and phases(s).
b.
Maximum heat dissipations Btu per hour.
c.
Calculations.
d.
Steady State Temperature Calculations: For nonventilated panels,
provide heat load calculations showing the panel estimated
internal steady state temperature for ambient air temperatures of
100 degrees F.
Installation Details: Include modifications or further details required and
define installation of I&C components.
Spares, expendables, and test equipment.
Electronic Copies: Microsoft Excel.
PLC I/O List:
a.
Managed by Engineer:
1)
During construction Engineer will maintain PLC I/O List
and give electronic Microsoft Excel copies to PIC System
Integrator.
2)
Engineer will assign PLC I/O points to specific chassis, slot,
and point addresses.
b.
PLC I/O List Changes: Changes to PLC I/O List reflecting actual
equipment and instrumentation provided.
1)
Mark up electronic file of latest PLC I/O List from
Engineer. Highlight changed cells with yellow, new rows
with red, and rows to be deleted with green.
2)
Submit marked up copies changes at 30-day intervals.
PLC I/O List: Submit I/O assignment and Rack/Slot/Point.
Shop Drawings for Changes Impacting PLC Programming:
a.
Submit details of changes required to PLC monitoring and control
resulting from installation of alternative or upgraded process
equipment and instrumentation, and other causes.
b.
Submit changes at 30-day intervals.

Informational Submittals:
1.

Statements of Qualification:
a.
PIC System Integrator.
b.
PIC System Integrators site representative.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

2.

3.

Resume for each PIC System Integrators onsite startup and


testing team member (engineers, technicians, and
software/configuring personnel).
Operation and Maintenance Data: In accordance with Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data, and in addition the following:
a.
General:
1)
Provide sufficient detail to allow operation, removal,
installation, adjustment, calibration, maintenance and
purchasing replacements for PIC components.
2)
Submittal Format: Both hard copy and electronic copies for
all submittals. Refer to Article Submittals, heading
Submittal Format.
b.
Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists.
c.
Process and Instrumentation Diagrams: Marked up copy of revised
P&ID to reflect as-built PIC design.
d.
Provide the following items as defined under heading Action
Submittals:
1)
Bill of materials.
2)
Catalog cuts.
3)
Instrument list.
4)
Component data sheets.
5)
Detailed Wiring Diagrams: As-built Drawings.
a)
Panel wiring diagrams.
b)
Loop diagrams.
c)
Interconnecting wiring diagrams.
6)
Panel plumbing diagrams.
e.
Manufacturers O&M manuals for components, electrical devices,
and mechanical devices:
1)
Content for Each O&M Manual:
a)
Table of Contents.
b)
Operations procedures.
c)
Installation requirements and procedures.
d)
Maintenance requirements and procedures.
e)
Troubleshooting procedures.
f)
Calibration procedures.
g)
Internal schematic and wiring diagrams.
h)
Component and I/O Module Calibration Sheets from
field quality control calibrations.
2)
Provide PDF file will linked index to all manuals.
Provide Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation where
specified.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.
1.06

Testing Related Submittals:


a.
Operational Readiness Test:
1)
Preliminary Test Procedures: Outline of proposed tests,
forms, and checklists.
2)
Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and
checklists.
3)
Test Documentation:
a)
Copy of signed-off test results.
b)
Completed component calibration sheets.
b.
Performance Test:
1)
Preliminary Test Procedures: Outline of proposed tests,
forms, and checklists.
2)
Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms, and
checklists.
3)
Test Documentation: Copy of signed-off test results.
Owner Training Plan: In accordance with Section 01 43 33,
Manufacturers Field Services.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Qualifications:
1.

2.
B.

PIC System Integrator: Minimum of 10 years experience providing,


integrating, installing, and starting up similar systems as required for
this Project.
PIC System Integrators Site Representative: Minimum of 5 years
experience installing systems similar to PIC required for this Project.

PIC Coordination Meetings:


1.
2.

3.

General: Refer to Section 01 31 19, Project Meetings, for PIC


coordination meetings.
PIC Schedule Coordination Meeting:
a.
Timing: Following Engineer review of PIC Schedule.
b.
Frequency: Monthly.
c.
Purpose: Discuss Engineers comments and resolve scheduling
issues.
Training Coordination Meeting:
a.
Timing: Following Engineer review of preliminary training plan.
b.
Purpose:
1)
Resolve required changes to proposed training plan.
2)
Identify specific Owner personnel to attend training.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.07

1.08

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

In accordance with Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

B.

Prior to shipment, include corrosive inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping


containers, and related equipment as recommended by capsule manufacturer.

C.

Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in


storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions.

D.

Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction
environments.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Refer to Section 01 31 13, Project Coordination, for Contractors scheduling


requirements for applications software testing.

B.

Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start following key Project
activities until prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been
completed and satisfied:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Shop Drawing Reviews by Engineer:


a.
Prerequisite: Engineer acceptance of Schedule of Values and
Progress Schedule.
b.
Schedule: In accordance with completed schedule of Shop
Drawing and Sample submittals specified in Section 01 33 00,
Submittal Procedures.
Test Prerequisite: Associated test procedures Submittals completed.
Training Prerequisite: Associated training plan Submittal completed.
PLC and OWS Configuring Equipment Delivered to Engineers office:
Refer to PIC subsections for a definition of this equipment.
PLC and HMI Applications Software Configuring by Engineer at
Engineers Office.
a.
Prerequisite: Delivery of PLC and OWS equipment.
b.
Duration: 120 days.
PLC and HMI Applications Software Configuring and Testing by
Engineer:
a.
FDT completed
b.
PLC and OWS applications software completed
c.
ORT1 and ORT2 completed.
d.
Duration:
1)
Thickening Building: 14 days.
2)
Aeration and Galleries: 7 days.
3)
RAS Pump Station asn WSR facility: 7 days.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
1.09

MAINTENANCE
A.

Maintenance Service Agreement:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

B.
1.10

4)
DAFT building: 7 days.
PLC and HMI Shipment to Site:
a.
General Prerequisites:
1)
Approval of PIC Shop Drawings and preliminary operation
and maintenance data.
2)
FDT completed.
PLC and OWS Installation Prerequisite: Equipment received at Site.
Operational Readiness Test 1 Prerequisite: PLC and HMI installation
complete.
Operational Readiness Test 2 Prerequisite: Operational Readiness Test 1
completed.
Performance Test Prerequisite: Operational Readiness Test 2 completed
and facility started up.

Duration of 1 year, unless otherwise noted in PIC subsections.


Start on date of Substantial Completion.
Performed by factory-trained service engineers with experience on PIC
systems to be maintained.
PIC Systems Covered: PIC components, PLC, OWS, except for
Engineer provided applications software.
Materials and labor for demand maintenance with coverage 8:00 a.m. to
5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday.
Response Time: Service engineer shall be onsite within 48 hours of
request by Owner.
Spare Parts: If not stocked onsite, delivered to Site within 24 hours from
time of request.
Repair or replace components or software found to be faulty.
Submit records of inspection, maintenance, calibration, repair, and
replacement within 2 weeks after each Site visit.

Telephone Support: As specified in PIC subsections.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

As specified in PIC subsections.

B.

In computing spare parts quantities based on specified percentages, round up


to nearest whole number.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Expendables: For following items provide manufacturers recommended


2-year supply, unless otherwise noted.
1.
2.
3.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Provide PIC functions shown on Drawings and required in PIC subsections for
each system and loop. Furnish equipment items required in PIC subsections.
Furnish materials, equipment, whether indicated or not, necessary to effect
required system and loop performance.

B.

First Named Manufacturer: PIC design is based on first named manufacturers


of equipment, and materials.
1.

2.

C.

If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain


approval from Engineer for such changes in accordance with the
General Conditions, Article 6.05 Substitutes and Or-Equals.
If proposed item requires, but not limited to, different installation,
wiring, raceway, enclosures, intrinsically safe barriers, and accessories,
provide such equipment and Work.

Like Equipment Items:


1.

2.
2.02

Chemical for analyzers.


Corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.
Spray pump filter adhesive; Hoffman Model A-FLTAD. One pint per
panel with air filters.

Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of


models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation,
maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturers services.
Implement same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For
example control logic, sequence controls, and display layouts.

I&C COMPONENTS
A.

Specifications: Refer to Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control


Components, for Specifications for I&C components.

B.

Components for Each Loop: Major components for each loop are listed in
Instrument List referenced in Article Supplements. Furnish equipment that is
necessary to achieve required loop performance.

C.

Control Panels: Reference Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS


A.

2.04

Reference PLC Equipment List in Article, Supplements, and PLC components


in Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.

Standard Service Conditions: The following defines certain types of


environments. PIC subsections refer to these definitions by name to specify
the service conditions for individual equipment units. Design equipment for
continuous operation in these environments:
1.

2.

3.

B.

Standard Service Conditions for Panels and Consoles: Unless otherwise noted,
in Control Panel Schedule located in Article Supplements at End of Section,
design equipment for continuous operation in these environments:
1.

2.

3.
C.

Inside:
a.
Temperature: 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 95 percent noncondensing.
c.
NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.
Outside:
a.
Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 percent to 100 percent, rain, and snow.
c.
NEC Classification: Nonhazardous.
Outside, Hazardous:
a.
Temperature Minus 20 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
b.
Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing, rain, and
snow.
c.
NEC Classification: As shown on Electrical Drawings.

Freestanding Panel and Consoles:


a.
Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 1.
b.
Inside: NEMA 12.
Smaller Panels and Assemblies (that are not freestanding):
a.
Inside, Air Conditioned: NEMA 12.
b.
All Other Locations: NEMA 4X.
Field Elements: Outside.

Special Environmental Requirements: Design following panels for continuous


operation in environments listed.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

NAMEPLATES AND TAGS


A.

Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on enclosure face.


1.
2.
3.

B.

Component Nameplates, Panel Face: Component identification located on


panel face under or near component.
1.
2.
3.

C.

Inscription: Component tag number.


Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic.
Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise
noted.

Legend Plates for Panel Mounted Pushbuttons, Lights, and Switches.


1.

2.
3.
E.

Location and Inscription: As shown on panel Drawing.


Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic.
Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise
noted.

Component Nameplates, Back of Panel: Component identification located on


or near component inside of enclosure.
1.
2.
3.

D.

Location and Inscription: As shown on Drawings.


Materials: Laminated plastic attached to panel with stainless steel
screws.
Letters: 1/2-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise
noted.

Inscription:
a.
Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Pushbutton Colors and
Inscriptions.
b.
Refer to table under Paragraph Standard Light Colors and
Inscriptions.
c.
Refer to P&IDs on Drawings.
Materials: Stainless steel, keyed legend plates. Secured to panel by
mounting nut for pushbutton, light, or switch.
Letters: Black on gray or white background.

Service Legends: Component identification nameplate located on face of


component.
1.
2.
3.

Inscription: As shown on panel Drawing.


Materials: Adhesive-backed, laminated plastic.
Letters: 3/16-inch-high, white on black background, unless otherwise
noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

Nametags: Component identification for field devices.


1.
2.
3.
4.

2.06

MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS


A.

2.07

2.08

2.09

Inscription: Component tag number.


Materials: 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
Letters: 3/16-inch-high, imposed.
Mounting: Affix to component with 16-guage or 18-gauge stainless steel
wire or stainless steel screws.

Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control Components.

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTROL LOOPS


A.

Shown on Drawings, in panel control diagrams, and Process and


Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID). P&ID format and symbols are in
accordance with ISA S5.1, except as specified or shown on Drawings.

B.

Supplemented by Process Control Narratives that describe requirements not


obvious on P&IDs or panel control diagrams.

PROCESS CONTROL NARRATIVES


A.

See Supplements located at End of Section.

B.

Organization: By unit process and loop number.

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Electrical Raceways: As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

B.

Wiring External to PIC Equipment:


1.
2.

Special Control and Communications Cable: Provided by PIC System


Integrator as noted in Component Specifications and PIC subsections.
Other Wiring and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C.

I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures UL


recognized or UL listed.

D.

Wires within Enclosures:


1.

ac Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: For current to be carried, but not less than No. 18 AWG.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.
5.

E.

Terminate and identify wires entering or leaving enclosures as follows:


1.
2.
3.

F.

Analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks.


Special signals terminated using manufacturers standard connectors.
Identify wiring in accordance with requirements in Section 26 05 05,
Conductors.

Terminal Blocks for Enclosures:


1.

2.
G.

Analog Signal Circuits:


a.
Type: 600-volt stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs or triad
with a 100 percent, aluminum-polyester shield, rated
60 degrees C.
b.
Panels with Circuits Less Than 600 volts: Rated at 600 volts.
Belden No. 18 AWG Type 9341, Triad Beldon No. 1121A.
c.
Size: No. 18 AWG, minimum.
Other dc Circuits.
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: For current carried, but not less than No. 18 AWG.
Special Signal Circuits: Use manufacturers standard cables.
Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.
a.
Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Brady Perma Sleev.
2)
Tyco Electronics.

Quantity:
a.
Accommodate present and spare indicated needs.
b.
Wire spare PLC I/O points to terminal blocks.
c.
One wire per terminal for field wires entering enclosures.
d.
Maximum of two wires per terminal for No. 18 AWG wire for
internal enclosure wiring.
e.
Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less
than 5 per terminal block, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
Terminal Block Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and
Control Components, Part 2, Article Electrical Components.

Grounding of Enclosures:
1.
2.

Furnish isolated copper grounding bus for signal and shield ground
connections.
Ground this ground bus at a common signal ground point in accordance
with National Electrical Code requirements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
H.

Analog Signal Isolators:


1.
2.

I.

Comply with NEC Article 504, Intrinsically Safe Systems.


Install intrinsically safe circuits in a separate wire way that:
a.
Is separated from nonintrinsically safe circuits as specified by
NEC.
b.
Is colored light blue and has message Intrinsically Safe Circuits
Only on raceway cover every 6 inches.

Wiring Interface: Terminate and identify wiring entering or leaving


enclosures.
1.
2.

K.

Furnish signal isolation for analog signals that are sent from one
enclosure to another.
Do not wire in series instruments on different panels, cabinets, or
enclosures.

Intrinsic Safety System Installation:


1.
2.

J.

Single Point Ground for Each Analog Loop:


a.
Locate signal ground at dc power supply for loop.
b.
Use to ground wire shields for loop.
Ground terminal block rails to ground bus.

Analog and Discrete Signal Wires: Terminate at numbered terminal


blocks as shown on the wiring diagrams.
Wiring for Special Signals: Terminate communications, digital data, and
multiplexed signals using manufacturers standard connectors for the
device to which the signals terminate.

Electrical Transient Protection:


1.

General:
a.
Function: Protect elements of PIC against damage due to electrical
transients induced in interconnecting lines by lightning and nearby
electrical systems.
b.
Surge suppressors are not shown for external analog transmitters.
Determine quantity and location, and show in Shop Drawings.
Refer to example wiring in installation details in Drawings.
c.
Provide, install, coordinate, and inspect grounding of surge
suppressors at:
1)
Connection of ac power to PIC equipment including panels,
consoles assembles, and field-mounted analog transmitters
and receivers.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2)

2.
3.

2.10

At the field and panel, console, or assembly connection of


signal circuits that have portions of the circuit extending
outside of a protective building.
Surge Suppressor Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation
and Control Components, Part 2, Surge Suppressors.
Installation and Grounding of Suppressors:
a.
As shown. See Surge Suppressor Installation Details.
b.
Grounding equipment, installation of grounding equipment, and
terminations for field mounted devices are provided under
Division 26, Electrical.

PANEL FABRICATION
A.

General:
1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.
B.

Nominal Panel Dimensions: Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article


Supplements for maximum external dimensions allowed for individual
control panels.
Instrument Arrangements: As shown on Drawing.
Panel Component Schedule: Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article
Supplements which provides a list by local control panel of major panelmounted components for each panel. In case of a conflict between this
list and Instrument List, Instrument List takes precedence. In case of a
conflict between Panel Component Schedule and P&IDs, P&IDs take
precedence.
Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National
Electrical Code (NEC), state and local codes, and applicable sections of
NEMA, ANSI, UL, and ICECA.
Fabricate panels, install instruments and wire, and plumb at PIC System
Integrators facility. No fabrication other than correction of minor
defects or minor transit damage permitted onsite.
UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating Listed Enclosed
Industrial Control Panel per UL 508A.
Electrical Work: In accordance with the applicable requirements of
Division 26, Electrical.

Temperature Control:
1.

Freestanding Panels:
a.
Nonventilated Panels: Size to adequately dissipate heat from
equipment mounted inside panel and on panel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

2.
3.

C.

Ventilated Panels:
1)
Furnish with louvers and forced ventilation as required to
prevent temperature buildup from equipment mounted
inside panel and on panel.
2)
For panels with backs against wall, furnish louvers on top
and bottom of panel sides.
3)
For panels without backs against wall, furnish louvers on
top and bottom of panel back.
4)
Louver Construction: Stamped sheet metal.
5)
Ventilation Fans:
a)
Furnish where required to provide adequate cooling.
b)
Create positive internal pressure within panel.
c)
Fan Motor Power: 120V ac, 60-Hz, thermostatically
controlled.
6)
Air Filters: Washable aluminum, Hoffman Series A-FLT.

Smaller Panels (that are not freestanding): Size to adequately dissipate


heat from equipment mounted inside panel and on panel face.
Space Heaters:
a.
Thermostatically controlled to maintain internal panel
temperatures above dewpoint.
b.
Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements.

Freestanding Panel Construction:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

Materials:
a.
Sheet steel, unless otherwise noted in Control Panel Schedule in
Article Supplements.
b.
Minimum Thickness: 10-gauge, unless otherwise noted.
Panel Front:
a.
Fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel, unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
b.
No seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front.
c.
Panel Cutouts: Smoothly finished with rounded edges.
d.
Stiffeners: Steel angle or plate stiffeners or both on back of panel
face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or
operation.
Internal Framework:
a.
Structural steel for instrument support and panel bracing.
b.
Permit panel lifting without racking or distortion.
Lifting rings to allow simple, safe rigging and lifting of panel during
installation.
Adjacent Panels: Securely bolted together so front faces are parallel.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

D.

Nonfreestanding Panel Construction:


1.

2.
3.

4.

E.

Based on environmental design requirements and referenced in Article


Environmental Requirements, provide the following unless otherwise
noted in Control Panel Schedule in Article Supplements:
a.
Panels listed as inside, air conditioned:
1)
Enclosure Type: NEMA 12.
2)
Materials: Steel.
b.
Other Panels:
1)
Enclosure Type: NEMA 4X.
2)
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
Metal Thickness: 14-gauge, minimum.
Doors:
a.
Rubber-gasketed with continuous hinge.
b.
Stainless steel lockable quick-release clamps.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hoffman Engineering Co.
b.
H. F. Cox.

Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and 4X panels:
1.

F.

Door:
a.
Full height, fully gasketed access door where shown on Drawings.
b.
Latch: Three-point, Southco Type 44.
c.
Handle: D ring, foldable type.
d.
Hinges: Full-length, continuous, piano-type, steel hinges with
stainless steel pins.

Manufacturer and Product: Cooper Crouse-Hinds; ECD Type 4X Drain


and Breather; Drain Model ECD1-N4D, Breather Model ECD1-N4B.

Control Panel Electrical:


1.

Power Distribution within Panels:


a.
Feeder Circuits:
1)
One or more 120V ac, 60-Hz feeder circuits as shown on
Drawings.
2)
Make provisions for feeder circuit conduit entry.
3)
Furnish terminal block for termination of wires.
b.
Power Panel: Furnish main circuit breaker and circuit breaker on
each individual branch circuit distributed from power panel.
1)
Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when
door is open.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 23

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2)

2.

3.
4.
5.

6.

Breaker Sizes: Coordinate such that fault in branch circuit


will blow only branch breaker, but not trip main breaker.
a)
Branch Circuit Breakers: 15 amps at 250V ac.
3)
Breaker Manufacturers and Products: Refer to Division 26.
c.
Circuit Wiring: P&IDs and Control Diagrams on Drawings show
detailed wiring diagrams that use the following rules for circuit
wiring.
1)
Devices on Single Circuit: 20, maximum.
2)
acrylic Multiple Units Performing Parallel Operations: To
prevent failure of any single branch circuit from shutting
down entire operation, do not group all units on same
branch circuit.
3)
Branch Circuit Loading: 12 amperes continuous, maximum.
4)
Panel Lighting and Service Outlets: Put on separate 15 amp,
120V ac branch circuit.
5)
Provide 120V ac plugmold for panel components with line
cords.
Signal Distribution:
a.
Signal Wiring: Separate analog signal cables from power and
control within a panel and cross at right angles where necessary.
b.
Within Panels: 4 to 20 mA dc signals may be distributed as
1V dc to 5V dc.
c.
Outside Panels: Isolated 4 to 20 mA dc only.
d.
Signal Wiring: Twisted shielded pairs.
Relay Types: Reference Section 40 91 00, Instrumentation and Control
Components, Part 2, Article Electrical Components.
Push-to-Test Circuitry: For each push-to-test indicating light, provide a
fused push-to-test circuit.
Internal Panel Lights for Freestanding Panels:
a.
Type: Switched fluorescent.
b.
Quantity: One light for every 4 feet of panel width.
c.
Mounting: Inside above door.
d.
Protective acrylic shield for lights.
Service Outlets for Freestanding Panels:
a.
Type: Three-wire, 120-volt, 15-ampere, GFCI GFCI duplex
receptacles.
b.
Quantity:
1)
Panels 4 Feet Wide and Smaller: One.
2)
Panels Larger than 4 Feet Wide: One for every 4 feet of
panel width, two minimum per panel.
c.
Mounting: Evenly spaced along back-of-panel area.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 24

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

G.

Internal Panel Lights and Service Outlets for Smaller Panels:


a.
Service Outlet: Breaker protected 120-volt, 15-amp, GFCI GFCI
duplex receptacle:
b.
Required for panels. Refer to Control Panel Schedule in Article
Supplements.

PIC Enclosure Internal Wiring:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

7.
8.
9.

10.
11.
12.

Restrain by plastic ties or ducts or metal raceways.


Hinge Wiring: Secure at each end so bending or twisting will be around
longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with sleeve.
Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire.
Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles that pass through holes or
across edges of sheet metal.
Connections to Screw Type Terminals:
a.
Locking-fork-tongue or ring-tongue lugs.
b.
Use manufacturers recommended tool with required sized anvil
to make crimp lug terminations.
c.
Wires terminated in a crimp lug, maximum of one.
d.
Lugs installed on a screw terminal, maximum of two.
Connections to Compression Clamp Type Terminals:
a.
Strip, prepare, and install wires in accordance with terminal
manufacturers recommendations.
b.
Wires installed in a compression screw and clamp, maximum of
one for field wires entering enclosure, otherwise maximum of two.
Splicing and tapping of wires, allowed only at device terminals or
terminal blocks.
Terminate 24V dc and analog signal circuits on separate terminal block
from ac circuit terminal blocks.
Separate analog and dc circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power and
control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at device
terminations.
Arrange wiring to allow access for testing, removal, and maintenance of
circuits and components.
Plastic Wire Duct Fill: Do not exceed manufacturers recommendations.
Conductors Carrying Foreign Voltages within a Panel:
a.
Route foreign voltage conductors into panel and land on a circuit
blade disconnect type terminal block.
b.
Use wire with pink insulation to identify foreign voltage circuits
within panel from terminal block on. Do not use wires with pink
insulation for any other purpose.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 25

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.
18.

Harness Wiring:
a.
120V ac: No. 14 AWG, MTW.
b.
24V dc: No. 16 AWG, MTW where individual conductors are
used and Type TC shielded tray cable where shielded wire is used.
Panelwork:
a.
No exposed connections.
b.
Allow adjustments to equipment to be made without exposing
these terminals.
c.
For power and control wiring operating above 80V ac or dc use
covered channels or EMT raceways separate from low voltage
signal circuits.
Plastic Wire Ducts Color:
a.
120V ac: White.
b.
24V dc: Gray.
c.
Communications Cables and Fiber Optic Jumpers: Orange.
Provide a communications plastic wire duct for communications cables
and fiber optic cables between the communications devices in control
panel and communications raceways. Design plastic wire duct design to
take into account the minimum bending radius of the communications
cable.
Make plastic wire ducts the same depth.
Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 inches between plastic wire ducts and
terminal blocks.

H.

Control Relay Arrangement: Install control relays associated with specific


loops in same panel section as corresponding terminal blocks or side panels.
Provide 20 percent space for future relays. Locate spare space in same sections
as spare terminal blocks.

I.

Factory Finishing:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Furnish materials and equipment with manufacturers standard finish


system in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.
Use specific color if indicated. Otherwise use manufacturers standard
finish color, or light gray if manufacturer has no standard color.
Stainless Steel and Aluminum: Not painted.
Steel Panels:
a.
Sand panel and remove mill scale, rust, grease, and oil.
b.
Fill imperfections and sand smooth.
c.
Paint panel interior and exterior with one coat of epoxy coating
metal primer, two finish coats of two-component type epoxy
enamel.
d.
Sand surfaces lightly between coats.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 26

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.
f.
2.11

CORROSION PROTECTION
A.

Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsules:


1.
2.

2.12

Areas Where Required: Refer to Part 3, Article Protection.


Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC.
b.
Hoffmann Engineering; Model A-HCI.

EQUIPMENT GROUPS
A.

PLC Equipment Group 1 for Engineers Office.


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

2.13

Dry Film Thickness: 3 mils, minimum.


Color: Manufacturers standard.

1 PLC processor.
1 Power Supply.
1 Ethernet Communication module.
1 ControlNet Communication module.
1 Discrete output module.
1 Discrete Input module.
1 Analog Input module.
1 Analog Output module.
1 Chassis.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Engineer may actively participate in many of the tests.


Engineer reserves right to test or retest specified functions.
Engineers decision will be final regarding acceptability and
completeness of testing.
Procedures, Forms, and Checklists:
a.
Except for Unwitnessed Factory Test, conduct tests in accordance
with, and documented on, Engineer accepted procedures, forms,
and checklists.
b.
Describe each test item to be performed.
c.
Have space after each test item description for sign off by
appropriate party after satisfactory completion.
Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists
signed by Engineer and Contractor.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 27

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

B.

Unwitnessed Factory Test:


1.
2.
3.

2.14

Scope: Inspect and test PIC to ensure it is operational, ready for FDT.
Location: PIC System Integrators facility.
Integrated Test:
a.
Interconnect and test PIC, except for primary elements and smaller
panels.
b.
Exercise and test functions.
c.
Provide stand-alone testing of smaller panels.
d.
Simulate inputs and outputs for primary elements, final control
elements, and panels excluded from test.

MAINTENANCE OF PROGRAMMING EQUIPMENT


A.

PART 3
3.01

Conducting Tests:
a.
Provide special testing materials and equipment.
b.
Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables,
equipment, and data.
c.
If not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and
data provide suitable means of simulation.
d.
Define simulation techniques in test procedures.
e.
Test Format: Cause and effect.
1)
Person conducting test initiates an input (cause).
2)
Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect),
occurs.

Provide for maintenance of programming equipment while at Engineers


office. Repair or replace failed equipment within 2 days of notice by Engineer.
EXECUTION

EXAMINATION
A.

For equipment not provided by PIC System Integrator, but that directly
interfaces with PIC, verify the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Proper installation.
Calibration and adjustment of positioners and I/P transducers.
Correct control action.
Switch settings and dead bands.
Opening and closing speeds and travel stops.
Input and output signals.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 28

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

INSTALLATION
A.

Material and Equipment Installation: Follow manufacturers installation


instructions, unless otherwise indicated or directed by Engineer.

B.

Wiring connected to PIC components and assemblies, including power wiring


in accordance with requirements in Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C.

Electrical Raceways: As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes.

D.

Mechanical Systems:
1.
2.

3.

Stainless Steel Tubing Support: Continuously supported


Tubing and Conduit Bends:
a.
Tool-formed without flattening, and of same radius.
b.
Bend Radius: Equal to or larger than conduit and tubing
manufacturers recommended minimum bend radius.
c.
Slope instrument connection tubing in accordance with
installation details.
d.
Do not run liquid filled instrument tubing immediately over or
within a 3-foot plan view clearance of electrical panels, motor
starters, or mechanical mounting panel without additional
protection. Where tubing must be located in these zones, shield
electrical device to prevent water access to electrical equipment.
e.
Straighten coiled tubing by unrolling on flat surface. Do not pull
to straighten.
f.
Cut tubing square with sharp tubing cutter. Deburr cuts and
remove chips. Do not gouge or scratch surface of tubing.
g.
Blow debris from inside of tubing.
h.
Make up and install fittings in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Verify make up of tube fittings with
manufacturers inspection gauge.
i.
Use lubricating compound or TFE tape on stainless steel threads
to prevent seizing or galling.
j.
Run tubing to allow but not limited to, clear access to doors,
controls and control panels; and to allow for easy removal of
equipment.
k.
Provide separate support for components in tubing runs.
l.
Locate and install tubing raceways in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations. Locate tubing to prevent
spillage, overflow, or dirt from above.
Enclosure Lifting Rings: Remove rings following installation and plug
holes.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 29

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.
3.03

Field Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.

Coordinate PIC testing with Owner and affected Subcontractors.


Notify Engineer of Performance Test schedule 4 weeks prior to start of
test.
Engineer may actively participate in tests.
Engineer reserves right to test or retest specified functions.
Engineers decision will be final regarding acceptability and
completeness of testing.

Onsite Supervision:
1.
2.
3.

Require PIC System Integrator to observe PIC equipment installation to


extent required in order to provide Certificates of Proper Installation.
Require PIC site representative to supervise and coordinate onsite PIC
activities.
Require PIC site representative to be onsite while onsite Work covered
by this section and PIC subsystems is in progress.

C.

Leak Tests: During preparation for testing, conduct leak tests in accordance
with Section 40 80 01, Process Piping Leakage Testing.

D.

Testing Sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Provide Operational Readiness Tests and Performance Tests for


facilities as required to support staged construction and startup of plant.
Refer to article Sequence of Work under Section 01 31 13, Project
Coordination, for a definition of project milestones.
Refer to Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, for
overall testing requirements.
Completion: When tests (except Operational Readiness Test) have been
completed and required test documentation has been accepted.

Testing:
1.

2.

Prior to Facility Startup and Performance Evaluation period for each


facility, inspect, test, and document that associated PIC equipment is
ready for operation. Divide Operational Readiness Tests for each facility
into two parts.
Operational Readiness Test 1(ORT1): Performed by PIC System
Integrator to test and document PIC, excluding Engineer provided

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 30

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

applications software, is ready for operation. For PIC Subsystems for


which Engineer provides applications software, provide sufficient
temporary software configuring to allow testing of these subsystems.
a.
Purpose of Test: The test verifies that the field installation has
been completed and is ready for confirmation testing from the
Owner or Engineer.
b.
Loop/Component Inspections and Tests:
1)
These inspections and tests do not require witnessing will be
spot checked by Engineer.
2)
Check PIC for proper installation, calibration, and
adjustment on loop-by-loop and component-by-component
basis.
3)
Provide space on forms for signoff by PIC System
Integrator.
4)
Use loop status report to organize and track inspection,
adjustment, and calibration of each loop and include the
following:
a)
Project name.
b)
Loop number.
c)
Tag number for each component.
d)
Checkoffs/Signoffs for Each Component:
(1) Tag/identification.
(2) Installation.
(3) Termination wiring.
(4) Termination tubing.
(5) Calibration/adjustment.
e)
Checkoffs/Signoffs for the Loop:
(1) Panel interface terminations.
(2) I/O interface terminations with PLCs.
f)
I/O Signals for PLCs, are Operational: Received/sent,
processed, adjusted.
g)
Total loop operational.
h)
Space for comments.
5)
Component calibration sheet for each active I&C component
(except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar
items) include the following:
a)
Project name.
b)
Loop number.
c)
Component tag number or I/O module number.
d)
Component code number for I&C elements.
e)
Manufacturer for I&C elements.
f)
Model number/serial number for I&C elements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 31

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

g)

3.

4.
F.

Summary of Functional Requirements; For Example:


(1) Transmitters/converters, input and output
ranges.
(2) Switching elements, unit range, differential
(fixed/adjustable), reset (auto/manual).
h)
Calibrations, for example, but not limited to:
(1) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0,
10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and
falling.
(2) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset
points.
(3) I/O Modules: Actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10,
50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling.
(4) Space for comments.
c.
Maintain loop status reports, valve adjustment sheets, and
component calibration sheets at Site, and make them available to
Engineer at all times.
d.
Engineer reviews loop status sheets and component calibration
sheets and spot-check their entries periodically, and upon
completion of Preparation for Testing. Correct deficiencies found.
e.
Forms: See Loop Status Report, Instrument Calibration Sheet, and
I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet referenced in Article Supplements.
Operational Readiness Test 2 (ORT2): Combined effort between
Contractor, PIC System Integrator, and Engineer to confirm PIC is ready
for operation. ORT 2 is a repeat of ORT1 with the Engineer and
Owners representative present.
a.
Purpose: This test confirms that all the field items are ready for
startup with the Engineer present.
b.
Prerequisite: Completion of Operational Readiness Test 1.
c.
Joint test with Engineer. Plant interlocking and communications
with PLCs, and OWS tested on loop-by-loop basis.
d.
Test procedures provided by Engineer based on Operational
Readiness Test 1 and additional software tests.
e.
Completed when Operational Readiness Test has been conducted
and Engineer has signed the test forms and checklists in field
indicating PICS is ready for start-up.
Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms, and checklists.
Signed by Engineer and Contractor.

Performance Testing After Facility Startup:


1.

Some control processes cannot be completely tested until the facility is


up and treating waste. These functions are required an additional
performance testing after or during facility startup. Once a facilitys

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 32

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
4.
3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: As required by each PIC subsection.

B.

Specialty Equipment: For certain components or systems provided under this


section, but not manufactured by PIC System Integrator, provide services of
qualified manufacturers representative during installation, startup,
demonstration testing, and training. Provide original equipment
manufacturers services for:
1.
2.

C.
3.05

Operational Readiness Test has been completed, perform jointly with


Engineer a Performance Test on associated PIC equipment to
demonstrate that it is operating as required by Contract Documents.
Performance tests are only required when PIC equipment or control
loops require that the facility is treating waste. Examples of these tests
may include but are not limited to:
a.
TSS analyzers.
b.
Total Phosphorus analyzers.
Make O&M data available to Engineer at Site both before and during
testing.
Determination of Ready for Operation: When Performance Test has
been completed.

Total Suspended Solids Analyzers.


Total Phosphorus Analyzers.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

TRAINING
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Provide an integrated training program for Owners personnel.


Perform training to meet specific needs of Owners personnel.
Include training sessions, classroom and field, for managers, engineers,
operators, and maintenance personnel.
Provide instruction on two working shift(s) as needed to accommodate
the Owners personnel schedule.
Owner reserves the right to reuse videotapes of training sessions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 33

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Operations and Maintenance Training:


1.

2.

3.06

CLEANING
A.

3.07

General:
a.
Refer to specific requirements specified in PIC Subsections.
b.
Include review of O&M data and survey of spares, expendables,
and test equipment.
c.
Use equipment similar to that provided.
d.
Unless otherwise specified in PIC subsections, provide training
suitable for instrument technicians with at least a 2-year associate
engineering or technical degree, or equivalent education and
experience in electronics, instrumentation, or digital systems.
Maintenance Training:
a.
Training Session Duration: 3 instructor days.
b.
Number of Training Sessions: One.
c.
Location: Project Site.
d.
Course Objective: Develop skills needed for routine maintenance
of PIC.
e.
Content: Provide training for each type of component and function
provided.
1)
Component calibration.
2)
Adjustments: For example, controller tuning constants,
current switch trip points, and similar items.
3)
Troubleshooting and diagnosis for equipment and software.
4)
Replacing lamps, chart paper, and fuses.
5)
I&C components removal and replacement.
6)
Periodic preventive maintenance.

Upon completion of Work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from interior
and exterior of equipment.

PROTECTION
A.

Use corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules in enclosures to protect electrical,


instrumentation, and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion.

B.

Periodically replace capsules based on capsule manufacturers


recommendations.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 34

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.08

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

Supplements listed below, follows End of Section, are part of this


Specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

13.

Process Control Narrative.


Instrument List.
PLC Equipment List.
Control Panel Schedule.
HDW-LCP-001 I/O List.
PRE-LCP-001 I/O List.
AER-LCP-002 I/O List.
AER-LCP-004 I/O List.
SCL-LCP-001 I/O List.
DFT-LCP-001 I/O List.
THK-LCP-001 I/O List.
Operational Readiness Test Forms:
a.
Loop Status Report: Each sheet shows status of instruments on a
loop. Also, gives functional description for loop.
b.
Instrument Calibration Sheet: Shows details on each instrument
(except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items).
c.
I&C Valve Adjustment Sheet: Shows details for installation,
adjustment, and calibration of a given valve.
Performance Test Sheet: Describe Performance Test for a given loop.
a.
List requirements of the loop.
b.
Briefly describe test.
c.
Cite expected results.
d.
Provide space for checkoff by witness.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 35

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

West Boise WWTF Phosphorus Removal Project


Process Control Narratives
1. Primary Influent Diversion Structure (PI-424):
1.1 General:
1.1.1 The existing primary influent diversion structure located at the headworks
building will have the two existing gate actuators modified to include new
PCS controlled modulating electric actuators and a new gate and modulating
actuator installed feeding primary clarifier 2. These gates will provide a
hydraulic flow split of the total influent flow to each clarifier.
1.2 Primary Influent Diversion Structure Gates:
1.2.1

Each of the 3 gates at the influent diversion structure will have the ability to
be controlled locally through the controls within the gate actuator.

1.2.2

When selected to be in Remote, the gate will be controlled by the PCS. At the
PCS graphical screen, the operator shall be capable of selecting between
Manual and Auto. When in Manual, the operator can input the gate position
set point.

1.2.3

When selected to be in Remote and Auto, the gate will have three (3)
selections (modes): Full Open, Full Closed, and Modulating. When selected to
be full open or full closed, the PCS shall drive the gate actuator to this
position and halt.

1.2.4

When selected to be in Modulating mode, the gate shall modulate to maintain


a flow, as referenced by the associated flow meter. The flow set point shall be
derived by taking the total influent flow (the 3 clarifier influent flows
summed) and multiplying an operator adjustable percent set point. The
percent set points shall always not exceed 100 percent. If the totals do not sum
to 100%, an indication at the PCS shall alert the operator.

1.2.5

The control loop shall have an operator adjustable deadband (supervisory


level), initially set at 0.5MGD to minimize actuator movement.

1.2.6

Gate closure during Modulating mode shall be limited to an operator


adjustable position, to keep the gate flow closing down past a set position.
(Initially set at 12 inches from bottom of the floor.)

1.2.7

At any time when in Auto, if the diversion structure water level reaches its
high high level alarm set point for a set period (initially 2 seconds), the gate
mode shall all automatically be selected to be full open (Mode change).

1.2.8

When the flow drops below an operator adjustable low flow set point for a set
period (initially set at 5 seconds), an alarm shall be displayed at the PCS. At
the same time, all gates in Auto shall move to the full open position. (This is
NOT a change in control modes.) Once the flow rate rises above the low flow

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

set point for a set period (initially 10 seconds), the gate modulating control
shall resume. The low flow alarm shall display the following alarm at the
PCS: Primary Influent Division Structure Gate Control Not Actively
Splitting Flow.
1.2.9

While in Modulating mode, the gate actuator shall be limited to a maximum


starts per hour. Actual starts per hour limitation shall be 1 less than the total
specified by the actuator manufacturer. The PCS shall reserve one start per
hour for an emergency move to allow the gate to maintain the ability to be
raised to a full open position if the level reaches a high high level.

1.2.10 A high flow alarm shall be set at any time the flow to a given clarifier exceeds
14MGD for a set period, initially set for 30 seconds. The alarm shall be
displayed at the PCS.
1.3 Primary Influent Diversion Structure Level:
1.3.1

The water level within the primary influent division structure shall be
continuously monitored by the PCS, with indication.

1.3.2

Alarm set points for high and high high shall be operator selectable at the
PCS, with alarms being indicated.

1.4 Primary Flow Metering:


1.4.1 The existing primary clarifier influent line will be modified, with two new
flow meters monitoring flow to clarifiers 1 and 2. Each flow meters rate shall
be totalized within the PCS and displayed at PCS.
1.4.2

Primary clarifier 3s existing flow meter will not be modified and is currently
monitored by the PCS.

2. Pretreatment Facility (PI-425):


2.1 General:
2.1.1 The existing primary clarifiers 1 and 2 will have their side walls raised and
new mechanisms installed.
2.2 Primary Clarifiers:
2.2.1.1 The existing PCS addresses and software programming will not be
modified. The new devices for primary clarifiers 1 and 2 will be attached
at these existing I/O points to minimize impact on the existing software.
3. Chemically Enhanced Phosphorus Treatment (PI-0426):
3.1 Ferric Chloride Feed System
3.1.1

There is an existing ferric chloride storage tank and ferric chloride feed
system. Per Citys instruction, only the metering pump will be replaced with a
larger pump with sufficient capability to control hydrogen sulfide and struvite
in the digesters during normal operation, as well as provide backup
phosphorus removal in case the intentional struvite system is out of service.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.1.2

The new peristaltic metering pump will receive RUN command and speed
signal from the plant control system. A LEAK alarm, AUTO control status,
and pump speed will be transmitted back to the Plant Control System (PCS).
3.1.3 When the pump is operated at Auto mode, the operator shall be able to
control the pump speed at Operator Work Stations (OWS) via one of these
two methods: 1) Enter a feed rate setpoint in gph. The system shall have a
calibrated pump speed vs. chemical feed rate table or plot so that the pump
speed is selected; 2) Enter a dosing rate in mg/L based on the digested sludge
flow rate. The operator shall also enter the concentration of the ferrous
chloride bulk solution. The system shall calculate the chemical feed rate using
the formula below:
Q (gph) = Dose (mg/L) x Q (mgd) / [Conc.(%) x s.g.]/24
Where, Q (gph) is ferrous chloride feed rate.
Dose (mg/L) is operator-input ferrous chloride dose.
Q (mgd) is measured thickened sludge flow rate to digesters.
Conc. (%) is the strength of the bulk solution
s.g. is the specific gravity of the bulk solution. 1.25 for ferrous chloride.
When the chemical feed rate is determined, the pump speed shall be
determined based on the calibrated pump speed vs. chemical feed rate table or
plot.

4. Aeration Basins (PI-0427 to PI-0436):


4.1 Aeration Basins Influent Flow Measurement
4.1.1 Influent Flow to South Plant Aeration Basins 1 and 2 is measured using a
magnetic flow meter on the influent piping to each aeration basin. The flow
rates will be monitored by the Plant Control System (PCS).
4.1.2

Influent Flow to North Plant Aeration Basins 5 and 6 is measured using a


magnetic flow meter on the influent piping to each aeration basin. The flow
rates will be monitored by the Plant Control System (PCS).

4.1.3

Flow to each aeration basin will be set by a percentage of the total primary
clarifier effluent flow. Under normal conditions the flow percentage to
Aeration Basin 1 will equal that of Aeration Basin 2, and the flow percentage
to Aeration Basin 5 will equal that of Aeration Basin 6.

4.1.4

Flow control to all Aeration Basins will be achieved by flow control valves on
the influent piping, downstream of flow meters.

4.1.5

Through the PCS the operators can set the flow percentage (for Aeration
Basin 1, 2, 5, and 6) and the flow control valves will automatically adjust to
provide the desired flow split.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.2 Aeration Basin Flow Split Between Zones:


4.2.1

Aeration Basin 1 and 2 flow split between anoxic zone 1, anaerobic zone 1,
and anoxic zone 2 is accomplished using the magnetic flow meter on the
primary effluent line entering each aeration basin and magnetic flow meters
and flow control valves to each Anoxic Zone 1 and Anerobic Zone 1. Anoxic
Zone 1 shall receive 5-10% of the total basin flow. Anaerobic Zone 1 shall
receive 30-45% of the total basin flow. And anoxic zone 2 shall receive the
rest of the flow (45-65%). The flow control valves for each of the zones
above will modulate to maintain the total aeration basin percentage of all
primary effluent flow. Aeration Basin 1 and 2 flow split will be monitored and
controlled through the PCS.

4.2.2

Aeration Basin 5 and 6 flow split between anoxic zone 1, anaerobic zone 1,
and anoxic zone 2 is accomplished using the magnetic flow meter on the
primary effluent line entering each aeration basin and magnetic flow meters
and flow control valves to each Anoxic Zone 1 and Anerobic Zone 1. Anoxic
Zone 1 shall receive 5-10% of the total basin flow. Anaerobic Zone 1 shall
receive 30-45% of the total basin flow. And anoxic zone 2 shall receive the
rest of the flow (45-65%). The flow control valve for each of the zones above
will modulate to maintain the total aeration basin percentage of all primary
effluent flow. Aeration Basin 5 and 6 flow split will be monitored and
controlled through the PCS.

4.3 Aeration Basin 5 and 6 Mixers:


4.3.1

New platform type mixers will be installed in Anoxic Zone 2. Normally these
mixers will run continuously.

4.3.2

Submersible mixers will be installed in Aerobic Zone 1 so that this zone may
be converted into another anoxic zone if desired. These mixers will be
manually turned on and off.

4.3.3

These mixers will be able to be monitored and controlled through the PCS.

4.4 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumping:


4.4.1

A new submersible pump will be provided in Aerobic Zone 4 to pump mixed


liquor to Anoxic Zone 2. This pump will be a fixed speed pump and will run
continuously when the aeration basin is in operation. The pump will be able to
be monitored and controlled through the PCS.

4.4.2

There is a gate on the discharge of the mixed liquor recycle pump to keep the
process from short circuiting the aeration basin when the recycle pump is off.
The pump will be interlocked with this gate through the PCS so that it will not
start unless the gate is closed. The gate will open once the pump is running.
This will inhibit the pump from starting when the flow is moving backwards
across its impellers.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.5 Aeration Basin VFLT Flow Monitoring:


4.5.1

Each aeration basin shall measure influent VFLT with a magnetic flow meter.
The flow split of VFLT between Aeration Basins 1 and 2 is assumed to be
equal, as well as the flow split between Aerations Basins 5 and 6. Manual ball
valves are provided and can be positioned accordingly to ensure this equal
flow split. The PCS will monitor the flow to each aeration basin.

4.6 South Plant Mixed Liquor Pumping (Not Part of This Contract):
4.6.1

A new Mixed Liquor Transfer Pump Station will provide the ability to transfer
mixed liquor from the South Plant to the North Plant secondary clarifiers. The
Mixed Liquor pump will be controlled from a VFD. This pump will be
operated when a South Plant Clarifier is down and needs maintenance. There
will be only one pump and therefore there is no redundancy.

4.6.2

A magnetic flow meter will monitor the mixed liquor from the South Plant to
the North Plant.

4.6.3

Through the Plant Control System (PCS) an operator is able to provide a flow
set point and the VFD and pump will modulate to maintain that set point.

4.6.4

An actuated slide gate will allows isolation of the transfer pump station
wetwell.

5. South Plant RAS Pumping (PI-0437):


5.1 RAS Pump Station
5.1.1 The South Plant RAS pump station no longer discharges to the existing
tower from which RAS flows by gravity to Aeration Basins 1 and 2. It now
has a pressurized discharge system that connects to both Aerations Basins 1
and 2 and the RAS header in the North Plant galleries.
5.1.2

The new fourth RAS pump is the same as the existing ones and provides
additional pumping capacity. The new pump is controlled by a VFD.

5.1.3

All 4 RAS pumps will be controlled by the PCS. Pumps are operated at the
same frequency. They are controlled to maintain a level in the wet well.
Additional pumps shall be turned on and off based on the VFD speed needed
to maintain the wet well level. For example: If 2 pumps are running at 100%
speed to maintain level than a third pump will be turned on. If 3 pumps are
running at 70% speed then one of the pumps will be shut off.

5.1.4

The pumps will be alternated to provide equal wear.

5.1.5

Total sludge flow pumped by the South Plant RAS Pump Station is measured
by a new flow meter in the discharge line and monitored by the Plant Control
System (PCS).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.1.6

RAS flow split between the Aeration Basins 1 and 2, and Aerations Basins 5
& 6 is done manually at actuated butterfly valves.

5.1.7

The PCS also monitors a flood switch in the below grade RAS pump station
electrical room.

6. Thickened Primary Sludge Pumping (PI-0438):


6.1 The existing Thickened Primary Sludge (TPS) pumps are controlled to maintain a
flow set point that would achieve a desired Solids Resident Time (SRT) in the
fermentation tanks. The existing TPS pipe will be extended to feed the fermentation
tanks to the west of the new Thickening Building.
6.2 A Total Suspended Solids (TSS) analyzer is installed on the TPS pipe after it enters
the Thickening Building. It monitors the TSS of the TPS feeding the fermentation
tanks. Coupled with the flow measurement of the thickened primary sludge, it is
used to monitor the solids mass entering the downstream fermentation tanks.
7. Primary Sludge Fermentation (PI-0439 to PI-0440):
7.1 Summary: Partially thickened primary sludge from the existing thickened primary
sludge (TPS) pump station is normally pumped from the existing thickened primary
sludge pump station to the two Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks to the west of
the Thickening Building.
7.2 Initial Operation:
7.2.1 During the initial year of operation, both fermentation tanks are needed but
the feed solids concentrations are lower than design value. In case a
fermentation tank needs to be taken out of service, the maintenance should be
conducted during the non-Total Phosphorus (TP) removal months when the
plant is not subject to an effluent TP limit. The fermentation can be conducted
at a reduced level in the remaining tank that is available.
7.3 Thickened Sludge Distribution
7.3.1

Flow meters and flow control valves will be used to equally distribute the TPS
into each fermentation tank. The flow will be monitored and controlled by the
PCS.

7.3.2

The thickened sludge will be able to bypass the fermentation facility to send it
directly to the fermented primary sludge (FPS) wet wells at the end of
fermentation tanks. From there it will be pumped to the Rotary Screen
Thickeners (RSTs).

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.4 Pipe Maintenance and Flushing:


7.4.1

The plant periodically flushes the TPS pipe with a large quantity of
geothermal water, which can negatively impact the fermentation process. The
geothermal water for flushing therefore is directed to the plant drain system
with automated valves to allow bypassing the fermentation process.

7.5 Fermentation Tank Mixing:


7.5.1

Fermentation Mixing Pumps 1, 2, and 3 continuously mix the sludge within


the fermentation tanks. Fermentation Tank Mixing Pump 1 normally mixes
Fermentation Tank 1 and Fermentation Tank Mixing Pump 3 normally mixes
Fermentation Tank 2. Fermentation Tank Mixing Pump 2 acts as back-up for
Fermentation Tank Mixing Pumps 1 or 3 and should be used on a regular
basis to exercise the pump..

7.5.2

All three mixing pumps will be controlled with VFDs to provide additional
control adjustment to meet the fermentation process mixing needs. The
mixing pumps are monitored and controlled by the PCS.

7.5.3

Each mixing pump has an actuated valve at the discharge of each pump. These
valves function as a check valve for the mixing pumps and will be
automatically controlled from the PCS to interlock with the mixing pumps.

7.5.4

Mixing flow for each fermentation tank is measured with a magnetic flow
meter. The flow is monitored by the PCS.

7.6 Fermented Primary Sludge Pumping:


7.6.1

Fermented primary sludge (FPS) overflow from each fermentation tank falls
into a FPS wet well. The level of each wet well is monitored by a pressure
transducer. Each fermentation tank also has a high level switch. This will alert
the operators of a high level condition in the fermentation wet well and
fermentation tanks in case there is a malfunction of the normal wet well level
sensor. In addition, there is an overflow pipe in each FPS wet well that is
connected to the plant drain system.

7.6.2

W3 water is injected into FPS wet wells. Total W3 flow into these wet wells is
measured and monitored by the PCS. The total W3 flow to both wet wells is
controlled by adjusting manual valves. It is assumed that the flow splits
equally to each wet well based on the symmetry of the piping.

7.6.3

There are two FPS pumps, one duty and one standby, that pump the FPS from
the FPS wet wells to the Thickening Facility. The two wet wells are joined by
the external pump suction line feeding the two FPS pumps. The two wet wells
are also internally joined by a gate in between to ensure that equal amount of
flows are pumped out of each wet well. The gate will be closed if any of the
fermentation tank and associated wet well needs to be taken out of service.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.6.4

The Fermented Primary Sludge Pumps are powered from VFDs and
controlled independently to maintain a level set point in the wet well that they
are pumping from. Each VFD has a hardwired interlock with a discharge high
pressure switch. This switch shuts the pump down to protect the pump from
high pressure due to a plugged line or closed valve. Each wet well also has a
secondary low level pressure switch that will alarm in case there is a
malfunction of the normal level sensor.

7.6.5

The FPS flow is pumped to the RST No. 4 that dedicated for FPS thickening.
FPS flow feeding the RST is measured by a flow meter, and monitored by the
PCS. Automated open/close valves control if the FPS is sent to RST No. 3 or
the standby RST No. 4

7.6.6

The solids content of discharge sludge flow to the RSTs is measured by an


inline TSS analyzer to ensure that the solids concentration is within
approximately 3 percent so that adequate mixing is achieved in fermentation
tanks. Combined with the TSS analyzer on the thickened primary sludge line
that feeds the fermentation tanks the TSS analyzer on the FPS discharge pipe
also allows monitoring of the fermentation system performance by measuring
solids reduction achieved.

8. Sludge Thickening (PI-0448 to PI-0452)


8.1 General:
8.1.1

All sludge to the Rotary Screen Thickeners (RST) normally comes from the
WAS phosphate Release Tank and the Primary Sludge Fermentation Tanks.
WAS or partially thickened primary sludge from the gravity thickeners can
also bypass the Phosphate Release Tank and Primary Sludge Fermentation
Tanks respectively and be routed to the thickening process.

8.1.2

There are four parallel thickening trains. Each train includes polymer
injection, flocculation tank, and rotary screen thickener. Trains 1 and 2
normally thicken the Waste Activated Sludge (WAS). Train 4 normally
thickens the Fermented Primary Sludge (FPS). Train 3 is a backup for both the
WAS and the PFS thickening.

8.1.3

Automated valves control which RSTs are used to thicken WAS or FPS.
Automated flow control valves are also available on sludge feed pipes for
RSTs 1, 2, and 3 to allow achieving of equal flow split between WAS
thickening RSTs.

8.1.4

The standby Train 3 does not need to be frequently exercised and should stay
available as a standby unit most of time. Otherwise the Train 3 may need to be
shut down and restarted to switch to a different type of sludge in event a duty
RST is out of service.

8.1.5

Sludge flow to each train is metered and monitored by PCS.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.2 Polymer Injection:


8.2.1

All four trains have parallel polymer injection equipment. Polymer, supplied
from new, dedicated polymer preparation systems, gets injected into and
mixed with sludge in a polymer injector and mixer..

8.2.2

Polymer flow is paced off of the sludge flow or mass feed into the thickening
train. Polymer flow control to each train is provided by a VFD controlled
polymer feed pump and a flow meter. The polymer is then further diluted to
optimize polymer activity by being mixed with a fixed amount of water before
it gets injected into the sludge.

8.2.3

Each polymer pump is monitored and controlled by the PCS to provide the
proper polymer dosage to each thickening train. A discharge high pressure
switch is hardwire interlocked with each polymer pump. A high discharge
pressure due to a closed valve or a plugged line will automatically stop the
polymer pump.

8.2.4

Polymer Feed Pump 3 is the standby backup pump for trains 1, 2, 4. The
standby pump will automatically be assigned to a functioning train if the
polymer pump for that train has failed. Therefore a failed polymer pump will
not disable a whole thickening train.

8.3 Flocculation and Thickening:


8.3.1

Normal Operation:

8.3.1.1 The polymer injected sludge is passed through a flocculation tank, which
is gently mixed by a floc tank mixer for sludge conditioning, and then to
the RSTs. Both the flocculation tank mixer and RST motor are powered
from VFDs and controlled from the PCS . Flocculation and RST speeds
will be manually adjusted through the PCS to provide the best thickening.
The thickened sludge on the discharge side of the RST will then fall by
gravity into the individual Thickened Sludge Hopper underneath the RST
to be pumped to the digesters..
8.3.1.2 W3 water is used by the RSTs in the thickening process to continuously
wash and clean the RST filtration mesh. The filtrate from the RSTs
thickening the WAS is rich in phosphorus and collected in the PFLT
(Phosphorus-rich Filtrate) wet well. The filtrate from the FPS is rich in
volatile fatty acids and collected in the VFLT (Volatile Fatty Acid Rich
Filtrate) wet well.
8.3.2

Locations of Control:

8.3.2.1 There will be an Operator Work Station (OWS) located in the RST room
adjacent to the RSTs so that an operator can initiate all controls needed to
operate, start, or stop a RST train while near the RSTs. The OWS have the
same access to all operator screens as the plant control system.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.3.2.2 Manual controls of individual equipment of a RST train are also available
near the equipment.
8.3.3

Start of a RST Train

8.3.3.1 From the PCS/OWS turn on the RST washwater solenoid valve and start
the screen motor to wet the screens. Set the screen speed to the desired
rpm.
8.3.3.2 From the PCS/OWS start the flocculator mixer motor to establish unit run
status. Set the mixer speed to the desired rpm.
8.3.3.3 After an RST screen and mixer run status are established, from the
PCS/OWS or at the pumps, start the polymer feed pump associated with
the RST train.
8.3.3.4 Verify that the motorized valve on the filtrate pipe is open and the
motorized valve directing the filtrate to process drain is closed.
8.3.3.5 Open automated valve on the sludge pipe feeding the operating RSTs and
verify that the valve to alternative standby RST is closed.
8.3.3.6 Turn on the FPS or WAS feed pump as necessary.
8.3.3.7 If the RST being started thickens WAS, adjust as necessary flow control
valves that are located downstream of the magnetic WAS flow meters on
the sludge feed lines of two WAS thickening RSTs, to achieve an equal
WAS flow split.
8.3.4

Stop of a RST Train

8.3.4.1 From the PCS/OWS or at the polymer pump, shutoff polymer feed system.
8.3.4.2 Keep the automated flow control valve on and continue to feed sludge to
the RST for approximately 5 minutes until all thickened sludge is cleaned
out of the drum discharge and there is no sludge on the screen. If too much
solids carry to PFLT that may negatively impact downstream struvite
process, close the motorized valve on the PFLT pipe and open the
motorized valve on process drain to direct PFLT to plant drain system.
8.3.4.3 Stop the RST feed pump at PCS/OWS as necessary.
8.3.4.4 Keep the RST running for an additional 15-20 minutes until the screen is
clean and no solids can be seen.
8.3.4.5 Stop the RST drum motor, and close the washwater solenoid valve
through the PCS/OWS.
8.3.4.6 Stop the flocculator motor through the PCS/OWS.
8.3.4.7 If the equipment will be shut down for an extended period, drain the floc
tank by manually opening the valve on the drain line near the bottom of
the floc tank.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.3.4.8 Thickened sludge pump will be automatically stopped when a low sludge
level is sensed.
8.4 VFLT Pumping
8.4.1

A pressure transducer is used to monitor the level in the wet well.

8.4.2

VFLT Pump 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each pump
sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump. Normally only
one pump operates at a time.

8.4.3

High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.

8.4.4

The VFLT pumps are on VFDs and are controlled to maintain a level set point
in the VFLT wetwell.

8.4.5

Normally the VFLT pump is pumping to the WAS Phosphate Release Facility
(WSR), North Plant aeration basins, and South Plant aeration basins. The PCS
controls the flow split so that the WSR receives a flow amount set at the PCS
that is adjustable. Additional VFLT above the needs of WSR are split between
the North Plant and South Plant Aeration Basins. Flow meters and flow
control valves are used to meet the desired flow splits and to monitor the flow
to each of the three locations.

8.5 PFLT Pumping


8.5.1

The PFLT pumps maintain a level set point in the PFLT wet well and pump
the phosphorus rich filtrate from the Thickening Facility to the Struvite
Production Facility.

8.5.2

A pressure level transmitter monitors the wet well level and transmits the level
back to the PCS.

8.5.3

High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.

8.5.4

PFLT Pump 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each pump
sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump. Normally only
one pump operates at a time.

8.5.5

In AUTO mode the PCS will control the pump station to maintain a level in
the wet well by modulating the pump speed therefore matching the influent
flow with the effluent flow. If the wet well level reaches a high level alarm set
point with one pump at full speed the backup pump will turn on at full speed
and will run until the wet well is at a low level set point.

8.6 Thickened Sludge Pumping


8.6.1

A pressure transducer is used to monitor the sludge level in individual


thickened sludge hopper dedicated to each RST.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.6.2

A High level switch at each thickened sludge hopper provides backup high
level alarm status for the level transmitter.

8.6.3

The Thickened Sludge pumps are on VFDs and are controlled to maintain a
sludge level range in the thickened sludge hoppers.

8.6.4

Normally Thickened Sludge pumps associated with duty RSTs are pumping,
with the Thickened Sludge pump No. 3 that is associated with RST train No. 3
as standby. If any of the duty Thickened Sludge pumps lose pumping
efficiency and needs to be serviced, the RST train No. 3 needs to be turned on,
along with Thickened Sludge pump No. 3. If the malfunction of duty
Thickened Sludge pumps occurs during night when the plant is not manned,
the sludge level in the associated hopper will overflow to adjacent sludge
hoppers to allow more response time before sludge spill would occur. High
level alarms will be sent to PCS. If sludge overflow to Thickened Sludge
Hopper No. 3 and a high level alarm is triggered, TS Feed pump No. 3 could
be turned on automatically if the pump is in the auto mode.

8.6.5

Various segments of the pump suction and discharge pipes within the
Thickening Building can be periodically flushed with a hot water flushing
system, which is installed within the building to clean debris, grease, and
other items causing the pipes to be restricted. If the entire thickened sludge
discharge pipe to digesters is plugged, flushing with large volume of hot water
can be done by connecting trucked geothermal water to the suction side of
Thickened Sludge Pumps No. 3 or No. 4 and pumping the geothermal water
through the long thickened sludge pipe line.

8.7 Gravity Belt Thickener


8.7.1

The gravity belt thickener is remaining to provide the ability for recuperative
thickening of partially digested sludge.

9. WAS Phosphate Release Facility (PI-0441 to 0444)


9.1 General:
9.1.1

The WAS Phosphate Release Facility (WSR) consists of two redundant tanks
where WAS and VFLT are mixed and retained for a period of time to help
facilitate the phosphorus removal process.

9.2 7.1.1 VFLT and WAS enters each of the WAS Phosphate Release tanks
independently. . The flow can be diverted to Tank 1, Tank 2 or both using flow
meters and flow control valves located at the DAFT basement..WAS Phosphate
Release Tanks:
9.2.1

The WAS and VFLT is mixed in the WAS phosphate release tanks with 2
bridge mounted mixers in each tank. Normally the mixers will be run
continuously. The mixers can be operated manually or through the PCS. The
PCS will monitor the mixers ON and AUTO status.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.2.2

The WAS Phosphate Release Tanks can be bypass by sending the WAS to
either the GBT or the Thickening (THK) facility. This is achieved using
actuated valves located at the DAFT basement.

9.3 Rotary Drum Thickener (RST) Feed Pump Station:


9.3.1

After the phosphate release tanks the sludge will pour into the WAS
Phosphate Release Outlet Box. The Box has isolation gates so that a WAS
phosphate release tank can be isolated for maintenance.

9.3.2

RST Feed pumps transfer sludge from the WSR outlet box to the RSTs in the
Thickening (THK) facility.

9.3.3

Level in the outlet box is measured by an ultrasonic level transmitter.

9.3.4

High and low level switches provide backup high level and low level alarm
status for the level transmitter.

9.3.5

RST Feed Pumps 1 and 2 will operate as a duplex pump station with each
pump sharing the run time and acting as a backup for the other pump.
Normally only one pump operates at a time. Both pumps will be controlled
from VFDs that will allow their discharge pump flow to be adjusted.

9.3.6

In AUTO mode the PCS will control the pump station to maintain a level in
the outlet box by modulating the pump speed therefore matching the influent
flow with the effluent flow. If the wet well level reaches a high level alarm set
point with one pump at full speed the backup pump will turn on at full speed
and will run until the wet well is at a low level set point.

10. Foul Air System (PI-0448 to 0449)


10.1 General:
10.1.1 The foul air system in the Thickening facility draws air from the RSTs,
flocculation tanks, fermentation tanks, VFLT wet well, and PFLT wetwell.
10.1.2 The foul air system exhaust fans are power from VFDs. They are controlled
by the PCS to maintain a -0.1 inch water column vacuum in the intake header
of the foul air piping right before it enters the fans.
10.1.3 The two exhaust fans are redundant and they are on standby power.
10.1.4 Each exhaust fan has an inlet and discharge damper that will close
automatically when the fan is not operating. The fans will automatically
alternate to provide equal wear.
10.1.5 The exhaust fans discharges the air into the existing foul air system header
east of the Thickening Building.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

11. Facility Monitoring


11.1 Engine Generator:
11.1.1 Standby generator RUNNING and TROUBLE status will be monitoring by
PCS.
11.2 Automatic Transfer Switch:
11.2.1 NORMAL and STANDBY switch status will be monitored by PCS.
11.3 Fire Alarm System:
11.3.1 The fire alarm system SUPERVISORY, FAULT, and ALARM status will be
monitored by PCS. The fire alarm system will also be monitored by a
independent fire alarm monitoring company. Monitoring the alarm in parallel
will alert personnel to what alarms are being sent to the monitoring company.
END OF SUPPLEMENT

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List

Tag Number
HDW-LE/LIT-20301

Component
Code
L5

HDW-FE/FIT-20321

F4

HDW-FE/FIT-20322

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGENTIC

AER-AE/AIT-P-30325

A20

AER-AE/AIT-P-30326

A20

AER-AE/AIT-30355

A20

AER-AE/AIT-P-30356

A20

AER-FE/FIT-P-30551

F4

DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND


TRANSMITTER, NONMEMBRANE
LUMINESCENT (LDO)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND
TRANSMITTER, NONMEMBRANE
LUMINESCENT (LDO)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND
TRANSMITTER, NONMEMBRANE
LUMINESCENT (LDO)
DISSOLVED OXYGEN ELEMENT AND
TRANSMITTER, NONMEMBRANE
LUMINESCENT (LDO)
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Component Title
LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER
ULTRASONIC
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGENTIC

Installation
Detail

Options
RANGE: 0-12 FEET

P&ID
PI-0424

RANGE: 0-20 MGD


SIZE: 36 INCHES
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PI
RANGE: 0-20 MGD
SIZE: 36 INCHES
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PI
RANGE: 0-10 PPM

PI-0424

4091-220G

PI-0424

4091-220G

PI-0432

4091-162G

RANGE: 0-10 PPM

PI-0435

4091-162G

RANGE: 0-10 PPM

PI-0432

4091-162G

RANGE: 0-10 PPM

PI-0435

4091-162G

RANGE: XX-XX GPM


SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL

PI-0428

4091-220G

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30552

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30555

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30556

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30781

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-LSL-30781
AER-PE/PI-30781
AER-FE/FIT-P-30841

L18
P4
F4

LEVEL SWITCH, NON MERCURY


PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30842

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 2

RANGE: XX-XX GPM


SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: XX-XX GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: XX-XX GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-7000 GPM
SIZE: 14 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: ML
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
SETPOINT: EL 2579.3
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 25 MDG
SIZE: 36 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 25 GPM
SIZE: 36 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL

PI-0429

4091-220G

PI-0431

4091-220G

PI-0434

4091-220G

PI-0436

4091-220G

PI-0436
PI-0437
PI-0427

4091-248
4091-304B
4091-220G

PI-0427

4091-220G

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30845

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30846

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30871

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30872

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30875

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30876

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 2 MGD
SIZE: 8 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL

PI-0430

4091-220G

PI-0433

4091-220G

PI-0427

4091-220G

PI-0427

4091-220G

PI-0430

4091-220G

PI-0433

4091-220G

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
AER-FE/FIT-P-30881

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30882

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-30885

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC (EXISTING
REPURPOSED FLOW METER)

AER-FE/FIT-P-30886

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC (EXISTING
REPURPOSED FLOW METER)

AER-FE/FIT-P-35015

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

AER-FE/FIT-P-35016

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

SCL-LSH-P-35051
SCL-PE35101
SCL-PI-P-35101

L18
P15
P4

LEVEL SWITCH, NON MERCURY


PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
PRESSURE GAUGE

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 4

RANGE: 0 TO 9 MGD
SIZE: 20 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 9 MGD
SIZE: 20 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0 TO 6 MGD
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 6 MGD
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 12 MGD
SIZE: 30 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: PE
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SETPOINT: 1 INCH AFF
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI

PI-0427

4091-220G

PI-0427

4091-220G

PI-0430

4091-220G

PI-0433

4091-220G

PI-0436

4091-220G

PI-0436

4091-220G

PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437

4091-248
4091-304C
4091-304C

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
SCL-PE35102
SCL-PI-P-35102
SCL-PE35103
SCL-PI-P-35103
SCL-PE35104
SCL-PI-P-35104
SCL-FE35141

P15
P4
P15
P4
P15
P4
F4

PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR


PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR
PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

DFT-FE/FIT-P-35441

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

DFT-FE/FIT-P-35442

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-PE-P-63011

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63011
THK-PE-P-63012

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63012
THK-PE-P-63013

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63013
THK-PE-P-63014

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63014

P4

PRESSURE GAUGE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 16 INCH
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
RANGE: 0-20,000 GPM
SIZE: 24 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: RAS
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-600 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: WAS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-600 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: WAS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 30 PSI

PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437

4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-304C
4091-220G

PI-0441

4091-220G

PI-0441

4091-220G

PI-0448

4091-304C

PI-0448
PI-0448

4091-304C
4091-304C

PI-0448
PI-0448

4091-304C
4091-304C

PI-0448
PI-0448

4091-304C
4091-304C

PI-0448

4091-304C

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-LE-P-63021

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-LSL-P-63021

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

THK-LIT-P-63021
THK-LSH-P-63022
THK-PI-P-63031A
THK-PI-P-63031B
THK-PI-P-63032A
THK-PI-P-63032B
THK-FE/FIT-P-63041

P9
L50
P4
P4
P4
P4
F4

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63042

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63043

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-PI-P-63051A
THK-PI-P-63051B
THK-PI-P-63052A
THK-PI-P-63052B
THK-PI-P-63053A
THK-PI-P-63053B
THK-PI-P-63054A
THK-PI-P-63054B

P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4
P4

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 6

SIZE: 2INCH
TYPE: OFF-LINE
SETPOINT: 36 INCHES WC

PI-0451

4091-304D

PI-0451

4091-304D

RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
SETPOINT: EL. 2695.5
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0-160 PSI
RANGE: 0-50 PSIG
RANGE: 0- 24GPM
SIZE: 1 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0- 68 GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-86 GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: VFLT
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI

PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451

4091-304D
4091-320
4091-304A
4091-304C
4091-304A
4091-304C
4091-220G

PI-0451

4091-220G

PI-0451

4091-220G

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449

4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A
4091-304A

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-PE-P-63061

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63061
THK-PE-P-63062

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63062
THK-FE/FIT-P-63071

P4
F4

PRESSURE GAUGE
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63072

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63073

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63074

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-LE-P-63081

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-LSL-P-63081

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0 TO 15 PSI
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0 TO 15 PSI
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-262 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-187 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: OFF-LINE
SETPOINT: 48 INCHES WC

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC
SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZER

RANGE: 0 - 24 FEET WC
SETPOINT: EL.2595.5
RANGE: 1 to 90 G/L

THK-LIT-P-63081
THK-LSH-P-63082
THK-AE/AIT-P-63091

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

P9
L50
A119

PI-0452

4091-304C

PI-0452
PI-0452

4091-304C
4091-304C

PI-0452
PI-0448

4091-304C
4091-220G

PI-0448

4091-220G

PI-0448

4091-220G

PI-0448

4091-220G

PI-0452

4091-304D

PI-0452

4091-304D

PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0450

4091-304D
4091-320
4091-310

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-PIT-P-63101
THK-LE-P-63111

P9
P15

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0453
PI-0450

4091-304A
4091-304C

PI-0450

4091-304C

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

RANGE: -10 TO 10 IN WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC

THK-PE-P-63111

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-63111
THK-LSL-P-63111

P4
P8

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PSH-P-63111

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SETPOINT: 120 PSIG

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-LIT-P-63111
THK-LE-P-63112

P9
P15

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PE-P-63112

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-PI-P-63112
THK-LSL-P-63112

P4
P8

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PSH-P-63112

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SETPOINT: 120 PSIG

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-LIT-P-63112
THK-LE-P-63113

P9
P15

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PE-P-63113

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-PI-P-63113
THK-LSL-P-63113

P4
P8

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PSH-P-63113

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SETPOINT: 120 PSIG

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-LIT-P-63113
THK-LE-P-63114

P9
P15

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL

RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 8

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-PE-P-63114

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0450

4091-304C

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SIZE: 4 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SETPOINT: 15 INCHES WC

THK-PI-P-63114
THK-LSL-P-63114

P4
P8

PI-0450
PI-0450

4091-304C
4091-304C

THK-PSH-P-63114

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SETPOINT: 120 PSIG

PI-0450

4091-304C

THK-LIT-P-63114
THK-FE/FIT-P-63121

P9
F4

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

PI-0450
PI-0447

4091-304C
4091-220G

THK-PI-P-63121
THK-PE-P-63121

P4
P6

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR

PI-0447
PI-0447

4091-304B
4091-304B

THK-PSH-P-63121

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

RANGE: 0- 20 FEET WC
RANGE: 0-10 GPM
SIZE: 1/2 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SETPOINT: 110 PSI

PI-0447

4091-304B

THK-FE/FIT-P-63122

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

PI-0447

4091-220G

THK-PI-P-63122
THK-PE-P-63122

P4
P6

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR

PI-0447
PI-0447

4091-304B
4091-304B

THK-PSH-P-63122

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

PI-0447

4091-304B

THK-FE/FIT-P-63123

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

PI-0447

4091-220G

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

RANGE: 0-10 GPM


SIZE: 1/2 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SETPOINT: 110 PSI
RANGE: 0-10 GPM
SIZE: 1/2 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-PI-P-63123
THK-PE-P-63123

P4
P6

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR

THK-PSH-P-63123

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

THK-FE/FIT-P-63124

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-PI-P-63124
THK-PE-P-63124

P4
P6

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR

THK-PSH-P-63124

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

THK-FIT-P-63141

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FIT-P-63142

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-63151

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-LSH-P-63181
THK-AE/AIT-P-63261
WSR-LSL-P-64031

L108
A119
L18

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 10

LEVEL SWITCH, RISES ON STEM


SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZER
LEVEL SWITCH, NON MERCURY

RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI


SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SETPOINT: 110 PSI

PI-0447
PI-0447

4091-304B
4091-304B

PI-0447

4091-304B

RANGE: 0-10 GPM


SIZE: 1/2 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: POLYMER
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0 TO 160 PSI
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
SETPOINT: 110 PSI

PI-0447

4091-220G

PI-0447
PI-0447

4091-304B
4091-304B

PI-0447

4091-304B

PI-0446

4091-220G

PI-0446

4091-220G

PI-0450

4091-220G

PI-0452
PI-0448
PI-0444

4091-310
4091-248

RANGE: 0-100 GPM


SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: W3
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-100 GPM
SIZE: 1.5 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: W3
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-120GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: TS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SETPOINT= 6 INCHES
RANGE: 1 to 30 G/L
SETPOINT: 3 FEET

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
WSR-LSH-P-64032
WSR-LIT-P-64041

L18
L5

WSR-PE-P-64051

P15

LEVEL SWITCH, NON MERCURY


LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ULTRASONIC
ANNULAR SEAL

WSR-PI-P-64051
WSR-PE-P-64052

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

WSR-PI-P-64052
THK-LE-P-71011

P4
P15

PRESSURE GAUGE
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-LSL-P-71011

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

THK-LIT-P-71011
THK-LE-71012

P9
P15

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
ANNULAR SEAL

THK-LSL-P-71012

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

THK-LIT-P-71012
THK-FE/FIT-P-71021

P9
F4

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-71022

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-PE-71041

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

THK-PI-P-71041

P4

PRESSURE GAUGE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SETPOINT: 15.5 FEET


RANGE: 17 FEET
ZERO REF: EL. 2566
SIZE: 8 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0-30 PSI
SIZE: 8 INCH
TYPE: INLINE
RANGE: 0-30 PSI
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: OFFLINE
SETPOINT: 6 FEET WC

PI-0444
PI-0444

4091-248
4091-280

PI-0444

4091-304C

PI-0444
PI-0444

4091-304C
4091-304C

PI-0444
PI-0439

4091-304C
4091-304D

PI-0439

4091-304D

RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
SIZE: 2 INCH
TYPE: OFFLINE
SETPOINT: 6 FEET WC

PI-0439
PI-0439

4091-304D
4091-304D

PI-0439

4091-304D

RANGE: 0- 24 FEET WC
RANGE: 0-2400 GPM
SIZE: 12 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: FPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-2400 GPM
SIZE: 12 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: FPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
SIZE: 6 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI

PI-0439
PI-0439

4091-304D
4091-220G

PI-0439

4091-220G

PI-0440

4091-304C

PI-0440

4091-304C

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Instrument List
THK-PSH-P-71041

P8

PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SETPOINT: 50 PSI

PI-0440

4091-304C

THK-PE-71042

P15

ANNULAR SEAL

PI-0440

4091-304C

THK-PI-P-71042
THK-PSH-P-71042

P4
P8

PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEADBAND

SIZE: 6 INCH
TYPE: IN-LINE
RANGE: 0 TO 60 PSI
SETPOINT: 50 PSI

PI-0440
PI-0440

4091-304C
4091-304C

RANGE: 1 to 100 G/L


SETPOINT: 21.75 FEET

PI-0440
PI-0439

4091-310
4091-320

SETPOINT: 21.75 FEET

PI-0439

4091-320

RANGE: 1 to 50 G/L
RANGE: 0-187 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: W3
MOUNTING: INTEGRAL
RANGE: 0-57.5 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: TPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE
RANGE: 0-57.5 GPM
SIZE: 4 INCH
LINER: TEFLON
FLOW STREAM: TPS
MOUNTING: REMOTE

PI-0439
PI-0439

4091-310
4091-220G

PI-0439

4091-220G

PI-0439

4091-220G

THK-AE/AIT-P-71051
THK-LSH-P-71061

A119
L50H

THK-LSH-P-71062

L50H

THK-AE/AIT-P-71071
THK-FE/FIT-P-71121

A119
F4

THK-FE/FIT-P-71161

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

THK-FE/FIT-P-71162

F4

FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,


ELECTROMAGNETIC

CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT 12

SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZER


LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC (HAZARDOUS
AREA)
LEVEL SWITCH, VIBRONIC (HAZARDOUS
AREA)
SUSPENDED SOLIDS ANALYZER
FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER,
ELECTROMAGNETIC

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PLC EQUIPMENT LIST


Name

Description

Qty.

HDW-LCP-001 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

AER-LCP-002

AER-LCP-004

Model

Manufacturer

Comments

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Existing

Processor

1756

Allen-Bradley

Existing.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1756-IF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Output Module

1756-OF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Location: Galleries South Stair Tower


13 slot chassis

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
I/O Chassis

1756-A13

Allen-Bradley

Power Supplies

1756-PA72

Allen-Bradley

ControlNet communication Module

1756-CN2/B

Allen-Bradley

Remote I/O for PLC-10

120V ac Isolated Discrete Input Module

1756-IA16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

120V Contact Output Modules

1756-OW16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1756-IF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Output Module

1756-OF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Location: South Plant Aeration Basin


Electrical Room

1756-A13

Allen-Bradley

13 slot chassis

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
I/O Chassis

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Name

SCL-LCP-001

DFT-LCP-001

Description

Qty.

Model

Manufacturer

Power Supplies

1756-PA72

Allen-Bradley

ControlNet communication Module

1756-CN2/B

Allen-Bradley

Remote I/O for PLC-10

120V ac Isolated Discrete Inputs

1756-IA16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1756-IF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Output Module

1756-OF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Location: RAS Pump Station


13 slot chassis

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

Comments

I/O Chassis

1756-A17

Allen-Bradley

Power Supplies

1756-PA72

Allen-Bradley

Ethernet Communication Module

1756-EN2T

Allen-Bradley

ControlNet communication Module

1756-CN2/B

Allen-Bradley

Remote I/O for THK-PLC-1

120V ac Isolated Discrete Input Module

1756-IA16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

120V Contact Output Modules

1756-OW16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1756-IF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Output Module

1756-OF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Existing RIO rack in DAFT Building

1771-ID16

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
120V ac Isolated Discrete Input Module

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Name

THK-LCP-001

Description

Qty.

Model

Manufacturer

Comments
system with each module.

120V Contact Output Modules

1771-OW16

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1771-NIS

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

PLC

Allen-Bradley

Location: Thickening Building


17 slot chassis

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
17 Slot I/O Chassis

1756-A17

Allen-Bradley

Processor

1756-L71

Allen-Bradley

Power Supplies

1756-PA72

Allen-Bradley

Ethernet Communication Module

1756-EN2T

Allen-Bradley

ControlNet communication Module

1756-CN2/B

Allen-Bradley

120V ac Isolated Discrete Input Module

10

1756-IA16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide fused IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

120V Contact Output Modules

1756-OW16I

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Input Module

1756-IF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Isolated Analog Output Module

1756-OF8

Allen-Bradley

Provide IFM and prewired 1492 wiring


system with each module.

Note 1: Where Allen-Bradley products are listed they are specified as no substitutions allowed.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE

Panel No.
AER-LCP-004

Requirements
Non-ventilated local control panel for
local control monitoring, and control of
equipment. Local control panel shall
incorporate:

Dimensions
H W D

FDT

Space
Heater

Serv.
Lights,
Outlets

Environment

SS

Mounting

NEMA

Freestanding

12

72

60

24

Yes

No

Yes

Inside, Air Conditioned

No

Freestanding

12

90

36

24

Yes

No

Yes

Inside

No

1. PLC
2. Door mounted industrial
touchscreen PC (AER-OWS-1).
3. Wire terminations, power
supplies, isolation relays, surge
protection,and other components
required to provide complete
PICS.
4. Provide power distribuition with
control panel using circuit
breakers and/or fused terminal
blocks.
SCL-LCP-001

Non-ventilated local control panel for


local control monitoring, and control of
equipment. Local control panel shall
incorporate:
5. PLC
6. UPS
7. Wire terminations, power
supplies, isolation relays, surge
protection,and other components
required to provide complete

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Panel No.

Requirements
PICS.

FDT

Space
Heater

Serv.
Lights,
Outlets

Environment

SS

Mounting

NEMA

Dimensions
H W D

Wall

4X

36 30 16

No

No

Outlet

Inside, Wet

Yes

Freestanding

12

90 144 24

Yes

No

Yes

Inside, A/C

No

8. Provide power distribuition with


control panel using circuit
breakers and/or fused terminal
blocks.
9. UPS Bypass switch and UPS
located outside panel
THK-LCP-002

Non-ventilated local control panel for


housing industrial touchscreen PC
(THK-OWS-2). Local control panel
shall incorporate:
10. Door mounted industrial PC.
11. Power distribution for THKOWS-2

THK-LCP-001

Non-ventilated local control panel for


local control monitoring, and control of
equipment. Local control panel shall
incorporate:
12. PLC
13. UPS
14. Door mounted industrial
touchscreen PC (THK-OWS-1).

(Use only
72 of
width. 72
of space
reserved for
future
expansion)

15. Wire terminations, power


supplies, isolation relays, surge
protection,and other components
required to provide complete
PICS.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Panel No.

Requirements

Mounting

NEMA

Dimensions
H W D

FDT

Space
Heater

Serv.
Lights,
Outlets

Environment

SS

16. Provide power distribuition with


control panel using circuit
breakers and/or fused terminal
blocks.
17. UPS Bypass switch and UPS
located outside panel.
Column Descriptions:
FDT: Factory Demonstration test required.
Dimensions: Approxiate panel size requirements.
SS: Stainless Steel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


HDW-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
I/O

Description

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

PRIMARY INFLUENT DIVERSION STRUCTURE LEVEL


PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 1 INFLUENT GATE POSITION
PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 2 INFLUENT GATE POSITION
PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 3 INFLUENT GATE POSITION
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

AO
AO
AO

PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 1 INF. GATE POS. CONTROL


PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 2 INF. GATE POS. CONTROL
PRIMARY CLARIFIER NO. 3 INF. GATE POS. CONTROL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/ High


Range
PLC Address Rk

0 XX.X Ft
0%
0%
0%

0
0
0

St

Pt

Address

PLC-01
100% PLC-01
100% PLC-01
100% PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

1 PLC-01
1 PLC-01
1 PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PRE-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST


Tag Number

PID

I/O

Description

PRE-PMP-P-20311MO
PRE-PMP-P-20311PV
PRE-PMP-P-20311YA
PRE-PMP-P-20311RN
PRE-PMP-P-20311AU

PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426
PI-0426

AO
AI
DI
DO
DI

FERROUS CHLORID METERING PUMP


FERROUS CHLORID METERING PUMP
FERROUS CHLORID METERING PUMP
FERROUS CHLORID METERING PUMP
FERROUS CHLORID METERING PUMP
SPARE
SPARE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Zero State/
Low Range
SPEED CONTROL
SPEED
FAULT
NORMAL
RUN COMMAND OFF
AUTO STATUS
MANUAL

0%
0%

One State/ High


Range
PLC Address Rk
100% PLC-01
100% PLC-01
ALARM
PLC-01
RUN
PLC-01
AUTO
PLC-01
PLC-01
PLC-01

St

Pt

Address
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-002 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
Tag Number

PID

I/O Description

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address

AER-FCV-30845RE
AER-FCV-30875RE
AER-FCV-30885RE
AER-MIX-P-30815AON
AER-MIX-P-30815AAU
AER-MIX-P-30815BON
AER-MIX-P-30815BAU
AER-MIX-P-30855AON
AER-MIX-P-30855AYA
AER-MIX-P-30855ARE
AER-MIX-P-30855BON
AER-MIX-P-30855BYA
AER-MIX-P-30855BRE
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
AER-PMP-P-30825YA
AER-PMP-P-30825ON

PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 5 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE


AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1
AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1
AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 1 LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 2 LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 ZONE 5 MLRP
AER BASIN 5 ZONE 5 MLRP LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 5 ZONE 5 MLRP

LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL

REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FCV-30846RE
AER-FCV-30876RE
AER-FCV-30886RE
AER-MIX-P-30816AON
AER-MIX-P-30816AAU
AER-MIX-P-30816BON
AER-MIX-P-30816BAU
AER-MIX-P-30855AON
AER-MIX-P-30855AYA
AER-MIX-P-30855ARE
AER-MIX-P-30855BON
AER-MIX-P-30855BYA
AER-MIX-P-30855BRE
AER-PMP-P-30825ON
AER-PMP-P-30825YA
AER-PMP-P-30825ON

PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 6 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE


AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1
AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1
AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 1 LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 2 LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 ZONE 5 MLRP
AER BASIN 6 ZONE 5 MLRP LEAK/TEMP
AER BASIN 6 ZONE 5 MLRP

LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
MANUAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL
OFF
LOCAL

REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
ON
AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE
ON
TROUBLE
REMOTE

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-002 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST

AER-GTE-P-30835OP
AER-GTE-P-30835CL
AER-GTE-P-30835RE
AER-FV-35151CL
AER-FV-35151OP
AER-FV-35151RE

PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 5 AER ZONE 4 GATE


AER BASIN 5 AER ZONE 4 GATE
AER BASIN 5 AER ZONE 4 GATE
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

NOT OPENED
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPENED
LOCAL

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-GTE-P-30835OP
AER-GTE-P-30835CL
AER-GTE-P-30835RE
AER-FCV-39101AV
AER-FV-35152CL
AER-FV-35152OP
AER-FV-35152RE

PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0442
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 6 AER ZONE 4 GATE


AER BASIN 6 AER ZONE 4 GATE
AER BASIN 6 AER ZONE 4 GATE
SECONDARY SCUM SPLIT TO RST VALVE
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

NOT OPENED OPENED


PLC-10
NOT CLOSED CLOSED
PLC-10
LOCAL
REMOTE PLC-10
NOT AVAIL AVAILABLE PLC-10
NOT CLOSED CLOSED
PLC-10
NOT OPENED OPENED
PLC-10
LOCAL
REMOTE PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

OPENED
CLOSED
REMOTE
CLOSED
OPENED
REMOTE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-002 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST

AER-MIX-P-30815ARN
AER-MIX-P-30815BRN
AER-MIX-P-30855ARN
AER-MIX-P-30855BRN
AER-PMP-P-30825RN
AER-GTE-P-30835RC
AER-GTE-P-30835RO
AER-FV-35151RC
AER-FV-35151RO

PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0431
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0432
PI-0437
PI-0437

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1


AER BASIN 5 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 5 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 5 ZONE 5 MLRP
AER BASIN 5 AER ZONE 4 GATE
AER BASIN 5 AER ZONE 4 GATE
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-MIX-P-30816ARN
AER-MIX-P-30816BRN
AER-MIX-P-30856ARN
AER-MIX-P-30856BRN
AER-PMP-P-30826RN
AER-GTE-P-30836RC
AER-GTE-P-30835RO
AER-FV-35152RC
AER-FV-35152RO

PI-0434
PI-0434
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0435
PI-0437
PI-0437

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 1


AER BASIN 6 ANOXIC ZONE 2 MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 1
AER BASIN 6 SWING ZONE MIXER 2
AER BASIN 6 ZONE 5 MLRP
AER BASIN 6 AER ZONE 4 GATE
AER BASIN 6 AER ZONE 4 GATE
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
RAS DIVERSION VALVE TO BASIN 5 & 6
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
RUN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-002 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST

AER-FIT-30845PV
AER-FCV-30845PV
AER-FIT-30875PV
AER-FCV-30875PV
AER-FIT-30885PV
AER-FCV-30885PV
AER-FIT-30555PV
AER-FIT-30781PV

PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0431
PI-0436

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

AER BASIN 5 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 FLOW


AER BASIN 5 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET FLOW
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET FLOW
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 5 VFLT INLET FLOW
MIXED LIQUOR TRANSFER PUMP FLOW

0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM%
0 GPM

XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FIT-30846PV
AER-FCV-30846PV
AER-FIT-30876PV
AER-FCV-30876PV
AER-FIT-30886PV
AER-FCV-30886PV
AER-FIT-30556PV
AER-FCV-39101PV

PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0433
PI-0434
PI-0442

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

AER BASIN 6 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 FLOW


AER BASIN 6 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE
AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET FLOW
AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET FLOW
AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 6 VFLT INLET FLOW
SECONDARY SCUM SPLIT TO RST VALVE

0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM%
0% OPEN

XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO

AER BASIN 5 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE


AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
AER BASIN 5 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
SECONDARY SCUM SPLIT TO RST VALVE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FCV-30845MO
AER-FCV-30875MO
AER-FCV-30885MO
AER-FCV-39101MO

PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0430
PI-0442

AND CONTROL
FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4

CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-002 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
AO SPARE
AER-FCV-30846MO
AER-FCV-30876MO
AER-FCV-30886MO

PI-0433 AO AER BASIN 6 PE FROM PRIM CLAR 3 VALVE


PI-0433 AO AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 1 INLET VALVE
PI-0433 AO AER BASIN 6 ANAER ZONE 2 INLET VALVE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

TBD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-004 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
Tag Number

PID

I/O Description

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address

AER-FCV-30841RE
AER-FCV-30881RE
AER-FCV-30871RE
AER-GTE-P-30781OP
AER-GTE-P-30781CL
AER-LSL-30781YA

PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0436
PI-0436
PI-0436

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 1 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


AER BASIN 1 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 1 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
MIXED LIQUOR TRANSFER GATE
MIXED LIQUOR TRANSFER GATE
ML TRANSFER PUMP STATION LEVEL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-

REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
LOW

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FCV-30842RE
AER-FCV-30882RE
AER-FCV-30872RE
AER-FIT-30552PV

PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

AER BASIN 2 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


AER BASIN 2 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 2 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 2 VFLT INLET FLOW
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL
0 GPM

REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
XX GPM

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-004 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST

AER-FCV-30841PV
AER-FIT-30841PV
AER-FIT-30881PV
AER-FCV-30881PV
AER-FIT-30871PV
AER-FCV-30871PV
AER-FIT-30551PV

PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

AER BASIN 1 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


AER BASIN 1 PRIMARY EFFLUENT METER
AER BASIN 1 ANAER ZONE 1 FLOW
AER BASIN 1 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 1 ANOXIC ZONE 1 FLOW
AER BASIN 1 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 1 VFLT INLET FLOW
SPARE

0% OPEN
0 GPM
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM

100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FCV-30842PV
AER-FIT-30842PV
AER-FIT-30882PV
AER-FCV-30882PV
AER-FIT-30872PV
AER-FCV-30872PV
AER-FIT-30552PV

PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0427
PI-0428

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

AER BASIN 2 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


AER BASIN 2 PRIMARY EFFLUENT METER
AER BASIN 2 ANAER ZONE 1 FLOW
AER BASIN 2 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 2 ANOXIC ZONE 1 FLOW
AER BASIN 2 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
AER BASIN 2 VFLT INLET FLOW
SPARE

0% OPEN
0 GPM
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 GPM

100% OPEN
XX GPM
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX GPM

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AER-FCV-30841MO
AER-FCV-30881MO
AER-FCV-30871MO

PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 1 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 1 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 1 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


AER-LCP-004 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
AO SPARE
AER-FCV-30842MO
AER-FCV-30882MO
AER-FCV-30872MO

PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 2 PRIMARY EFFLUENT VALVE


PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 2 ANAER ZONE 1 VALVE
PI-0427 AO AER BASIN 2 ANOXIC ZONE 1 VALVE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

CLOSE
CLOSE

OPEN
OPEN
OPEN

PLC-10
PLC-10
PLC-10

TBD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SCL-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
Tag Number

PID

I/O Description

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/
PLC
High Range Address Rk St Pt Address

WSR-MX-P-64021AU
WSR-MX-P-64021ON
WSR-MX-P-64022AU
WSR-MX-P-64022ON
WSR-GTE-P-64061OP
WSR-GTE-P-64061CL
WSR-LSL-64031YA
WSR-LSH-64032YA

PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0444
PI-0444

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

WAS MIXER 1
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 1
OFF
WAS MIXER 2
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 2
OFF
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 1 NOT OPENED
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 1 NOT CLOSED
WAS PHOS OUTLET BOX LEVEL LOW
WAS PHOS OUTLET BOX LEVEL HIGH
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
OPENED
CLOSED
LOW
HIGH

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

WSR-MX-P-64023AU
WSR-MX-P-64023ON
WSR-MX-P-64024AU
WSR-MX-P-64024ON
WSR-GTE-P-64062OP
WSR-GTE-P-64062CL

PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443
PI-0443

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

WAS MIXER 3
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 3
OFF
WAS MIXER 4
MANUAL
WAS MIXER 4
OFF
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 2 NOT OPENED
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK GATE 2 NOT CLOSED
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

AUTO
ON
AUTO
ON
OPENED
CLOSED

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

WSR-MX-P-64021RN

PI-0443 DO WAS MIXER 1

RUN

TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

STOP

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SCL-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
WSR-MX-P-64022RN

PI-0443 DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

WAS MIXER 2
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

STOP

RUN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

WSR-MX-P-64023RN
WSR-MX-P-64024RN

PI-0443 DO WAS MIXER 3


PI-0443 DO WAS MIXER 4
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE
DO SPARE

STOP
STOP

RUN
RUN

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SCL-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
SCL-LIT-36350PV
SCL-LS-35051HI
SCL-FIT-35141PV
WSR-LIT-64041HI

PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0437
PI-0444

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

RAS PUMP STATION WETWELL LEVEL


RAS PUMP STATION LEVEL
RAS PUMP FLOW
WAS PHOS RELEASE OUTLET BOX LEVEL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

0 FT
XX FT
0 GPM
0 FT

XX FT
XX FT
XX GPM
XX FT

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


DFT-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST

Tag Number
DFT-FV-P-35421OP
DFT-FV-P-35421CL
DFT-FV-P-35421RE
DFT-FV-P-35431OP
DFT-FV-P-35431CL
DFT-FV-P-35431RE
DFT-FCV-P-34441AV
DFT-FCV-P-34442AV
DFT-FV-P-35451RE
DFT-FV-P-35451OP
DFT-FV-P-35451CL
DFT-FV-P-35421RC
DFT-FV-P-35421RO
DFT-FV-P-35431RC
DFT-FV-P-35431RO
DFT-FV-P-35451RC
DFT-FV-P-35451RO
DFT-FIT-P-34441PV
DFT-FCV-P-34441PV
DFT-FIT-P-34442PV
DFT-FCV-P-34442PV
DFT-FCV-P-34441MO
DFT-FCV-P-34442MO

PID
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441
PI-0441

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

I/O
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
AI
AI
AI
AI
AO
AO

Description
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE OPEN STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE OPEN STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV AVAILABLE
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV AVAILABLE
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE REMOTE STATUS
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE OPEN STATUS
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE CLOSED STATUS
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS WSR BYPASS VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS GRAVITY THICKENER INLET VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE OPEN COMMAND
WSR DISCHARGE VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
WAS FLOW TO WSR TANK 1
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV POSITION
WAS FLOW TO WSR TANK 2
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV POSITION
WAS TO WSR TANK 1 FCV POSITION CONTROL
WAS TO WSR TANK 2 FCV POSITION CONTROL

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/High
Range

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
AVAILABLE
AVAILABLE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
600 GPM
100%
600 GPM
100%
100%
100%

0 GPM
0%
0 GPM
0%
0%
0%

PLC
Address
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40
PLC-40

Address
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
Tag Number

PID

I/O Description

Zero State/
Low Range

One State/ High


Range
PLC Address Rk St Pt Address

THK-FCV-71161AV
THK-GTE-P-71111OP
THK-GTE-P-71111CL
THK-FV-71031OP
THK-FV-71031CL
THK-FV-71031RE
THK-FV-71032OP
THK-FV-71032CL
THK-FV-71032RE
THK-FIT-63071PV
THK-FCV-63071PV
THK-FCV-63071RE
THK-FV-63011BRE
THK-FV-63011BOP
THK-FV-63011BCL
THK-PSH-71041HI

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0440

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE


FERMENTER TANK 1 GATE
FERMENTER TANK 1 GATE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 1 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 1 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 1 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 2 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 2 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 2 EFFLUENT VALVE
WAS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER
WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
FERMENTED PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP 1 PRESSURE

LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-

REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
HIGH

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FCV-71162AV
THK-GTE-P-71112OP
THK-GTE-P-71112CL
THK-GTE-P-71081OP
THK-GTE-P-71081CL
THK-FV-71033OP
THK-FV-71033CL
THK-FV-71033RE
THK-FV-71121OP
THK-FIT-63072PV
THK-FCV-63072PV
THK-FCV-63072RE
THK-FV-63012BRE
THK-FV-63012BOP
THK-FV-63012BCL
THK-PSH-71042HI

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0440

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FERMENTER TANK 2 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE


FERMENTER TANK 2 GATE
FERMENTER TANK 2 GATE
FERMENTATION WET WELL 2 GATE
FERMENTATION WET WELL 2 GATE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
WET WELLS W3 SPRAY VALVE
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
FERMENTED PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP 2 PRESSURE

LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPENED
0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
-

REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
HIGH

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FIT-63074
THK-FCV-63074RE

PI-0448 DI FPS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER


PI-0448 DI FPS THICKENER INLET VALVE

0 GPM
LOCAL

XX GPM
REMOTE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1

TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-FCV-63074OP
THK-FCV-63074CL
THK-FV-63014BRE
THK-FV-63014BOP
THK-FV-63014BCL
THK-FV-63171OP
THK-FV-63171CL
THK-FV-63171RE
THK-LSH-63082HI
THK-LSH-63071HI
THK-LSL-63111LO
THK-PSH-63111HI

PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FPS THICKENER INLET VALVE


FPS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
PFLT PUMP WETWELL HIGH LEVEL SWITCH
PFLT PUMP SUMPWELL HIGH LEVEL SWITCH
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 1 LOW LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 1 HIGH LEVEL
SPARE
SPARE

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
-

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FIT-63073PV
THK-FCV-63073PV
THK-FCV-63073RE
THK-FV-63013BRE
THK-FV-63013BOP
THK-FV-63013BCL
THK-FV-63172OP
THK-FV-63172CL
THK-FV-63172RE
THK-LSL-63081LO
THK-LSL-63112LO
THK-PSH-63112HI

PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER


FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
PFLT PUMP WETWELL LOW LEVEL SWITCH
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 2 LOW LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 2 HIGH LEVEL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

0 GPM
CLOSED
LOCAL
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
-

XX GPM
OPEN
REMOTE
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
LOW
LOW
HIGH

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FV-63271OP
THK-FV-63271CL
THK-FV-63271RE
THK-FV-63273OP
THK-FV-63273CL
THK-FV-63273RE

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FLOCC TANK 1 BYPASS


FLOCC TANK 1 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 1 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 3 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 3 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 3 BYPASS

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-FV-63201OP
THK-FV-63201CL
THK-FV-63201RE
THK-FV-63281OP
THK-FV-63281CL
THK-FV-63281RE
THK-FV-63191OP
THK-FV-63191CL
THK-FV-63191RE

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

PFLT WET WELL VALVE


PFLT WET WELL VALVE
PFLT WET WELL VALVE
FLOC TANK 2 & 3 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 2 & 3 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 2 & 3 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
SPARE

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FV-63272OP
THK-FV-63272CL
THK-FV-63272RE
THK-FV-63274OP
THK-FV-63274CL
THK-FV-63274RE
THK-FV-63282OP
THK-FV-63282CL
THK-FV-63282RE
THK-FV-63221OP
THK-FV-63221CL
THK-FV-63221RE
THK-FV-63211OP
THK-FV-63211CL
THK-FV-63211RE

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

FLOCC TANK 2 BYPASS


FLOCC TANK 2 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 2 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 4 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 4 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 4 BYPASS
FLOC TANK 3 & 4 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 3 & 4 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 3 & 4 DISCHARGE VALVE
VFLT WET WELL VALVE
VFLT WET WELL VALVE
VFLT WET WELL VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
SPARE

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FV-63231OP
THK-FV-63231CL
THK-FV-63231RE
THK-FV-63241OP
THK-FV-63241CL
THK-FV-63241RE
THK-FIT-63121PV
THK-FV-63243OP
THK-FV-63243CL
THK-FV-63243RE

PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 INLET VALVE


POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 1 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 1 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 1 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 1 EFFLUENT METER
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 3 & 4 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 3 & 4 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMPS 3 & 4 EFFLUENT VALVE

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-FIT-63123PV
THK-LSL-63021LO
THK-FCV-63041AV
THK-LSL-63113LO
THK-PSH-63113HI

THK-FV-63232OP
THK-FV-63232CL
THK-FV-63232RE
THK-FV-63242OP
THK-FV-63242CL
THK-FV-63242RE
THK-FIT-63122PV
THK-FV-63244OP
THK-FV-63244CL
THK-FV-63244RE
THK-FIT-63124PV
THK-LSH-63022HI
THK-FCV-63043AV
THK-LSL-63114LO

PI-0447
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0450
PI-0450

PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0447
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0450

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 EFFLUENT METER


VFLT WETWELL LOW LEVEL
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE TANK INLET VALVE
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 3 LOW LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 3 HIGH LEVEL
SPARE

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 INLET VALVE


POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 2 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 2 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 2 & 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 2 EFFLUENT METER
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 EFFLUENT METER
VFLT WETWELL HIGH LEVEL
SOUTH PLANT ANAEROBIC INLET VALVE
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 4 LOW LEVEL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 4

0 GPM
-

NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
NOT OPEN
NOT CLOSED
LOCAL
0 GPM
-

XX GPM
LOW
AVAILABLE
LOW
HIGH

OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
OPEN
CLOSED
REMOTE
XX GPM
HIGH
AVAILABLE
LOW

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-PSH-63114HI

PI-0450 DI THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 4 HIGH LEVEL


DI SPARE

HIGH

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

14
15

TBD
TBD

THK-GEN-E-1YA
THK-GEN-E-1RN
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-FACP-1YA
THK-ATS-E-1SB
THK-ATS-E-1NM
THK-LSL-P-71011LO
THK-LSL-P-71012LO

PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0452
PI-0439
PI-0439

DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI

STANDBY GENERATOR
STANDBY GENERATOR
FIRE ALARM PANEL
FIRE ALARM PANEL
FIRE ALARM PANEL
AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH
AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH
FERMENTED WET WELL 1 LOW LEVEL ALARM
FERMENTED WET WELL 2 LOW LEVEL ALARM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

NORMAL
OFF
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL
NORMAL

ALARM
RUNNING
SUPERVISORY
FAULT
ALARM
STANDBY
NORMAL
ALARM
ALARM

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FCV-71161MO
THK-FV-71031RC
THK-FV-71031RO
THK-FV-71032RC
THK-FV-71032RO
THK-FV-63171RO
THK-FV-63171RC
THK-FCV-63071MO
THK-FV-63011BRC
THK-FV-63011BRO
THK-FCV-63074RO
THK-FCV-63074RC
THK-FV-63014BRC
THK-FV-63014BRO

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE


FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 1 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 1 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 2 EFFLUENT VALVE
FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 2 EFFLUENT VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
WAS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
FPS THICKENER INLET VALVE
FPS THICKENER INLET VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
SPARE
SPARE

0% OPEN
0% OPEN
-

100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FCV-71162MO

PI-0439 DO FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE

0% OPEN

100% OPEN

THK-PLC-001

TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-FV-71033RC
THK-FV-71033RO
THK-FV-71121OP
THK-FV-63172RO
THK-FV-63172RC
THK-FV-63012BRC
THK-FV-63012BRO
THK-FIT-63072MO
THK-FIT-63073MO
THK-FV-63013BRC
THK-FV-63013BRO

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448
PI-0448

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE


FERMENTATION MIXING PUMP 3 EFFLUENT VALVE
WET WELLS W3 SPRAY VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
RAW SEWAGE THICKENING SPLITTER VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER
FPS/WAS THICKENER INLET FLOW METER
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
IN-LINE MIXER W3 VALVE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

THK-FV-63051RC
THK-FV-63271RO
THK-FV-63271RC
THK-FV-63053RC
THK-FV-63273RO
THK-FV-63273RC
THK-FV-63201RO
THK-FV-63201RC
THK-FV-63281RO
THK-FV-63281RC
THK-FV-63191RO
THK-FV-63191RC
THK-FV-63231RO
THK-FV-63231RC

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0447
PI-0447

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

FLOCC TANK 1 W3 VALVE


FLOCC TANK 1 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 1 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 3 W3 VALVE
FLOCC TANK 3 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 3 BYPASS
PFLT WET WELL VALVE
PFLT WET WELL VALVE
FLOC TANK 2 & 3 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 2 & 3 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 3 INLET VALVE
SPARE
SPARE

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 6

0% OPEN
0% OPEN
-

CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
100% OPEN
100% OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

THK-FV-63052RC
THK-FV-63272RO
THK-FV-63272RC
THK-FV-63054RC
THK-FV-63274RO
THK-FV-63274RC
THK-FV-63282RO
THK-FV-63282RC
THK-FV-63221RO
THK-FV-63221RC
THK-FV-63211RO
THK-FV-63211RC
THK-FV-63232RO
THK-FV-63232RC

PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0449
PI-0447
PI-0447

DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO

FLOCC TANK 2 W3 VALVE


FLOCC TANK 2 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 2 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 4 W3 VALVE
FLOCC TANK 4 BYPASS
FLOCC TANK 4 BYPASS
FLOC TANK 3 & 4 DISCHARGE VALVE
FLOC TANK 3 & 4 DISCHARGE VALVE
VFLT WET WELL VALVE
VFLT WET WELL VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
FLOC DISCHARGE TO PLANT DRAIN VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 INLET VALVE
POLYMER FEED PUMP 4 INLET VALVE
SPARE
SPARE

THK-AIT-71071PV
THK-FIT-71161PV
THK-FCV-71161PV
THK-LSH-71061HI
THK-FIT-71021PV
THK-LIT-71011PV
THK-AIT-71051PV
THK-FIT-63141

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0440
PI-0446

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

THICKENED PRIMARY SLUDGE SOLIDS ANALYZER


FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW
FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE
FERMENTATION TANK 1 LEVEL SWITCH
FERMENTATION TANK 1 FEEDBACK METER
WET WELL 1 FLUSHING LEVEL
FPS PUMPS DISCHARGE ANALYZER
POLYMER PREP SYSTEM 1 FLOW METER

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE
OPEN
CLOSE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

0 G/L
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0% HIGH
0 GPM
0 FT%
0 G/L%
0 GPM

XX G/L
XX GPM
100% OPEN
100% HIGH
XX GPM
XX FT
XX G/L
XX GPM

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
THK-FIT-71162PV
THK-FCV-71162PV
THK-LSH-71062HI
THK-FIT-71022PV
THK-LIT-71012PV
THK-FIT-71121PV
THK-FIT-63142
THK-FIT-63042PV

PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0439
PI-0446
PI-0451

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

FERMENTER TANK 2 INLET FLOW


FERMENTER TANK 2 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE
FERMENTATION TANK 2 LEVEL SWITCH
FERMENTATION TANK 2 FEEDBACK METER
WET WELL 2 FLUSHING LEVEL
METER FOR W3 FLOW TO WET WELLS
POLYMER PREP SYSTEM 2 FLOW METER
NORTH PLANT ANAEROBIC INLET FLOW

0 GPM
0% OPEN
0% HIGH
0 GPM
0 FT
0 GPM
0 GPM
0 GPM

XX GPM
100% OPEN
100% HIGH
XX GPM
XX FT
XX GPM
XX GPM
XX GPM

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-LIT-63021PV
THK-FIT-63041PV
THK-FCV-63041PV
THK-LIT-63081PV
THK-LIT-63111PV
THK-LIT-63113PV
THK-FIT-63151PV
THK-AIT-63091PV

PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0452
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-0450

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

VFLT WETWELL LOW LEVEL


WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE INLET FLOW
WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE INLET VALVE
PFLT WETWELL LOW LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 1 LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 3 LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE EFFLUENT FLOW METER
THICKENED SLUDGE EFFLUENT ANALYZER

0 FT
0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 FT
0 FT
0 FT
0 GPM
0 GRAM/L

XX FT
XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX FT
XX FT
XX FT
XX GPM
XX GRAM/L

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-FIT-63043PV
THK-FCV-63043PV
THK-PIT-63101PV
THK-LIT-63112PV
THK-LIT-63114PV
THK-AIT-63261

PI-0451
PI-0451
PI-0453
PI-0450
PI-0450
PI-448

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

SOUTH PLANT ANAEROBIC INLET FLOW


SOUTH PLANT ANAEROBIC INLET VALVE
FOUL AIR BLOWER PRESSURE
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 2 LEVEL
THICKENED SLUDGE FEED PUMP 4 LEVEL
WAS TOTAL SUSPENDED SOLIDS
SPARE
SPARE

0 GPM
0% OPEN
0 LB/SQFT
0 FT
0 FT
0 G/L

XX GPM
100% OPEN
XX LB/SQFT
XX FT
XX FT
90 G/L

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2

TBD
TBD

THK-FCV-71161MO
THK-FCV-63041MO

PI-0439 AO FERMENTER TANK 1 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE


PI-0451 AO WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE INLET VALVE

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 8

0% OPEN
0% OPEN

100% OPEN
100% OPEN

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


THK-LCP-001 INPUT/OUTPUT LIST
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
AO
THK-FCV-71162MO
THK-FCV-63043MO

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE

PI-0439 AO FERMENTER TANK 2 INLET FLOW CONTROL VALVE


PI-0451 AO SOUTH PLANT ANAEROBIC INLET VALVE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE
AO SPARE

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

0% OPEN
0% OPEN

100% OPEN
100% OPEN

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001
THK-PLC-001

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CH2M HILL

LOOP STATUS REPORTEXAMPLE FORMAT

Rev.06.05.92

Project Name: Newport News WTP

Project No. WDC23456.C1

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Measure, locally indicate, and transmit RAS flow to LP-10.
2. At LP-10 indicate flow and provide flow control by modulation of FCV-10-2.
3. Provide high RAS flow alarm on LP-10.

COMPONENT STATUS (Check and initial each item when complete)


Delivered

Tag ID
Checked

Installation

FE/FIT-10-2

Jan-12-90 DWM

Jan-12-90 DWM

Feb-7-90 DWM

Mar-5-90 DWM

FIC-10-2

Jan-12-90 DWM

Jan-12-90 DWM

Mar-5-90 DWM

Apr-4-90 DWM

May-4-90 VDA

FSH-10-2

Jan-12-90 DWM

Jan-12-90 DWM

Mar-5-90 DWM

Apr-4-90 DWM

May-7-90 VDA

FAH-10-2

Jan-12-90 DWM

Jan-12-90 DWM

Mar-5-90 DWM

Apr-4-90 DWM

May-7-90 VDA

FCV-10-2

Mar-2-90 DWM

Mar-2-90 DWM

Apr-20-90 DWM

Apr-30-90 DWM

May-16-90 VDA

Date: May-18-90

Loop No.: 10-2

Tag Number

Termination
Wiring

Termination
Tubing
N.A.

Calibration
May-6-90 VDA

REMARKS: None.

Loop Ready for Operation

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

By: D.W. Munzer

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEETEXAMPLEANALYZER/TRANSMITTER


COMPONENT

MANUFACTURER

Rev.06.05.92

PROJECT

Code: A7

Name: Leeds & Northrup

Number: WDC30715.B2

Name: pH Element & Analyzer/Transmitter

Model: 12429-3-2-1-7
Serial #: 11553322
FUNCTIONS

Name: UOSA AWT PHASE 3

Indicate? Y
Record? N

Transmit/
Convert? Y

RANGE
Chart:

VALUE

UNITS

Scale:

1-14

pH units

Input:
Output:

REQUIRED
Input

Indicated

COMPUTING FUNCTIONS? N
Describe:

1-14
pH units
4-20
mA dc
ANALOG CALIBRATIONS
AS CALIBRATED

Output

Increasing Input

Decreasing Input

Indicated

Output

Indicated

Output

Number

1.0

1.0

4.0

1.0

4.0

1.0

3.9

1.

2.3

2.3

5.6

2.2

5.5

2.3

5.6

2.

7.5

7.5

12.0

7.5

11.9

7.5

12.0

3.

12.7

12.7

18.4

12.7

18.3

12.6

18.3

4.

14.0

14.0

20.0

14.0

20.0

14.0

20.0

5.

CONTROL MODE SETTINGS:


P: N.A.
I:
#
NOTES:
1. Need to recheck low pH calibration solutions.

D:

CONTROL? N
Action? direct / reverse
Modes? P / I / D
SWITCH? N
Unit Range:
Differential:
fixed/adjustable
Reset? automatic / manual
DISCRETE CALIBRATIONS
Note
REQUIRED
AS CALIBRATED
No.
Trip Point

Reset Pt.

Trip Point

Reset Pt.

(note rising or falling)

(note rising or falling)

N.A.

N.A.
1.

6.
Component Calibrated and Ready
for Start-up
By: J.D. Sewell
Date: Jun-6-92
Tag No.: AIT-12-6[pH]

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CH2M HILL

I&C VALVE ADJUSTMENT SHEETEXAMPLE

Rev.06.05.92

PARTS

Project Name: SFO SEWPCP

Project Number: SFO10145.G2

Body

Type: Vee-Ball

Mfr: Fisher Controls

Size: 4-inch

Model: 1049763-2

Line Connection: 159 # ANSI Flanges

Serial #: 1003220

Type: Pneumatic Diaphragm

Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Linear Modulated

Model: 4060D

Travel: 3-inch

Serial #: 2007330

Input Signal: 3-15 psi

Mfr: Fisher Controls

Action: Direct - air to open

Model: 20472T

Cam: Equal percentage

Serial #: 102010

Pilot

Action:

Mfr:

Solenoid

Rating: None

Model:

I/P

Input: 4-20 mA dc

Mfr: Taylor

Converter

Output: 3-15 psi

Model: 10-T-576-3

Action: Direct

Serial #: 1057-330

Position

Settings: Closed / Open 5 deg, rising

Mfr: National Switch

Switch

Contacts: Close / Close

Model: 1049-67-3

Operator

Positioner

Serial #:

Serial #: 156 &157


Power

Type: Pneumatic

Air Set Mfr: Air Products

Supply

Potential: 40 psi

Model: 3210D
Serial #: 1107063

ADJUSTMENTS

Initial

Date

VERIFICATION

Initial

Date

Air Set

JDS

Jun-06-92

Valve Action

JDS

Jun-03-92

Positioner

JDS

Jun-06-92

Installation

JDS

Jun-03-92

Position Switches

JDS

Jun-06-92

Wire Connection

JDS

Jun-04-92

I/P Converter

JDS

Jun-07-92

Tube Connection

JDS

Jun-04-92

Actual Speed

JDS

Jun-07-92

REMARKS: Valve was initially installed backwards.

Valve Ready for Start-up

Observed to be correctly installed May-25-92

By: J.D. Sewell


Date: Jun-07-92
Tag No.: FCV-10-2-1

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

CH2M HILL PERFORMANCE TEST SHEET - EXAMPLE


Project Name: SFO SEWPCP Plant Expansion

Rev.06.05.92

Project No.:
SFO12345.C1

Demonstration test(s): For each functional Requirement of the loop:


(a) List and number the requirement. (b) Briefly describe the demonstration test.
(c) Cite the results that will verify the required performance. (d) Provide space for signoff.
1. MEASURE EFFLUENT FLOW
1.a With no flow, water level over weir should be zero and
FIT indicator should read zero.

Jun-20-92 BDG

2. FLOW INDICATION AND TRANSMISSION TO LP & CCS


With flow, water level and FIT indicator should be related by expression
Q(MGD) = 429*H**(2/3) (H = height in inches of water over weir).
Vary H and observe that following.
2.a Reading of FIT indicator.

Jun-6-92 BDG

2.b Reading is transmitted to FI on LP-521-1

Jun-6-92 BDG

2.c Reading is transmitted and displayed to CCS.

Jun-6-92 BDG

H(measured)

10

15

Q(computed)

47.96 135.7 251.7

Q(FIT indicator)

48.1

137

253

Q(LI on LP-521-1)

48.2

138

254

Q(display by CCS)

48.1

136.2 252.4

Forms/Sheets Verified

By

Date

Loop Accepted By
Owner

Loop Status Report

J.D. Sewell

May-18-92

By: J.D. Smith

Instrument Calibration Sheet

J.D. Sewell

May-18-92

Date: Jun-6-92

I&C Valve Calibration Sheet

N.A.

Performance Test

By

Date

Performed

J. Blow MPSDC Co.

Jun-6-92

Witnessed

B. DeGlanville

Jun-6-92

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Loop No.: 30-12

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL


FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
40 90 00 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 91 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

This section gives general requirements for instrumentation and control


components.
PRODUCTS

GENERAL
A.

Article Mechanical Systems Components covers requirements of mechanical


PIC components that are not specifically referenced by Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, Instrument Lists or Data
Sheets.

B.

Article Electrical Components covers requirements for electrical PIC


components that are not specifically referenced by Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, Instrument Lists or Data
Sheets.

C.

All other Part 2 articles cover components that are referenced by Instrument
Lists in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, or
by specific component numbers in other PIC subsections.

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMPONENTS


A.

Flow Element, Rotameter, Purge:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

For air or water service, unless otherwise noted.


Materials: Glass tube, fiberglass body, stainless steel float, nylon ball
check valve.
Direct-Reading Scale Length: 2-1/2 inches, minimum.
Scale Ranges: 0 scfh to 2.5 scfh for air service or 0 gph to 10 gph for
water service.
Integral inlet needle valves.
Integral differential pressure regulators:
a.
For water service.
b.
For air service for level ranges greater than 10 feet of water.
Rotameters for water service.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

B.

Pressure Gauge: For other than process variable measurement.


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

3.

Type: Ball valve.


Materials: Brass, stainless steel, PVC, or CPCV, as recommended by
manufacturer for designated service, unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Whitey; Series 41 through Series 43.
b.
Hoke; Flomite 7100 Series.

Pressure Regulator, Air:


1.

2.
3.
4.

E.

Dial Size: Nominal 2-inch dial size.


Accuracy: 2 percent of span.
Scale Range: Such that normal operating pressure lies between
50 percent and 80 percent of scale range.
Connection: 1/4-inch NPT through bottom, unless otherwise noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Ashcroft Utility; Gauge Series 1000.
b.
Marsh; Standard Gauge Series.
c.
Ametek U.S.; Gauge Series P500.
d.
Acculite; Series 2000.

ON/OFF Valves:
1.
2.

D.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Fischer & Porter; Series 10A3130.
b.
Brooks; Series DS-1350.

Provide air at reduced pressures, as shown, constant to within plus or


minus 10 percent for flows from 0 scfh to 300 scfh with 100 psi supply
pressure.
Setscrew for outlet pressure adjustment.
Integral filter and relief valve.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Masoneilan; Series 77-4.
b.
Fisher; Series 67FR.

Test Tap:
1.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Imperial-Eastman; quick-disconnect couplings No. 292-P and caps
No. 259-P.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.
F.

Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316, 0.065-inch wall,


seamless, soft annealed, as shown on Drawings.

G.

Stainless Steel Fittings:


1.

2.

H.
2.03

Crawford Fitting Co.; Swagelok quick-connects Series QC4 and


caps QC4-DC.
Parker; CPI Series precision quick couplings.

Compression Type:
a.
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged
bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, flareless.
b.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Parker Flodar; BA Series.
2)
Swagelok tube fittings.
3)
Parker CPI tube fittings; Parker A-LOK dual ferrule tube
fittings.
Socket Weld Type:
a.
Materials: Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A182/A182M forged
bodies or ASTM A276 barstock bodies, 3,000 psi maximum
working pressure, safety factor 4:1.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Cajon.
2)
Swagelok.
3)
Parker WELDLOK.

Air Set: Consists of a shutoff valve, pressure regulator, discharge pressure


gauge, and interconnecting tubing.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A.

Terminal Blocks for Enclosures:


1.

General:
a.
Connection Type: Screw compression clamp.
b.
Compression Clamp:
1)
Complies with DIN-VDE 0611.
2)
Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves that penetrate
wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.
3)
Guides strands of wire into terminal.
c.
Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking.
d.
Current Bar: Copper or treated brass.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.

2.

3.

4.

Insulation:
1)
Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 degrees C to plus
110 degrees C.
2)
Two funneled shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry.
f.
Mounting:
1)
Standard DIN rail.
2)
Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without
displacing adjacent blocks.
3)
End Stops: Minimum of one at each end of rail.
g.
Wire Preparation: Stripping only permitted.
h.
Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on
terminal or rail.
i.
Marking System:
1)
Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block.
2)
Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags.
3)
Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops.
4)
Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown
on panel control diagrams and loop diagrams.
5)
Fuse Marking for Fused Terminal Blocks: Fuse voltage and
amperage rating shown on top of terminal block.
Terminal Block, General Purpose:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 30 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 24 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
g.
Test Sockets: One screw test socket 0.079-inch diameter.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.T.
Terminal Block, Ground:
a.
Wire Size: 24 AWG to 10 AWG.
b.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
c.
Color: Green and yellow body.
d.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
e.
Grounding: Electrically grounded to mounting rail.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P.
Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 10 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body, orange switch.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

6.

7.

8.

B.

g.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SNT.
Terminal Block Diode:
a.
Rated Voltage: 24V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 30 ma.
c.
Wire Size: 16 AWG.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Phoenix Contact ST-IN.
Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 25 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches.
g.
Indication: LED diode 24V dc.
h.
Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.
i.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type ML10/13.SFD.
Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 25 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 AWG to 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Fuse: 0.25 inch by 1.25 inches.
g.
Indication: Neon lamp, 110V ac.
h.
Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum.
i.
Spacing: 0.512 inch, maximum.
j.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type ML10/13.SFL.
Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac, High Current:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 35 amps.
c.
Wire Size: 18 AWG to 8 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 8 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray.
f.
Fuse: 13/32 inch by 1.5 inches.
g.
Spacing: 0.95 inch, maximum.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type MB10/24.SF.

Relays:
1.

General:
a.
Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket.
b.
Relay Enclosure: Furnish dust cover.
c.
Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

C.

d.
Socket Mounting: Rail.
e.
Provide holddown clips.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:
a.
Type: Compact general purpose plug-in.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac, and 6.6A at 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations.
i.
Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp.
j.
Push-to-test button.
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay:
a.
Type: Adjustable time delay relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 30V dc or 277V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Operating Temperature: Minus 10 degrees C to 55 degrees C.
g.
Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent.
h.
Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall
between 20 percent to 80 percent of range.
i.
Time Delay Setpoint: As noted or shown.
j.
Mode of Operation: As noted or shown.
k.
Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to
dust cover.
l.
Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield; Series CB for
0.1-second to 100-minute delay time ranges, Series CK for
0.1-second to 120-second delay time ranges.

Surge Suppressors:
1.

General:
a.
Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and
second-stage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series
impedance; includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.
b.
Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum.
c.
Recovery: Automatic.
d.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C.
e.
Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

D.

Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections:


a.
Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences
of IEEE C62.41 Category B test waveform.
b.
First-Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less.
c.
Second-Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less.
d.
Power Supplies for Continuous Operation:
1)
Four-Wire Transmitter or Receiver: Minimum5 amps at
130V ac.
2)
All Other Applications: Minimum 30 amps at 130V ac.
Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines:
a.
Test Waveform: Linear 8-microsecond rise in current from 0 amps
to a peak current value followed by an exponential decay of
current reaching one-half the peak value in 20 microseconds.
b.
Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000-amp
peak test waveform.
1)
dc Clamping Voltage: 20 percent to 40 percent above
operating voltage for circuit.
2)
dc Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3)
Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Analog Signals Lines: Emerson Edco PC-642 or SRA-64 series.
b.
120V ac Lines: Emerson Edco HSP-121.
c.
Field Mounted at Two-Wire Instruments:
1)
Encapsulated in stainless steel pipe nipples.
2)
Emerson Edco SS64 series.

Power Supplies:
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

Furnish as required to power instruments requiring external dc power,


including two-wire transmitters and dc relays. Provide dual power
supplies with diode auctioneered outputs.
Convert 120V ac, 60-Hz power to dc power of appropriate voltage(s)
with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that
instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances.
Provide output over voltage and over current protective devices to:
a.
Protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure.
b.
Protect power supply from damage due to external failure.
Enclosures: NEMA 1.
Mount such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other
components.
Fuses: For each dc supply line to each individual two-wire transmitter.
a.
Type: Indicating.
b.
Mount so fuses can be easily seen and replaced.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Intrinsic Safety Barriers:


1.

2.

2.04

Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in


hazardous area and are used in a safe area.
a.
Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.
Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from
hazardous area to safe area.
a.
Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

I&C COMPONENTS
A.

A20 Dissolved Oxygen Element and Transmitter, Nonmembrane Luminescent


(LDO):
1.

2.

3.

4.

General:
a.
Function: Continuous measurement of dissolved oxygen (DO)
concentration of process fluid.
b.
Type: Luminescent or fluorescence sensor.
c.
Parts: Element (sensor), transmitter (analyzer), external power
supply, interconnecting cable, mounting hardware, and ancillaries.
Performance:
a.
Range: 0 to 20 ppm.
b.
Sensor Accuracy:
1)
Measurement: plus or minus 0.2 percent of span.
2)
Temperature: plus or minus 0.2 degrees C.
c.
Response Time: Less than 40 seconds to 90 percent of value upon
step change.
Element:
a.
Luminescent or fluorescent sensor.
b.
Process Temperature Range: 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F.
c.
Submersion Depth: 350 feet maximum.
d.
Sensor Cable: Integral 33 feet of cable. Provide additional length
as required.
e.
Junction Box: Provide junction or termination box and extension
cable as required.
f.
Mounting: 1-1/2 UNF - 12 UNF thread.
Transmitter:
a.
Display:
1)
Graphic dot matrix LCD to display DO.
2)
Auxiliary Readout:
a)
Temperature.
b)
Diagnostic warnings.
c)
Error messages.
d)
Other information.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

5.

6.
B.

Ambient Conditions:
1)
Temperature minus 4 degrees F to plus 140 degrees F.
2)
Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, relative, noncondensing.
c.
Signal Interface:
1)
Analog Output:
a)
Two isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance
up to 500 ohms.
b)
Either output configurable for DO or temperature.
2)
Relay Outputs:
a)
Three SPST; 5 amps resistive,
115V ac/230V ac/30V dc.
b)
Each relay assignable to either DO or temperature.
c)
Function:
(1) Control: Settings for fail safe on/off, high/low
phasing, setpoint, deadband, and on/off displays.
(2) Alarm: Settings for fail safe on/off, high alarm
point, high alarm point deadband, low alarm
point, low alarm point deadband, and on/off
relays.
3)
Serial Communication: If and as noted.
d.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X/IP66 polycarbonate/aluminum.
e.
Mounting Hardware: Suitable to support panel, surface, horizontal
pipe, and vertical pipe mounting.
f.
Power Requirements: 120V ac, 60-Hz.
g.
Stainless steel equipment tag.
Accessories:
a.
Unless otherwise noted, provide submersion mounting hardware
and mounting bracket as required to perform appropriate
installation.
b.
Provide sun shield for transmitter display.
Manufacturers and Products: Hach; sc200 LDO Analysis System.

A100 Total Phosphorus Analyzer


1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Measure indicate and transmit total phosphorus in waste
water.
b.
Type: Sampling
Performance:
a.
Measurement Range: [xxxx]
b.
Response Time: [xxx]
Service:
a.
Secondary Effluent:
1)
Process Temperature: 40 to 80 degrees F

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

C.

2)
Total Suspended solids: XX to XX g/L
Interfaces:
a.
Electrical:
b.
Control:
c.
Plumbing:
Manufacturer and Model:
a.
ASA Analytics; ChemScan 4100.
b.
Or equal.

A119 Suspended Solids Analyzer:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

General:
a.
Function: Measure indicate and transmit suspended solids in
wastewater.
b.
Type: Inline.
Performance:
a.
Measurement Range: 1 to 100 g/L, sludge, user-selectable.
b.
Response Time: 1 to 300 seconds adjustable.
Service:
a.
Thickened primary sludge.
b.
Thickened sludge
c.
Operating Temperature:
1)
Probe: 32 to 120 degrees F.
2)
Transmitter: 32 to 120 degrees F.
Element:
a.
Probe:
1)
Stainless steel housing.
2)
Back-scatter photo receptor to detect light at 140 degrees to
the transmitted light beam; to measure suspended solids in
heavily located sample streams.
3)
Self-cleaning wiper system.
Transmitter:
a.
Displays measured variable.
b.
Menu driven operation.
c.
Graphics display.
d.
Programmable to display hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly
progress lines.
e.
Enclosure Dimension: 6H x 6W x 8D inches, nominal.
f.
Power Supply: 115V ac, 50/60 Hz.
g.
Signal Interface:
1)
Output: 4 to 20 mA dc signal for load impedance up to
0-500 ohms without load adjustments.
Cable Length: As required.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.
8.

9.
D.

Miscellaneous:
a.
Calibration: Sample specific, based on gravimetric TS analysis.
Accessories (for each unit provided):
a.
Pipe insertion mounting hardware.
b.
Replacement wiper blades, 1 package of 10.
Manufacturer and Product Model: Hach Suspended Solids, Probe and
Controller, Highline-SC, 115 V ac; SC-200 Controller.

F4 Flow Element and Transmitter, Electromagnetic:


1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Measure, indicate, and transmit the flow of a conductive
process liquid in a full pipe.
b.
Type:
1)
Electromagnetic flowmeter, with operation based on
Faradays Law, utilizing the pulsed dc type coil excitation
principle with high impedance electrodes.
2)
Full bore meter with magnetic field traversing entire flowtube cross section.
3)
Unacceptable are insert magmeters or multiple single point
probes inserted into a spool piece.
c.
Parts: Flow element, transmitter, interconnecting cables, and
mounting hardware. Other parts as noted.
Service:
a.
Stream Fluid:
1)
As noted.
2)
Suitable for liquids with a minimum conductivity of
5 microS/cm and for demineralized water with a minimum
conductivity of 20 microS/cm.
b.
Flow Stream Descriptions: If and as described below.
Operating Temperature:
a.
Element:
1)
Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2)
Process: Minus 5 to 170 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.
b.
Transmitter:
1)
Ambient: Minus 5 to 140 degrees F, typical, unless
otherwise noted.
2)
Storage: 15 to 120 degrees F, typical, unless otherwise
noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

Performance:
a.
Flow Range: As noted.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of rate for all flows resulting
from pipe velocities of 2 to 30 feet per second.
c.
Turndown Ratio: Minimum of 10 to 1 when flow velocity at
minimum flow is at least 1 foot per second.
Features:
a.
Zero stability feature to eliminate the need to stop flow to check
zero alignment.
b.
No obstructions to flow.
c.
Very low pressure loss.
d.
Measures bi-directional flow.
Process Connection:
a.
Meter Size (diameter inches): As noted.
b.
Connection Type: 150-pound ANSI raised-face flanges;
AWWA C207, Table 2 Class D; or wafer style depending on
meter size, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Flange Material: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.
Power (Transmitter): 120V ac, 60-Hz, unless otherwise noted.
Element:
a.
Meter Tube Material: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
b.
Liner Material: Teflon, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Liner Protectors: Covers (or grounding rings) on each end to
protect liner during shipment.
d.
Electrode Type: Flush or bullet nose as recommended by the
manufacturer for the noted stream fluid.
e.
Electrode Material: Type 316 stainless steel or Hastelloy C, unless
otherwise noted.
f.
Grounding Ring:
1)
Required, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Quantity: Two, unless otherwise noted.
3)
Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.
g.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted.
h.
Submergence:
1)
Temporary: Unless noted otherwise.
2)
Continuous (up to 10 feet depth), NEMA 6P/IP68: If noted.
i.
Direct Buried (3 to 10 feet): If noted.
j.
Hazardous Area Certification:
1)
Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D: If noted.
2)
Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and FM approved:
If noted.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3)

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Class 1, Division 1, Groups C, D, and FM approved: If


noted.
Transmitter:
a.
Mounting: Surface (wall), unless otherwise noted.
b.
Display: Required, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Digital LCD display, indicating flow rate and total.
2)
Bi-directional Flow Display: Required, unless otherwise
noted.
a)
Forward and reverse flow rate.
b)
Forward, reverse and net totalization.
c.
Parameter Adjustments: By keypad or non-intrusive means.
d.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X, minimum, unless otherwise noted.
e.
Empty Pipe Detection: Drives display and outputs to zero when
empty pipe detected.
Signal Interface (at Transmitter):
a.
Analog Output:
1)
Isolated 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance from 0 ohm
to at least 500 ohms minimum for 24V dc supply.
2)
Supports Superimposed Digital HART protocol.
b.
Discrete Input: If noted.
1)
Contact closure, configured as noted for the following
typical parameters: reset totalizer, change range, hold output
constant, drive output to zero, and low flow cutoff, etc.
c.
Other: As noted.
Cables:
a.
Types: As recommended by manufacturer.
b.
Lengths: As required to accommodate device locations.
Built-in Diagnostic System:
a.
Features:
1)
Field programmable electronics.
2)
Self-diagnostics with troubleshooting codes.
3)
Ability to program electronics with full scale flow,
engineering units, meter size, zero flow cutoff, desired
signal damping, totalizer unit digit value, etc.
4)
Initial flow tube calibration and subsequent calibration
checks.
Factory Calibration:
a.
Calibrated in an ISO 9001 and NIST certified factory.
b.
Factory flow calibration system must be certified by volume or
weight certified calibration devices.
c.
Factory flow calibration system shall be able to maintain
calibration flow rate for at least 5 minutes for repeatability point
checks.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

14.
15.

16.

Factory Ready for Future In situ Verifications: If noted.


a.
Original meter parameter values available from vendor by request.
Accessories:
a.
In situ Verification System: If noted.
1)
Quantity: One complete system provided for the project.
2)
Verifies quantitatively that the meter and signal converters
present condition is the same as originally manufactured.
3)
Physical access to the flow-tube not required.
4)
Meet standards established by the National Testing
Laboratory.
5)
Tests and stores over 50-meter parameters related to primary
coils, electrodes, interconnecting cable and signal converter.
6)
Verification standard shall be plus or minus 1 percent of wet
calibration for meters produced using the calibration
verification service, or plus or minus 2 percent for standard
meters.
7)
Windows-based software.
b.
Primary Simulation System: If noted.
1)
Quantity: One complete system provided for the project.
2)
Verifies proper operation of the signal converter by
simulating the flow meters output signal.
a)
Generates pulsed dc excitation signal with a reference
voltage of 70 mV.
b)
Generated signal ranges from 0 to 99 percent (0 to
32.8 feet per second) with a resolution of 0.1 percent.
c)
Switch selectable for forward, reverse and zero flow
rate.
3)
Verifies various input and output signals.
Manufacturers:
a.
Krohne includes IFC 020K/IFC 090K (integral) or
IFC 020F/IFC 090F (remote) signal converter.
1)
Aqua Flux Flowmeter (size: 3/8 to 120 inches).
2)
EnviroMag, IFS 4000 Flowmeter (size: 2 to 60 inches).
3)
IFS 1000 EcoFlux Flowmeter (size: 1/10 to 8 inches).
b.
ABB Automation MagMaster (includes Transmitter):
1)
10D1475 Mini-Mag (size: 1/10 to 4 inches).
2)
MFE (size: 1/2 to 24 inches).
3)
Plus MFF (size: 8 to 84 inches).
c.
Emerson Process Management, Rosemount Division:
1)
Model 8705 (flanged) and Model 8711(wafer) flow tubes.
2)
Model 8712 (surface) and Model 8732 (integral)
transmitters.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

e.

f.

E.

Endress & Hauser, Inc. Flow Measuring System:


1)
Promag 50/53H (size: 1/12 o 4 inches).
2)
Promag 50/53P (size: 1/2 to 24 inches).
3)
Promag 50/53W (size: 1 to 78 inches).
Invensys Foxboro (includes IMT 25 Series Intelligent Magnetic
Flow Transmitter):
1)
8000A Series Wafer Body (size: 1/16 to 16 inches).
2)
9100A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 1 to
78 inches).
3)
9200A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 8 to
48 inches).
4)
9300A Series Flanged Body Flow Tubes (size: 8 to
16 inches).
Krohne includes IFC 020K/IFC 090K (integral) or
IFC 020F/IFC 090F (remote) signal converter.
1)
Aqua Flux Flowmeter (size: 3/8 to 120 inches).
2)
EnviroMag, IFS 4000 Flowmeter (size: 2 to 60 inches).
3)
IFS 1000 EcoFlux Flowmeter (size: 1/10 to 8 inches).

L5 Level Element and Transmitter, Ultrasonic:


1.

2.

3.

4.

General:
a.
Function: Continuous, noncontacting level measurement.
b.
Type: Ultrasonic.
c.
Parts: Element, transmitter, interconnecting cable, and accessories
as noted.
Service:
a.
Application: If and as noted.
b.
Vapor Space Pressure: Atmospheric, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Operating Temperature Range:
1)
Element: Minus 4 degrees F to plus 149 degrees F.
2)
Transmitter: Minus 4 degrees F to 113 degrees F.
Performance:
a.
Range: As noted.
b.
Zero Reference: As noted.
c.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of maximum range or
6 mm, whichever is greater.
d.
Resolution: 0.1 percent of range or 2 mm, whichever is greater.
e.
Blanking Distance: Sensor dependent, typically 1 foot.
Element:
a.
NEMA 6P waterproof.
b.
Housing: PVDF, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Other materials subject to Engineer approval.
c.
Facing: None, unless otherwise noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

5.

6.
7.

8.

Integral Flange: If noted.


1)
Face: PTFE, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Size: As noted.
e.
Process Connection:
1)
1-inch NPT, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Top mounted.
f.
Electrically Hazardous Rating:
1)
Class I, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, and D: If noted.
2)
Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, and G: If noted.
3)
Other Ratings: As noted.
g.
Beam Angle: 12 degrees or less.
h.
Integral temperature compensation.
Transmitter:
a.
Display.
b.
Integral keypad or nonintrusive external programming.
c.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X polycarbonate, unless otherwise noted.
d.
Power Supply: 115 volts, 50/60-Hz, unless otherwise noted.
e.
Isolated Analog Output:
1)
One Minimum: 4 mA to 20 mA dc for load impedance of 0
to 750 ohms.
f.
Digital Communication: As noted.
g.
Discrete Outputs:
1)
Minimum, two relay (SPDT) rated for 2 amps continuous at
230V ac.
2)
Assignable and as noted.
Interconnecting Cable: Weatherproof, UV protected, length as required,
and type as recommended by manufacturer.
Accessories:
a.
Submergence Shield: If noted.
b.
Remote Programming Software: If noted.
1)
Allows remote programming via computer and echo traces
for troubleshooting.
2)
One per lot of units furnished.
c.
Others: As noted.
d.
If no integral keypad, furnish one handheld programmer per lot of
units furnished.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Siemens; SITRANS L, Model HydroRanger 200 and Sensor.
b.
Pulsar; Blackbox Series 13X and Sensor.
c.
Endress & Hauser; Model FMU90 and Sensor.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

F.

L18 Level Switch, Non-Mercury:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type:
1)
Direct-acting, float with enclosed, encapsulated switch and
integral cable.
2)
Mercury free.
Service (Liquid): Wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: 5 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: Watertight and impact-resistant.
b.
Float:
1)
Material and Size: 5.5-inch diameter polypropylene.
c.
Cable:
1)
Length as noted or as necessary per mounting requirements.
2)
Plastic-jacketed cable, oil-resistant, and suitable for
continuous service.
d.
Mounting: Pipe, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Pipe Mounting:
a)
Cable clamp, suitable for connection to 1-inch pipe.
b)
Pipe-to-wall bracket, suitable for connection to 1-inch
pipe.
2)
Anchor Mounting Kit: If noted.
a)
15-pound vinyl-coated cast-iron anchor.
b)
1/8-inch, Type 316 stainless steel wire rope.
c)
Stainless steel cable clips.
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Type: Magnetic reed.
b.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at least 0.8 amp continuous at 120V ac.
2)
Contact Type: Either NO or NC, as required by application
or as noted; or SPDT (NO and NC).
Accessories: As noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Siemens Water Technologies; Model 9G-EF Direct Acting Float
Switch (B100).
b.
Contegra; Model FS90.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 17

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

L50 Level Switch, Vibronic:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

H.

General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type:
1)
Suitable for non-hazardous locations.
2)
Only 2 wires and a ground are required.
Service (Liquid): Wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: 1 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: NEMA 4X
b.
Mounting: 4 inch ANSI B16.5 Flange
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at least 1 amp continuous at 220V ac.
2)
Contact Type: Normally Closed
Accessories: As noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Endress+ Hauser; FEL51
b.
Or equal.

L50H Level Switch, Vibronic (Hazardous Area):


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type: Suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D hazardous
locations.
Service (Liquid): Primary Sludge, Thickened Sludge
Performance:
a.
Setpoint: As noted.
b.
Differential: -/+ .5 inches maximum.
c.
Temperature: 32 degrees F (nonfreezing) to 160 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Entire Assembly: NEMA 4X
b.
Mounting: 4 inch ANSI B16.5 Flange
c.
Probe length: Supply as needed to meet setpoint requirement.
Signal Interface:
a.
Connects to 4-20mA analog input module:
1)
Provides 16mA when probe is in air.
2)
Provides 8mA when probe is submerged
Accessories: As noted.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 18

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

I.

L108 Level Switch, Rises on Stem:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
J.

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Endress+ Hauser; FEL55
b.
Or equal

General:
a.
Function: Actuate contact at preset liquid level.
b.
Type: Direct acting; rises on stem.
Service: Liquid, water, wastewater, unless otherwise noted.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint as noted.
b.
Switch Actuation Point: Approximately one-half distance from
end of stem to mounting.
c.
Operating Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 300 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Assembly Material: Stainless steel.
b.
Float Size: 2-1/8-inch diameter.
Mounting: Stem Mount: 1/4-inch NPT.
Signal Interface:
a.
Switch Type: Magnetic reed switch.
b.
Switch Contacts:
1)
Isolated, rated at 100 VA.
2)
NO or NC (by inverting float on unit stem).
3)
Lead Wires: 18 AWG, 24-inch length.
Manufacturer and Product: GEMS; Single Station Liquid Level
Switch, Model LS-1950.

P4 Pressure Gauge:
1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Local pressure indication.
b.
Type: Bourdon tube element.
Performance:
a.
Scale Range: As noted.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.50 percent of full scale.
Features:
a.
Dial: 4-1/2-inch diameter.
b.
Pointer Vibration Reduction: Required, unless otherwise noted.
Use the following method:
1)
Liquid filled gauge front, unless otherwise noted.
a)
Glycerine fill, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Case Material: Black thermoplastic, unless otherwise noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 19

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

4.

5.

6.

K.

Materials of Wetted Parts (including element, socket/process


connection, throttling device (if specified) and secondary
components): Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.
e.
Pointer: Adjustable by removing ring and window.
f.
Window: Glass or acrylic, unless otherwise noted.
g.
Threaded reinforced polypropylene front ring.
h.
Case Type: Solid front with blow-out back.
Process Connection:
a.
Mounting: Lower stem, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Size: 1/2-inch MNPT, unless otherwise noted.
Accessories:
a.
Throttling Device: Required, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Type suitable for the intended service.
2)
Install in gauge socket bore.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Ashcroft; Duragauge Model 1259/Model, 1279/Model, 1279
PLUS!
b.
Ametek U.S. Gauge; Solfrunt Model 19XX/1981Advantatge.
c.
WIKA, Type 2XX.34.

P6 Pressure Seal, Diaphragm:


1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Isolate sensing element from process fluid.
b.
Type:
1)
Diaphragm.
2)
Fluid filled between diaphragm and sensing element.
Service:
a.
Pressure: Same as associated sensor.
b.
Temperature Range: If noted.
Performance:
a.
Pressure:
1)
For threaded process connections, at least 2,500 psig at
100 degrees F.
2)
Glycerin Fill: Suitable only for pressure (not vacuum
applications).
b.
Temperature:
1)
Dependent upon fill fluid.
a)
Glycerin (food grade): Zero to 400 degrees F.
b)
Silicone: Minus 40 degrees F to plus 600 degrees F.
c)
Silicone (food grade): Zero to 375 degrees F.
d)
Halocarbon: Minus 70 degrees F to 300 degrees F.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 20

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

L.

Features:
a.
Materials:
1)
Lower Housing: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise
noted.
2)
Diaphragm Material: Type 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
3)
Top Housing: Steel, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Diaphragm: Welded to upper housing, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Filling screw in upper housing.
d.
Fill Fluid:
1)
As noted.
2)
Or approved equal.
3)
Factory assembled and filled.
e.
Flushing Connection: 1/4-inch NPT in lower housing.
f.
Diaphragm Seal Displacement: 0.1 cubic inch, nominal.
Connections:
a.
Instrument: 1/2-inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or
shown.
b.
Process: 1/2-inch female NPT, unless otherwise noted or shown.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ashcroft; Type 201.
b.
Ametek; Mansfield and Green Division; Type SG.
c.
WIKA; Type L990.10.

P8 Pressure Switch, Fixed Deadband:


1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Monitor pressure.
b.
Type: Diaphragm actuated switch.
Performance:
a.
Setpoint:
1)
As noted.
2)
Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent.
b.
Range: Noted setpoint shall fall between 20 percent and
80 percent of range.
c.
Overpressure Proof Pressure: At least 400 percent of rated
maximum static pressure.
d.
Operating Temperature Range:
1)
Dependent on actuator seal materials.
2)
For Buna-N seal, 0 degrees F to 150 degrees F.
Features:
a.
Actuator Seal: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Differential (deadband): Fixed.
c.
Reset: Automatic, unless otherwise noted.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 21

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.
6.

7.

M.

d.
Mounting: Surface, unless otherwise noted.
Process Connection:
a.
1/2-inch NPT female connections, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Materials: Nickel-plated brass, unless otherwise noted.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Signal Interface:
a.
Contact Type:
1)
DPDT, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Rated for 10 amps minimum at 120V ac.
b.
Hermetically Sealed Switch: If noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Ashcroft; Type 400, B Series.
b.
United Electric; 400 Series.

P9 Pressure Transmitter:
1.

2.

3.

General:
a.
Function: Measure pressure and transmit signal proportional to
pressure.
b.
Type:
1)
Electronic variable capacitance or silicon strain gauge.
2)
Two-wire transmitter; smart electronics.
c.
Parts: Transmitter and accessories.
Performance:
a.
Range: As noted.
1)
Select transmitters factory upper range limit (URL) such
that upper boundary of noted range is as close as possible to
80 percent of factory URL, but does not exceed it.
b.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of span, unless otherwise
noted.
c.
Ambient Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus
175 degrees F, with integral meter.
d.
Process Operating Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F to plus
250 degrees F.
e.
Humidity: 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
f.
Hazardous Location Certifications: If and as noted.
Features:
a.
Type: Gauge pressure, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Adjustable damping.
c.
LCD indicator, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Display in either percent or engineering units, field
configurable.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 22

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.

4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

N.

Wetted Metallic Parts: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise


noted. Includes drain/vent valves; process flanges and adapters,
and process isolating diaphragm.
e.
Wetted O-Rings: Glass filled TFE, graphite filled PTFE, or Viton,
unless otherwise noted.
f.
Bolts and Nuts (if required): Type 316 stainless steel, unless
otherwise noted.
g.
Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted.
Process Connections:
a.
Line Size: 1/2 inch.
b.
Connection Type: FNPT.
c.
Direct/remote Diaphragm Seal: If and as noted.
Signal Interface:
a.
4-20 mA dc output with digital signal based on HART protocol,
unless otherwise noted below.
1)
Nominal Maximum Loop Resistance with External 24V dc
Power Supply: 550 ohms.
Enclosure:
a.
Type: NEMA 4X.
b.
Materials: Coated aluminum, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Mounting bracket, unless otherwise noted.
1)
Bracket and Accessories: Stainless steel; suitable for
mounting transmitter to panel or 2-inch pipe.
Accessories:
a.
Two-valve (isolate and vent) Stainless Steel Manifold: If noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Gauge Pressure Units:
1)
Rosemount; Model 3051 TG.
2)
Foxboro; Model IGP20.
3)
SMAR; LD30XM Series.
b.
Absolute Pressure Units:
1)
Rosemount; Model 3051 TA.
2)
Foxboro; Model IAP20.
3)
SMAR; LD30XA Series.

P15 Pressure Seal, Annular:


1.

General:
a.
Function:
1)
Sense pressure in a process line and transfer to pressure
monitoring device.
2)
Protect attached pressure monitoring device from sludge or
slurry.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 23

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
2.

3.

4.

5.

Type: Annular fluid-filled device that senses pressure through


flexible sleeve around full pipe circumference.
Performance:
a.
Operating Conditions: Suitable for line pressures up to pipe flange
rating.
Features:
a.
Construction:
1)
In-line, 8 Inches and Smaller: Full-faced thru-bolted with
outside diameter same as mating flanges, unless otherwise
noted.
2)
In-line, 10 Inches and Larger: Wafer style.
3)
Offline: Threaded, unless otherwise noted.
b.
Materials:
1)
Body: Carbon steel, unless otherwise noted.
2)
Flanges (where applicable): Carbon steel, unless otherwise
noted.
3)
Flexible Sleeve: Buna-N, unless otherwise noted.
4)
Fill Fluid: Ethylene glycol/water or propylene glycol, unless
otherwise noted.
c.
Factory Filled System:
1)
Filled and assembled with pressure monitoring device(s).
2)
Coordinate attached pressure monitoring device(s) with
system integrator. Seal vendors standard pressure
monitoring device(s) only acceptable if it meets
specification of the related pressure monitoring device.
Process Connections:
a.
Mounting: In-line or offline, as noted or shown.
b.
Pipe Size:
1)
In-line: As noted or shown.
2)
Offline: 2 inches, unless otherwise noted.
c.
Connections:
1)
In-line, Full-faced through-bolted: ASME B16.5, 150-pound
flanges.
2)
In-line, Wafer style: Compatible with Classes 150/300
flange drilling.
3)
Offline: Female NPT Threaded, unless otherwise noted.
Manufacturers and Products:
a.
Red Valve Company; Series 40, Series 42/742, Series 48.
b.
Dover/OPW Engineered Systems; Iso-Ring.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 24

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

O.

Y50 Programmable Logic Controller System:


1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

General:
a.
Function: Used for process monitoring and control by emulating
functions of conventional panel mounted equipment such as
relays, timers, counters, current switches, calculation modules,
PID controllers, stepping switches, and drum programmers.
b.
Type: Microprocessor based device programmable using ladder
logic.
c.
Parts: Central processing unit (CPU), power supply, local and
remote input/output modules, local and remote base (chassis/rack)
controllers, I/O bases (chassis/rack), data highway, and factory
assembled interconnecting cables. Provide components required to
make a complete and totally operational system. Reference PLC
system block diagram in Drawings.
Environmental:
a.
Temperature: Operating range 32 to 140 degrees F (0 to
60 degrees C); storage range minus 40 to 158 degrees F (0 to
70 degrees C).
b.
Humidity: Operating range 5 to 95 percent noncondensing.
c.
Vibration:
1)
Sinusoidal: IEC 68-2-6, Test Fc; 0.15 mm peak-to-peak,
10-to 57-Hz; 1 g, 57- to 150-Hz.
2)
Random: IEC 68-2-34, Test Fdc; 0.4 g2/Hz, 80- to 350-Hz,
and 3dB/octave rolloff, 80- to 20-Hz and 350- to 2-KHz at
10 min/axis.
d.
Noise: IEC 801, Part 3, Level 3 and Part 4, Level 3;
MIL STD-461B.
e.
Isolation: User-side to PLC side 1,500V rms.
Random Access Memory (RAM):
a.
Type: CMOS type.
b.
Word Size: 16 bits, minimum.
c.
Battery Backup: 6 months, minimum.
d.
Memory Size: Sufficient to implement all applications software
plus 100 percent spare.
e.
Read only memory (ROM) for controllers operating system and
diagnostics.
f.
Memory Protection: Keylock switch.
CPU: See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Power Supply: One unit for each input/output base assembly:
a.
Voltage: 120/220 volts (user selectable), 60-Hz input; 85 to
132 volts output.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 25

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

7.

b.
Mounting: Integral with base.
Input/Output: Complete input/output system, including remote I/O
points.
a.
Discrete Input Modules:
1)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
2)
Operating Power: 2 watts.
3)
Points per Module: 16, maximum.
4)
LED status indicator for each point.
5)
Isolation: Between input point and PLC, 1,500 volts rms.
6)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
b.
Discrete Output Modules:
1)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
2)
Operating Power: 2 watts.
3)
Load Rating: 2 amps continuous.
4)
Isolation: Between PLC and output point, 1,500 volts rms.
5)
Points per Module: 16 maximum.
6)
LED status indicator for each point.
7)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
c.
Isolated Discrete Output Modules:
1)
Type: Isolated Form C relay.
2)
Voltage: 120 volts, 60-Hz.
3)
Load Rating: 2 amps continuous.
4)
Operating Power: 2.5 watts.
5)
Points Per Module: 16, maximum.
6)
LED status indicator and fuse for each point.
7)
Isolation: Between PLC and output point, 1,500 volts rms.
8)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
d.
Analog Input/Output Modules:
1)
Voltage: 24 volts dc.
2)
Power: 3 watts.
3)
Isolated Analog Output Points Per Module: 8 maximum.
4)
Isolation: Between PLC and I/O point and between I/O
points, 1,500 volts rms.
5)
See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Remote Input/Output Bases: See PLC Equipment List supplement in
Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 26

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

9.

10.
11.
P.

Y51 Industrial Touchscreen PC:


1.

Q.

Redundancy Requirement:
a.
I/O:
1)
All discrete inputs in one group, discrete outputs in another
group.
2)
Wired to/from PLC I/O modules or racks to/from control
panel terminal blocks in all panels (direct connection of
field wiring to I/O module or rack is not acceptable.
Identification:
a.
Nameplates installed above/below each PLC component (CPU,
I/O rack, power supply.).
b.
Label configured I/O points as they have been configured
(addressed) in the system, as approved by the Engineer.
Spares: See PLC Equipment List supplement in Section 40 90 00,
Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Manufacturers and Products: Allen-Bradley; Model ControlLogix only.

General:
a.
Function: Provide Operator Control for equipment.
b.
Allowance: Because technology like this changes so rapidly
provide a $6,000 equipment allowance for each device. This
allowance does not include installation and other costs. Please
include additional costs in bid.
c.
Product manufacturer and model number will be provided to
contractor for purchasing during construction.
d.
Location: Shall be installed in doors of local control panels as
specified in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for
Process Systems, Supplement Control Panel Schedule.

UPS:
1.
2.

General:
a.
Function: provides uninterrupted power for local control panels
Features:
a.
1 grometted cable connection for 3C 10 AWG SO cord for input
power. Cord shall be 6 feet long with NEMA 5-20P.
b.
1 grometted cable connection for 3C 10 AWG SO cord for output
power. Cord shall be 6 feet long with NEMA 5-20R.
c.
Rating: 1800 VA.
d.
Input: 120 Vac.
e.
Output: 120 Vac.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 27

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

R.

UPS Bypass Switch:


1.

2.

3.
PART 3

Manufacturers and Products:


a.
Eaton/ FerrUPS; FE1.8.
b.
Or approved equal.

General:
a.
Function: Allows power for local control panel to bypass UPS
when providing periodic maintenance.
Features:
a.
3 position Bypass-UPS-OFF switch for bypassing UPS.
b.
2 position ON-OFF for turning AC power off to UPS.
c.
Provide 3 conductor #10 AWG SO cord from bypass switch to
UPS as required for UPS input power and UPS output power.
Manufacturers and Products: Powerware.

EXECUTION (NOT USED)


END OF SECTION

INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL COMPONENTS
40 91 00 - 28

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 40 99 90
PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.

4.
5.
1.02

1.03

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):


C62.41, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in LowVoltage AC Power Circuits.
International Society of Automation (ISA): S50.1, Compatibility of
Analog Signals for Electronic Process Instruments.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a.
250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b.
AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
c.
ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical
Code (NEC).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 508A, Standards for Safety,
Industrial Control Panels.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

Assemble panels and install instruments, plumbing, and wiring in equipment


manufacturers factories.

B.

Test panels and panel assemblies for proper operation prior to shipment from
equipment manufacturers factory.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

Bill of material, catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring


diagrams, and Shop Drawings for components of control system.
Catalog information on electrical devices furnished with system.
Shop Drawings, catalog material, and dimensional layout Drawings for
control panels and enclosures.
Panel elementary diagrams of prewired panels. Include in diagrams
control devices and auxiliary devices, for example, relays, alarms, fuses,
lights, fans, and heaters.
Plumbing diagrams of preplumbed panels and interconnecting plumbing
diagrams.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.
1.04

Prior to shipment, include corrosive-inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping


containers and related equipment as recommended by capsule manufacturer.

EXTRA MATERIALS
1.

PART 2
2.01

Programmable Controller Submittals:


a.
Complete set of user manuals.
b.
Fully documented ladder logic listings.
c.
Function listing for function blocks not fully documented by
ladder logic listings.
d.
Cross-reference listing.
Manufacturers list of proposed spares, expendables, and test
equipment.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

1.05

Interconnection wiring diagrams that include numbered terminal


designations showing external interfaces.

Fuse: 100 percent, 5 minimum, of each type used.

PRODUCTS
SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
A.

Analog Signals:
1.
2.
3.
4.

B.

Pulse Frequency Signals: dc pulses whose repetition rate is linearly


proportional to process variable over 10:1 range. Generate pulses by contact
closures or solid-state switches.
1.

C.

4 to 20 mA dc, in accordance with compatibility requirements of


ISA S50.1.
Unless otherwise specified or shown, use Type 2, two-wire circuits.
Transmitters: Load resistance capability conforming to Class L.
Fully isolate input and output signals of transmitters and receivers.

Power source: Less than 30V dc.

Discrete Signals:
1.
2.

Two-state logic signals.


Utilize 120V ac sources for control and alarm signals.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

2.02

CORROSION PROTECTION
A.

Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsule Manufacturers:


1.
2.

2.03

Alarm signals shall be normally open, close to alarm isolated contacts


rated for 5-ampere at 120V ac and 2-ampere at 30V dc.

Northern Instruments; Model Zerust VC.


Hoffmann Engineering; Model A-HCI.

CONTROL PANEL
A.

Panel Construction and Interior Wiring: In accordance with the National


Electrical Code (NEC), UL 508, state and local codes, and applicable sections
of NEMA, ANSI, and ICECA.

B.

Conform to NEMA ratings as specified in individual equipment sections.

C.

Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 gauge.

D.

NEMA 250, Type 4X Panels: Type 316 stainless steel construction unless
otherwise specified.

E.

Doors:
1.
2.

Three-point latching mechanisms in accordance with NEMA 250


Type 1 and 12 panels with doors higher than 18 inches.
For other doors, stainless steel quick release clamps.

F.

Cutouts shall be cut, punched, or drilled and finished smoothly with rounded
edges.

G.

Access: Front, suitable for installation with back and sides adjacent to or in
contact with other surfaces, unless otherwise specified.

H.

Temperature Control:
1.
2.
3.

I.

Size panels to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment


mounted on or in the panel.
Furnish cooling fans with air filters if required to dissipate heat.
For panels outdoors or in unheated areas, furnish thermostatically
controlled heaters to maintain temperature above 40 degrees F.

Push-to-Test Circuitry: For each push-to-test indicating light, provide a fused


push-to-test circuit.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

J.

Lighting: Minimum of one hand switch controlled internal 100-watt


incandescent light for panels 12 cubic feet and larger.

K.

Minimum of one 120-volt GFCI duplex receptacle for panels 12 cubic feet
and larger.

L.

Finish:
1.
2.

M.

Panel Manufacturers:
1.
2.

N.

Hoffman.
H.F. Cox.

Breather and Drains: Furnish with NEMA 250, Type 4 and 4X panels.
1.

2.04

Metallic External Surfaces (Excluding Aluminum and Stainless Steel):


Manufacturers standard gray unless otherwise specified.
Internal Surfaces: White enamel.

Manufacturer and Product: Cooper Crouse-Hinds; ECD Type 4X Drain


and Breather; Drain Model ECD1-N4D, Breather Model ECD1-N4B.

CONTROL PANEL ELECTRICAL


A.

UL Listing Mark for Enclosures: Mark stating Listed Enclosed Industrial


Control Panel per UL 508A.

B.

I&C and electrical components, terminals, wires, and enclosures UL


recognized or UL listed.

C.

Control Panels without Motor Starters:


1.
2.
3.

Furnish main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on each individual


branch circuit distributed from power panel.
Locate to provide clear view of and access to breakers when door is
open. Group on single subpanel. Provide typed directory.
Circuit Breakers:
a.
Coordinate for fault in branch circuit trips, branch breaker, and
not main breaker.
b.
Branch Circuit Breakers: 15 amps at 250V ac.
c.
Breaker Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Heineman Electric Co.; Series AM.
2)
Airpax/North American Philips Controls Corp.; Series 205.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Control Panels with Three-Phase Power Supplies and Motor Starters:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

Interlock main circuit breaker with panel door.


a.
Mount logic controls, branch circuit breakers, overload reset
switches, and other control circuit devices.
b.
Mount operator controls and indications on front access door.
Circuit Breakers:
a.
In accordance with NEMA AB 1.
b.
18,000-ampere RMS symmetrical rating, minimum at 480 volts,
unless otherwise specified.
c.
Breakers, except Motor Branch Breakers: Molded case thermal
magnetic.
d.
65,000-ampere RMS symmetrical rating, minimum at 480 volts,
unless otherwise specified in package system equipment
specification sections.
e.
Tripping: Indicate with operator handle position.
Magnetic Motor Starters:
a.
Full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, Class A, Size O minimum.
b.
Include three-pole bimetallic or eutectic alloy thermal overload
relays sized for each motor.
c.
Manual reset type with reset button mounted on panel door.
Motor Control: 120V ac (except intrinsically safe circuits where
applicable).
a.
Power Control Transformer:
1)
Sufficient capacity to serve connected load, including
200VA for duplex outlet plus 100VA (minimum).
2)
Limit voltage variation to 15 percent during contact pickup.
3)
Fuse one side of secondary winding and ground the other.
4)
Furnish primary winding fuses in ungrounded conductors.
Power Monitoring Relay:
a.
Protect three-phase equipment from single phasing, phase
imbalance, or phase reversal.
b.
Separate, isolated contact outputs to stop motors and activate
alarm light during abnormal conditions.
c.
Transient Voltage Protection: 10,000 volts.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Furnas; Class 47.
Power Distribution Blocks: Furnish to parallel feed tap on branch circuit
protective devices. Do not leap frog power conductors.
Terminations for Power Conductors: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C
wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Wiring:
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

F.

Wiring Interface:
1.
2.
3.

G.

ac Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: For current to be carried, but not less than 14 AWG.
Analog Signal Circuits:
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type 3 stranded copper, twisted shielded pairs.
b.
Size: 18 AWG, minimum.
Other dc Circuits.
a.
Type: 600-volt, Type MTW stranded copper.
b.
Size: 18 AWG, minimum.
Separate analog and other dc circuits by at least 6 inches from ac power
and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points and at
device terminations.
Enclose wiring in sheet metal raceways or plastic wiring ducts.
Wire Identification: Numbered and tagged at each termination.
a.
Wire Tags: Machine printed, heat shrink.
b.
Manufacturers:
1)
Brady PermaSleeve.
2)
Tyco Electronics.

For analog and discrete signal, terminate at numbered terminal blocks.


For special signals, terminate power (240 volts or greater) at
manufacturers standard connectors.
For panel, terminate at equipment on/with which it is mounted.

Terminal Blocks:
1.

2.

Quantity:
a.
For external connections.
b.
Wire spare or unused panel mounted elements to their panels
terminal blocks.
c.
Spare Terminals: 20 percent of connected terminals, but not less
than 10.
General: Group to keep 120V ac circuits separate from 24V dc circuits.
a.
Connection Type: Screw connection clamp.
b.
Compression Clamp:
1)
Hardened steel clamp with transversal grooves penetrating
wire strands providing a vibration-proof connection.
2)
Guides strands of wire into terminal.
c.
Screws: Hardened steel, captive, and self-locking.
d.
Current Bar: Copper or treated brass.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Insulation:
1)
Thermoplastic rated for minus 55 to plus 110 degrees C.
2)
Two funnel shaped inputs to facilitate wire entry.
f.
Mounting:
1)
Rail.
2)
Terminal block can be extracted from an assembly without
displacing adjacent blocks.
3)
End Stops: One at each end of rail, minimum.
g.
Wire Preparation: Stripping only.
h.
Jumpers: Allow jumper installation without loss of space on
terminal or rail.
i.
Marking System:
1)
Terminal number shown on both sides of terminal block.
2)
Allow use of preprinted and field marked tags.
3)
Terminal strip numbers shown on end stops.
4)
Mark terminal block and terminal strip numbers as shown.
Terminal Block, 120-Volt Power:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 30 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 through 10 AWG.
d.
Rated Wire Size: 10 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
g.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.
Terminal Block, Ground:
a.
Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG.
b.
Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
c.
Color: Green and yellow body.
d.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
e.
Grounding: Ground terminal blocks electrically grounded to the
mounting rail.
f.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.P.
Terminal Block, Blade Disconnect Switch:
a.
Use: Provide one for each discrete input and output field interface
wire.
b.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
c.
Rated Current: 10 amp.
d.
Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG.
e.
Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
f.
Color: Gray body, orange switch.
g.
Spacing: 0.25 inch, maximum.
h.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SN.
Terminal Block, Fused, 24V dc:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V dc.
b.
Rated Current: 6.3 amp.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

7.

Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG.


Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
Color: Gray body.
Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses.
Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal
block.
h.
Indication: LED diode 24V dc.
i.
Leakage Current: 5.2 mA, maximum.
j.
Spacing: 0.32 inch, maximum.
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SFD.
Terminal Block, Fused, 120V ac:
a.
Rated Voltage: 600V ac.
b.
Rated Current: 6.3 amp.
c.
Wire Size: 22 through 12 AWG
d.
Rated Wire Size: 12 AWG.
e.
Color: Gray body.
f.
Fuse: 5 by 20 GMA fuses.
g.
Fuse Marking: Fuse amperage rating shown on top of terminal
block.
h.
Indication: Neon lamp 110V ac.
i.
Leakage Current: 1.8 mA, maximum.
j.
Spacing: 0.32 inch, maximum
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Entrelec; Type M4/6.SFL.

H.

Grounding: Internal copper grounding bus for ground connections on panels,


consoles, racks, and cabinets.

I.

Relays:
1.

2.

General:
a.
Relay Mounting: Plug-in type socket.
b.
Relay Enclosure: Provide dust cover.
c.
Socket Type: Screw terminal interface with wiring.
d.
Socket Mounting: Rail.
e.
Furnish holddown clips.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Nonlatching:
a.
Type: Compact general purpose plug-in.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 3 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 1.8 watts (dc), 2.7VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 10,000,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 100,000 operations.
i.
Indication Type: Neon or LED indicator lamp.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

J.

Intrinsic Safety Barriers:


1.

2.

K.

j.
Push-to-test button.
k.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KUP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Latching:
a.
Type: Dual coil mechanical latching relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 28V dc or 120V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As noted or shown.
f.
Coil Power: 2.7 watts (dc), 5.3VA (ac).
g.
Expected Mechanical Life: 500,000 operations.
h.
Expected Electrical Life at Rated Load: 50,000 operations.
i.
Manufacturer and Product: Potter and Brumfield; Series KB/KBP.
Control Circuit Switching Relay, Time Delay:
a.
Type: Adjustable time delay relay.
b.
Contact Arrangement: 2 Form C contacts.
c.
Contact Rating: 10A at 240V ac.
d.
Contact Material: Silver cadmium oxide alloy.
e.
Coil Voltage: As specified or shown.
f.
Operating Temperature: Minus 10 to 55 degrees C.
g.
Repeatability: Plus or minus 2 percent.
h.
Delay Time Range: Select range such that time delay setpoint fall
between 20 to 80 percent or range.
i.
Time Delay Setpoint: As specified or shown.
j.
Mode of Operation: As specified or shown.
k.
Adjustment Type: Integral potentiometer with knob external to
dust cover.
l.
Manufacturer and Products: Potter and Brumfield.
1)
Series CB for 0.1-second to 100-minute delay time ranges.
2)
Series CK for 0.1- to 120-second delay time ranges.

Intrinsically Safe Relays: Monitor discrete signals that originate in


hazardous area and are used in a safe area.
a.
Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.
Intrinsically Safe Barriers: Interface analog signals as they pass from
hazardous area to safe area.
a.
Manufacturer and Product: MTL, Inc.; Series MTL 5000.

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):


1.

Solid state units capable of performing same function as conventional


relays, timers, counters, drum sequencers, arithmetic, and other special
functions necessary to perform required control functions.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
7.
L.

Minimum of 12 discrete inputs and 8 discrete outputs, optical isolations


rated at 2,500-volt rms. Discrete inputs shall be 120V ac. Discrete
outputs shall be rated for 2 amps at 120V ac. Each input and output shall
have an LED ON/OFF status indicator.
Minimum of 25 percent excess capacity for inputs, outputs, internal
coils, registers, and other necessary functions.
Capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment (for example,
heat, electrical transients, RFI, and vibration) without fans, air
conditioning, or electrical filtering. Units operate from 0 to 60 degrees C
and up to 95 percent humidity, noncondensing.
Furnish with a handheld, CRT, or personal computer programmer that
plugs into controller. Program using conventional relay ladder diagram
notation. Programmer shall provide a force function to set inputs or
outputs to a given state regardless of program or input conditions.
Programmer shall indicate power flow through internal elements.
Communication: Ethernet
Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley, (no or-equal).

Front-of-Panel Devices in Conjunction with NEMA 250, Type 1 and 12


Panels:
1.

2.

3.

Potentiometer Units:
a.
Three-terminal, oiltight construction, resolution of 1 percent and
linearity of plus or minus 5 percent.
b.
Single-hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses
between 1/8 and 1/4 inch.
c.
Include legend plates with service markings.
d.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Allen-Bradley; Model 800T.
2)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Model 10250T.
Indicating Lights:
a.
Heavy-duty, push-to-test type, oiltight, industrial LED type for
120V ac applications.
b.
Screwed on prismatic glass lenses in colors noted and factory
engraved legend plates for service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T.
2)
General Electric; CR2940U.
Pushbutton, Momentary:
a.
Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with full guard and
momentary contacts rated for 10 amperes continuous at 120V ac.
b.
Standard size legend plates with black field and white markings
for service legend.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

4.

M.

Manufacturers and Products:


1)
Square D; Class 9001, Type K.
2)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type T.
3)
General Electric; Type CR-2940.
Selector Switch:
a.
Heavy-duty, oiltight, industrial type with contacts rated for
120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous.
b.
Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for
service legend.
c.
Operators: Black knob type.
d.
Single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from
1/16 inch to 1/4 inch.
e.
Manufacturers and Products for Units with up to Four Selection
Positions:
1)
Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type T.
2)
Square D; Type K.
f.
Manufacturers and Products for Units with up to 12 Selection
Positions:
1)
Rundel-Idec; Standard Cam Switch.
2)
Electroswitch; 31.

Front-of-Panel Devices Used in Conjunction with NEMA 250, Type 4X


Panels:
1.

2.

3.

Potentiometer, Watertight:
a.
Three-terminal, heavy-duty NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight
construction, resolution of 1 percent and linearity of plus or minus
5 percent.
b.
Single-hole, panel mounting accommodating panel thicknesses
between 1/8 and 1/4 inch.
c.
Include engraved legend plates with service markings.
d.
Manufacturer and Product: Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 800H.
Indicating Lights, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, push-to-test type, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight,
industrial LED type for 120V ac applications and corrosionresistant service.
b.
Screwed on prismatic lenses and factory engraved legend plates
for service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Square D; Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.
Pushbutton, Momentary, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight, industrial type with
momentary contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes
continuous and corrosion-resistant service.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

4.

2.05

INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERS


A.

2.06

Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings for
service legend.
c.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
Square D; Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.
Selector Switch, Watertight:
a.
Heavy-duty, NEMA 250, Type 4X watertight, industrial type with
contacts rated for 120V ac service at 10 amperes continuous and
corrosion-resistant service.
b.
Standard size, black field, legend plates with white markings, for
service legend.
c.
Operators: Black knob type.
d.
Single-hole mounting, accommodating panel thicknesses from
1/16 to 1/4 inch.
e.
Manufacturer and Products:
1)
Square D; Class 9001, Type SK.
2)
Allen-Bradley; Type 800H.

See Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.

NAMEPLATES, NAMETAGS, AND SERVICE LEGENDS


A.

Nametags: Permanently mounted bearing entire ISA tag number.


1.
2.

B.

Service Legends (Integrally Mounted with Instrument) and Nameplates:


1.

2.
3.
4.

C.

Panel Mounted: Plastic, mounted to instrument behind panel face.


Field Mounted: Engraved Type 316 stainless steel, 22-gauge minimum
thickness, attached with stainless steel.

Engraved, rigid, laminated plastic type with adhesive back. Furnish


service legends and nameplates to adequately describe functions of
panel face mounted instruments.
Color: White with black letters.
Letter Height: 3/16 inch.
For each panel, face mounted laminated nameplate inscribed with the
panel name and tag number. Color shall be white with black letters
1/2 inch high.

Standard Light Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise specified in


individual equipment specifications, use the following color code and
inscriptions:

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.
2.

Tag

Inscription(s)

Color

ON

ON

Red

OFF

OFF

Green

OPEN

OPEN

Red

CLOSED

CLOSED

Green

LOW

LOW

Amber

FAIL

FAIL

Amber

HIGH

HIGH

Amber

AUTO

AUTO

White

MANUAL

MANUAL

Yellow

LOCAL

LOCAL

White

REMOTE

REMOTE

Yellow

FORWARD

FORWARD

Red

REVERSE

REVERSE

Blue

Lettering: Black on white and amber lenses; white on red and green
lenses.
Standard Pushbutton Colors and Inscriptions:
a.
Use following unless otherwise noted.
Tag Function

Inscription(s)

Color

OO

ON
OFF

Black
Black

OC

OPEN
CLOSE

Black
Black

OCA

OPEN
CLOSE
AUTO

Black
Black
Black

OOA

ON
OFF
AUTO

Black
Black
Black

MA

MANUAL
AUTO

Black
Black

SS

START
STOP

Black
Black

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.

2.07

Tag Function

Inscription(s)

Color

RESET

RESET

Black

EMERGENCY
STOP

EMERGENCY
STOP

Red

Lettering Color:
1)
Black on white and yellow buttons.
2)
White on black, red, and green buttons.

ELECTRICAL SURGE AND TRANSIENT PROTECTION


A.

Equip control panels with surge-arresting devices to protect equipment from


damage as a result of electrical transients induced in interconnecting lines
from lightning discharges and nearby electrical devices.

B.

Suppressor Locations:
1.

2.
3.

C.

Suppressor Design:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
D.

At point of connection between an equipment item, including ac


powered transmitters, and power supply conductor (direct-wired
equipment).
On analog pairs at each end when the pair travels outside of building.
In other locations where equipment sensitivity to surges and transients
requires additional protection beyond that inherent to design of
equipment.

Construction: First-stage, high-energy metal oxide varistor and secondstage, bipolar silicon avalanche device separated by series impedance;
includes grounding wire, stud, or terminal.
Response: 5 nanoseconds maximum.
Recovery: Automatic.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees C to plus 85 degrees C.
Enclosure Mounted: Encapsulated inflame retardant epoxy.

Suppressors on 120V ac Power Supply Connections:


1.
2.
3.
4.

Occurrences: Tested and rated for a minimum of 50 occurrences of


IEEE C62.41 Category B test waveform.
First-Stage Clamping Voltage: 350 volts or less.
Second-Stage Clamping Voltage: 210 volts or less.
Power Supplies for Continuous Operation:
a.
Four-Wire Transmitter or Receiver: Minimum 5 amps at 130V ac.
b.
All Other Applications: Minimum 30 amps at 130V ac.

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Suppressors on Analog Signal Lines:


1.

2.

F.

Manufacturers and Products:


1.
2.
3.

G.

2.

3.01

Analog Signals Lines: Emerson Edco PC-642 or SRA-64 series.


120V ac Lines: Emerson Edco HSP-121.
480-Volt, Three-Phase Power Supplies: Square D Model SDSA3650.

Grounding:
1.

PART 3

Test Waveform: Linear 8-microsecond rise in current from 0 amp to a


peak current value followed by an exponential decay of current reaching
one-half the peak value in 20 microseconds.
Surge Rating: Tested and rated for 50 occurrences of 2,000-amp peak
test waveform.
a.
dc Clamping Voltage: 20 percent to 40 percent above operating
voltage for circuit.
b.
dc Clamping Voltage Tolerance: Plus or minus 10 percent.
c.
Maximum Loop Resistance: 18 ohms per conductor.

Coordinate surge suppressor grounding in field panels and field


instrumentation as specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems, and suppressor manufacturers
requirements.
Provide control panels with an integral copper grounding bus for
connection of suppressors and other required instrumentation.

EXECUTION
ELECTRICAL POWER AND SIGNAL WIRING
A.

Restrain control and signal wiring in control panels by plastic ties or ducts.
Secure hinge wiring at each end so bending or twisting will occur around the
longitudinal axis of wire. Protect bend area with a sleeve.

B.

Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Install
abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across edges of
sheet metal.

C.

Use manufacturers recommended tool with sized anvil for crimp


terminations. No more than one wire may be terminated in a single crimp lug.
No more than two lugs may be installed on a single screw terminal.

D.

Do not splice or tap wiring except at device terminals or terminal blocks.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

PROTECTION
A.

Protect enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation


and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of
corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules.

B.

During Work, periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule


manufacturers recommendations. Replace capsules at Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION

PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS


40 99 90 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 41 22 13.19
MONORAIL HOIST AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.

Trolley: ANSI MH27.1.

B.

Stress and Safety Factors: ANSI MH27.1 and ANSI B30.11. Properly select
materials of construction for stresses to which subjected.

C.

Safety of Operation, Accessibility, Interchangeability, and Durability of Parts:


ANSI B30.11 and OSHA requirements.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Shop Drawings:
1.
2.

3.
B.

Information Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.03

Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly.


Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of
construction, and specifications on jib crane, trolley, floor crane, and
accessories.
Factory finish system.

Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.


Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Temperature:
1.
2.

B.

Maximum: 110 degrees F.


Minimum: -10 degrees F.

Humidity: 50 percent.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Location:
1.
2.

1.04

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

PART 2
2.01

Jib Crane and Trolley: Indoors.


Equipment Lift: Indoors in unheated building.

See Division 01, General Requirements, which contains information and


requirements that apply to the Work specified herein and are mandatory for
this Project.
PRODUCTS

GANTRY CRANE
A.

General: Provide a fixed height mobile aluminum gantry crane suitable for a
minimum one ton load. Gantry crane shall be provided with a top support
trolley. Crane manufacturer to coordinate equipment requirements with other
utilities and obstructions. Crane and complete crane assembly shall be
warranted by the manufacture for 5 years.

B.

Frame:
1.
2.

Frame shall be suitable for a one (1) ton/2000 lbs load. The inside clear
dimension of the crane shall be 10 feet wide by 10 feet tall.
Frame to be constructed of all aluminum with all bolted or welded
structural aluminum frame. Frame shall be either structural aluminum
tube or I-beam.

C.

Casters: Casters shall be suitable for easily rolling and turning on a concrete
floor. Each wheel shall be provided with a wheel brake to prevent unexpected
movement. Wheels shall be steel with mold on polyurethane protectors.

D.

Chain Fall Hoist:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

E.

Manual chain fall hoist rated for (1) ton/2000 lbs load.
Lift shall be 10 feet.
Hoist shall incorporate a mechanical brake to hold load in place.
Chain shall be heat treated and rated for lifted load.
Provide lift hook to attach to trolley with retaining clip to hold hoist
securely to trolley.
Provide an oversized lift hook with a retaining clip.

Trolley:
1.

Trolley shall be a top running trolley designed to match the load.

MONORAIL HOIST AND


LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

F.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Frame: Welded steel, cast steel, or ductile iron construction, or a


combination thereof. Design to control deflection of trolley assembly
while transmitting the carrying load to rails.
Wheels: Rolled or forged steel, accurately machined and ground to
receive inner bearing races. Furnish alloy steel axles. Rotating axles
with wheels mounted press fit and keys, or with keys alone. Minimum
tread hardness 210 Brinell.
Bearings: Combination radial and thrust type, double row, angular
contact ball bearings or single-row tapered roller bearings. Bearings
pre-lubricated and sealed, or fitted for pressure lubrication. Locate
pressure lubrication fittings for accessibility during maintenance.

Spanco Model 1ALU1010B.


Gorbel Model ALUG-20009/12/12.
Or equal.

MONORAIL CRANE
A.

General:
1.

2.

Provide a complete trolley suitable for use on the bottom flange of a


beam. Trolley shall be electrically driven along the length of the beam
and shall be remote controlled.
Trolley shall be as follows:
a.
Capacity: 5 Tons/10,000 lbs.
b.
Lift Height: 48 feet.
c.
Method of Control: Radio Remote FM Frequency.
d.
Hoist Speed: Constant 12FPM.
e.
Trolley Speed: Constant.
f.
Trolley Type: Under-hung.
g.
Service Class: H3.
h.
Location: Indoors.
i.
Hoist Lifting System: Electric Wire Rope.
j.
Voltage: 460/3.
k.
Trolley HP: 1/2 HP.
l.
Hoist HP: 5 HP.
m. Electrical Connection: Bus Bar.
n.
Beam Used by Trolley: S18-54.7 with 6 inch Bottom Flange.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Trolley:
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

C.

Hoist:
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

D.

Frame: Welded steel, cast steel, or ductile iron construction, or a


combination thereof. Design to control deflection of trolley assembly
while transmitting the carrying load to bridge rails.
Drive shall consist of trolley drive shaft, driven by an electric motor
through a gear reduction unit.
Wheels: Rolled or forged steel accurately machined and ground to
receive inner bearing races. Furnish alloy steel axles. Rotating axles
with wheels mounted press fit and keys, or with keys alone. Minimum
tread hardness 210 Brinell.
Drive Gears: Helical, spur or herringbone type, rolled or cast steel, with
machine cut teeth.
Bearings: Combination radial and thrust type, double row, angular
contact ball bearings or single-row tapered roller bearings. Bearings
pre-lubricated and sealed, or fitted for pressure lubrication. Locate
pressure lubrication fittings for accessibility during maintenance.

Hoisting machinery shall consist of rope drum driven through gear


reductions, load blocks, hook, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking.
Drum size and length sufficient for minimum two turns of cable
remaining on drum when hook is at lowest position.
Rope drum and surrounding members constructed to minimize abrasion,
crushing or jamming of hoist rope. Load blocks enclosed type. Hoisting
rope extra flexible, improved plow steel wire rope, made especially for
hoist service.
Hook: Construct with sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook
failure, equipped with safety latch, free to rotate 360 degrees with rated
load and positively held in place with locknuts, collars or other devices.
Brakes: Mechanical and electric load brake and controls, designed in
accordance with ASME 4M, and adjustable to compensate for wear.
Brakes: In accordance with ASME HST 1M and HST 2M, adjustable to
compensate for wear, electric release load brake system, which releases
load when drive motor is energized and holds load when the drive motor
is de-energized. Provide a Weston type mechanical load brake, with
uniform composition lining and forged steel alloy latch pawl. Brake
shall be rated for a minimum of 150 percent of full motor torque.

Electrical:
1.

Furnish electrical equipment including motors, motor starters, pendant


control, control systems, wire, and conduit. Bridge conductors may be
removed for shipment. Crane wiring by crane supplier.

MONORAIL HOIST AND


LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.
E.

Controls:
1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

6.
F.

Electrical: In accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 610.


Furnish motors compatible with adjustable frequency, variable speed,
drive system, 40 to 1 speed range, suitable for hoist, trolley, and bridge
drive applications. Controls with 120-volt ac, microprocessor based,
pulsed width modulation design, withstand 45 degree C temperatures,
housed in NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosure, and supplied with 200 percent
overcurrent protection.
Bridge and trolley conductor voltage drops from runway supply taps
shall permit the crane motors to operate within voltage tolerances of
plus or minus 10 percent, when building supply voltage is at plus or
minus 5 percent of design voltage.
Festooned Flat Cable Conductors: Flexible cable, carried by heavy-duty
roller, permanently lubricated roller bearings, with monorail support
system that will dispense and retrieve flexible cable without twisting or
tangling, and 20 percent spare conductor in each cable assembly.
Grounding: External in accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 250.

Furnish electric cranes with FM radio controlled momentary contact


pushbuttons with a device which will disconnect motors from line on
failure of power. Device shall not permit any motor to be restarted until
controller handle is brought to the OFF position, or a reset switch or
button is operated. Furnish with undervoltage protection as a function of
each motor controller, or by magnetic main line contactor.
Controls: Fully magnetic, plain reversing type, housed in NEMA 250,
Type 12 enclosure, with contactors of sufficient size and quantity for
starting, accelerating, reversing, and stopping duty for specified crane
service class.
Control System: Heavy Duty Radio Control FM style remote controlled
and capable of operating all crane functions.
Control motions indicate direction of resultant crane motion. Furnish
spring-loaded switch motions, with return to OFF position when switch
is released and designed to prevent runaway crane situations.
Crane motions shall stop automatically when crane can no longer
receive remote signals and designed to stop when control signal for any
motion becomes ineffective.
Remote Control Crane Motions: Hook raise and lower.

Manufacturers:
1.
2.

Wright Speedway Acco Series 31.


Or equal.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

MONORAILHOIST AND
LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Provide lubrication and lubrication fittings.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on Monorail Crane.


1.

B.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment and


connection, and quiet operation.

Performance Test:
1.
2.

Load tests in compliance with OSHA, ANSI B30.11, and


ANSI MH27.1
Contractor to provide portable hoist for test.
END OF SECTION

MONORAIL HOIST AND


LIFTING EQUIPMENT
41 22 13.19 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 43 22 56
VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
WAS Phosphate Release Basin Mixers: WSR-MIX-P-64021, WSR-MIX-P-64022,
WSR-MIX-P-64023, WSR-MIX-P-64024.
Aeration Basins Anaerobic Mixers: AER-MIX-P- 30815A, AER-MIX-P-30815B, AERMIX-P-30816A, and AER-MIX-P-30816B
(Total Quantity: 8)
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.

The Work of this section includes providing the vertical mixers and all
appurtenant Work.

B.

Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the WAS phosphate release basin
mixers and the aeration basins anaerobic mixers, complete with all accessories
and appurtenances (including, but not necessarily limited to, electric motors,
and components), be the end product of one responsible system manufacturer
or responsible system supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor
shall obtain each system from the responsible supplier of the equipment,
which supplier shall furnish all components and accessories of the system to
enhance compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to
place the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified
performance, features and functions without altering or modifying the
Contractors responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible to the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified
herein.

C.

General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which


contains information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

Anti-Friction Bearing Manufactures Association (AFBMA).


American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.
1.03

a.
B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
b.
B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
c.
B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70, National
Electrical Code.

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Administrative, Shop Drawings, Samples, quality control, and


contract close-out submittals shall conform to the requirements of
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

B.

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures,


submit the following additional detailed Shop Drawing information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

C.

Drawings showing complete dimensional data.


Complete literature on the mechanical mixers.
Calculations verifying that provided mixer meets mixing criteria for the
application.
See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for motor
submittal requirements.
Manufacturer shall verify in writing that the mixer model number and
impeller type are correct for the application intended.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.

Factory Functional Test Reports.


Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that the factory finish
system is identical to the requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for
checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.
List of special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment
for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.
1.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Two complete sets of special tools required for mixer disassembly.

B.

Tools: Special tools recommended by the manufacturer for maintenance and


repair tools shall be stored in tool boxes, and identified with the equipment
number by means of stainless steel or solid plastic name tags attached to the
box.

C.

Spare Parts:
1.
2.

3.
1.05

All equipment shall be furnished with the specified manufacturers spare


parts.
Spare parts shall be tagged by the first six characters of the equipment
number (AER-MIX) and identified as to part number, equipment
manufacturer, and subassembly component (if appropriate). Spare parts
subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical
components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and
encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. Spare parts with
individual weights less than 50 pounds and dimensions less than 2 feet
wide, or 18 inches high, or 3 feet in length shall be stored in a wooden
box with hinged wooden cover and locking hasp. Hinges shall be strap
type. The box shall be painted and identified with stenciled lettering
stating the name of the equipment, equipment numbers, and the words
spare parts. A neatly typed inventory of spare parts shall be taped to
the underside of the cover.
Provide the following spare parts: Two complete set of gear reducer
bearings and seals for each group of identical mixers.

WARRANTY
A.

PART 2
2.01

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Provide as specified in the General Conditions. Warranty shall be valid for


10 years, beginning on the substantial completion date.
PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Where a manufacturers standard equipment name and/or model number is


listed, the equipment system shall be provided as modified to conform to the
performance, functions, features, and materials of construction as specified
herein.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Materials, equipment, components and accessories specified in this section


shall be products of:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Anco Mixers Enviropax, Inc.; Salt Lake City, UT.


Philadelphia Mixers, Palmyra, PA.
Mixing Equipment Co., Lightnin Mixers, Rochester, NY.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Wetted parts are defined as
any parts extending below the mixer support bridge.

B.

Noise Level: When in operation, no piece of equipment shall exceed 85 dBA


at 3 feet from any part of the drive assembly per AGMA 299.01.

C.

Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.

D.

Safety Devices: The completed work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.

E.

Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment shall comply with


ANSI B16.1, Class 125; or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated.
Threaded flanges and fittings shall have standard taper pipe threads complying
with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

F.

Bearings:
1.
2.
3.

G.

Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing


Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).
All drive bearings shall be of the antifriction type, ball or roller bearings.
The output shaft shall be supported by tapered roller bearings.
Except where otherwise indicated, bearings of process equipment shall
have minimum AFBMA B-10 lives of 100,000 hours when operating at
full motor nameplate horsepower at design speed.

Gears and Gear Drives:


1.

Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 3, a minimum L-10 bearing

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
4.

5.
6.

2.03

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.04

See supplements to this section for additional equipment system product,


component or accessory information.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.

2.05

life of 100,000 hours based on full motor nameplate horsepower and a


minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Worm gears shall not be used.
Gear speed reducers or increasers shall be of the enclosed type, oil- or
grease-lubricated and fully sealed, with a breather to allow air to escape
but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy-duty
steel construction with lifting lugs and an inspection cover for each gear
train. An oil level sight glass, oil flow indicator, and oil drain shall be
provided and installed for easy access.
Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped
fully assembled for field installation.
Material selections shall comply with AGMA values and the
manufacturers recommendations. Input and output shafts shall be
properly designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be
computer-matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shall
have two positive seals to prevent oil leakage.
Where gear drive input to output shafts connect to couplings or
sprockets, the gear drive manufacturer shall supply matching key.
The mixer drive consisting of a speed reducer and motor shall be factory
mounted to a common open type extended pedestal base that provides
access to the low speed impeller shaft coupling above the mounting
platform. The base shall be made of ASTM A36 carbon steel. Pedestal
mounting shall be identical to the standard mixer baseplate mounting.
Pedestal shall be factory coated the same as the mixer.

Mixer shall be designed for the service conditions specified on the Mixer Data
Sheets.

EQUIPMENT AND/OR MATERIALS


A.

Shafts:
1.

The shaft shall be connected from the reducer drive by a rigid flanged
coupling with a machined registered fit. The coupling and impeller
hub(s) shall be designed to transmit 150 percent of the torque and
150 percent of the axial loads. The coupling shall be welded to the shaft,
turned to a large smooth radius and faced with a registered fit so any
shaft, turbine, drive of the same size can be interchanged. Match marks

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

B.

Impellers:
1.

2.

3.
4.

2.06

Impellers shall have one axial flow impeller. The impellers shall be
sized and designed for operation at a maximum speed of 25 rpm and
shall not require dynamic balancing. In addition, the impellers shall be
designed as necessary to suspend solids to a uniform concentration
without stratification at all conditions listed on the Mixer Data Sheets.
Mixing impellers shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel and
have a minimum diameter of 80 inches. Unless otherwise specified, the
impellers shall be of bolted construction, and shall be connected to the
agitator shaft with a hook key for maximum security. A keyway shall be
provided to allow for vertical adjustment of impeller.
The maximum stress in any impeller component shall not exceed
11,000 psi under maximum operating loads.
The shaft-impeller system design shall be such that its operating speed
shall not exceed 40 percent of its first lateral critical speed. The use of
stabilizing rings or fins will not influence this limitation. The shaft shall
be safe for operation when the liquid level passes through the impeller
while the mixer is running.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES


A.

2.07

shall not be used or required and shimming and/or fitting will not be
allowed. Shaft shall rotate with a maximum run out of 1/8 inch per
10 feet of length.
All exposed rotating mixer shafts and rotating components shall be
provided with a totally enclosed expanded stainless steel safety guard in
conformance with OSHA requirements. Banded access openings with
screwed covers shall be provided where required for access to
lubrication fittings.
The shaft shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches in diameter and designed
such that the maximum stress shall not exceed 8,000 psi under
maximum operating loads. It shall be of overhung design. The use of
submerged bearings is not permitted.

Motors: Provide as indicated on mixer data sheets at the end of this section.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Stainless steel anchor bolts and nuts. Number and size as recommended by
manufacturer.

B.

Provide lifting lugs on equipment over 100 pounds.

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

2.08

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.09

PART 3

3.02

3.03

Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 4.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.01

Nameplates: Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or


stamped and fastened to the equipment in accessible locations with stainless
steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturers name,
model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the
machine performance ratings.

Factory and shop inspections and tests. One mixer shall be functionally wet
tested for a period of 4 hours at the factory for vibration and maximum shaft
runout. Provide Engineer with certified test results.
EXECUTION

ASSEMBLY AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT


A.

Each drive unit, including motor, shall be completely factory assembled,


aligned, and securely crated for shipment. Accessory equipment which cannot
be shipped assembled to the unit, such as shafts, baseplates, impellers, spare
parts, and anchorage materials, shall be separately crated, clearly marked as to
the contents, and shipped on the same shipment as the drives.

B.

For shipment, exposed surfaces subject to rust, such as mounting flange faces,
etc., shall be covered with a rust-preventive compound such as Kendall No. 5,
or equal.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install per manufacturers recommendations.

B.

Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Prior to acceptance of each mixer installation, each unit


shall be run to demonstrate its ability to operate without overloading,
jamming, excessive shaft runout, or excessive vibration.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Installation, Startup, and Testing Services:


1.

2.
3.
B.

Training Services:
1.
2.

3.05

Provide training of Owners personnel in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Provide 1 person-day of post-startup training, which shall be provided in
one session within a 24-hour period to accommodate personnel working
different shifts.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.06

Provide complete manufacturers installation, startup, and testing


services in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field
Services.
Provide Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Provide Qualifications of Manufacturers Representative.

Solvent clean (SP 1-82) and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating, System No. 4. Finish coat color shall be coordinated
with Owner.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
2.

Aeration Basins No. 5 and No. 6 Anaerobic Zone 2 Mixer Data Sheet.
WAS Phosphate Release Tank Mixers Data Sheet.
END OF SECTION

VERTICAL BRIDGE-MOUNTED MIXERS


43 22 56 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SECTION 43 22 56.01 MIXER DATA SHEET
Project: West Boise WWTP
Owner: Boise, ID
Equipment Name: Aeration Basin 5, 6; Anoxic Zone 2 Mixers
AER-MIX-P-30815A, AER-MIX-P-30815B, AER-MIX-P-30816A, and
Equipment Tag Number(s):
AER-MIX-P-30816B

MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER

EQUIPMENT NAME
Anoxic Zone 2 Mixer Basin 5 and
Anoxic Zone 2 Mixer Basin 6

4 Total

SPEED TYPE
Constant Speed

EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

MODEL

Enviropax, Inc.
Or equal

Anco

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Aeration Basin Mixed Liquor

2,500 to 4,500 mg/L


50 to 75 degrees F
16 ft x 26 ft x 18.62 ft
2567.0 to el. 2,568.93 MSL
el. 2,585.17 MSL
1.03

Maximum Speed
25
rpm
Minimum Pumping Capacity
25,000
gpm
Maximum Shaft Runout:
1/8" per 10 ft.
One (2) mixer per Mixed Volume

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Vertical
Number of Impellers:
1
Minimum Impeller Diameter
80 inches
Impeller Location:
12" Vertical adjustment
Impeller Const:
Bolted and Keyed

Casing:
Manufacturers Standard
Shaft:
Type 316 SST
Impellers:
Type 316 SST
Lubrication:
Oil
Drive Type:
Gear
Mounting Type:
Pedestal/Baseplate

MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
2 HP
Voltage:
460
Phase:
3
Enclosure Type:
TEFC
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Mounting Type:
Horizontal
X Vertical
Winding:

One

Two

Multispeed, Two-speed:

rpm

Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 16405, AC INDUCTION MOTORS


Shaft
Split
Hollow
Upthrust:

High

(<30%)

Extra High

(<175%)

Special Features:

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AERATION BASIN ANOXIC MIXERS DATA SHEETS


43 22 56.01 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SECTION 43 22 56.02 MIXER DATA SHEET
Project: West Boise WWTF
Owner: Boise, ID
Equipment Name: WAS Phosphate Release Basin Mixers
Equipment Tag Number(s):
WSR-MIX-P-64021, WSR-MIX-P-64022, WSR-MIX-P-64023, WSR-MIX-P-64024

MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER

EQUIPMENT NAME
WAS Phosphate Release Basin Mixers

SPEED TYPE

4 Total

Constant Speed

EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

MODEL

Enviropax, Inc.
Or equal

Anco Series 3000

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Waste Activated sludge

2,500 to 10,000 mg/L


50 to 75 degrees F
20 ft x 30 ft x 14 ft SWD
2566.25 to el. 2,566.81 MSL
el. 2,580.50 MSL
1.03

Maximum Speed
25
rpm
Minimum Pumping Capacity
30,000
gpm
Maximum Shaft Runout:
1/8" per 10 ft.
Other Requirements:
Two (2) mixer per Mixed Volume

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Vertical
Number of Impellers:
1
Minimum Impeller Diameter
90 inches
Upper Position:
N/A
Impeller Location:
12" Vertical adjustment
Impeller Const:
Bolted and Keyed

Casing:
Shaft:
Impellers:
Lubrication:
Drive Type:
Mounting Type:

Manufacturers
Type 316 SST
Type 316 SST
Oil
Gear
Pedestal/Baseplate

MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
2 HP
Phase:
3
Voltage:
460
Mounting
Enclosure
Type:Type:
TEFC
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Horizontal
X Vertical
Winding:
X One
Two
Multispeed, Two-speed:
rpm
Shaft
Split
Hollow
Upthrust:

High

(<30%)

Extra High

(<175%)

Special Features:

PW\WBG\426399
4/3/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WAS PHOSPHATE RELEASE


TANK MIXERS DATA SHEET
43 22 56.02 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 43 22 57
SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
Aeration Basin 5 Swing Zone Mixers: AER-MIX-P- 30855A, AER-MIX-P-30855B
Aeration Basin 6 Swing Zone Mixers: AER-MIX-P-30856A, AER-MIX-P-30856B
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.

The Work of this section includes providing the submersible mixers and all
appurtenant work.

B.

Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the aeration basin submersible
mixers, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including, but not
necessarily limited to, electric motors, mast assemblies, and components), be
the end product of one responsible system manufacturer or responsible system
supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system
from the responsible supplier of the equipment, which supplier shall furnish
all components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease
of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in
operation in conformance with the specified performance, features and
functions without altering or modifying the Contractors responsibilities under
the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for
providing the equipment systems as specified herein.

C.

General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which


contains information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).


American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
American Standard Association (ASA).
American Water Works Association (AWWA).
Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Assoc. (AFBMA).
ASTM International (ASTM).
Factory Material (FM).
International Standards Organization (ISO).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.
10.
11.
1.03

National Electric Code (NEC).


National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Administrative, Shop Drawings, Samples, quality control, and


contract closeout submittals shall conform to the requirements of
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.

B.

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures,


submit the following additional detailed Shop Drawing information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Drawings showing complete dimensional data.


Complete literature on the mechanical mixers.
Calculations verifying that provided mixer meets mixing criteria for the
application.
See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for motor
submittal requirements.
Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

Factory Functional Test Reports.


Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that the factory finish
system is identical to the requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for
checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.
List of special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment
for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for Each Mixer:


1.
2.
3.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Where a manufacturers standard equipment name and/or model number is


listed, the equipment system shall be provided as modified to conform to the
performance, functions, features, and materials of construction as specified
herein.

B.

Materials, equipment, components, and accessories specified in this section


shall be products of:
1.
2.

2.02

Gear reducer bearings.


Set of O-rings.
Complete set of seals.

KSB, Inc.; Richmond, VA.


Landia, Inc.; Cary, NC.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel with the exception of the
motor housing and gear box. Wetted parts are defined as any parts extending
below the freeboard of the aeration basin.

B.

Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.

C.

Safety Devices: The completed Work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.

D.

Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment shall comply with


ANSI B16.1, Class 125; or ANSI B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise
indicated. Threaded flanges and fittings shall have standard taper pipe threads
complying with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Bearings:
1.
2.
3.

F.

Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing


Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).
All drive bearings shall be of the antifriction type, ball or roller
bearings. The output shaft shall be supported by tapered roller bearings.
Except where otherwise indicated, bearings of process equipment shall
have minimum AFBMA B-10 lives of 100,000 hours when operating at
full motor nameplate horsepower at design speed.

Gears and Gear Drives:


1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 2, a minimum L-10 bearing
life of 100,000 hours based on full motor nameplate horsepower and a
minimum efficiency of 94 percent.
Allowable Types:
a.
Gear reduction units are required for the mixers. Gear speed
reducers or increasers shall be of the single or double reduction
inline type, oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed, or similar.
The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy-duty steel construction
with lifting lugs. An oil drain and inspection plug shall be
provided and installed for easy access.
b.
Gearbox may be one-stage planetary reduction gear, with a
service factor of 2.0. The motor shaft shall be provided with a
spline to attach to the gear reducer. The reduction stage shall
consist of an integral toothed ring gear to which three planet
wheels are mounted on the planet carriers, engaging with the
pinion.
Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped
fully assembled for field installation.
Material selections shall comply with AGMA values and the
manufacturers recommendations.
The area where the propeller shaft enters the pumped media shall be
sealed by two totally independent mechanical shaft seals, each with its
own independent single spring system. The outer mechanical seal shall
be protected from solids in the pumped media by a labyrinth cast into
the propeller hub/seal housing interface. An oil-filled chamber with
drain and inspection plug (each with positive anti-leak seal) shall
separate the seals and provide lubrication. Single mechanical seals or
rotary lip seals shall not be considered adequate for this critical sealing
area.

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

2.03

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
A.

2.04

Propeller: Propeller shall be of cast material as specified, with thick cross


section to resist abrasion and to permit displacement of the stagnation point
along the leading edge. Propeller and hub shall be a single piece casting
without weld joints. Thin cross section blades, or those constructed of welded
sheet metal of any material, will not be acceptable. The propeller shall be
sized to optimize the mixing and energy consumption given the basin
geometry and mixing requirements specified. The propeller shall be capable
of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, and other matter found in
normal sewage applications.

Design the submersible mixers for continuous full load duty and guarantee the
mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data sheet. Design and
construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select all units to allow
as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified details of design
and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturers standard.

MAST ASSEMBLY/GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM FOR SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS


A.

Mast Assembly:
1.

2.

3.

B.

Provide a permanently installed guide mast assembly which allows for


mixer installation, operation, and retrieval without the need to enter the
basin. The mast shall be minimum 4-inch by 4-inch square tube or
4-inch diameter, supplied with factory welded mounting brackets at the
top, bottom and intermediate levels as needed to provide support at a
maximum of 10-foot intervals.
The mast assembly shall be adjustable, providing adjustment of the
mixer in the horizontal plane and adjustment of its vertical location. All
adjustments must be possible without requiring the basin to be drained.
A minimum of 160 degrees of rotation is required for the horizontal
plane adjustment.
A fabricated support frame shall support the weight of the mixer at its
horizontal center of gravity. Cantilevered designs, with the mixer
suspended on its own motor housing, will not be considered equal to a
support frame design.

Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Mast/Guide Rail System: Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 316.


Upper and Lower Support: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.
Intermediate Support: Wall mounted and stainless steel, ASTM A276,
Type 316.
Fabricated Support Frame: Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 316.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

PORTABLE LIFTING DAVIT AND LIFTING CABLE


A.

Provide one portable lifting davit suitable for use with all mixers in this
section. The davit shall be designed to be mounted in a floor socket next to the
mixer mast. Design and provide one floor socket for each mixer location, four
total. The lifting davit shall include a manual brake winch, and shall be
adequately rated to lift the mixer and support arm off the mast and directly
onto the adjacent deck surface. A removable section of handrail shall be
provided by Contractor, such that the mixer does not need to be lifted over the
handrail. A lifting cable, permanently attached to each mixer, shall be
provided in sufficient length for attachment of the upper end to the winch
cable reel when the davit assembly is installed. Provide storage area for cable
when davit is not installed.

B.

Materials:
1.
2.

2.06

Davit: Stainless Steel ASTM A276, Type 316.


Cable: Stainless Steel.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES


A.

Motors: Provide as indicated on mixer data sheets at the end of this section.

ACCESSORIES

2.07

B.

Anchor bolts shall be specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.


Number and size as recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Provide lifting lugs on equipment over 100 pounds.

D.

Nameplates: Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or


stamped and fastened to the equipment in accessible locations with stainless
steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturers name,
model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the
machine performance ratings.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.08

Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 2.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

The final acceptance of the equipment requires a field test for handling the
specified fluid under specified conditions.

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Furnish for each unit, certified factory flow test based on measured axial flow
thrust, as per proposed Hydraulic Institute Standards.

C.

Make available to the Owner without charge, all test records, whether test
witnessing is required or not on the Data Sheet.

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Provide stainless steel mounting bolts, washers, and nuts and install the
equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B.

Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and


typical installation detail included in this section. The manufacturer will
provide for setup of the mixers during startup to optimize the mixing within
the basin.

C.

Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.03

Functional Tests: Prior to acceptance of each mixer installation, each unit


shall be run to demonstrate its ability to operate without overloading,
jamming, excessive shaft runout, or excessive vibration.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Installation, Startup, and Testing Services:


1.

2.
3.
B.

Provide complete manufacturers installation, startup, and testing


services in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field
Services.
Provide Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Provide Qualifications of Manufacturers Representative.

Training Services:
1.
2.

Provide training of Owners personnel in accordance with


Section Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Provide 2 person-days of post-startup training, which shall be provided
in one session within a 24-hour period to accommodate personnel
working different shifts.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.05

Solvent clean (SP 1-82) and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating, System No. 2.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this


Specification.
1.

Aeration Basin 5, 6 Submersible Mixer Data Sheet.


END OF SECTION

SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS
43 22 57 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SECTION: 43 22 57.01 SUBMERSIBLE MIXER DATA SHEET
Project: West Boise WWTF
Owner: Boise, ID
Equipment Name: Aeration Basin 5 and 6 Swing Zone Mixers
Equipment Tag Number(s):
AER-MIX-P-30855A, AER-MIX-P-30855B
AER-MIX-P-30856A, AER-MIX-P-30856B

MIXER DATA
EQUIPMENT NUMBER

EQUIPMENT NAME

SPEED TYPE

Aeration Basin 5, 6
Swing Zone Mixers

Constant Speed

EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

MODEL

KSB, Inc.
Landia

Amamix Series 180-820


POP-I

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Mixed:
Suspended Solids:
Temperature
Mixed Volume:
Bottom Tank Elevation:
Maximum Liquid Level:
Specific Gravity:
Viscosity:

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Aeration Basin Mixed Liquor

1,000 to 5,000 mg/L


50 to 75 degrees F
85.5 ft 33.5 ft x 20 ft SWD
2567.11 to el. 2,568.93 MSL
el. 2,585.0 MSL
1.03
50 cp

Maximum Speed
Minimum Pumping Capacity

390
15,250

rpm
gpm

Other Requirements:
Two (2) mixers per Mixed Volume

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Mixer Type:
Number of Propellers:
Minimum Propeller Diameter
Impeller Locations:
Upper Position:
Lower Position:
Impeller Const:
Mfr. Std.

Submersible
1
20 inches
N/A
See Drawings

Casing:
Manufacturers Standard
Shaft:
Type 316 SST
Propellers:
Type 316 SST
Lubrication:
Oil
Drive Type:
Gear Reduction
Mounting Type:
Submersible

MOTOR DATA
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
9 HP
Voltage:
460
Phase:
3
Enclosure Type:
Submersible
Synchronous Speed:
NA
rpm
Mounting Type:
Horizontal
Vertical
Winding:

X One

Two

Multispeed, Two-speed:

rpm

Controlled by AFD (in future): See Section 26 29 23,


Low-voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems
Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 16405, AC INDUCTION MOTORS
Shaft
Split
Hollow
Upthrust:

High

Special Features:

(<30%)

Extra High

(<175%)

Manufacturer to provide the motor seal failure moisture detection and motor high temp sensors.

PW\WBG\426399
4/1/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE MIXER DATA SHEET


43 22 57 01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 24.01
PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
1.02

American Bearing Manufacturers Association, (ABMA): ABMA-9-90,


Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
American Gear Manufacturers Association, (AGMA):
a.
2001-B-88, Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods
for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
b.
6010-E-88, Standard for Spur, Herringbone, and Bevel Enclosed
Drives.
c.
6019-E-89, Gearmotors Using Spur, Helical, Herringbone,
Straight Bevel or Spiral Bevel Gears.
d.
6034-A-88, Enclosed Cylindrical Worm Gear Speed Reducers and
Gear Motors.
American Institute of Steel Construction, (AISC): Manual of Steel
Construction, Allowable Stress Design - 9th Edition.
American Iron and Steel Institute, (AISI): AISI, Pocketbook of AISI
Standard Steels.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A36/A36M, Structural Steel.
b.
A48-83, Gray Iron Castings.
c.
A536-84, Ductile Iron Castings.
d.
B247, Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings and Rolled
Ring Forgings.
e.
E18, Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell Superficial Hardness of
Metallic Materials.
American Welding Society, (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code
Steel
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

DESCRIPTION
A.

Scope: This section includes the replacement of the existing clarifier


equipment in two primary clarifiers (Primary Clarifiers 1-2). This section
specifies primary clarifier tank equipment including sludge and scum
collection equipment, scum box, drive equipment, clarifier mechanism access
bridge, influent well, flocculation well, and miscellaneous appurtenances as
shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The equipment shall be suitable

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

for use in the gravity separation of solids contained in raw wastewater which
has been screened but not degritted.
B.

Type: Equipment furnished under this section shall be suitable for installation
in the existing circular primary clarifier tanks. The equipment shall have an
energy dissipating influent well supported from a center influent column along
with a flocculation well. The equipment shall also have sludge rake arms.
Sludge collector blades shall be attached to the rake arms and arranged to
move the settled solids on the tank bottom to a sludge hopper located on the
tank bottom adjacent to the center column. The equipment shall be
specifically designed for the conditions specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings.

C.

Definitions:
1.

D.

The following definitions apply to this section:


a.
Continuous Operating Torque: The continuous operating torque is
defined as the AGMA design torque which is the torque load that
is assumed to be continuously applied on the drive system through
a 24-hour operating period, 365 days per year for a 20-year life.
b.
Alarm Torque: The torque at which an alarm sounds to serve as a
warning of increased torque loading. The alarm torque is defined
to be equal to 110 percent of the continuous operating torque.
c.
Cutout Torque: The torque load at which a motor cutout switch is
activated to shut down the unit. The cutout torque is defined to be
not less than 120 percent of the continuous operating design
torque.
d.
Momentary Peak Torque: The maximum or peak torque of the
drive unit assumed to be equal to twice the calculated AGMA
design torque rating of the spur gear set or 3 times calculated
AGMA torque rating of the worm gear set, whichever is lower.

Equipment List:
1.

Equipment numbers are as follows:


Item

Equipment No.

Primary Clarifier Drive Unit

PCL-DRV-P-20111 & 20112

High torque alarm switch (110%)

NSH-20111 & 20112

High torque limit switch (120%)

NSHH-20111 & 20112

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Performance and Design Requirements:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

All structural members shall be designed in accordance with AISC


standards and shall be capable of transmitting the momentary peak
torque without undue or permanent deflection. AISC recommended
slenderness limits shall not be exceeded for the design of all members.
In addition to the operating loads required in this section, each member
shall be designed to withstand a point load of 200 pounds applied
perpendicular to its weak axis at the midpoint between its support areas.
The clarifier equipment shall be designed to meet the requirements of
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. Design for sloshing
shall not be required.
Wastewater will be conveyed to the primary sedimentation tank in a
closed pipe.
The primary sedimentation tank shall be of the under-floor and centercolumn feed, concentric weir, and outboard launder overflow type, with
a central drive mechanism which shall support and rotate two attached
truss-type rake arms. Rake collector blades shall be attached to the rake
arms and shall be arranged to move the settled primary sludge on the
tank bottom to a hopper located on the tank bottom adjacent to the
center column. Solids collected in the hopper will be removed by
pumping.
The unit shall be provided with an energy dissipating type inlet and a
flocculation well arrangement designed to dissipate density currents and
prevent short circuitry. Kinetic energy available at the outlet of the
clarifiers center column inlet ports shall be dissipated through the dual
effects of hinged, adjustable diffuser gates at the periphery of the tanks
influent well.
The collector shall have two scum skimming devices supported from the
top of both of the truss arms to move the floating scum to an outlet box
and pipe located adjacent to the effluent launder as shown on the
Drawings.
The central influent pier and column assembly shall be designed to
support the drive mechanism, the sludge and scum collection
mechanisms, utility piping, access bridge, and walkway. No vertical
thrust load shall be placed on any underwater bearing. All drive gears
shall be located above water level and all gearing shall be completely
enclosed and oil lubricated. The drive cage, each sludge collector arm,
and associated supports and connecting members shall be designed to
withstand application of 200 percent of the continuous operating torque
at the AISC allowable stresses. The drive cage shall be designed to
withstand these forces resulting from operation in the clockwise
direction.
The access bridge and operating platform shall be designed for a live
load of 100 pounds per square foot. Deflection under full live load and

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

dead load shall not exceed 1/360 of the span. The influent well and its
supports shall be designed for stable, safe, distortion-free operation
when full of water and the tank empty, and vice versa.
Other specific design requirements are as follows:
Proposed
Internal tank diameter, feet

90

Side-water depth, feet

13.8

Water depth at center column, feet

17.5

Slope, inches/feet

Freeboard at maximum flow, feet

Influent column internal diameter, inches

36

Influent well:
Diameter, feet

Depth, feet

Flocculation well:
Diameter, feet

24

Depth below water surface, feet

Sludge collection arms, number

Continuous operating torque, foot-lb applied at


output of drive unit

F.

30,000

Nominal minimum bearing race diameter, inches

42

Maximum motor output, horsepower

1/2

Operating Conditions:
1.

The equipment shall be designed and operable for the following


conditions:
a.
Maximum Inlet Flow: 15 mgd.
b.
Minimum Inlet Flow: 4 mgd.
c.
Minimum Settled Solids Concentration, Percent TSS: 0.5.
d.
Maximum Settled Solids Concentration, Percent TSS: 6.0.
e.
Maximum Sludge Collector Peripheral Speed: 8 feet per minute.
f.
Sludge Viscosity, N-sec/m2: 0.01-0.8.

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Standards:
1.

2.

1.04

Structural Steel and Welds: All structural steel used for equipment
fabrication shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Steel for Bridges and Buildings and ASTM A36. All
welding shall conform to the latest standards of the American Welding
Society (AWS). Continuous seal welds shall be provided at all welded
joints. Skip welds will not be permitted.
Structural Design: All steel structural components shall be so designed
that the stresses developed under the specified conditions will not
exceed the allowable stresses defined by the AISC standards and the
aforementioned standards. Except where specifically indicated
otherwise, all plate and structural members designed for submerged
service shall be steel with a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. AISC
recommended limits for slenderness shall not be exceeded on any
structural steel member.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
B.

Certified general arrangement Drawings (Shop Drawings) showing all


important details and materials of construction, dimensions, loads on
supporting structures, and anchor bolt locations.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
Speed reducer data.
Calculations documenting the AGMA rating of the drive unit and life of
the main bearing, prepared and signed by a registered professional
engineer.
Complete descriptive information and electrical schematic for torque
overload device.
Complete process calculations substantiating the sizing of the center
column and ports, EDI and outlets, and outer feedwell. These
calculations shall be based on parameters from the manufacturers
operating experience. These parameters shall be verified by data
presented from successful operating installations.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.

Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
1.05

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Spare parts shall be provided as follows:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

PART 2
2.01

1 Set: All bearings and bearing seal rings for drive unit, except the main
turntable bearing.
1 Set: All gaskets for drive unit.
1 Set: Spur gear seal, if used.
2 Sets: Stainless steel squeegees.
1 Set: Shear pins, if used.
1 Set: Any special tools required to assemble, disassemble, or maintain
the equipment.
4 Sets: Retaining springs for sludge collector boxes.

PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A.

2.02

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Factory and Field Performance Test Reports.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of
1 year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

Primary clarifier equipment shall be manufactured by Westech Engineering,


Ovivo/Eimco or equal , modified to provide the specified features and to meet
the specified operating conditions.

MATERIALS
Component

Material

Center Column

ASTM A36

Steel Plate

ASTM A36

Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM A36

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Component

2.03

Material

Squeegees

Stainless steel

Drive Cage

ASTM A36, steel, 1/4 inch minimum

Main Spur Gear:


Ductile Iron
Forged Steel

ASTM A536, 100-70-03


AISI 4140, 4150 or 4340

Worm through Hardened

AISI 41L50 alloy steel

Worm Gear

ASTM B247, gear bronze alloy casting

Pinion

AISI 4140, 4150 or 4340

Main Bearings

SAE 52100, Rockwell C64 ANSI

Submerged Fastening Hardware


including Anchor Bolts

Type 304 stainless steel

Scum Wiper Blades

Aluminum

EQUIPMENT
A.

Influent Structure:
1.

2.

The tank influent structure shall consist of a center column and an


influent well. The center column shall be a hollow steel cylinder with its
base flanged for fixing to the concrete floor of the tank. Its top shall also
be flanged and stiffened for supporting the sludge collection
mechanism, the drive mechanism, and the access bridge beams. Ports
shall be provided for discharging the raw wastewater from the center
column into the influent well.
The influent well shall be designed to diffuse the liquid into the
flocculation well without excessive disturbance or formation of vertical
velocity currents. The influent well shall be fabricated of minimum
1/4-inch-thick steel plate. The influent well shall be fitted with openings
having adjustable multiple hinged steel diffuser gates or other equal
proprietary design. If gates are used, the gates shall be designed to direct
the flow to move in the same tangential direction to provide for energy
control. The gates shall be hinged to the tub with annealed Type 304
stainless steel hinges. Gates that pivot on their vertical centerline will
not be allowed. Diffuser gates shall be equally spaced around the
influent well periphery at a distance no greater than 30 inches apart from
centerline to centerline. The adjustable feature shall be accomplished
using Type 304 stainless steel adjusting chains connected to the end of
the gate and tethered to the influent well wall by a pin on the tub. The
influent well shall be supported from the drive cage and shall rotate

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.

B.

therewith. A neoprene seal shall be provided at the bottom of the tub


between the rotating bottom and the stationary center column to prevent
the passage of raw wastewater into the clarifier tank at this location. The
top of the influent well inlet ports and diffuser gates on the influent well
periphery shall be above the tanks maximum water surface elevation.
Complete process calculations shall be included with the submittal
substantiating the sizing of the influent well and outlets, and outer
flocculation well. The diameter, depth, and detention time of the
influent well shall be included with the design calculations, and shall
show proper process application as evidenced by the required successful
operating installations. These parameters shall be verified by data
presented from successful operating installations. Data from side by side
comparison testing of the influent well and flocculation well design
from existing operating clarifiers that are products of the manufacturer
shall be presented with the calculations. The submittal shall include data
from a minimum of two (2) successfully operating installations that
verify the experience of the manufacturer.
The flocculating well shall be located outside the influent well to diffuse
the liquid into the tank without disturbance or formation of velocity
currents. A sufficient number of equally spaced slots shall be provided
in the flocculation well baffle to allow for scum travel from the
flocculation well to the outer tank area. The invert of the slots shall be at
the same elevation as the bottom of the notches in the primary clarifier
effluent weir. The supports for the flocculation well shall be located
either above the liquid extending from the cage or bridge, or on the rake
arms. Submerged supports from the rake arms shall be designed so as to
minimize horizontal flow disruption. No flocculation well support or
flocculation well spliced connection shall be contained within the
annular space formed between the flocculation well and the influent
well. The depth of the flocculation well shall be such as to provide
proper detention time and an exit velocity at maximum flow that will
not scour the settled sludge. The diameter, depth, detention time, and
exit velocities shall match the process application calculations as
evidenced by the required successful operating installations. The
flocculation well shall be made of not less than 3/16- thick steel plate
with necessary stiffening angles.

Drive Cage: Torque shall be transmitted from the drive unit to the sludge
collection arms and scum skimmers by a drive cage. The drive cage shall
encompass the center column and shall be of sufficient strength to transmit
and/or carry all loads and stresses associated with 200 percent of the
continuous operating torque. Drive cages shall be capable of withstanding
forces from operation in the directions. Detailed calculations shall be provided
showing the related stresses developed in the drive cage at that torque.

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Sludge Collector Mechanism:


1.

D.

Truss Arms: The clarifier sludge collector mechanism shall have two
structural steel rake collector arms rigidly connected to the center drive
cage. The rake collector arms shall be of a truss construction
conforming to the slope of the tank floor.
a.
Each rake collector arm shall be provided with steel blades to
scrape the settled solids along the tank bottom to the sludge
hopper located adjacent to the center column.
b.
To ensure alignment and connection to the center drive cage, the
width of the rake collector arms shall be the same as the center
drive cage. The design of the arms shall not incorporate the use of
any tie rods.
c.
The blade setting shall be identical for each rake collector arm
with the blades spaced so that the entire circular portion of the
tank bottom will be scraped at least twice with each revolution of
the mechanism. The main rake collector blades shall have a
minimum depth of 12 inches including squeegees. All blades shall
be provided with adjustable spring Type 316 or Type 316L
stainless steel squeegees projecting approximately 1-1/2 inches
below the bottom of the blade and secured by Type 316L stainless
steel nuts, bolts, and accessories. Each Type 316L stainless steel
squeegee shall have a minimum thickness of 26 gauge and be
designed for a 2-inch minimum adjustment in the vertical plane.

Drive MechanismOption A:
1.

Design Parameters: The drive unit shall be designed for the torque
values previously listed. It shall turn the mechanism at the design
collector tip speed. The drive main bearing shall be designed for the
total rotating mechanism loads with a minimum L-10 life of 100 years
or 876,000 hours. The drive unit shall be capable of producing and
withstanding the previously listed momentary peak torque while
starting. The drive main gear shall be designed to a minimum AGMA 6
rating when rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standard. Gear
teeth shall be designed for proper load distribution and sharing. Stub
tooth design and surface hardening of the main gear shall not be
allowed. The main bearing shall be capable of withstanding the listed
overturning moment without the aid of any underwater guides or
bearings to ensure correct tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main
gear.
a.
All spur gearing shall be designed to the latest AGMA spur gear
standard for strength and surface durability, based on a life of
175,000 hours. The design running torque rating of the drive
gearing shall be based on the smaller of the strength and durability

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

values determined from the above AGMA standard. To ensure


safety and ease of maintenance, all components of the drive shall
be direct coupled.
b.
No overhung pinions shall be allowed on the speed reducing unit.
The lower pinion bearing shall not be located below the turntable
base.
c.
Any and all welding on the drive unit shall be done using E70XX
weld rod.
Physical Characteristics: The drive unit shall consist of a solid internal
main spur gear, bearing turntable, pinion, secondary speed reducer,
support base, and drive unit bearing. The drive shall be mounted on the
center column and support the entire rotating load of the mechanism.
The main internal gear shall be forged of alloy hardened steel. The
pinion shall be heat treated alloy steel. All speed reducers shall be fully
enclosed and running in grease. Support base for the drive shall be of
welded steel to assure rigidity. Lubricant and dust shields shall be
provided. The drive bearing shall include a forged steel precision
gear/bearing set, with fully contoured raceways hardened to a minimum
58-60 Rc and protected by a neoprene seal. The drive shall be designed
so that the balls and nylon spacers can be replaced without removing the
access walkway. The main gear to pinion gear mesh shall be grease
lubricated. Lubrication fittings shall be readily accessible. Continuous
condensate drains shall be provided in the main gear housing.
Overload Protection: An overload device shall be provided in a stainless
steel water-tight NEMA 4X enclosure. The device shall be actuated by
torque generated from the main drive, which shall operate two
independently adjustable switches (the alarm switch at 110 percent of
design running torque and the motor cutout switch at 120 percent of
design running torque). These two switches shall be factory adjusted to
accurately calibrate the alarm torque value and the overload position. A
visual torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so that it may be
read from the walkway. It shall be calibrated from 0 percent to
160 percent of design running torque. The torque overload protection
system shall be fully functional in both forward directions.
a.
A backup shear pin shall be provided in a shear pin hub mounted
on the output shaft of the gear motors. The shear pin shall be
selected to break when the load on the mechanism achieves
140 percent of the continuous operating torque specified. The
shear pin device shall be capable of functioning as required in
either the forward rotation of the mechanism.
Turntable: The turntable base shall have an annular bearing raceway
upon which the rotating assembly rests. It shall have a maximum
allowable deflection in accordance with the bearing Specifications. The
allowable modulus of elasticity shall be a minimum of 29 x 106 psi. The
center cage shall be fastened to and supported from the gear casing. Ball

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

6.

E.

bearings shall be of high carbon chrome alloy 52100 steel running in


fully contoured races, as part of a precision gear/bearing set. The balls
shall be oil lubricated and protected by elastomer seals.
Speed Reducing Unit: The speed reducing unit shall consist of
cycloidal, helical, or planetary speed reducers directly connected to a
motor without the use of chains or V-belts, and shall be keyed to the
pinion.
Motor: The motor shall be a squirrel cage, induction type, TEFC, ball
bearing heavy duty unit of ample power for starting and operating the
mechanism without overload, with a minimum service factor of 1.15.
Power supply to the equipment shall be 480 volt, 60 hertz, three-phase.

Drive MechanismOption B:
1.

2.

3.

General: The drive assembly shall include an electric gear motor, worm
gear and worm gear reducer, pinion gear, turntable type main spur gear,
drive base, shear pin hub coupling, steel roller drive chain, and torque
overload protection system. The spur gear set shall be designed in
accordance with AGMA 2001-D. The worm gears shall be designed in
accordance with AGMA 6034-A for a service factor of 1.25 applied to
the continuous operating torque. A reversible, failsafe,
electromechanical torque protection device may be acceptable in lieu of
shear pins provided the Contractor makes all changes necessary to the
appurtenant systems.
a.
The drive mechanism shall be mounted on the influent column
with the top of the spur gear housing capable of supporting the
total access bridge load by means of equally loaded, removable
bridge supports. Drive mechanism components shall be designed
for the rated torque specified in Article1.01 E. Calculations shall
be provided that substantiate the torque rating (including
momentary peak torque) of the gear assembly. Numerical values
shall be shown for all terms used in the AGMA rating equations.
Gear Motor: The drive motor shall be 1,800 rpm. The motor shall be
designed for continuous duty, Class II applications in accordance with
AGMA 6019-E. Motor bearings shall be rated for a minimum L-10 life
of 100,000 hours.
a.
Power transmission between the gear motor and a special, singlereduction worm gear reducer shall be made through a roller chain
and sprocket drive assembly. The chain drive shall be enclosed by
a removable chain guard, constructed of a minimum 14-gage
hot-dip galvanized steel and conform to OSHA requirements.
Worm Gear: The special worm assembly shall consist of a through
hardened and ground alloy steel worm and a centrifugally cast bronze
worm gear. The worm gear assembly shall be self-contained and
enclosed in a cast iron gear case and provided complete with oil fill,

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

5.

6.

level, and drain fittings and a sight gage. The drain shall be at the lowest
point of the oil reservoir and shall be accessible.
a.
The worm shall be cast integrally with the worm shaft. Designs
which use a separate gear, keyed to the shaft, will not be
considered. The worm gear torque capacity shall be determined
according to AGMA 6034-A for service factor of 1.25 applied to
the continuous operating torque.
Pinion Gear: The pinion and pinion shaft which drive the internal spur
gear shall be made as an integral unit from heat treated forged alloy
steel and designed in accordance with AGMA 6010-E. The pinion shall
be rigidly supported by bearings located above and below the pinion
gear. Overhung pinions shall not be acceptable.
Spur Gear Assembly: The spur gear shall be AGMA Quality 5 and shall
be designed and rated in accordance with AGMA 2001-B. If the spur
gear is of a split gear design, the two halves shall be provided with
precision mating surfaces with self-registering and indexed fits.
a.
The spur gear housing shall be made of cast iron. A felt or
neoprene seal and dust shield shall be included with each spur
gear housing in two locations; a lower seal located between the
stationary drive base and main gear and an upper seal located
between the main gear and stationary drive cover. The spur gear
housing shall be designed to allow submergence of the gear face
in the oil bath sufficient to provide complete lubrication of the
gear assembly. When the main spur gear is manufactured from
forged steel, a minimum 75 percent of the gear face shall be
submerged in oil. The gear case shall be complete with an oil fill
and drain components. Drain piping shall tap the lowest point in
the oil reservoir for removal of oil and condensate, shall be
valved, and shall be conveniently accessible. An extension
operator shall be provided for operation of the drain valve from
the walkway level above. A dip stick or sight glass extending
from the walkway level to the bottom of the drain shall be
provided to indicate oil level and the presence of condensate.
b.
The drive assembly shall be firmly mounted to a cast iron
turntable base with a minimum wall thickness of 1 inch. The drive
base shall be mounted on the center column and be provided with
a positive leveling feature. The drive base shall be suitable for
supporting the entire load of the drive mechanism and access
bridge. To permit inspection and maintenance of components in
the interior of the drive unit housing, each assembly shall have an
access opening of not less than 22 inches in diameter. Cover plate
with lifting eyes securely attached shall be provided for the
opening.
Main Bearing: The entire sludge collector mechanism shall be
suspended from the turntable which in turn shall be supported on a ball

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

7.

8.

F.

bearing assembly that uses hardened carbon corrected, vacuum degassed


alloy steel bearing balls. The bearing balls shall run in an oil bath on
replaceable carbon corrected, high carbon steel liners hardened to 38-46
Rockwell C as specified in ASTM E18 and placed in annular raceways
in the gear and turntable base. A cross-contact or four-point angle
contact bearing arrangement is prohibited.
Torque Overload Protection: The drive mechanism for the sludge
collector shall be provided with an overload protection device and an
overload alarm system. The overload protection device shall be
designed to measure thrust of the worm gear shaft and be provided with
an indicator showing the load on the mechanism. The indicator shall be
visible from the access bridge, shall read in ft-lbs torque or percent
continuous operating torque and shall cover the range of torques
specified up to 200 percent of the continuous operating torque. The
torque overload protection system shall be fully functional in both
forward directions.
a.
The overload device shall include two switches, the first to
activate a remote alarm, and the second to shut down the unit. The
overload device shall be enclosed in a watertight NEMA 4X cast
iron or aluminum housing. The switches shall be NEMA 4X
SPDT, rated at 10 amps and 250 volts AC. The device shall be
factory calibrated to activate the alarm switch such that its
contacts open when the torque load on the mechanism reaches
110 percent of the continuous operating torque and activate the
cutout switch (normally closed) at 120 percent of the continuous
operating torque.
b.
A backup shear pin shall be provided in a shear pin hub mounted
on the output shaft of the gear motors. The shear pin shall be
selected to break when the load on the mechanism achieves
140 percent of the continuous operating torque specified. The
shear pin device shall be capable of functioning as required in
either the forward rotation of the mechanism.
Motor: The motor shall be a squirrel cage, induction type, TEFC, ball
bearing heavy duty unit of ample power for starting and operating the
mechanism without overload, with a minimum service factor of 1.15.
Power supply to the equipment shall be 480 volt, 60 hertz, three-phase.

Skimmers and Scum Trough:


1.

The mechanism shall be provided with scum skimming components to


remove surface scum from the outer annular space between the
flocculation well baffle and the scum baffle. Scum shall be moved from
the inner annular space to the outer through ports located in the
flocculation well baffle. All surface scum in the outer annular space
shall be moved to a scum hopper for removal from the primary clarifier.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

G.

The mechanism shall be provided with two skimming arms located


180 degrees apart to collect and move surface scum from the outer
annular space between the flocculation well baffle and the scum baffle
adjacent to the outboard effluent weir to a fabricated steel scum trough
extending inward from just inside the scum baffle. Skimming arms shall
be designed so they may be easily removable in adverse weather
conditions in which they could be damaged. Removal shall be achieved
by accessing the arms from the access walkway. A manual system for
removal of the skimming arms shall be provided. Each skimming arm
shall consist of a scum deflector plate, a support boom, and a hinged
aluminum blade. A return beach shall be provided for guiding the scum
blade back to its normal position. Each skimmer arm shall have a wiper
assembly so constructed as to maintain contact with the scum baffle and
form a pocket to trap the scum.
Each skimming mechanism shall be supported by structural steel
members rigidly fixed to the rotating clarifier truss arms. The scum
trough shall consist of a galvanized steel box with a vertically adjustable
steel approach lip extending from the effluent weir. The scum trough
and approach lip shall be supported by structural steel braces attached to
the tank wall.
A valve shall be attached to the scum box which automatically opens
and allows clarified liquid into the scum box to flush out solids. The
valve shall actuate at every pass of the scum skimmer over the scum box
allowing sufficient delay after deposit of the solids before flushing
begins. Delay and flush duration shall be adjustable. The valve shall be
constructed of oil impregnated UHMW-PE disks with stainless steel
rods and stainless steel hardware. The opening and closing of the scum
flushing valve shall be one smooth continuous movement.

Walkway and Operating Platform:


1.

An access bridge shall be provided as shown for the sludge collector


mechanism and shall consist of structural steel truss sections interlaced
for rigidity. All walkway surfaces shall be at the same elevation. The
access bridge shall be supported on the main spur gear housing which in
turn shall be supported by the center column support structure.
Clearance of 24 inches shall be provided around the drive. The bridge
shall span from tank wall to the center of the tank, as shown on the
Drawings. The bridge shall include a 36-inch wide aluminum grating
walkway complete with 3/16-inch by 4-inch high toe plates. The
operating platform shall include a similarly constructed walkway
encircling the exposed portion of the drive unit. A removable section of
grating shall be used to cover the drive unit well to maintain all levels of
the walkway on one plane. Grating shall be as specified in
Section 05 53 00, Metal Gratings, and on the Drawings.

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

H.

PART 3
3.01

3.02

The walkway and operating platform shall be provided with hand


railing. All hand railing shall be picket railing hand rail as detailed in
Specification 05 52 00 (2.10.D.10 In-Fill Area Picket and
Attachments) and Standard Detail 0552-001 (Detail 2 of 8) Walkway
truss members may serve as handrails if the top chord is 3 feet 6 inches
above the walking surface.

Finishing Requirements: All fabricated steel or ferrous metal shall be fully


prepared with field-applied prime and final coats of Coating System
Number 2 in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating. Preparation of steel and ferrous surfaces shall comply with
requirements specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications, and
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. Spark testing shall be conducted
following application of the final finish coat.
EXECUTION

INSTALLATION, FIELD TESTING, AND START-UP


A.

General: Equipment furnished under this section shall be installed, checked,


and adjusted as recommended by the manufacturer. The installation shall be
certified on the Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation in Section 01
43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

B.

Anchor Bolts: Design of the anchor bolts of the new influent column is the
responsibility of the manufacturer. All anchor bolts shall be made of Type 304
stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, and
washers required for the equipment.

FIELD TESTING AND START-UP


A.

General: In addition to the installation and acceptance tests specified in other


portions of the project manual, the equipment furnished under this section
shall be subject to the following field performance tests. All performance tests
shall be performed under the onsite supervision of personnel trained by the
manufacturer. All equipment and instrumentation necessary to complete the
testing procedures outlined below shall be provided by the Contractor.
Performance testing shall include operating, and torque load testing. Failure to
complete the testing program, as outlined in the following paragraphs, shall be
sufficient cause for rejection. In addition, a factory representative shall start
up and train plant personnel in operating and maintenance procedures for not
less than 8 hours.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Operating Tests:
1.

2.

C.

The primary clarifier tank shall be filled with non-potable water to its
operating level and the mechanism operated continuously at its
maximum speed for a period of not less than 48 hours. At no time
during the operating test shall the equipment fail on torque overload or
exhibit indications of binding or uneven operation. The Contractor shall
record torque values as registered on the drive mechanism torque
indicator and motor amperage (all three phases) at 3-hour intervals.
If the mechanism should fail on torque overload or, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the mechanism should exhibit indications of binding or
improper adjustment; the Contractor shall immediately halt the tests and
remedy the problem. After completion of necessary repairs or
adjustments, the tests shall be repeated. Failure to successfully complete
the test in six attempts shall be considered sufficient cause for rejection.

Torque Test: The Contractor shall load test the entire collector mechanism by
anchoring the clarifier truss arms individually. Each truss arm shall be tested
individually by using a single attachment point at the end of the arm to
achieve a point load condition during the test. In successive tests, the
Contractor shall demonstrate the sludge collection mechanisms (including
drive unit, cage, gears and structures) capability to withstand all loads and
stresses associated with the cut-out torque. Prior to initiating the test, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sketches and calculations
illustrating the test procedure and demonstrating how the specified torque will
be applied to satisfy this requirement.
END OF SECTION

PRIMARY CLARIFIER EQUIPMENT


44 42 24.01 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 2, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.01
SCREW CENTRIFUGAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)


WSR- PMP-P-64051: RST Feed Pump NO. 1
WSR-PMP-P-64052: RST Feed Pump NO. 2
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
1.02

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):


a.
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b.
11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b.
A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, HotWrought, Special Quality.
Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS):
a.
11.6, Submersible Pump Test.
b.
14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance
Tests.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code.
b.
497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable
Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified)
Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

DEFINITIONS
A.

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to ratings and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.

Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.


Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, Specifications, and
identification of materials of construction, including cable seal details.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand,
and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff
to maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower
demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at
guarantee point.
For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every
50 rpm over the operational range.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
Adjustable frequency drive data, in accordance with the requirements of
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
Factory-finish system.
L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA.
If required, wiring for motor protection module.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.
8.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Factory and Field Performance Test Reports.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of
1 year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for this set of pumps:


1.
2.

PART 2
2.01

2.02

2.03

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Submersible, vertical shaft, screw centrifugal nonclog type, for pumping


WAS.

B.

Designed for continuous operation under submerged or partially submerged


conditions, and intermittent operation when totally dry without damage to
pump or motor.

C.

Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division
location in accordance with NFPA 70.

D.

Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating


system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller.

E.

Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer.

MANUFACTURES
A.

WEMCO Hidrostal.

B.

Hayward Gordon.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.04

One set mechanical seals.


One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

Specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

COMPONENTS
A.

Equipment consists of pump complete with motor, control system, guide rail,
anchoring brackets, base elbow, power cable, and pump lifting cable.

B.

Characteristics:
1.
2.

Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump.
Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O-rings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
C.

Lifting Arrangement:
1.
2.
3.

D.

Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to


pass course solids and stringy materials.

Stainless steel chain, 2 feet minimum, and one grip-eye.


Attach chain permanently to pump and access platform with stainless
steel wire rope.
Grip-eye capable of being threaded over and engaging links of
stainless steel chain so pump and motor may be lifted with grip-eye
and independent hoist.

Sliding Guide Bracket:


1.
2.

3.

Integral part of pump unit.


Pump unit to be guided by no less than two guide bars, or equivalent
cable system, and pressed tightly against discharge connection elbow
with metal-to-metal contact or through use of profile-type gasket,
provided gasket is attached to pumps flange and can be easily accessed
for inspection when pump is lifted out of wetwell.
Pump metal parts that come into contact with guide rail or cable system
shall be made of nonsparking materials.

E.

Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug.
Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from
outside.

F.

Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at head-capacity point on


pump curve.

G.

Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for submersible pump
application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for
pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes
without strain or splicing.

H.

Motor Protection Module: If required, provide pump with a motor protection


module for remote mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named
submersible pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and
motor protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided,
provide revised wiring for the motor protection module.
1.

The stator winding and lead shall be insulated with moisture-resistant


Class F insulation for continuous duty in 40 degree C ambient. The
motor shall be designed for continuous duty capable of ten (10) starts
per hour. Automatic reset, normally closed thermal overloads shall be

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

I.

Cable Entry System:


1.
2.
3.

2.05

2.06

2.07

imbedded in the motor windings to provide overheating protection.


Motor winding thermostats must be connected to an electric controller
per local and state codes and the National Electric Code.
Two moisture detection probes shall be installed so that they will detect
moisture in either the seal or stator cavity measuring resistivity between
the probes. They shall be wired internally to the control cable
connection at the top of the motor. Float type devices located in the
rotor/stator area or single probe-to-ground moisture detectors measuring
continuity are not acceptable. O-ring sealed inspection plugs shall be
provided in the mechanical seal oil chamber for ease of inspection,
draining and filling of oil.

Junction chamber and motor separated by stator lead sealing gland or


terminal board that prevents foreign material entering through pump top.
Utilize cable with factory-installed sealing gland with nonshrink epoxy
seal system.
O-ring compression seal between sealing gland and cable entry point
shall also be acceptable.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch diestamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.

B.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

Prepare, and prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating.

B.

Manufacturers standard epoxy system for continuous submergence in


corrosive water.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Pump:
1.

Factory Performance Test:


a.
In accordance with HIS 11.6, Level A for submersible pump tests.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
2.
3.

B.
PART 3
3.01

3.02

Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Mount the discharge elbow to the floor of the wetwell floor with stainless steel
bolts.

C.

Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Test: Conduct on each pump.


1.
2.
3.
4.

3.04

Include test data sheets, curve test results, and performance test
logs.
Conduct on each pump.
Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at 2/3, 1/3,
and shutoff conditions.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for
abnormally high temperatures.
Test for continuous 3-hour period.
Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute
Standards for submersible pump tests HIS 14.6 and 11.6.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.

B.

1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of


Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.

C.

1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.

D.

1/2 person-day for facility startup.

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

E.

1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owners personnel. Training shall


not commence until accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has
been reviewed by Owner.

F.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.

Data Sheets: Pump and Motor.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.01-01


Tag Numbers: WSR-PMP-P-6401, WSR-PMP-P-64052
Pump Name: RST Feed Pump No. 1, RST Feed Pump No. 2
Manufacturer and Model Number:

(1) WEMCO Hydrostal


(2) Hayward Gordon
(3) Or approved equal

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): WAS (Activated Sludge)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F:

Min 45

Viscosity Range: 1.03 cp

Vapor Pressure at 60 Degrees F: _0.25 psi


Abrasive (Y/N) N

Max 70

pH: 6 to 8

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total suspended solids (mg/L): 700 to 13,000


Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches): 3 inches
Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute):
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 555 (Primary design point); 300 (Secondary design point at
reduced pump speed)
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 30 (Primary design point); 23 (Secondary design point
at reduced pump speed)
Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 45
Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 60
Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 855 rpm
Adjustable (Y/N): Y

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Constant (Y/N): N

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

DESIGN AND MATERIALS


Pump Type: Heavy-Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y

Other:

Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48


Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Wear Rings Front head (Y/N): N
Wear Ring Impeller (Y/N):

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 2

Material: stainless steel

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SUBMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.01-02
Tag Numbers: WSR-PMP-P-6401, WSR-PMP-P-64052
Pump Name: RDT Feed Pump No. 1, RDT Feed Pump No. 2
Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber
Fasteners: Stainless Steel
Impeller: Type: Double-Shrouded Non-Clog (Y/N): Y

Other:

Material: High Chrome cast iron, ASTM A532


Shaft Material: Carbon Steel, ASTM A576 with stainless steel sleeve or all stainless steel
Base Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y

Bearing Life (Hrs): 100,000

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.


Horsepower: 15

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3

Synchronous Speed (rpm): 1800

Enclosure: EXP
CLASSIFICATION: Unclassified
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 800 min to 1800 max, See Section 26 29 23, Low
Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
Other Features:
Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y
Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y
REMARKS:

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SCREW CENTRIFUGAL
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.03
VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS HANDLING PUMPS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.
1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.03

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):


a.
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b.
11, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
American Petroleum Institute (API):
a.
610, Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical, and
Natural Gas Industries.
b.
670, Machinery Protection Systems.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A36/A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b.
A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
c.
B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for
General Applications.
Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS):
a.
9.6.4, Rotodynamic Pumps for Vibration Measurements and
Allowable Values.
b.
14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance
Tests.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors
and Generators.
NSF International (NSF): 61, Drinking Water System Components
Health Effects.

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.

Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.


Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identification of materials of construction.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.
6.

7.

8.

9.
10.
11.
12.
B.

Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand,


NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire full-speed
operating range of the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity and at
pump speeds corresponding to 55 Hz, 50 Hz, 45 Hz, 40 Hz, 35 Hz, and
30 Hz. Indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand,
overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design
flow conditions.
Calculations: Seismic analysis for discharge head, equipment support
and anchors, and column pipe bowl assembly.
Pump maximum downthrust or upthrust in pounds.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing
equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights
of components.
Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling,
bearings, anchor bolt plan, parts nomenclature, and materials of
construction lists.
Baseplate drawings with leveling jackscrew details, anchor bolt and
sleeve details, and minimum foundation installation and leveling
requirements.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor
manufacturer, including motor modifications.
Factory finish system.
Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

7.
8.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that factory finish system is
identical to requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports: Factory test data for
each pump shall be submitted, reviewed, and approved by Engineer
prior to shipment of equipment.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period
of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for
checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLIING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.
1.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for each pump:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

PART 2
2.01

Complete set bearings.


Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals.
Complete set of shaft sleeves.
Impeller.
Impeller shaft.
Impeller wear ring.
Bowl wear ring.
Head shaft.
One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Lateral and Torsional Vibrations:


1.
2.

B.

Pump and motor assembly shall have no natural frequencies within 10


percent of operating speed range.
Fundamental critical speed of rotating assembly shall be no less than 25
percent above the rated speed.

Adjustable Speed Drives:


1.
2.

2.02

Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

Where required, furnish coordinated operating system complete with


pump and driver.
Coordinate pump and motor requirements with adjustable speed drive
manufacturer and be responsible for the following:
a.
Torsional vibration of rotating assembly and related stresses.
b.
Motor thermal rating.
c.
Structural design of pump and motor assembly.
d.
Drive capacity for actual motors nameplate current rating being
supplied.
e.
Minimum motor speed rating for required corresponding torque.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

SHAFT SEALS
A.

Sealing system for vertical turbine solids handling pump shafts shall be
mechanical seal.

B.

Mechanical Seal Requirements:


1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.

Nonfretting type requiring no wearing sleeve for shaft.


Shafts for pumps specified with mechanical seals shall be furnished
with no reduction in size through seal area.
Split Type:
a.
Requiring no field assembly other than assembly around shaft and
insertion into pump or balanced cartridge design in conjunction
with a spool type spacer coupling as specified in pump data sheet.
b.
Nonshaft O-rings: Ball and socket type requiring no gluing.
c.
Initial seal installation at factory shall be with nonsplit seal faces;
spare seals and spare kits to have split faces.
d.
Unless otherwise specified, capable of 400 psig service, be selfaligning, self-centering, and single.
e.
Manufacturer and Product: A.W. Chesterton Company; No. 442.
Arrangement shall allow removal of seal without disturbing pump or
driver.
For clear water services and solids up to 5 percent by weight, face
combination shall be hard/soft. Otherwise, hard/hard faces shall be used.
Design such that dynamic O-ring moves towards a clean surface as face
wears and springs are not in pumped fluid.
Stationary seal face shall be spring loaded to provide self-aligning
despite stuffing box misalignment.
Where cartridge type mechanical seals are specified:
a.
Single, balanced, flexible stator design.
b.
Capable of 600 psig service.
c.
O-ring secondary seals and setscrew drive with three-point
centering to ensure 0.003-inch maximum perpendicularity of
rotary face to shaft.
d.
Gland shall have flush port and be affixed to equipment with
adjustable tabs to fit irregular bolt patterns.
e.
Manufacturers and Products:
1)
A.W. Chesterton Company; 155.
2)
Crane; 1B.
Seal Materials:
a.
Metals:
1)
Loaded Parts Over 0.060-inch Cross Section: Type 316
stainless steel minimum.

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLIING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2)

10.

11.

Thinner Parts (springs): Hastelloy-C, Alloy 20, AMS5876


Elgiloy, or other alloy that is not vulnerable to chloride
stress corrosion.
b.
Elastomers: Fluorocarbon Viton preferred, unless seal
manufacturer recommends ethylene propylene for service
conditions.
c.
Faces: Homogeneous construction. Surface treatments and plated
faces are unacceptable.
1)
Acceptable hard faces include nickel bound tungsten
carbide, self-sintered silicon carbide, reaction bonded
silicon carbide, or graphitized silicon carbide. Silicon
carbide is preferred because of its higher pressure-velocity
capability.
2)
Acceptable soft face is carbon-graphite, either Union
Carbide 658RC or Purecarbon P8412.
Seal Environmental Controls:
a.
Pipe seal flush port drain to wetwell or hub drain as shown on
Drawings with 1/8-inch orifice plate in the line. Provide venting
of seal chamber.
b.
Mechanical seals for anything other than clear water services shall
be fitted with Enviroseal SpiralTrac Version F, N, or D,
installation Type I as recommended by A.W. Chesterton
Company.
1)
Provide fluid circulation in seal chamber that removes
frictional heat from mechanical seal.
2)
Convey particulate matter and contaminants for removal by
conveying them from bore to shaft by means of integral
machined spiral.
3)
Remove particulate matter from seal chamber, without seal
flush water, through integral machined exit groove.
c.
Material of Construction: Type 316 stainless steel.
d.
Connect mechanical seal to water purge supply where indicated
on Drawings.
Shaft Sleeve:
a.
Fit section of shaft or impeller hub that extends through or into
stuffing box with replaceable stainless steel sleeve with a Brinell
hardness of not less than 500.
b.
Sleeve shall be held to shaft to prevent rotation.
c.
Gasketed to prevent leakage between shaft and sleeve.
d.
Thickness: 3/8 inch minimum.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

2.05

ACCESSORIES
A.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch


die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible
location.

B.

Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

C.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

Prepare, prime, and finish coat:


1.

2.

2.06

Near-white blast clean surface preparation with 2 coats, 16 mil total dry
film thickness, of coal tar epoxy, Carboline 300M or equal. Provide a
prime coat if recommended by the coating manufacturer.
Provide the coal tar epoxy coating to the outside of the bowl, inside and
outside of the column, outside of tube and inside and outside of the
discharge head.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Inspections: Inspect for required construction, electrical connection,


and intended function.

B.

Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment actually furnished.

C.

Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results.

D.

Functional Test: Perform manufacturers standard.

E.

Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Conduct on each pump at rated speed.


Perform under simulated operating conditions.
Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.
Test Log: Record the following:
a.
Total head.
b.
Capacity.
c.
Horsepower requirements.
d.
Flow measured by factory instrumentation and storage volumes.
e.
Average distance from suction well water surface to pump
discharge centerline for duration of test.

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLIING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

f.

5.
F.
PART 3
3.01

3.02

Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.

C.

Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D.

After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.

E.

Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump


flanges.

F.

Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Pump discharge pressure converted to feet of liquid pumped and


corrected to pump discharge centerline.
g.
Calculated velocity head at the discharge flange.
h.
Bowl head.
i.
Driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase.
Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest in accordance with Hydraulic
Institute Standards if necessary.

As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump.


1.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.
4.
5.
3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below for each pump, travel time
excluded:
1.
2.
3.

3.05

Vibration Test:
a.
Test with unit installed and in normal operation, and discharging
to connected piping systems at rates between low discharge head
and high discharge head conditions specified, and with actual
building structures and foundations provided shall not develop
vibration exceeding 80 percent of limits specified in HIS 9.6.4.
b.
If unit exhibits vibration in excess of limits specified, adjust or
modify as necessary. Unit that cannot be adjusted or modified to
conform as specified shall be replaced.
Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes.
Test for continuous 2-hour period.
Test Report Requirements: In accordance with HIS 14.6.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1 person-day for functional testing and completion of Manufacturers
Certificate of Proper Installation.
1 person-day for facility startup and Site training.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.

Pump Data Sheets.


END OF SECTION

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLIING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.03-01


Tag Numbers: SCL-PMP-P-35104
Pump Name: West Boise WWTF South Plant RAS Pump #4
Manufacturers and Product:

(1) Fairbanks Morse VTSH 16"


(2) No Equal

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Return Activated Sludge (max. 1% total
suspended solids)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal 68
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 85

Min 55

Viscosity Range:
pH: 6.5-8

Abrasive (Y/N): Y

Caused by: Solids

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Caused by:

Corrosive (Y/N): N

Caused by:

Total suspended solids (mg/L)

3,000 - 10,000 .

Largest diameter solid pump can pass (inches) 4

Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): ______


Altitude (Feet above Mean Sea Level): 2600
Area Classification: Outdoor, non-classified if more than 18 above discharge head
base.
Ambient Temperature (degrees F.): 68
Location: Indoor (Y/N): N

Outdoor (Y/N): Y

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 5,600
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 30
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

BHP at Rated Point: 55


Min. Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 64
Max. NPSH Required at Rated Capacity (Ft. Absolute):
Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 890
Constant (Y/N): N
Adjustable (Y/N): Y
DESIGN AND MATERIALS
Pump Type: Enclosed Line Shaft, VTSH
Bowl: Closed-grained cast iron, ASTM A48 CL30.
Bowl Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA40 300-350 Bhn.
Bowl Bearings: Fluted synthetic rubber with bronze, ASTM B584 C90500, shells.
Bowl bearings shall be enclosed and lubricated by the flushing water that lubricates
the line shaft bearings.
Column: Flanged type in lengths of not over 10 feet. Entire length of column contains
an internal vertical splitter vane to prevent trash accumulation. Coated and lined,
16-inch minimum size.
Line Shafting: Type 416 SST, Max. bearing span of 3 ft
Line Shaft Bearings: Fluted synthetic rubber with bronze, ASTM B584 C90500,
Shells.
Discharge Head:
Type: Aboveground, three section mitred, designed to prevent the collection
of stringy material by the use of a splitter vane.
Material: Fabricated Steel, ASTM A36/A36M.
Discharge Nozzle Size (inches): 16
ANSI

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 2

Flange Standard/Class: 150 pound

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Impeller:
Type: Enclosed solids handling type
Material: One-piece case iron ASTM A48 CL30
Impeller Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA15 190-241 Bhn or ASTM A743 CA40
300-350 Bhn
Head Shaft Material: Type 416 SST
Shaft Sealing:

Shaft Sleeve Material: Type 304 SST

Packing (Y/N) N

Mechanical (Y/N) Y

Type: Split
Seal Lubrication: Water (plant effluent)
Coupling: Falk (Y/N)

Fast: (Y/N)

Gear Type (Y/N)

Spring-Grid (Y/N)

Spacer (Y/N)

Manufacturer Standard (Y/N) Y


Baseplate Material:
Sole Plate (Y/N) Y

Material carbon steel_________

Soleplate: Provide for support of pump assembly, including thrust and dynamic loads,
as indicated. Top of soleplate shall be faced, drilled, and tapped for pump baseplate.
Motor Base Material:
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 60

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3

Synchronous Speed (rpm): 900


Service Factor: 1.0 Inverter Duty Rated
Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on
pump curve.
Enclosure: DIP _____ EXP ______ ODP ______ TEFC ___X___
CISD-TEFC ______ TEWAC ______ WPI ______ WPII ______

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Mounting Type:

Vertical Hollow Shaft

Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N) Y

Vertical Solid Shaft


ABMA 9 and ABMA 11, B-10 Motor Bearing Life (hrs): 50,000
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: __30 Hz____ min to ___60 Hz___ max. See
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems.
REMARKS Provide internal heater for the motor. Match the existing three pumps for
Installation. Provide a 2-inch threaded tap on top of pump discharge as shown on Drawings
for pressure gauge installation

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.03-02


Tag Numbers: AER-PMP-P-30781 (NOT IN CONTRACT)
Pump Name: West Boise WWTF South Plant ML Transfer Pump
Manufacturers and Product:

(1) Fairbanks Morse VTSH 16"


(2) Flowserve MVX

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Mixed Liquor (max. 0.5% total
suspended solids)
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal 68
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 85

Min 55

Viscosity Range:
pH: 6.5-8

Abrasive (Y/N):

Caused by: _Solids___________

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Caused by:

Corrosive (Y/N): N

Caused by:

Total suspended solids (mg/L) __3000____.


Largest diameter solid pump can pass (inches) __4____.
Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 38
Altitude (Feet above Mean Sea Level): 2659
Area Classification: Outdoor, non-classified if more than 18 above discharge head
base.
Ambient Temperature (degrees F.): 68
Location: Indoor (Y/N): N

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Outdoor (Y/N): Y

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Performance requirement shall be dependent on contractors selection of mixed liquor
transfer pump forcemain diameter per note on drawing W-YRD-ME-0435.
14 Diameter Forcemain:
Minimum: 2140

Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 5,350


Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 22

Minimum: 7

16 Diameter Forcemain:
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 5,350

Minimum: 2140

Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 19

Minimum: 6

Min. Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 75


Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 880
Constant (Y/N): N
Adjustable (Y/N): Y
DESIGN AND MATERIALS
Pump Type: Enclosed Line Shaft, VTSH
Bowl: Closed-grained cast iron, ASTM A48 CL30.
Bowl Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA40_300-350 Bhn
Bowl Bearings: Fluted synthetic rubber with bronze, ASTM B584 C90500, shells.
Bowl bearings shall be enclosed and lubricated by the flushing water that lubricates
the line shaft bearings.
Column: Flanged type in lengths of not over ten feet. Entire length of column
contains an internal vertical splitter vane to prevent trash accumulation. Coated and
lined, 16-inch minimum diameter.
Line Shafting: Type 416 SST, Max bearing span of 3 feet.
Line Shaft Bearings: Fluted synthetic rubber with bronze, ASTM B584 C90500,
shells

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Discharge Head:
Type: Aboveground, three section mitred, designed to prevent the collection
of stringy material by the use of a splitter vane.
Material: Fabricated Steel, ASTM A36/A36M
Discharge Nozzle Size (inches): 16
Flange Standard/Class: 150 pound ANSI
Impeller:
Type: Enclosed or semi open
Material: One-piece cast iron ASTM A48 CL30 or Bronze
Impeller Wear Rings: ASTM A743 CA15 190-241 Bhn or ASTM A743 CA40
300-350 Bhn
Head Shaft Material: Type 416 SST
Shaft Sealing:

Shaft Sleeve Material: Type 304 SST

Packing (Y/N) N

Mechanical (Y/N) Y

Type: Split
Seal Lubrication: Recycled Plant Effluent
Coupling: Falk (Y/N) ___N___ Fast: (Y/N) _N_____ Spring-Grid (Y/N) ____N__
Gear Type (Y/N) __N____ Spacer (Y/N) __Y____
Manufacturer Standard (Y/N) _____
Baseplate Material:
Sole Plate (Y/N) __Y____ Material Carbon Steel
Soleplate: Provide for support of pump assembly, including thrust and dynamic loads,
as indicated. Top of soleplate shall be faced, drilled, and tapped for pump baseplate.
Motor Base Material:
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 40

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3

Synchronous Speed (rpm): 900


PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Service Factor: 1.0 inverter duty rated


Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on
pump curve.
Enclosure: DIP _____ EXP ______ ODP ______ TEFC ___X___
CISD-TEFC ______ TEWAC ______ WPI ______ WPII ______
Mounting Type:

Vertical Hollow Shaft X

Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N) Y

Vertical Solid Shaft


ABMA 9 and ABMA 11, B-10 Motor Bearing Life (hrs): 50,000
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: __30 Hz__ min to __60 Hz__ max. See
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive Systems.
REMARKS Provide 1inch and 3/4 inch holes in base plate for air vent and pump frame
drain respectively located as shown on Drawings. Provide internal heater for the motor.

VERTICAL TURBINE SOLIDS


HANDLING PUMPS
44 42 56.03 SUPPLEMENT - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.05
HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBERS:
THK-PMP-P-71031: Fermentation Mixing Pump 1
THK-PMP-P-71032: Fermentation Mixing Pump 2
THK-PMP-P-71033: Fermentation Mixing Pump 3
PART 1
2.01

2.02

GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.

The Work of this section includes providing pump mixing systems as defined
herein and all appurtenant Work.

B.

Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the Primary Sludge Fermentation
tank mixing, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including, but
not necessarily limited to, electric motors, safety guards, and spare parts) be
supplied by one responsible system manufacturer or responsible system
supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system
from the responsible supplier of the equipment. The supplier shall furnish all
components and accessories of the system to enhance compatibility, ease of
operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place the equipment in
operation in conformance with the specified performance, features, and
functions indicated without altering or modifying the Contractors
responsibility under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to
the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified herein.

C.

General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which


contains information and requirements that apply to the Work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

B.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower
demand, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of
the pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately
the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and
minimum submergence required at the guarantee point.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings showing
the equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated mixing system and recirculation equipment.
e.
Motor information as specified in Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage
AC Induction Motors.
f.
Factory finish system data sheets.
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) analysis that models the flows
within each Primary Sludge Fermentation tank verifying that nozzle
location and orientation provides adequate mixing of the tank contents,
under service conditions specified herein. Adequate mixing shall be
provided to obtain suspended solids concentrations within 10 percent of
the average value regardless of location inside the tank. Model must
contain all structural and mechanical elements.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.

Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports and Log from actual
mixing pumps that will be used in the mixed systems for this Project.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that the factory finish
system is identical to the requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year. Include a list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Manual.

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 2

PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.

2.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

PART 2
3.01

Furnish complete mechanical seal, impeller, and cutter bar.


PRODUCTS

GENERAL
A.

Coordinate pump requirements with drive manufacturer and be responsible for


pump and drive requirements.

B.

Pumped Mixing System Manufacturer:


1.
2.

C.
3.02

If anchorage and support details, locations, sizes and materials are not
identified by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall provide support and
anchorage calculations stamped by an engineer registered in the state of
the project. Anchorage and support design criteria shall meet
manufacturers requirements, design loads provided in the General
Structural Notes on the Drawings, and all applicable codes and
standards. Provide ICC-ES report and special inspection requirements
for any post installed anchors in concrete and masonry. Anchor
calculations shall account for edge distance, concrete thickness and
other existing conditions which shall be field verified by the Contractor
and identified in the calculations and any related Drawings.

Rotamix as manufactured by Vaughan Co., Inc.


Or approved equal.

Mixing and Recirculation Pump Manufacturer: Vaughan Co., Inc.

MIXING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


A.

The Contractor shall furnish two complete mixing system, for two Primary
Sludge Fermentation Tanks, consisting of six floor-mounted mixing nozzle
assemblies in each tank, and three associated chopper pumps. The dimensions
of fermentation tanks shall be as shown on the Drawings. The nozzles shall be
designed to produce a rotational mixing pattern within the tank. The
manufacturer shall be responsible for determining mixing assembly quantity,
location, appropriate nozzle angles, and hydraulic performance of the pumps
and system as a whole. Mixing system shall be designed to adequately mix the
tank as specified under Article 3.03.C, with inner structural and mechanical
elements including but not limiting to concrete fillets and weirs, as shown on
Contract Drawings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Service Conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.

C.

The Contractor shall submit manufacturers standard warranties for equipment


to be furnished in accordance with this Section. The pump warranty shall be
manufacturers standard for 1 year. The nozzle warranty shall be a 10-year
nonprorated warranty, commencing on the initial startup date.

D.

A performance affidavit shall be supplied certifying that the system as


provided will meet or exceed the performance requirements for the specific
application if proposed system has less than a minimum of 10 years of proven
successful installations of the current design.

E.

Nozzle Construction:
1.

2.
3.
4.

3.03

Design Percentage Total Solids (TS) of Feed Sludge: 3 percent max.


Range 2 percent to 3 percent.
Design Temperature of Sludge: 40 degrees F to 70 degrees F.
Feed Sludge Flows: 115 gpm.
The sludge is anticipated to have low pH (normally above 5, but could
be down to approximately 4.5), high volatile fatty acid concentration
(could be up to 3,500 mg/L), and high H2S concentration (up to 20
mg/L in liquid phase or 50 ppmv in gas phase).

Nozzles: Shall be glass-lined cast ductile iron, with 1.0 inch nominal
wall thickness to protect against abrasive conditions, and a long straight
taper length of at least 10 inches.
Assembly Fittings: Shall be glass-lined cast ductile iron, with 150 pound
flanged piping connection.
Base: Shall be fabricated carbon steel, with -inch mounting holes for
5/8-inch anchor bolts.
Anchor Bolts: Shall be 5/8 -inch diameter minimum and sized by the
equipment supplier, and of sufficient length to support thrust loads from
nozzles. Construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

CHOPPER PUMPS
A.

Fermentation Tank Mixing Pumps 1, 2, and 3 (THK-PMP-P-71031,


THK-PMP-P-71032, and THK -PMP-P-71033):
1.
2.
3.

Capacity: Determined by mixing system manufacturer. One pump per


tank with a shared standby unit.
Head: Determined by mixing system manufacturer for the piping system
as shown on the Drawings.
rpm: 1,170.

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 4

PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.

B.

Pump shall be direct driven. Pump and motor orientation shall not
compromise clearance shown on mechanical Drawings for equipment
access.

Pump Construction:
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
6.

7.

Pumps shall be horizontal chopper type pumps with all appurtenances as


specified. The pumps shall be specifically designed to pump waste
solids at heavy consistencies. Materials shall be macerated and
conditioned by the pump as an integral part of the pumping action. The
pump must have demonstrated the ability to chop through and pump
high concentrations of solids such as plastics, heavy rags, grease and
hair balls, wood, paper products and stringy materials without plugging,
both in tests and field applications.
Casing: The pump casing shall be semi-concentric back pullout design,
with the first half of the circumference being cylindrical beginning after
the pump outlet, and the remaining circumference spiraling outward to
the 150-pound flanged centerline discharge. Casing shall be
ASTM A536 ductile cast iron with all water passages to be smooth, and
free of blowholes and imperfections for good flow characteristics. A
1/4-inch NPT pressure tap shall be included in the discharge flange.
Impeller: Shall be semi-open type with pump out vanes to reduce seal
area pressure. Chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished
by the action of the cupped and sharpened leading edges of the impeller
blades moving across the cutter bar at the intake openings, with a
maximum set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of
0.010-inch to 0.030-inch cold. Impeller shall be cast from ASTM A148
alloy steel, case hardened to minimum Rockwell C 60 and dynamically
balanced. The impeller shall have no axial adjustments and no
setscrews.
Cutter Bar: Shall be recessed into the pump bowl, with a funnel shaped
inlet opening, and shall extend diametrically across entire pump suction
opening. Cutter bar shall be cast from ASTM A536 ductile iron, or T1
alloy steel, hardened to minimum Rockwell C 50. Replaceable shear
bars shall be AISI 8620 or ASTM A148 cast alloy steel, case hardened
to minimum Rockwell C 60.
Pump Shafting: The pump shaft and impeller shall be supported by
AFBMA ball bearings. All shafting shall be AISI 4140 heat treated.
Bearings: Shaft thrust in both directions shall be taken up by two backto-back mounted single-row angular contact ball bearings. Two back-toback mounted single-row radial bearings shall also be provided. B10
bearing life shall be minimum 100,000 hours.
Bearing Housing: Shall be A536 ductile cast iron, and machined with
piloted bearing fits for concentricity of all components. Bearing housing
shall be oil bath lubricated with ISO Gr. 46 turbine oil and a side-

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

8.

9.

10.

11.

C.

3.04

mounted site glass to provide a permanently lubricated assembly.


Viton double lip seals riding on stainless steel shaft sleeves are to
provide sealing at each end of the bearing housing.
Seal: Flushless mechanical seal system specifically designed to require
no seal flush through the elimination of the stuffing box: The seal shall
be made of AISI Type 316 stainless steel and shall be cartridge-type
with Viton O-rings and tungsten carbide faces. The cartridge seal shall
be preassembled and pretested so that no seal settings or adjustments are
required. Any springs used to push the seal faces together must be
shielded from the fluid to be pumped. The cartridge shall also include a
17-4PH, heat-treated seal sleeve and an ASTM A536 ductile iron seal
gland. The mechanical seal faces shall be lubricated and cooled by a
separate oil chamber. The oil chamber shall include a 10 psi pressure
relief valve. The area between the seal oil chamber and bearing oil
chamber shall be vented and drained to prevent contamination of the
bearings.
Inlet Manifold: The pump assembly shall be mounted horizontally with
150-pound standard inlet flange, cleanout, 1/4-inch NPT suction
pressure tap, drain connection, and mounting feet.
Shaft Coupling: Bearing housing and motor stool design is to provide
accurate, self-aligning mounting for a C-flanged electric motor. Pump
and motor coupling shall be as manufactured by:
a.
T.B. Woods; Sureflex elastomeric type.
b.
Falk.
c.
Or equal.
The pump manufacturer shall provide a common pump and motor base
constructed of a minimum 3/8-inch thick fabricated steel, suitably
reinforced to support the full weight of the pump and motor.

Motors: Drive motors shall be inverter duty, horizontal, TEFC, 40 hp


minimum, 1.15 service factor, 460 volts, three-phase, 60-Hz. Motor nameplate
horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head capacity point on the pump
curve. See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 3/8-inch high


engraved block type equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily
visible location.

B.

Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

C.

Anchor Bolts: Sized by equipment manufacturer, 1/2-inch minimum diameter,


and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 6

PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.05

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

3.06

Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, System No. 5.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction,


electrical connection, and intended function.

B.

Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment and control panels actually
furnished.

C.

Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, performance
test logs, certified correct by a registered professional Engineer.

D.

Functional Test: Perform manufacturers standard motor test on equipment.


Include vibration test, as follows:
1.
2.

E.

Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
F.

Dynamically balance rotating parts of each pump and its driving unit
before final assembly.
Limits:
a.
Driving Unit Alone: Less than 80 percent of NEMA MG 1 limits.
b.
Complete Rotating Assembly, Including Coupling and Motor:
Less than 90 percent of limits established in the Hydraulic
Institute Standards.

Conduct on each pump.


Perform under simulated operating conditions.
Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.
Test Log: Record the following:
a.
Total head.
b.
Capacity.
c.
Horsepower requirements.
d.
Flow measured by factory instrumentation and storage volumes.
e.
Average distance from suction well water surface to pump
discharge centerline for duration of test.
f.
Pump inlet and outlet pressure converted to feet of liquid pumped
and corrected to pump discharge centerline.
g.
Driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase.
Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest in accordance with Hydraulic
Institute Standards if necessary.

Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.
PART 3
4.01

4.02

Hydrostatic Tests: Pump casing(s) tested at 150 percent of shutoff head. Test
pressure maintained for not less than 5 minutes.
EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4-inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for the pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so that
there is no change of level or springing of the baseplate when the anchor bolts
are tightened.

C.

Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned,
plumb, and level with the driven units and all interconnecting shafts and
couplings. Do not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D.

After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and
the concrete foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper
category, as specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove
wedges after grout is set and pack void with grout.

E.

Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump


flanges.

F.

Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Type 316 stainless steel, sized by
equipment manufacturer in accordance with Section 01 88 15, Seismic
Anchorage and Bracing.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

Field finish pumps as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating,


System No. 5.

B.

Field finish nozzle assemblies as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and


Coating, System No. 2.

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 8

PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.03

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump, system, and subsystem as specified


in Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
1.
2.

3.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
Vibration Test:
a.
Test with units installed and in normal operation, and discharging
to the connected piping systems at rates and with the actual
building structures and foundations provided shall not develop at
any frequency or in any plane, peak-to-peak vibration amplitudes
in excess of 3 mils.
b.
If units exhibit vibration in excess of the limits specified, adjust or
modify as necessary. Units which cannot be adjusted or modified
to conform as specified shall be replaced.
Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes.

B.

Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for


abnormally high temperatures.

C.

Performance Test:
1.
2.

In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standard 1.6, Centrifugal Pump


Test.
After startup of the fermentation process, perform a mixing test at each
mixing system using each pump to demonstrate adequate mixing.
a.
Perform at conditions stated in Article Mixing System
Description.
b.
Select three vertical lines and two depths in each tank.
c.
Take three Samples at each of two depths along each vertical line
using Van Doren sampler.
d.
Independent testing laboratory approved by Engineer will perform
residue test on each Sample. Mean value of total residue for three
Samples at each depth will be used to determine if suspended
solids concentrations of all samples are within 10 percent of the
average value regardless of location inside the tank.
e.
All testing and sampling shall conform to procedures established
in latest edition of Standard Methods for Examination of Water
and Wastewater.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.

B.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
1 person-day for post-startup training of Owner's personnel. Training
shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each
training activity has been reviewed by Owner.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
END OF SECTION

HORIZONTAL CHOPPER PUMP


AND MIXING ASSEMBLIES
44 42 56.05 - 10

PW/WBG/360314
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.06
IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section:


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

7.
1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.03

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):


a.
9, Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
b.
11, Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Gray Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, and 150.
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b.
A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon,
Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.
Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS):
a.
11.6, Submersible Pump Test.
b.
14.6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance
Tests.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
70, National Electrical Code.
b.
497, Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable
Liquids, Gases, or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified)
Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to ratings and nomenclature of Hydraulic Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.
2.
3.

Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.


Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and
identification of materials of construction, including cable seal details.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand,
and pump efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff
to maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
1.04

demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at


guarantee point.
For variable speed motors, provide variable speed curves for every
50 rpm over the operational range.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
Motor data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
Adjustable frequency drive data, in accordance with the requirements of
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
Factory-finish system.
L-10 bearing life calculations per ABMA.
If required, wiring for motor protection module.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Factory and Field Performance Test Reports and Log.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that factory finish system
meets requirements specified herein.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of
1 year and 5 years. Include list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for this set of pumps:


1.
2.

One set mechanical seals.


One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Immersible, vertical shaft, centrifugal nonclog type, for pumping wastewater.

B.

Designed for continuous operation under submerged, partially submerged, or


dry pit installed conditions, and continuous operation when totally dry without
damage to pump or motor.

C.

Pump and Electrical Driver: Meet requirements for class, group, and division
location in accordance with NFPA 70.

D.

Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating


system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller.

E.

Pumps furnished under this section to be provided by a single manufacturer.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.03

Specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

COMPONENTS
A.

Equipment consists of a base-mounted, dry-pit immersible solids-handling


pump complete with motor, control system, mounting base, and suction
elbow.

B.

Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Motor and rotating parts shall be removable from motor end of pump.
Mating surfaces to be watertight and fitted with nitrile O-rings.
Pumps fitted with dynamically balanced nonclog impellers designed to
pass course solids and stringy materials.

Base and Suction Elbow


1.

2.

A rugged, heavy-duty fabricated steel base with openings large enough


to permit access to the suction elbow and cleanout, bolted directly to the
volute, shall be provided. The base shall be designed to support the
assembled weight of the pump and motor.
A cast iron suction elbow with 1/2-inch or 1/4 inch gauge connection,
contoured handhole cleanout, and a 125-pound flange, with flat or
slotted, raised face, conforming to ANSI drilling shall be furnished.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

D.

Oil chamber between seals shall be equipped with drain and inspection plug.
Plug shall have positive antileak seal and shall be easily accessible from
outside.

E.

Motor nameplate horsepower not to be exceeded at head-capacity point on


pump curve.

F.

Pump motor and sensor cables shall be suitable for immersible pump
application and cable sizing shall conform to NFPA 70 specifications for
pump motors. Cables shall be of sufficient length to reach junction boxes
without strain or splicing.

G.

Motor Protection Module: provide pump with a motor protection module for
remote mounting. Contract Drawings are based on first named immersible
pump manufacturer and motor protection module. If pump and motor
protection module other than first named manufacturer is provided, provide
revised wiring for the motor protection module.
1.

2.

2.04

The stator winding and lead shall be insulated with moisture-resistant


Class F insulation for continuous duty in 40 degree C ambient. The
motor shall be designed for continuous duty capable of ten (10) starts
per hour. Automatic reset, normally closed thermal overloads shall be
imbedded in the motor windings to provide overheating protection.
Motor winding thermostats must be connected to an electric controller
per local and state codes and the National Electric Code.
Two moisture detection probes shall be installed so that they will detect
moisture in either the seal or stator cavity measuring resistivity between
the probes. They shall be wired internally to the control cable
connection at the top of the motor. Float type devices located in the
rotor/stator area or single probe-to-ground moisture detectors measuring
continuity are not acceptable. O-ring sealed inspection plugs shall be
provided in the mechanical seal oil chamber for ease of inspection,
draining and filling of oil.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch diestamped equipment tag number securely mounted in readily visible location.

B.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer, and
as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. Coat in accordance with
Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

2.06

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating.

B.

Manufacturers standard epoxy system for continuous submergence in


corrosive water.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Pump:
1.

2.
3.

B.
PART 3
3.01

3.02

Submersible Motor Functional Test: In accordance with HIS 11.6.


EXECUTION

INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Connect piping without imposing strain to flanges.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Factory Performance Test:


a.
In accordance with HIS 11.6, Level A for submersible pump tests.
b.
Include test data sheets, curve test results, and performance test
logs.
Conduct on each pump.
Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions.
a.
Throttle discharge valve to obtain pump data points on curve at
2/3, 1/3, and shutoff conditions.

Equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Test: Conduct on each pump.


1.
2.
3.
4.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for
abnormally high temperatures.
Test for continuous 3-hour period.
Test Report Requirements: In accordance with Hydraulic Institute
Standards for submersible pump tests HIS 14.6 and 11.6.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06- 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.
3.05

1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1/2 person-day for functional and performance testing and completion
of Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
1/2 person-day for facility startup.
1/2 person-day for post-startup training of Owners personnel. Training
shall not commence until accepted detailed lesson plan for each training
activity has been reviewed by Owner.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are part of this
Specification.
1.

Data Sheets: Pump and Motor.


END OF SECTION

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

IMMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.06-01


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63061, THK-PMP-P-63062
Pump Name: PFLT Pump No. 1, PFLT Pump No. 2
Manufacturer and Model Number:

(1) Fairbanks Morse 4 D5432WD


(2) Grundfos (Yeomans) Series 9235, Model 4123,
with 210CLC frame

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent Solids): Sludge Thickening Filtrate
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60
Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F:

Vapor Pressure at 60 Degrees F: _0.25 psi


Abrasive (Y/N) N

Max 70

Min 45

Viscosity Range: 1.1 cp


pH: 6 to 8

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total suspended solids (mg/L): 500 to 3,000


Minimum diameter solid pump can pass (inches): 2
Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 33
Suction Pressure (Ft): Max ____4.3____ Rated___3.8_____
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: 551 (Primary design point); 420 (Secondary design point at
reduced pump speed)
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: 10.2 (Primary design point); 5.8 (Secondary design point
at reduced pump speed)
Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): 30
Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%):60
Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 855 rpm Constant (Y/N): N
Adjustable (Y/N): Y

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

DESIGN AND MATERIALS


Pump Type: Heavy-Duty Nonclog (Y/N) Y

Other:

Volute Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48


Pump Casing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Motor Housing Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Wear Rings Front head (Y/N): Y Material: stainless steel
Wear Ring Impeller (Y/N): Y
than the fronthead wear ring

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 2

Material: stainless steel, approximately 50 Brinell softer

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

IMMERSIBLE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.06-02


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63061, THK-PMP-P-63062
Pump Name: PFLT Pump No. 1, PFLT Pump No. 2
Elastomers: Nitrile Rubber
Fasteners: Stainless Steel
Impeller: Type: Double-Shrouded Non-Clog (Y/N): Y
Material: Cast Iron ASTM A48

Other:

Shaft Material: 416 stainless steel stainless steel.


Suction Elbow: Cast Iron ASTM A48
Double Mechanical Seal (Y/N): Y

Bearing Life (Hrs):

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors)


Horsepower: 3 HP max.

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3 Synchronous Speed (rpm): 855

CLASSIFICATION: Unclassified
Adjustable Speed Drive Range: ___650_____ min to ____855____ max, See
Section 26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
Other Features:
Moisture Detection Switches (Y/N): Y
Thermal Protection Embedded in Windings (Y/N): Y
REMARKS:
When viewed from drive end, the discharge position shall be #13, counterclockwise rotation
for Fairbanks Morse pumps, or position 5, left hand rotation for Grundfos (Yeomans) pumps.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 3, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

IMMERSIBLE PUMPS
44 42 56.06 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.09
NON-CLOG DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.03

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).


American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): B16.1, Cast Iron
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
ASTM International (ASTM): A48/A48M, Standard Specification for
Gray Iron Castings.
Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors
and Generators.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each pump assembly.
b.
Complete pump and motor catalog information, descriptive
literature, specifications, and identification of materials of
construction.
c.
Performance data curves at nominal pump speed showing head,
capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump
efficiency over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to
maximum capacity. Indicate separately head, capacity, horsepower
demand, NPSHR, and overall efficiency required at Rated
Conditions and at Secondary Conditions (if applicable).
d.
Certified detail structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings
showing equipment dimensions, arrangement, assembly, including
locations and type of connections and weights of major equipment
and components.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
1.04

Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and


numbers.
Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor
manufacturer, and including any motor modifications.
Factory finish system.
Bearing life calculation confirming compliance with L10 bearing
life requirement.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that factory finish system is
identical to requirements specified herein.
Factory Functional Test Reports and Log.
Field Test Reports and Log.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for period of
1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for each set of pumps:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Complete set(s) bearings.


Complete set(s) gaskets and O-ring seals.
Complete set(s) of shaft sleeves.
Complete set(s) keys, dowels, pins, etc.
Complete mechanical seal(s).
Impeller.
Impeller shaft.
One complete set of any special tools required to dismantle pump.

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

2.02

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Provide a complete, coordinated, and fully functional operating system.

B.

Coordinate pump requirements with motor manufacturer and be responsible


for pump and motor requirements.

C.

Pumps supplied under this section to be a standard product of manufacturer


and to have proven reliability.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.03

Specific service, performance, and design requirements are attached to this


section as supplements.

EQUIPMENT
A.

Pump:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
B.

Heavy-duty, solids handling, non-clog, dry pit design.


Configuration: See Supplement.
See Drawings for pump orientation and rotation.
Continuously rising head-capacity curve from runout to shutoff.
Designed to operate continuously at any point on specified operating
range of performance curve without cavitation, overheating, or
excessive vibration.
Motor nameplate horsepower rating not to be exceeded by pump brake
horsepower required at any point on nominal pump performance curve.

Casing:
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.

Back pullout design allowing for removal of rotating element without


disturbing piping connections.
Heavy wall, one-piece volute construction with integral flanged
discharge flange and smooth fluid passages. Provide drilled and tapped
volute priming and drain connections.
Provide handhole for cleanout purposes at volute centerline located to
provide access to interior of pump.
Flanges:
a.
Conform to ASME B16.1, Class 125-pound, flat face standard.
b.
Provide 1/2-inch gauge connection drilled and tapped in discharge
flange.
Diffusion vanes or stationary guides are not allowed.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Suction Cover (Fronthead):


1.
2.
3.

D.

Stuffing Box Cover (Backhead):


1.

2.

3.
E.

Single-piece construction designed with integral stuffing box suitable


for use of either conventional packing or mechanical seal. Drilled and
tapped 3/4-inch drain connection and large openings to allow easy
access to stuffing box.
Designed for installation of a minimum of five rings of packing and a
split type lantern ring and a split type gland follower. Provide stuffing
box with 1/4-inch minimum drilled and tapped connection for injection
or venting of the stuffing box.
Machine register fitted to casing.

Bearing Frame and Bearings:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
F.

Single-piece construction designed to provide even flow to impeller eye.


Flanged connection conforming to ASME B16.1, Class 125-pound, flat
face standard.
Machine register fitted to casing.

Removable, single-piece construction.


Machined for accurate bearing alignment and completely enclosing shaft
between bearings.
Provide with retainer covers on inboard and outboard ends of frame
equipped with lip-type grease seals to prevent entrance of contaminants.
Single or double row bearings at inboard and outboard ends designed to
take radial, weight, and thrust loads of pump and associated shafting
loads. Bearings to be designed for an L10 life of 50,000 hours per
ABMA at best efficiency point.
Provide jacking screws for adjustment of impeller.
Grease packed at factory and provided with grease fittings for bearing
lubrication.

Impeller:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Single suction, enclosed, non-clogging type design with extremely


smooth passageways to prevent clogging.
Single-piece construction.
Secure to shaft with stainless steel bolt, washer, and key to prevent
loosening from either forward or reverse rotation.
Dynamically balanced to assure vibration limits for pump are not
exceeded.

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

G.

Wear ring securely fastened to impeller with recessed stainless steel


screws. Impeller wear ring to be a minimum of 50 Brinell softer than
suction head wear ring.

Shaft:
1.
2.

3.
4.

Accurately machined over entire length and precision ground at bearing


locations.
Designed to transmit full motor horsepower with a liberal safety factor
to carry maximum loads imposed and to meet pump vibration
requirements.
Provide keyways at both ends.
Provide renewable, hooked shaft sleeve positively secured to shaft to
prevent leakage.

H.

Pump Base: Rugged, heavy duty, with ample strength for support of entire
pump and imposed static and operational loads.

I.

Coupling:
1.
2.

3.

4.
J.

High Ring Base:


1.

2.
K.

Designed to provide flexible connection between pump and motor.


Flexible coupling to be designed to carry maximum horsepower of
motor, including service factor, and additional forces imposed by
rotating assembly.
Flexible coupling selection to take into account torsional analysis of
complete pump and motor drive system. There is to be no torsional
critical speed within 15 percent above or below specified speed range.
Number of vanes times the rpm are part of this speed range.
Provide fabricated coupling guard to comply with OSHA safety
standards.

Cast iron or fabricated steel of adequate height to allow access to


flexible coupling and designed to carry weight of motor without undue
vibration to pump assembly.
Provide with shaft guard to comply with OSHA safety standards.

Motor: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, and the


datasheet at the end of the specification.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

2.05

ACCESSORIES
A.

Lifting Lugs: Provide suitably attached for equipment assemblies and


components weighing over 100 pounds.

B.

Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16-gauge stainless steel


identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component
and control panel in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 3/8-inch high
engraved block type black enamel filled equipment identification number and
letters indicated in this Specification and as shown.

C.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer,


1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications, and Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.06

Manufacturer to prepare, prime and finish coat in accordance with


Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Tests and Adjustments:


1.
2.
3.

Factory testing to be in accordance with the standards of the Hydraulic


Institute, latest edition.
Test all pumps actually furnished. Use actual motor to be provided for
factory tests.
Factory tests to include the following:
a.
Hydrostatic testing of pump pressure containing components, to
include as a minimum, pump volute, suction cover, and stuffing
box cover. Test pressure to be the greater of 150 percent of rated
condition or 125 percent of pressure at rated speed with discharge
valve closed. Test for 10 minutes.
b.
Include complete test records, certified correct by an authorized
representative of the pump manufacturer of each test performed.
c.
Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction
Motors.
d.
Make necessary adjustments, realignments, and retest to bring
pumps into compliance.

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.

C.

Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and all interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do
not compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D.

After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.

E.

Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump


flanges.

F.

Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Conduct on each pump, system, and subsystem as specified in


Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper
alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
Flow Output: Measure using plant instrumentation.
Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for
abnormally high temperatures.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.03

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.
3.04

1/2 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1/2 person-day for functional testing and completion of Manufacturers
Certificate of Proper Installation.
1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
1/2 person-day for facility startup.
1/2 person-day for post-startup training. Training shall not commence
until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each training activity has been
reviewed by Owner.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.

Pump Data Sheet.


END OF SECTION

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.09-_


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63031, THK-PMP-P-63032
Pump Name: VFLT Pump No. 1, VFLT Pump No. 2
Manufacturer and Model Number:

(1) Fairbanks Morse 5400BLADELESS 2" 5412K


(2) Grundfos pumps, type 2110, frame LLC4

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Sludge Thickening Filtrate
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 60

Max:

70

Min: 45

Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F: __1___ Viscosity Range: ___1.1cp___


Vapor Pressure at 60 Degrees F:
Abrasive (Y/N)

0.25 psi

pH:

5 to 7

caused by ______

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N):

caused by ______

Corrosive caused by low pH, presence of volatile fatty acid


Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 500 3,000
Min. NPSH Available (Ft. Absolute): 30
Area Classification: Unclassified
Ambient Temperature (F): 55 to 75
Location Indoor/Outdoor: Indoor
Altitude: 2575 feet
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Capacity (US gpm): Rated: _ 161__ Secondary: 130
Total Dynamic Head (Ft): Rated: __69.3___ Secondary: ___46.0___
BHP at Rated Point:

6 HP max. Secondary:

3.5 HP max

NPSH Required, Max. (Ft Absolute) at Rated Point: _25 feet; Secondary: 15 feet
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Maximum Shutoff Pressure (Ft): _100__


Min. Rated Pump Hydraulic Efficiency at Rated Capacity (%): 47
Max. Pump Speed at Rated Capacity (rpm): 1750
Constant Speed: ___N___
Adjustable Speed: __Y___ Minimum Speed: 1150
Maximum Head, Rated Impeller (ft) at rated flow: 116
Maximum Power, Rated Impeller (BHP) at rated flow: 10
Sphere Size Required (to pass through impeller), Min. (in): 1.5
PUMP CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
Configuration:

Horizontal, Frame Mounted: Y

Vertical, Close-Coupled: ______


Vertical, Extension Shafting: ______
Size: Suction (in.): 2 or 4 Discharge (in.): 2 or 4
Casing:

Single Volute: Y

Tangential Discharge: Y
Impeller:

Enclosed:

Centerline Discharge: ______

Two Vane, or Bladeless

Wear Rings: Suction Cover: __Y____ Impeller: ___Y___


Axial Type: ______ Radial Type: ______ L Type: ______
Bearings L10 Life: 100,000 Hr: ______ 50,000 Hr: Y
Shaft Sleeve: Yes X

25,000 Hr: ______

No ______

Pump Base: Heavy Duty Fabricated Steel: X


Cast Iron Combination Base Elbow: ______
Cast Mounting Pads Integral With Casing: ______
Suction Elbow:

Yes ______ No

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 2

Type: ______
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Material: Cast Iron, ASTM A48 Class 30: ______


With 3% Nickel: ______
Coupling:

Standard Flexible Type:

Spacer Type: ______

Manufacturer: ______ Manufacturers Standard:


Seal:

Packing: ______
Mechanical Seal: ___Y___ Single: ______ Double: ___Y___
Mechanical Seal Manufacturer/Model: ______
Lubrication: _Flush water_____

Extension:

Solid Type: ______ Tubular Type: ______

Shafting:

No of Segments: ______Max Drive Shaft Segment Length (in): ______

Materials:

Pump Castings (includes casing, suction cover, stuffing box


cover, bearing frame):

Cast Iron, ASTM A48/A48M Class 30

Or, Cast Iron, ASTM A48/A48M Class 35


Impeller:

Cast Iron, ASTM A48/A48M Class 30

Pump Shaft: High Strength Steel

With 3% Nickel ____


X

With 3% Nickel ____


X

With 3% Nickel ____

AISI 1045 Steel, HR ______

Type 4140 Alloy Steel ______ Type 304 Stainless Steel ______
Shaft Sleeve: Hardened Stainless Steel

Wear Rings: Hardened Stainless Steel

Packing:

Corrosion-Resistant Bronze _____

Graphite Impregnated Braided Synthetic ______

Lantern Ring:

Bronze ______ Teflon ______

Follower Gland:

Bronze ______ Cast Iron ______ Steel ______

Mechanical Seal: Buna N ______ Viton

EPT ______

Carbon _____ Tungsten Carbide _____ Silicone Carbide


18-8 Stainless Steel ______ Type 316 Stainless Steel
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Extension
Shafting:

Steel ______ Fiber Reinforced Composite ______

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors)


Horsepower: __10 HP max__ Voltage: __460__ Phase: ___3___ Hertz:

60

Synchronous Speed (rpm): __1800____


Service Factor (at max. ambient temp.): 1.0______ 1.15 _Y____
Insulation Class: ______Temperature Rise: ______
Inverter Duty Rated (Y/N): _Y_____ Thermal Protection: ______
Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on
pump curve.
Enclosure: DIP _____ EXP _____ ODP _____ TEFC X
TENV _____ WPI _____ WPII _____ SUBM _____
Mounting Type: Horizontal

CISD-TEFC _____

Vertical Solid Shaft: _____

Adjustable Speed Drive: __1150____ min to _1750_____ max. See Section 26 29 23,
Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System.
REMARKS Pump rotation and position shall be as shown on the Drawings. Suction and
Discharge connections shown on the Drawings are based on first named manufacturers.
Coordinate with pump manufacturer and modify fittings as necessary to connect to pumps if
suction and discharge sizes are different.

NON-CLOG DRY-PIT
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
44 42 56.09 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.13
PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.

1.02

This section defines the design, construction, and performance requirements


of the progressing cavity pumps, motors, and associated control panels.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.

1.03

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.04

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).


Hydraulic Institute Standards (HIS).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors
and Generators.

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to the ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower and
demand over the entire operating range of the pump, from shutoff
to maximum capacity.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing
the equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated equipment.
e.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
f.
Complete motor data, as required by Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
g.
Factory finish system.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

h.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
1.05

Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as


required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that factory finish system is
identical to the requirements specified herein.
Factory Functional and Performance Test Reports and Log.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price
information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for this set of pumps:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Complete set packing.


Complete set of bearings.
Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals.
Complete set rod washers.
Complete set keys, dowels, pins, etc.
Three stators.
One rotor.
One connecting rod with one pair of universal joint(s), as required by
pump type.
One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.
Where indicated on pump data sheets, one complete spare pump, on the
shelf, with motor and other required accessories for installation and
startup.

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

2.02

2.03

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Coordinate pump requirements with drive manufacturer and be responsible for


pump and drive requirements.

B.

Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated operating


system complete with pump, drive, and speed controller.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

B.

No or-equal or substitute products will be considered.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Stator Thermal Protection: Provide for pumps where indicated in supplements


and as specified below:
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Stator thermal protection (run dry protection) shall shut pump down
before stator damage occurs.
Provide thermowell drilled and tapped into stator and thermocouple for
measurement of temperature at pump stator to rotor interface.
Provide temperature controller in NEMA 4X enclosure, with dual
display for stator temperature and alarm set-point with adjustable
hysteresis to prevent on/off cycling of pump when coming off an alarm.
Temperature controller shall have a 120 Vac rated, normally open, dry
contact, that closes when temperature sensor reaches alarm set-point.
Provide thermocouple cable between thermocouple and temperature
controller.

B.

Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch


die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in a readily visible
location.

C.

Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

D.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, 1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as
specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

E.

Pump Drive: The pump drive shall be a gear-type universal joint or pin joint.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.04

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.05

Prepare, prime, and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Inspections: Inspect control panels for required construction, electrical


connection, and intended function.

B.

Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all equipment and control panels actually
furnished.

C.

Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets, curve test results, and
performance test logs.

D.

Functional Test: Perform manufacturers standard test on equipment.

E.

Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

F.

Factory Performance Test:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Conduct on each pump.


Conduct in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards.
Perform under simulated operating conditions.
Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.
Test Log: Record the following:
a.
Total head.
b.
Capacity.
c.
Horsepower requirements.
d.
Flow measured by factory instrumentation and storage volumes.
e.
Average distance from suction well water surface to pump
discharge centerline for duration of test.
f.
Pump discharge pressure converted to feet of liquid pumped and
corrected to pump discharge centerline.
g.
Calculated velocity head at the discharge flange.
h.
Field head.
i.
Driving motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase.
Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest in accordance with Hydraulic
Institute Standards if necessary.

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide a level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of the baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.

C.

Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned, plumb,
and level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D.

After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the
proper elevation, grout space between bottom of baseplate and concrete
foundation with a poured, nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as
specified in Section 03 62 00, Nonshrink Grouting. Remove wedges after
grout is set and pack void with grout.

E.

Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump


flanges.

F.

Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

G.

Pipe pump drain(s) to hub drain.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

Equipment as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating,


System No. 5.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump.


1.
2.
3.

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
Flow Output: Measured by plant instrumentation and storage volumes.
Operating Temperatures: Monitor bearing areas on pump and motor for
abnormally high temperatures.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Performance Test:
1.
2.
3.

3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.
3.05

In accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards.


Performance testing with clean water shall be performed as described in
Section 01 91 14, Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.
During unit process startup, performance testing with primary clarifier
skimmings shall be performed as described in Section 01 91 14,
Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

2 person-days for installation assistance and inspection.


2 person-days for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
1 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
1 person-day for facility startup.
1 person-day for post-startup training of Owners personnel.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENT
A.

The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this


Specification.
1.

Polymer Feed Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 Data Sheet.


END OF SECTION

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.13


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63121, 63122, 63123, and 63124
Pump Name: Polymer Feed Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4
Manufacturer and Model Number:

(1) Seepex BN2-12


(2) Moyno 1000

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Polymer solution, 0.2% to 1% concentration
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 70

Max: 80

Min: 50

Viscosity Range: 900 to 2,000 cps

Specific Gravity at 60 Degrees F:


pH:
Abrasive (Y/N): N

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Inlet Pressure at Pump (psig): -3.9 minimum


Min. Net Positive Inlet Pressure Available (psia): 9.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Rated Capacity: 8.5

US gpm at 90 psi.

Range (US gpm): 0.85 to 8.5


Max. Pump Speed (rpm): 400
Speed Range (rpm):

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

Constant (Y/N):

Adjustable (Y/N): Y

Constant Torque (Y/N):

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.13


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63121, 63122, 63123, and 63124
DESIGN AND MATERIALS
Pump Body Material: Steel or C.I.

Drive Housing Material:

Pump Stages:
Connections:
Suction: Flanged: X Flange Type:
Discharge: Flanged: X Flange Type:

Open-Throat:
Screwed:

Screwed:

Suction Port:
Stator Material: Fluoroelastomer 70 Durometer, or Viton Stator Thermal Protection
(Y/N): Y
Rotor Material: Type 316 SST Chrome Plated, duktil coated
Drive Shaft Material:

Connecting Rod Material:


Joints: Gear Type Universal (Y/N): Y

Pin Type Universal (Y/N): N Other:

Shaft Sleeve (Y/N):


Shaft Seal: (Y/N):
Lantern Ring (Y/N):
Mechanical (Y/N):

Material:
Material:

N
N
Y

Material:
Type: single, flushless

Lubrication: product lubricated


ABMA B-10 Bearing Life (hrs): 50,000
Coupling:

Falk (Y/N):
Gear Type (Y/N):

Baseplate: Design:
Drive Type:

Direct-Coupled: X Belt:
Close Coupled Gear Reducer:

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT - 2

Lubrication:
Fast (Y/N):
Manufacturer Standard (Y/N):

Material: Steel
Hydrostatic Adjustable Speed:
Other:

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.13


Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63121, 63122, 63123, and 63124
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 2

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3

Service Factor: 1.15

Base Speed (rpm): 1,800

Inverter Duty (Y/N): Y

Motor nameplate horsepower shall not be exceeded at any head-capacity point on


pump curve.
Enclosure: DIP
WPII
SUBM

EXP

ODP

TEFC X CISD-TEFC

Drive Arrangement: In-Line: X


Horizontal Offset:

TENV

Vertical Z:
C-Face Mounted:

WPI

Piggy Back:

Nonreverse Ratchet (Y/N): N


REMARKS: Manufacturer to supply missing data. Pump/drive rotation shall be
Counterclockwise, with horizontal suction connections. Orientations of the suction
connections for individual pumps shall be as shown on Drawings.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2012 CH2M HILL

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMPS


44 42 56.13 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.14
LOBE PUMPS

PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
1.02

DEFINITIONS
A.

1.03

American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA).


American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
ASTM International (ASTM):
a.
A48/A48M, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
b.
D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber PropertyDurometer
Hardness.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): MG 1, Motors
and Generators.

Terminology pertaining to pumping unit performance and construction shall


conform to ratings and nomenclature of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
b.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
c.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower
demand, and pump efficiency over entire operating range of
pump, from shutoff to maximum capacity. Indicate separately the
head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and
minimum submergence required at guarantee point.
d.
Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings showing
equipment dimensions, size, and locations of connections and
weights of associated equipment.
e.
Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and
numbers.
f.
Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor
manufacturer, and including motor modifications.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

g.
h.
B.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
1.04

Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by


Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.
Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that factory-applied coating
system(s) is identical to requirements specified herein.
Factory Test Report, as well as field Functional and Performance Test
Reports and Log.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain equipment in service for a period
of 1 year. Include list of special tools required for checking, testing,
parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for
use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.05

Factory finish system.


Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as
required by Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Rotary lobe pump manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for each set of pumps:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 2

Complete set of bearings.


Complete set gaskets and O-ring seals.
Two shaft sleeves if used.
Complete set keys, dowels, pins.
Two complete mechanical seals.
One set wear plates.
One set housing segments or radial liners.
One pair rotors or rotor tips for two rotors.
One complete set of special tools required to dismantle pump.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be


products of:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Vogelsang.
Boerger.
LobePro.

ROTARY LOBE POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP


A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

B.

Coordinate pump requirements with drive manufacturer and be


responsible for pump and drive requirements.
Where adjustable speed drives are required, furnish a coordinated
operating system complete with pump and inverter duty drive.
Pumping units required under this section shall be complete.

Pump Design:
1.
2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.
8.

Some specific requirements are attached to this section as supplements.


Designed and fabricated for 24-hour continuous duty at any and all
points within specified range of operation, without overheating and
without excessive vibration or strain.
Parts shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength,
stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for service to be
performed. Provide space for inspection, repairs, and adjustment.
Working parts of pumps and motors, such as bearings, wearing rings,
shaft, sleeves shall be interchangeable between like units and such that
Owner may, at any time in future, obtain replacement and repair parts
for those furnished in original equipment.
Nameplate ratings of motors shall not be exceeded, nor shall design
service factor be reduced when pump is operating at point on its
characteristic curve up to maximum flow specified herein.
Provide mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors in
accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. Unless otherwise
specified, provide rigid painted steel or stainless steel guards on rotating
assemblies. Guards shall be removable only by use of a tool.
Noise level of pump system, unless otherwise noted, shall not exceed
limits established by HI 3.1-3.5-2008 paragraph 3.3.17.3.
Lubrication fitting shall be brought to outside of equipment so they are
readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers,
plates, housings, or guards.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.

C.

Pump Castings:
1.

2.

D.

Pump Rotor Housing: Pump casing shall be manufactured in a single


block construction, equipped with radial liners that can be replaced to
restore running clearance to protect the pump casing. Multi-piece
construction with provisions to allow adjustment of rotor running
clearance at least twice is also acceptable.
Materials:
a.
Fabricated of ASTM A48, Class 30 or higher cast iron for
Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63111 and THK-PMP-P63112.
b.
Fabricated of stainless steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THKPMP-P-63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge
Pumps THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.

Wear Plates:
1.
2.
3.
4.

E.

Mechanical seals, wear plates and rotors shall be replaceable by


removing front cover of rotor housing without disassembly of pump unit
or pipe system.

Rear of pump rotor casing and front cover shall be protected with
replaceable wear plates having a minimum Brinell hardness of 500.
Front cover wear plate shall be reversible.
Wear Plate Bolts: Bolts that secure wear plates to castings inside pump
assembly shall be stainless steel, hex head type.
Materials for wear plates and radial liners, if included:
a.
Fabricated of hardened steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THKPMP-P-63111 and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Fabricated of stainless steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THKPMP-P-63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge
Pumps THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.

Rotors:
1.
2.

3.

4.

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 4

Driven through positive timing gears running in oil.


Solid cast-iron rotor cores shall be covered with a layer of abrasionresistant elastomeric material. Alternatively, pump may utilize rotors
with replaceable elastomer tips.
Geometry:
a.
Rotor core shall be same as that of finished rotor.
b.
Helical with three or four lobes to provide a near pulseless flow.
Designed for pumping fermented primary sludge, thickened fermented
primary sludge, or thickened waste activated sludge as described at the

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

F.

Shafts:
1.
2.

G.

Fabricated of alloy steel AISI A4140 or carbon steel C45.


Protected from wetting by fluid being pumped or fabricated of carbon
steel with ceramic coated stainless steel sleeves through seal area.

Mechanical Seals:
1.
2.
3.
4.

H.

end of the specification section. The sludge contain organic solids, small
inorganic particles, and grit.
Materials:
a.
Fabricated of Buna-N at an average durometer hardness of 70 as
per ASTM D2240 for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P63111 and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Fabricated of EPDM for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge Pumps
THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.

Mechanical style, cartridge style or component type mechanical seals


that use bushings to permanently place seals are acceptable.
Seal Holders: Fabricated of materials that are suitable for prolonged
corrosion and chemical resistance.
Pumps that utilize packing glands or require external flushing for
lubrication and cooling are not acceptable.
Materials and construction:
a.
Duronit seal faces, Buna-N O-rings for Thickened Sludge Pumps
THK-PMP-P-63111 and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Silicon carbide seal faces with EPDM o-rings for Thickened
Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63113 and THK-PMP-P-63114 and
Fermented Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-71041 and
THK-PMP-P-71042.

Quench/Blocking Chamber:
1.

2.

3.

Oil-filled quench/blocking chamber located behind mechanical seal, and


in front of bearing housing lip seal shall be molded into casting of
pump.
Chamber shall be suitable for fill, from side of pump, through nipples
and have an external sight glass or oil bottle for visual inspection of
status of mechanical seal operation.
Oil shall provide lubrication and cooling of seals.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

I.

Flanges and Inlet/Outlet Ports:


1.
2.
3.
4.

J.

Pump Front Cover:


1.
2.
3.

K.

Provide access to pump chamber without disconnecting pipe work or


bearings.
When opened shall provide unhindered access to rotors, wear plate, and
mechanical seals.
Materials:
a.
Hardened steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63111
and THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Stainless steel for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63113
and THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge Pumps
THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.

Bearings:
1.
2.

L.

Port Connection: ANSI 125-pound or 150-pound rated or greater.


Inlet and outlet ports on pump casting shall be rectangular, with fittings
and flanges bolted to ports.
Ports shall be oriented horizontally without offset unless otherwise
shown on Drawings.
Materials:
a.
Galvanized steel flanges, Buna-N flange gasket, and cast iron
ports for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63111 and
THK-PMP-P-63112.
b.
Stainless steel flanges, EPDM flange gasket, and stainless steel
ports for Thickened Sludge Pumps THK-PMP-P-63113 and
THK-PMP-P-63114 and Fermented Sludge Pumps
THK-PMP-P-71041 and THK-PMP-P-71042.

Sized to withstand maximum radial or axial load carried by shafts for


continuous duty.
Minimum ABMA L10 Bearing Life:
a.
Running at Steady or Constant Speed, Load, Pressure and
Temperature: 100,000 hours.
b.
Operated with Variable Frequency Drive: 50,000 hours.

Timing Gears and Gear Housing:


1.
2.
3.

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 6

Meet AGMA Class 8 quality minimum.


Keyed and timed to prevent contact between rotors and provide smooth
and quiet transmission of load.
Located in separate oil-filled, cast-iron gear box fitted with built-in sight
glass to monitor oil level.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

M.

Gear Reducer:
1.

N.

2.03

Structural Base: Rotary lobe pump, gear reducer, motor or gear motor shall be
mounted on a structural steel baseplate, with structural channel supports as
necessary, complete with couplings, guards, and mounting hardware.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Equipment Identification Plate:


1.

2.

2.04

16-gauge stainless steel with 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment tag


number securely mounted in a readily visible location giving name of
manufacturer, rated capacity, head, speed and other pertinent data.
Attach to each pump, motor, and gear reducer.
Additionally, pump serial number, model, gear reduction and motor
horsepower shall be cut or stamped into steel plate and welded to skid
for permanent identification.

B.

Lifting Lugs: Equipment weighing over 100 pounds.

C.

Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer,


1/2-inch minimum diameter, and as specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal
Fabrications.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.05

In-line gear reducer designated for continuous duty at heavy shock load.
a.
Meet AGMA Class II, with service factor of 1.4 minimum for
pump applications with moderate shock, continuous duty and
AGMA Class III, with service factor of 2.0 minimum for heavy
shock, continuous duty operation.
b.
C-face, mounted with C-face drive motor to form integral gear
motor combination.

Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Coating, using Manufacturers standard industrial protective coatings

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Tests and Adjustments: Test all pumps actually furnished.

B.

Functional Test: Perform manufacturers standard test on equipment.

C.

Motor Test: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.

D.

Factory Test Report: Include test data sheets.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Level base by means of steel wedges (steel plates and steel shims). Wedge
taper not greater than 1/4 inch per foot. Use double wedges to provide level
bearing surface for pump and driver base. Accomplish wedging so there is no
change of level or springing of baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.

C.

Adjust pump assemblies so driving units are properly aligned, plumb, and
level with driven units and interconnecting shafts and couplings. Do not
compensate for misalignment by use of flexible couplings.

D.

After pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to
proper elevation, if recommended by pump manufacturer, grout space
between bottom of baseplate and concrete foundation with a poured,
nonshrinking grout of the proper category, as specified in Section 03 62 00,
Nonshrink Grouting. Remove leveling wedges after grout is set and pack void
left with grout.

E.

Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to pump


flanges.

F.

Anchor Bolts: Accurately place using equipment templates and as specified in


Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.

G.

Pipe pump drain to trench drain shown on the Drawings.

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.03

As specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests:
1.
2.

B.

Conduct on each pump.


Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper
alignment and connection, and quiet operation.

Performance Test:
1.
2.

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 8

Conduct on each pump.


Perform under simulated or actual operating conditions, at rated flow
and solids concentrations as specified.
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.
4.

3.04

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B.
3.05

Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction.


Test Log: Record the following:
a.
Pump suction head relative to suction flange centerline, using
plant pressure instrumentation
b.
Pump discharge head relative to pump discharge flange centerline,
using plant pressure instrumentation
c.
Calculated velocity head at the suction and discharge flanges.
d.
Pump flow using pump rpm and gallons per revolution.
e.
Motor voltage and amperage measured for each phase.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


3 person-days for functional and performance testing and completion of
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
1/2 person-day for prestartup classroom or Site training.
1/2 person-day for facility startup.
1 person-day for post-startup training of Owners personnel. Training
shall not commence until an accepted detailed lesson plan for each
training activity has been reviewed by Owner

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.
2.
3.

Pump Data Sheet Thickened sludge pumps 1, 2


Pump Data Sheet Thickened sludge pumps 3, 4
Pump Data Sheet Fermented primary sludge pumps 1, 2
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

LOBE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.14Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63111, THK-PMP-P-63112


Pump Name: Thickened sludge pumps 1, 2
Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Boerger, PL 200
(2) Vogelsang, VX136-105Q
(3) Lobe Pro
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Altitude (ft msl): 2758 Area Classification: unclassified Location (indoor/outdoor): indoor
In normal operation:
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Thickened waste activated sludge
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 65
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Min 50

Viscosity Range: 1 cp

Vapor Pressure @ 60 Degrees F: 0.25 psi


Abrasive (Y/N) Y

Max 85

Liquid pH: 6.5-7.5

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 50,000 to 80,000


Inlet Pressure Range (psig): 0.9 to 5.2
During periodic thickened sludge pipe flushing:
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Geothermal water
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 150
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 160

Min 140

Viscosity Range: 1 cp

Vapor Pressure @ 60 Degrees F: 0.25 psi Liquid pH: 6.5-7.5


Abrasive (Y/N) N

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 200 to 1,000


Suction Pressure (psig): Maximum 5.2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

Rated 0.9 at Vacuum (in. Hg)

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AT PRIMARY DESIGN POINT


Capacity (US gpm): Rated 53
Maximum Pump Differential Pressure (psig): Rated 90
Minimum Continuous Flow (gpm): 5.3
Maximum Pump Speed at Design Point (rpm): 200
Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y
DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 10

Voltage: 460

Phase: 3

Service Factor: 1.15

Inverter Duty: Y

Enclosure: EXP _____

ODP _____

Synchronous Speed (rpm) 1800

TEFC X

TENV _____

Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section
26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 2

PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

LOBE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.14Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-63113, THK-PMP-P-63114


Pump Name: Thickened sludge pumps 3, 4
Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Boerger, PL 200
(2) Vogelsang, VX136-105Q
(3) Lobe Pro
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Altitude (ft msl): 2758

Area Classification: unclassified Location (indoor/outdoor): Indoor

In normal operation:
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Thickened fermented primary sludge for
THK-PMP-P-63114; thickened fermented primary sludge or thickened waste
activated sludge for THK-PMP-P-63113
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 65
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 85

Min 50

Viscosity Range: 1 cp

Vapor Pressure @ 60 Degrees F: 0.25 psi Liquid pH: 4.5 to 7.5


Abrasive (Y/N) Y

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 50,000 to 80,000


Inlet Pressure Range (psig): 0.9 to 5.2
During periodic thickened sludge pipe flushing:
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Geothermal water
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 150
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 160

Min 140

Viscosity Range: 1 cp

Vapor Pressure @ 60 Degrees F: 0.25 psi Liquid pH: 6.5-7.5


Abrasive (Y/N) N Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N
Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 200 to 1,000
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Suction Pressure (psig): Maximum 5.2

Rated 0.9 at Vacuum (in. Hg)

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AT PRIMARY DESIGN POINT


Capacity (US gpm): Rated 53
Maximum Pump Differential Pressure (psig): Rated 90
Minimum Continuous Flow (gpm): 5.3
Maximum Pump Speed at Design Point (rpm):

200

Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y


DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)
Horsepower: 10 Voltage: 460
Service Factor: 1.15

Phase: 3

Synchronous Speed (rpm) 1800

Inverter Duty: Y

Enclosure: EXP _____ ODP _____ TEFC

TENV _____

Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section
26 29 23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 4

PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

LOBE PUMP DATA SHEET, 44 42 56.14Tag Numbers: THK-PMP-P-71041, THK-PMP-P-71042


Pump Name: Fermented primary sludge pumps 1, 2
Manufacturer and Model Number: (1) Boerger, PL 300
(2) Vogelsang, VX136-210Q
(3) Lobe Pro
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Fermented primary sludge
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 65
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F: 1.0

Max 85

Min 50

Viscosity Range: 1 cp

Vapor Pressure @ 60 Degrees F: 0.25 psi Liquid pH: 4.5 to 7.5


Abrasive (Y/N) Y

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N): N

Total Suspended Solids (mg/L) 10,000 to 20,000


Inlet Pressure Range (psig): 6.5 to 7.1
Altitude (ft msl): 2578

Area Classification: unclassified

Location (indoor/outdoor): indoor


PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AT PRIMARY DESIGN POINT
Capacity (US gpm): Rated 187
Maximum Pump Differential Pressure (psig): Rated 30
Minimum Continuous Flow (gpm): 18.7
Maximum Pump Speed at Design Point (rpm): 300
Constant (Y/N): N Adjustable (Y/N): Y

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

DRIVE MOTOR (See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.)


Horsepower: 10 Voltage: 460
Service Factor: 1.15

Phase: 3

Synchronous Speed (rpm) 1800

Inverter Duty: Y

Enclosure: EXP _____ ODP _____ TEFC

TENV _____

Adjustable Speed Drive Range: 10 percent min to 100 percent max, see Section 26 29
23, Low-Voltage Adjustable Frequency Drive System
REMARKS

LOBE PUMPS
44 42 56.14 SUPPLEMENT - 6

PROJNUMBER
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.18
PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.

1.02

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

B.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Complete catalog information, descriptive literature,
specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
b.
Detailed mechanical and electrical Drawings showing equipment
dimensions, size, and locations of connections and weights of
associated equipment.
c.
Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment
assembly.
d.
Performance data curves showing head, capacity, and horsepower
demand over entire operating range of pump, from shutoff to
maximum capacity. Indicate head, capacity, and horsepower
demand required at guarantee point.
e.
Listing of extra materials supplied for this section.
f.
Factory finish system.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.
3.

1.03

ISO 9001-2000.
UL610101A.

Manufacturers Certification of Compliance signed by an authorized


representative of manufacturer that equipment and factory-applied
coating system(s) meet requirements specified herein.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.

QUALITY CONTROL AND MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATION


A.

To maximize pump efficiency and minimize tube fatigue that will impact life,
performance, and accuracy, pumps must be designed not to exceed the

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

specified P/10 ratio (Theoretical maximum number of occlusions per 10


gallons pumped). P/10 Ratio shall not exceed 11,112 for 6.4mmx 2.4mm tube
size.
B.

For quality assurance, all pump elements must be manufactured by the pump
manufacturer in accordance with their specifications.

C.

Drive and pump heads shall be 24 hr continuous duty rated and have a threeyear manufacturer's warranty from date of shipment.

D.

Manufacturer of tubing pumps must have at least 20 operating installations in


domestic water or wastewater treatment plants located in the United States
over a period of at least seven years pumping the same fluid as specified.

E.

Pumps must be manufactured under ISO 9001-2000.

F.

Pumps shall be met all applicable CE and C ETL US standards per


UL610101A.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

Pumps shall be positive displacement peristaltic type complete with springloaded pumphead, self-contained variable speed drive, and flexible extruded
tube as specified.

B.

Peristaltic pumping action is created by the compression of the flexible tube


between the pumphead rollers and track, induced forward fluid displacement
within the tube by the rotation of the pump rotor, and subsequent
vacuum-creating restitution of the tube.

C.

Pumps shall be dry self-priming, capable of being run dry without damaging
effects to pump or tube, and shall have a maximum suction lift capability of
up to 30 feet vertical water column. Maximum pressure rating: 60 psi.

D.

Pump shall not require the use of check valves or diaphragms and shall not
require dynamic seals in contact with the pumped fluid. Process fluid shall be
contained within pump tubing and shall not directly contact any rotary or
metallic components.

E.

Flow shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed and
shall be proportional to rotor speed.

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.02

PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A.

Pumphead:
1.

2.

Pumphead shall consist of a fixed track, a hinged guard door, and


spring-loaded roller rotor assembly. Pump tubing shall be in contact
with the inside diameter of the track through an angle of 180 degrees. At
all times, one roller shall be fully engaged with the tubing providing
complete compression and preventing back flow or siphoning. Tube
occlusion and spring tension shall be factory set to accommodate 2.4mm
wall thickness tubing and shall not require adjustment.
Pumphead guard shall be clear for viewing of rotation direction. When
closed, the pumphead guard shall seal against the pump track for leak
containment and controlled waste through the pumphead waste port in
the event of a tube failure. For operator and environmental safety,
pumps in which the direction of rotation cannot be visually verified
and/or do not have a controlled waste port are not acceptable.
a.
Pumphead Assembly:
1)
Pump Track Geometry must have a minimum 96.6mm
swept diameter through a minimum track angle of 180
degrees.
2)
Provide high corrosion/impact materials as specified.
a)
Track Construction: polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
b)
Guard Construction: hinged impact-resistant
polycarbonate breakaway guard, tool un-lockable for
operator safety.
c)
Rotor Construction: polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)
b.
Rotor Assembly:
1)
Provide rotor assembly that ensures gradual tube occlusion
and compensates for tube tolerance:
a)
Twin spring-loaded roller arms located 180 degrees
apart, each fitted with stainless steel helical springs
and compressing roller for occlusion of the tube twice
per rotor revolution
2)
Compressing Rollers:
a)
Type 316 stainless steel with low friction stainless
steel bearings and PTFE seals, minimum diameter of
18mm.
b)
Provide non-compressing guide rollers constructed of
corrosion resistant Nylatron.
3)
Clutch: Equip rotor with a central handgrip hub and
manually activated clutch to disengage the rotor from the
drive for manual rotor rotation during tube loading. Clutch
shall automatically reengage rotor to gearbox upon one
complete revolution.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4)

5)
B.

Tubing:
1.

2.
3.
4.

C.

Mounting: To prevent slip, the rotor assembly shall be


axially secured to the dogged output shaft of the gearmotor
via a slotted collet and central retaining screw.
Pumpheads requiring disassembly or special tools for tube
changing are not acceptable.

Pump shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded
fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead.
Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track
(housing) through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on the
suction and discharge by the element fittings. The tubing shall be
replaceable without the use of tools and with no disassembly of the
pumphead. To achieve maximum service life, pump heads with a track
angle of less than 180 degrees and/or without tube elements are not
acceptable.
Load Sure Element shall be constructed with either Marprene or
Sta-Pure tubing with male PVDF Quick Release Connectors.
Supply two (2) tube elements of the specified size per pump.
Supply One (1) meter of reinforced transparent PVC flexible hose for
connection of pump to suction and discharge process lines. Flexible
hose shall have a PVDF female Quick Release fitting for connection to
the tube Element and male quick release fitting for connection to barbed
adaptor with built-in shut off valve for ease of maintenance and
connection to process lines.

Drive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.

Rating: Continuous 24 hour operation, 40 degrees C ambient.


Supply: 110-120V 50/60 Hz, 1-Phase. Supply nine-foot length mains
power cord with standard 115V three-prong plug.
Max drive power consumption: 135VA.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X.
Housing: Pressure cast aluminum with Alocrom pre-treatment and
exterior grade corrosion resistant polyester powder coat. By nature of
the environmental conditions, unpainted housings, including Type 316
stainless steel, are not acceptable.
Pumps must meet the following minimum requirements for operator
interface functionality:
a.
Backlit graphical LCD capable of up to four lines of text with up
to 16 characters per line to display pump speed, running status,
flow rate, and programming instructions
b.
Keypad for start, stop, speed increment, speed decrement,
forward/reverse direction, rapid prime, and programming.

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

c.

7.

8.

9.

10.
11.
12.
13.

14.

Menu driven on screen programming of manual or auto control,


flow and remote signal calibration, and general programming.
d.
Programmable Auto Restart feature to resume pump status in
the event of power outage interruption.
e.
Programmable Keypad Lock to allow operator lockout of all
keys except emergency start/stop.
f.
Programmable Maximum Speed to allow operator to set the
maximum speed of the pump within 0.1-220 rpm.
Supply auto control features to meet the following minimum
functionality requirements for use with the SCADA system. All control
signal features must be located internally to the pump. Pumps not
meeting this minimum functionality or that require additional external
control boxes are not acceptable.
a.
Remote Control Inputs
Speed Control:
a.
Primary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC speed input, with input
signal trimmable and speed scaleable over any part of the drive
speed range.
b.
Secondary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC scaling input, with input
signal trimmable and programmable scaling factor.
c.
Provisions for alternative remote accessory potentiometer (if
supplied by others) for primary speed control or secondary speed
scaling.
Start/Stop Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry contactConfigurable command sense allowing open to equal run or open to
equal stopped.
Forward/Reverse Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry
contact
Auto/Man Mode Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry
contact
Leak Detector Run/Stop Control: Status Outputs
Four relay contacts rated for a 30 VDC with a maximum load of 30W,
NO or NC software configurable to indicate the following:
a.
Running/Stopped status.
b.
Forward/Reverse status.
c.
Auto/Manual status.
d.
General Alarm status.
e.
Leak Detected status.
Speed output Analog 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC:
a.
Accepts RS485 data protocol.
b.
Termination: supply screw down terminals suitable for up to18
AWG field wire and accessible through four glanded cable entry
points on the pump.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

15.

16.
17.

D.

Spares
1.
2.

2.03

Equipment Identification Plates: Provide 16-gauge stainless steel


identification plate securely mounted on each separate equipment component
in a readily visible location. Plate shall bear 1/4-inch high block type
equipment identification number and letters indicated in this Specification.

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.06

Specific product requirements are attached to this section as supplements.

ACCESSORIES
A.

2.05

Supply two spare tube elements of the specified size per pump.
Supply one spare pumphead assembly and rotor.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

2.04

Drive motor- brushless DC motor with integral gearbox and tachometer


feedback.
a.
Speed Control Range of 2200:1 from 0.1 to 220 rpm +/- 0.1 rpm
throughout the range.
b.
Closed loop microprocessor controlled drive with pulse width
modulation at speeds above 35 rpm and synchronous mode with
magnetic field rotation control below 35 rpm
c.
Circuitry complete with temperature and load compensation and
protection.
Mounting: Drive shall be self-supporting and shall not require
anchoring.
Leak Detection- Pump manufacturer shall supply float-type leak sensor
mounted to the drain port of the pump head for leak detection and pump
shut down in the event of a tubing failure.

Prepare, and prime and finish coat using Manufacturers standard industrial
protective coatings.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Tests:
1.

Pumps: Assemble, check, and shim all pumps for the specific
application prior to shipment.

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PART 3
3.01

3.02

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Contractor shall supply shielded signal wiring for wiring of the required
remote input and output to the connectors.

C.

Contractor to provide fittings to connect suction and discharge piping to the


hard pipe.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Perform pre-operational checks per manufacturers printed instructions.

B.

Functional Tests:
1.

3.03

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Manufacturers Representative: Present at Site or classroom designated by


Owner, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1.
2.

B.
3.04

Conduct on Each Pump: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation,


proper connections, and normal operational characteristics.

1 person-day for installation assistance and inspection.


1 person-day for functional testing, completion of Manufacturers
Certificate of Proper Installation and prestartup classroom or Site
training.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplement listed below, following End of Section, is a part of this


Specification:
1.

Peristaltic Chemical Metering Pump Data Sheet.


END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMP DATA SHEET 44 42 56.16Tag Numbers: PRE-PMP-P-20311


Pump Name: Ferrous Chloride Metering Pump
Manufacturer and Model Number:

(1) Watson Marlow/Bredel Pumps 520DuS/REM


(2) or Equal

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Liquid Pumped (Material and Percent): Ferrous chloride solution 28-34%
Pumping Temperature (Fahrenheit): Normal: 68
Specific Gravity @ 60 Degrees F:

Max 85

Min

32

Viscosity Range:

1.2

pH: <1
Abrasive (Y/N): N

Possible Scale Buildup (Y/N):

Inlet Pressure at Pump (psig): 3 max.


Min. Net Positive Inlet Pressure Available (psia):
Area Classification: Non-classified
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Rated Capacity (gpm): 0.33 (20 gph) Rated Differential Pressure (psi): 60
Maximum Pump Speed at Rated Condition (rpm): 220
Constant Speed (Y/N): N

Adjustable Speed (Y/N): Y

REMARKS

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL
METERING PUMPS
44 42 56.16 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 56.19
AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT NUMBER(S)
Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump: AER-PMP-P-30825
Aeration Basin 6 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump: AER-PMP-P-30826
PART 1
1.01

1.02

GENERAL
WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.

The Work of this section includes providing the axial-flow pumps and all
appurtenant work.

B.

Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the aeration basin mixed liquor
recycle pumps, complete with all accessories and appurtenances (including,
but not necessarily limited to, electric motors, mast assemblies, and
components), be the end product of one responsible system manufacturer or
responsible system supplier. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall
obtain each system from the responsible supplier of the equipment, which
supplier shall furnish all components and accessories of the system to enhance
compatibility, ease of operation and maintenance, and as necessary to place
the equipment in operation in conformance with the specified performance,
features and functions without altering or modifying the Contractors
responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible
to the Owner for providing the equipment systems as specified herein.

C.

General Requirements: See Division 01, General Requirements, which


contains information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein
and are mandatory for this Project.

REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).


American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
American Standard Association (ASA).
American Water Works Association (AWWA).
Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Assoc. (AFBMA).
Factory Material (FM).
International Standards Organization (ISO).

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

9.
10.
11.
1.03

National Electric Code (NEC).


National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA).

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Administrative, Shop Drawings, samples, quality control, and


contract close-out submittals shall conform to the requirements of
Section 01 33 00, Submittals Procedures.

B.

In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittals Procedures,


submit the following additional detailed Shop Drawing information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

C.

Drawings showing complete dimensional data.


Complete literature on the mechanical mixers.
Calculations verifying that provided mixer meets mixing criteria for the
application.
See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, for motor
submittal requirements.
Seismic anchorage and bracing Drawings and cut sheets, as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

Informational Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.

Factory Functional Test Reports.


Manufacturers Certification of Compliance that the factory finish
system is identical to the requirements specified herein.
Special shipping, storage and protection, handling instructions.
Manufacturers printed installation instructions.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a
period of 1 year and 5 years. Include a list of special tools required for
checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.
List of special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment
for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01 78 23,
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing.

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.04

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

Furnish for Each Pump:


1.
2.
3.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Where a manufacturers standard equipment name and/or model number is


listed, the equipment system shall be provided as modified to conform to the
performance, functions, features, and materials of construction as specified
herein.

B.

Materials, equipment, components and accessories specified in this section


shall be products of:
1.
2.

2.02

Gear reducer bearings.


Set of O-rings.
Complete set of seals.

KSB, Inc.; Richmond, VA.


Landia, Inc.; Cary, NC.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

All wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel with the exception of the
motor housing and gear box. Wetted parts are defined as any parts extending
below the top of aeration basin walls.

B.

Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection and design of
components where so indicated in individual sections. When not indicated
there, minimum service factors shall be 1.25, except for gears and gear drives
as specified herein.

C.

Safety Devices: The completed work shall include all necessary permanent
safety devices, such as machinery guards, emergency stops and similar items
required by OSHA, and other federal, state, and local health and safety
regulations.

D.

Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment shall comply with


ANSI B16.1, Class 125; or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated.
Threaded flanges and fittings shall have standard taper pipe threads complying
with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

E.

Bearings:
1.
2.
3.

F.

Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing


Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA).
All drive bearings shall be of the antifriction type, ball or roller
bearings. The output shaft shall be supported by tapered roller bearings.
Except where otherwise indicated, bearings of process equipment shall
have minimum AFBMA B-10 lives of 100,000 hours when operating at
full motor nameplate horsepower at design speed.

Gears and Gear Drives:


1.

2.

3.
4.
5.

Except as otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiralbevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA
Standards, with a minimum service factor of 2, a minimum L-10 bearing
life of 100,000 hours based on full motor nameplate horsepower and a
minimum efficiency of 94 percent.
Allowable Types:
a.
Gear reduction units are required for the mixers; gear speed
reducers or increasers shall be of the double reduction inline type,
oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed. The casing shall be of
cast iron or heavy-duty steel construction with lifting lugs and an
inspection cover for each gear train. An oil drain and inspection
plug shall be provided and installed for easy access.
b.
Gearbox may be one-stage planetary reduction gear, with a
service factor of 2.0. The motor shaft shall be provided with a
spline to attach to the gear reducer. The reduction stage shall
consist of an integral toothed ring gear to which three planet
wheels are mounted on the planet carriers, engaging with the
pinion.
Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped
fully assembled for field installation.
Material selections shall comply with AGMA values and the
manufacturers recommendations.
The area where the propeller shaft enters the pumped media shall be
sealed by two totally independent mechanical shaft seals, each with its
own independent single spring system. The outer mechanical seal shall
be protected from solids in the pumped media by a labyrinth cast into
the propeller hub/seal housing interface. An oil-filled chamber with
drain and inspection plug (each with positive anti-leak seal) shall
separate the seals and provide lubrication. Single mechanical seals or
rotary lip seals shall not be considered adequate for this critical sealing
area.

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

G.

2.03

2.04

Propeller: Propeller shall be of cast material as specified, with thick cross


section to resist abrasion and to permit displacement of the stagnation point
along the leading edge. Propeller and hub shall be a single piece casting
without weld joints. Thin cross section blades, or those constructed of welded
sheet metal of any material, will not be acceptable. The propeller shall be
sized to accommodate the performance requirements of the pump, as
specified. The propeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials,
heavy sludge, and other matter found in normal sewage applications.

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
A.

General: Design the axial-flow pump for continuous full load duty and
guarantee the mixers based on the design conditions specified on the data
sheet. Design and construct all units to permit economical maintenance. Select
all units to allow as much interchangeability of parts as possible. Unspecified
details of design and construction of the mixing unit will be manufacturers
standard.

B.

Spool Piece: Provide a spool piece between the axial flow pump and concrete
wall. The spool piece is to be sized to accommodate the axial flow pump and
be of a length allowing the pump to be positioned for removal from the basin.
Include pipe supports for the spool piece as per manufacturers
recommendation.

MAST ASSEMBLY FOR AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS


A.

Mast Assembly/Guide Rail System:


1.

2.

Provide a permanently installed guide mast assembly which allows for


pump installation, operation, and retrieval without the need to enter the
basin. The mast shall be minimum 4 inches by 4 inches square tube or
4-inch diameter, supplied with factory welded mounting brackets at the
top, bottom and intermediate levels as needed to provide support at a
maximum of 10-foot intervals. A pump mounting tube shall be provided
by the pump manufacturer. The tube shall be a minimum 24 inches in
length with one end designed to support the pump and accommodate the
removal of the pump as specified by the lifting davit assembly. The
other end of the pipe is to terminate in a standard ANSI flange, sized to
accommodate the mounting tube and connecting wall pipe.
A fabricated support frame shall support the weight of the pump at its
horizontal center of gravity. Cantilevered designs, with the pump
suspended on its own motor housing, will not be considered equal to a
support frame design.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.05

PORTABLE LIFTING DAVIT AND LIFTING CABLE


A.

Provide one (1) portable lifting davit suitable for use with all pumps in this
section. The davit shall be designed to be mounted in a floor socket next to the
pump mast. Design and provide one (1) floor socket for each pump location,
four (4) total. The lifting davit shall include a manual brake winch, and shall
be adequately rated to lift the pump and support arm off the mast and directly
onto the adjacent deck surface. A removable section of handrail shall be
provided by Contractor such that the pump does not need to be lifted over the
handrail. A lifting cable, permanently attached to each pump, shall be
provided in sufficient length for attachment of the upper end to the winch
cable reel when the davit assembly is installed. Provide storage area for cable
when davit is not installed.

B.

Materials:
1.
2.

2.06

Davit: Stainless Steel ASTM A276.


Cable: Stainless Steel.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES


A.

2.07

Mast/Guide Rail System: Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 316.


Upper and Lower Support: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.
Intermediate Support: Wall mounted and stainless steel, ASTM A276,
Type 316.
Fabricated Support Frame: Stainless Steel ASTM A276, Type 316.
Mounting Pipe: Ductile Iron.

Motors: Provide as indicated on pump data sheets at the end of this section.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Anchor bolts shall be specified in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications.


Number and size as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

Provide lifting lugs on equipment over 100 pounds.

C.

Nameplates: Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or


stamped and fastened to the equipment in accessible locations with stainless
steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturers name,
model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the
machine performance ratings.

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.08

FACTORY FINISHING
A.

2.09

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

The final acceptance of the equipment requires a field test for handling the
specified fluid under specified conditions.

B.

Furnish for each unit, certified performance curves that show efficiency, speed
range, brake horsepower, at no extra charge.

C.

Make available to the Owner without charge, all test records, whether test
witnessing is required or not on the Data Sheet.

PART 3
3.01

3.02

Prepare surface and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coatings, System No. 2.

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

Provide stainless steel mounting bolts, washers, and nuts and install the
equipment at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B.

Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and


typical installation detail included in this section.

C.

Lubricants: The installation includes oil and grease for initial operation.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Functional Tests: Conduct on each pump, with manufacturer present.


1.

3.03

Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct rotation, proper


alignment and connection, and quiet operation.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Installation, Startup, and Testing Services:


1.

2.
3.

Provide complete manufacturers installation, startup, and testing


services in accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field
Services.
Provide Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation.
Provide Qualifications of Manufacturers Representative.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

B.

Training Services:
1.
2.

3.
3.04

FIELD FINISHING
A.

3.05

Provide training of Owners personnel in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Provide 2 person-days of post-startup training, which shall be provided
in one session within a 24-hour period to accommodate personnel
working different shifts.
Provide taping of all training sessions as specified in Section 01 43 33,
Manufacturers Field Services.

Solvent clean and finish coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coating, System No. 2.

SUPPLEMENTS
A.

The supplements listed below, following End of Section, are a part of this
Specification.
1.

Aeration Basin 5, 6 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pumps Data Sheet.


END OF SECTION

AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS
44 42 56.19 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL


SECTION 44 42 56.19.01 AXIAL-FLOW PUMPS DATA SHEET
PUMP DATA

PUMP NAME
EQUIPMENT NUMBER
Aeration Basin 5 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump AER-PMP-P-30825
Aeration Basin 6 Mixed Liquor Recycle Pump AER-PMP-P-30826

SPEED TYPE
Variable
Variable
MODEL
Amaline P480
AXP-I

PUMP MANUFACTURERS

KSB
Landia, Inc.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Rated Capacity:
11,000
gpm
Head at Rated Capacity:
1.8
feet
Maximum Propeller Speed
510 rpm

SERVICE CONDITIONS

Liquid Pumped:
Mixed Liquor
Largest Solid:
3 inches
Pumping Temperature (PT):
70 degrees F
Specific Gravity at PT:
1
Viscosity at PT:
53 cp
Minimum NPSHA at PT:
90 feet absolute

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Gear Housing:Cast Iron ASTM A48, Class 30


Motor Housing: Cast Iron ASTM A48, Class 30
Propeller: SST ASTM A743
Stuffing Box/Mechanical Seal: Mechanical
Lubrication:

Oil

Propeller Shaft: SST ASTM A276, Type 420


Motor Shaft:
SST ASTM A276, Type 420
Bearings:
100,000 hour L-10 life
Bearing Lubrication:
Oil
Baseplate:
N/A
Configuration:
Horizontal, submersible

MOTOR DATA

Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1


Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories
of a single manufacturer
Hazardous Location:
Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674
and have an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower:
25
Voltage:
460
Phase:
3
Enclosure Type:
Submersible
Synchronous Speed:
Winding:
Load Class

X One

1,800

rpm

Mounting Type: X Horizontal

Two

Multispeed, Two-speed:

Constant Torque

Vertical
rpm

Variable Torque

Controlled by AFD (in future): See Section


Constant Horsepower
26 29 23, Low-voltage Adjustable Frequency
Drive Systems
Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 26 20 00, Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors
X

Shaft

Split

Hollow

Upthrust:

High (<30%)

Extra High (<175%)

Special Features: Manufacturer to provide the motor seal failure moisture detection, thermal sensor,
and interfacing relay. Pumps may be operated by AFD in future, pumps shall be Inverter Duty Rated.

PW\WBG\42399
4/2/2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS DATA SHEET


44 42 56.19.01 SUPPLEMENT - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 42 73.01
THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
REFERENCES
A.

The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:


1.

1.02

ASTM International (ASTM):


a.
C1147, Standard Practice for Determining the Short Term Tensile
Weld Strength of Chemical-Resistant Thermoplastics.
b.
D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic ElastomersTension.
c.
D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
d.
D792, Standard Test Method for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Action Submittals:
1.

2.

3.

B.

Scaled Drawings showing surfaces in plan or elevation view for each


structure to receive lining, with joints, penetrations, seams, attachments,
and welds fully detailed.
Drawings shall include details for the following items: wall corners,
wall to roof corner inside corner, wall to roof outside corner, penetrating
adhesive anchored bolt through liner, interface to aluminum roof hatch
embedded frame, damaged liner patch, and other typically encountered
conditions for a lined tank.
Product Data: Manufacturers catalog for plastic lining system,
including product data indicating physical and chemical resistance
properties.

Informational Submittals:
1.

2.

Manufacturers installation instructions with specific details modified


and tailored to each structure and portion of structure to receive liner,
including attachments to formwork where applicable.
Statements of Qualifications:
a.
Lining system manufacturer.
b.
Lining system manufacturers representative.
c.
Lining system installer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR


CONCRETE STRUCTURES
44 42 73.01 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.

4.
5.
6.
1.03

QUALIFICATIONS
A.

Lining System Manufacturer: Successful use of sheet material similar to this


Project for minimum period of 10 years.

B.

Manufacturers Representative: As specified in Section 01 43 33,


Manufacturers Field Services.

C.

Lining System Installer: Recommended and certified by manufacturer to do


the Work.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Lining system specified in this section shall be products of:


1.
2.
3.

2.02

Installers Information:
a.
Include list of technical personnel who will perform work on liner.
b.
Technician certification, indicating that technician has completed
required training for welding, fabricating, and installing liner.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Manufacturers Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
Written test reports of each test and inspection.

GSE Lining Technologies, Inc., Houston, TX; GSE StudLiner Lining


Systems.
Atlas Minerals and Chemicals, Inc., Mertztown, PA; Anchor-Lok Lining
System.
Gaussan Inc., Tilton NH: Corr-Tite Thermal Plastic Lining System.

MATERIALS
A.

In accordance with ASTM C1147.

B.

Composition:
1.

2.
3.

Sheet liner, joint, corner, and welding strips formed by combination of


polyethylene (PE) resin, pigments, and plasticizers, specially
compounded to remain flexible.
Not less than 99 percent by weight of resin used in formulation shall be
thermal plastic resin.
Do not use copolymer resins.

THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR


CONCRETE STRUCTURES
44 42 73.01 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Chemical Resistance: Lining system suitable for exposure to fermented


sewage sludge with pH of 4 to 8, hydrogen sulfide, and diluted sulfuric acid at
ambient temperatures.

D.

Physical Properties:
1.

2.

3.
E.

2.03

2.04

Lining system including sheets, joint, corner and welding strips initially
tested at 77 degrees F plus or minus 5 degrees F:
a.
Minimum Tensile Strength: 2,200 psi in accordance with
ASTM D638.
b.
Minimum Elongation: 200 percent in accordance with
ASTM D638.
Pull Test for Locking Extensions: Liner plate locking extensions for
embedment in concrete shall withstand test pull of at least 100 pounds
per linear inch or 250 pounds per anchor for individual conical anchors,
applied perpendicularly to face of sheet for period of 1 minute, without
rupture or pullout of extensions. Perform test at temperature of
70 degrees F to 80 degrees F.
Liner Sheet: Minimum 0.078 inch thick with locking extensions of same
material.

Furnish lining system free from cracks, cleavages, or other defects. Liner sheet
shall be impact resistance, flexible, and capable of being repaired during life
of structure.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Sealant Adhesive: Nonflammable and as supplied by liner manufacturer.

B.

Waterproof Tape: 2 inches wide, minimum.

FABRICATION
A.

Shop Welded Joints:


1.

2.
B.

Fuse together individual sections of liners; thickness, corrosion


resistance, and impermeability of welds shall be same as specified for
liner sheets.
Cracks and separations of welds not acceptable.

Basic Sheets:
1.
2.

Width: 48 inches to 96 inches, nominal.


Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/4 inch for each 100 inches.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR


CONCRETE STRUCTURES
44 42 73.01 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.05

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Inspections: Inspect liner sheets for holes using electrical spark tester
set at 20,000 volts. Repair holes found in liner sheets in shop and retest prior
to shipment.

B.

Factory Tests: Measure tensile strength across shop welded joints in


accordance with ASTM D412 using Die B minimum 2,000 psi. Test
temperature to be 77 degrees F plus or minus 5 degrees F. Measure minimum
width and thickness of reduced welded section.

PART 3
3.01

EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.

General:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
B.

In accordance with manufacturers written instructions.


Installation of lining system in cold weather, including preheating of
sheets and welding of joints, shall be done in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
Do not apply hot compounds to lining.
Provide accessory strips and miscellaneous accessories for a complete
liner system.
Protect installed lining from construction equipment and materials.

Application to Cast-in-Place Concrete Structures:


1.

2.

3.
4.

Closely fit and secure liner sheets to inner forms in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions. Cut sheets to fit curved and warped
surfaces using minimum number of separate pieces. Weld 2-inch-wide
water-resistant tape or welding strip on back of butt joints to prevent wet
concrete from flowing around edges.
Return lining minimum 3 inches at surfaces of contact between concrete
structure and items not of concrete, for example, manhole frames, gate
guides, or brick manholes, and clay or cast-iron pipes. Follow same
procedure at joints where type of protective lining is changed or new
work is built to join existing unlined concrete. Seal return liner at each
return to item in contact with plastic-lined concrete.
Install liner continuous over expansion or control joints per approved
Shop Drawings.
Join lining in accordance with manufacturers instructions and to
provide flexibility and excess material to allow for differential
movement.

THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR


CONCRETE STRUCTURES
44 42 73.01 - 4

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

C.

Protect lining from damage when removing forms. Do not use sharp
instruments to pry forms from lined surfaces. Pull remaining nails from lining
without tearing and clearly mark resulting holes. Mark areas of abrasion,
damaged surfaces, and form tie holes before ties are broken off.

D.

Patching:
1.
2.
3.

3.02

TESTS AND INSPECTION


A.

3.03

Patch torn, cut, seriously abraded areas, nail, and tie holes in lining.
Fuse welding strip patches to liner over entire patch area.
Continuously seal around larger patches with welding strip fused to
patch and sound lining surrounding damaged area.

After placement of concrete and removal of forms, test field joints and patches
for holes using electrical spark tester set at 20,000 volts. Repair discontinuities
and retest.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

Provide manufacturers representative at Site in accordance with


Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, during installation of liner in
formwork, to advise, assist, and observe.

B.

Provide manufacturers representative at Site to observe patching, field


welding, field testing, and to certify proper installation.
END OF SECTION

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

THERMOPLASTIC LINER FOR


CONCRETE STRUCTURES
44 42 73.01 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

SECTION 44 44 63.03
DRY AND LIQUID POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.

1.02

This section covers the Work necessary to furnish and install two dry and
liquid polymer mix/feed systems capable of metering, diluting, and activating
liquid or dry polymer with water at the specified concentrations.

GENERAL
A.

Major Equipment Numbers:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

THK-PMP-P-63141, 63142: Liquid Polymer Feed Pumps.


THK-LCP-P-63141, 63142: Polymer Mix Local Control Panels.
THK-CNV-P-63141, 63142: Dry Polymer Feeders.
THK-BLR-P-63141, 63142: Dry Polymer Blowers (optional).THKTNK-P-63141A, 63142A: Polymer Mix Tanks
THK-MIX-P-63141, 63142: Polymer Mixers.
THK-TNK-P-63141B, 63142B: Polymer Feed Tanks.

B.

Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of one
manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation,
maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service.

C.

Unit Responsibility: The Work requires that the polymer feed systems,
complete with all accessories and appurtenances, be the end product of one
responsible system manufacturer or responsible system supplier. Unless
otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall obtain each system from the
responsible supplier of the equipment, which supplier shall furnish all
components and accessories as necessary to place the equipment in operation
in conformance with the specified performance, features, and functions
indicated without altering or modifying the Contractor's responsibilities under
the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for
providing the equipment systems as specified herein.

D.

See Conditions of the Contract and Division 1, General Requirements, which


contain information and requirements that apply to the work specified herein
and are mandatory for this project.

E.

The design of the polymer system as shown on the Contract Drawings is based
upon the first-named manufacturer listed in this Specification. Manufacturers

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 1

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

other than the A named manufacturer will be responsible for coordinating


layout changes and interface connections to other work which are different
than that shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor will be responsible
for coordinating this work and the changes will be at the sole expense of the
Contractor. At a minimum, these changes will include:
1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
1.03

Layout of polymer skids including dry polymer storage tank, mix tank,
feed tank, and liquid polymer feed pump to coordination with the
specified grating system and supports within the polymer room.
Changes in electrical requirements including breaker sizing for control
panels, wiring sizing, number of wires and conduits, and changes in
motor horsepower requirements.
Relocation of equipment pads and changes in sizes to accommodate
alternate equipment.
Coordination of the height of the dry polymer feeder to accommodate
750-kg bag unloading.
Instrumentation and control interface requirements.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submittals shall be made as required in Section 01 33 00, Submittal


Procedures, in Division 1, General Requirements. The following specific
information shall be provided:
1.

Shop Drawings:
a.
Catalog cuts for all components including water pressure and flow
sensing and regulating devices, electrical controls and
components, solenoid valves and motors.
b.
Manufacturer's literature for the liquid polymer metering pump
indicating the specific model proposed.
c.
Polymer feed system O&M Manual describing the function of
each component and the operating and control strategy for the
complete system.
d.
Installation list for the model type proposed including a contact
name, phone and date of installation.
e.
Bill of Materials listing part numbers, name, and material of
construction.
f.
Performance data including mixing energy data at maximum and
minimum flow.
g.
Details of DC/SCR drive system including rating, special features,
operating description, and schematic (elementary) wiring diagram.
h.
Point-to-point wiring and control schematic diagrams shall
conform to the format and content requirements contained in
Section 40 99 90, Package Control Systems.

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 2

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

i.
j.

2.

3.
4.

1.04

Control panel transformer load calculations.


Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA, motor
manufacturer, and any motor modifications. See Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors, and Section 26 29 25,
DC-SCR Drive Systems, for additional motor submittal
requirements.
k.
Control panel construction and layout drawings.
l.
Instrumentation and Control Submittals: In conformance with
Section 40 90 0, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
Quality Control Submittals:
a.
Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance.
b.
Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling
instructions.
c.
Manufacturers written/printed installation instructions.
d.
Manufacturers certificate of proper installation as specified in
Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
e.
Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup.
f.
Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for
a period of 2 years and 5 years. Include a list of special tools
required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance
with current price information.
g.
List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with
equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future
maintenance.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Service records for maintenance
performed during construction.
Provide detailed seismic calculations for polymer mix tank, polymer
feed tank, and dry polymer storage hopper anchoring. Calculations to be
provided by a registered professional Engineer in the State of Idaho.
Design supports in accordance with IBC and requirements in
Section 01 88 15, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing, and
Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


A.

O&M Manuals: Content, format, and schedule for providing as specified in


Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data.

B.

Maintenance Summary Forms: As specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation


and Maintenance Data.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 3

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

1.05

WARRANTY
A.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.

2.02

2.03

2.04

Provide as specified in the General Conditions. Warranty shall be valid for


1 year, beginning on the substantial completion date.

The use of a manufacturers name and model or catalog number is for the
purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration
desired. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance
with the General Conditions.

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Fluid Dynamics, Dynajet M8-750SL-3.

B.

Or equal.

SERVICE CONDITIONS
Dry Polymer

Dry Cationic Polymer

Liquid Polymer

Liquid Emulsion or Liquid Dispersion


Polymer (40 to 50 percent activity)

Pumping Temperature

50 degrees F to 70 degrees F

Viscosity

Up to 2,000 cps (liquid polymer)

Dilution Water

Non-potable Water at 50 psi

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Dry Polymer Usage

6.8 25.4 lb/hr Active Polymer

Neat Polymer Usage

6.8 25.4 lb/hr Active Polymer

Polymer Makeup Solution

Dry polymer: 0.1 - 0.3 percent; 0.3


percent at 25.4 lb/hr Active Polymer
Liquid polymer: 0.33- 0.6 percent; 0.6
percent at 25.4 lb/hr Active Polymer

Minimum Polymer Aging Time

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 4

45 minutes (dry polymer); 30 minutes


(liquid polymer)
PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

Polymer Solution Feed


2.05

2.7 - 20.3 gpm

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A.

General: The polymer system shall be an integrated, self-contained, package


system that is prepiped and prewired, and whose dimensions shall not exceed
the available floor space as shown on the Drawings. Each system shall be
equipped with both a mix tank and a feed tank to supply a stock polymer
solution for distribution. Each system shall be equipped with one progressing
cavity pump or diaphragm pump sized to deliver emulsion or liquid dispersion
type polymers from a 40 percent to 50 percent active stored volume to meet
the stated performance requirements. The system shall be equipped with a dry
polymer hopper and volumetric feeder that will convey dry polymer to a
wetting device and mix tank to meet the stated performance requirements. The
control panel shall be shipped loose and the Contractor shall be responsible
for wiring between the LCP and a factory-wired terminal junction box located
on the equipment skid.

B.

System Description:
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

The polymer preparation system shall be capable of automatically


preparing a homogenous polymer solution. The system shall incorporate
a sequential batching regiment to prepare stock solution from either dry
or liquid polymer. The conversion from dry to liquid polymer shall
require no additional equipment other than polymer storage and
handling equipment external to the system. The system shall
continuously supply stock polymer solution to one or more devices
designed to meter, dilute and deliver the material to the point of
application.
The system shall meter dry polymer with a volumetric feeder for a preset
period of time, to prepare the desired polymer solution concentration.
Dry polymer shall be pneumatically or gravitily conveyed to a plug-free,
non-dusting wetting device.
Prepare the desired polymer solution concentration from liquid polymer,
the system shall meter liquid polymer with a progressive cavity or
diaphragm metering pump at a constant rate to a high energy, nondamaging liquid polymer activation chamber.
The mix tank shall provide the feed tank with a prepared, fully aged
batch upon demand. The polymer preparation system shall operate on a
cycle controlled by liquid level device at high, middle and low tank level
points in the mixing tank.
The polymer preparation system shall be a modular system. The polymer
feed skid shall support the volumetric feeder, polymer storage hopper,

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 5

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

6.

C.

Polymer Activation:
1.

2.
3.

2.06

liquid polymer metering pump, wetting system, and pneumatic dry


polymer conveyance equipment.
The prepared stock polymer solution shall be supplied from the polymer
feed tank to a polymer feed pump which is external to the system. The
feed pump will deliver polymer stock solution to the point of
application.

Dry or liquid polymer and water shall be blended in a mixing chamber


so as to produce a complete uniform blend without fisheyes and be
fully activated to maximize process performance.
The mixing device to accomplish the herein stated performance must be
dynamic, capable of high fluid shear.
Neat or dry polymer and water shall be blended in a completely mixed
environment. Mixing energy shall be provided by a mix tank mixer
providing alternate mixing energy to fully mix the contents to provide a
uniform polymer mixture.

POLYMER PREPARATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS


A.

Dry Polymer Hopper and Bag Frame:


1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

Provide a 4-cubic foot, dry product storage hopper. The top of the
hopper shall not exceed 70 inches from the equipment base, without
modifying the equipment pad to accommodate a taller unit. The hopper
shall have a gasketed lid with bag adapter to interface with bulk polymer
bags. The hopper will sit on top of the volumetric feeder.
The hopper shall be fabricated of a not less than 12-gauge Type 304
stainless steel, rectangular construction, with the lower portion of the
hopper tapering to facilitate flow of the dry product to the ensuing screw
feeder.
The storage hopper shall include a proximity or paddle type switch to
sense low product level.
Provide a stainless steel screen in the hopper to prevent foreign material
from entering auger. The screen shall have 1/4-inch square area
openings and constructed of 12-gauge wire.
Each system shall have a bulk bag frame, an I-beam, a hoist and trolley
to hold and feed bulk polymer bags. They shall conform to the
following:
a.
capable of loading polymer bags of up to 2000-poundcapacity..
b.
Epoxy coated steel frame and I-beam.
c.
Height of 185 inches maximum from the equipment base.

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 6

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

d.
e.

B.

Dry Polymer Feeder and Conveyance System:


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.
7.

8.

C.

Each system shall have a lift bar that can attach to a polymer bag
and be lifted into place via fork truck or overhead crane.
The hoist and trolley shall be motorized, with hand held operator
with 16-inch cord chain holder, and utilize 480V ac/threephase/60 Hz power.

Provide a volumetric screw feeder of 6.1 lb/min feed capacity or greater


to transport dry product from the storage hopper to the wetting system at
a rate described in Article Performance Requirements.
The screw feeder shall be chain driven design incorporating a direct
current motor and a lubricated inline gear reducer, or direct coupled to a
gear reducer. The drive assembly shall be connected to the helix by an
industrial duty rated roller chain.
The screw feeder shall be sized to supply volumes of product as required
to meet the specified system performance criteria while incorporating
the specified system cycle of operation. The feed range of the screw
feeder shall be changeable by replacing the auger and discharge spout.
The removable auger shall be of the solid shaft design, fabricated for
Type 304 stainless steel. Hollow augers are not acceptable. The helix
drive shaft shall be supported on lubricated flanged mounted bearings.
The screw feeder shall be of rugged designed for long life under
continuous use. The housing is to be of Type 304 stainless steel
construction.
The motor shall be 1/2 hp, 90V dc, TENV type.
The gearbox shall accept direct coupling of the motor. The gears shall
be helical type gearing. The output shaft design shall provide for
substantial overhung load capacity. The gearbox shall be permanent
grease lubricated, requiring no additional grease addition over its
lifetime.
The pneumatic conveyance system may consist of a 2.5 hp regenerative
blower with flow capacity compatible with that of volumetric screw
feeder and a stainless steel solids eductor to convey dry polymer to the
wetting head.

Liquid Polymer Feed Pump:


1.

Provide an integrally mounted, progressive cavity pump or diaphragm


pump to meter liquid polymers to the wetting device. The pump shall be
constructed of stainless steel and Viton, provided with mechanical seals
or packing, according to pump manufacturers recommendation for neat
polymer application, and a three-phase gear motor. The pump shall fit
within the perimeter of the dispenser module.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 7

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.

3.

4.

D.

Polymer Mix Tank:


1.

2.

3.
E.

The metering pump shall have an output capacity sufficient to meet the
performance requirements at a neat polymer concentration of 40 percent
active polymer with a maximum shaft speed of 300 rpm. The pump shall
be suitable to pump the liquid polymer through a 1-1/2-inch Schedule 80
PVC suction pipe up to 35 feet long and a 5/8-inch I.D. tubing provided
by the polymer system supplier up to 20 feet long. The suction lift shall
be up to 10 feet.
The liquid polymer pump shall be provided with a 460V/3PH/60Hz
constant speed 1/2 hp, 1,750 rpm motor coupled to an inline gear
reducer. Motor shall be TEFC and conform to Section 26 20 00, LowVoltage AC Induction Motors.
An integrally mounted graduated cylinder shall be provided with
necessary valves for startup calibration. The calibration column shall be
rigidly mounted to the systems skid. The calibration column shall
provide 1-minute draw down for the next polymer pump. Provide
tubing, valves and other fittings required for pump calibration.

A mixing tank shall be provided to receive polymer solution from the


dry polymer disperser or the liquid polymer activation chamber. The
solution shall mix and age in the mixing tank prior to transfer to the feed
tank.
The mixing tank shall be rectangular with the length not exceeding
twice the width or depth and shall be constructed of minimum 11-gauge
Type 304 stainless steel, minimum. The tank shall be designed to meet
local seismic codes as specified herein.
The tanks volume shall have not less than 760 gallons working volume.
The mixing tank shall have a 4-inch NPT discharge outlet.

Mix Tank Mixer:


1.

2.

3.

4.

Provide a tank mixer to ensure adequate agitation of the polymer


solution before transfer to the polymer storage tank. The mixer drive
shall be capable of handling solution viscosity up to 5,000 cps and shaft
speed shall not exceed 350 rpm.
The mixer shall have a Type 316 stainless steel shaft and impeller(s).
Impeller(s) shall be affixed to the shaft in location(s) to provide for
adequate mixing of the polymer solution.
The agitator shall be driven by a CISD TENV electric motor, maximum
1.5 hp, S.F. 1.15, 460V/3PH/60Hz as required by Section 26 20 00,
Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors.
An integral mixer support frame assembly constructed of Type 304
stainless steel.

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 8

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

F.

Polymer Hydration Device(s):


1.

2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

G.

The mixer-supporting frame shall be of heavy duty construction capable


of supporting the mixers weight and rotational forces without
deflection.

Dry product shall be conveyed to a tank top mounted wetting device.


The device shall be of substantial construction, fabricated of stainless
steel. The wetting device shall have a proven track record and shall be
specifically designed for dry product wetting. Dry polymer conveyance
to a tank top generates static electricity and provision for mitigating this
condition shall be provided.
Liquid polymer shall be pumped to a wetting device separate and
independent from the dry polymer wetting device.
A 1.5-inch solenoid valve shall be provided for controlling water feed to
the dispenser. The solenoid valve shall be of slow close design to reduce
water hammer. The valve shall be by ASCO or equal.
Provide a liquid filled pressure gauge to monitor water supply pressure.
The gauge shall have an operating range of 0 to 160 psi. Construction
shall be stainless steel housing, polycarbonate lens, a brass socket, a
bronze bourdon tube, with glycerin fill.
An industrial duty pressure switch shall be provided to sense loss of
make-down water pressure. The switch shall have an operating range of
0 to 100 psi. The housing shall be rated NEMA 4X. The switch contacts
shall be rated for at least 15 amps. The connection shall be 1/4 NPT
brass. The diaphragm bellows shall be of phospher bronze construction.
Provide a rapid fill assembly as necessary so that the total fill time for
the mix tank shall not exceed 10 minutes with 100 gpm available fill
water supply at 50 psi pressure. The rapid fill assembly shall include
pipe, fittings, and automated valves and allow water filling the mix tank
directly, in addition to fill water through the wetting head.

Mix Tank Level Monitoring Devices:


1.

2.

3.

Liquid level detection devices shall be provided to detect liquid levels in


the mixing tank. Signals received by the control panel from the liquid
level detection devices shall be used to automatically operate the entire
polymer blending system.
Liquid level probes shall be supplied for liquid level detection. The
probes shall consist of 1/2-inch diameter stainless steel pipe, held by a
PVC insulating mounting block, with wiring terminations housed within
a NEMA 4X enclosure.
The liquid probes for the feed tank shall consist of the following:
a.
Low Level.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 9

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

b.
c.

Mid Level.
High Level.

H.

Solution Transfer System: Provide a motorized 4-inch ball valve to


automatically transfer polymer solution from the mixing tank to the feed tank.
The valve shall provide for transfer time not to exceed 10 minutes.

I.

Polymer Feed Tank:


1.

2.

3.

J.

Solution Feed Tank Level Monitoring Devices:


1.

2.

3.
K.

A feed tank shall be provided to receive aged polymer solution from the
mix tank and store the solution prior to feeding to the point of
application.
The feed tank shall be designed to support the mix tank. The tank shall
be constructed of a minimum 11-gauge Type 304 stainless steel,
designed with an offset room the mix tank for accessibility. Tanks shall
be designed to meet local seismic codes as specified herein.
The tanks volume shall provide for not less than 840 gallons working
volume. The feed tank shall be provided with a 3-inch NPT discharge
connection.

Liquid level detection devices shall be provided to detect liquid levels in


the feed tank. Signals received by the control panel from the liquid level
detection devices shall be used automatically operate the entire polymer
blending system.
Liquid level probes shall be supplied for liquid level detection. The
probes shall consist of 1/2-inch diameter stainless steel pipe, held by a
PVC insulating mounting block, with wiring terminations housed within
a NEMA 4X enclosure.
The liquid level detection system shall consist of a low level probe at
minimum.

Materials: All metal in contact with polymer or polymer solution shall be


Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. This shall include miscellaneous
hardware including sheet metal screws, hose clamps, etc. All other materials
in contact with polymer or polymer solution shall be constructed of plastics or
elastomers suitable for service application.

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 10

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

2.07

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS


A.

General:
1.

2.

3.

B.

Provide all ancillary components necessary to provide an operable


system in conformance with this section, whether or not the components
are listed herein or shown on the Drawings.
All elements of the Instrumentation and Control System shall be tested
to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of
this section. Test shall demonstrate system operation through field
wiring to and from interfaced equipment.
Like items of equipment provided hereunder shall be the end products of
one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance,
operation, maintenance, spare parts, and service. All components,
assemblies, and wiring shall conform to the requirements of the National
Electrical Code; Division 26, Electrical; and Section 40 99 90, Package
Control Systems.

Polymer Mix Local Control Panel:


1.
2.
3.

4.

Provide polymer feed system with an integral NEMA 4X local control


panel factory-mounted and wired to the package system.
The panel shall be completely assembled, prewired, and tested by the
polymer feed system supplier for proper control of the system.
The control panel shall be provided with an Allen-Bradley
ControlLogix, MicroLogix, or CompactLogix PLC with ethernet
communications to the plant control system and an Allen-Bradley
PanelView 1000 touch screen operator interface, no substitution
allowed.
The touch screen operator interface, as a minimum, shall be provided
with the following:
a.
Overview screen displaying equipment run status, valve status,
polymer aging countdown timer, and tank level.
b.
Automatic Operation: Provide continuous automatic batch
polymer operation maintaining a constant polymer solution
strength.
c.
Manual Operation: Provide access to manual and function of
individual system components.
d.
Polymer batch solution strength setpoint.
e.
Liquid: Dry neat polymer selection.
f.
Dry Polymer Feeder and Liquid Polymer Feed Pump calibration
settings.
g.
Alarm summary display.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 11

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

5.

C.

The following information, as a minimum, shall be made available to the plant


control system via ethernet communications link, as shown on the control
system block diagram. Connection shall be made using ethernet cable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

D.

Liquid Polymer Feed Pump ON-OFF status.


Dry Polymer Feeder ON-OFF status.
Polymer Mix Tank Mixer ON-OFF status.
Polymer Batch Mix System AUTO-MANUAL status.
Polymer Solution Strength setpoint.
Polymer Solution Aging Time.
Polymer Batch Mix System Water Low Pressure alarm.
Dry Polymer Hopper Low Level alarm.
Polymer Feed Tank Low-Low Level alarm.
Polymer Batch Mix System EMERGENCY STOP.

Software Documentation: Software documentation shall be provided a


minimum of 4 weeks prior to the functional test and an as-built set after
successful completion of the performance test. In addition to the requirements
for documentation in the General Requirements, the Contractor shall provide
the following documentation:
1.

2.

2.08

The control panel shall be supplied with an EMERGENCY STOP


pushbutton to shut down the Liquid Polymer Feed Pump, the Dry
Polymer Feeder, and the Polymer Mix Tank Mixer upon activation.

A commented hard copy printout and electronic copy of the custom PLC
ladder diagram and display configuration. The electronic copy of the
PLC program and display software shall be fully compatible with
Rockwell Software Logix 5000 and Panel Builder 32, respectively. The
software shall be fully annotated and commented to enable the user to
easily follow the PLC logic.
An operators manual describing the polymer feed system and the
procedures required by the operator to set up and run the polymer
system. Copies of all screens shall be included.

ELECTRICAL
A.

General:
1.
2.
3.

Conform with Division 26, Electrical.


Provide all necessary electrical components and wiring for a complete,
functional system.
Motor controllers for all equipment provided with the Liquid Polymer
Feed Systems shall be provided in the local control panel. The control

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 12

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

panels shall conform with requirements specified in Section 40 99 90,


Package Control Systems.
B.

Wiring:
1.

2.

The Drawings and Specification indicate the anticipated wiring for the
equipment provided under this Section. If additional wiring is required,
or if required wiring does not match what is indicated, the Contractor
shall make the necessary modifications to the electrical wiring and
documentation at Contractors sole expense. Wiring shall meet the
requirements of Section 26 05 05, Conductors, and the NEC. Insulation
shall be rated 600 volts, minimum. Low-voltage (24V) signals shall be
run in twisted, shielded pair cables.
All skid-mounted equipment shall be prewired to the local control
panels. Wiring shall conform with Section 26 05 05, Conductors.

C.

Electrical Raceways: Electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit meeting the


requirements of Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. Raceways shall be
installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes, and the
NEC.

D.

DC/SCR Drive Controller:


1.
2.
3.

DC solid-state variable speed drive controller with continuously


adjustable speed over a 20:1 range.
Controller shall be mounted inside the NEMA 4X control station (CS).
Additional Functions:
a.
Constant torque over a controlled speed range of 20:1.
b.
Adjustable current limit up to 150 percent of rated current.
c.
Contactor in motor armature circuit.
d.
Adjustable maximum and minimum speed.
e.
Full Wave Rectification: Circuit breaker for protection of motor
and SCR control unit and for disconnecting the control unit from
the electric supply system.
f.
Load capability of 150 percent of rated full load for 1 minute.
g.
Dynamic braking.
h.
Adjustable IR compensation.
i.
MOV surge suppressors.
j.
Motor inverse time thermal overheat protection by motor thermal
switch.
k.
Dry contact rated 4A at 120V ac to close when drives FAIL, for
connection to external controls.
l.
Provision for remote speed set analog (4 mA to 20 mA) input or
local ON speed set potentiometer.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 13

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

m.

4.

5.
6.
E.

2.09

Identification Plates: A 16-gauge stainless steel identification plate shall be


securely mounted on the equipment in a readily visible location. The plate
shall bear the 1/4-inch die-stamped equipment number that is assigned in this
Specification and Owner identification number shown on the Drawings.

SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS


A.

PART 3
3.01

DC Motor: The dc motor shall be 1/4 horsepower, maximum, and shall be


matched to the controller. The motor shall be CISD-TENV, permanent magnet
field, 90V armature with Class F insulation. The motor shall be capable of
continuous full torque operation from base speed down to 5 percent of base
speed in a 40 degrees C ambient. The motor shall be suitable for use in
corrosive environments and shall include cast iron end shields and stainless
steel drains and breather. The motor shall be finished with an enamel coating
over an epoxy primer. Brush inspection openings shall be provided. Motor
shall be equipped with automatic reset temperature sensing thermostats on the
intercoil.

ACCESSORIES
A.

2.10

Provision for dry contact input to run drive in ON or REMOTE


modes.
n.
Dry contact rated 4A at 120V ac to close when drive is running.
o.
Motor speed indicator.
Variable speed drive shall not cause more than 1 percent harmonic
distortion into the power supply voltage waveform, as defined by IEEE
Standard 519. Furnish isolation transformers or filtering devices as
necessary to meet requirement.
DC/SCR Drive Controller Manufacturer: Reliance, DC2 Series 50, or
equal.
For additional requirements, see Section 26 29 25, DC-SCR Drive
Systems.

Provide spare parts and special tools recommended by manufacturer to


maintain the equipment in service for a period of 2 years.
EXECUTION

SHIPPING, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION


A.

As specified in Section 01 61 00, Common Product Requirements.

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 14

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

3.02

GENERAL
A.

3.03

FACTORY TESTING
A.

3.04

Each unit shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers


directions. The manufacturer is responsible for setting and calibrating the
equipment to meet the performance criteria including, but not limited to, dc
drives, limit switches, level elements, etc.

FIELD TESTING
A.

3.06

Each liquid polymer feed system shall be fully assembled and factory-tested
prior to shipment. Each unit shall arrive at the Job Site with a manufacturer's
certificate stating the date of factory testing and initials of the responsible
Quality Control Inspector.

INSTALLATION
A.

3.05

The polymer mix/feed system shall be factory assembled. The unit shall be
pre-wired and pre-piped requiring field connection of neat polymer and
solution outlet, as well as termination of 480-volt power supply to a junction
box mounted on the unit. Additional field terminations shall be made in the
junction box for the interface controls stated in this section.

Each unit furnished shall be inspected for proper installation, absence of


vibration, and quiet operation. Each unit shall be operated to demonstrate
proper operation as judged by consistent and trouble-free production of a
polymer solution without fisheyes and meeting performance requirements
stated in the section. A unit failing to field test shall be readjusted and
retested. If the unit fails the retest, the unit will be rejected and the Contractor
shall replace it. The Contractor shall provide replacement units that will
perform as specified.

MANUFACTURERS SERVICES
A.

A manufacturers representative for the equipment specified herein shall be


present at the Job Site for the minimum person-days listed for the services
hereinunder, travel time excluded:
1.

2.
3.

1 person-day for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of


the installation. Provide manufacturer's certificate of proper installation
as specified in Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services.
1 person-day for functional testing and test certification.
1 person-day for prestartup classroom or jobsite training of Owners
personnel.

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 15

WEST BOISE WWTF PHOSPHORUS REMOVAL

4.
5.

3.07

2 person-days for startup assistance.


2 person-days for post-startup classroom or jobsite training of Owners
personnel.

B.

Training of Owners personnel shall be at such times and at such locations as


requested by the Owner.

C.

See Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers Field Services, and Section 01 91 14,


Equipment Testing and Facility Startup, of Division 1, General Requirements.

MANUFACTURERS CERTIFICATES
A.

Provide manufacturers certificate(s) in accordance with Section 01 43 33,


Manufacturers Field Services, of Division 1, General Requirements.
END OF SECTION

DRY AND LIQUID


POLYMER FEED SYSTEM
44 44 63.03 - 16

PW\WBG\426399
APRIL 1, 2013
COPYRIGHT 2013 CH2M HILL

VOLUME 4
DRAWINGS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

VOLUME 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

VOLUME 6
DESIGN DETAILS
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

VOLUME 7
ROTARY SCREEN THICKENER
EQUIPMENT PROCUREMENT
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

VOLUME 8
GEOTECHNICAL DATA REPORT
(BOUND SEPARATELY)

You might also like